THE  PUBLICATIONS  OF 

IVISON,   PHINNEY,   ELAKEMAN  &  CO. 

THE  AMERICAN  EDUCATIONAL  SERIES  OF 

SCHOOL  AND  COLLEGE  TEXT  BOOKS. 

THE  mim  READERS,  SPELLERS,  PRIMER  AXD  SPEAKER, 

By  Prof.  CHAS.  W.  SANDERS, 

CONFORMING  ENTIRELY  TO 

"Webster's  New  Illustrated  and  Revised  Dictionaries. 


UNION    PICTORIAL    PRIMER. 
UNION    PRIMARY    SPELLER. 


UNION    READER,  Number  Three. 
UNION    READER,  Number  Four. 


EX-LIBRIS 


'^m 

r— ^^ 

HK^^'    1^9 

^fa^ 

^'fi^:-:^i%, 

JMii  f>^^ 

^^^te^^ 

!£l<'^/ 

i''*"''"*^ 

Kc'^^^^tT^HS 

Hki'  -'^  JH 

RNI^^^Sh 

t'/-:# 

^mf^^i^'t 

^^ij^^H 

^^ 

^^ 

s 

^m 

i^^^^^M 

;^i^£J 

^^^eT  U  AW  N  4^tS 

^si 

Ini'm 

W 

@^ 

LOUISE  ARNER  BOYD 


For  freshness,  analysis,  scientific  method,  and  practical  utility,  this  series  of 

English  Grammars  is  unrivaled  by  any  other  yet  published. 

First  Lessons  in  Grammar.  Common  School  Grammar.  Conprehensivo  Grammar. 

WEBSTEE'S  SCHOOL  DICTIONAEIES. 

Richly  and  profusely  illustrated,  and  embellished  with  Wood  Cuts,  assisting  im- 
measurably in  the  definition  of  the  words  under  which  they  occur. 
Webster's  Primary  School  Dictionary.      I         Webster's    Hich    School    Dictionary. 
Webster's  Common  School  Dictionary.     |         Webster's  Academic  Dictionary. 
Most  valuable  Tkxt-Books  for  systematic  instruction  in  spelling  and  pronunciation  IM  Schools. 
Webster's  Countine-House  and  Family   I   Webster's  Pocket  Dictionary 

Dictionary.  I   Webster's  Army  and    Navy   Dictionary 


-} 


TOWXSEND'S  ANALYSIS 

OF  THB 

CONSTITUTION  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES. 

A  CHART  of  52  pages  on  one  roller,  designed  to  hang  in  Class-Rooms.    An 


town: 


WE] 


1ENT. 


[ES. 


Science 

THE  LIBRARY 

Natural 

OF 

ology. 

C 

THE  UNIVERSITY 

By   ASA   d 

OF  CALIFORNIA 

ty.      The 

"How   Pli 

Sook    of 

Lessons  inl 
Manual  of| 
Gray's  Les 
Gray's     Fi< 

GIFT  OF 

nd  Field, 
bound  in 

Botany, 

LOUISE  ARNER  BOYD 

BRYi 


ES. 


Common  Sv.i»<jui  i^«ai 


JLiUlLlUll.  N^UUJILUJJ^ 


•nuuse  Edition. 


WILSON'S  SCHOOL  HISTORIES. 

Primary    American    History.  American   History,   School  Edition. 

History   of   the    United    States.  Outlines  of   General   History. 

Parley's   Universal   History. 


^ 


PETER    PARLEY    AND    IIIS    FRIENDS    AT    MADRID. 


PETER    PARLEY'S 


UNIVERSAL  HISTORY, 


ON  THE  BASIS  OP 


GEOGRAPHY. 


A  NEW  EDITION,  BROUGHT  DOWN  TO  THE  PRESENT  DAY 


ILLUSTRATED  BY  20  MAPS  AND  125  ENGRAVINGS. 


KEW  YORK: 

mSON,  PHINNEY,  BLAKEMAN  &  CO., 

CHICAGO  :   S.  C.  GRIGGS  &  CO. 


18  6  9. 


ADVERTISEMENT. 

Thb  idea  of  embracing  in  the  compass  of  this  little  volume  any  thing  like  a  tolerable  outline 
of  Universal  History,  would  doubtless  excite  a  smile  on  the  lip  of  a  college  professor,  should  ho 
ever  co  descend  to  peep  into  our  humble  title-page.  But  let  our  object  be  clearly  understood, 
sind  we  hope  the  attempt  we  have  here  made  may  not  be  deemed  either  ridiculous  or  presuming. 
A  work  which  gives  in  detail  the  history  of  mankind,  must  necessarily  be  voluminous.  It  is, 
therefore,  beyond  the  utmost  stretch  of  the  youthful  intellect  to  compass  it;  the  young  reader 
shrinks  back  in  despair,  even  from  undertaking  the  task  of  its  perusal.  Abridgements  of 
general  history  have  been  usually  liable  to  still  greater  objections.  They  are  little  more 
than  dry  lists  of  dates,  presenting  no  pictures  to  the  imagination,  exciting  no  sympathies 
in  the  heart,  and  imparting  few  ideas  to  the  understanding.  And  yet  it  is  very  de  irable  that 
every  person  should,  at  an  early  period  of  life,  have  imprinted  on  his  mind,  in  bright  and  un- 
fading cnlors,  a  clear  outline  of  the  story  of  mankind,  from  its  beginning  in  the  plain  of  Shinar, 
down  to  the  present  hour.  The  advantages  of  this  are  obvious.  It  makes  all  subsequent  read- 
ing and  reflection  on  the  subject  of  history  both  useful  and  interesting;  it  becomes  a  stimulus 
to  research ;  it  is  ever  after  a  thread  to  guide  the  inquirer  through  the  labyrinths  of  his- 
torical lore. 

The  attempt  has  been  made  in  this  work  to  give  the  pupil  such  an  outline  of  Univehsal 
History  ;  to  weave  into  a  few  pages  a  clear,  vivid,  and  continuous  tale  of  the  great  human 
family,  one  that  may  be  both  intelligible  and  entertaining  to  the  young  reader.  The  success 
attained  by  the  previous  editions,  during  the  last  thirty  years,  encourages  the  publishers  to  hope 
for  a  fair  measure  of  success  in  this. 

Numerous  improvements  have  been  introduced  into  the  work.  The  engravings  are  for  the 
most  part  new,  and  several  additional  maps  have  been  inserted.  The  questions  have  been 
re-arrauged  at  the  foot  of  the  pages  to  which  they  refer.  The  history  of  every  country  has  been 
brought  down  to  the  present  day,  and  such  topics  as  have  increased  in  interest  have  been 
treated  at  greater  length. 


Entered,  according  to  the  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  183T,  by 

8.  G.  GOODRICH, 

In  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  of  Massachusetts. 

Entered,  according  to  the  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  18C0,  by 

THE  HEIRS  OF  8.  G.  GOODRICH, 

In  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  for  the  Southern  District  of  New  York. 

0.   A.  ALVOUD,  ELKCTBOTTPES 


GIFT 


CONTENTS. 


D21 
MAIN 


INTRODUCTION. 

CUAPTKR  PaGB 

I, — About  travelling  in  a  balloon,   and  the  curious  things  one^^^ 

would  see 1 1 

II. — About  history,  and  geograpliy,  and  other  matters 14 

III. — How  tlie  world  is  divided  into  land  and  water 19 

IV. — About  the  inhabitants  of  Asia,  Africa,  and  other  countries. .  .  21 

Y. — About  the  diflereut  kinds  of  people  in  the  world. ...   23 

ASIA. 

VI. — About  the  climate,  productions,  mountains,  people,  and  ani- 
mals of  Asia,  and  other  things. 2G 

VII.— About  the  Creation.      The  Deluge. 30 

Vlil. — How  Noali  and  his  family  came  out  of  the  ark.     How  the 

people  settled  in  the  land  of  Shinar.     About  Babel 32 

IX. — The  great  Assyrian  empire,  and  reign  of  queen  Semirarais. .  37 
X. — Queen  Serairamis  sets  forth  to  conquer  tlie  world,  but  is  de-  7 

feated  by  the  king  of  the  Indies. 40        -^ 

XI. — About  Ninias.    Reign  of  Sardanapalus,  and  fall  of  the  Assyrian 

empire ' 43 

XII. — About  the  Hebrews  or  Jews.     Origin  of  the  Jews.     The  re- 
moval of  Jacob  and  his  children  to  Egypt 45 

XII r. — The  bondage  in  Kgypt.     Flight  of  the  Hebrews,  and  destruc- 
tion of  Pharaoh  and  his  host 49 

XIV. — About  the  wanderings  of  the  Israelites  in  the  wilderness 54 

XV. — The  Hebrews  overthrow  the  Midianites.     Samson,  judge  of 

Israel 58 

XVI.— Beginning  of  the  reign  of  Saul 62 

XVIL— Combat  of  David  and  Goliah 64 

XVIII. — The  reign  of  David.     Wisdom  of  Solomon 67 

XIX. — Building  of  the  temple.     Visit  of  the  queen  of  Sheba 70 

XX. — The  decline  of  the  Jewish  nation 73 

XXI. — Tlie  Hebrew  prophets 77 

XXII. — Crucifixion  of  the  Saviour.     Destruction  of  Jerusalem 81 

XXIII. — Cyrus  conquers  Babylon.     His  death 85 

7[X1  v.— Reign  of  Cambyses 88 

XXV. — Expedition  of  Xerxes  into  Greece 00 

757 


6  CONTENTS. 

CuAPTEE  Page 

XXVI. — Affairs  of  Persia  till  the  Saracen  conquest 93 

XXVII. — Modern  history  of  Persia. 96 

XXVIIL— Early  histoi-ylJf-^WnaTTy 101 

XXIX. — Anecdotes  of  the  Chinese   emperors.      Confucius.     Modern 

history  of  China 1 04 

XXX. — Cities  of  China.     Manners  of  the  Chinese 108 

XXXL— History  of  Japan Ill 

XXXIl — Origiu  of  the  Arabs.     Rise  of  Mahomet 114 

XXXI  It. — Sequel  of  THe  In  story  of  the  Arabs  or  Saracens ...  117 

XXXIV. — AV)out  Syria,  Phoenicia,  and  Asia  Minor 120 

XXXV. — A  brief  view  of  several  nations 125 

XXXVI.— Review  of  the  history  of  Asia 128 

XXXVII. — Chronology  of  Asia 133 

AFRICA. 

XXXVIIT. — About  the  geography  of  Africa.     The  inhabitants 137 

XXXIX. — Early  sovereigns  of  Kgypt 141 

XL. — Egyptian  ai chitecture  and  sculpture 145 

XLI. — The  Ptolemies  and  queen  Cleopatra 149 

XLII. — Sequel  of  the  Egyptian  history 154 

XLIIL — Summary  of  Ethiopian  matters 156 

XLI  V. — Origin  of  the  Barbary  states,  and  their  piracies  on  the  Christians  1 59 

XLV.— Fables  and  facts  about  Africa 1 G2 

XLV  I. — History  of  the  slave  trade 1 65 

XLVIL— Chronology  of  Africa^ 167 

EUROPE. 

XLVIII. — Introductory  remarks  on  its  geography,  and  other  matters. . .  170 
XLIX. — About  Greece ;  where  it  is  situated ;  appearance  of  the  coun- 
try ;    climate 176 

L. — The  extent  of  Greece.     First  settlement  of  the  country...  180 

LI. — The  Grecian  lawgivers 1 83 

LIL— War  with  Persia 186 

LIII.— Affiurs  of  Athens 189 

LIV. — Beginning  of  the  Theban  war 193 

LV. — Sequel  of  the  Thebaa   war 1 95 

_XlVL — Grecian  religion  or  mythology 198 

LVITT — The  Grecian  philosophers ,  203 

LyiII. — Something  more  about  philosophers.     About  the  Greek  poets  207 

"  LIX: — About  the  mode  of  life  among  the  ancient  Greeks 210 

LX. — Philip  of  Macedon  conquers  Greece' 215 

LXI. — Conquests  of  Alexander  the  Great 218 

LXII. — Sequel  of  Alexander's  career 221 

LXIII. — Greece  invaded  by  the  Gauls 224 


c 


CONTENTS.  7 

Chapter  Pagb 

LXIY. — End  of  Grecian  independence ,,  .   227 

LXV. — Modern  history  of  Greece 230 

LXVL— Clironology  of  Greece. 2H3 

LXVIL— About  ItalyasitjiasyLja. 235 

LXVIII. — Founding  of  Hornoby  Romulus.     Its  early  state 239 

LXIX. — Battle  of  the  Horatii  and  the  Curiatii 243 

LXX. — From  the  reign  of  Ancus  Martius  till  the  expulsion  of  the  kings  246 

LXXI. — The  story  of  Coriolanus 250 

LXXII. — Home  invaded  by  the  Gauls.     The  first  Punic  war 253 

LXXIII. — Second  and  tliird  Punic  wars 257 

LXXIV.— Scipio's  triumph 260 

LXXV— Sylla  and  Marius 263 

LXXVI. — Cneius  Pompey  and  Julius  Cnpsar " 265 

LXXVII. — Caesar  usurps  the  supreme  power 268 

LXXVIIl. — Assassination  of  Julius  Caesar 270 

LXXIX. — Consequences  of  Cicsar's  death 273 

LXXX. — About  the  great  power  and  extent  of  the  Roman  empire  in 

the  time  of  Augustus 27'? 

LXXXr. — The  means  by  which  Rome  acquired  its  power 281 

LXXXJI. — Rome  under  the   emperors 284 

LXXXIII. — Fall  of  the  western  empire  of  the  Romans 287 

LXXXI v.— Progress  of  the  decline  of  Rome 291 

LXXXV. — Manners  and  customs  of  the  ancient  Romans 294 

LXXXVl. — About  rehgion!     Deities.     Temples.     Marriages 296 

LXXXVII. — About  funeral  rites  and  ceremonies 299 

LXXXVIII. — Roman  farms.  Mode  of  ploughing.  Farm-houses.  Grain. 
Cattle.  Superstitions  of  "the  farmers.  Vines.  Country- 
houses.     Aqueducts 304 

LXXXIX. — Military  affairs  of  the  Romans.     Division  of  the  army.'    The 
imperial  eagle.     Music.    Arms.     Dress.     Military  rewards. 

Crowns.     The  triumph 30d 

XC. — About  naval  affairs.     The  war-galley.      Commerce.     Shows 

of  wild  beasts.     Exhibitions  of  gladiators 314 

XCI. — Sports.  Chariot-racing.  The  circus.  Carriages.  Private 
entertainments.  Supper-rooms.  Convivial  parties.  Luxu- 
ries.    Clocks.     Fine  arts.     Books.     Costume 318 

XCIT. — ^Eome  under  the.  .popes. 323 

\  XCIII.-^ About  several  other  Italian  states 329 

%GI¥.— Chronology  of  RxDine. .-.  .T.' .".'  T. 333 

XCV. — About  the  Ottoman  empire.     Turkey  in  Europe.     Turkey  in 

Asia.     About  the  climate,  people,  and  other  things 335 

XCVI. — About  the  Saracens.    How  the  Turks  overturned  the  Saracen 
empire.     How  the  Ottoman   Turks  founded  the  Ottoman 

empire.     About  Bajazet,  Timour,  and  others 3.T 

XCYII.— Sequel  of  the  Turkish  history 342 


8  CONTENTS.  \ 

CnAPTEE  Pagb 

XCYIII. — Early  history  of  Spain,     The  Moorish  conquest 3-46 

XCIX. — Wars  between  the  Moors  and  tlie  Spaniards 350 

G. — The  Spanish  Inquisition 353 

CI. — The  Invincible  Armada.     Curious  death  of  a  Spanish  king. 

Beceni  affairs  of  Spain 356 

CII. — A  short  story  about  Portugal 359 

cm. — Chronology  of  Turkey,  Spain,  and  Portugal 362 

CIY. — Description  of  France.     Its  climate.     Cities.     Manufactures. 

Manners  and  Customs  of  tlie  people 364 

CY. — About  the  Gauls  and  other  tribes  of  barbarians.     How  the 
southern  parts  of  Europe  were  first  settled,  and  how  the 

northern  parts  were  settled  afterward 367 

CYI. — The  Gauls-.    Origin  of  the  French  nation.     Little  king  Pepin.   372 

CYII. — About  Clovis  and  little  king  Pepiu 375 

CYITI. — The  reign  of  Charlemagne 378 

CIX. — About  the  crusades  or  holy  wars 381 

ex. — About  the  Feudal  System. 386 

CXI. — About  chivalr}',  or  knight-errantry 391 

CXTI. — More  about  chivalry 395 

CXIII. — King  Philip  and  pope  Boniface.     "Wars  of  the  French   and 

English 398 

CXIY. — The  reigns  of  several  French  kings 403 

CXY. — The  reigns  of  Louis  the  Grand  and  his  successor 406 

CXYL— The  French  Revolution 410 

CXYII. — The  rise  of  Napoleon  Bonaparte 415 

CXYIII.— The  fall  of  Napoleon  Bonaparte 417 

CXIX. — Later^  Rgyphitiona^ia •Franco.     Napoleon  III 420 

CXX— Chronology  ol -France V77T 424 

CXXL — About  Germany 425 

CXXn. — About  the  ancient  tribes  of  Germany,  Charlemagne,  etc 427 

CXXIIL— .\ff'airs  of  Switzerland 432 

CXXI Y. — Sequel  of  German  history 436 

CXXY. — About  Austria,  Hungary,  etc 439 

CXXYI. — About  Hungary,  Bohemia,  the  Tyrol,  etc 442 

CXXYIL— About  Prus.sia 445 

CXXYIIL — More  about  Prussia.     Frederic  the  Great 447 

CXXIX. — Chronology  of  (jerman}'-,  Austria,  Hungary,  and  Prussia. . . .  45] 

CXXX. — Description  of  Hu.ssia 452 

CXXXI. — Description  of  Russia  continued ' 455 

CXXXIl  — The  reign  of  Peter  the  Great 459 

CXXXI II.— The  successors  of  Peter  the  Great 462 

CXXXI  Y.— About  Sweden 466 

CXXXY. — Charles  tlie  Twelfth  and  his  successors 469 

CXXXYI. — About  Lapland,  Norway,  and  Denmark  472 

CXXXVIL — Brief  notices  of  several  kingdoms  and  states 476 


CONTENTS.  9' 

CiiAPTKR  Page 

CXXXVIII. — Chronology  of  Russia,  Sweden,  Lapland,  Norway,  Denmark, 

Holland,  Belgium,  etc 479 

CXXXTX. — Kingdom  of  Great  Britain  and  Ireland 48 L 

CXL. — About  London  and  other  cities  of  England,  Wales,  Scotland, 

and  Ireland 484 

CXLL— Origin  of  the  British  nation.     Tlie  Druids 488 

CXLIL — Saxon  and  Danish  kings  of  England 491 

CXLIIL— Norman  kings  of  England 494 

CXLiy. — English  wars  and  rebellions 497 

CXLV. — The  Lancastrian  kings  of  England 501 

CXLVI.— Wars  of  the  Roses 504 

CXLVIl.— Reigns  of  the  Tudor  princes 507 

CXLVIIL— The  reign  of  Elizabeth 511 

CXLIX. — Accession  of  the  House  of  Stuart 515 

CL. — Wars   of  the  king  and  jjarlianient 518 

CLI. — The  Protectorate  and  the  Restoration 522 

CLII. — The  Revolution  of  1688,  and  other  matters 525 

Clilll. — The  Hanoverian  kings  of  Great  Britain 528 

CLIV.— The  story  of  Wales 532 

CLV.— The  story  of  Scotland 538 

CLVL— About  Ireland 542 

CLV  11. — About  various  matters  and  things 547 

CLVIII, — Chronology  of  Great  Britain 550 

CLIX. — Review.     The  dark  ages.      Important  inventions,  etc 551 

A  M  ERICA. 

CLX. — About  America 559 

CLXl. — The  tirst  inhabitants  of  America 5G5 

..rrrl^iscovery  of  America  by  Columbus 568 

CLXIII, — A  lew  words  about  Iceland  and  Greenland,     Settlements  of 

the  French  in  America 573 

CLXIV. — The  French  colonies  conquered  by  the  English 576 

CLXV. — Description  of  the  United  States 580 

CLXVI. — Settlement  and  colonial  history  of  New  England 582 

CLX VI I. — Affairs  of  New  England  continued 585 

DLXVIII  —Early  history  of  Virginia 589 

CLXiX. — Braddock's  defeat,  and  other  matters 592 

OLXX  — Causes  which  led  to  the  Revolution 595 

CLXXI. — Account  of  the  battle  of  Lexington 598 

CLXXn.— Tlie  battle  of  Bunker  Hill   .' 600 

CLXXIII. — Progress  of  the  war.     Capture  of  Burgoyne 603 

CLXXIV. — The  story  of  the  traitor  Arnold  and  Major  Andre 606 

CLXXV. — War  in  the  South.     Surrender  of  Cornwallis 608 

CLXXVL— The  Presidents 611 


10  CONTENTS. 

Chapter  Page 

GLXXVII. — The  Presidents  continued 617 

CLXXVni. — Greneral  remarks  upon  the  history  of  the  United  Siates   623 

CLXXIX. — General  remarks  upon  the  history  of  the  United  States  con- 
tinued   625 

CLXXX. — About  South  America.    El  Dorado  and  the  Fountain  of  Youth  631 

CLXXXE  — History  of  the  Mexican  territories.     Guatimala 634 

GLXXXn.— Spanish  Peruvian  territories 638 

CLXXXin. — Account  of  the  Brazilian  territories 640 

CLXXXrV.— The  West  Indies 643 

CLXXXY.— The  West  Indies  continued 646 

CLXXXVL— The  West  Indies  concluded 649 

CLXXXVIL— Chronology  of  America 653 

OCEANICA. 

CLXXXVIIL— About  Oceanica.     The  Malaysian  Islands 654 

CLXXXrX. — The  Australasian  division  of  Oceanica 657 

CXC. — Polynesia.     The  Sandwich  Islands 660 

CXCL — Polynesia  continued.     The  Society  Islands.     The  Bounty. . .  663 

CXCII.  —Story  of  the  Bounty  concluded 667 

CXC [11. —Chronology  of  Oceanica 67  0 

CXCIV  — Ancient  names  of  countries,  etc 67  0 

OXCV. — The  origin  and  progress  of  government 67  2 

CXCYI  — Architecture.     Commerce 67  6 

CXC VII. — Origin  and  progress  of  various  arts 685 

CXCVIII. — Dates   of  discoveries  and  inventions 691 


Important  Dates 694 

ORiGiif  OF  States,  Kingdoms,  Empires,  etc 695 

Celebrated  Characters 696 


UNIYERSAL    HISTORY. 


STUDYING  GEOaRAPHY   FROM  A  BALLOON. 

CHAPTEE  I.— Introduction. 

About   travelling  in  a   halloon^  and   the  curious  things  one 

would  see. 

1.  If  yon  should  enter  a  balloon,  rise  into  tlie  air, 
and  sail  along  over  tlie  country,  how  many  interesting 
tilings  would  you  see  !     At  one  moment  you  would  be 


Chapter  I. — 1.  What  would  a  person  see,  if  he  were    to  sail  along  over  the 
country  in  a  balloon? 


12  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

passing  over  a  city,  at  another  you  would  look  down 
upon  a  valley,  or  a  river,  or  a  liill,  or  a  mountain ! 

J  2.  What  a  pleasant  method  this  would  be  of  study- 
ing what  is  called  geography !     For  geography,  you 

•know,  is  a  description  of  cities,  rivers,  valleys,  hills, 
mountains,  and  other  things  that  a  traveller  meets 
with. 

3.  How  much  more  delightful  this  would  be,  than 
to  look  over  maps,  which  only  give  you  a  sort  of  pic- 
ture, showing  where  towns  are  placed,  how  rivers  run, 
and  where  mountains  lie.  But  as  very  few  of  us  can 
travel  about  in  balloons,  we  must  be  content  ^vith  maps, 
and  learn  geography  from  them  as  well  as  we  can. 

4.  Suppose  that  in  travelling  in  some  distant  country, 
Ave  should  meet  with  a  building  different  from  any  we 
had  ever  seen;  suppose  that  it  was  built  of  stone, 
covered  with  moss,  and  marked  with  great  age,  as  if  it 
had  been  erected  at  least  ^yq  hundred  years  ago. 

5.  Suppose  that  on  entering  this  building  we  should 
find  strange,  dark  rooms  of  vast  size ;  suppose  that  we 
should  find  in  this  building  the  graves  of  persons  who 
died  two  or  three  hundred  years  ago,  with  their  names 
carved  upon  the  stones  beneath  which  their  bones 
repose ! 

5.  What  is  .Q^^ography  ?     3.  What  are  maps?     4—6.  Suppose  we  should  meet 
with  some  old  building,  what  should  we  desire  to  kuow? 


INTRODUCTION.  13 

6.  Now  what  do  you  imagine  we  should  think  of  all 
this  ?  Should  we  not  he  curious  to  know  why  this 
building  was  erected — when  and  by  whom  it  was 
built  ?  Should  we  not  be  anxious  to  know  something 
of  the  people  who  constructed  such  a  wonderful  edi- 
fice? Should  we  not  desire  to  go,  back  five  hundred 
years,  and  learn  the  story  of  that  distant  time  ? 

7.  And  if  we  could  meet  with  some  old  man  who 
had  lived  so  long,  should  we  not  wish  to  sit  down  by 
his  side  and  hear  him  tell  how  this  structure  had  been 
built  ?  Should  we  not  ask  him  a  thousand  questions 
about  the  people  who  erected  it,  and  those -who  had 
been  buried  in  it  ? 

8.  Now  if  you  were  to  travel  in  foreign  countries, 
you  would  meet  with  a  great  many  such  buildings  as  I 
have  described.  You  would  indeed  find  many  that 
are  more  than  five  hundred  years  old. 

9.  If  you  were  to  extend  your  travels  to  Italy,  or 
Greece,  or  Egypt,  or  some  parts  of  Asia,  you  would 
often  meet  with  the  ruins  of  temples,  palaces,  and 
cities,  which  existed  even  two  or  three  thousand  years 
ago.  Some  of  these  would  excite  your  wonder  on 
account  of  their  beauty,  and  so«ie  on  account  of  their 
grandeur. 

7.  Suppose  we  should  find  a  man  equally  old,  what  should  we  do?  8.  What 
would  a  traveller  meet  with  in  foreign  lands?  9.  What  would  he  meet  with  in 
Italy,  Greece,  Egypt,  or  Asia?    How  would  these  ancient  ruins  excite  his  wonder  ? 


14  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

10.  Such  things  you  would  meet  witli  in  foreign 
lands,  but  no  man  could  be  found  old  enough  to  tell 
you  their  story  from  his  own  observation.  What  then 
would  you  do  ?  Perhaps  you  would  be  content,  after 
returning  from  your  travels,  to  sit  down  with  old  Peter 
Parley,  and  hear  the  history  of  these  ancient  times. 

11.  Well,  I  suppose  that  most  of  my  readers  have 
either  travelled  about,  or  read  of  distant  countries. 
Perhaps,  then,  they  are  curious  to  hear  an  old  man 
speak  of  the  olden  time.  If  the  reader  is  not  already 
tired  of  my  stories,  I  beg  him  to  sit  down  and  hear 
what  I  have  to  say. 


CHAPTEE  II. — Iniroduction  CoNTmuED. 
About  History^  and  Geography^  and  other  2f alters. 

1.  I  SUPPOSE  you  have  often  met  with  the  words, 
History  and  Geography.  History  is  the  story  of  man- 
kind since  the  world  was  created,  and  may  be  com- 
pared to  an  old  man  who  has  lived  for  thousands  of 
years,  and  who  has  seen  cities  built  and  fall  into  decay; 
who  has  seen  nations  rise,  ilourisli,  and  disappear ;  and 
who,  with   a   memory  full  of  w<^iiderful   things,    sits 

10.  Could  you  find  such  a  man?     "What  would  you  do  then? 
Chapter  II, — 1.  What  is  history?    To  what  may  it  be  comjmred? 


INTRODUCTION.  1^ 

down  to  tell  you  of  all  tliat  lias  happened  during  so 
many  ages. 

2.  Geograj)liy,  as  I  have  before  said,  is  a  deseription 
of  towns,  rivers,  mountains  and.  countries—the  things 
which  a  traveller  sees  in  going  from  one  place  to 
another.  Geography,  then,  may  be  compared  to  some 
roving  fellow  who  has  been  all  over  the  world  in  ships, 
cars,  and  steamboats,  and  has  come  back  to  give  us 
an  account  of  what  he  has  seen. 

3.  You  will  see,  then,  that  History  is  a  record  of 
events  that  have  hapj)ened,  and  that  Geography  tells 
you  of  the  places  where  they  happened.  In  order  to 
understand  the  former,  you  must  know  something  of 
the  latter.  In  this  little  book  I  shall  therefore  some- 
times assume  to  be  the  old  graybeard  of  history,  who 
has  lived  for  thousands  of  years,  and  tell  you  of  what 
has  come  to  pass ;  and  sometimes  I  shall  take  you  in  a- 
balloon  or  vessel,  and  carry  you  with  me  to  the  places 
where  the  events  I  relate  have  occurred. 

4.  I  shall,  in  the  progress  of  my  story,  tell  you  how 
the  first  man  and  woman  were  made,  how  they  had  a 
large  family,  how  these  increased  and  spread  them- 
selves throughout  different  countries.  I  shall  tell  you 
of  the  great  nations  that  have  existed,  of  the  great 

2.  What  is  geography  ?     To  what  may  it  be  compared?     3,4.  What  will  the 
author  do  in  telling  his  story  ? 


16  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

battles  that  have  been  fougM,  and  of  tlie  deeds  of  cel- 
ebrated persons. 

5.  But,  before  I  proceed,  I  must  remind  you  that  tbe 
world  is  round,  and  that  men  and  animals  live  upon 
tbe  surface ;  that  the  face  of  the  earth  is  divided  into 
land  and  water ;  that  on  the  land  trees,  grass,  herbs,  and 
flowers  grow ;  that  on  the  land  men  and  animals  dwell ; 
that  on  the  land  towns,  cities,  and  villages  are  built. 

6.  A  high  piece  of  land,  you  know,  is  called  a 
mountain  or  hill ;  a  low  j)iece  of  land  is  called  a  val- 
ley. Water  running  in  a  stream  through  a  valley,  is 
called  a  river;  a  still  piece  of  water  surrounded  by 
hills,  is  called  a  lake. 

T.  About  one-third  of  the  face  of  the  earth  is  land, 
and  two-thirds  are  water.  The  land  is  divided  into 
two  great  continents;  the  western  continent  consists 
of  North  and  South  America;  the  eastern  continent 
consists  of  Europe,  Africa,  and  Asia. 

8.  If  you  will  look  at  page  17,  you  will  see  a  map 
'of  the  eastern  continent;  and  at  page  18,  you  will  see 
a  map  of  the  western  continent. 

5.  What  IS  the  shape  of  the  earth  ?  How  is  the  face  of  the  land  divided? 
Where  do  men  and  animals  live  ?  What  grow  upon  the  land?  What  live  upon 
the  land  ?  What  are  built  upon  the  land  ?  6.  What  is  a  mountain  or  a  hill  ?  A 
valley?  A  rivr-"  V  lake  ?  7,  What  part  of  the  face  of  the  earth  is  land  ?  What 
portion  is  watei  o\v  is  the  land  divided  ?     What  of  the  western  continent  ? 

The  eastern  ? 


INTRODUCTION. 


1! 


MAP   OP   THE    EASTERN    HEMISPHERE,    INCLUDING   EUROPE,    ASIA,    AFRICA,    AND 

AUSTRALIA. 


Questions  on  the  Map- — What  ocean  lies  west  of  Europe  ?  "What  lies  to  the 
west  of  Africa  ?  What  to  the  south  of  Africa  and  Asia?  What  to  the  east  of 
Asia  ?  How  is  Europe  bounded  ?  Which  way  is  it  from  Africa  ?  How  is  Africa 
bounded?  How  is  Africa  separated  from  Asia?  What  sea  lies  between  Africa 
and  Europe  ?  Are  Europe  and  Asia  separated  by  water,  or  do  they  lie  together  in 
one  piece  of  land?     How  is  Asia  bounded  ?     Where  is  Australia? 


18 


UNITERSAL  HISTORY. 


MAP   OF   THE  WESTERN    HEMISPHERE,  INCLUDING  NORTH  AND  SOUTH  AMERICA. 


Questions  on  the  Map. — What  ocean  lies  east  of  America?  What  hes  to  the 
vest  ?  What  country  lies  to  the  south  of  the  United  States  ?  What  large  islands 
lie  in  the  Pacific  ocean  ?  What  islands  lie  between  North  and  South  America 
in  the  Atlantic  ocean?  What  large  rivers  are  there  in  South  America?  What 
.straits  separate  North  America  from  Asia?  Where  is  Greenland?  Terra  del 
Fuego?     Newfoundland?     Hudson's  Bay? 


INTRODUCTION.  Id 


CHAPTER  III. — Introduction  Continued. 
JIow  the  World  is  divided  into  Land  and  Water, 

1.  I  HAVE  said  tliat  about  two-tliircls  of  the  face  of 
tlie  eartli  are  covered  with  vrater.  This  water  is  one 
vast  salt  sea,  but  to  different  parts  of  it  we  give  dif- 
ferent names. 

2.  That  part  which  lies  between  America  and  Eu- 
rope is  called  the  Atlantic  Ocean,  and  is  about  three 
thousand  miles  wide;  that  part  which  lies  between 
America  and  Asia  i.^  called  the  Pacific  Ocean,  and  is 
about  ten  thousand  miles  wide.  There  are  many  other 
names  given  to  other  j)arts  of  the  great  salt  sea. 

3.  Ships,  as  you  well  know,  sail  from  one  country 
to  another  upon  the.  water,  and  in  this  way  a  great 
deal  of  trade  or  commerce  is  carried  on.  But  as  man- 
kind live  on  the  land,  my  stories  will  chiefly  relate  to 
what  has  liappened  on  the  land. 

4.  I  suppose  you  have  heard  people  speak  of  the 
four  quarters  of  the  world.  By  this  they  mean 
America,  Europe,  Africa,  and  Asia.      Besides  these, 

CiiAPTKR  III. — 1.  "What  of  the  great  mass  of  water  that  covers  two-thirds  of  the 
earth?  2.  What  of  the  Atlantic  Ocean?  The  Pacific?  3.  What  of  ships?  What 
of  t)ie  land?     4.  What  are  the  four  quarters  of  the  world? 


2Q  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

there  are  a  great  many  pieces  of  land  surrounded  by 
water,  called  islands. 

5.  In  tlie  Pacific  Ocean  there  are  many  of  these,  the 
inhabitants  of  which  are  very  numerous.  These  islands 
are  considered  a  fifth  division  of  the  world,  and  are 
called  Oceania. 

6.  Now  what  I  am  going  to  tell  you  has  happened 
in  these  different  parts  of  the  world.  In  order  to  un- 
derstand my  stories,  it  is  necessary  you  should  look 
over  the  maps  which  are  given  Mth  them.  These  will 
show  you  where  the  different  countries  are,  about  which 
I  am  going  to  speak. 

What  IS  an  island  ?     6.  What  of  Oceania  ? 


INTRODUCTION. 


21 


INHABITANTS  OF  ASIA- 


CHAPTER  lY. — Introduction  Continued. 
About  the  Inhahiiants  of  Asia  ^  Africa^  and  otJiei'  Countries. 

1.  Before  I  proceed  further,  I  must  tell  you  tliat 
Asia  is  a  vast  country  with  a  multitude  of  cities,  occu- 
pied by  a  great  many  different  nations. 

2.  The  principal  of  these  nations  are  the  Tartars, 
who  wander  from  place  to  place,  and  dwell  chiefly  in 
tents ;  the  Arabs,  who  have  large  flocks  of  camels  and 
fine  horses,  with  which  they  roam  over  the  desert; 

Chapter  IV. — 1.  What  of  Asia?     2.  What  are  the  i)rincipal  nations  of  Asia? 


22  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

the  Hindoos,  or  inhabitants  of  India,  who  travel  about 
on  elephants,  and  worship  idols ;  the  Persians,  who  are 
very  fond  of  poetry  and  have  splendid  palaces ;  the 
Chinese,  from  whom  we  get  tea ;  the  Japanese,  who 
have  remained,  until  late  years,  shut  up  and  secluded 
from  the  rest  of  the  world ;  and  the  Turks,  who  sit  on 
cushions  instead  of  chairs. 

3.  The  whole  population  of  Asia  is  about  four 
hundred  millions,  which  is  about  half  the  inhabitants 
of  the  whole  globe.  It  has  nine  times  as  many  people 
as  the  whole  of  North  and  South  America  put  together. 

4.  Africa,  you  know,  is  the  native  land  of  the  ne- 
groes. It  has  a  few  large  cities,  but  the  whole  number 
of  people  is  but  sixty  millions. 

5.  Europe  is  divided  into  several  nations,  such  as 
the  English,  French,  Italians,  Spaniards,  Germans, 
Russians,  and  others.  It  has  many  fine  cities,  and 
about  three  hundred  millions  of  inhaljitants. 

6.  America  is  the  country  Avhere  we  live.  It  has 
some  large  cities,  and  many  pleasant  towns  and  vil- 
lages, but  nearly  half  the  country  is  uninhabited. 
The  ^vhole  population  is  about  forty-five  millions. 

7.  Oceania,  as  I  have  before  said,  consists  of  many 
islands  in  the  Pacific  Ocean.     Some  of  these,  as  Java, 

B.  What  is  the  population  of  Asia?  4.  "What  of  Afiica?  Its  population? 
5  What  of  Europe?  Its  popiilation?  (j.  What  of  America?  Its  population? 
7.  AViiat  of  Oceania? 


INTRODUCTION.  28l 

Sumatra,  Borneo,  and  New  Ilolland,  or  Australia,  are 
veiy  large,  the  latter  being  the  largest  island  on  the 
globe.  From  these  countries  we  get  pepper,  cloves, 
coffee,  and  other  nice  things.  The  w^hole  population 
of  Oceania  is  about  twenty  millions. 


CHAPTER  Y. — Introduction  Continued. 
About  the  different  kinds  of  Peoj>le  in  the  World. 

1.  Thus  you  see  that  the  whole  number  of  the  in- 
habitants upon  the  globe  is  about  eight  hundred  mill- 
ions. All  these  are  descended  from  Adam  and  Eve, 
who  lived,  the  Bible  tells  us,  in  the  garden  of  Eden ! 

2.  What  an  immense  family  to  have  proceeded  from 
one  pair !  You  may  well  believe  that  it  has  taken 
many  years  for  the  human  family  to  increase  to  this 
extent. 

3.  If  you  were  to  travel  in  different  countries,  you 
would  observe  that  the  inhabitants  differ  very  much  in 
their  color,  dress,  and  mode  of  living. 

4.  Some  have  dark  skins,  like  the  color  of  a  dead 

What  do  we  get  from  Oceania?    Its  population? 

Chapter  V. — 1.  "What  is  tlie  whole  population  of  the  globe?  Where  did  Adam 
and  Eve  live  ?  3.  What  would  you  observe  in  travelling  through  diflerent  coiui- 
tries  ?    4.  Give  the  color  of  different  races. 


24  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

leaf,  as  the  American  Indians ;  some  have  a  yellowish 
or  olive  color,  like  the  Chinese;  some  are  a  deep, 
sooty  brown,  like  the  Hindoos ;  some  are  black,  like 
the  negroes,  and  some  are  white,  like  the  English  and 
the  peoj^le  of  the  United  States. 

5.  In  some  countries  the  people  live  in  huts  built 
of  mud  and  sticks,  and  subsist  by  hunting  with  the 
bow  and  arrow.  These  are  said  to  be  in  the  savage 
state.  Our  American  Indians,  some  of  the  negroes  of 
Africa,  some  of  the  inhabitants  of  Asia,  and  most  of  the 
Oceanians,  are  savages. 

6.  In  some  countries  the  people  live  in  houses  partly 
built  of  stone  and  mud.  They  have  few  books,  no 
churches  or  meeting-houses,  and  worship  idols.  Such 
are  most  of  the  negroes  of  Africa,  and  many  tribes  in 
Asia.  These  are  said  to  be  in  the  barbarous  state,  and 
are  often  called  barbarians.  Many  of  their  customs  are 
very  cruel. 

7.  In  some  countries  the  inhabitants  live  in  tolerable 
houses,  and  the  rich  have  fine  palaces.  The  people 
have  many  ingenious  arts,  but  the  schools  are  23oor, 
and  but  a  small  portion  are  taught  to  read  and  wiite. 
The  Chinese,  the  Hindoos,  the  Turks,  and  some  other 
nations  of  Asia,  with  some  of  the  inhabitants  of  Africa 

5.  "What  of  people  in  the  savage  state?     6.   What  of  people  m  tli«  barbarous 
state?    7.  What  of  people  in  the  civilized  state? 


INTIlODUCTIO^^.  25 

and  Europe,  are  in  tMs  condition,  wliicli  may  be  called 
a  civilized  state. 

8.  In  many  parts  of  Europe,  and  in  the  United 
States,  tlie  people  live  in  good  houses,  have  good  fur- 
niture, many  books,  good  schools,  churches,  meeting- 
liouses,  steamboats,  railroads  and  telegraphs.  These 
are  in  the  hiijhest  state  of  civilization. 

9.  Thus  you  observe  that  mankind  may  be  divided 
into  four  classes ; — ^those  who  are  in  the  savage  state, 
those  who  are  in  the  barbarous  state,  those  who  are 
merely  civilized,  and  those  who  are  in  the  highest  state 
of  civilization. 

8.  What  of  people  in  the  highest  state  of  civilization  ?    9.  Into  what  four  classes 
may  mankind  bo  divided? 


26 


UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


STUDYING  THE  MAP  OP  ASIA. 


CHAPTEE  YI.— Asia. 

About  the   Climate^   Productions,   Mountains,   People,  and 
Animals  of  Asia,  and  other  things. 

1.  I  HAVE  already  said  tliat  Asia  is  a  vast  eonntiy, 
containing  a  great  many  cities,  and  a  multitude  of 
inhabitants.  It  lies  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  earth 
from  us,  and  you  may  go  to  it  by  crossing  the  Paciiiv; 
Ocean  on  the  west,  or  by  crossing  the  Atlantic  Ocean 
and  Europe  on  the  east. 

Chapter  VI. — 1.  What  of  Asia?  Where  is  Asia?  How  can  you  goto  it?   Point 
your  finger  toward  Asia. 


ASIA.  2^ 

2.  In  the  southern  portion  of  Asia  the  climate  is 
warm,  as  in  our  Southern  states.  These  parts  are 
chiefly  inhabited  by  the  Chinese,  Hindoos,  Persians, 
Arabians  and  Turks.  In  many  places  the  countiy  is 
fertile,  and  in  the  valleys,  beautiful  flowers,  spicy 
shrubs,  and  ^yild  birds  of  the  most  brilliant  colors,  are 
found. 

3.  In  the  centre  of  Asia  there  are  mountains  whose 
tops  are  covered  with  everlasting  snow.  These  are  the 
loftiest  peaks  in  the  world,  and  are  nearly  six  miles  in 
height.  To  the  north  of  these  there  is  a  cold  region, 
where  there  are  vast  plains  with  scattered  tribes  of  Tar- 
tars roaming  over  them,  for  the  scanty  pastures  they  af- 
ford for  their  camels  and  horses.  They  build  no  houses, 
but  dwell  in  tents,  and  live  upon  the  milk  and  flesh  of 
their  flocks. 

4.  The  native  animals  of  Asia  are  many  of  them 
very  remarkable.  The  elephant  is  found  in  the  thick- 
ets, the  rhinoceros  along  the  banks  of  rivers,  the  lion 
in  the  plains,  the  royal  tiger  in  the  forests,  monkeys 
and  apes  of  many  kinds  abound  in  the  hot  parts,  and 
serpents  thirty  feet  in  length  are  sometimes  met  with. 

5.  In  the  southern  portions  of  Asia,  hurricanes  some- 

2.  Climate  of  Southern  Asia?  Wliat  nations  live  in  Southern  Asia?  Its  pro- 
ductions? 3.  Its  mountains ?  What  of  Northern  Asia?  Inhabitants?  4.  Ani- 
mals of  Asm? 


28  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

times  overturn  the  liouses,  rend  tlie  forests  in  pieces, 
and  scatter  ruin  and  desolation  over  tlie  land.  The 
country  is  often  parched  with  drought.  Sometimes 
millions  of  locusts  come  upon  the  wind,  and  devour 
eveiy  green  thing,  so  that  nothing  is  left  for  man  or 
beast.  Pestilence  often  visits  the  people,  and  sweeps 
away  thousands  upon  thousands. 

6.  Such  is  Asia,  a  land  of  wonders  both  in  its  geog- 
raphy and  history.  It  is  the-  largest  of  the  four  quar- 
ters of  the  globe  ;  it  contains  the  loftiest  mountains,  it 
affords  the  greatest  variety  of  animal  and  vegetable 
productions,  and  the  seasons  here  display  at  once  their 
most  beautiful  and  their  most  fearful  works. 

7.  Asia,  too,  is  the  most  populous  quarter  of  the 
globe ;  it  contained  the  first  human  inhabitants,  and 
from  this  quarter  all  the  rest  of  the  globe  has  been 
peopled.  Here,  too,  the  most  remarkable  events  took 
place  that  belong  to  the  history  of  man.  Here  the 
most  wonderful  pei-sonages  were  born  that  have  ever 
trod  this  earth ;  and  here,  too,  the  mighty  miracles  of 
Jehovah  were  ^\Tought. 

5.  Soutliern  parla  of  Asia?  Hurricanes?  Drought?  Locusts?  Pestileuce? 
6.  For  what  is  Asia  very  remarkable  as  to  its  geography  ?  7.  For  what  is  Asia 
very  remarkable  as  to  its  history  ? 


327 


1S1  147 


|£L»J 


Questions  on  the  Map  of  Asia. — How  is  Asia  bounded  on  the  north  ?  East  ? 
South?  West  ?  Which  way  is  Asia  from  Europe  ?  In  what  part  of  Asia  is  Persia  ? 
In  which  direction  from  Persia  is  Arabia?  Hindostan?  China?  Tartary?  Siberia? 
Red  Sea?  Egypt?  Mediterranean  Sea?  In  what  part  of  Asia  is  the  river 
Euphrates?    The  Indies?    The  Ganges?    TheHoangHo? 


30  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


CHAPTER  YII.— Asia  CoNrmuED. 
About  the  Creation. — The  Deluge. 

1.  The  first  portion  of  the  worhi  inhabited  by  man- 
kind was  Asia ;  the  next  was  Africa ;  the  next  was 
Europe,  and  the  last  was  America.  How  long  it  is 
since  this  latter  country  was  first  peopled  by  the  In- 
dians, we  do  not  know;  but  the  first  white  people 
came  here  about  three  hundred  and  seventy  years 
since. 

2.  Let  us  now  go  back  to  the  creation  of  the  world. 
This  wonderful  event  took  place  about  six  thousand 
years  ago.  The  stoiy  of  it  is  beautifully  told  in  the 
first  chapter  of  Genesis. 

3.  Adam  and  Eve  were  created  in  Asia,  and  were 
placed  in  the  garden  of  Eden,  not  far  from  the  river 
Euphrates.  This  river  is  in  the  western  part  of  Asia, 
and  is  about  six  thousand  miles  in  an  easteidy  direction 
from  New  York  and  Boston. 

Chapter  VII. — I.  Which  quarter  of  the  globe  was  first  inhabited  ?  Which  next? 
Which  quarter  was  inhabited  last?  When  was  America  first  peopled  by  the 
Indians?  When  by  white  people?  2.  How  long  is  It  since  the  world  was  crea- 
ted ?  Tell  the  story  of  creation,  as  related  in  the  fiist  chapter  of  Genesis.  3.  Where 
did  Adam  and  P)ve  live?  Where  is  the  river  Euphrates  ?  How  far  is  itfVom  Now 
Vork  ?    Which  way  from  Boston  ? 


ASIA. 


31 


4.  Adam  and  Eve  were  for  a  time  the  only  human 
beings  on  this  vast  globe.     Yet  they  did  not  feel  alone, 


ADAM   AND   EVE. 


for  God  was  mth  them.  At  length  they  had  children, 
and  in  the  course  of  years  their  descendants  were  very 
numerous. 

5.  These  dwelt  in  the  neighborhood  of  the  Euphra- 
tes, and  here  they  built  towns,  cities,  and  villages. 
But  they  became  very  wicked.  They  forgot  to  wor- 
ship God,  and  were  unjust  and  cruel. 

6.  The  Creator  therefore  determined  to  cut  off  the 
whole  human  family,  with  the  exception  of  Noah  and 

4.  What  of  Adam  and  Eve?     5.  Where  did  the  descendants  of  Adam  and  Eve 
dwell?     What  did  they  do?     6".  What  did  God  determine  to  do ? 


32  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

his  children,  both  as  a  punishment  to  the  disobedient, 
and  as  a  warning  to  all  future  nations  that  evil  must 
follow  sin. 

7.  Noah  was  told  of  the  coming  destruction,  and 
therefore  built  an  ark,  into  which  he  gathered  his 
family,  and  a  single  pair  of  the  various  kinds  of  land 
animals.  It  then  began  to  rain,  until  all  the  countries 
of  the  earth  were  covered  with  a  deluge  of  water. 

8.  Thus  all  the  nations  were  cut  off,  and  the  world 
once  more  had  but  a  single  human  family  upon  it. 
This  event  occurred  sixteen  hundred  and  fifty-six  years 
after  the  creation. 


CHAPTEE  YIIL— Asia  Continued. 

lloio  NoaJi  and  his  Fmnily  came  out  of  the  Ark,— How  tlie 
Peojple  settled  in  the  Land  of  Shinar. — About  Babel. 

1.  The  people  who  lived  before  the  flood  are  called 
antediluvians.  We  know  nothing  about  them  except 
what  is  told  in  the  Bible.  It  is  probable  that  they 
extended  over  but  a  small  part  of  Asia,  and  that  no 

"Why  did  God  determine  to  destroy  mankind?  7.  Wlmt  of  Noah  ?  Describe 
the  deluge.  8.  What  was  the  eflect  of  the  deluge?  When  did  the  deluge  take 
place  ? 

Chapter  VIII. — 1.  What  of  those  who  lived  before  the  flood? 


ASIA.  33 

liuman  beings  dwelt  either  in  Africa,  Europe,  or  Amer- 
ica, before  the  flood. 

2.  The  deluge  is  supposed  to  have  commenced  in 
November,  and  the  rain  is  thought  to  have  ceased-  in 
March.  After  a  while  the  waters  subsided,  and  Noah's 
ark  rested  upon  the  top  of  a  tall  mountain  in  Aj-mc* 
nia,  called  Ararat,  which  is  still  to  be  seen. 

3.  The  people  and  animals  now  came  out  of  the  ark. 
The  animals  spread  themselves  abroad,  and  after  many 
centuries  they  were  extended  into  all  countries. 

4.  Noah  had  three  sons,  Shem,  Ham,  and  Japheth. 
These,  with  their  families,  proceeded  to  the  land  of 
Shinar,  which  lies  to  the  south  of  Mount  Ararat. 
Here  they  settled  themselves  on  the  borders  of  the 
river^  Euphrates,  probably  the  same  country  that  had 
been  inhabited  by  the  antediluvians.  It  is  in  this 
region  that  the  first  nations  were  formed. 

5.  All  who  remembered  the  deluge,  or  had  heard  of 
it,  were  afraid  that  the  wickedness  of  mankind  would 
again  be  punished  in  a  similar  way.  They  therefore 
resolved  to  build  a  tower,  that  they  might  mount  upon 
it,  and  save  themselves  from  destruction. 

2.  When  did  the  deluge  begin  and  end?  What  of  Mount  Ararat?  3.  What  of 
the  people  that  came  out  of  the  ark  ?  The  animals  ?  4.  What  three  sons  had 
Noah?  Where  did  they  settle?  Where  was  the  land  of  Shinar?  5.  Why 
did  the  people  resolve  to  build  the  tower  of  Babel? 


34  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

6.  Accordingly  tliey  laid  tlie  foundation  of  the  edi- 
fice on  tlie  eastern  bank  of  the  river  Euphrates.  Per- 
haps they  expected  to  rear  the  tower  so  high  that  its 
top  would  touch  the  blue  sky,  and  enable  them  to 
climb  into  heaven. 

T^  Their  building  materials  were  bricks  that  had 
been  baked  in  the  sun.  Instead  of  mortar,  they  ce- 
mented the  bricks  together  with  a  sort  of  slime  or 
pitch. 

8.  The  workmen  labored  very  diligently,  and  piled 
one  layer  of  bricks  upon  another,  till  the  eai*th  was  a 
considerable  distance  beneath  them.  But  the  blue 
sky,  and  the  sun,  and  the  stars,  seemed  as  far  off  as 
when  they  fii'st  began. 

9.  One  day,  while  these  foolish  people  were  at  .their 
labor,  a  very  wonderful  thing  took  place.  They  were 
talking  together  as  usual,  but,  all  of  a  sudden,  they 
found  it  impossible  to  understand  what  each  other 
said. 

10.  If  any. of  the  workmen  called  for  bricks,  their 
companions  at  the  bottom  of  the  tower  mistook  their 
meaning,  and  brought  them  pitch.  If  they  asked  for 
one  sort  of  tool,  another  sort  was  given  them.  Their 
words  appeared  to  be  mere  sounds  w^ithout  any  sense, 

6-8.  Describe  the  building  of  the  tower.  9,  10.  Describe  the  confusion  of  lan- 
guages. 


ASIA.  35 

like  tlie  babble  of  a  little  child,  before  it  lias  been 
taugbt  to  speak. 

11.  This  event  caused  sucli  confusion  tliat  tliey  could 
not  go  on  building  the  tower.  They  therefore  gave  up 
the  idea  of  climbing  to  heaven,  and  resolved  to  \f  ander 
to  different  parts  of  the  earth.  It  is  likely  that  they 
formed  themselves  into  several  parties,  consisting  of  all 
who  could  talk  intelligibly  together.  They  set  forth 
on  their  journey  in  various  directions. 

12.  The  descendants  of  Shem  are  supposed  to  have 
distributed  themselves  over  the  country  near  to  the 
Euphrates.  The  descendants  of  Ham  took  a  westerly 
direction,  and  proceeded  to  Africa.  They  settled  in 
Eg3rpt,  and  laid  the  foundation  of  a  great  nation  there. 
The  descendants  of  Japheth  proceeded  to  Greece,  and 
thus  laid  the  foundation  of  several  European  nations. 

13.  Some  travellers  in  modern  times  have  discovered 
a  large  hillock  on  the  shore  of  the  Euphrates.  It  is 
composed  of  sun-burnt  bricks  cemented  together  with 
pitch.  They  believe  this  hillock  to  be  the  ruins  of  the 
tower  of  Babel,  which  was  built  more  than  four  thou- 
sand years  ago. 

11.  What  was  the  consequence  of  this  confusion  of  languages?  12.  What  of 
the  descendants  of  Shem?  Of  Ham  ?  Of  Japheth?  13.  What  have  some  trav- 
ellers discorered  ?     What  is  the  hillock  supposed  to  be  ? 


ASIA.  37 


CHAPTER  IX.— Asia  Continued. 

Aljout   the   great  Assyrian    Empire^    and   Reign   of   Q'ueen 

Semiramis.  j 

1.  WiiEJS"  tlie  rest  of  mankind  were  scattered  into 
different  parts  of  the  eartli,  there  were  a  number  of 
people  who  remained  near  the  tower  of  BabeL  They 
continued  to  inhabit  the  land  of  Shinar,  which  was  a 
warm  country  and  very  fertile.  In  course  of  time  they 
extended  over  a  much  larger  tract  of  country,  and 
built  towns  and  cities. 

2.  This  region  received  the  name  of  Assyria,  It 
was  the  first  of  the  nations  of  the  earth.  Its  bounda- 
ries varied  at  different  times,  but  its  place  on  the  map 
may  be  seen  in  the  vicinity  of  the  two  rivers  Tigris  and 
Euphrates,  northward  of  the  Persian  Gulf 

3.  Ashur,  the  grandson  of  Noah,  was  the  first  ruler 

Questions  on  the  Map. — Where  does  the  river  Euphrates  rise  ?  Where  does 
\t  empty  ?  Which  way  was  Shinar  from  Mount  Ararat  ?  "^hich  way  was  Jeru- 
salem from  Babylon?  Nineveh  from  Babylon?  Eg-ypt?  Persia  ?  Which  way 
was  Assyria  from  the  Mediterranean  sea  ?  Direction  of  the  following  places  from 
Babj'lon — Egypt?    Asia    Minor?  Greece?  Macedonia?  Italy?    Canaan?    Persia? 

Chaptee  IX. — 1.  Did  all  the  people  leave  the  land  of  Shinar  alter  the  con- 
fusion of  languages?  Did  the  people  of  the  land  of  Slnnar  increase?  What 
did  they  do  ?  2.  What  name  did  the  country  around  Shinar  receive  ?  What  was 
the  first  empire  or  great  nation  of  the  earth?     Where  was  it  situated? 


38  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

of  Assyria.  In  tlie  year  2229  B.  C,  or  1775  years 
after  tlie  creation,  lie  built  the  city  of  Nineveh,  and 
surrounded  it  with  walls  a  hundred  feet  hio^h.  The 
city  was  so  large  that  a  person  would  have  travelled  a 
hundred  miles  merely  in  walking  around  it. 

4.  But  the  city  of  Babylon,  which  was  built  a  short 
time  afterward,  was  superior  to  Nineveh  both  in  size 
and  beauty.  It  was  situated  on  the  river  Euphrates. 
The  walls  were  so  very  thick,  that  six  chariots  drawn 
by  horses  could  be  driven  abreast  upon  the  top,  with- 
out danger  of  falling  oif  on  either  side.  In  our  coun- 
try we  do  not  surround  our  cities  with  walls ;  but  in 
ancient  times  walls  were  necessary  to  protect  the  people 
from  their  enemies. 

5.  In  this  city  there  were  magnificent  gardens,  be- 
longing to  the  royal  palace.  They  were  constructed 
in  a  manner  to  appear  to  be  hanging  in  the  air  without 
resting  on  the  earth.  They  contained  large  trees,  and 
all  kinds  of  fruits  and  flowers. 

6.  There  was  also  a  splendid  temple  dedicated  to 
Belus  or  Baal^  ^vho  was  the  chief  idol  of  the  Assyri- 
ans.    This  temple  was  six  hundred  and  sixty  feet  high, 

3.  Who  was  the  first  ruler  of  Assyria?  "What  city  did  lie  build?  Describe  the 
city  of  Nineveh.  4.  Where  was  the  city  of  Babylon?  Describe  this  wonderful 
city.  "Why  did  the  ancients  surround  their  cities  with  walls?  5.  What  of  the 
hanging  gardens?     6.  The  templo  of  Belus  ? 


ASIA.  89 

and  it  contained  a  golden  image  of  Belus  forty  feet  in 
lieiglit. 

7.  Babylon  was  ])nilt  by  Nimrod,  that  miglity 
hunter  of  whom  the  Bible  tells  ns.  But  the  person 
who  made  all  the  beautiful,  gardens  and  palaces,  and 
who  set  up  the  image  of  Belus,  was  a  woman  named 
Semiramis. 

8.  She  had  been  the  wife  of  Nlnus,  king  of  Assyria, 
but  when  king  Ninus  died,  queen  Semiramis  became 
sole  ruler  of  the  empire.  Slie  *  was  an  ambitious 
woman,  and  was  not  content  to  live  quietly  in  Baby- 
lon, although  she  had  taken  so  much  pains  to  make  it 
a  beautiful  city. 

9.  She  was  tormented  with  a  wicked  desire  to  con- 
quer all  the  nations  of  the  earth.  So  she  collected  an 
immense  army,  and  marched  against  the  rich  and 
powerful  king  of  the  Indies,  who  lived  in  what  we 
now  call  Hindostan,  a  country  lying  to  the  south-east 
of  Assyria. 

T.  Who  built  Babylon?  Who  made  the  hanging  gardens?  8.  What  of  Semir- 
amis ?  Was  she  contented  with  Babylon  ?  9.  What  desire  had  she  ?  What  did 
she  do  ?    Where  did  the  king  of  the  Indies  hve  ? 


4(i  ,  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


CHAPTER  X.— Asia  Continded. 

Queen  Semiramis   sets  forth  to  conquer   the  World,   hut   it 
defeated  hy  the  King  of  the  Indies. 

1.  Wheis"  the  king  of  the  Indies,  wlio  was  very  rich 
and  powerful,  heard  that  queen  Semiramis  was  coming 
to  invade  his  dominions,  he  mustered  a  vast  number  of 
men  to  defend  them.  Besides  his  soldiers,  he  had  a 
great  many  elephants. 

2.  Each  of  these  enormous  beasts  was  worth  a 
whole  regiment  of  soldiers.  They  were  taught  to  rush 
into  battle  and  toss  the  enemy  about  with  their  trunks, 
and  trample  them  down  with  their  huge  feet. 

3.  Now  queen  Semiramis  had  no  elephants,  and 
therefore  she  was  afraid  that  the  king  of  the  Indies 
would  overcome  her.  She  endeavored  to  prevent  this 
misfortune  by  a  very  curious  contrivance.  In  the  first 
place  she  ordered  three  thousand  brown  oxen  to  be 
killed. 

4.  The  hides  of  the  dead  oxen  were  stripped  off,  and 
sewed  together  in  the  shape  of  elephants.  These  were 
placed  upon  camels,  and  when  the  camels  were  drawn 

Chapter  X. — 1.  What  did  the  king  of  the  Indies  do  when  he  lieard  of  Semira- 
mis' purpose?  What  sort  of  an  army  had  he?  2.  Wliat  of  the  elephants?  3,  4.  To 
what  contrivance  did  Semiramis  resort? 


ASIA. 


41 


up  in  battle  array,  they  looked  pretty  much  like  a 
troop  of  great  brown  elephants.  Doubtless  the  king 
of  the  Indies  wondered  where  queen  Semiramis  had 
caught  them. 

5.  When  the  battle  was  to  be  fought,  the  king  of 
the  Indies  with  his  real  elej^hants  marched  forward  on 
one  side,  and  queen  Semiramis  with  her  camels  and 
ox-hides,  came  boldly  against  him  on  the  other. 

6.  But  when  the  Indian  army  had  marched  close  to 


DEFEAT  AND  FLIGHT   OF  SEMIRAMIS. 


the  host  of  the  Assyrians,  they  perceived  that  there 
was  no  such  thing  as  an  elephant  among  them.     They 


5-7.  Describe  the  battle.     What  was  the  result  of  the  battle? 


42  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

therefore  laid  aside  all  fear,  and  rushed  furiously  upon 
queen  Semiramis  and  her  soldiers. 

7.  The  real  elephants  put  the  camels  to  flight ;  and 
then,  in  a  great  rage,  they  ran  about,  tossing  the  As- 
syrians into  the  air,  and  trampling  them  down  by  hun- 
dreds. Thus  the  Assyrian  army  was  routed,  and  the 
king  of  the  Indies  gained  a  complete  victory. 

8.  Queen  Semiramis  was  sorely  wounded ;  but  she 
got  into  a  chariot,  and  drove  away  at  full  speed  from 
the  battle-field.  She  finally  escaped  to  her  OAvn  king- 
dom, but  in  a  very  sad  condition. 

9.  She  then  took  up  her  residence  in  the  palace  at 
Babylon.  But  she  did  not  long  enjoy  herself  in  the 
beautiful  gardens  Avhich  she  had  suspended  in  the  air. 
It  is  said  that  her  o^vn  son,  whose  name  was  Ninias, 
put  his  mother  to  death,  that  he  might  get  possession 
of  the  throne,  and  reign  over  the  people. 

10.  Such  was  the  .  melancholy  end  of  the  mighty 
queen  Semiramis.  How  foolish  and  wicked  it  was  for 
her  to  spend  her  life  in  trying  to  conquer  other  nations, 
instead  of  niaking  her  own  people  happy !  But  slie 
had  not  learned  that  golden  rule,  "  Do  to  another  aa 
you  would  have  another  do  to  you." 

8.  What  of  Semiramis?     9.  What  became  of  her?     10.  Was  the  conduct  of 
Semiramis  good  or  wise?     Do  you  think  she  was  happy? 


ASIA.  43 


CHAPTEE  XL— Asia  CoNTmuED. 

About   Nlnias, — lieign  of  Sardanupalus^  and   Fall   of  the 
Assyrian  Empire. 

1.  After  Ninias  had  wickedly  murdered  liis  motlier, 
lie  became  king  of  Assyiia.  His  reign  began  about 
tlie  year  2000  B.  C,  or  about  three  hundred  and  forty 
years  after  the  deluge. 

2.  Ninias  was  not  only  a  very  wicked  man,  but  a 
very  slothful  one.  He  did  not  set  out  to  conquer 
kingdoms  like  his  mother,  but  shut  himself  up  in  his 
palace,  and  thought  of  nothing  but  how  to  enjoy  him- 
self. 

3.  He  knew  that  his  people  hated  him,  and  there- 
fore he  kept  guards  in  his  palace ;  Blit  he  was  afraid 
to  trust  even  his  guards.  Whether  he  was  murdered 
at  last,  or  whether  he  died  quietly  in  his  bed,  is  more 
than  I  can  tell,  for  history  does  not  inform  us. 

4.  After  the  reign  of  Ninias,  there  was  an  interval  of 
eight  hundred  years,  during  which  it  is  impossible  to 
say  what  happened  in  the  kingdom  of  Assyria.     It  is 

Chapter  XI.— 1.  Whal  of  Ninias?  When  did  his  reign  begin  ?  2.  What  was 
his  character?  What  did  he  do  ?  3,  What  else  of  Ninias  ?  4,  What  of  Assyria 
for  eight  hundred  years  after  Ninias? 


44  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

probable  that  most  of  tlie  kings  were  like  Ninias,  tkat 
they  wasted  their  time  in  idle  pleasures,  and  never  did 
any  thing  worthy  of  remembrance. 
i  5.  Some  years  afterward,  there  was  a  king  upon  the 
throne  of  Assyria,  whose  name  was  Sardanapalus. 
^He  is  said  to  have  been  a  beautiful  young  man;  but 
he  was  slothful,  and  took  no  care  of  his  kingdom,  and 
made  no  attempt  to  promote  the  welfare  of  his  people. 

6.  He  never  went  outside  of  his  palace,  but  lived  all 
the  time  among  the  women.  And  in  order  to  make 
himself  more  fit  for  their  company,  he  painted  his  face, 
and  sometimes  put  on  a  woman's  dress.  In  this  ridic- 
ulous guise,  the  great  king  Sardanapalus  used  to  sit 
down  with  the  women,  and  help  them  to  spin. 

Y.  But  while  Sardanapalus  was  feasting,  and  dancing, 
and  painting  his  face,  and  dressing  himself  like  a  wom- 
an, and  hel2:)ing  thfe  women  to  spin,  a  terrible  destruc- 
tion was  impending  over  his  head. 

8.  Ai'baces,  governor  of  the  Medes,  made  war 
against  this  unworthy  monarch,  and  besieged  him  in 
the  city  of  Babylon.  Sardanapalus  saw  that  he  could 
not  escape,  and  that  if  he  lived  any  longer,  he  should 
probably  become  a  slave. 

9.  So,  rather  than  be  a  slave,  he  resolved  to  die. 

5.  Wliat  of  Sardanapalus  ?     6,  1.  How  did  he  live?     8.  What  of  Arbaces? 


ASIA.  46 

He  therefore  collected  his  treasures,  and  heaped  them 
in  one  great  pile  in  a  splendid  hall  of  his  palace,  and 
then  set  fire  to  the  pile.  The  palace  was  speedily  in  a 
blaze,  and  Sardanapalus,  with  his  favorite  officers,  and 
a  multitude  of  beautiful  women,  w^ere  burnt  to  death 
in  the  flames.  Thus  ended  the  great  Assyrian  monar- 
chy, the  country  being  conquered  by  Arbaces. 

10.  Sardanapalus  died  about  the  year  876  B.  C. 
After  a  time  a  new  kingdom  arose,  and  Nineveh  was 
the  capital.  This  is  called  the  second  Assyrian  Em- 
pire. The  kings  of  this  empire  made  war  on  the  Jews, 
and  are  often  spoken  of  in  the  Bible.  Their  powder 
was  terminated,  and  Nineveh  finally  destroyed  by  tlie 
king  of  the  Medes,  606  B.  C. 


CHAPTER  XII.— Asia  Continued. 

About  the  Hebrews  w  Jews. — Origin  of  the  Hebrews. — The 
Removal  of  Jacob  and  his  Children  to  Egy^yt. 

1.  The  founder  of  the  Hebrew  nation  was  Abraham, 
who  was  born  about  tw^o  hundred  years  after  the  del- 
uge. The  country  of  his  birth  was  Chaldea,  which 
formed  the  southern  part  of  the  Assyrian  empire. 

9.   What  of  the  death  of  Sardanapalus?     What  was  the  end  of  the  Assyrian  em- 
pire?    10.  How  and  when  was  it  terminated? 

Chapter  -XH. — 1.  What  of  Abraham  ?     When  and  where  was  he  born? 


46  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

2.  Tlie  rest  of  tlie  inhabitants  of  Clialdea  were  idol, 
aters,  and  worshipped  tlie  sun,  moon,  and  stars ;  but 
Abrabam  worshipped  the  true  God  whom  we  worship. 
In  the  early  part  of  his  life,  he  was  a  shepherd  on  the 
Chaldean  plains.  When  his  father,  Terah,  was  dead, 
God  commanded  him  to  leave  his  native  country,  and 
travel  westward  to  the  land  of  Canaan. 


THE  DEPARTURE  OF  ABRAHAM. 

« 

3.  This  region  was  afterward  called  Palestine.  It 
lies  north  of  Arabia,  is  on  the  eastern  border  of  the 
Mediterranean  Sea,  and  is  nearly  six  thousand  miles 

2.  What  of  the  worship  of  the  Chaldeans  ?  Of  Abraham  ?  What  of  the  early- 
life  of  Abraham  ?  What  did  God  command  Abraham  to  do?  3.  Where  is  tho 
land  of  Canaan?     What  is  it  now  called? 


ASIA.  4*r 

soutli-easterly  from  New  York.  It  was  a  rich  and  fer- 
tile country,  and  God  promised  Abraham  that  his 
descendants  should  dwell  there. 

4.  Many  years  of  Abraliam's  life  w^ere  spent  m 
wandering  to  and  fro.  His  wife  Sarah  went  with  him, 
and  they  were  followed  by  a  large  number  of  male 
and  female  servants,  and-  by  numerous  flocks  and 
herds.     They  dwelt  in  tents,  and  had  no  settled  home. 

5.  Abraham  and  Sarah  had  one  son,  named  Isaac. 
His  father  loved  him  fondly ;  but  when  God  command- 
ed him  to  sacrifice  his  child,  he  prepared  to  obey.  But 
an  angel  came  down  from  heaven,  and  told  him  not  to 
slay  his  son. 

6.  The  life  of  Abraham  was  full  of  interesting  events, 
but  I  have  not  room  to  relate  them  all  here.  He  lived 
to  be  a  hundred  and  seventy-five  years  old,  and  then 
died  at  Hebron,  in  Canaan.  From  this  ancient  patri- 
arch the  Jews  and  Arabians  are  descended.  They 
have  always  called!  him  Father  Abraham. 

Y.  Isaac,  the  son  of  Abraham,  left  two  children, 
Esau  and  Jacob.     The  younger,  Jacob,  persuaded  his 

4.  "What  of  the  life  of  Abraham  ?  Who  went  witli  him  from  Chaldea  to  Canaan? 
5.  What  of  Isaac?  6.  What  else  of  Abraham?  What  of  the  Jews  ?  7.  WHiat  o£ 
Isaac's  sons  ?  What  did  Jacob  do  ?  What  is  meant  by  birthright  ?  Ans.  The 
eldest  son  in  ancient  times  enjoyed  many  privileges  over  his  younger  brotheix 
These  Esau  sold  to  Jacob  for  a  single  meal  of  victuals.  Thus  Jacob  became  tlie 
head  of  the  Jewish  people. 


48  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

brotlier  to  sell  liis  birthriglit  for  a  mess  of  pottage. 
He  likewise  obtained  a  blessing,  whicli  his  father 
intended  to  bestow  on  Esau. 

-  8.  Jacob,  to  wliom  God  gave  tlie  name  of  Israel,  bad 
twelve  sons,  whose  names  were  Reuben,  Simeon,  Levi, 
Dan,  Judah,  Naphthali,  Gad,  Ashur,  Issachar,  Zebulon, 
Joseph,  and  Benjamin.  The  posterity  of  each  of  these 
twelve  afterward  became  a  separate  tribe  among  the 
Hebrews  or  Israelites. 

9.  My  young  reader  must  look  into  the  Bible  for  the 
beautiful  story  of  Joseph  and  his  brethren.  I  can 
merely  tell  him  that  Joseph  was  sold  into  captivity 
and  carried  into  the  land  of  Egypt,  and  that  there  he 
was  the  means  of  preserving  his  aged  father  and  all 
his  brothers  from  death  by  famine. 

10.  Jacob  and  his  twelve  children  removed  to  Egypt, 
and  took  up  their  residence  there.  It  was  in  that 
country  that  the  Hebrews  first  began  to  be  a  nation ; 
so  that  their  history  may  be  said  to  commence  from 
this  period.     Jacob  died  1689  B.  C. 

8.  Who  were  the  twelve  sons  of  Jacob  ?  What  of  the  descendants  of  these 
twelve  sons?  9.  Can  you  tell  the  story  of  Joseph  as  related  in  Genesis  chapter 
37,  etc.?  10.  Where  did  Jacob  go  with  his  family?  What  of  the  origin  of  the 
JewB? 


ASIA,  40 


CHAPTEE  XIII.— Asia  Continued.  ' 

The  Bondage  in  Egypt. — Flight  of  the  Hebrews^  and  D^stnic- 
tion  of  Pharaoh  and  his  Host. 

1.  Egypt,  you  know,  is  in  Africa.  It  has  many 
cities,  and  a  famous  river  called  tlie  Nile  runs  tlirougli 
the  country.  But  this  land  is  less  populous  now  than 
in  the  time  of  Joseph.  It  was  then  full  of  people,  and 
they  were  the  most  learned  and  civilized  of  all  the 
nations  of  the  earth.  There  are  many  ruins  to  be  seen 
in  Egypt,  which  show  that  the  palaces  and  cities  of 
ancient  times  were  very  splendid. 

2.  But  I  must  tell  you  of  the  Hebrews.  Pharaoh, 
the  good  king  of  Egypt  died,  and  Joseph  likewise. 
Another  king  then  ascended  the  throne,  who  hated  the 
Hebrews,  and  did  all  in  his  power  to  oppress  them. 

3.  The  Egyptians  treated  them  like  slaves.  All  the 
hardest  labor  was  performed  by  the  Hebrews.     It  is 

^thought  by  some  writers  that  the  immense  piles  of 
stone  called  the  Pyramids,  were  built  by  them.  These 
vast  edifices  are  still  standing  on  the  banks  of  the 
Nile. 

Chapter  XIII.— 1.  What  of  Egypt  ?  What  of  Egypt  in  the  time  of  Joseph  ? 
2.  How  were  the  Hebrews  treated  after  the  death  of  Joseph?  3.  What  of  the 
pyramids?  How  high  is  the  tallest  of  the  Egyptian  pyramids?  Ans.  About  five 
hundred  feet. 


56 


UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


4.  This  cruel  king  was  named  Pharaoh,  like  his  pre- 
decessor. One  of  the  most  wicked  injuries  that  he 
inflicted  on  the  Hebrews  was  the  following : 

5.  He  commanded  that  every  male  child  sliould  be 
thi'own  into  the  river  Nile  the  instant  he  was  born. 
The  reason  for  this  horrible  cruelty  was,  that  the  He- 
brews mio^ht  not  become  more  numerous  than  the 
Egyptians,  and  conquer  the  whole  country. 

6.  One  of  the  Hebrew  women,  however,  could  not 


MOSES  IN  THE  BULEUSnES. 


make  up  her^mind  to  throw  her  son  into  the  Nile.     If 
she    had   positively    disobeyed    the    king's  order,   she 

4,  5.  Whatcnielty  did  Pharaoh  inflici  upon  the  Hebrews?     6.  What  did  one  of 
the  Hebrew  women  do? 


ASIA.  51 

would  liave  been  put  to  death.  She  therefore  very 
privately  made  a  little  ark  or  boat  of  bulrushes,  j  Jaced 
the  child  in  it,  and  laid  it  among  the  flags  that  grew 
by  the  river's  side. 

Y.  In  a  little  while  the  king's  daughter  came  down 
to  the  river  to  bathe.  Perceiving  the  ark  of  bulrushes, 
she  went  with  her  maids  to  fetch  it.  When  they 
looked  into  it,  they  found  a  little  Hebrew  boy  there  ! 

8.  The  heart  of  the  princess  was  moved  Avith  com- 
passion, and  she  resolved  to  save  his  life.  She  hired 
his  own  mother  to  nurse  him.  She  gave  him  the  name 
of  Moses,  and  when  he  grew  old  enough  to  be  put  to 
school,  she  caused  him  to  be  instructed  in  all  the  learn- 
ing of  the  Egyptians.  At  that  period  they  were  the 
most  learned  people  on  earth. 

9.  But  though  he  himself  was  so  well  treated,  Moses 
did  not  forget  the  sufferings  of  the  other  Hebrews. 
He  remembered  that  they  were  his  brethren,  and  he 
resolved  to  rescue  them  from  their  oppressors. 

10.  He  and  his  brother  Aaron  received  power  from 
God  to  perform  many  wonderful  things,  in  order  to 
induce  Pharaoh  to  let  the  Hebrews  depart  out  of 
Egypt.     Ten  great  plagues  were  inflicted  on  the  Egyp- 


1.  AYhat  of  Pharaoh's  daughter?     8.  What  of  Moses?     9.  Wliat  did  ha  resolve 
to  do  ?     10.  What  of  Moses  and  Aaron  ? 


52 


UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


tians,  and  these  were  so  terrible  tliat  at  last  Pharaoli 
gave  the  Hebrews  leave  to  go. 


AARON. 


MOSES. 


11.  But  scarcely  were  they  gone,  when  the  king  was 
sorry  he  had  not  kept  them  in  Egypt,  that  he  might 
oppress  them,  and  compel  them  to -labor  for  him  as 
before.  He  therefore  mustered  his  warriors,  and  rode 
swiftly  after  the  fugitives. 

12.  When  he  came  in  sight  of  them,  they  were 
crossing  the  Ived  Sea,  v>^hich  lies  between  Egypt  and 
Arabia.  The  Lord  had  caused  the  watei^  to  roll  back, 
and  form  a  wall  on  each  side.  Thus  there  was  a  patli 
of  glistening  sand  for  the  Hebrews  through  the  very 
depths  of  the  sea. 

To  what  did  Pharaoh  Consent?     11,  Did  lie  change  his  mind  ?     12.  What  inir- 
iicle  did  God  perform  ?     How  did  the  Hebrews  cross  the  Rod  Sea? 


ASIA.  53 

13.  Pharaoh  and  Ms  army  rode  onward,  and  hj  the 
time  that  the  fugitives  had  reached  the  opposite  shore, 
the  Egyptians  were  in  the  midst  of  this  wonderful 
passage.  As  the  Hebrews  fled,  they  looked  behind 
them.  There  w^as  the  prond  array  of  the  Egyptian 
king,  wdth  his  chariots  and  horsemen,  and  Pharaoh 
himself  riding  haughtily  in  the  midst. 

14.  The  affrighted  Hebrews  looked  behind  them 
again,  and  lo !  the  two  walls  of  water  had  rolled  to- 
gether. They  were  dashing  against  the  chariots,  and 
sweeping  the  soldiers  oif  their  feet.  The  waves  were 
crested  with  foam,  and  came  roaring  against  the  wicked 
king.  In  a  little  time,  the  sea  rolled  calmly  over  Pha- 
raoh and  his  host,  and  thus  they  all  j)erished,  lea\dng 
the  Jew^s  to  proceed  on  their  journey. 

15.  This  was  a  terrible  event,  but  Pharaoh  had  been 
very  cruel ;  he  therefore  deserved  his  fate.  This  stoiy 
may  teach  us,  that  not  only  wdcked  rulers,  but  those 
who  follow  them,  have  reason  to  fear  the  judgments  of 
Heaven. 


13,  14.  Describe  the  passage  of  the  Egyptians.     15.  What  may  this  story  teach 
us? 


54  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

CHAPTER  XIY.— Asia  Continued. 

About  the  Wa7iderings  of  the  Israelites  in  the  Wilderness. 

1.  It  was  now  two  liiindred  and  fifteen  years  since 
Jacob  liad  come  to  settle  in  Egypt.  His  descendants 
had  multiplied  so  rapidly  tliat  at  the  time  of  their 
departure,  the  Hebrew  nation  are  supposed  to  have 
amounted  to  two  millions  of  people.  Moses,  their 
leader,  was  eighty  years  old,  but  his  step  was  steady ; 
and  though  of  meek  and  humble  manners,  he  was  a 
man  of  great  wisdom  and  firmness  of  character. 

2.  The  Hebrews  intended  to  go  directly  from  Egypt 
to  the  land  of  Canaan.  This  latter  country  is  now 
called  Palestine.  Before  reaching  it,  the  children  of 
Israel  were  to  pass  through  a  part  of  Arabia. 

3.  In  order  that  they  might  not  go  astray,  a  vast 
pillar  of  mist,  or  cloud,  moved  before  them  all  day 
long ;  and  at  night  the  jiillar  of  cloud  was  changed  to 
a  pillar  of  fire,  which  threw  a  radiance  ovej:  the  regions 
through  which  they  journeyed. 

4.  The  country  was  desolate  and  l)arren,  and  often 

Chapter  XIV. — 1.  How  long  was  it  from  the  linio  Jacob  settled  v.\  l\L;ypt  to 
the  departure  of  the  Israelites?  "What  was  their  number?  How  old  was  M.^cs  r 
What  was  his  character?  2.  lu  what  country  did  the  Hebrews  watider  ?  ii.  11  ow 
•were  the  Hebiews  guided? 


ASIA.  bi) 

destitute  of  water,  but  tlie  Lord  fed  tlie  people  witli 
manna  and  with  quails  ;  and  when  they  were  thirsty, 
Moses  smote  upon  a  rock,  and  the  water  gushed  out 
abundantly.  Besides  all  this,  the  Hebrews  received 
divine  assistance  against  the  Amalekites,  and  were 
enabled  to  conquer  them  in  battle. 

5.  But  in  spite  of  these  various  mercies,  the  Israel- 
ites were  an  ungrateful  and  rebellious  people.  They 
often  turned  from  the  worship  of  the  true  Grod,  and 
became  idolaters. 

6.  At  the  very  time  when  the  Lord  was  revealing 
himself  to  Moses  from  the  summit  of  Mount  Sinai,  and 
giving  him  the  Ten  Commandments,  the  people  com- 
pelled Aaron  to  make  a  golden  calf  They  worshipped 
this  poor  image  instead  of  Jehovah,  who  had  brought 
them  out  of  Egypt. 

Y.  On  account  of  their  numerous  sins,  the  Lord  often 
inflicted  grievous  punishments  upon  them.  Many 
were  slain  by  pestilence,  and  some  were  swallowed 
up  in  the  earth.  The  remainder  were  compelled  to 
wander  forty  years  in  the  deserts  of  Arabia,  though  the 

4.  "What  sort  of  country  did  they  travel  through  ?  IIow  were  they  fed  and 
supphed  with  water  ?  What  other  divine  assistance  was  rendered  to  the  Hebrews? 
5.  Were  the  Hebrews  grateful  for  all  the  mercies  bestowed  upon  them  ?  G.  What 
did  they  do  when  Moses  was  on  Mount  Sinai?  7.  What  evil  resulted  from  the 
disobedience  of  the  Hebrews  ?  How  long  did  the  Hebrews  wander?  What  is 
the  distance  from  Egypt  to  Canaan  ? 


5Q  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

whole  distance  in  a  direct  line  from  Egypt  to  Canaan 
was  but  two  liundred  and  fifty  miles. 

7.  Before  they  came  to  tlie  land  of  Canaan,  most  of 
those  who  had  fled  out  of  Egypt  were  dead.  Their 
children  inherited  the  promised  land,  but  they  them- 
selves were  buried  in  the  sands  of  the  desert.  Even 
Moses  was  permitted  merely  to  gaze  at  the  land  of 
Canaan  from  the  top  of  Mount  Pisgah.  Here  he  died, 
at  the  age  of  one  hundred  and  twenty  years. 

9.  After  the  death  of  Moses,  Joshua,  the  son  of  Nun, 
became  leader  of  the  Israelites.  Under  his  guidance 
they  entered  the  promised  land,  and  subdued  the  peo- 
ple who  inhabited  it.  The  territory  of  Canaan  was  then 
di\dded  amons:  the  twelve  tribes  of  Israel. 

8.  Did  the  Hebrews  who  left  Egypt  reach  Canaan  ?  "What  of  Moses  ?  "Wliere 
is  Mount  Pisgah  ?  (See  the  map  on  the  opposite  page.)  9.  Who  became  leader 
after  the  death  of  Moses  ?     How  was  the  land  of  Canaan  divided  ? 

Questions  on  the  Map. — In  wliat  direction  from  Jerusalem  are  the  following 
places — Gaza?  Damascus?  Samaria?  Cana?  Jericho?  Where  is  Mount  Ta- 
bor? A.scalon?  Nazareth?  Bethlehem?  Between  what  seas  does  the  river 
Jordan  flow?     Where  is  Tyre  ?     Joppa?     Mount  Carmel? 


58  UNIVERSAL  IlISTOllT. 


CHAPTER  XY.— Asia  Continued. 

The  Hebrews  overthrow  the  Midianites. —  Samson^  Judge  of 

Israel, 

1.  After  tlieir  settlement  in  Canaan,  tlie  Israelites 
lived  under  the  authority  of  judges.  These  were  their 
rulers  in  times  of  peace,  and  their  generals  in  Avar. 
Some  of  them  were  very  remarkable  personages,  and 
did  many  things  worthy  of  remembrance. 

2.  The  name  of  one  of  the  judges  was  Gideon. 
While  he  ruled  Israel,  an  army  of  Midianites  invaded 
the  country,  and  oppressed  the  people  for  seven  years. 
But  the  Lord  instructed  Gideon  how  to  rescue  the  Is- 
realites  from  their  power. 

3.  Gideon  chose  three  hundred  men,  and  caused  each 
of  them  to  take  an  earthen  pitcher,  and  put  a  lamp 
within  it.  With  this  small  band  he  entered  the  camp 
of  the  Midianites  by  night.  There  was  an  immense 
army  of  them  sleeping  in  their  tents,  without  appre- 
hending any. danger  from  the  conquered  Israelites. 

4.  But  their  destruction  was  at  hand.     Gideon  gave 

Chapter  XV.— 1.  How  were  the  Hebrews  governed  after  their  settlement  in 
Canaan?  What  of  the  judges?  2.  What  of  Gideon?  3-5.  Tell  how  Gideon 
contrived  to  overcome  the  Midianites. 


ASIA.  59 

a  signal,  and  all  liis  tliree  liundred  men  broke  their 
pitcliers,  at  the  same  time  blowing  a  loud  blast  upon 
trumpets  which  they  had  brought.  This  terrible 
clamor  startled  the  Midianites  from  their  sleep. 

5.  Amid  the  clangor  of  the  trumpets  they  heard  the 
Israelites  shouting,  "The  sword  of  the  Lord  and  of 
Gideon  1"  A  great  panic  seized  upon  the  Midianites. 
Each  man  mistook  his  neighbor  for  an  enemy  ;  so  that 
more  of  the  Midianites  were  slain  l)y  their  own  swords, 
than  by  the  swords  of  the  men  of  Israel.  Thus  God 
wrought  a  great  deliverance  for  his  people. 

6.  The  most  famous  of  all  the  judges  of  Israel  was 
named  Samson.  He  was  the  strongest  man  in  the 
world ;  and  it  was  a  wonderful  circumstance  that  his 
great  strength  depended  upon  the  hair  of  his  head. 
While  he  continued  to  wear  his  hair  long,  and  curling 
down  his  neck,  he  had  more  strength  than  a  hundred 
men  put  together.  But  if  his  hair  were  to  be  cut  off, 
he  would  be  no  stronger  than  any  single  man. 

7.  In  the  days  of  Samson  the  Philistines  had  con- 
quered the  Israelites.  Samson  disliked  them  on  ac- 
count of  the  injuries  which  they  inflicted  upon  his  coun- 
trymen, and  naturally  made  use  of  his  great  strength 
to  do  them  all  the  harm  in  his  power. 

6.  What  of  Samson?     7.  Wliat  of  the  rhihstines  ?   Why  did  Samson  dislike  them  ? 


60  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

8.  On  one  occasion  lie  slew  a  tliousand  of  them,  al- 
tliougli  lie  had  no  better  weapon  than  the  jawbone  of 
an  ass.  At  another  time,  when  they  had  shut  him  np 
in  the  city  of  Graza,  he  took  the  gates  of  the  city  npon 
his  shoulders,  and  carried  them  to  the  top  of  a  distant 
hill. 

9.  But  though  Samson  hated  the  Philistines,  and 
was  always  doing  them  mischief,  there  was  a  woman 
among  them  whom  he  loved.  Her  name  was  Delilah. 
She  pretended  to  love  Samson  in  return  ;  but  her  only 
object  was  to  ruin  him. 

10.  This  woman  used  many  persuasions  to  induce 
Samson  to  tell  what  it  was  that  made  him  so  much 
stronger  than  other  men.  At  first  Samson  deceived 
her.  At  length,  however,  Delilah  prevailed  upon  him 
to  tell  her  the  real  cause  of  his  great  strength. 

11.  When  she  had  found  out  the  secret,  she  cut  oQ 
the  hair  of  his  head  while  he  was  sleeping,  and  then 
delivered  him  to  her  countrymen,  the  Philistines.  The 
latter  put  out  his  eyes,  and  bound  him  wdth  fetters  of 
brass,  and  he  was  forced  to  labor  like  a  brute  beast  in 
the  prison. 

8.  With  what  weapon  did  Samson  kill  a  thousand  Philistines?  WTiat  of  the 
gates  of  Gaza?  9.  What  of  Delilah ?  10.  What  did  she  ask  Samson  ?  11.  TIow 
did  Delilah  deprive  Samson  of  his  strength  ?  What  did  the  Philistines  do  to  Sam- 
son? 


ASIA.  61 

12.  Samson  was  able  to  work  very  liard,  for  pretty 
soon  his  hair  "began  to  grow,  and  so  his  wonderful 
vigor  returned.  Thus  he  became  the  strongest  man  in 
the  w^orld  again. 

13.  One  day  the  Philistines  were  offering  a  great 
sacrifice  to  their  idol,  whose  name  was  Dagon.  They 
feasted,  and  their  hearts  were  merry.  When  their 
mirth  was  at  its  height,  they  sent  for  poor  blind  Sam- 
son, that  he  might  amuse  them  by  showing  specimens 
of  his  wonderful  strength. 

14.  Samson  was  accordingly  brought  from  prison, 
and  led  into  Dagon's  temple.  His  brazen  fettei^ 
clanked  at  every  step.  He  was  a  woful  object  with 
his  blinded  eyes.  But  his  hair  had  grown  again,  and 
was  curling  upon  his  brawny  shoulders. 

15.  When  Samson  had  done  many  wonderful  feats 
of  strength,  he  asked  leave  to  rest  himself  against  the 
two  main  pillars  of  the  temple.  The  floor  and  galle- 
ries were  all  crowded  with  Philistines.  They  gazed 
upon  this  man  of  mighty  strength,  and  they  triumphed 
and  rejoiced,  because  they  imagined  he  could  do  them 
no  more  harm. 

16.  But  while  they  gazed,  the  strong  man  threw  his 
arms  round  the  two  pillars  of  the  temple.     The  edifice 

12.  "What  happened  when  Samson's  hair  grew  again?     13-17.  Tell  how  Sam- 
son destroyed  the  Philistine  temple, 


62  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

trembled  as  witli  an  earthquake.  Then  Samson  bowed 
himself  with  all  his  might,  and  down  came  the  temj)le 
with  a  crash  like  thunder,  overwhelming  the  whole 
multitude  of  the  Philistines  in  its  ruins. 

17.  Samson  was  likewise  crushed,  but  in  his  death  it 
appears  that  he  triumphed  over  his  enemies,  and  lay 
buried  beneath  the  dead  bodies  of  lords  and  mighty 
men. 


CHAPTER  XVI.— Asia  Continued. 
Beginning  of  the  Reign  of  Saul. 

1.  Many  other  judges  ruled  over  Israel,  in  the  space 
of  about  four  hundred  years  from  the  time  that  Moses 
led  the  Hebrews  out  of  Egypt.  But  at  length  they 
became  dissatisfied  with  this  mode  of  government,  and 
demanded  that  a  king  should  be  placed  over  them. 

2.  Samuel  was  then  the  judge  of  Israel.  He  was 
an  old  man,  and  a  wise  one ;  and  besides  the  wisdom 
that  he  had  collected  in  the  course  of  a  lonsr  life,  he 
possessed  wisdom  from  on  high. 

Chapter  XVI. — 1.  For  how  long  a  time  were  the  Hebrews  governed  by 
judges?     2.  What  of  Samuel  ? 


ASIA.  ^3 

3.  Wlien  the  people  demanded  a  king,  Samuel  en- 
deavored to  convince  tliem  tliat  tliey  were  much  better 
off  without  one.  He  described  the  tyrannical  acts 
which  kings  have  always  been  in  the  habit  of  commit- 
ting, whenever  they  have  had  the  power  to  do  so.  But 
the  Israelites  would  not  hearken  to  him.  . 

4.  Samuel,  therefore,  consulted  the  Lord,  and  was 
directed  to  find  out  a  king  for  the  Israelites.  The  per- 
son who  was  fixed  upon  was  a  young  man  named  Saul. 
He  possessed  great  beauty,  and  was  a  head  taller 
than  any  other  man  among  the  Israelites.  Samuel  an, 
ointed  his  head  with  oil,  and  gave  him  to  the  Israelites 
as  their  king. 

-  5.  For  a  considerable  time  king  Saul  behaved  like 
a  wise  and  righteous  monarch.  But  at  length  he  began 
to  disobey  the  Lord,  and  seldom  took  the  advice  of 
Samuel,  although  that  good  old  priest  would  have  been 
willing  to  direct  him  in  every  action  of  his  life. 

6.  In  the  course  of  Saul's  reign,  the  Israelites  were 
often  at  war  with  the  neighboring  nations.  At  one 
time,  when  the  Philistines  had  invaded  the  country, 
there  was  a  great  giant  in  their  host,  whose  name  was 
Goliath,  of  Gath. 

Y.  He  was  at  least  ten  or  twelve  feet  high,  and  was 

3.  What  did  he  do,  when  the  people  demanded  a  king  ?  4.  What  of  Saul  ? 
5.  How  did  Saul  behave?     6-8.  What  of  Goliath  ? 

4 


6-4  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

clothed  from  liead  to  foot  in  brazen  armor.  He  carried 
an  enormous  spear,  the  iron  head  of  which  weighed 
thirty  pounds. 

8.  Every  day  did  this  frightful  giant  stride  forth 
from  the  camp  of  the  Philistines,  and  defy  the  Isra- 
elites to  produce  a  champion  who  would  stand  against 
him  in  single  combat.  But,  instead  of  doing  this,  the 
whole  host  of  Israel  stood  aloof  from  hnn,  as  a  flock  of 
sheep  from  a  lion. 


CHAPTER  XYII.— Asia  Continiied. 
Combat  of  David  and  Goliath. 

1.  At  last,  a  young  shepherd,  by  the  name  of  David, 
happened  to  come  to  the  camp  of  the  Israelites,  and 
heard  the  terrible  voice  of  Goliath  as  he  thundered 
forth  his  challenge. 

2.  Young  as  he  was,  David  had  already  slain  a  lion 
and  a  bear ;  and  with  the  help  of  the  Lord  he  thought 
himself  able  to  slay  this  gigantic  Philistine.  He  there- 
fore obtained  leave  of  king  Saul  to  accept  the  chal- 
lenge. 

Chapter  XVIL— 1.  Who  was  David?    What  did  he  do?     2.  What  had  David 
done?     What  did  he  think ? 


ASIA.  65 

3.  But,  instead  of  wearing  tlie  king's  armor,  wMcli 
Saul  would  willingly  liave  lent  him,  David  went  to  tlie 
battle  in  his  shepherd's  garb.  He  did  not  even  buckle 
on  a  sword. 

4.  When  the  two  combatants  came  into  the  field, 
there  was  the  youthful  David  on  the  side  of  the  Israel-  > 
ites,  with  a  staff  in  one  hand,  and  a  sling  in  the  other, 
carrying  five  smooth  stones  in  a  shepherd's  scrip  or 
pouch. 

5.  On  the  side  of  the  Philistines,  forth  strode  the 
mighty  Goliath.  He  glistened  in  his  brazen  armor, 
and  brandished  his  great  iron-headed  spear,  till  it 
quivered  like  a  reed.  When  the  giant  spoke,  his 
voice  growled  almost  like  thunder  rolling  overhead. 

6.  He  looked  scornfully  at  David,  and  hardly 
thought  it  worth  his  while  to  lift  up  his  spear  against 
him.  "  Come  hither,"  quoth  the  giant,  "  and  I  will 
feed  the  fowls  with  your  fiesh  !" 

7.  But  little  David  was  not  at  all  abashed.  He 
made  a  bold  answer,  and  told  Goliath  that  he  would 
cut  off  his  head,  and  give  his  enormous  carcass  to  the 
beasts  of  the  field.  This  threat  so  enraged  the  giant^ 
that  he  put  himself  in  motion  to  slay  David. 

8.  The  young  man  ran  forward    to    meet    Goliath, 

3-9.  Tell  the  story  of  David  and  Goliath. 


66 


UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


and  as  lie  ran  lie  took  a  smooth  stone  from  liij5  scrip, 
and  placed  it  in  liis  sling.  When  at  a  proper  distance, 
he  whirled  the  sling,  and  discharged  the  stone.  It 
went  whizzing  through  the  air,  and  hit  Goliath  right 
in  the  centre  of  the  forehead,  :■ 


DAVID  A>'D   GOLIATH. 


9.  The  stone  penetrated  to  the  brain  ;  and  down  the 
giant  fell  at  full  length  upon  the  field,  with  his  brazen 
armor  clanging  around  him.  David  then  cuj  off  Goli- 
ath's head  with  his  own  sword.  The  Philistines  were 
affrighted  at  their  champion's  overthrow,  and  fled. 

10.  The  men  of  Israel  pursued  them,  and   made  a 


What  effect  had  the  death  of  GoUath  upon  the  Phihstines? 


A.SIA.  67 

prodigious  slaughter.  David  returned  from  tlie  battle 
carrying  the  grim  and  grisly  head  of  Goliath  by  the 
hair.  The  Hebrew  women  came  forth  to  meet  him, 
danced  around  him,  and  sang  triumphant  anthems  in 
his  praise. 


CHAPTER  XVIII.— Asia  Continued. 
The  Reign  of  David. —  Wisdom  of  Solomon, 

1.  David  had  won  so  much  renown  by  his  victory 
over  Goliath  that  Saul  became  envious  of  him,  and 
often  endeavored  to  kill  him.  But  Jonathan,  the  son 
of  Saul,  loved  David  better  than  a  brother. 

2.  During  the  lifetime  of  Saul,  David  was  forced  to 
live  in  exile.  But  after  a  reign  of  about  twenty-four 
years,  king  Saul  was  slain  on  the  mountains  of  Gilboa, 
in  a  disastrous  battle  with  the  Philistines.  Jonathan 
was  likewise  killed. 

3.  When  David  heard  of  these  sad  events,  he  ex- 
pressed his  sorrow  by  wee]3ing,  and  rending  his  gar- 

10.  Wliat  honors  were  paid  to  David? 

Chapter  XVII.— 1.  Wliy  was  Saul  envious  of  David?  What  did  Saul  do? 
What  of  Jonathan?  2.  How  was  David  ob  iged  to  live?  What  of  the  death  of 
Saul  and  Jonathan  ?     3.  What  effect  had  these  events  upon  David  ? 


68  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

ments.  Yet  lie  gained  a  kingdom  by  tlie  deatli  of 
Saul  and  Jonathan,  for  the  men  of  Judah  first  elected 
him  to  reign  over  them,  and  afterward  the  whole  peo- 
ple of  Israel  chose  him  for  their  king. 

4.  A  great  part  of  David's  life  was  spent  in  war. 
He  gained  many  victories,  and  enjoyed  high  renown 
as  a  gallant  leader.  He  conquered  many  of  the  sur- 
rounding nations,  and  raised  his  kingdom  to  a  higher 
pitch  of  power  than  it  ever  enjoyed  before  or  afterward. 
But  he  also  w^on  a  peaceful  kind  of  fame,  which  will 
last  while  the  world  endures,  and  be  remembered 
through  eternity. 

5.  He  won  it  by  his  heavenly  poesy ;  for  king  David 
was  the  sweet  Psalmist  of  Israel ;  and  in  all  the  ages 
since  he  lived  his  psalms  have  been  sung  to  the  praise 
of  the  Lord.  It  is  now  about  three  thousand  years 
since  David  died,  yet  to  this  hour  every  pious  heaii:. 
loves  to  commune  with  God  in  the  beautiful  words  of 
this  inspired  man. 

6.  When  David  had  reigned  forty  years,  and  was 
grown  a  very  old  man,  he  died  in  his  palace  at  Jerusa- 
lem.    The  kingdom  was  inherited  by  his  son  Solomon. 

Who  became  king  of  Israel  after  the  death  of  Saul?  4.  How  was  a  great  part 
of  David's  life  spent  ?  To  what  condition  did  he  bring  the  Hebrew  nation  ?  5. 
What  better  feme  did  he  acquire  than  that  of  a  conqueror?  What  can  you  say  o( 
the  Psalms  ?  How  long  since  David  lived?  6.  How  long  did  David  reign?  Who 
succeeded  him  ? 


ASIA.  6§ 

This  prince  was  very  young  when  he  ascended  the 
throne,  but  he  was  wiser  in  his  youth  than  in  his  riper 
years. 

7.  Not  long  after  he  became  king,  two  women  came 
into  his  presence  bringing  a  little  child.  Each  of  the 
women  claimed  the  child  as  her  own,  and  they  quar- 
relled violently,  as  if  they  would  have  torn  the  poor 
babe  asunder.  It  seemed  impossible  to  find  out  whose 
the  child  really  was. 

8.  "  Bring  hither  a  sword,"  said  king  Solomon ;  and 
immediately  one  of  the  attendants  brought  a  sharp 
sword.  "  Now,"  continued  Solomon,  "  that  I  may  not 
wrong  either  of  these  women,  the  thing  in  dispute  shall 
be  equally  divided  between  them.  Cut  the  child  in 
twain,  and  let  each  take  half" 

9.  But  when  the  real  mother  saw  the  keen  sword 
glittering  over  her  poor  babe,  she  gave  a  scream  of 
agony.  "  Do  not  slay  the  child ! "  she  cried.  "  Give  it 
to  this  wicked  woman.  Only  let  it  live,  and  she  may 
be  its  mother !" 

10.  But  the  other  woman  showed  no  pity  for  the 
child.  "  I  ask  no  more  than  my  just  rights,"  she 
said.  "  Cat  the  child  in  two  !  I  will  be  content  with 
half."     Now  Solomon  had  watched  the  conduct  of  the 


k 


What  of  Solomon?     t-lO.  Tell  the  story  of  the  child 


70  UNIYERSAL  HISTORY. 

two  women,  and  lie  knew  the  true  mother  by  her  ten- 
derness for  the  poor  babe.  "  Give  the  child  alive  to 
her  who  would  not  have  it  slain,"  he  said.  "  She  is  its 
mother." 


CHAPTEE   XIX.— Asia    Continued. 
building  of  tne  Tcvi^de. —  Visit  of  the  Queen  of  Sheha. 

1.  King  David,  as  I  before  told  you,  had  increased 
the  power  and  wealth  of  the  Hebrew  nation,  so  that  it 
had  become  a  great  kingdom.  Silver  and  gold  were 
very  abundant  in  the  country,  and  king  David  had 
made  preparation  for  the  building  of  a  splendid  temple 
in  Jerusalem,  his  capital,  to  be  dedicated  to  the  wor- 
ship of  the  true  God. 

2.  The  chief  event  of  Solomon's  life  was  the  build- 
ing of  this  temple.  This  was  done  by  the  special 
command  of  the  Lord.  It  was  now  four  hundred  and 
eighty  years  since  the  Israelites  had  come  out  of  Egypt ; 
and  in  all  that  time  there  had  been  no  edifice  erected 
to  the  worship  of  God. 

Chapter  XIX. — 1.  What  had  David  done?  What  of  silver  and  gold  among  the 
Hebrews  ?  2,  What  was  tho  chief  event  of  Solomon's  reign  ?  By  whose  com- 
mand was  the  temple  built  ? 


ASIA.  71 

3.  Solomon  made  an  agreement  witli  Hiram,  king  of 
Tyre,  tliat  lie  would  give  him  a  yearly  supply  of  wheat 
and  oil,  in  exchange  for  cedar  and  fir.  Tyre  was  a 
great  commercial  city  on  the  coast  of  the  Mediterranean 
Sea,  to  the  northward  of  Jerusalem.  It  belonged  to 
Phoenicia,  a  country  which  has  the  credit  of  having 
first  engaged  in  commerce. 

4.  With  the  timber  which  he  procured  from  Tyre, 
and  with  a  large  quantity  of  hewn  stone,  Solomon 
began  to  build  the  temple.  The  front  of  this  building 
was  one  hundred  and  twenty  feet  long,  thirty-five  feet 
broad,  and  forty-five  feet  high.  It  extended  around  a 
large  square,  and  with  the  various  buildings  attached 
to  it,  covered  twenty  acres  of  ground. 

5.  But  no  pen  can  describe  the  richness  and  splendor 
of  this  sacred  edifice.  The  interior  was  constructed  of 
the  most  costly  kinds  of  wood ;  and  the  walls  were 
carved  with  figures  of  cherubim  and  other  beautiful 
devices.  The  walls  and  floors  were  partly  overlaid 
with  gold. 

6.  Seven  years  were  employed  in  building  this  tem- 
ple.    It  was  finished  about  three  thousand  years  after 

3.  What  agreement  did  Solomon  make  with  Hiram,  king  of  Tyre  ?  Where  was 
Tyre  ?  What  of  Pha3nicia  ?  4.  With  what  did  Solomon  begin  to  build  the  tem- 
ple ?  Where  was  the  temple  of  Solom.on  built?  Ans.  On  a  hill  in  Jerusalem 
called  Mount  Moriah,  5.  Describe  the  interior  of  the  temple.  6.  How  long  were 
they  in  building  the  temple?  How  long  after  the  creation  was  the  temple  finished? 


72  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

the  creation,  and  one  thousand  years  before  tlie  birtli 
of  Christ.  When  it  was  completed,  Solomon  assem- 
bled all  the  chiefs,  and  elders,  and  great  men  of  Israel, 
in  order  to  dedicate  it.  The  priests  brought  the  ark, 
containing  the  two  tables  of  stone  which  God  had 
given  to  Moses  more  than  four  centuries  before. 

7.  The  ark  was  now  placed  in  the  holiest  part  of  the 
temple.  It  rested  between  the  broad  wings  of  two 
cherubim  that  were  overlaid  with  gold.  No  sooner 
was  the  ark  set  in  its  place  than  a  cloud  issued  forth 
and  filled  the  temple.  This  was  a  token  that  the  Lord 
was  there. 

8.  After  the  building  of  the  temple,  Solomon  be- 
came so  renowned  for  his  wisdom  and  magnificence, 
that  the  queen  of  Sheba  came  from  her  own  dominions 
to  visit  him.  Her  country  is  supposed  to  have  been  in 
Africa,  to  the  south  of  Egypt. 

9.  When  she  came  to  Jerusalem,  she  beheld  Solomon 
seated  on  a  great  throne  of  ivory,  overlaid  with  pure 
gold.  His  feet  rested  on  a  golden  footstool  There 
were  lions  of  gold  about  the  throne.  The  king  had  a 
majestic  look,  and  the  queen  of  Sheba  was  astonished 
at  his  grandeur ;  but  Avhen  they  had  talked  together, 

How  long  before  Christ  ?  How  long  ago  ?  7.  Describe  the  dedication  of  the 
temple.  8.  What  of  the  queen  of  Sheba?  Where  is  it  supposed  she  came  from  ? 
9.  Describe  her  visit  to  Solomon. 


ASIA.  T3 

she  admired  liis  wisdom  even  more  tlian  liis  magnifi- 
cence. She  acknowledged  that  the  half  of  his  great- 
ness had  not  been  told  her. 

10.  If  the  queen  of  Sheba  could  have  seen  Solomon 
a  few  yaars  afterward,  she  would  have  beheld  a  lament- 
able change.  He  turned  from  the  true  God,  and 
became  an  idolater.  This  wise  and  risrhteous  kin 2:, 
who  had  built  the  sacred  temple,  now  grew  so  wicked 
that  he  built  high  places  for  the  worship  of  heathen 
deities. 

11.  For  this  reason  God  determined  to  take  away 
the  chief  part  of  the-  kingdom  from  his  descendants. 
Accordingly,  when  Solomon  was  dead,  ten  of  the  tribes 
of  Israel  revolted  against  his  son  Rehoboam. 


CHAPTER  XX.— Asia  Continued. 

The  Decline  of  the  Jewish  Nation. 

1.  In"  consequence  of  the  revolt  of  the  ten  tribe?, 
Rehoboam  reigned  only  over  the  two  tribes  of  Judah 

10.  What  change  took  place  ia  Solomon?     11.  What  evil  followed  the  idolatry 
of  Solomon  ? 

Chapter  XX. — 1.  What  of  Rehoboam  ? 


74  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

and  Benjamin,  these  being  called  ihe  kingdom  of  Ju- 
dah.  Besides  the  loss  of  so  large  a  part  of  his  king- 
dom, lie  suffered  other  misfortunes.  Shishak,  king  of 
Egypt,  made  war  against  him,  and  took  Jerusalem. 
He  carried  away  the  treasures  of  the  temple  and  of  the 
palace. 

2.  The  other  ten  tribes  of  Israel,  which  had  revolted 
from  Behoboam,  were  thenceforward  governed  by  kings 
of  theii'  own,  the  country  being  called  the  kingdom  of 
Israel.  Most  of  these  kings  were  wicked  men  and 
idolaters.  Their  palace  and  seat  of  government  was  in 
the  city  of  Samaria. 

3.  When  the  kingdom  of  Israel  had  been  separated 
from  that  of  Judah  about  two  hundred  and  fifty  years, 
it  was  conquered  by  Salmaneser,  king  of  Assyria.  He 
made  slaves  of  the  Israelites,  and  carried  therii  to  his 
own  country,  and  few  of  them  ever  returned  to  the 
land  of  Canaan. 

4.  The  people  of  the  two  tribes  of  Judah  and  Ben- 
jamin continued  to  reside  in  Canaan.  They  were  now 
called  Jews.  The  royal  palace  and  seat  of  government 
were  at  Jerusalem.     Some  of  the  Jewish  kings  were 

Over  whom  did  he  reign  ?  What  of  Shishak  ?  2.  How  was  the  kingdom  of 
Israel  governed?  What  of  the  kings  of  Israel  ?  Where  did  these  kings  dwell? 
3,  What  of  Salmaneser?  4.  What  were  the  people  of  Judah  now  called?  Where 
was  the  seat  of  government  ?    What  of  the  kings  of  Judah  ? 


ASIA.  75 

pious  men,  but  most  of  them  offended  God  by  tteir 
sinfulness  and  idolatry. 

5.  The  whole  nation  of  the  Jews  were  perverse,  and 
underwent  many  severe  inflictions  from  the  wrath  of 
God.  In  the  year  606  B.  C,  Nebuchadnezzar,  king  of 
Babylon,  took  Jerusalem.  He  destroyed  the  temple, 
and  carried  the  principal  people  captive  to  Babylon. 

6.  Afterward,  when  Zedekiah  was  king,  Jerusalem 
was  again  besieged  and  taken  by  Nebuzaradan,  a  gen- 
eral under  Nebuchadnezzar.  He  broke  down  the  walls 
of  the  city,  and  left  nothing  standing  that  could  be 
destroyed.  The  Jews  remained  captive  in  Babylon 
seventy  years. 

7.  When  Babylon  was  taken  by  Cyrus,  king  of  Per- 
sia, the  Jews  were  permitted  to  return  to  their  own 
country.  They  rebuilt  the  temple,  and  resumed  their 
ancient  manner  of  worship.  Till  the  time  of  Alexan- 
der the  Great,  about  330  B.  C,  the  nation  was  depend- 
ent on  the  kinoes  of  Persia. 

8.  It  is  said  that  Alexander  the  Great  intended  to 
take  Jerusalem.  But  as  he  advanced  with  his  army, 
the  high  priest  came  forth  to  meet  him,  in  his  robes  of 

5.  What  of  the  Jewish  nation?  What  of  Nebuchadnezzar?  6.  What  of  Ne- 
buzaradan  ?  How  long  did  the  Jews  remain  captive  in  Babylon?  7.  What  of 
Cyrus?  What  did  the  Jews  do  on  their  return  from  captivity?  How  long  vvas 
the  nation  dependent  upon  Persia?     What  of  Alexander  the  Great? 


76  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

office,  at  the  liead  of  a  long  train  of  Levites  and  people. 
Alexander  was  so  struck  witli  their  appearance,  that 
he  agreed  to  spare  the  city. 

9.  In  the  course  of  the  next  two  centuries,  the  Egyp- 
tians invaded  the  Jewish  kingdom,  and  afterward  the 
Syrians  reduced  the  inhabitants  to  bondage.  They 
suffered  great  calamities  from  the  tyranny  of  these 
conquerors. 

10.  But  in  the  year  IGG  before  the  Christian  era, 
Judas  Maccabseus,  a  valiant  Jewish  leader,  drove  the 
Syrians  out  of  the  country.  When  the  king  of  Syria 
heard  of  it,  he  took  an  oath  that  he  would  destroy  the 
whole  Jewish  nation.  But  as  he  was  hastening  to  Je- 
rusalem, he  was  killed  by  a  fall  from  his  chariot. 

11.  The  descendants  of  Judas  Maccabseus  afterward 
assumed  royal  authority,  and  became  kings  of  the 
Jews.  In  less  than  a  century,  however,  the  country 
was  subdued  ]:)y  Pompey,  a  celel^rated  Roman  general. 
He  conferred  the  government  on  Antipater,  a  native  of 
Edom. 

12.  In  the  year  37  before  the  Christian  era,  the 
Roman  senate  decreed  that  Herod,  the  son  of  Antipa- 

9.  "What  happened  after  the  time  of  Alexander?  10.  What  of  Judas  Maccab;c- 
us?  What  of  the  kini;-  (.f  >vii,i  ?  11.  Wlmt  of  the  de=ceiidants  of  Judas  Macca- 
b:cus?  What  of  Pompey  ?  Whom  did  he  appoint  to  proveru  Judah  ?  12.  When 
did  tho  Roman  senate  appoint  Iferud  king  of  tlie  Jews? 


ASIA.  77' 

ter,  sliould  be  king  of  tlie  JewSc  It  was  this  Herod  wlio 
commanded  tliat  all  the  young  cliildren  of  Bethleliem 
should  be  slain,  in  order  tliat  tbe  infant  Jesus  migbt 
not  survive.  The  period  of  that  blessed  infant's  birth 
was  now  at  hand. 


CITAPTEE  XXI.— Asia  Contintjed. 
The  Hebrew  Projphets. 

1.  I  MUST  now  glance  backward,  and  say  a  few 
words  respecting  a  class  of  men  who  had  appeared  at 
various  times  among  the  Hebrews.  These  men  were 
called  prophets.  They  held  intercourse  with  God,  and 
he  gave  them  the  knowledge  of  things  that  were  to 
happen  in  future  years. 

2.  One  of  the  most  remarkable  of  these  prophets 
was  named  Elijah.  Many  wonderful  things  are  told  of 
him.  While  he  was  dwelling  in  a  solitary  place,  the 
ravens  brought  him  food.  He  restored  the  son  of  a 
poor  widow  from  death  to  life.  ) 

3.  He  called  down  God's  vengeance  upon  the  wicked 

What  did  Herod  order?     What  was  liis  motive? 

Chapter  XXL— 1.  What  of  the  prophets?     2-1.  Wliat  is  told  of  Elijah? 


78  •  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

king  Aliab,  and  foretold  that  the  dogs  should  eat  the 
painted  Jezebel,  his  queen.  And  all  this  was  so.  He 
caused  fire  to  come  down  from  heaven,  and  consume 
three  captains,  with  their  soldiers.  He  divided  the 
river  Jordan,  by  smiting  it  with  his  mantle,  and  passed 
over  on  dry  ground. 

4.  At  last,  when  his  mission  on  earth  was  ended, 
there  came  a  chariot  and  horses  of  fire,  and  Elijah  was 
borne  by  a  whirlwind  up  to  heaven. 

5.  Elijah's  mantle  fell  from  the  fiery  chariot.  It  was 
caught  up  by  a  person  named  Elisha,  and  he  likewise 
became  a  very  celebrated  prophet.  He  cursed  some 
little  children  because  they  laughed  at  his  bald  head ; 
and  soon  afterward  two  she-bears  tore  forty  and  two  of 
them  in  pieces. 

6.  When  Elisha  was  dead,  and  had  lain  many  months 
in  his  sepulchre,  another  dead  man  happened  to  be 
let  down  into  the  same  darksome  place.  But  when  the 
corpse  touched  the  hallowed  bones  of  the  prophet 
Elisha,  it  immediately  revived,  and  became  a  living 
man  ao:ain. 

7.  Jonah  was  another  prophet.  A  whale  swallowed 
him,  and  kept  him  three  days  in  the  depths  of  the 
ocean,  and  then  vomited  him  safely  on  dry  land.     Isa- 

5,  6.  What  of  Elisha  ?     T.  What  of  Jonah  ?     Isaiah? 


ASIA.  79 

iali  was  also  a  propliet.  He  foretold  many  terrible 
calamities  tliat  were  to  befall  Israel  and  Judah,  and  the 
surrounding  nation^.  Jeremiali  bewailed  in  plaintive 
accents  tlie  future  sins  and  misfoi-tunes  of  God's  people. 

8.  Tlie  i3ropliet  Daniel  foretold  tlie  downfall  of  Bel- 
sLazzar,  king  of  Babylon.  He  was  afterward  cast  into 
a  den  of  lions  in  Babylon,  at  tlie  command  of  king 
Darius.  The  next  morning  the  king  looked  clown  into 
the  den,  and  tliere  was  Daniel,  alive  and  well. 

9.  King  Darius  then  ordered  Daniel  to  be  drawn 
out  of  the  den,  and  liis  false  accusers  to  be  thro^vn  into 
it.  The  moment  that  these  wicked  persons  touched 
the  bottom,  the  lions  sprang  forward  and  tore  them 
limb  from  limb. 

10.  Numerous  other  prophets  appeared  at  various 
times,  and  most,  of  them  performed  such  wonderful 
works  that  there  could  be  no  doubt  of  their  possessing 
power  from  on  high.  Now  it  was  remarked  that  all 
these  prophets,  or  nearly  all,  spoke  of  a  King,  or  Buler, 
or  other  illustrious  Personage,  who  was  to  appear 
among  the  Jews. 

11.  Although  they  foretold  the  most  dreadful  calam-| 
ities  to  the  people,  still  there  was  this  one  thing  to 

Jeremiah?  8,9.  What  of  Daniel  ?  10.  What  can  you  say  of  the  prophets?  Of 
What  did  the  prophets  all  speak  ?  11.  What  cheering  prospect  did  the  prophets 
hold  out  to  the  Jews  ? 


80  UNIYERSAL  HISTORY. 

comfort  them.  A  descendant  of  king  David  was  to 
renew  the  glory  of  the  Jewish  race,  and  establish  his 
sway  over  the  whole  world. 

^  12.  This  great  event  w^as  expected  to  happen  in 
about  fifteen  hundred  years  after  Moses  led  the  Israel- 
ites out  of  Egypt.  And  it  did  then  happen.  When 
the  appointed  period  had  elapsed,  there  appeared  a  star 
in  a  certain  quarter  of  the  heavens. 

13.  Three  wise  men  from  the  east  beheld  the  star, 
and  were  guided  by  it  to  a  stable  in  the  little  village  of 
Bethlehem.  It  was  about  five  miles  from  Jerusalem. 
There,  in  a  manger,  lay  the  infant  Jesus ! 

12.  About  how  long  after  Moses  did  Christ  appear?     What  of  a  star  in  the 
east  ?     13.  What  of  Bethlehem  ?    Whom  did  the  wise  men  find  in  a  manger? 


ASIA. 


81 


THE  CRUCIFIXION. 


CHAPTER  XXIL— Asia  Continued. 
Crucijixion  of  the  Saviour. — Destruction  of  tTerusalein, 

1.  The  greatest  event,  not  only  in  tlie  history  of  the 
Jews,  but  in  the  history  of  the  world,  had  now  taken 
^  place.  This  was  the  coming  of  the  Saviour.  But  my 
readers  must  not  expect  me  to  relate  the  whole  story 
of  this  Divine  Personage  in  the  little  book  which  I  am 
now  writing. 

Chapter  XXII. — 1.  What  is  the  greatest  event  that  has  occurred  on  the 
globe?  How  long  since  ChrivSt  was  born?  How  long  after  the  creation  did 
Christ  appear  ?     Axs.  Four  thousand  and  four  years. 


82  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

2.  The  Jews  rejected  him.  They  had  been  looking 
for  an  earthly  potentate ;  and  when  they  beheld  the 
meek  and  lowly  Jesus,  they  despised  and  hated  him. 
From  the  time  that  he  proclaimed  himself  the  Messiah, 
they  sought  to  take  his  life. 

3.  They  brought  him  before  the  judgment-seat  of 
Pontius  Pilate,  who  was  then  the  Roman  governor  of 
Judea.  Pilate  sentenced  him  to  death,  and  the  Saviour 
of  the  world  was  crucified  between  two  thieves.  He 
however  rose  from  the  dead,  after  being  buried  three 
days,  and  ascended  into  heaven ! 

4.  Such  is  the  brief  story  of  Jesus  Christ.  After 
his  death,  his  apostles  proceeded  to  preach  his  gospel 
throughout  the  land  of  Canaan  and  other  countries. 
Of  all  the  apostles,  Paul  was  the  most  active  and  suc- 
cessful. 

5.  He  visited  various  parts  of  Palestine,  Syria,  Asia 
Minor,  and  Greece.  At  length  he  was  sent  as  a  pris- 
oner to  Rome,  to  be  tried  by  the  emperor.  He  went 
with  other  prisoners  in  a  small  vessel  nearly  the  wliole 
leno^th  of  the  Mediterranean  Sea. 

6.  In  the  course  of  the  voyage,  the  vessel  was 
-wrecked  upon  the  island  of  Malta  during  a  terrible 

2.  How  did  the  Jews  receive  Christ?  3.  What  of  Pilate?  The  crucifixion? 
4.  Wiiat  did  Christ's  apostles  do  after  his  death?  What  of  Paul?  5.  What  coun- 
tries did  Paul  visit?     Where  was  Le  at  length  sent? 


ASIA.  83 

gale.  Soon  after  this  Paul  proceeded  on  Ills  voyage, 
and  reached  Rome  sixty-one  years  after  Christ. 
Here  he  remained  in  prison  a  long  time;  but  many 
persons  came  to  visit  him,  and  he  preached  to  them  all 
the  doctrines  of  Christianity.  Paul  was  at  length  re- 
leased, but  it  is  believed  that  he  was  beheaded  by 
order  of  the  emperor  Nero. 

7.  The  apostle  had  now  sown  the  seeds  of  the  gospel 
in  many  countries,  and  the  fruits  began  to  appear. 
Nearly  all  the  civilized  world  were  worshippers  of  the 
Roman  gods;  but  this  heathen  faith  gradually  gave 
way  before  the  gospel,  and  in  process  of  time,  Chris- 
tianity was  diffused  over  nearly  the  whole  of  Europe. 

8.  Long  before  the  crucifixion  of  Christ,  the  Jews 
had  become  completely  subject  to  the  Roman  power. 
But  about  forty  years  after  his  death,  they  rebelled 
aixainst  their  masters. 

9.  Titus,  the  Roman  general,  immediately  marched 
to  besiege  Jerusalem.  A  most  dreadful  war  ensued. 
Tlie  inhabitants  were  shut  up  in  the  city,  and  soon 
were  greatly  in  want  of  food.  Hunger  compelled  one 
of  the  Jewish  women  to  devour  her  own  child.     When 

6.  Where  was  Paul's  vessel  wrecked  ?  When  did  he  arrive  at  Rome  ?  To 
whom  did  he  preach  Christianitj' ?  What  is  supposed  to  have  been  his  fate?  7. 
What  had  the  apostles  done?  What  of  the  worship  of  heathen  deities?  What  of 
Christianity?  8.  To  whom  had  the  Jews  been  long  subject?  What  occurred 
forty  years  after  the  death  of  Clu-ist  ?     9.  What  of  Titus  ? 


84  •     UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

Titus  heard  of  it,  lie  was  so  shocked  tliat  lie  vowed 
the  destruction  of  the  whole  Jewish  race,  and  more 
than  a  hundred  thousand  persons  perished  during  this 
frightful  siege ! 

10.  At  length  the  city  was  taken  in  the  night-time 
and  set  on  fire.  The  flames  caught  the  temple.  The 
hills  on  which  Jerusalem  is  situated  were  all  blazing 
like  so  many  volcanoes.  The  blood  of  the  slaughtered 
inhabitants  hissed  upon  the  burning  brands. 

11.  Ninety-seven  thousand  Jews  were  taken  prison- 
ers. Some  were  sold  as  slaves.  The  conquerors  ex- 
posed others  to  be  torn  in  pieces  by  wild  beasts.  A 
few  people  remained  in  Jerusalem,  and  partly  rebuilt 
the  city.  But  it  was  again  destroyed  by  a  Roman  em- 
peror named  Adrian.  He  levelled  the  walls  and  houses 
with  the  earth,  and  sowed  the  ground  with  salt. 

12.  The  Jews  were  scattered  all  over  the  world. 
This  catastroj^he  had  long  been  prophesied.  There  are 
now  between  three  and  four  millions  of  them  in  difter- 
ent  parts  of  the  earth.  They  still  keep  theii-  religion, 
and  many  of  their  old  customs.  Jerusalem  has  been 
partially  restored,  but  it  is  now  very  difierent  from 
what  it  was  in  the  time  of  our  Saviour. 

10, 11.  Describe  tlie  f^iege  of  Jerusalem.  What  of  Adrian?  12.  "What  became  of 
the  Jews?  What  event  had  been  foretold  by  the  prophets?  What  of  Jerusalem 
at  the  present  day  ? 


ASIA. 


CHAPTER  XXIII.— Asia  Continued. 
Cyrus  conquers  Babylon. — His  Death. 

1.  I^  a  former  part  of  tMs  book  I  liave  told  the  story 
of  Assyria,  the  first  great  empire  of  ancient  times.  It 
was  situated,  as  you  remember,  on  the  borders  of  the 
rivers  Tigris  and  Euphrates.  In  this  region  the  cli- 
mate is  warm,  and  the  soil  exceedingly  fruitful.  Here 
the  human  race  seemed  to  multiply  in  the  most  won- 
derful manner. 

2.  Thus  many  nations  soon  sprang  up  and  increased, 
till  the  whole  surrounding  country  was  filled  with  mul- 
titudes of  people,  Assyria  at  one  time  extended  its 
dominion  over  most  of  these  nations ;  but  at  length 
Persia  became  a  powerful  monarchy,  and  not  only 
Assyria,  but  a  great  many  other  nations  became  sub- 
ject to  it. 

3.  The  first  inhabitants  of  Persia  were  descended 
from  Elam,  the  eldest  son  of  Shem.  They  were  there- 
fore  called   Elamites.     Very  little  is  known  of  their 

Chapter  XXIII. — 1.  What  was  the  first  great  empire  of  the  world?  Where 
was  Assyria  situated?  Chinate  of  this  region  ?  Soil?  The  human  race?  2.  In- 
crease of  mankind?  What  of  Assyria?  Persia?  3.  Wliat  of  the  first  inhabit- 
ants of  Persia  ? 


86  UNIYERSAL  HISTORY. 

history  till  about  eighteen  centuries  after  the  deluge. 
Cyrus,  a  great  conqueror,  then  ascended  the  throne  of 
Persia.  Some  historians  have  spoken  of  Cyrus  as  a 
wise  and  excellent  monarch,  but  it  appears  probable 
that  he  was  no  better  than  most  other  conquerors. 

4.  Cyrus  continued  to  extend  his  empire  in  all  direc- 
tions. Media,  Parthia,  Mesopotamia,  Armenia,  Syria, 
Canaan,  and  parts  of  Arabia,  were  subdued,  and  made 
portions  of  his  kingdom.  One  of  his  chief  exploits 
was  the  taking  of  the  city  of  Babylon,  the  capital  of 
Babylonia.  The  walls  of  this  great  city  were  so  thick 
and  high,  that  it  would  have  been  impossible  for  an 
enemy  either  to  break  them  down,  or  to  climb  over 
them.  It  was  therefore  a  very  difficult  matter  to  take 
this  strong  place. 

5.  Now  the  channel  of  the  river  Euphrates  ran  di- 
rectly through  the  centre  of  Babylon.  Cyrus  caused 
deep  ditches  to  be  dug  around  the  city,  so  that  he 
could  draw  off  all  the  water  of  the  river,  and  leave 
the  channel  dry.  When  the  ditches  were  completed, 
he  waited  for  a  proper  time  to  draw  off  the  river. 

6.  On  a  certain  night,  Belshazzar,  king  of  Babylon, 
gave  a  great  festival.     His  guards,  and  all  the  inhabi- 

At  what  time  did  Cyrus  ascend  the  throne  of  Persia  ?  "What  of  Persia  before 
the  time  o^  Cyrus?  Character  of  Cyrus ?  4.  What  were  some  of  the  countries 
conquered  by  Cyrus  ?     5-7.  Describe  the  taking  of  Babylon. 


•ASIA.  87 

tants,  were  eating  and  drinking,  tliouglitless  of  the 
enemy  on  tlie  outside  of  their  walls.  The  Persians 
seized  this  opportunity  to  throw  open  the  dams  of  the 
ditches. 

7.  The  whole  water  of  the  Euphrates  immediately 
flowed  into  them.  Cyrus  put  himself  at  the  head  of 
the  Persian  army ;  and  where  the  mighty  river  had  so 
lately  rushed  along,  there  were  now  the  trampling  foot- 
steps of  an  innumerable  host.  Thus  the  Persian  troops 
entered  the  city. 

8.  The  guards  of  the  royal  palace  were  surprised  and 
slain.  Belshazzar  heard  the  clash  of  arms,  and  the 
shrieks  of  dying  men,  as  he  sat  with  his  nobles  in  the 
banquet-hall.  But  it  was  too  late  to  escape.  They 
were  all  slaughtered,  and  their  blood  was  mingled  with 
the  wine  of  the  festival.  Thus  Babylon  was  taken, 
and  Babylonia  became  a  part  of  Persia. 

9.  Cyrus  afterward  marched  against  the  Scythians, 
a  brave  nation  who  dwelt  to  the  north-east  of  the  Cas- 
pian Sea.  But  Tomyris,  their  queen,  collected  an  army, 
and  fought  a  bloody  battle  with  the  Persians.  Cyrus 
was  defeated  and  taken  prisoner.  The  son  of  the 
Scythian  queen  had  been  killed  in  the  battle,  and  she 


8.  What  event  terminated  the  Assyrian  empire  ?     9.  Where  did  the  Scythians 
live?     Their  character  ?     What  of  Tomyris? 

5 


88  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

resolved  to  avenge  his  death.  She  ordered  her  atten- 
dants to  kill  Cyrus,  which  was  done  in  a  horrible 
manner. 


CHAPTER  XXIY.— Asia  Continued. 
Heign  of  Ca7)ibyses. 

1.  Cambyses,  the  son  of  Cyrus,  seems  to  have  been 
a  worse  man  than  his  father.  He  was  addicted  to 
drinking  wine ;  and  Prexaspes,  a  favorite  courtier, 
hinted  to  him  that  he  injured  his  health  and  faculties 
by  this  practice.  When  Prexaspes  had  done  speaking, 
Ca,mbyses  called  for  wine,  and  drank  off  several  large 
goblets.  "  Now  we  shall  see,"  said  he,  "  whether  the 
wine  has  dimmed  my  sight,  or  rendered  my  hand  un- 
steady !" 

2.  He  then  called  for  a  bow  and  arrow,  and  ordered 
the  son  of  Prexaspes  to  stand  at  the  farther  end  of  the 
hall.  The  boy  did  so ;  and  while  his  father  looked 
on,  the  cruel  Cambyses  took  deliberate  aim  at  the  poor 
child,  and  shot  an  arrow  directly  through  his  heart. 

3.  I  am  very  sorry,  my  dear  young  reader,  to  tell 
you  such  horrible  stories  as  these.     I  would  not  tell 

The  death  of  Cyrus  ? 

CiiAPTEU  XXIV. — 1,  2.  What  of  Cambyses?    What  story  can  you  tell  of  him? 


ASIA.  89 

tliem  but  that  they  are  true,  and  they  may  teach  us 
good  and  useful  lessons.  They  may  show  us  how 
wicked  and  miserable  even  kings  may  be. 

4.  But  I  must  go  on  with  my  story.  Cambyses 
made  war  against  the  Egyptians.  At  the  siege  of  one 
of  their  cities,  he  contrived  a  very  cunning  method  to 
take  the  place.  The  Egyptians  believed  that  cats  and 
dogs  were  sacred,  and  they  worshipped  them  as  gods. 
This  foolish  superstition  induced  Cambyses  to  collect 
all  the  cats  and  dogs  in  the  country,  and  place  them  in 
front  of  his  army. 

5.  The  Egyptians  were  afraid  to  discharge  their 
arrows,  lest  they  should  kill  some  of  these  divine 
animals.  The  Persians  therefore  marched  onward, 
with  the  dogs  barking  and  the  cats  mewing  before 
them,  and  the  city  was  taken  without  the  slightest 
resistance. 

6.  The  chief  deity  of  the  Egyptians  was  a  great  bull, 
to  whom  they  had  given  the  name  of  Apis.  Camby- 
ses killed  this  holy  bull,  and  bestowed  the  flesh  on 
some  of  his  soldiers  for  dinner.  Soon  afterward,  to  the 
great  joy  of  the  Egyptians,  he  killed  himself  accident- 
ally with  his  own  sword. 

3.  What  lessons  may  we  learn  from  those  painful  tales  of  ancient  kings  ?  4,  5. 
How  did  Cambyses  capture  an  Egyptian  city?  6.  What  of  the  Egyptian  god 
Apis?    How  was  Cambyses  slahi ? 


90  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


CHAPTER  XXY.— Asia  Continued. 
Expedition  of  JCerxes  into  Greece. 

1.  Another  king  of  the  Persians  was  named  Darius. 
He  was  likewise  a  cruel  tyrant.  When  he  was  going 
on  an  expedition  against  the  Scythians,  he  compelled 
an  old  man's  thiee  sons  to  join  his  army.  These  were 
all  the  children  the  old  man  had.  He  came  into  the 
king's  presence,  and  earnestly  entreated  that  one  of  his 
sons  might  be  left  at  home. 

2.  "  I  am  very  poor  and  infirm,"  said  the  old  man. 
"  I  am  unable  to  work.  If  you  take  away  all  my  three 
children,  I  shall  starve  to  death."  "  Indeed,"  answered 
king  Darius  in  a  very  compassionate  tone,  "  then  they 
shall  all  three  remain  with  you !"  Immediately  he  or- 
dered the  three  young  men  to  be  slain,  and  gave  their 
dead  bodies  to  their  poor  old  father. 

3.  While  Darius  was  preparing  to  make  war  on 
Greece,  he  fell  sick  and  died.  His  successor  was  his 
son  Xerxes.  This  monarch  invaded  Greece  with  nearly 
two  millions  of  men  on  land,  and  more  than  half  a 
million  on  board  liis  fleet. 

Chapter  XXV.— 1,  2.  What  of  Darius?    Tell  a  story  of  his  cruelty. 


ASIA.  91 

4.  You  may  well  believe  tliat  a  king  wlio  could 
collect  so  large  an  army  liad  great  wealth  and  power. 
At  this  time  the  Persian  empire  was  of  vast  extent, 
but  still  Xerxes  wished  to  conquer  other  nations.  His 
capital  was  Persepolis,  one  of  the  most  splendid  cities 
that  ever  existed. 

5.  When  Xerxes  arrived  in  Greece,  it  so  happened 
that  a  great  mountain,  called  Mount  Athos,  stood  di- 
rectly in  the  way  he  wished  his  ships  to  sail.  He 
therefore  wrote  a  letter  to  the  mountain,  commanding 
it  to  get  out  of  his  way ;  but  Mount  Athos  would  not 
stir  one  step. 

6.  In  order  to  bring  his  land  forces  from  Asia  into 
Greece,  Xerxes  built  a  bridge  of  boats  across  a  part  of 
the  sea  called  the  Hellespont.  But  the  waves  broke 
the  bridge  in  pieces,  and  Xerxes  commanded  the  sea 
to  be  whipped  for  its  disrespectful  conduct. 

Y.  The  greater  part  of  the  cities  of  Greece  submitted 
to  Xerxes ;  but  Sparta  and  Athens  made  a  stubborn 
resistance.  Though  they  could  muster  but  few  soldiers, 
these  were  far  more  valiant  than  the  Persians. 


3.  Who  was  the  successor  of  Darius?  How  large  was  the  army  of  Xerxes  when 
he  invaded  Greece?  Where  is  Greece ?  Ans.  In  Europe.  How  far  from  Persia ? 
Ans.  About  fifteen  hundred  miles.  In  which  direction  from  Persia?  Ans.  North- 
west. 4.  What  of  the  Persian  empire  in  the  time  of  Xerxes?  What  of  Persepo- 
lis?    5.  What  of  Mount  Athos?    6.  What  of  the  Hellespont?   7.  What  of  Greece? 


92  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

8.  At  Thermopylae,  Xerxes  wislied  to  lead  his  army 
througli  a  narrow  passage  between  a  mountain  and  tlie 
sea.  Leonidas,  king  of  Sparta,  opj^osed  him  with  six 
thousand  men.  Seventy  thousand  Persians  were  slain 
in  the  attempt  to  break  through  the  pass. 

9.  At  last  Leonidas  found  that  the  Persians  would 
not  be  kept  back  any  longer.  He  therefore  sent  away 
all  but  three  hundred  men,  and  with  these  he  remained 
at  the  pass  of  Thermopylae.  The  immense  host  of  the 
Persians  came  onward  like  a  flood ;  and  only  one  sol- 
dier of  the  three  hundred  escaped  to  Sparta  to  tell  that 
the  rest  were  slain. 

10.  But  Xerxes  did  not  long  continue  to  triumph  in 
Greece.  His  fleet  was  defeated  at  Salamis,  and  his 
army  at  Plataea.  In  escaping,  he  was  forced  to  cross 
the  Hellespont  in  a  little  fishing-vessel ;  for  the  sea, 
in  spite  of  being  whipped,  had  again  broken  his  bridge 
of  boats. 

11.  Not  long  after  his  return  to  Persia,  the  proud 
Xerxes  was  murdered  in  his  bed.  This  event  happened 
about  the  year  465  before  Christ.  His  son,  Artaxerxes, 
made  peace  with  the  Greeks. 

12.  The  story  of  Xerxes  may  teach  us  the  folly  of 

8.  What  of  Thermopyhe ?  9.  ^\Tiat  of  Leonidas?  10.  What  of  Salamis?  Phi- 
tiea?  How  did  Xerxes  return  ?  11.  Death  of  Xerxes?  Wheu  did  this  event 
happen?     "Who  succeeded  Xerxes ? 


ASIA.  9B 

ambition.  Had  lie  been  content  witli  staying  at  home 
and  governing  Ms  people  so  as  to  make  them  happy, 
he  might  have  been  happy  himself.  But  having  too 
much,  he  still  strove  to  acquire  more,  and  thus  brought 
misery  upon  himself  and  millions  of  his  fellow  men. 


CHAPTER  XXYI.— Asia  Continued. 
Affairs  of  Persia  till  the  Saracen  Conquest. 

1.  Between  one  and  two  centuries  after  the  death 
of  Xerxes,  that  is,  about  330  years  before  Christ,  Persia 
was  invaded  by  Alexander  the  Great,  king  of  Macedon. 
Darius  the  Third  was  then  king  of  Persia.  Being  de- 
feated by  Alexander,  two  of  his  own  subjects  bound 
him  with  golden  chains  and  put  him  in  a  covered  cart. 

2.  They  intended  to  murder  Darius,  and  get  posses- 
sion of  the  kingdom.  But  Alexander  came  suddenly 
on  the  conspirators,  and  forced  them  to  take  flight. 
As  they  rode  away,  they  discharged  their  darts  at 
Darius,  and  slew  him. 

12.  What  may  the  story  of  Xerxes  teach  us?   How  might  he  have  been  happy? 
Chapter  XXVI. — 1.  When  was  Persia  invaded  by  Alexander  the  Great  ?   Who 
was  then  king  of  Persia?    What  happened  to  Darius?    2.  Haw  was  he  killed? 


94  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

3.  After  this  time  Persia  became  subject  to  tlie  Par- 
tliians,  whose  country  liacl  formerly  been  a  province  of 
the  Persian  empire.  It  continued  under  the  govern- 
ment of  the  Parthian  kings  nearly  five  hundred  years. 
About  the  year  230  after  the  Christian  era,  a  Per- 
sian, named  Artaxares,  excited  a  rebellion  and  made 
himself  king. 

4.  His  descendants  occupied  the  throne  for  many 
generations.  One  of  the  most  distinguished  was  Chos- 
roes  the  Great,  who  lived  about  six  hundred  years 
after  Christ.  He  made  war  against  the  Romans,  and 
ravaged  their  provinces  in  Asia. 

5.  One  of  his  successors  was  likewise  named  Chos- 
roes.  This  hateful  monster  caused  his  own  father  to 
be  beaten  to  death.  But  Heaven  punished  him  by  the 
wickedness  of  his  eldest  son,  whose  name  was  Siroes. 
He  dethroned  his  father,  and  murdered  all  his  brothei*s 
in  his  presence. 

6.  Siroes  then  ordered  his  father  to  be  thrown  into 
a  dungeon.  Here,  instead  of  killing  the  old  king  at 
once,  he  tormented  him  for  a  long  time  by  pricking 


3.  To  whom  did  Persia  become  subject  after  the  death  of  Darius?  llow  long 
did  it  continue  under  the  government  of  Parlhia?  When  did  Artaxares  make 
himself  king?  4.  What  of  his  descendants?  Chosroes  the  Great?  Wiien  did  ho 
live?  What  did  ho  do?  5.  What  of  the  successors  of  Chosroes  the  Great?  G.  What 
wickedness  did  Siroes  commit  ? 


ASIA.  95 

Mm  wltli  tlie  points  of  aiTows  !     Chosroes  died  at  last, 
in  great  agony. 

7.  These  tilings  may  seem  too  shocking  to  tell,  but  it 
is  perhaps  necessary  that  my  young  readei^  should 
know  how  very  ci-uel  men  may  become  when  given  up 
to  the  influence  of  passion.  Let  us  be  thankful  that 
the  religion  of  Christ  has  taught  us  to  look  upon  such 
crimes  as  were  often  practised  by  Persian  kings,  with 
horror  and  disgust. 

8.  Isdigertes,  who  ascended  the  throne  in  the  year 
630  of  the  Christian  era,  was  the  last  of  this  dynasty 
of  Persian  kings.  During  his  reign,  the  Saracens,  a 
warlike  people  of  Arabia,  invaded  Persia,  and  con- 
quered it.     Isdigertes  was  killed  in  battle. 

9.  Persia  then  became  a  part  of  the  Saracen  empire. 
It  was  ruled  by  the  caliphs  who  resided  at  Bagdad,  a 
splendid  city  which  they  built  on  the  river  Tigris. 

10.  This  celebrated  place  was  founded  in  672,  and 
once  contaijied  two  millions  of  inhabitants.  It  was 
then  filled  with  costly  buildings,  but  it  is  now  in  ruins. 
The  modern  city  is  poorly  built,  and  comparatively 
insignificant. 

1.  How  may  men  become  very  cruel ?  For  what  should  we  be  thankful?  8. 
"When  did  Isdigertes  ascend  the  throne  ?  What  of  him  ?  What  did  the  Saracens 
do  during  his  jeign?  9.  Of  what  empire  did  Persia  become  a  part?  How  was 
it  ruled?     Where  did  the  caliphs  hvo  ?    10.  What  of  Bagdad?    The  modem  city? 


96  -  ^  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

CHAPTER  XXYII.— Asia  Continued.  , 
Modem  History  of  Persia. 

1.  In  tlie  year  1258  of  tlie  Christian  era,  the  empire 
of  the  Saracens  was  subverted  by  the  Tartars.  Persia 
was  governed  by  them  for  a  considerable  time.  It  was 
afterward  ruled  by  monarchs  called  Sophis,  or  Shahs. 
The  first  of  these  was  named  Ismael,  a  man  of  Saracen 
descent.  He  took  possession  of  the  throne  by  violence, 
and  reigned  twenty-three  years. 

2.  The  greatest  of  these  monarchs  was  named  Shah 
Abbas.  He  ascended  the  throne  in  1589.  Abbas 
fought  against  the  Turks,  and  gained  many  splendid 
victories.  He  also  deprived  the  Portuguese  of  their 
possessions  in  the  East. 

3.  But  the  best  of  all  the  kings  of  this  family  was 
Shah  Husseyn;  and  he  was  also  the  last,  and  the  most 
unfortunate.  He  began  to  reign  in  the  year  1694. 
Husseyn  and  his  subjects  met  with  many  disasters ; 
and  he  was  at  length  compelled  to  surrender  his  throne 
to  a  rival. 

Chapter  XXVII. — 1.  "Wliat  of  the  empire  of  the  Saracens  in  the  year  1258? 
How  was  Persia  governed  ?  What  of  Ismael  ?  2,  Who  was  Shah  Abbas  ? 
When  did  ho  ascend  the  throne  ?    What  did  ho  do?     3.  What  of  Shah  Husseyn  ? 


ASIA.  .  97 

4.  But  before  lie  took  off  the  crown  from  his  head, 
Husseyn  went  on  foot  through  the  principal  streets  of 
Ispahan,  which  was  then  the  capital.  The  people 
thronged  around  him  with  tears  and  lamentations. 
The  excellent  and  kind-hearted  monarch  endeavored  to 
comfort  them. 

5.  He  told  them  that  the  new  king,  whose  name  was 
Mahmoud,  would  not  love  them  bette-  than  he  himself 
had,  but  that  he  would  know  better  how  to  govern 
them,  and  how  to  conquer  their  enemies.  So  the  good 
Husseyn  took  off  his  crown,  which  had  been  only  a 
trouble  to  him,  and  bade  his  people  farewell. 

6.  In  1730,  Kouli  Khan  took  possession  of  the 
throne  of  Persia.  He  called  himself  Nadir  Shah.  He 
was  a  famous  conqueror  and  tyrant,  and  was  assas- 
sinated in  his  tent  after  a  reign  of  about  seventeen 
years. 

7.  Since^his  death  there  has  been  much  bloodshed 
in  Persia.  Ambitious  men  have  often  aspired  to  the 
throne,  and  involved  the  country  in  civil  w^ar.  The 
present  ruler  is  said  to  be  a  better  man  than  many  of 
his  predecessors. 

4,  5.  Describe  the  manner  in  which  he  surrendered  his  crown.  6.  "When  did 
Kouli  Khan  come  to  the  throne?  What  other  name  had  he?  What  of  him? 
1.  What  of  Persia  since  the  death  of  Kouli  Khan  ?  What  Is  said  of  the  present 
ruler  ? 


98  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

8.  The  king  generally  resides  in  the  city  of  Teheran. 
But  he  has  a  beautiful  palace  at  Ispahan,  called  the 
Palace  of  Forty  Pillars.  Each  of  the  forty  pillars  is 
supported  by  four  lions  of  white  marble.  The  whole 
edifice  looks  as  if  it  were  built  of  pearl,  and  silver  and 
gold,  and  precious  stones. 

9.  I  have  now  done  with  the  story  of  Persia.  Like 
that  of  most  othei*  eastern  countries,  it  abounds  in  tales 
of  cruelty,  battle,  and  bloodshed.  In  ancient  times  the 
people  worshipped  the  snn,  and  bowed  down  to  idols. 
But  for  more  than  a  thousand  years,  they  have  been 
believers  in  a  false  prophet,  called  Mahomet. 

10.  The  climate  of  Persia  is  mild,  and  the  country 
abounds  in  beautiful  and  fragrant  trees,  shrubs,  and 
flowers.  The  people  are  less  warlike  than  in  former 
times.  Tlic  rieli  live  in  splendid  palaces,  and  the  poor 
in  mud  liuts.  The  kingdom  is  small,  compared  with 
the  vast  empire  of  Xerxes.  Persepolis,  the  ancient 
capital,  is  now  a  heap  of  ruins.  Teheran  and  Ispahan, 
the  two  principal  cities,  are  of  comparatively  modern 
date. 

11.  From  what  I  have  told  you,  you  will  not  like 

8.  Where  does  he  reside?  Describe  the  palace  of  the  king.  9.  "What  of 
the  story  of  Persia  ?  What  was  the  worship  of  tho  ancient  Persians  ?  What  is 
now  the  religion  of  the  people?  10.  What  of  the  climate  of  Persia?  The  soil? 
People ?     What  of  Persepolis?     Teheran?     Ispahan? 


ASIA.  99 

the  Persian  character;  yet  it  is  not  altogether  bad. 
The  people  are  very  fond  of  reading,  and  telling  iii- 
structive  stories;  many  of  these  were  written  ages 
since,  and  are  exceedingly  beautiful.  The  people  also 
have  a  taste  for  poetry,  and  they  appear  to  be  fond  of 
the  beauties  of  nature,  and  to  have  a  native  love  of 
virtue. 

11.  What  of  the  Persian  character?     The  people? 


100 


UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


V- 

1  ^     J)   ■i'atci, 


J.oii.  lUO  East  li'uill  Hireeuwick  iiU      _   -   d  V 


i^ 


T5ir 


ns 


MAP   OP  CHINA. 


Questions  ox  the  Map  of  China, — How  is  China  bounded  on  the  North? 
Boulh?  East?  West?  Where  is  Pekin?  Tell  the  directions  of  the  following 
places  from  Pekin:  Nankin?  Canton?  Shanghai?  Macao?  Semao?  Where 
are  the  following  islands?  Hainan?  Formosa?  Amoy?  Chusan  ?  Where  is 
the  Yellow  Sea  ?  The  Gulf  of  Tonkin  ?  Where  are  the  Peling  Mountains?  The 
Meling  ?    Which  way  does  the  Yangtse  Kiang  River  run  ?     The  Hoaug  Ho  ? 


ASIA.  101 

CHAPTER  XXVIII.— Asia  Continued. 

Early  History  of  China.  ^ 

1.  The  territory  of  tlie  Chinese  empire  is  nearly  tlie 
same  at  tlie  present  day  as  it  lias  been  from  the  earliest 
records.  It  is  bounded  on  tlie  iiortli  ])y  Asiatic  Rus- 
sia, on  the  east  by  the  Pacific  Ocean,  and  on  the  south 
by  the  Chinese  Sea  and  Farther  India.  On  the  west, 
there  are  mountains  and  sandy  deserts,  which  divide  it 
from  Thibet  and  Tartary. 

2.  This  empire  is  very  ancient,  and  has  continued 
longer  than  any  other  that  has  ever  existed.  Its  history 
goes  back  four  thousand  years  from  the  present  time. 
The  name  of  its  founder  was  Fohi,  whom  some  writers 
suppose  to  have  been  the  same  as  Noah. 

3.  There  have  been  twenty-two  dynasties,  or  separate 
families  of  emperors,  who  have  successively  ruled  over 
China.  If  their  history  were  to  be  minutely  related, 
it  would  fill  at  least  twenty-two  great  books.  Yet  few 
of  the  emperors  did  any  thing  that  was  worthy  of  re- 
membrance. 

Chapter 'XX VIII.— 1.  What  of  the  Cliinese  empire  ?  Its  bouudafies?  Vvliat 
divides  it  from  Thibet  and  Tartary?  2.  What  of  the  antiquity  and  duration  of  the 
Chinese  empire?  Who  was  its  founder?  What  do  some  writers  suppose?  3. 
What  of  the  dynasties  or  families  that  have  ruled  over  China?. 


102  UNITERSAL  HISTORY. 

4.  We  find  notliing  very  remarkable  about  tbem  till 
tbe  reign  of  Chaus,  wlio  lived  about  a  thousand  years 
before  tlie  Christian  era.  He  was  extremely  fond 
of  bunting,  and  used  to  gallop  into  tlie  midst  of  the 
rice-fields  in  pursuit  of  game.  In  this  manner  lie  did 
so  much  mischief,  that  his  sulvjects  resolved  to  destroy 
him. 

5.  There  was  a  large  river,  which  the  emperor  was 
often  in  the  habit  of  crossing.  On  the  shore  of  this 
river,  the  people  placed  a  boat,  as  if  for  the  accommo- 
dation of  Cliaus.  The  next  time  that  the  emperor  re- 
turned from  hunting,  he  and  his  attendants  got  on 
board  the  boat,  and  set  sail  for  the  opposite  shore. 

6.  But  the  boat  had  been  contrived  on  purpose  for 
his  destruction.  In  the  middle  of  the  river  it  fell  to 
pieces,  and  all  on  board  were  drowned.  Thus,  to  the 
great  joy  of  his  subjects,  the  emperor  Chaus  went  down 
among  the  fishes,  and  never  again  came  hunting  in 
their  rice-fields. 

7.  The  emj)eror  Ching,  who  reigned  about  two  thou- 
sand years  ago,  built  a  great  wall,  in  order  to  protect 
his  dominions  against  the  Tartars.  It  was  forty-five 
feet  high,  and  eighteen  feet  thick,  and  it  extended  over 

4.  When  did  Chaus  live ?  What  of  him?  5,  6.  Relate  the  manner  in  which 
the  people  destroyed  him.  7.  Wlien  did  the  emperor  Ching  live?  Describe  th© 
great  wall. 


ASIA.  103 

mountains  and  valleys,  a  distance  of  fifteen  Imndred 
miles.     This  wall  still  remains. 

8.  When  Cliing  had  completed  the  wall,  he  thought 
himself  so  very  great  an  emperor,  that  none  of  his 
predecessors  were  worth  remembering.  He  therefore 
ordered  all  the  historical  writings  and  public  records 
to  be  burnt.  He  also  caused  four  hundred  learned 
men,  who  were  addicted  to  writing  histories,  to  be 
buried  alive. 

9.  If  the  emperor  Ching  could  have  caught  poor  old 
Peter  Parley,  he  certainly  would  have  buried  him 
likewise,  with  his  four  hundred  learned  brethren ;  and 
so  the  world  would  have  lost  this  Universal  Histoiy ! 

Does  it  still  remain  ?     8.  What  orders  did  he  give  respecting  historical  books, 
papers,  and  learned  men  ? 


•-  W-^ 


104 


UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


CONFUCIUS  AND   HIS  DISCIPLES. 


CHAPTER  XXIX.— Asia  Continded. 

Anecdotes   of  tJie    Chinese   Eiaperovs — Confacius. — Modem 
_  HistoTif  of  China. 

1.  The  emperor  Vati  lived  about  the  time  of  the 
Christian  era.  This  emperor  Avas  desirous  of  reigning 
till   the  world  should  come  to  an  end,  and  perhaps 

CiiAPTEU  XXIX. — 1.  AVhut  of  the  emperor  Vati?     How  did  he  speud  his  time? 


ASIA.  105 

longer.  He  tlierefore  spent  his  time  in  endeavoring  to 
brew  a  liquor  that  would  make  him  immortal.  But 
unfortunately,  before  the  liquor  was  fit  to  drink,  the 
emperor  died. 

2.  Another  emperor,  instead  of  attending  to  the 
affaii^s  of  the  nation,  applied  himself  wholly  to  study. 
His  prime  minister  took  advantage  of  his  negligence, 
and  raised  a  rebellion  against  him.  When  the  empe- 
ror heard  the  shouts  of  the  rebels,  he  shut  his  book, 
and  put.  on  his  armor.  But  on  ascending  the  ramparts 
of  the  city,  he  saw  that  it  was  too  late  to  resist.  He 
then  returned  to  his  library,  which  contained  one  hun- 
dred and  forty  thousand  volumes. 

'  3.  The  emperor  knew  that  these  books  had  been  the 
means  of  his  losing  the  vast  empire  of  China,  by  with- 
drawing his  attention  from  the  government.  He  there- 
fore set  fire  to  them  with  his  own  hands,  and  the 
whole  library  was  consumed.  The  rebels  afterward 
put  him  tQ  death. 

4.  The  emperor  Si-given  began  to  reign  in  the  year 
617  after  the  Christian  era.  He  dwelt  in  a  magj-nificent 
palace.  After  his  death,  his  son  came  to  the  palaj^e, 
and  was  astonished  at  its  splendor  and  beauty.  "  Such 
a  res'-dence  is  good  for  nothing  but  to  corrupt  a  mon- 

2,  3  Tell  the  story  of  a  very  learned  emperor.  4.  When  did  Si-giveu  begin  to 
reign  '-     Where  did  he  dwell?     Wliat  did  his  son  do  ? 


106  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

arch,  and  render  him  proud,"  exclaimed  he.  Accor- 
ding!}^ he  commanded  this  great  and  costly  palace  to 
be  burned  to  the  ground. 

Th  Chwang-tsong,  who  had  been  a  brave  soldier,  was 
made  emperor  about  eight  hundred  years  ago.  He 
was  a  person  of  very  frugal  habits.  It  was  one  of  his 
singularities,  that  he  never  slept  in  a  bed,  but  always 
on  the  bare  ground,  with  a  bell  fastened  to  his  neck. 
If  he  turned  over  in  his  sleep,  the  ringing  of  the  bell 
would  awaken  him ;  and  he  then  considered  it.  time  to 
get  up. 

6.  In  the  year  1209,  Genghis  Khan  invaded  China 
with  an  immense  army  of  Tartars.  He  and  his  descen- 
dants conquered  the  whole  empii'e,  and  governed  it 
during  many  years. 

7.  The  emperor  Ching-tsa  ascended  the  throne  three 
or  four  centuries  ago.  A  mine  was  discovered  during 
his  reign,  and  precious  stones  of  great  value  were  dug 
out  of  it.  Some  of  them  were  brought  to  the  emperor, 
but  he  looked  scornfully  at  them. 

8.  "  Do  you  call  these  precious  stones  ? "  cried  he. 
"  What  are  they  good  for  ?  They  can  neither  clothe  the 
people,  nor  satisfy  their  hunger."     So   saying,  he   or- 

5.  What  of  Ch\van,<r-tson,u:?  AVbat  curious  fact  is  related  of  him?  6  When  did 
Gengliis  Khan  invade  Clnna  ?  A\'liat  of  him  aud  his  descendants?  7,  8.  "What  of 
the  etnneror  Chang- Ida?     Relate  the  story  of  the  mine. 


ASIA.  107 

dered  tlie  mine  to  be  closed  up,  and  the  miners  to  be 
employed  in  some  more  useful  kind  of  labor. 

9.  About  a  hundred  years  ago,  in  tlie  reign  of  Yong- 
tcliing,  there  was  the  most  terrible  earthquake  that  had 
ever  been  known.  It  shook  down  nearly  all  the  houses 
in  the  city  of  Pekin,  and  buried  one  hundred  thousand 
people.  A  still  greater  number  perished  in  the  sur- 
rounding country. 

10.  Confucius,  the  most  famous  man  that  China  has 
ever  produced,  lived  a])out  five  liundred  years  Ijefore 
Christ.  He  was  a  very  learned  man,  and  wrote  many 
books.  He  delivered  lectures,  and  he  had  many  dis- 
ciples or  scholars,  who  followed  him  about  in  all  his 
travels. 

11.  In  1840,  a  war  broke  out  between  China  and 
Great  Britain.  The  English  sent  a  fleet  against  the 
Chinese,  which  took  Canton  and  several  other  places. 
Peace  was  made  two  yeai's  afterward,  and  somewhat 
later  the  .Chinese  made  a  treaty  of  commerce  with  the 
United  States. 

12.  In  1852,  an  insurrection  began  in  China,  and  in 
1857  another  war  broke  out  with  Great  Britain. 
France  has  since  joined  the  British  government,  and  at 

9.  What  happened  in  the  reip:a_o.fY<)rip:-tching-?  10.  What  of  Confucius?  11. 
Wliat  happened  in  1840?  In  1842?  12.  What  liappened  in  1852?  In  1857? 
What  is  the  present  state  of  things? 


108  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

tlie  present  moment  (1860)  tlie  two  powers  are  en- 
gaged in  an  attempt  to  force  the  Chinese  to  comply 
with  their  terms.  \^ 


CHAPTEE  XXX.— Asia  Continited. 

"^         Cities  of  China. — Manners  of  the  Chinese. 

1.  I  MUST  now  give  you  a  short  account  of  the  cities 
and  people  of  China  as  they  are  at  this  day.  Nankin 
w\as  formerly  the  capital  of  China.  Pekin,  which  con- 
tains two  millions  of  inhabitants,  is  now  the  capital. 
The  emperor's  j)alace  stands  in  a  part  of  Pekin  called 
the  Tartar  city. 

2.  The  walls  of  Pekin  are  built  of  brick,  and  are 
nearly  one  hundred  feet  high,  so  that  they  hide  the 
whole  city.  They  are  so  thick  that  sentinels  on  horse- 
back ride  round  the  city  on  the  top  of  the  wall.  There 
are  nine  gates,  which  have  marble  arches,  and  are  pro- 
digiously high. 

3.  The  people  of  China  have  an  olive  complexion, 

CuAPTER  XXX. — 1.  AVhat  wtis  formerly  the  capital  of  China?  What  is  now? 
How  many  inhabitants  d<x;s  Pekin  contain?  Wliure  is  tlie  emperor's  palace? 
2.   What  of  the  walls  of  Pekin  ?     Tlio  gates  ?     3.  What  of  the  people  of  Cliina  ? 


ASIA.  109 

with  black  liair,  and  small  black  eyes.  The  chief  part 
of  their  dress  is  a  long  loose  robe,  which  is  fastened 
round  the  body  with  a  silken  girdle.  In  this  girdle 
they  carry  a  knife,  and  two  sticks  for  eating  instead  of 
a  knife  and  fork. 

4.  The  Chinese  are  great  fibbers,  and  are  very  much 
addicted  to  cheating.  There  are  some  horrible  cus- 
toms among  them.  For  instance,  if  parents  have  a 
greater  number  of  children  than  they  can  conveniently 
support,  they  are  permitted  to  throw  them  into  a 
river! 

5.  The  people  are  not  nice  about  what  they  eat. 
Dead  puppy-dogs  are  publicly  sold  in  the  streets  for 
food.  Rats  and  mice  are  frequently  eaten.  There  is 
a  sort  of  bird's  nest  which  is  made  into  a  jelly,  and  is 
considered  a  great  delicacy. 

6.  The  Chinese  ladies  are  chiefiy  remarkable  for 
their  little  feet.  A  grown  woman  in  China  is  able  to 
wear  smaller  shoes  than  a  young  child  in  America. 
But  their  feet  are  kept  merely  for  show,  and  are  almost 
good  for  nothing  to  walk  with. 

7.  Religion  among  the  Chinese  is  in  a  very  sad  con- 
dition. The  people  are  given  up  to  idolatry.  Almost 
all  religions  are  tolerated,  although  but  little  reverence 

Their  dress?      4.  What   of  the  character   of  the  Chinese?      Their   customs? 
5.  What  of  food?     6.  What  of  the  Chinese  ladies?     t.  What  of  rehgion  in  China? 


110  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

is  paid  to  any.     There   are  more  temples  than  can  be 
easily  numbered. 

8.  In  China  there  are  some  very  singular  punish- 
ments. Sometimes  a  wooden  frame  weighing  two 
hundred  2:)ounds  is  2)ut  round  a  man's  neck.  He  is 
i^bmpelled  to  cany  it  about  vnih  him  wherever  he 
goes ;  and  so  long  as  he  wears  it,  he  can  neither  feed 
himself,  nor  lie  down. 

9.  One  of  the  most  cuiious  customs  of  China  was 
that  of  excludino',  until  latelv,  all  foreiccners  from  the 
country.  A  few  American  and  European  merchants 
were  permitted  to  reside  at  Canton,  but  they  were 
oblisred  to  leave  their  wives  at  IMacao.  No  other 
strangers  were  permitted  in  the  kingdom.  The  peoj^le 
think  that  their  manners  and  customs  are  the  best  in 
the  world,  and  they  do  not  wish  foreigners  to  come 
and  introduce  new  notions.  The  treaty  of  peace  ^vith 
England,  in  1842,  however,  opened  five  ports  to  foreign 
nations. 

10.  China  has  a  great  many  large  cities,  and  these 
are  filled  with  countless  numbers  of  inhabitants.  They 
have  many  ingenious  arts  and  manufactures,  they  till 

Temples?  8.  "What  of  piiniahments  in  China?  9.  What  custon*  was  there  re- 
specting foreigners  ?  Where  did  the  Avives  of  nioi-chauts  reside  ?  Why  do  not  the 
Cliinese  wish  foreigners  to  come  among  ihcm  ?  WliuL  hapi)ened  in  1842?  10. 
What  of  the  cities  of  China? 


ASIA.  Ill 

tlie  eartli  witli  great  skill,  and  tlieir  gardens  are  man- 
aged witL  special  care. 

11.  Tea  is  brought  to  us  from  this  country,  with  a 
great  variety  of  other  articles.  You  will  not  be  sur- 
prised that  we  get  so  many  things  from  China,  when 
you  know  that  the  country  contains  three  hundred  and 
fifty  millions  of  inhabitants,  that  is,  six  times  as  many 
as  in  all  America,  r- 


CHAPTER  XXXL— Asia  Continued. 
v^  History  of  Jajjan. 

1.  Japan  is  an  extensive  empire,  containing  twenty- 
six  millions  of  inha])itants.  These  live  to  the  east  of 
China,  upon  several  islands,  of  which  Niphon  is  the 
largest.  The  people  live  crowded  together  in  large 
and  well-kept  cities,  and  resemble  the  Chinese  in  their 
religion,  manners,  and  customs,  and  the  American  In- 
dians in  their  personal  appearance. 

2.  It  is  uncertain  whether  the  ancient  nations  knew 
any  thing  of  this  empire,  and  its  early  history  is  quite 

Mauufaciures?     Do  the  people  uuderstaud  agriculture?     11.  Where  do  we  get 
our  tea  ?    What  is  the  population  of  China  ? 

Chaptkr  XXXI. — 1.  What  of  Japan?     The  people? 

6 


112  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

unknown.  It  is  probable  tbat  it  lias  remained  with 
little  change  for  thousands  of  years.  Its  existence  was 
first  ascertained  by  the  Europeans  about  the  year  1400, 
but  as  strangers  are  not  permitted  to  travel  in  the 
country,  very  little  has  been  found  out  concerning  it. 
The  people  are  idolaters. 

3.  Up  to  the  year  1853,  the  Japanese  had  excluded 
all  ships  from  their  ports,  except  those  of  the  Dutch. 
In  this  year,  however,  a  fleet  of  seven  American  vessels, 
the  majority  of  them  steam-ships,  commanded  by  Com- 
modore Perry,  and  sent  out  by  the  government  of  the 
United  States,  arrived  in  the  bay  of  Jeddo.  The  ships 
anchored  in  waters  never  visited  by  a  foreign  craft 
before. 

4.  After  some  delay.  Commodore  Perry  succeeded 
in  laying  before  the  emjDcror  of  Japan,  the  desire 
of  the  American  government  to  open  a  trade  with 
his  people,  and  their  wish  to  enter  into  a  treaty  with 
him. 

5.  Though  the  Japanese  have  for  centuries  lived  in 
isolation,  and  do  not  yet  seem  altogether  willing  to  enter 
into  intimate  relations  with  other  countries,  yet  this 
desire  was  acceded  to,  and  a  treaty  of  peace  and  eom- 

2.  What  of  its  early  history  ?  Wliat  is  known  of  the  country  ?  3.  With  whom 
was  trade  carried  on?  What  happened  in  1853?  4.  What  did  Commodore 
Perry  succeed  iu  doing?     5.  What  of  a  treaty? 


ASIA.  113 

merce  was   made.     By  this,  American  merchants  are 
alloived  to  visit  and  to  trade  at  two  ports  in  Jiipan. 

6.  The  emperor,  or  Tycoon  of  Japan,  sent  an  em- 
bassy— the  first  ever  accredited  to  a  foreign  nation — 
to  Washington  in  1860,  to  exchange  ratifications  of  the 
treaty.  The  embassy,  consisting  of  several  princes, 
officers,  and  interpreters,  and  a  numerous  retinue  of 
servants — seventy  in  all — were  brought  to  America  in 
the  steam-frigate  Powhattan,  and  sent  home  in  the 
Niagara. 

7.  They  remained  in  the  country  about  two 
months,  during  which  their  expenses  were  paid  by  the 
American  government.  They  went  away  apparently 
well  pleased,  and  satisfied  that  they  had  accomplished 
the  object  of  their  visitrf 

6,  1.  "What  of  the  Japanese  embassy  to-  the  United  States  ? 


114: 


u:niversal  history. 


PILGRIMS   OF  ARABIA  GOING  TO   THE  TOMB   OF   MAHOMET. 


CHAPTER  XXXIL— Asia  Continued. 

Jib- 

^  Origin  of  the  Arabs — Iltse  of  Maliomet 

1.  The  Arabs  are  descended  from  Islimael,  a  son  of 
Abraham.  It  was  foretold  of  him,  that  "his  hand 
should  be  against  every  man,  and  every  man's  hand 
against  him."  In  all  ages  this  prophecy  has  been  ful- 
filled among  his  posterity;  for  they  appear  to  have 
been  enemies  to  the  rest  of  mankind,  and  mankind 
enemies  to  them. 


CuAT'TKU    XXXir. — 1.    From    whom  are  the   Arabs    descended?     What  was 
pr()i)hosied  of  Ishiuael?     Has  tlie  prophecy  been  fuUilled? 


ASIA.  115 

2.  Arabia  consists  of  several  separate  states,  or 
nations.  The  whole  country  is  bounded  on  the  noi'th 
by  Palestine,  Mesopotamia,  &c. ;  on  the  east  by  the 
Persian  Gulf  and  the  Gulf  of  Ormuz,  on  the  south  by 
the  Indian  Ocean,  and  west  by  the  Red  Sea. 

3.  The  Arabs  have  always  been  wandering  tribes, 
and  have  dwelt  in  tents  among  the  trackless  deserts 
which  cover  a  large  portion  of  their  country.  Their 
early  history  is  very  imperfectly  known.  The  first 
event  that  is  worth  recording,  was  the  birth  of  Ma- 
homet. This  tobk  place  at  Mecca,  a  city  on  the 
borders  of  the  Ked  Sea,  in  the  year  570  of  the  Chris- 
tian era. 

4.  Till  the  age  of  twenty-five,  Mahomet  was  a  camel- 
driver  in  the  de>sei't.  He  afterward  spent  much  of  his 
time  in  solitude.  His  dwelling  was  a  lonesome  cave, 
where  he  pretended  to  be  employed  in  prayer  and 
meditation.  When  he  was  forty  years  old,  he  set  up 
for  a  prophet. 

5.  He  publicly  proclaimed  that  God  had  sent  him 
to  convert  the  world  to  a  new  religion.  The  people  of 
Mecca  would  not  at  iirst  believe  Mahomet.     He  was 

2.  Of  what  does  Arabia  consist?  TTow  is  it  bounded?  3.  How  have  the  Arabs 
always  lived?  Vv''liat  of  their  e^rl^^  history?  "When  and  where  was  Mahomet 
born?  4.  Of  what  profession  was  Maliomot?  How  di(i  lie  Ww  Viefore  lie  was 
forty  years  old?     5.  Wliat  did  he  llien  do?     What  of  tlie  people  of  McL-ca  ? 


116  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

born  among  them,  and  they  knew  that  he  had  been  a 
camel-driver,  and  was  no  holier  than  themselves.  Be- 
sides, he  pretended  that  he  had  ridden  up  to  heaven 
on  an  ass,  in  company  with  the  angel  Gabriel ;  and 
many  of  his  stories  were  as  ridiculous  as  this. 
^^.  So  the  men  of  Mecca  threatened  to  slay  Mahomet, 
and  he  was  therefore  forced  to  flee  to  Medina,  another 
city  of  Arabia.  There,  in  the  course  of  two  or  three 
years,  he  made  a  great  number  of  converts.  He  told 
his  disciples  that  they  must  compel  others  to  adopt 
his  religion  by  force,  if  they  refused  to  do  so  by  fair 
means. 

7.  This  conduct  brought  on  a  Avar  between  the  dis- 
ciples of  Mahomet  and  all  the  other  Arabians.  Ma- 
homet won  many  victories,  and  soon  made  himself 
master  of  the  whole  countiy,  and  of  Syria  besides. 

8.  Mahomet  was  now  not  only  a  pretended  prophet, 
but  a  real  king.  He  was  a  veiy  terrible  man,  even  to 
his  own  followers ;  for  whenever  he  was  angry,  a  vein 
between  his  eyebrows  used  to  swell  and  turn  black. 
This  gave  him  a  grim  and  fi'ightful  aspect. 

9.  His  power  continued  to  increase;  but  he  died 
suddenly,  at  the  age  of  sixty-three.     His  religion  was 

What  did  Mahomet  pretend?  6,  Why  did  Mahomet  flee  to  Medina?  AVliat 
means  did  he  lake  to  make  converts  in  Medina  ?  7.  What  was  the  effoct  of  this 
conduct?     What  victories  did  Mahomet  win ?     8.  Describe  Mahomet. 


ASIA.  lit 

diffused  over  nearly  all  Asia  and  Africa,  and  is  still 
believed  by  many  millions  of  people.  Its  precepts  are 
contained  in  a  book  called  tlie  Koran.  Mahomet  af- 
jfirmed  tliat  the  angel  Gabriel  brought  him  the  doc- 
trines contained  in  this  book  from  heaven. 


CHAPTER  XXXIII.— Asia  Continued. 
'^  Sequel  of  the  History  of  the  Arabs  or  Saracens. 

1.  Those  of  the  Arabians  who  followed  Mahomet 
were  called  Saracens.  After  their  leader's  death,  they 
conquered  the  whole  of  Turkey  in  Asia,  and  many 
other  countries.  The  capital  of  their  empire  was  the 
city  of  Bagdad,  on  the  river  Tigris,  which  I  have 
already  mentioned. 

2.  One  of  the  successors  of  Mahomet  was  Ali,  his 
son-in-law.  He  was  opposed  l)y  Ayesha,  Mahomet's 
widow.  This  woman  was  suspected  of  having  mur- 
dered her  husband. 

3.  She  raised    an    army,   and    led    them    to  battle 

9.  AYhen  did  he  die?  Where  is  the  religion  of  Mahomet  followed?  What  is 
the  Koran  ?     What  did  Maliomet  affirm  ? 

Chapter  XXXIII. — 1.  Who  were  the  Saracens?  What  of  them  ?  What  was 
the  C9^')ital  of  their  empire?     2.  Who  was  Ali  ?     Who  opposed  him  ? 


118  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

against  Ali.  During  tlie  conflict,  Ayesha  sat  in  a  sort 
of  cage  or  litter,  on  the  back  of  a  camel.  The  camel's 
rein  was  held  by  one  of  her  soldiers ;  and  it  is  said 
that  seventy  soldiers  were  killed,  one  after  another, 
while  holding  the  rein.  Finally,  Ali  was  victorious, 
and  confirmed  his  sway  over  all  the  disciples  of  Ma- 
homet, and  over  the  countries  which  they  had  won. 

4.  The  Saracen  empire  was  thus  established.  The 
kings  were  called  caliphs.  They  reigned  at  Bagdad 
for  the  space  of  six  hundred  and  twenty  years.  One 
of  the  most  distinguished  of  them  was  Mahmoud  Ga- 
zui.  He  was  a  great  conqueror,  and  added  a  part  of 
India  to  his  dominions. 

5.  A  poor  man  once  complained  to  Mahmoud  Gazui 
that  a  soldier  had  turned  him  and  his  f^imily  out  of 
doors,  and  had  kept  possession  of  his  house  all  night. 
When  the  caliph  heard  this,  he  suspected  that  the  sol- 
dier was  his  own  son.  "  If  he  ill-treats  you  again,  let 
me  know,'^  said  he. 

6.  Accordingly,  a  few  nights  afterward,  the  poor 
man  told  the  caliph  that  the  same  soldier  had  turned 
him  out  of  his  house  again.  The  caliph  took  his  cmie- 
ter  and  went  to  the  house;  but  before  entering,  he 

3.  Describe  the  conflict  between  Ali  and  Ayesha.  Who  was  victorious?  4. 
Who  were  the  caliphs?  Where  did  they  reign?  What  of  Malunond  (iazui  ?  5-7. 
Relate  tho  story  of  the  poor  m;in  and  Mahmoud  Gazui. 


I 


ASIA.  119 


caused  all  the  liglits  to  be  extinguished,  so  that  his 
heart  might  not  be  softened  by  the  sight  of  the  of- 
fender. 

7.  When  all  was  darkness,  he  entered  the  house, 
and  struck  tlie  soldier  dead  with  his  cimeter.  "  Nov/ 
bring  a  light,"  cried  the  caliph.  His  attendants  did  so. 
KrJimoud  Gazui  held  a  torch  over  the  bloody  corpse 
of  the  soldier,  and  found  that  his  suspicions  were  cor- 
rect.    He  had  kill^^d  his  own  son  !  y 

8.  The  last  of  the  caliphs  was  named  Mostasem. 
He  was  so  proud  and  vainglorious  that  he  considered 
his  subjects  unworthy  to  behold  his  face.  He  there- 
fore never  appeared  in  public  without  wearing  a  veil 
of  golden  tissue.  Whenever  he  rode  through  the 
streets,  thousands  would  ilock  to  get  a  glimpse  of  his 


golden  veil. 


9.  But  at  length  Hulaki,  chief  of  the  Tartars,  took 
the  city  of  Bagdad.  He  stripped  off  the  golden  veil 
of  the  caliph  Mostasem,  and  put  him  alive  into  a  leatli 
ern  bag.  The  bag,  with  the  poor  caliph  in  it,  was 
dragged  by  Moses  through  the  same  streets  where  he 
had  formerly  ridden  in  triumph. 

10.  Thus  perished  the  caliph  Mostasem,  being 
bruised  to  death  on  the  pavements.     With  him  ended 

8.  Who  was  Mostasera  ?     What  can  you  say  of  hun?     9.   How  did  ho  die? 


120  UNIYERSAL  HISTORY. 

the  empire  of  the  Saracens,  in  the  year  1258  of  the 
Christian  era.  But  the  termination  of  this  empire  did 
not  put  an  end  to  the  religion  of  Mahomet. 


RUINS   OF   PALMY  ilA. 

CIIAPrER  XXXIV.— Asia  Continued. 
Ahout  Syria,  Phoanicia,  and  Asia  Minor, 

1.  I  WILL  now  give  you  a  short  account  of  Syria 
which  hxy  to  the  north  of  Palestine.     It  was  bounded 

10.  AVhen  did  the  empire  of  the  Saraceiis  eud?     What  of  therehgiou  of  Mahomet? 


ASIA.  121 

north  by  Asia  Minor,  on  the  east  by  tlie  river  Euphra- 
tes and  Arabia,  on  the  south  l)y  Palestine  and  a  part 
of  Arabia,  and  west  by  the  Mediterranean  Sea. 

2.  Syria  is  frequently  mentioned  in  the  Bible.  The 
people  were  engaged  in  almost  constant  wars  with  the 
Jews,  from  the  time  of  David  nearly  to  the  time  of 
Christ,  when  it  became  a  Roman  province. 

3.  At  this  period  its  capital  was  Antioch,  which 
was  one  of  the  most  splendid  cities  in  the  world.  This 
was  the  native  place  of  St.  Luke,  and  here  l)oth  St. 
Peter  and  St.  Paul  lived  for  some  time.  Here,  too, 
the  followers  of  Christ  were  first  called  Christians. 

4.  Damascus,  another  city  of  Syria,  one  hundred  and 
thirty-six  miles  to  the  north  of  Jerusalem,  appears  to 
have  been  known  ever  since  the  time  of  Abraham.  It 
is  frequently  mentioned  in  the  Bible,  and  here  St.  Paul 
was  miraculously  converted  to  the  Chiistian  faith. 

5.  This  city  was  famous  in  later  times  for  making 
the  best  swords,  sabres,  and  other  cutlery;  but  the 
art  which  the  people  once  possessed  is  now  lost.  The 
inhabitants  of  this  city  were  also  celebrated  for 
manufacturing  beautiful  silks,  to  which  the  name  of 


Chaptkr  XXXIV. — 1.  Where  was  Syria  situated?  How  was  it  bounded?  2. 
What  of  the  people  of  Syria  ?  3.  Capital  of  Syria  ?  Wliat  great  events  took  place 
at  Antioch  ?  4.  What  of  Damascus?  What  took  place  there?  What  was  Da- 
mascus celebrated  for  in  ancient  times  ? 


122  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

damask  was   given,  from  the  place  wliere  they  were 
made. 

6.  Anotlier  place  in  Syria  mentioned  in  tlie  Bible 
was  Tadmor,  sometimes  called  "  Tadmor  in  the  desert ;" 
this  was  built  by  Solomon  for  the  convenience  of  his 
traders ;  it  was  ten  miles  in  extent,  but  it  is  now  in 
iiiins.  The  splendid  remains  of  this  place,  consisting 
of  columns  and  other  things  beautifully  sculptured  in 
stone,  show  that  it  must  have  been  a  rich  and  power- 
ful city.     In  modern  times  it  is  called  Palmyi'a. 

7.  At  the  distance  of  thirty-seven  miles  north-west 
of  Damascus,  are  the  remains  of  Balbec,  a  very  splen- 
did city  in  the  time  of  the  apostles,  and  then  called 
Heliopolis.  It  is  now  in  ruins,  and  contains  scarcely 
more  than  a  thousand  inhabitants. 

8.  I  must  not  forget  to  mention  Phoenicia,  which  lay 
alono-  the  border  of  the  Mediterranean  Sea ;  it  contained 
the  cities  of  Tyre,  Sidon,  Ptolemais,  and  other  celebra- 
ted places.  In  very  early  times,  the  Phoenicians  were 
famous  for  taking  the  lead  in  commerce,  navigation, 
and  other  arts.  They  were  then  an  independent  nation, 
but  in  after-times  their  country  became  a  province  of 
Syria. 

9.  Syria   is   at   the   present   day  governed   by  the 

6.  What  of  Tadmor  ?     7.  What  of  tlie  ruins  of  Balbec?     8.  "What  of  Phoeuicia  ? 
What  did  it  contain?     What  of  the  Phoeniciaus? 


ASIA.  123 

Turks,  and  like  every  otlier  country  under  tlieir  sway, 
is  stamped  with  an  aspect  of  desolation  and  decay. 
Tlie  term  Syria  is  now  applied,  not  only  to  wliat  an. 
ciently  bore  tliat  name,  but  to  Palestine  also. 

10.  Asia  Minor,  or  Natolia,  as  it  is  now  called,  lies 
at  the  nortli-eastern  corner  of  the  Mediterranean  Sea ; 
it  is  a  kind  of  peninsula,  bounded  on  the  north  by  the 
Euxine  or  Black  Sea ;  on  the  west  by  the  ^gean 
Sea ;  and  on  the  east  by  Syria,  Mesopotamia  and  Ar- 
menia. 

11.  It  is  about  six  hundred  miles  in  length,  from 
east  to  west,  and  four  hundred  in  breadth.  It  is  at 
present  under  the  government  of  Turkey,  and  its  in- 
habitants are  mostly  believers  in  Mahomet.  The 
chief  city  now  is  Smyrna,  to  which  many  vessels  go 
from  this  country,  and  bring  back  figs,  dates,  and  other 
fruits. 

12.  Asia  Minor  appears  to  have  been  settled  in  vevy 
early  times.  Several  kingdoms  have  arisen  and  flour- 
ished here  at  different  periods,  but  it  has  never  been 
the  seat  of  any  great  empire.  The  kingdom  of  Lydia, 
in  Asia  Minor,  existed  as  early  as  eight  hundred  years 
before  Christ. 

9.  What  of  Syria?  To  what  is  this  name  now  applied  ?  10,  Situation  and 
boundaries  of  Asia  Minor?  11.  Its  extent?  Government?  Inhabitants?  What 
of  Smyrna  ?     12.  What  of  Asia  Minor  ?    What  of  Lydia  ? 


124  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

13.  The  last  king  of  Lydia  was  Croesus,  who  was  so 
famous  for  his  great  riches,  that  to  this  day  we  say, 
"As  rich  as  Croesus."  But  in  spite  of  his  wealth,  he 
was  conquered  by  Cyi'us,  king  of  Persia,  548  B.  C. 

14.  From  this  period,  Lydia,  with  a  great  part  of 
Asia  Minor,  continued  subject  to  the  Persian  empire 
till  the  time  of  Alexander,  about  330  B.  C,  when  it 
was  conquered  by  that  famous  leader. 

15.  Three  hundred  years  before  Christ,  Pontus, 
which  had  once  been  a  part  of  Lydia,  became  an  inde- 
pendent country.  It  continued  to  flourish  for  many 
years,  and  Mithridates  VII.  successfully  maintained  a 
war  with  the  Komans  for  a  long  time. 

16.  By  his  skill  and  courage,  he  baffled  the  best 
generals  of  the  empire.  But  at  length,  in  the  year  64 
B.  C,  he  was  conquered,  and  his  kingdom,  with  the  rest 
of  Asia  Minor,  was  subjected  to  the  Boman  dominion. 

17.  Notwithstanding  the  wars  in  Asia  Minor,  the 
country  became  filled  with  people,  and  superb  cities 
rose  up  in  various  parts  of  it*  Ephesus,  situated  in 
Lydia,  was  a  splendid  place,  and  it  had  a  temple  so 
magnificent  that  it  was  called  one  of  the  seven  wonders 
of  the  world. 

13.  What  can  jou  say  of  Croesus?  14.  What  of  Lydia?  By  whom  was  it 
conquered?  15.  What  of  Pontus?  Mithridates  VII.?  16.  By  wliom  was  Mith- 
ridates conquered?     17.  "What  of  Ephesus  ? 


ASIA.  125 

18.  This  temple  was  one  hundred  and  twenty  years 
in  building ;  but  a  man  named  Erostratus,  wishing  to 
make  himself  remembered,  set  it  on  fire,  and  it  was 
burned  to  the  ground. 

19.  There  were  also  many  other  fine  cities  in  Asia 
Minor,  several  of  which  are  mentioned  in  the  New 
Testament.  Among  these  was  Tarsus,  the  birthplace 
of  Paul ;  also,  Pergamos,  Thyatira,  Sardis,  Philadelphia, 
and  Laodicea,  which  are  spoken  of  in  the  book  of  Rev- 
elations. 

20.  Through  the  labors  of  Paul,  Barnabas,  Silas, 
Timothy,  Luke,  and  perhaps  others,  Christianity  was 
planted  at  an  early  date  in  nearly  all  the  divisions  of 
Asia  Minor. 


CHAPTEE  XXXY.— Asia  Continued. 

A  hrief  Review  of  several  Nations. 

1.  I  HAVE  now  related  the  history  of  the  most  cele- 
brated countries  in  Asia.  But  there  are  several  other 
territories,  and  some  of  them  very  extensive,  of  which 

I  can  only  say  a  few  words  in  this  little  book. 

— — __ ^ — 

18.  Temple  of  Diana?     How  was  it  destroyed?     19.  What  other  cities  were 
there  in  Asia- Minor?     20.  Who  planted  Christianity  in  Asia  Minor? 


126  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

2.  In  ancient  times,  the  Scytliians  inhabited  the 
northern  parts  of  Asia.  They  were  a  warlike  and  a 
savage  people,  and  very  expert  with  the  bow  and 
arrow.  Many  of  the  Asiatic  and  European  kings 
endeavored  to  subdue  them,  but  were  generally  de- 
feated. 

3.  At  different  times,  vast  numbers  of  the  Scythians 
used  to  overrun  the  more  civilized  countries  that  lay 
to  the  south  of  them.  A  tribe  of  Scythians  founded 
the  powerful  empire  of  Parthia,  which  afterward  ex- 
tended its  sway  over  Persia  and  other  countries.  This 
empire  began  in  the  year  250  B.  C,  and  continued  five 
hundred  years. 

4.  In  more  modern  times,  the  regions  inhabited  by 
the  Scythians  have  been  called  Tartary.  The  people 
are  not  much  more  civilized  than  they  formerly  were. 
More  than  one  celebrated  conqueror  has  arisen  among 
the  Tartars. 

s  5.  India,  which  we  call  the  East  Indies,  was  very 
little  known  to  the  people  who  lived  to  the  westward 
in  ancient  times.  Semiramis  invaded  it,  and  likewise 
Alexander  the  Great,   and  several   other  conquerors. 

Chapter  XXXV.— 2.  What  of  the  Soythians?  Whciv  did  they  live  ?  ?>.  Wii^it 
of  Parthia?  4.  What  is  the  name  given  to  the  eoiin tries  forinerly  inhabited  by 
the  Scythians,  Partliians,  &c. ?  Doythe  Tartars  remain  nearly  i!ie  same  as  tiie 
ancient  Scythians,  Parthians.  &c.  ?  5,  What  of  India  or  Iluido.stan?  Who  in- 
vaded it? 


ASIA.  127 

The  Hindoos  of  tlie   present   day  are   an   interesting 
people,  but  addicted  to  idolatry. 

6.  India  consists  of  Hindostan,  and  of  an  extensive 
region  to  the  eastward  of  it.  Within  the  last  hnndred 
years,  the  English  have  gained  great  power  in  this 
part  of  the  world.  They  made  war  against  the  native 
rulers,  and  reduced  them  to  subjection.  The  Indians 
revolted  in  1857,  under  Nena  Sahib,  but  after  great 
slausfhter  on  both  sides,  were  ao-ain  reduced  to  sub- 
mission. 

7.  The  Turks,  or  Ottomans,  are  a  people  who  had 
their  origin  in  Asia.  But  as  they  have  been  settled  in 
Europe  during  several  centuries,  it  will  be  more  proper 
and  convenient  to  speak  of  them  in  the  history  of  that 
quarter  of  the  globe. 

8.  There  are  several  other  kingdoms  of  Asia,  of  which 
the  history  is  little  knoAvn,  or  quite  uninteresting. 
Among  these  are  Siam,  Cochin  China,  the  Birman  Em- 
pire, Cabul,  Beloochistan,  and  some  others.  Besides 
these,  the  northern  portions  of  Asia  are  occupied  by 
various  tribes  of  Tartars,  who  appear  to  have  wandered 
over  these  regions  for  ages,  leaving  no  story  behind 
them.  The  emperor  of  Russia  rules  over  these  vast 
dominions. 

6.  What  of  the  English  in  Hindostan  ?     What  of  the  Turks  or  Ottomans  ?     8- 
What  other  nations  of  Asia  are  there  of  which  the  liistory  is  little  known  ?    What 

of  tho  northern  portions  of  Asia  ? 


128 


UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


ADAM  AND  EVE  DRIVEN  FROM  EDEN. 

CHAPTER  XXXYL— Asia  Continued. 
H&view  of  the  History  of  Asia, 

1.  Let  us  now  go  back  and  review  the  history  of 
Asia.  In  this  quarter  of  the  globe  the  most  wonderful 
events  in  the  history  of  mankind  have  happened. 
Here  Adam  and  Eve  were  created  ;  here  they  sinned, 
^nd  here  they  were  driven  from  the  garden  of  Eden  ; 
and  on  the  banks  of  the  Euphrates  all  the  people  dwelt 
who  lived  before  the  flood. 

2.  It  was  in  Asia  that  the  ark  of  Noah  rested ;  and 


Chapter  XXXVI. — 1-4.  What  remarkable  events  have  occurred  in  Asia? 


ASIA.  129 

here  again  the  people  began  to  build  cities,  and  estab- 
lish nations.  Here  the  first  great  empire  arose.  Here 
the  Jewish  nation  had  its  origin ;  and  nearly  all  the 
events  related  in  the  Old  Testament  took  place  here. 

3.  It  was  in  Asia  that  the  religion  which  teaches  us 
that  there  is  only  one  living  and  true  God  had  its 
origin;  and  here  Jesus  Christ  appeared  to  establish 
this  religion,  and  seal  the  truth  of  revelation  with  his 
blood. 

4.  It  was  in  Asia  that  Mahomet  commenced  and 
established  his  religion,  which  is  now  believed  by  more 
than  half  the  human  race.  Several  other  religions  had 
their  origin  in  Asia. 

5.  In  Asia,  some  of  the  greatest  empires  have  ex- 
isted of  which  history  gives  us  any  account.  The 
Assyrian  empire,  as  I  have  before  said,  is  the  first  on 
record.  This  was  followed  by  the  Persian  empire, 
which  seemed  to  swallow  up  all  the  surrounding  na- 
tions. China,  the  most  populous  empire  on  the  globe, 
has  endured  longer  than  any  other. 

6.  The  Saracens,  who  extended  their  dominion  over 
many  countries,  had  their  origin  in  Asia.  The  Turks, 
who  have  reigned  over  Palestine,  Mesopotamia,  Syria, 
Asia  Minor,  a  part  of  Europe,  and  a  part  of  Africa, 

5.  What  is  the  first  empire  recorded  in  history  ?    What  of  the  Persian  empire  ? 
What  of  China  ?     6.  What  of  the  Saracens  ?     What  of  the  Turks  ? 


IBO  UNIYERSAL  HISTORY. 

for  nearly  dglit  hundred  years,  liad  their  origin  in 
Asia. 

7.  There  is  one  portion  of  Asia  which  is,  perhaps, 
more  full  of  historical  interest  than  any  other  on  the 
face  of  the  globe.  It  is  that  which  lies  between  the 
Mediterranean  on  the  west,  Armenia  on  the  north, 
Persia  on  the  east,  and  Arabia  on  the  south.  Here  is 
the  spot  on  which  the  first  inhabitants  dwelt ;  here 
was  the  place  where  the  first  nations  were  formed ; 
here  the  miracles  recorded  in  the  Bible  took  place ; 
here  the  prophets  dwelt ;  here  Jesus  Christ  lived, 
preached  and  died. 

8.  The  most  remarkable  feature  in  the  history  of 
Asia  is,  that  while  the  country  has  seen  many  revolu- 
tions and  changes,  the  condition  of  the  people  remains 
nearly  the  same.  In  our  country  and  in  Europe,  there 
is  a  constant  improvement.  Every  year  brings  some 
new  art,  invention,  or  institution,  for  the  benefit  of 
society. 

9.  But  in  Asia  it  is  not  so.  Whoever  is  king,  the 
people  are  but  slaves.  Education  makes  no  progress, 
liberty  is  unkno^vn,  truth  is  little  valued,  virtue  is  not 

*7.  What  portion  of  Asia  is  the  most  interesting  on  the  giobe  ?  Wliy  is  this 
portion  of  the  country  thus  interesting?  8.  What  is  remarkable  in  the  history  of 
Asia?  What  is  said  of  this  country  and  of  Europe?  9.  How  does  Asia  differ 
from  Europe  and  America? 


ASIA.  131 

prized,  and  tliat  thing  wliich.  we  call  comfort,  and 
whicli  makes  our  liomes  so  dear  to  us,  is  not  to  be 
found  in  tliis  vast  country,  so  favored  by  Providence, 
and  so  richly  endowed  by  nature. 

10.  It  would  seem  that  the  real  difficulty  in  Asia  is, 
that  while  they  are  destitute  of  the  knowledge  of  the 
gospel,  they  have  i^^^W  f^l^e  religions.  Mahometan- 
ism  prevails  #^fe^ela*  part  ^  tfiis  p^-tion  of  the 
globe ;  and  it  is  remarkable  that  no  country,  the  people 
of  which  believe  in  this  false  religion,  have  ever  been 
happy  or  well  governed. 

11.  The  Hindoos  believe  in  Brahminism,  which 
teaches  them  that  there  is  one  principal  deity,  called 
Brahma,  and  several  other  inferior  deities,  called  Vish- 
nu, Siva,  &c.  They  make  strange  images  of  these,  and 
worship  them.  The  priests  are  called  Brahmins,  and 
instruct  the  people  in  many  idle  ceremonies  and  cruel 
superstitions. 

12.  Besides  these  religions,  there  is  the  worship  of 
the  Grand  Lama,  to  whom  a  temple  is  erected  in  Tar- 
tary.  The  Chinese  believe  in  Boodh,  and  other  nations 
believe  in  other  deities. 

10.  What  is  the  conditiou  of  Asia  ?  What  of  Mahometaiiism  ?  What  is  a  re- 
markable fact?  11.  In  what  religion  do  the  Hindoos  believe?  What  does  Brah- 
minism teach?  What  of  the  Brahmins?  12,  Where  is  the  temple  of  the  Grand 
Lama?    In  what  deity  do  the  Chinese  believe  ?    What  of  other  nations  ? 


132 


UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


viSHiru. 


13.  Thus  nearly  tlie  whole  of  Asia  is  involved  in 
darkness  as  to  the  character  of  God,  and  the  destiny  of 
man ;  and  thus  we  see  that  the  conduct  of  mankind  is 
such  as  might  be  expected  where  such  ignorance  and 
such  €rror  prevail. 

13.  In  what  error  is  nearly  the  whole  of  Asia  involved?    What  do  we  see  as 
lespects  the  condition  of  mankind  ? 


ASIA.  133 


CHAPTER  XXXYII.— Asia  Continued. 
Chronology  of  Aula. 

1.  Chronology  is  a  record  of  tlie  dates  wlien  histor- 
ical events  happened.  By  studying  chronology,  you 
therefore  learn  the  time  at  which  the  creation  took 
place,  when  Abraham  went  from  Chaldea  to  Canaan, 
when  Christ  was  born,  and  other  things. 

2.  Now  in  order  to  have  a  clear  view  of  the  prog- 
ress of  history,  it  is  very  important  to  place  before  us  a 
table  of  chronology ;  and  if  we  wish  to  remember  his- 
tory for  a  long  time,  it  is  well  to  ^:l  this  table  in  the 
memory. 

3.  I  will  now  give  you  a  brief  view  of  the  chronology 
of  Asia.  By  this  you  will  notice  some  curious  things. 
You  will  see  that  Solomon  and  Chaus  of  China  lived 
at  the  same  time ;  that  Solomon  began  the  temple 
exactly  three  thousand  years  after  the  creation,  cfec. 

Before  Christ.  Before  Christ. 


Creation  of  the  -world 4004 

Deluge 2348 

Confusion  of  tongues 2247 


Ashur  founds  the  empire  of  Assyria,  2229 
Ninias  king  of  Assyria,  began  to 
reign. 2000 


Chapter  XXXVII. — 1.  What  is  chronology?  Its  use?  2.  What  benefit  can 
we  gain  by  placing  before  us  a  chronological  table  ?  What  is  the  advantage  of 
fixing  a  chronological  table  in  the  raemory?  3.  What  curious  things  do  we  learn 
from  a  chronological  view  of  Asia  ? 


134 


UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


Before  Christ. 

Abraham  born 1996 

Abraham  sets  out  from  Chaldea  to 

go  to  Canaan 1921 

Jacob  removes  with  his  family  to 

Egypt 1705 

Death  of  Jacob 1689 

Death  of  Joseph ..    ...    1635 

Moses  born 1570 

Departure   of  the    Israelites   from 

Egypt 1491 

Death  of  Moses 1447 

Death  of  Joshua 1426 

Saul  proclaimed  king  of  Israel.  ...   1100 

King  David  born 1085 

Solomon  began  to  reign 1015 

Temple  of  Solomon  built 1004 

Chaus,  emperor  of  China,  began  to 

reign 1000 

Death  of  Sardanapalus — First  Assy- 
rian empire  overthrown 876 

Jonah,  the  prophet,  sent  to  preach 

to  the  Xinevites 806 

Ardysus,  first  king  of  Lydia,   in- 

Asia  Minor 797 

Salmaneser    conquered   the   king- 
dom of  Israel,   and  carried  the 
chief  inhabitants  into  captivity..      721 
Isdigertes  made  king  of  Persia.  . . .     630 
Second  Assyrian  empire  overthrown,  606 
Lydia  conquered  by  Cyrus,  king  of 

Persia 548 

Babylon  captured  by  Cyrus 538 

Jews  return  from  Babylon 536 

Persian  empire  established  by  Cy- 
rus the  G-reat 536 

Death  of  Cyrus. 529 

Cambyses  succeeds  his  father  Cyrus,    529 
Darius  began  to  reign 522 


Before  Christ 
Xerxes  defeats  Leonidas  at   Ther- 

mopylce 480 

Death  of  Xerxes 465 

Alexander  invades  Persia 330 

Kingdom  of  Syria  founded  by  Se- 

leucus 312 

Pontus  becomes  independent  under 

Mithridates  II 309 

Empire  of  Parthia  founded 250 

Artaxares  made  king  of  Persia. . . .  230 
Judas  Maccabseus  drives  the  Syrians 

out  of  the  Jewish  kingdom 166 

Chang,  emperor  of  Cliina 67 

Pontus,  with  other  parts  of  Asia 

Minor,  conquered  by  the  Romans,  64 
Syria  and  Canaan  conquered  by  the 

Romans 61 

Herod,  king  of  the  Jews ,  37 

Vati,  emperor  of  China 33 

A.  D. 

Jesus  Christ  born* 0 

Christ  crucified 33 

Paul  arrives  at  Rome 61 

Destruction  of  Jerusalem  by  Titus,  70 
Si-given,  emperor  of  China,  began 

to  reign 617 

Birth  of  Mahomet 570 

Mahomet  obliged  to  fly  from  his  en- 
emies f 622 

Death  of  Mahomet 632 

Saracen  empire  established 638 

Chosroes  the  Great,  king  of  Persia, 

began  to  reign. ...    600 

Bagdad,  the  seat  of  the   caliphs, 

founded 672 

Chwang-tsong,  emperor  of  China, 
began  to  reign 1037 


*  Jesus  Christ  was  born  40!i4  years  after  the  creation  ;  this  period  Is  called  the  Christian  era. 
It  is  the  custom  in  all  ('hristian  countries  to  date  from  the  birth  of  (  hrist.  B.  C.  means 
before  Christ;  A.  C  means  after  (hrist;  A.  D.  stands  for  Anno  Domini,  that  is,  in  the  year  of 
our  Lord.  Thus  we  say,  A.  D.  1861,  by  which  we  mean,  in  the  year  of  our  Lord,  or  fi-om  the 
birth  of  Christ,  1361  years. 

t  This  Is  called  the  Ueglra,  and  la  the  era  from  wMch  the  Turks  date,  as  we  do  from  the 
birth  of  Christ. 


ASIA. 


135 


A.  D. 

Genghis  Khan  invades  China  . . .  1209 
Saracen  empire  overturned  by  the 

Turks 1258 

Jnpan  discovered  by  Europeans. . .  1400 
Shah  Abbas  ascended  the  throne  of 

Persia 1589 

ShahHusseyn  "  "  1694 

Kouli  Klian  made  king  of  Persia . .  1730 
yonsr-tching   came   to  the  throne 

of  China 1737 


A.  D. 

Taou-kwang  ascended  the  throne  of 

China 1820 

War  between  China  and  Gt.  Britain,  1840 
Peace         "  "  "  1842 

Treaty  between  Ciiina  and  the  U.  S.,  1844 

Insurrection  in  Cliina 1852 

Ccminodore  Perry  visits  Japan  . . .    1853 
War  between  China  and  Gt.  Britain,  1858 
A  Japanese  Embassy  visits  the  Uni- 
ted States ]  860 


Questions  ox  the  Map  op  Africa. — How  is  Africa  bounded  on  the  north? 
South?  Ease?  "West?  What  is  the  most  northern  point?  The  most  eastern? 
The  most  soutliern?  Ti»e  most  western?  In  what  part  is  Egypt?  Wliere 
is  tlie  Desert  of  Sahara  ?  Barharj'?  Alexandria?  Ethiopia?  Guinea?  "Wiiich 
way  and  into  what  does  the  Nile  run?  "Where  are  the  mountains  of  the  Moon? 
Where  is  Liberia?    The  island  of  Madagascar ?    The  Cape  of  Good  Hope? 


AFRICA. 


137 


STTJDYma  THE  MAP  OF  AFRICA. 

CHAPTEE.  XXXYIII.— Africa. 

Ahont  the  Geograj)hy  of  Africa. — The  Inlidbitants. 

1.  Afkica  is  one  of  tlie  four  quarters  of  tlie  eartli. 
It  is  an  immense  extent  of  country,  and  includes  nearly 
one-fourth  of  all  the  land  on  the  globe.  It  is  separated 
from  America  hy  the  Atlantic  Ocean ;  the  nearest  part 
is  about  three  thousand  miles  from  New  York  or 
Boston. 

2.  It  is  divided  from  Europe  by  the  Mediterranean 


Chapter  XXXYIII. — 1.  What  of  Africa  ?  How  is  it  separated  from  America  ? 
How  far  is  the  nearest  poiut  from  New  York  or  Boston?  2.  How  is  it  divided 
from  Europe  ? 


188  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

Sea,  and  from  Asia  by  the  Red  Sea.  It  is,  however, 
attached  to  Asia  by  a  narrow  neck  of  land,  called  the 
isthmus  of  Suez. 

3.  Africa  is  less  known  than  any  other  portion  of 
the  globe.  Many  parts  of  the  interior  have  never  been 
visited  by  Europeans,  for  the  greater  part  of  the  inhab- 
itant^ are  negroes,  of  which  there  are  many  tribes. 
Some  of  these  are  intelligent,  and  live  tolerably  well, 
but  the  gi^eater  part  are  in  a  savage  or  a  barbarous  state. 

4.  The  climate  being  warm,  they  need  little  shelter 
or  clothing.  Their  houses  are  therefore  poor  mud 
huts,  or  slight  tenements  made  of  leaves  or  branches  of 
trees.  Their  dress  is  often  but  a  single  piece  of  cloth 
tied  around  the  waist.  They  are,  however,  a  cheerful 
race,  and  spend  much  of  their  time  in  various  amuse- 
ments. 

5.  Besides  the  negroes,  there  are  several  other  races 
of  Africans.  The  inhabitants  from  Egypt  to  Abyssinia 
appear  to  consist  of  the  original  Egyptian  people, 
mixed  with  Turks,  Arabs  and  others.  The  people  of 
the  Barbary  states  are  the  descendants  of  the  ancient 
Carthaginians,  mingled  with  the  Saracens  who  con- 
quered the  country,  together  with  Turks  and  Arabs. 

From  Asia  ?  What  neck  of  land  joins  it  to  Asia  ?  3.  Is  Africa  well  known  ? 
What  of  the  inhabitants?  4.  What  of  the  climate?  Houses?  Dress?  What  of 
the  negroes  ?     5.  What  of  other  races  ?     Describe  them. 


AFRICA.  139 

6.  The  immense  desert  of  Sahara,  with  all  the  ad- 
jacent regions,  appears  to  be  occupied  by  wandering 
tribes  of  Arabs,  who  move  from  place  to  place  with 
their  horses  and  camels,  like  the  2:>eople  of  Arabia,  for 
pasturage  or  plunder. 

7.  Africa  may  be  considered  as,  on  the  whole,  the 
/east  civilized  portion  of  the  earth.  The  people  are 
mostly  Mahometans,  and  one-half  of  them  are  nearly  in 
a  savage  state.     The  rest  are  in  a  barbarous  condition. 

8.  The  central  parts  of  Africa  abound  in  wild  ani- 
mals, such  as  lions,  panthers,  leopards,  elephants,  rhi- 
noceroses, zebras,  and  quaggas.  The  woods  are  filled 
with  chattering  monkeys,  the  thickets  are  infested  with 
monstrous  serpents,  ostriches  roam  over  the  deserts, 
various  kinds  of  anteloj^es  and  deer  in  vast  herds  graze 
upon  the  plains,  hippopotami  are  seen  in  the  lakes  and 
rivers,  and  crocodiles  abound  in  the  stagnant  waters. 
Wild  birds  of  every  hue  meet  the  eye  of  the  traveller 
in  nearly  all  parts  of  the  country. 

6.  What  of  the  desert  of  Sahara?  "7.  What  may  Africa  be  considered?  State 
of  the  people  ?     8.  What  of  animals  in  Central  Africa  ? 


140 


UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


MAP   OF  EOYPT. 


Questions  on  the  Map. —  Hew  is  Kgypt  bounded?  Which  way  does  the  N^ile 
flow?  Where  does  it  empty?  Where  is  Dendera?  Medinet?  Alexandria? 
\v<)  ?  Damiettu?  What  isthmus  joins  Egypt  to  Arabia?  What  two  great  seas 
•  li' ;u- J*:gypt?  Where  are  the  ruins  of  Thebes  ?  Of  Metnp^his?  Where  is  Mt 
iliiii?     Lake  Mareotis?     Mt.  Boomheh? 


AFRICA.  141 

CHAPTER  XXXIX.— Africa  Continued. 
Early  Sovereigns  of  Egypt. 

1.  The  natives  of  Africa  are  supposed  to  be  descended 
from  Noah's  son  Ham,  wlio  went  thither  and  settled  in 
Egypt  after  the  building  of  the  tower  of  Babel,  this 
country  being  near  the  land  of  Shinar.  The  kingdom 
of  Egypt  is  very  ancient,  and  was  founded  by  Menes, 
one  of  the  children  of  Ham,  2188  B.  C.  In  the  Bible, 
he  is  called  Misraim. 

2.  Egypt  is  bounded  north  by  the  Mediterranean 
Sea,  east  by  the  Red  Sea,  south  by  Nubia,  and  west  by 
the  desert.  The  Nile  runs  through  the  midst  of  Egypt, 
from  the  south  to  the  north.  This  river  overflows  once 
a  year,  and  thus  fertilizes  the  coimtry,  for  it  very  sel- 
dom rains  in  Egypt. 

3.  Menes,  or  Misraim,  the  first  king  of  Egypt,  turned 
aside  the  Nile  from  its  original  channel,  and  built  the 
city  of  Memphis  where  the  river  had  formerly  flowed. 
He  was  so  great  a  monarch  that  the  people  worshipped 
him  as  a  god  after  his  death. 

'    Chapter  XXXIX. — 1.  From  whom  are  the  natives  of  Africa  descended  ?     By 
-whom  and   when  was   Egypt  founded?      What  of  Menes?     2.  How   is  Egypt 
bounded?     What  of  the  Nile?     Does  it  often  rain  in  Egypt?     3.  Where  and  by 
whom  was  Memphis  built  ?     What  was  thought  of  Menes  ?  * 


142  Ul>nVERSAL  HISTORY. 

4.  The  history  of  Egypt  is  very  obscure  during  a 
considerable  time  after  the  reign  of  Menes.  From  the 
year  2084  to  the  year  1825  before  the  Christian  era,  it 
was  governed  by  rulers  who  led  the  lives  of  shepherds, 
and  were  therefore  called  shepherd  kings.  These  kings 
^v^ere  afterward  driven  from  Egypt.  An  Ethiopian 
woman,  named  Mtocris,  became  queen  of  the  country, 
in  the  year  1678  before  the  Christian  era.  Her  brother 
had  been  murdered  by  the  Egyptians,  and  she  resolved 
to  avenge  him. 

5.  For  this  purpose  queen  Nitocris  built  a  palace 
under  ground,  and  invited  the  murderers  of  her  brother 
to  a  banquet.  The  subterranean  hall  where  the  ban- 
quet was  prepared  was  brilliantly  illuminated  with 
torches.  The  guests  were  the  principal  men  in  the 
kingdom. 

6.  Tlie  scene  was  magnificent,  as  they  sat  feasting 
along  the  table.  But  suddenly  a  rushing  and  roaring 
sound  was  heard  overhead,  and  a  deluge  of  water 
burst  into  the  hall.  Queen  Mtocris  had  caused  a 
river  to  flow  through  a  secret  passage,  and  it  extin- 
guished the  torches,  and  drowned  all  .the  company  at 
the  banquet. 


4.  What  of  the  history  of  Epypt?     What  of  the  shepherd  kings?    What  of  Ni- 
tocris?     5,  6.  How  did  she  revenge  her  brother's  death  ? 


AFRICA.  143 

7.  The  most  renowned  monai'cli  tliat  ever  reigned 
over  Egypt  was  Sesostris.  This  king  formed  the  design 
of  conquering  the  world,  and  set  out  from  Egypt  with 
more  than  half  a  million  of  foot  soldiers,  twentyrfour 
thousand  horsemen,  and  twenty-seven  thousand  armed 
chariots. 

8.  His  ambitious  projects  were  partially  successful, 
lie  made  great  conquests,  and  wherever  he  went  he 
caused  marble  pillars  to  be  erected,  and  inscriptions  to 
be  engraved  on  them,  so  that  future  ages  might  not 
forget  his  renown. 

9.  The  following  was  the  inscription  on  most  of  the 
pillars:  —  "Sesostris,  king  of  kings,  has  cois^quered 
THIS  TERRITORY  BY  HIS  ARMS."  But  the  marble  pillars 
have  long  ago  crumbled  into  dust,  or  been  buried  under 
the  earth;  and  the  history  of  Sesostris  is  so  obscure, 
that  some  writers  have  even  doubted  whether  he  ever 
made  any  conquests  at  all, 

10.  But  other  writers  assure  us  that  he  returned  to 
Egypt  after  his  wars,  bringing  with  him  a  multitude 
Df  captives,  and  long  trains  of  camels  laden  with  trea- 
sure, and  that  he  then  built  magnificent  temples,  and 
constructed  canals  and  causeways. 

t.  "What  of  Sesostris?  His  army?  8.  What  of  liis  conqtiests?  9.  "What  inscrip- 
tion was  engraved  on  the  marble  pillars  raised  by  Sesostris?  Are  the  pillars 
still  standing?     What  do  some   writers  doubt*?     10.  "What   do  others  say? 


144  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

11.  When  Sesostris  went  to  worship  in  the  temple, 
he  rode  in  a  chai'iot  which  was  drawn  by  captive  kings. 
They  were  harnessed  like  horses,  four  abreast;  and 
their  royal  robes  trailed  in  the  dust  as  they  tugged  the 
heavy  chariot  along.  But  at  length  the  proud  Sesos- 
tris grew  old  and  blind.  He  could  no  longer  look 
round  him,  and  see  captive  kmgs  drawing  his  chariot, 
or  kneeling  at  his  footstool.  He  then  became  utterly 
miserable,  and  committed  suicide. 

11.  How  was  the  chariot  of  Sesostris  drawn  ?    What  was  the  fate  of  this  des- 
potic king? 


AFRICA. 


145 


SPHYNX,    PYRAMIDS,   AND  EUINS  OF  EGYPT. 


CHAPTEE  XL.— Africa  Continued. 

Egyptian  ArcMtecture  and  Sculpture, 

1.  The  ancient  history  of  Egypt  is  so  obscure,  and 
yet  so  full  of  wonderful  tales,  tliat  we  might  doubt  it 
altogether,  and  believe  it  but  the  marvellous  invention 
^  of  fanciful  story-tellers,  were  it  not  for  the  vast  ruins 
and  stupendous  monuments  still  to  be  found  in  differ- 
ent parts  of  the  country.  These  show  that  many  ages 
since,  between  three  and  four  thousand  years  ago,  this 
country  was  filled  with  millions  of  people,  and  that 

Chapter  XL. — 1.  What  of  the  ancient  history  of  Egypt  ?     "What  of  ruins  and 
monumcnis  ?  .  What  do  they  prove  ? 


146  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

there  were  cities  here  of  tlie  most  wonderful  magnifi- 
cence. 

2.  Thebes  appears  to  have  been  more  magnificent 
than  any  other  city,  either  in  ancient  or  modern  times. 
It  was  called  the  city  of  a  hundred  gates ;  and  such 
was  the  immense  population,  that  through  each  of  these 
gates,  in  time  of  war,  marched  two  hundred  armed 
chariots,  and  two  thousand  soldiers. 

3.  Thebes  was  ruined  in  the  time  of  Cambyses,  king 
of  Pei^ia,  who  lived  about  twenty-four  hundred  years 
ago.  Yet  the  remains  of  the  city  are  still  visible, 
scattered  over  a  space  of  twenty-seven  miles  on  each 
side  of  the  Nile.  Some  of  the  pillars  of  the  temj)les 
are  eleven  feet  in  diameter. 

4.  One  of  the  Egyptian  kings  caused  his  subjects  to 
dig  a  great  lake,  forty-five  miles  in  circumference,  and 
almost  as  deep  as  the  ocean.  Another  king  constructed 
a*labyrinth  of  marble,  containing  three  thousand  cham- 
bers, fifteen  hundred  of  which  were  under  ground. 

5.  In  the  upper  chambers  of  this  labyrinth  were  kept 
the  sacred  crocodiles,  and  till  the  other  animals  which 
the  Egyptians  worshipped.  In  the  subterranean  cham- 
bers lay  the  dead  kings  of  Egypt. 

2.  What  of  Thebes  ?  Its  population  ?  3.  Who  destroyed  Thebes?  Remains? 
Pilhire-?  4.  Describe  the  works  of  soine  of  the  kings.  What  of  the  labyrinth? 
5.  What  were  kept  in  tlie  labyrinth  ? 


AFRICA.  147 

6.  The  catacombs  are  likewise  veiy  wonderful. 
They  are  galleries  hewn  out  of  the  rock,  and  extend  a 
great  way  beneath  the  ground.  The  dead  bodies  of 
persons  who  died  thousands  of  years  ago  are  found  in 
these  catacombs,  and  they  are  nearly  as  well  preserved 
now  as  when  they  Avere  first  buried.  These  are  called 
mummies ;  and  some,  supposed  to  be  three  thousand 
years  old,  have  been  brought  to  this  country. 

7.  Every  body  has  heard  of  the  pyramids  of  Egypt. 
These  immense  edifices  are  still  standing  on  the  banks 
of  the  Nile.  The  largest  is  -B^ve  hundred  feet  high,  and 
covers  eleven  acres  of  groundr* 

8.  The  pyramids  are  so  old  that  it  is  impossible  to 
tell  when  they  were  erected,  or  by  whom.  It  is  gene- 
rally supposed  that  the  ancient  kings  of  Egypt  in- 
tended them  as  their  sepulchres,  thinking  that  thus 
they  should  be  famous  forever.  But  though  the  pyra- 
mids have  not  decayed,  the  names  of  those  kings  are 
forgotten. 

9.  The  sphynx  is  one  of  the  most  curious  among  the 
Egyptian  antiquities.  It  was  originally  the  gigantic 
head  of  a  woman,  on  the  body  of  a  lion ;  but  the  lower 
part  is  now  buried  in  the  sand.     The  part  wdiich  re- 


6.  Describe  the  catacombs.    What  are  mummies?    t,  8.  What  of  the  pyramids'}- 
What  was  prob;iMy  the  cause  of  their  erection?     9.  Describe  the  sphynx. 


148 


UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


mains  above  ground  is  tlie  head  and  neck.  These  are 
twenty-seven  feet  liigh,  and  are  made  of  solid  rock. 
At  a  distance,  it  looks  as  if  a  great  flat-nosed  woman 
were  risincr  out  of  the  sand. 

10.  The  ruins  of  Luxor,  near  ancient  Thebes,  are  so 
grand  as  to  strike  the  beholder  with  awe.  The  re- 
mains of  one  of  the  temples  are  perhaps  the  most 
remarkable  relics  of  antiquity. 


IMAGE  OF   OSIRIS. 


IMAGE   OF  ISIS. 


11.  At  the  time  when  they  constructed  these  mar- 
vellous works,  the  ancient  Egyptians  possessed  more 
learning  and  science  than   any  other  people.     Their 

10.  What  of  Uie  ruin;?  of  Luxor?     11.  What  of  the   ]*>yptiaii.s  at  the  time  we 
aru  speaking  ot?     jlow  were  they  looked  upou  by  the  I't'ople  of  other  couulries? 


AFRICA.    ■  149 

superior  knowledge  caused  tliem  to  be  looked  upon  as 
magicians  by  the  people  of  other  countries. 

12.  Still,  the  Egyptians  had  many  absurd  supersti- 
tions. Their  chief  god  was  Isis,  and  another  was  Osi- 
ris. Of  these  they  made  strange  images,  and  wor- 
shipped them.  Isis  was  greatly  reverenced,  and  the 
people  dedicated  many  splendid  temples  to  its  wor- 
ship. 


CHAPTEK  XLL— Africa  Continued. 
The  Ptolemies  and  Queen  Cleopatra. 

1.  In  the  history  of  the  Jews  I  have  told  of  their 
bondage  in  Egypt,  and  of  their  miraculous  escape.  A 
long  while  afterward,  an  Egyptian  king  named  Shishak 
took  Jerusalem,  and  robbed  Solomon's  temple  o^  its 
treasures. 

2.  A  very  famous  king  of  Egypt  was  named  Ameno- 
phis.  He  is  supposed  to  be  the  same  as  Memnon,  in 
honor  of  whom  a  temple  with  a  gigantic  statue  was 
erected,  of  which  some  remains  are  still  to  be  seen  at 

12.  "What  of  tlie  superstitions  of  the  Egj^ptians?     Isis  and  Osiris? 
Chapter  XLI. — 1.  Who  was  Shishak?     What  did  lie  do?     2,  Who  was  Arae- 
nophis?     What  of  the  statue  of  Memnon? 


150  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

Thebes.  This  statue  was  said  to  utter  a  joyful  sound 
at  sunrise,  and  a  mournful  sound  when  the  sun  set. 
Some  modern  travellers  imagine  that  they  have  heard 
it.     This,  however,  is  absurd. 

3.  In  the  year  525  before  the  Christian  era,  Egypt 
^\'as  conquered  by  Cambyses,  king  of  Persia.  He 
compelled  Psammenitus,  who  Avas  then  king  of  Egypt, 
to  drink  bull's  blood.  It  operated  as  a  poison,  and 
caused  his  death. 

4.  Three  hundred  and  thirty-two  years  before  the 
Christian  era,  Egypt  was  conquered  by  Alexander  the 
Great,  king  of  Macedon.  Here  he  built  a  famous  city, 
called  Alexandria,  which  was  for  many  centuries  one 
of  the  most  splendid  places  in  the  world.  But  the 
ancient  city  is  in  ruins,  and  modern  Alexandria  is  far 
inferior  to  it. 

5.  Alexander  was  buried  at  Alexandria,  in  a  tomb 
cut  out  of  one  vast  stone;  this  has  been  carried  to 
London  within  a  few  years,  and  may  now  be  seen  there. 

6.  He  appointed  Ptolemy,  one  of  his  generals,  to  be 
ruler  of  the  country.  From  Ptolemy  were  descended 
a  race  of  kings,  all  of  whom  were  likewise  called 
Ptolemy.     They  reigned  over  Egypt  two  hundred  and 

3.  When  and  by  whom  was  Egypt  conquered?  Fate  of  Psammenitus?  4. 
When  did  Alexander  conquer  Egypt  ?  5.  What  of  Alexander's  burial  ?  6.  What 
of  Ptolemy  and  his  descendants? 


151 

ninety-four  years.  The  last  of  these  kings  was  Ptolemy 
Dionysius,  whose  own  wife  made  war  against  him.  A 
battle  was  fought,  in  which  Ptolemy  Dionysius  was 
defeated.  He  attempted  to  escape,  but  w^as  drowned 
in  the  Nile.  His  wife,  whose  name  was  Cleopatra, 
then  became  sole  ruler  of  Egypt. 

Y.  She  was  one  of  the  most  beautifal  women  that 
ever  lived,  and  her  talents  and  accomplishments  were 
equal  to  her  personal  beauty.  But  she  was  very 
wicked.  Among  other  horrid  crimes,  Cleopatra  poi- 
soned her  brother,  who  was  only  eleven  years  old. 
Yet,  though  all  the  world  knew  what  an  abandoned 
WTetch  she  was,  the  greatest  heroes  could  not  or  would 
not  resist  the  enticements  of  her  beauty. 

8.  When  Mark  Antony,  a  Roman  General,  had  de- 
feated Brutus  and  Cassius  at  Philippi,  in  Greece,  he 
summoned  Cleopatra  to  come  to  Cilicia,  on  the  north- 
eastern coast  of  the  Mediterranean.  He  intended  to 
punish  her  for  having  assisted  Brutus.  ^ 

9.  As  soon  as  Cleopatra  received  the  summons,  she 
hastened  to  obey.  She  went  on  board  a  splendid  ves- 
sel, which  was  richly  adorned  with  gold.     The   sails 

How  long  did  they  reign  in  Egypt?  Wtio  was  Ptolemy  Dion3^sius  ?  His  wife  ? 
7.  What  of  Cleopatra?  What  cruelty  did  she  couunit?  What  made  Gleopat'-a 
irresistible?  8.  Who  was  Mark  Antony  ?  Why  did  he  wish  to  punish  CJ-'-opat- 
ra  ?     9-11.  Give  an  account  of  the  arrival  of  Cleopatra  at  Cilicia. 


152 


UNIVERSAL  HISTORTir 


were  made  of  tlie  costliest  silk.  Instead  of  rough  sun- 
burnt sailors,  the  crew  consisted  of  lovely  girls,  who 
rowed  with  silver  oars ;  and  their  strokes  kept  time  to 
melodious  music. 

10.  Queen  Cleopatra  reclined  on  the  deck,  beneath  a 
silken  awning.  In  this  manner  she  went  sailing  along 
the  river  Cydnus.  Her  vessel  was  so  magnificent,  and 
she  herself  so  lovely,  that  the  whole  spectacle  appeared 
like  a  vision. 


CLEOPATBA   IN    EBB    BARQS. 


11.  Mark  Antony  was  first  warned  of  her  approach 
t)y  the  smell  of  delicious  perfumes,  which  the  wind 
wafted  from  the  silken  sails  of  the  vessel.     He  next 


AFRICA.  153 

heard  the  distant  strains  of  music,  and  saw  the  gleam- 
ing of  the  silver  oars. 

12.  But  when  he  beheld  the  beauty  of  the  Egyptian 
queen,  he  thought  of  nothing  else.  Till  Mark  Antony 
met  Cleopatra,  he  had  been  an  ambitious  man  and  a 
valiant  warrior.  But  from  that  day  forward,  he  was 
nothing  but  her  slave. 

13.  Owing  to  Cleopatra's  misconduct  and  his  own, 
Antony  was  defeated  by  Octavius,  another  Ronian 
general,  at  Actium,  in  Greece.  He  then  killed  himself, 
by  falling  on  his  sword.  Cleopatra  knew  that  if  Octa- 
vius took  her  alive,  he  would  carry  her  to  Rome,  and 
expose  her  to  the  derision  of  the  populace. 

14.  She  resolved  not  to  endure  this  ignominy.  Now 
in  Egypt  there  is  a  venomous  reptile,  called  an  asp,  the 
bite  of  which  is  mortal,  but  not  painful.  Cleopatra 
applied  one  of  these  reptiles  to  her  bosom.  In  a  little 
while  her  body  was  benumbed,  and  her  heart  ceased  to 
beat ;  and  thus  died  the  beautiful  and  wicked  queen 
of  Egypt.  This  event  occurred  thirty  years  before 
Christ. 

15.  The  story  of  queen  Cleopatra  is  very  instructive. 

12.  What  was  the  character  of  Antony  till  he  met  Cleopatra?  13.  Where  was 
Antony  defeated?  Who  was  Octavius?  Fate  of  Antony  ?  Why  did  Cleopatra 
determine  to  kill  herself?  14.  What  caused  her  death?  How  long  was  this 
before  Christ  ? 


154  '  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

It  shows  that  a  person  on  whom  ho^ven  has  bestowed 
the  richest  gifts  may  use  them  to  cause  mischief  and 
misery  to  all  around. 


CHAPTER  XLIL— Africa  Continued. 
Sequel  of  the  Egyptian  History, 

1.  After  the  death  of  Cleopatra,  Egypt  became  a 
province  of  the  Roman  empire ;  and  it  continued  to 
belong  to  that  empire,  and  to  the  portion  of  it  called 
the  Eastern  empire,  till  the  year  640  after  the  Chris- 
tian era.  It  was  then  conquered  by  the  Saracens. 
It  remained  under  their  government  upward  of  six  cen- 
turies. 

2.  The  Saracen  sovereigns  were  dethroned  by  the 
Mamelukes,  whom  they  had  trained  up  to  be  their 
guards.  The  Mamelukes  ruled  Eg;y^pt  till  the  year 
1517,  when  they  were  conquered  by  the  Turks.  They 
kept  possession  of  Egypt  till  the  year  1798.  It  was 
then  invaded  by  Napoleon  Bonaparte,  with  an  army 
of  forty  thousand  Frenchmen. 

Chapter  XLII. — 1.  "What  was  the  state  of  Egypt  from  Cleopatra's  death  to  its 
subjugation  by  tlie  Saracens?  How  long  did  they  govern  Egypt?  2.  What  of  the 
Mamelukes?  Wlieu  and  how  long  did  the  Turks  govern  Egypt  ?  "What  happened 
in  1708? 


AFRICA.  155 

3.  The  Turks,  ever  since  their  conquest  of  Egypt, 
/lad  kept  a  body  of  Mamelukes  in  their  service ;  these 
made  a  desperate  resistance.  A  battle  was  fought 
near  the  pyramids,  in  which  many  of  them  were  slain, 
and  others  were  drowned  in  the  Nile.  Not  long  after 
this  victory,  Bonaparte  went  back  to  France,  and  left 
General  Kleber  in  command  of  the  French  army. 

4.  Greneral  Kleber  was  a  brave  man,  but  a  severe 
one,  and  his  severity  cost  him  his  life.  He  -had  or- 
dered an  old  Mussulman,  named  the  Sheik  Sada,  to  be 
bastinadoed  on  the  soles  of  his  feet.  Shortly  after- 
ward, when  the  general  was  in  a  mosque,  a  fierce  Arab 
rushed  upon  him,  and  killed  him  with  a  dagger. 

5.  In  1801,  the  English  sent  Sir  Ralph  Abercrom- 
bie  with  an  army  to  drive  the  French  out  of  Egypt. 
General  Menou  was  then  the  French  commander.  Sir 
Ralph  Abercrombie  beat  him  at  the  battle  of  Aboukir, 
but  was  himself  mortally  wounded. 

6.  In  the  course  of  the  same  year,  the  French  army 
sailed  from  Egypt  back  to  France.  The  inhabitants 
lamented  their  departure,  for  the  French  generals  had 
ruled  them  with  more  justice  and  moderation  than  their 
old  masters,  the  Turks.     Egypt  is  now  governed  by  a 

3.  What  battle  was  fought?  What  of  Bonaparte  after  the  victory?  4.  What  of 
General  Kleber?  5.  What  took  place  in  1801  ?  6.  What  happened  in  the  same 
year  ?    Why  were  the  Egyptians  sorry  to  have  the  French  leave  them  ? 


156  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

sovereign,  wlio  bears  the  name  of  pacha,  and  the  coun- 
try is  no  longer  a  part  of  the  Tm^kish  empire. 

Y.  The  present  capital  of  Egypt  is  Grand  Cairo.  It 
is  much  inferior  to  what  it  was  in  former  times,  but 
still  contains  about  three  hundred  thousand  inhabit- 
ants. Alexandria,  built  by  Alexander  the  Great,  as  I 
have  before  said,  is  now  much  reduced,  but  the  ruins 
around  it  show  that  it  was  once  a  splendid  city. 
There  is  no  part  of  the  world  that  seems  more  gloomy 
to  the  traveller  than  Egypt.  The  present  aspect  of  the 
towns  and  cities  is  that  of  poverty  in  the  midst  of 
ruins,  which  speak  of  wealth  and  splendor  that  have 
long  since  departed. 


CHAPTER  XLIIL— Africa  Continued. 

Summary  of  Ethiopian  Matters, 

1.  All  the  interior  parts  of  Africa  were  anciently 
called  Ethiopia.  But  properly  speaking,  Ethiopia 
comprised  only  the  countries  now  called   Nubia  and 

How  IS  Egypt  now  governed  ?  IIow  is  the  country  considered  ?  7.  What  is 
the  capital  of  Egypt  ?  What  of  Grand  Cairo?  Population?  What  of  Alexan- 
dria?    How  does  Egypt  appear  to  a  traveller? 

CuAPTER  XLIII.— 1.  What  was  aucieully  called  Ethiopia? 


AFRICA.  15  Y 

Abyssinia.  This  region  lies  south  of  Egypt,  and  ex- 
tends along  the  shore  of  the  Red  Sea.  The  first  inhab- 
itants of  Ethiopia  are  supposed  to  have  emigrated  from 
Arabia  the  Happy,  a  part  of  Arabia.  Their  earlier 
history  is  almost  unknown. 

2.  Ethiopia,  or  at  least  a  portion  of  it,  was  formerly 
called  Sheba,  and  from  thence  it  is  supposed  that  the 
queen  of  Sheba  went  to  visit  Solomon.  About  thirty 
years  ago  it  is  said  that  one  of  her  descendants  was 
king  of  Abyssinia. 

3.  It  used  to  be  the  custom  to  confine  the  Ethiopian 
princes  on  a  high  mountain,  which  was  named  Ge- 
shen.  It  was  very  high  and  steep,  and  looked  like  an 
enormous  castle  of  stone.  No  person  could  ascend  this 
mountain,  or  come  down  from  it,  unless  he  were  raised 
or  lowered  by  means  of  ropes. 

4.  The  princes  lived  on  the  summit  of  the  mountain, 
in  miserable  hiits.  The  greater  part  of  them  never 
came  down  till  their  dying  day.  But  whenever  the 
king  died,  one  of  the  princes  was  summoned  to  the 
throne.  Perhaps,  however,  he  found  himself  no  hap- 
pier in  the  royal  palace,  than  in  his  hut  on  the  summit 
of  Mount  Geshen. 

In  which  direction  is  it  from  Egypt?  Where  was  Ethiopia  properly -situated? 
Who  were  the  first  inhabitants  of  Ethiopia?  2.  What  was  Ethiopia  formerly 
called  ?  What  of  the  queen  of  Sheba  ?  3.  Wh^at  was  once  the  custom  ?  4.  How 
did  the  princes  live  ?     What  happened  when  the  king  died  ? 


158  UNIYERSAL  HISTORY. 

5.  The  Ethiopians  were  believers  in  the  Jewish 
religion  till  the  middle  of  the  fourth  century  after  the 
Christian  era.  Candace,  the  queen  of  the  country,  was 
then  converted  to  Christianity,  and  her  subjects  fol- 
lowed her  example. 

6.  The  inhabitants  of  Ethiopia,  or  Abyssinia,  are 
still  called  Christians,  but  their  mode  of  worship  is 
mixed  up  with  many  Jewish  practices.  They  also 
worship  the  virgin  Mary  and  the  saints,  like  the  E-o- 
man  Catholics. 

T.  The  people  of  this  part  of  Africa  are  not  gene- 
rally negroes.  They  are  of  an  olive  complexion,  and 
have  long  hair  and  agreeable  features.  But  in  the 
north-eastern  part  of  Abyssinia,  there  is  a  race  of  ne- 
groes called  Shangallas. 

8.  These  negroes  have  been  described  as  having 
faces  resembling  apes,  and  as  being  little  more  intelli- 
gent than  the  monkey  tribe.  They  have  no  houses,  but 
sleep  under  the  trees,  and  sometimes  burrow  in  caves. 
The  Abyssinians  hunt  them  as  they  would  wild 
beasts. 

5.  Till  what  time  did  the  Ethiopians  believe  in  the  Jewish  religion?  AVhat 
of  Candaee  ?  6.  What  of  the  worship  of  the  people  of  Ethiopia  at  the  present 
time?  f.  What  of  their  personal  appearance?  What  of  the  Shangallas  ?  8.  De- 
scribe them. 


AFRICA. 


159 


ALGIERS. 

CHAPTER  XLIY.— Africa  Continued. 

Origin   of  the   Barhary   States   and  their  Piracies   on   the 
Christians. 

1.  The  Barbary  states  are  Morocco,  Algiers,  Tunis 
and  Tripoli.  Tliey  are  bounded  nortli  by  the  Mediter- 
ranean Sea,  east  and  south  by  the  desert,  and  west  by 
the  Atlantic  Ocean.  These  countries  were  inhabited 
in  the  time  of  the  Eomans.  Morocco  was  called  Man- 
ritania;  and  Algiers,  Numidia.  These  regions  were 
first  settled  by  colonies  from  Phoenicia,  Greece,  and 
other  countries. 

Chapter  XLIV. — 1.  What  are  the  Barbary  states?    How  are  they  bounded  ? 

8 


IGO  UNIVERSxVL  HISTORY. 

2.  In  this  region  stood  tlie  celebrated  city  of  Car- 
thage in  ancient  times.  Its  site  was  about  ten  miles 
north-east  of  the  city  of  Tunis.  It  was  founded  by 
some  Phoenicians,  eight  hundred  and  sixty-nine  years 
before  the  Christian  era.  The  Phoenicians,  as  I  havo 
told  you,  were  the  first  people  who  engaged  in  com 
merce,  and  founded  colonies  for  the  purpose  of  carry- 
ing on  trade. 

3.  In  the  history  of  Rome  I  shall  tell  you  how  Car- 
thage was  destroyed.  The  Romans  erected  a  new  city 
where  it  had  formerly  stood.  This  was  conquered  and 
destroyed  by  the  Saracens,  who  then  built  the  city  of 
Tunis.  In  the  year  1574,  Tunis  was  seized  by  the 
Turks. 

4.  The  city  of  Algiers  was  built  by  the  Saracens,  in 
the  year  944.  The  government,  called  the  regency  of 
Algiers,  was  founded  in  1518,  by  two  Turks,  named 
Horuc  and  Hagradin.  They  were  brothers,  and  both 
bore  the  name  of  Barbarossa,  or  Red-Beard. 

5.  The  country  now  called  Morocco  was  conquered 
by  the  Saracens,  about  the  same  time  with  the  other 
Barbary  states.     So  also  was  Tripoli.     All  these  states, 

2.  Where  did  ancient  Carthage  stand?  Who  founded  it?  3.  Who  erected  a 
new  city?  What  did  the  Saracens  do?  When  was  Tunis  seized  by  tlio  Turks? 
4.  When  and  by  whom  was  Algiers  built?  What  was  done  in  1518  ?  Who  were 
called  Barbarossa  ?     5.  What  of  Morocco  and  Tripoli  ? 


AFRICA.  161 

except  Morocco,  afterward  fell  into  tlie  hands   of  tlie 
Turks. 

6.  During  a  long  period,  tlie  Barbary  states  were  in 
the  habit  of  fitting  out  vessels  to  cruise  against  the 
ships  of  every  nation.  Their  prisoners  were  sold  as 
slaves,  and  never  returned  to  their  own  country,  unles:^; 
a  high  ransom  were  paid  for  them. 

Y.  The  Americans  were  the  first  who  made  any  con- 
siderable resistance  to  these  outrages.  In  the  year 
1803,  Commodore  Preble  sailed  to  the  Mediterranean 
sea  with  a  small  American  fleet.  He  intended  to 
attack  Tripoli ;  but  one  of  his  frigates,  the  Philadel- 
phia, got  aground  in  the  harbor. 

8.  The  Turks  took  possession  of  the  Philadelphia. 
But  one  night  Lieutenant  Decatur  entered  the  harbor 
of  Tripoli,  and  rowed  toward  the  captured  vessel,  with 
only  twenty  men.  He  leaped  on  board,  followed  by 
his  crew,  and  killed  all  the  Turks,  or  drove  them  over- 
board.    The  Philadelphia  was  then  set  on  fire. 

9.  After  this  exploit.  Commodore  Preble  obtained 
some  gun-boats  from  the  king  of  Naples,  and  with 
these  and  the  American  vessels  he  made  an  attack  on 

Which  of  the  Barbary  states  fell  afterward  into  the  hands  of  the  Turks?  6. 
"What  were  these  states  in  the  habit  of  doing?  T.  "What  was  done  in  1803? 
"What  of  Commodore  Preble  ?  8.  What  of  the  Philadelphia  ?  What  did  Decatur 
do  ?     9.  What  attack  was  made  on  Tripoli  ? 


162  CJNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

the  fortifications  of  Tripoli.     Tlie  bashaw  of  Tripoli 
was  forced  to  give  up  his  prisoners. 

10.  In  the  year  1815,  Commodore  Decatur  (the  same 
who  had  burnt  the  Philadelphia)  was  sent  with  a  fleet 
against  Algiers.  He  captured  their  largest  vessels, 
and  compelled  the  Algerines,  and  the  Tripolitans  also, 
to  agree  never  more  to  make  slaves  of  Americans. 

11.  In  1816,  Algiers  was  battered  by  an  English 
fleet  xmder  the  command  of  Lord  Exmouth.  This  was 
the  severest  chastisement  that  the  Algerines  had  ever 
received  at  that  period.  But  in  1830,  the  French  sent 
a  large  naval  and  military  force  against  Algiers,  com- 
manded by  Marshal  Beaumont.  The  fortifications  were 
battered  down,  and  the  city  was  taken.  Algeria  is 
now  a  province  of  France, 


CHAPTER  XLY.— Africa  Continued. 

Fahles  and  Facts  about  Africa. 

1.  Most  of  the  other  regions  of  Africa  can  hardly 
be  said  to  have  any  history.     The  inhabitants  possess 

"Whatof  the  bashaw?  10.  V^'hat  was  done  in  the  year  1815?  What  agree- 
ment did  the  Tripolitans  and  Algerines  make  ?  11.  When  was  Algiers  battered? 
What  took  place  in  1 830  ?    What  is  Algeria  now  ? 

(3HAPTEE  XLV.~1.  What  of  the  inhabitants  of  most  parts  of  Africa  ? 


AFRICA.  163 

no  written  records,  and  cannot  tell  wliat  events  hap- 
pened to  tlieir  forefathers. 

2.  The  ancients  had  very  curious  notions  about 
Africa ;  for  they  had  visited  only  the  northern  parts, 
and  contented  themselves  with  telling  incredible  stories 
about  the  remainder.  They  supposed  that  tov/ard 
the  eastern  shore  of  the  continent  there  were  people 
witliout  noses,  and  others  who  had  three  or  four  eyes 
aj)iece. 

3.  In  other  parts  of  Africa  there  were  said  to  be 
men  without  heads,  but  who  had  eyes  in  their  breasts. 
Old  writers  speak  also  of  a  nation  whose  king  had  a 
head  like  a  dog.  There  was  likewise  said  to  be  a  race 
of  giants,  twice  as  tall  as  common  men  and  women. 

4.  But  the  prettiest  of  all  these  fables  is  the  stoiy 
of  the  Pigmies.  These  little  people  were  said  to  be 
about  a  foot  high,  and  were  believed  to  dwell  near  the 
source  of  the  river  Nile.  Their  houses  were  built 
something  like  birds'  nests,  and  their  building  mate- 
rials were  clay,  feathers,  and  egg  shells. 

5.  These  Pigmies  used  to  wage  terrible  wars  with 
the  cranes.  An  immense  army  of  them  would  set  out 
on  an  expedition,  some  mounted  on  rams  and  goats, 
and  others  on  foot. 

2.  What  were  the  ideas  of  the  ancients  concerning  Africa?     4-7.  What  is  the 
prettiest  of  all  these  fabulous  stories?    Grivo  some  account  of  the  Pigmies 


164  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

6.  When  an  army  of  tlie  Pigmies  encountered  an 
Army  of  the  cranes,  great  valor  was  displayed  on  both 
sides.  The  cranes  would  rush  forward  to  the  charge, 
flapping  their  wings,  and  sometimes  one  of  them  would 
snatch  up  a  Pigmy  in  his  beak,  and  carry  him  away 
captive. 

7.  But  the  Pigmies  brandished  their  little  swords 
and  spears,  and  generally  succeeded  in  putting  tlie 
enemy  to  flight.  Whenever  they  had  a  chance,  they 
would  break  the*  eggs  of  the  qranes,  and  kill  the 
unfledged  young  ones  without  mercy. 

8.  Until  mthin  a  few  years,  the  moderns  have  not 
known  much  more  about  the  interior  of  Afiica  than 
the  ancients  did.  They  have  now  acquired  consider- 
able knowledge  respecting  it ;  but  the  subject  belongs 
rather  to  geography  than  history.  Nearly  the  whole 
of  the  central  part  of  Africa,  through  which  the  river 
Niger  flows,  is  called  Nigritia,  or  Negro-land.  It  is 
inhabited  by  several  different  nations. 

9.  The  principal  city  in  Nigritia  is  called  Timbuctoo. 
No  white  people  have  ever  visited  it,  except  one  Amer- 

acan,  one  Englishman,  and  one  Frenchman.     The  name 
of  the  latter  was  M.  Caillie.     He  was  there  in  1827, 

8.  "What  knowledge  have  the  modems  of  the  interior  of  Africa  ?  Where  is  Ni- 
gritia? "What  of  the  inhabitants?  9.  "What  of  Timbuctoo?  Who  have  visited  it? 
What  does  M.  Caillid  say  of  it  ? 


AFRICA.  165 

and  describes  tlie  city  as  built  in  the  shape  of  a  tri- 
angle, and  situated  eight  miles  from  the  Niger. 

10.  The  houses  are  only  one  story  high,  and  are 
built  of  round  bricks  baked  in  the  sun.  The  poor 
people  and  slaves  dwell  in  huts  of  straw,  shaped  some-- 
thing  like  bee-hives.  All  around  the  city,  there  is  an 
immense  plain  of  yellowish  white  sand.  • 

11.  There  are  English  and  French  settlements  on 
the  western  coast  of  Africa.  There  was  formerly  a 
Dutch  settlement  at  the  southern  extremity  of  the 
continent,  but  the  English  have  had  possession  of  it 
since  the  year  1806.  This  is  called  Cape  Town,  and  is 
situated  at  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope.  The  republic  of 
Liberia  was  founded  in  1821,  by  the  American  Coloni- 
zation Society,  and  its  population  is  already  275,000. 
Several  of  the  European  powers  have  acknowledged 
its  independence.     Monrovia  is  the  capital. 


CHAPTER  XLYI.— Africa  Continued. 

History  of  the  Slave  Trade. 

1.  The  most  painful  part  of  the  history  of  Africa  i^ 
that  which  belongs  to  the  slave  trade.     From  the  car- 
lo. Describe  it.    11.  "What  of  settlements?    What  of  Cape  Town  ?    How  long 
have  the  English  had  possession  of  it  ?     What  of  Liberia  ? 


1G6  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

liest  ages,  wlien  human  society  was  yet  in  a  rude  state, 
it  was  tlie  custom  to  make  slaves  of  those  who  were 
taken  in  war.  This  practice  was  continued  in  after 
times,  and  thus,  for  thousands  of  years,  slavery  was 
established  in  nearly  all  the  nations  of  the  earth. 

2.  But  in  those  countries  where  the  Christian  reli- 
gion pi'evailed,  slavery  came  into  general  disuse.  In 
1482,  however,  the  Portuguese  began  the  horrid  traffic 
of  the  slave  trade,  and  the  English  followed  in  1563. 
From  that  time,  it  has  continued  to  the  present  day, 
though  most  nations  have  made  laws  against  it,  and  it 
has  now  nearly  ceased. 

3.  For  at  least  two  hundred  years,  this  traffic  was 
carried  on  to  a  great  extent.  The  custom  was  for  ves- 
sels to  go  to  the  western  coast  of  Africa,  and  purchase 
of  the  African  princes  such  prisoners  as  they  had  for 
sale.  Sometimes,  however,  the  captains  of  the  vessels 
would  rob  the  people  of  their  children,  or  they  would 
go  on  shore  with  a  body  of  armed  men,  and  carry  away 
the  inhabitants  of  a  whole  village. 

4.  The  poor  negroes  thus  taken  from  their  homes, 

Chapter  XLVI.— 1.  What  is  painful  in  the  history  of  Africa  ?  What  was  tlia 
custom  in  the  earliest  ages?  How  was  slavery  established?  2.  What  effect  had 
the  Christian  religion  upon  slavery  ?  When  did  the  Portuguese  engage  in  the 
slave  trade  ?  Tlie  English?  What  has  happened  till  the  present  time?  3.  How 
long  was  the  traffic  carried  on  ?  What  was  the  custom  ?  What  was  done  by 
captains  of  vessels?    4.  Describe  the  state  of  the  poor  negroes. 


AFRICA.  1^7 

and  separated  forever  from  all  they  lield  dear,  were 
crowded  into  the  vessels,  where  they  were  often  half- 
starved,  and  where  they  sometimes  suffered  from  dis- 
ease, or  unkind  treatment.  Such  was  frequently  their 
distress,  that  they  would  jump  into  the  sea,  or  beat  out 
their  own  brains  in  despair. 

5.  Millions  of  these  poor  negroes  have  been  taken 
from  their  homes ;  and  probably  more  than  half  of  those 
who  entered  the  ships,  from  the  beginning  of  the  trade 
to  this  day,  have  perished  before  they  reached  the 
countries  to  which  they  were  bound.  America  was 
the  first  nation  to  make  laws  against  the  slave-trade, 
and  to  declare  it  piracy. 


CHAPTER  XLYII— Africa  Continued. 
Chronology  of  Africa.. 
1.  The  follomno:  table   exhibits  the  dates  of  the 


'& 


most  remarkable  events  in  the  history  of  Africa.  It 
may  be  well  to  compare  this  with  the  chronology  of 
Asia,  by  which  you  may  see  w^hat  was  doing  in  that 
quarter,  while  these  events  were  happening  in  Africa. 

5.  What  uation  first  made  laws  against  the  slave-trade  ? 


I 


1G8 


UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


B.  c. 

Eg:ypt  settled  by  Misraim 2188 

Niiocris  queen  of  Egypt 1678 

Departure  of  the  Israelites   from 

Egypt 1491 

Cambyses  conquers  Egypt 525 

"         destroys  Thebes 520 

Alexander  conquers  Egypt 332 

Death  of  Cleopatra ' 30 

A.   D. 

Egypt  conquered  by  the  Saracens,     GTO 

Algiers  built 944 

Mamelukes  came  into  power 1250 

The  Portuguese  begin  to  traffic  in 

slaves 1482 

Egj'^pt  conquered  by  the  Turks. . .  1517 
A  government  founded  at  Algiers, 

called  the  regency  of  Algiers.. .   1518 


The    English    begin   to   traffic   in 

slaves 1 563 

Tunis  seized  by  the  Turks 1574 

Napoleon  invades  Egpyt 1798 

Sir  Ralph  Abercrombie  drives  tlie 

French  out  of  Egypt 1801 

Tripoli   attacked    by   Commodore 

Preble 1803 

The  English  take  Cape  Town  from 

the  Dutch 1806 

Commodore   Decatur  attacks   Al- 
giers     1815 

Lord  Exmouth  batters  Algiers. . ,    1816 

Liberia  founded 1821 

Caillie,  a  Frenchman,  goes  toTira- 

buctoo 1827 

Algiei-s  taken  by  Marshal  Beau- 
mont    1830 


I      6 


10  15  20 


30  35  40 


Questions  on  the  Map  of  Europe. — "What  sea  lies  to  the  west  of  Europe? 
To  the  south  ?  What  continent  lies  to  the  south  ?  Where  is  Madrid  ?  Vienna  ? 
St.  Petersburg?  Paris?  Rome?  Nova  Zambia?  Direction  of  Great  Britain 
from  Spain  ?  Of  Austria  from  Sweden  ?  Where  is  the  Black  Sea  ?  The  Straits 
of  Gibraltar?   Iceland?    Sardinia?    Sicily? 


170 


UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


STUDYING   THE  MAP  OF  ETTBOPB. 


CHAPTEE  XLYIII.— Europe. 

Introductory  Remarks  on  its  Geogra2^hy  and  other  matters. 

1.  Europe  is  considered  tlie  third  quarter  of  the 
globe.  It  is  the  smallest  in  extent,  being  about  one- 
quarter  as  large  as  Asia,  one-third  as  large  as  Africa^ 
and  about  one-third  larger  than  the  whole  United 
States.  It  is  a  part  of  the  eastern  continent,  and  is 
only  separated  from  Asia  by  the  Ural  Mountains.  It 
is  separated  fi-om  Africa  by  the  Mediterranean  sea. 

Chapter  XLVIII. — 1.  Winch  is  the  third  quarter  of  the  globe  ?  The  smallest? 
How  large  is  Europe  compared  with  Asia?  Africa?  The  United  States?  How 
is  it  separated  from  Asia  ?    From  Africa  ? 


EUROPE.  "  171 

At  tlie  straits  of  Gibraltar,  tlie  distance  from  Europe 
to  Africa  is  but  twenty-one  miles. 

2.  But  altliougli  Europe  is  the  smallest  of  tlie  four 
quarters  of  the  globe,  it  lias  nearly  three  hundred  mill- 
ions of  inhabitants,  and  is  much  superior  to  Asia, 
Africa,  and  most  parts  of  America,  in  civilization.  It 
abounds  in  fine  cities,  fine  roads,  good  houses,  useful 
manufactures,  and  most  other  things  that  are  necessary 
to  the  comfort  and  happiness  of  mankind. 

3.  In  all  parts  of  Europe  except  Tui'key,  the  religion 
of  Jesus  Christ  prevails.  If  you  were  to  travel  in 
Asia  or  Africa,  you  would  meet  with  no  churches,  or 
only  now  and  then  one,  where  the  true  God  is  wor- 
shipped. But  you  would  see  a  great  many  mosques 
dedicated  to  the  false  religion  of  Mahomet,  and  a  great 
many  temples  where  the  people  bow  down  to  idols  of 
v/ood,  stone,  or  metal. 

4.  But  in  Europe,  the  traveller  everywhere  meets 
with  churches,  and  these  show  that  the  people  are 
Christians.  In  Europe,  also,  there  are  many  colleges, 
academies,  and  schools,  which  prove  that  the  people 
set  a  high  value  upon  education.     It  is  a  fact  which  I 

How  far  is  the  nearest  point  of  Europe  from  Africa?  2.  What  of  Europe?  In 
what  does  it  abound  ?  3.  Wliat  of  rehgion  in  Europe  ?  What  of  Asia  and  Africa? 
What  of  churches?  Mosques?  Temples?  4.  What  does  the  traveller  me^t  in  Eu- 
rope?   What  do  churches  show?  .  What  do  colleges,  schools,  &c.,  show? 


172  UNIYERSAL  HISTORY. 

wish  you  to  remember,  that  in  all  parts  of  the  world 
where  you  find  churches,  you  find  that  the  people  are 
more  or  less  advanced  in  civilization  and  the  arts  which 
render  mankind  happy. 

5.  As  Europe  is  the  smallest  of  the  four  quarters  of 
the  earth,  so  it  was  behind  Asia  and  Africa  in  beinor 
settled  and  civilized.  Long  after  the  Assyrian  empu-e 
had  risen  to  great  power  and  splendor,  long  after 
Babylon  and  Nineveh  had  flourished  on  the  banks  of 
the  Euphrates,  long  after  Egypt  had  become  a  mighty 
kingdom,  long  after  Thebes,  Memphis,  and  other  mag- 
nificent cities  had  risen  upon  the  borders  of  the  Nile, 
Europe  continued  to  be  inhabited  only  by  wandering 
tribes  of  savages. 

6.  Greece  was  the  first  portion  of  Europe  that  was 
settled.  About  the  time  that  Moses  led  the  Israelites 
out  of  Egypt,  the  Greeks  began  to  build  houses^  found 
cities,  and  emerge  from  the  savage  into  a  more  civilized 
state.  By  degrees  they  advanced  in  knowledge  and 
refinement,  and  at  length  became  the  most  polished 
people  in  the  world. 

7.  Afterward  Eome,  situated    in    Italy,  became   a 


What  do  you  find  where  there  are  churches  ?  5.  What  of  Europe  ?  What  was 
the  condition  of. Europe  until  after  the  empires  of  Asia  and  Egypt  had  long  flour- 
ished? 6.  AVhat  part  of  Europe  was  first  inhabited  ?  Wliat  of  the  Greeks  ?  Their 
progress? 


EUROPE.  173 

miglity  city,  and  tlie  Eoman  people  extended  their 
empire  over  the  greater  part  of  Europe,  and  the  most 
civilized  portions  of  Asia  and  Africa.  Carthage, 
Egypt,  Greece,  Asia  Minor,  Palestine,  Syria,  and  other 
Asiatic  countries,  bowed  to  the  Roman  yoke. 

8.  Rome  was  the  most  splendid  empire  that  the 
world  has  ever  seen.  But  as  it  crushed  other  kingdoms 
beneath  its  foot,  so,  in  turn,  imperial  Rome  was  itself 
trampled  down  by  the  northern  nations  of  Europe, 
Great  ignorance  followed  this  event,  and  the  different 
nations  and  tribes  of  Europe  seemed  like  broken  and 
crushed  limbs  and  members  of  the  great  empire,  almost 
without  life. 

9.  But  these  separate  fragments  of  the  human  family 
grew  up  in  due  time  to  be  separate  nations,  and  these 
advanced  in  knowledge  until  they  reached  the  condi- 
tion in  which  we  now  find  them. 

10.  Europe  may  be  divided  into  two  parts — the 
northern  and  southern.  In  the  former,  the  climate  is 
about  as  cold  as  it  is  in  our  middle  and  eastern  states. 
In  the  latter,  it  is  about  as  warm  as  in  the  southern 
states.     The  principal  kingdoms  in  the  northern  sec- 

7.  What  of  Rome  ?  "What  countries  became  subject  to  Rome  ?  8.  What  waa 
Rome  ?  What  happened  to  the  empire  ?  What  followed  the  destruction  of  the 
Roman  empire?  9.  What  of  the  several  nations  of  Europe ?  10.  How  may  Eu- 
rope be  divided  ?    Climate  in  northern  Europe  ?    Southern  Europe  ? 


174  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

tion  of  Eui-ope  are  Russia,  Norway,  Sweden,  Prussia, 
Austria,  tlie  several  states  of  Germany,  Denmark,  Hol- 
land, Belgium,  Switzerland,  France,  and  Great  Britain. 

11.  Among  tlie  southern  kingdoms  of  Europe  are 
Portugal,  Spain,  Italy,  Greece,  and  Turkey.  In  these 
latter  countries  the  soil  is  generally  fertile,  and  here 
grapes,  olives,  oranges,  lemons,  melons,  and  other 
delicious  fraits,  are  abundant. 

12.  Here,  too,  all  the  wants  of  man  for  food  are 
easily  supplied,  and  so  warm  and  gentle  is  the  climate, 
that  the  people  do  not  find  it  necessary  to  build  tight 
houses,  and  put  on  thick  clothing,  and  provide  stores 
against  the  winter;  yet  it  is  remarkable,  that  where 
nature  has  done  so  much,  the  people  think  it  hardly 
necessary  to  do  any  thing,  and  consequently  they  are 
less  industrious,  less  comfortable,  and  less  happy,  than 
in  more  cold  and  severe  climates. 

13.  In  the  northern  parts  of  Europe,  the  people  find 
it  necessary  to  cultivate  the  soil  with  care,  and  lay  up 
in  summer  a  store  of  provisions  against  the  long,  cold 
winter.  They  build  themselves  good  houses,  they 
furnish  them  with  many  convenient  articles,  and  thus, 
by  their  industry  and   care,  they  live   more  happily 

Principal  nations  of  northern  Europe?  11.  The  southern  kingdoms  of  Europe? 
The  climate?  12.  Effect  of  the  climate  on  the  people?  13.  What  of  the  northern 
parts  of  Europe  ?    Condition  of  the  people  7 


EUROPE.  175 

tlian   tliose    wlio   inliabit   the   gentler   climes    of  tlie 
south. 

14.  The  wild  animals  of  Europe  resemble  those  of 
this  country,  though  they  are  in  some  respects  differ- 
ent. The  trees,  plants,  shrubs,  and  flowers,  are  similar 
to  those  we  find  here,  though  not  exactly  the  same. 

15.  If  you  were  to  go  to  Europe,  you  w^ould  every- 
where feel  that  you  were  in  a  strange  land,  but  still 
many  things  would  remind  you  of  your  own  dear  home 
in  America.  But  if  you  were  to  go  to  Asia  or  Africa, 
the  houses,  the  fields,  the  dress  of  tlie  people,  and  all 
their  manners  and  customs,  would  impress  you  with 
the  idea  tbat  you  were  in  a  strange  land — far,  very  far, 
from  your  native  country. 

14.  "Wild  animals  of  Europe  ?    Vegetation  ?      15.  What  if  you  were  to  go  to 
Europe  ?    Asia  ?    Africa  ? 


176 


TJNIYERSAL  HISTORY. 


EUINS   OF  THE  PAETHBNON. 

CHAPTER  XLIX.— Europe  Continued. 

About   Greece^     wliere  it  is  situated y     apj)earance   of  the 
Countnj  I    Glhnate. 

1.  Greece  is  a  small  strip  of  land  extending  into 
the  Mediterranean  sea.  It  lies  almost  exactly  east  of 
New  York,  at  tlie  distance  of  about  five  thousand 
miles.  It  is  about  as  far  from  Asia  Minor  on  the  east, 
as  from  Italy  on  the  west. 

Chapter  XLIX.— 1.  What  is  Greece?  Direction  and  distance  from  New  YoKk? 
In  what  direction  is  it  from  Asia  Minor  ?     From  Italy  ? 

Questions  on  the  Map  of  Greece  on  the  opposite  page.— What  are  the  boun- 
daries of  Greece  ?  Where  is  Mount  Olympus  ?  Thermopylte  ?  Corinth  ?  Athens  ? 
Marathon?  Argoa?  Where  are  the  following  islands ?—Lemnos ?  Cythera? 
Ithaca?    Corcyrd?    Cephallonia? 


l'?8  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY 

2.  Greece  is  bounded  on  tlie  north  by  Macedonia, 
wMcli  is  now  a  part  of  Turkey ;  on  every  other  side  it 
is  bounded  by  the  sea.     To  the  south  and  east  of  i 
are  a  great    number  of  islands,  some  of   which  are 
extremely  beautiful. 

3.  Several  of  them  have  towns  and  cities  upon 
them,  and  one,  called  Antiparos,  is  remarkable  for  a 
grotto  beneath  the  earth,  which  appears  like  a  beau- 
tiful palace.  When  lighted  up  with  lamps,  it  seems  a 
vast  hall,  with  thousands  of  pillars  and  ornaments  of 
silver. 

4.  Some  of  the  islands  of  Greece  have  been  thrown 
up  from  the  sea,  and  others  which  formerly  existed 
have  disappeared.  These  strange  things  have  been 
caused  by  volcanic  fires  under  the  sea.  Nothing  can 
be  more  wonderful  than  the  scenes  which  have  some- 
times been  exhibited  by  these  convulsions  of  nature. 

5.  In  the  southern  part  of  Greece,  and  among  the 
islands,  the  climate  is  as  mild  as  in  Virginia,  and  the 
country  abounds  in  all  sorts  of  delicious  finiits.  In 
the  northern  part,  the  climate  is  somewhat  colder. 

6.  If  you  were  to  travel  through  Greece,  you  w^ould 
discover  that  it  is  naturally  very  beautiful.     Along 

2.  How  is  Greece  bounded  on  the  north ?  South?  East?  West?  What  of 
the  iahmds?  3.  What  of  Antiparos?  4.  What  of  volcanic  islands ?  5.  Tlie  cli- 
mate in  the  southern  part  of  Greece  ?     In  the  northern  ? 


EUROPE.  179 

tlie  shores,  you  would  meet  with  many  little  bays  and 
harbors,  and  you  would  easily  believe  that  the  people 
living  there  would  be  tempted  by  the  placid  water  to 
become  seamen.  You  would  accordingly  find  a  large 
portion  of  the  inhabitants  to  be  seafaring  people. 

7.  In  the  interior  of  the  country  you  would  meet 
with  lofty  mountains,  whose  tops  in  winter  are  covered 
with  snow.  You  would  meet  with  smiling  valleys, 
bright,  rapid  streams,  and  steep  hillsides  covered  v/ith 
olive  groves,  vineyards,  and  ^g  trees. 

8.  You  would  discover  that  the  people  of  the  pres- 
ent day  live  in  miserable  villages  or  towns^  all  wearing 
an  aspect  of  poverty  and  decay.  But  you  would  often 
meet  with  the  ruins  of  temples  and  other  edifices, 
built  by  the  ancient  Greeks  two  or  three  thousand 
years  ago. 

9.  These  would  show  you  that,  though  the  modem 
Greeks  appear  to  be  a  degraded  people,  yet  the  former 
inhabitants  of  this  country  were  among  the  most 
remarkable  people  that  ever  lived.  It  is  of  these  that 
I  am  now  going  to  tell  you. 

6.  "What  of  the  shores  of  Greece?  To  what  pursuits  are  many  of  the  present 
Greeks  devoted?  7.  What  of  the  interior  of  Greece?  8.  What  of  the  present  in- 
habitants of  Gree*;^  ?  What  of  ruins,  temples,  &c.  ?  9.  What  would  these  ruins 
prove  ? 


180  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

CHAPTEE  L.—EuEOPE  Continued. 
The  extent  of  Greece,    First  Settlement  of  the  country. 

1.  Though  Greece  is  one  of  the  most  famous  conn, 
tries  on  the  face  of  the  globe,  it  is  not  very  extensive ; 
its  boundaries  varied  at  different  times,  but  it  never 
exceeded  four  hundred  miles  in  length,  and  about  one 
hundred  and  fifty  in  width.  That  portion  to  which 
the  name  of  Greece  is  properly  applied,  was  not  much 
larger  than  the  state  of  New  York. 

2.  I  must  now  carry  you  back  to  the  first  settlement 
of  this  country,  which  took  place  more  than  four  thou- 
sand years  ago.  When  the  human  race  was  scattered 
from  the  tower  of  Babel,  it  is  supposed  that  the  family 
of  Japheth,  Noah's  youngest  son,  travelled  from  Asia 
into  Europe.  As  Greece  lay  nearer  to  the  land  of 
Shinar  than  the  other  parts  of  Europe,  it  was  probably 
settled  first. 

3.  The  Greeks  themselves  believed  that  their  ances- 
tors had  sprung  up  out  of  the  eaith.  The  first  inhab- 
itants were  mere  savages.    They  dwelt  in  wretched  ^ 

ri!  u'Ti:i;  [;.— 1.  Wli.'it;  nf  tlip  exient  of  ■  .  vatearieng-tli?    Width? 

2.  ll(»\v  long  since  Greece  was  tirsl  setiled  ?     AVho   are   sujiposed   to  liave  been 
the  first  inhabiiants  of  Greece  ?    3.  What  did  the  Greeks  believe  of  their  anoestors? 


J 


EUROPE.  181 

huts,  and  fed  on  acorns.     Their  garments  were  tlie 
skins  of  wild  beasts. 

4.  There  are  so  many  fables  about  the  early  history 
of  Greece,  that  I  shall  pass  very  briefly  over  the  first 
three  or  four  centuries.  Cecrops,  an  Egyptian,  seems 
to  have  been  the  first  who  introduced  civilization 
among  the  Greeks.  He  came  with  a  number  of  his 
countrymen,  and  founded  the  city  of  Athens.  This 
event  took  place  about  fifteen  hundred  and  fifty-si:s; 
years  before  the  Christian  era. 

5.  Thirty  or  forty  years  afterward.  Cadmus  came 
from  Phoenicia  and  built  the  city  of  Thebes.  He  was 
one  of  the  greatest  benefactors  of  the  Greeks,  for  he 
taught  them  the  cultivation  of  the  vine,  the  manufac- 
ture of  metals,  and  the  use  of  the  alphabet. 

6.  Other  parts  of  Greece  were  also  settled  by  colo- 
nies from  foreign  nations.  The  country  then  consisted 
of  a  number  of  small  kingdoms,  which  had  little  or  no 
connection  with  one  another.  These  were  frequently 
at  war  among  themselves. 

7.  Twelve  of  these  little  kingdoms,  or  states,  soon 
united  themselves  into  a  confederacy.     Their  deputie^s 

What  of  the  first  inhabitants  of  Greece  ?  4.  Who  first  introduced  civilization 
among  the  Greeks?  What  city  was  founded  by  Cecrops?  When  did  this  take 
place?  5.  What  of  Cadmus?  6.  How  were  other  parts  of  Greece  settled?  What 
of  Greece  at  this  time  ?     t.  What  did  twelve  of  the  Grecian  states  do  ? 


182  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

held  a  meeting  twice  a  year,  in  order  to  consult  respect- 
ing tlie  welfare  of  the  country.  Tliey  were  called  tLe 
Council  of  the  Amphyctions.  By  means  of  this  coun- 
cil, the  different  states  were  kept  at  peace  with  each 
other,  and  were  united  against  foreign  enemies. 

8.  One  of  the  famous  events  of  Grecian  history  was 
the  Argonautic  expedition.  It  is  said  that  a  prince 
named  Jason,  Avith  a  company  of  his  friends,  sailed  to 
Colchis,  which  lay  eastward  of  the  Black  Sea.  Their 
object  was  to  find  a  wonderful  ram  with  a  fleece  of 
gold ;  but  the  whole  story  is  supposed  to  be  a  fable,  or 
to  have  some  hidden  meaning. 

9.  The  Trojan  war  was  still  more  famous  than  the 
expedition  in  search  of  the  golden  fleece.  Troy  was  a 
large  city  on  the  Asiatic  side  of  the  Hellespont,  which 
is  now  called  the  Dardanelles.  Paris,  the  son  of  the 
Trojan  king,  had  stolen  away  the  wife  of  Menelaus,  a 
Greek  prince. 

10.  All  the  Grecian  kings  combined  together  to 
punish  this  offence.  They  sailed  to  Troy  in  twelve 
hundred  vessels,  and  took  the  city  after  a  siege  of  ten 
years.  This  event  is  supposed  to  have  occurred  eleven 
hundred  and  ninety-three  years  before  the  Christian 
era. 

What,  of  the  Amphyctionic  council?     What  effect  had  this  council?    8.  Wiiat  of 
the  Argonautic  expedition?     9,  10.  What  of  the  Trojau  war? 


EUROPE.  183 

11.  But  most  historians  are  of  opinion  that  the  Tro- 
jan war  was  a  much  less  important  affair  than  Homer 
has  represented  it  to  be.  Poets  do  not  always  tell  the 
truth;  and  Homer  was  the  father  and  chief- of  poets. 
He  was  a  blind  old  man,  and  used  to  wander  about 
the  country,  reciting  his  verses. 


CHAPTER  LL— Europe  Continued. 

The  Grecian  Lawgivers. 

1.  One  of  the  principal  states  of  Greece  was  called 
Sparta,  or  Lacedsemon.  It  was  founded  by  Lelex,  1516 
B.  C.  It  received  a  code  of  laws  from  Lycurgus,  who 
lived  nearly  nine  centuries  before  Christ.  He  was 
stiict  and  severe,  but  wise  and  upright. 

2.  Lycurgus  ordered  that  all  the  Spartans  should  eat 
together  at  public  tables.  The  reason  of  this  law  was, 
that  the  rich  citizens  might  not  feast  luxuriously  at 
home,  but  that  the  rich  and  poor  should  fare  alike. 
As  for  the   children,  they  were  not  allowed  any  thing 

11.  What  of  Homer? 

Chapter  LL — 1.  What  of  Sparta?  Lelex?  When  did  Lycurgus  live?  What 
was  his  character  ?  2.  Why  did  Lycurgus  wish  the  Spartans  to  eat  in  public? 
What  of  th    children? 

9 


184  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY 

to  eat,  unless  thej  could  steal  it.  This  wicked  custom 
was  adopted  wdtli  the  idea  that  it  would  train  up  the 
young  Spartans  to  be  cunning  in  war. 

3.  In  order  that  the  people  might  not  be  avaiicious, 
Lycurgms  forbade  any  gold  or  silver  to  be  coined  into 
money.  All  the  money  was  made  of  iron.  It  could 
not  very  easily  be  carried  in  the  pocket,  for  a  Spartan 
dollar  weighed  as  much  as  fifty  pounds. 

4.  The  children  were  all  brought  up  at  the  public 
expense.  They  were  allowed  to  stand  near  the  dinner 
tables  and  listen  to  the  wise  conversation  of  their 
parents.  The  Spartans  w^ere  veiy  anxious  that  their 
children  should  abhor  drunkenness. 

5.  They  showed  them  the  disgusting  effects  of  this 
pernicious  vice,  by  causing  their  slaves  to  drink  intoxi- 
cating liquors.  When  the  children  had  witnessed  the 
ridiculous  conduct  of  the  drunken  slaves,  they  wei'e 
carefal  never  to  reduce  themselves  to  so  degraded  a 
condition. 

6.  When  Lycurgus  had  completed  his  code  of  laws, 
he  left  Sparta.  Previous  to  his  departure,  he  made  the 
people  swear  that  they  would  violate  none  of  the  law^s 

"Wliy  were  tliey  encouraged  to  steal?  3.  What  laws  were  made  respecting 
money?  What  of  a  Spartan  dollar?  4.  How  were  children  brought  up?  5.  How 
were  they  taught  to  abhor  drunkenness?  6.  What  did  Lycurgus  make  the  Spar- 
tans swear  before  he  went  away  ? 


EUROPE.  185 

till  lie  should  return.     But  lie  was  resolved  never  to 
return. 

7.  He  committed  suicide  by  starving  himself  to 
death ;  and  his  ashes  were  thrown  into  the  sea  by  his 
command,  so  that  the  Spartans  might  not  bring  back 
his  dead  body.  Thus,  as  Lycurgus  never  could  return, 
the  Spartans  were  bound  by  their  oath  to  keep  his 
laws  forever. 

8.  They  did  keep  them  during  five  hundred  years, 
and,  all  that  time,  the  Spartans  were  a  brave,  patriotic, 
and  powerful  people.  Many  of  their  customs,  how- 
ever, belonged  rather  to  a  savage  than  a  civilized 
nation. 

9.  Athens  had  two  celebrated  lawgivers,  Draco  and 
Solon.  The  laws  of  Draco  were  so  extremely  severe 
that  they  were  said  to  be  written  with  blood,  instead 
of  ink.  He  punished  even  the  smallest  offences  with 
death.     His. code  was  soon  abolished. 

10.  Solon's  laws  were  much  milder.  Almost  all  of 
them  were  wise  and  good  laws,  and  would  have  been 
advantageous  to  the  people.  But  the  Athenians  had 
so  much  fickleness  and  levity,  that  they  were  contin- 
ually proposing  alterations  in  them. 

7.  What  was  the  fate  of  the  Spartan  lawgiver?  8.  How  long  did  the  Spartans 
keep  his  laws?  9.  What  of  Draco  and  Solon?  The  laws  of  Draco?  10.  What 
of  Solon's  laws?     The  Athenians  ? 


186  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

11.  Atliens  was  at  this  time  a  republic;  wliicL  is, 
yoii  know,  a  government  of  the  people ;  but  soon  after 
Solon  had  made  his  laws,  the  supreme  power  was 
usurped  by  Pisistratus,  an  ambitious  citizen.  He  and 
his  sons  ruled  Athens  fifty  years. 


CHAPTER  LIT.— EuKOPE  Continued. 
War  with  Persia. 

1.  About  ^ve  centuries  before  the  Christian  era, 
Darius,  king  of  Persia,  made  war  against  Greece.  His 
generals  invaded  the  countiy  with  a  fleet  of  six  hun- 
di-ed  vessels,  and  half  a  million  of  men.  There  were 
scarcely  any  troops  to  opj^ose  them,  except  ten  thou- 
sand Athenians. 

2.  Darius  felt  so  certain  of  conquering  Greece,  that 
he  had  sent  great  quantities  of  marble  with  his  anny. 
He  intended  that  it  should  be  carved  into  pillars  and 
triumphal  arches,  and  other  trophies  of  victory.  He 
]ui<l  also  commanded  his  generals  to  send  all  the  Athe- 
nians to  Persia,  in  chains. 

11.  "What  was  the  goveriinu'iit  of  Athens?  "Who  usurped  tlie  svipreine  power? 
What  of  the  government  of  Athens  for  tift}'  years? 

Chapter  LII. — 1.  When  did  Darius  make  war  against  Greece  ?  What  of  the 
Tersiau  force?    The  Athenian?   2.  What  of  marble  ?   What  did  Darius  command  ? 


EUROPE.  187 

3.  Tlie  Athenian  general  was  named  Miltiades.  He 
led  Ills  little  army  against  the  immense  host  of  the 
Persians,  and  encountered  them  at  Marathon.  This 
was  a  small  town  on  the  sea-shore,  about  fifteen  miles 
north-east  of  Athens. 

4.  While  their  countrymen  were  fighting,  the  aged 
people,  the  women,  and  children,  remained  at  Athens 
in  the  utmost  anxiety.  If  Miltiades  were  to  lose  the 
battle,  they  knew  that  the  Persians  would  chase  his 
routed  army  into  the  city,  and  burn  it  to  ashes. 

5.  Suddenly  a  soldier,  covered  with  blood,  ran  into 
the  market-place  of  the  city.  He  was  sorely  wounded, 
but  he  had  come  all  the  way  from  the  army  to  bring 
the  news.  He  was  ghastly  pale,  and  the  people  feared 
that  the  Persians  had  won  the  day,  and  that  the  soldier 
was  a  fugitive. 

6.  They  gathered  round  him,  eagerly  asking  about 
Miltiades  and  the  army.  The  soldier  leaned  heavily 
upon  his  spear.  He  seemed  too  much  exhausted  to 
give  utterance  to  the  news  he  had  brought. 

7.  But,  exerting  all  his  strength,  he  cried  out,  "  Ee- 
joice,  my  countrymen!  The  victory  is  ours!"  And, 
with  that  exulting  shout,  he  fell  down  dead. 

3.  Who  was  the  Athenian  general?  Where  was  Marathon?  4.  What  of  those 
who  remained  at  Athens  ?  5.  What  messenger  was  sent  from  Marathon  ?  6. 
What  of  the  soldier?     1.  What  news  did  the  messenger  bring? 


188  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

8.  Tlie  Athenians  showed  themselves  nngrateful  to 
the  brave  Miltiades.  All  that  he  demanded  as  a  reward 
for  rescuing  his  native  land  from  slavery,  was  a  crown 
of  olive  leaves,  which  was  esteemed  a  mark  of  honor 
among  the  Greeks.  But  they  refused  to  give  him  one; 
and  he  was  afterward  condemned,  on  some  frivolous 
pretence,  to  pay  a  fine  of  fifty  talents.  As  Miltiades 
had  not  so  much  money  in  the  world,  he  perished  in 
prison. 

9.  After  the  battle  of  Marathon,  the  Persians  were 
driven  out  of  Greece,  and  Darius  died  while  he  was 
preparing  to  invade  the  country  again.  His  son 
Xerxes  renew^ed  the  war.  In  the  history  of  Persia,  I 
have  already  told  of  the  invasion  of  Greece  by  Xerxes 
with  two  millions  of  men,  and  of  the  misfortunes 
which  befel  him  there. 


8.  How  did  the  Athenians  treat  Miltiades?  His  fate?^  9.  What  of  the  Per- 
sians after  the  battle  of  Marathon?  What  of  DariUs?  Xerxes?  What  may  you 
read  in  the  history  of  Persia  ? 


EUROPE. 


189 


ANCIENT  ATHENS. 

CHAPTEE   LIII.— Europe  Continued. 
Affairs  of  AtJmis. 

1.  After  tlie  Persian  war,  Cimon,  Aristides,  and  Per- 
icles were  tlie  tliree  principal  men  of  Athens.  Pericles 
at  length  became  tlie  chief  person  in  the  republic. 
Athens  was  never  more  flourishing  than  while  he  was 
at  the  head  of  the  government. 

2.  He  adorned  the  city  with  magnificent  edifices,  and 
rendered  it  famous  for  learning,  poetry,  and  beautiful 
works  of  art,  such  as  temples,  statues,  and  paintings. 

Chapter  LIII. — 1.  Who  were  the  three  principal  meu  of  Athens  ?     What  of 
Pericles  ?     2.  What  did  he  do  for  Athens  ? 


190  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

But  the  Athenians  were  fickle,  and  generally  ungi-atefnl 
to  tlieir  public  benefactors;  and  they  sometimes  ill 
treated  Pericles. 

3.  In  the  latter  part  of  his  administration,  a  terrible 
plague  broke  out  in  Athens.     Many  of  the  citizens  fell 

"clown   and   died,  while   passing  through   the    streets. 
Dead  bodies  lay  in  heaps,  one  upon  another. 

4.  The  illustrious  Pericles  was  one  of  the  victims  of 
the  pestilence.  When  he  lay  at  the  point  of  death,  his 
friends  praised  him  for  the  glorious  deeds  which  he  had 
achieved.  "It  is  my  greatest  glory,"  replied  Pericles, 
"  that  none  of  my  acts  have  caused  a  citizen  of  Athens 
to  put  on  mourning." 

5.  Three  years  before  the  death  of  Pericles,  a  war  had 
commenced  between  Athens  and  Sparta.  These  were 
now  the  two  principal  states  of  Greece,  and  they  had 
become  jealous  of  each  other's  greatness.  A  fierce  war 
followed,  in  which  all  the  states  of  that  part  of  Greece 
called  Peloponnesus  were  engaged.  This  bloody  strife 
lasted  twenty-eight  years. 

6.  In  the  course  of  this  war,  Alcibiades  made  a  con- 

"What  was  the  general  character  of  the  Athenians  ?  3.  What  of  the  plague? 
4.  What  did  Pericles  say  on  his  deathbed?  5.  What  was  begun  three  years  be- 
fore the  death  of  Pericles?  "VVliat  of  Athens  and  Sparta?  How  long  did  the 
Peloponnesian  war  last?  What  states  were  included  in  the  Peloponnesus?  Ans. 
Arcadia,  Laconia,  Messenia,  Elia,  Argolis,  Achaia,  Sicyon,  and  Coriiuh.  6.  Wluu 
of  Alcibiades  ? 


EUROPE.  191 

splcuous  figure  among  tlie  Athenians.  He  was  tlie 
handsomest  and  most  agreeable  man  in  Athens.  At 
one  period  he  was  greatly  beloved  by  the  people,  and 
possessed  almost  unlimited  power.  But  he  was  ambi- 
tious, and  destitute  of  principle. 

7.  He  w^as  the  cause  of  much  trouble,  not  only  in 
nis  native  city,  but  all  over  Greece.  At  last,  when  he 
had  lost  the  good  will  of  everybody,  he  retired  to  a 
small  village  in  Phrygia,  in  Asia  Minor^  and  dwelt 
there  with  a  woman  named  Timandra. 

8.  His  enemies  sent  a  party  of  assassins  to  murder 
him.  These  set  fire  to  the  house  in  which  he  lived. 
Alcibiades  was  a  brave  man,  and  he  rushed  out,  sword 
in  hand,  to  fight  the  assassins.  But  they  stood  at  a 
distance,  and  pierced  him  through  with  javelins.  They 
then  went  away,  leaving  Timandra  to  bury  him. 

9.  The  Peloponnesian  war  brought  great  misfortunes 
upon  the  Athenians.  The  Spartans  conquered  them, 
and  burnt  the  city ;  and  while  this  work  of  destruction 
was  going  forward,  the  victors  caused  gay  tunes  of 
music  to  be  played. 

10.  The  Athenians  were  now  placed  under  the  gov- 
ernment of  thirty  Spartan  captains.  These  were  called 
the  Thirty  Tyrants  of  Athens;   but  they  held  their 

•7.  What  happened  to  him  ?     8,  How  did  he  die  ?     9.  What  of  Athenian  mia- 
fortunes  ?     10.  What  of  the  thirty  tyrants  ? 


192  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

power  only  tliree  years.  Thrasybulus,  a  patriotic 
Athenian,  tlien  incited  his  countrymen  to  regain  their 
freedom. 

11.  The  thii'ty  tp-ants  were  expelled,  and  Thrasy- 
bulus was  rewarded  with  a  wreath  made  of  two  twigi 
of  an  olive  tree,  which,  as  I  have  before  said,  was 
esteemed  a  great  mark  of  honor.  Athens  again  became 
prosperous,  and  its  former  government  was  restored  in 
the  year  403  before  the  Christian  era. 

Thrasybulus?      11.  How  was  he  rewarded  for  expelling  the  thirty  tvrauts? 
Wbat  took  place  403  B.  C.  ? 


EUROPE, 


193 


GOIiEK  WARRIORS,  WITH  SPEABS,  JAVELINS,  SLINGS,  AND  BOWS  AND  ARROWS. 

CHAPTEE   LIY.— Europe  Continued. 

Beginning  of  the  Thehan  War, 

1.  Not  long  after  tliis  period,  Thebes  became  the 
most  distinguished  city  of  Greece.  It  was  the  capital 
of  the  kingdom  of  Boeotia.  A  war  between  Thebes 
and  Sparta  originated  in  the  following  manner.  Phse- 
bidas,  a  Spartan  general,  had  wrongfully  taken  posses- 
sion of  Cadmsea,  a  fortress  belonging  to  Thebes.  The 
Thebans  demanded  that  it  should  be  given  up;  bx  ; 
the  Spartans  gan^soned  it  strongly,  and  resolved  1 ; 
hold  it  as  their  own. 

Chapter  LIV. — 1.  What  of  Thebes  ?     How  did  the  war  between   Thebes  and 
Sparta  originate  ? 


194  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

2.  A  brave  and  patriotic  young  man  of  Thebes, 
named  Pelopidas,  contrived  a  scheme  to  get  back  the 
fortress.  He  and  eleven  companions  put  on  their 
breastplates,  and  girded  their  swords  around  them, 
but  clothed  themselves  in  women's  garments  over  their 
armor.  In  this  garb,  they  went  to  the  gate  of  Cad- 
msea,  and  were  admitted.  .!■ 

3.  The  magistrates  and  Spartan  officers  were  assem- 
bled at  a  splendid  festival.  Archias,  the  Spartan  com- 
mander, sat  at  the  head  of  the  table.  He  and  his 
friends  were  wholly  occupied  with  the  enjoyment  of 
the  banquet.  They  took  scarcely  any  notice  when  the 
twelve  fiOTres  in  female  attire  entered  the  hall. 

4.  At  the  moment  when  the  mirth  and  festivity  of 
the  Spartans  was  at  its  height,  the  strangers  tore  off 
their  female  garb.  Instead  of  twelve  women,  there 
stood  twelve  young  warriors.  The  light  of  the  festal 
torches  flashed  back  from  their  bright  breastplates. 
Their  naked  swords  were  in  their  hands. 

5.  Pelopidas  and  his  eleven  companions  immediately 
attacked  the  Spartan  banqueters.     Their  sur])rise  hin- 
dered the  Spartans  from  making  any  effectual  resist-' 
ance.      Archias  and  many  others  were  struck   dead, 
almost  before  they  could  rise  from  the  table. 

2-4.  What  of  Pelopidas?  Describe  the  scheme  of  Pelopidas  and  his  compan- 
joiis.     5.  Did  tiiis  bold  undertaking  succeed? 


EUROPE.  195 

6.  Thus  tlie  Tliebans  gained  possession  of  the  for- 
tress. But  Spai-ta  immediately  began  a  war  against 
Thebes.  Many  of  the  other  states  of  Greece  lent  their 
assistance  to  the  Spartans.  It  appeared  probable  that 
the  Thebans  would  be  conquered  and  entirely  ruined. 
^7.  But  they  had  a  brave  and  skilful  general,  named 
Epaminondas.  With  only  six  thousand  Thebans,  he 
encountered  twenty-five  thousand  Spartans,  commanded 
by  Cleombrotus,  their  king.  Tlie  battle  was  fought  at 
Leuctra.  The  Thebans  gained  a  complete  victory,  and 
killed  Cleombrotus  and  fourteen  hundred  of  his  men. 


CHAPTER  LY.— EuEOPE  Continued. 

Sequel  of  the  Tlieban  War, 

1.  Epaminondas,  the  Theban  general,  was  one  of  the 
best  men  that  lived  in  ancient  times.  His  private 
virtues  were  equal  to  his  patriotism  and  valor.  It  is 
said  of  him  that  a  falsehood  was  never  known  to  come 
from  his  lips ;  one  of  the  highest  praises  that  can  be 
bestowed  on  any  man. 

6.  "What  state  made  war  upon  Thebes?  Other  states?  7.  What  of  Epaminon- 
das? His  army?  The  Spartan  force?  "Who  was  the  Spartan  leader?  Did  the 
Thebans  gain  the  victory  ?  . 

Chapter  LV.— 1.  Character  of  Epaminondas  ? 


196  UNIYERSAL  HISTORY. 

2.  It  miglit  be  supposed  tliat  the  Thebans  would 
Lave  felt  the  utmost  gratitude  toward  Epaminondas, 
whose  valor  had  saved  his  country ;  and  it  is  true  that 
the  most  virtuous  part  of  the  people  honored  him 
according  to  his  merits ;  but  I  am  sorry  to  tell  you  that 
a  great  and  good  man  is  very  apt  to  have  enemies.     , 

3.  His  virtues  and  his  greatness  are  a  reproach  to  the 
vicious  and- the  mean,  and  therefore  they  hate  him,  and 
seek  to  destroy  him.  So  it  happened  with  Epaminon- 
das,  and  so  it  has  happened  in  all  ages. 

4.  Epaminondas  had  many  enemies  among  the  The- 
bans. They  at  first  attempted  to  have  him  sentenced 
to  death  because  he  had  kept  the  command  of  the  army 
longer  than  the  law  permitted.  But  as  his  only  motive 
had  been  to  preserve  Thebes  from  ruin,  his  judges  con- 
cluded to  let  him  live. 

5.  Nevertheless,  in  order  to  disgrace  him  as  much  as 
possible,  he  was  appointed  to  clean  the  streets  of 
Thebes.  Epaminondas  was  not  mortified ;  for  he  knew 
that  the  Thebans  might  disgrace  themselves  by  such 
ingratitude,  but  could  not  disgrace  him.     He  therefore 

..  set  about  discharging  the  duties  of  his  new  ofiice,  and 


2.  Were  the  Thebans  grateful  to  him  ?  3.  Why  do  the  wicked  liate  a  great  and 
good  man?  4.  What  did  the  Thebans  attempt?  5.  How  did  they  seek  to 
disgrace  Epaminondas? 


EUROPE.  197 

this  great  and  victorious  general  was  accordingly  seen 
cleaning  away  tlie  iiltli  from  the  streets. 

6.  But  the  war  was  not  yet  at  an  end;  and  the 
Thebans  soon  found  that  they  could  not  do  without 
Epaminondas.  They  made  him  throw  away  his  broom! 
and  take  the  sword  again.  He  was  placed  at  the  head; 
of  the  army,  with  greater  power  than  he  had  possessed 
before. 

7.  So  long  as  Epaminondas  was  their  general,  the 
Thebans  were  the  most  powerful  people  of  Greece. 
The  last  victory  that  he  gained  was  at  Mantinea.  But 
it  cost  the  Thebans  dear ;  for  while  Epaminondas  was 
fighting  in  the  thickest  of  the  battle,  a  Spartan  soldier- 
thrust  a  javelin  into  his  breast. 

8.  The  Thebans  and  Spartans  fought  around  the 
wounded  Epaminondas,  the  latter  wishing  to  put  an  end 
to  his  life,  and  the  former  to  bear  him  from  the  field. 
The  Spartans  were  driven  back,  and  some  of  his  sol- 
diers carried  Epaminondas  in  their  arms  to  his  tent. 

9.  The  javelin  remained  sticking  in  the  wound,  for 
the  surs-eons  declared  that  he  would  die  the  moment 
that  it  should  be  drawn  out.    Epaminondas  lay  in  great 

Was  he  mortified  ?  What  did  he  do  ?  6.  What  did  the  Thebans  find  ?  What 
did  tliey  do?  1.  What  of  Thebes  while  Epaminondas  was  general?  What  was 
his  last  victory?  How  was  he  wounded  ?  8.  By  whom  was  he  carried  from  the 
field?     9.  What  of  the  javelin  ? 


198 


UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


pain ;  but  lie  tliouglit  little  of  his  own  agony,  and  was 
anxious  only  for  the  success  of  liis  countrymen. 

10.  At  last  a  messenger  came  from  the  battle-field, 
and  told  him  that  the  Spartans  were  flying,  and  that 
Thebes  had  won  a  glorious  victory.  "  Then  all  is 
well !"  said  Epaminondas.  As  he  spoke,  he  drew  the 
javelin  out  of  his  wound,  and  instantly  expired. 

11.  This  event  took  place  in  the  year  363  before  the 
Chi^istian  era.  After  the  death  of  Epaminondas,  the 
Thebans  were  no  longer  formidable  to  the  rest  of  the 
Greeks. 


CHAPTER  LVI.— Europe  Continued. 
Chi^ecian  Religion  or  Mythology. 
1.  My  history  has  now  reached  the  period  when  the 
glory  of  Greece  was  at  its  height; 
and  I  shall  soon  have  to  speak  of  its 
decline.  Before  doing  so,  I  think  it 
proper  to  give  a  slight  account  of  the 
religion  of  the  Greeks,  and  some 
other  interesting  particulars. 

2.  The  Greeks  believed  that  there 
were  three  classes  of  deities,  the  Ce- 
lestial, the  Marine,  and  the  Infernal. 

10.  Describe  the  death  of  Epaminondas.     11.  When  did  this  happen  ?    What 
of  the  Thebans  after  the  death  of  Epaminondas  ? 

CiiAi'TEU  LVI. — 1.  At  what  period  was  the  glory  of  Greece  at  its  height? 


EUROPE. 


199 


Tlie  first,  as  they  fancied,  dwelt  in  the  sky,  the  second 
in  the  sea,  and  the  third  in  the  dreary  regions  under 
the  earth.  Besides  these,  there  were 
inferior  kinds  of  deities,  who  haunted 
the  woods,  or  lived  in  fountains  and 
streams. 

3.  The  deities  whose  home  was  in 
the  sky,  were  Jupiter,  Apollo,  Mars, 
Mercury,  Bacchus,  Vulcan,  Juno, 
Minerva,  Venus,  Diana,  Ceres,  and 
Vesta.  The  greatest  of  all  the  gods 
was  Jupiter.  When  it  thundered  and  lightened,  the 
Greeks  supposed  that  Jupiter  was  angry,  and  was 
flinging  his  thunderbolts  about. 

4.  The  Olympic  games  were  institu- 
ted by  the  Greeks  in  honor  of  Jupiter. 
These  games  were  celebrated  every 
four  years.  They  consisted  of  races 
on  foot,  and  on  horseback,  and  in 
chariots,  and  of  leaping,  wrestling,  and 
boxing.  It  was  considered  a  very 
great  honor  for  a  person  to  gain  a 
prize  at  the  Olympic  games. 

2.  In  what  deities  did  the  Greeks  believe?  "What  were  the  three  classes? 
"Where  did  each  of  them  dwell?  "What  of  inferior  deities?  3.  Who  were  the 
celestial  deities?    What  of  Jupiter?     4.  What  of  the  Olympic  games? 


200 


UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


5.  Apollo  was  tlie  son  of  Jupiter.  He  was  supposed 
to  be  the  driver  of  tlie  sun,  whicli  had  four  horses  har- 
nessed to  it,  and  went  round  the 
world  every  day.  It  was  pretty 
much  like  a  modem  stage-coach,  ex- 
cept that  it  carried  no  passengers. 

6.  Besides  being  the  coachman  of 
the  sun,  Apollo  was  likewise  the  god 
of  music  and  poetry,  and  of  medicine, 
and  all  the  fine  arts.  He  also  pre- 
sided over  the  famous  oracle  at  Del- 

phos,  whither  people  used  to  come  from  all  parts  of 
the  world  to  find  out  the  events  of  futurity. 

7.  Mars  was  the  god  of  war,  and 
Mercury  the  god  of  merchants,  trav- 
ellers, and  shepherds,  and  Bacchus 
the  god  of  wine,  and  Vulcan  the  god 
of  blacksmiths,  Vulcan  seems  to 
have  been  one  of  the  best  and  most 
useful  of  the  heathen  deities,  for  he 
was  an  excellent  blacksmith,  and 
worked  hard  at  his  anvil. 

8.  Venus  was  the  goddess  of  beauty.     Her  statues 


5,  What  of  Apollo?     His  diariot?     6    What  more  can  you  tell  of  Apollo ?     7 
What  of  Mars  ?     Mercury  ?    Bacchus  ?  •  Vulcan  ?     8.  What  of  Venus  ? 


EUROPE. 


■201 


were  made  in  tlie  foiin  of  a  beautiful  woman.  Slie  had 
a  son  named  Cupid,  wlio  was  a  mischievous  little  deity, 
and  used  to  shoot  at  people  with  a  bow 
and  arrow. 

9.  Neptune  was  the  chief  of  the  ma- 
rine  deities.      It  was   supposed  that 
he  had  a  huge  scallop-shell  for  a  char- 
iot, and  that  his  horses  had  the  tails 
of  fishes.     Whenever  he  rode  over  the 
waves,   a   tribe    of    sea  monsters   sur- 
rounded his  chariot. 
10.  Pluto  was  the  deity  who  presided  in  the  infer- 
nal regions.     He  used  to  sit  on  a  throne  of  brimstone, 
looking  very  stern   and   awful.      In 
one  hand  he  held  a  sceptre,  and  in 
the  other   two  keys.      A  dog  with 
three  heads  kept  guard  at  his  gate. 

11.  Juno  was  the  wife  of  Jupiter, 
and  queen  of  heaven.  Minerva  was 
the  goddess  of  wisdom,  Diana  the 
goddess  of  hunting,  Ceres  the-goddess 
of  the  fields  and  the  harvests,  and 
Vesta  the  goddess  of  fire. 


Cupid?  9.  What  of  Neptune?  Where  did  he  dwell?  How  is  he  represented? 
10.  Who  was  Pluto?  Where  did  he  dwell ?  What  of  him?  His  dog?  11.  What 
ol'  Juno  ?     Minerva  ?     Ceres  ?     Vesta  ? 


202 


UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


12.  Beside  tlie  gods  and  goddesses,  tlie  Greeks  be- 
lieved ill  heroes,  who  Avere  half  gods  and   half  men. 
Of  these,  Hercules  was  very  famous 
for  his  wonderful  feats  of  strensTth. 

18.  Ridiculous  as  their  deities 
were,  the  Greeks  honored  them  with 
magnificent  temples.  No  other  edi- 
fices ever  built  by  mortal  hands  have 
been  so  beautiful.  Some  of  the 
churches  in  our  own  country  are  now 
built  on  the  plan  of  the  old  Grecian 
temples  dedicated  to  heathen  gods. 

14,  The    Grecian   sculptors    carved   marble   statues 


of  their   deities.      These   images  were  so  gi^and,  and 


12.  What  of  heroes?     Hercules?     13.  How  did  the  Greeks  lienor  their  falso 
gods?    What  of  toniples?     14.  What  can  you  say  of  the  Grecian  statue-s? 


EUROPE. 


203 


beautiful,  and  dignified,  tliat  it  seems  as  if  tlie  artists 
must  have  seen  sucli  heavenly  creatures  somewhere, 
or  else  they  never  could  have  carved  their  likenesses. 


CIIAPTErt  LYIL— Europe  Continued. 
The  Grecian  Philosophers, 


\ 


1.  The  Greek  philosophers  were  men  who  pretended 
to  be  wiser  than  mankind  in  general.  There  were  a 
great  many  of  them,  who  lived  in  various  ages.  I  shall 
speak  of  some  of  the  most  remarkable,  in  this  and  the 
following  chapter. 

2.  The  philosopher  Thales  was  born  between  six  and 


CfiAPTEK  LVII. — 1.  "Who  were  the  Greek  philosophers' 


"204:  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

seven  hundred  years  before  the  Christian  era.  In  his 
time  there  were  seven  philosophers,  who  were  called 
the  seven  wise  men  of  Greece ;  and  Thales  was  con- 
sidered the  wisest  of  them  all. 

3.  One  night,  while  this  great  philosopher  was  taking 
a  walk,  he  looked  upward  to  contemplate  the  stars. 

'Being  much  interested  in  this  occupation,  he  strayed 
out  of  his  path,  and  tumbled  into  a  ditch.  An  old 
woman  who  lived  in  his  family  ran  and  helped  him  out, 
all  covered  with  mud.  "  For  the  future,  Thales,"  said 
she, "  I  advise  you  not  to  have  your  head  among  the 
stars,  while  your  feet  are  on  the  earth !"  Some  people 
think  that  the  old  woman  was  the  wisest  philosopher 
of  the  two. 

4.  The  philosopher  Pythagoras  believed  that  when 
people  died,  their  souls  migrated  into  the  bodies  of 
animals  or  birds.  He  affirmed  that  his  own  soul  once 
lived  in  the  body  of  a  peacock. 

5.  Heraclitus  of  Ephesus  was  called  the  dark  ])hilos- 
opher,  because  all  his  sayings  were  like  riddles.  He 
thonglit  that  nothing  was  wisdom  which  could  be 
understood  l)y  common  peo])]e. 

6.  This   wise   man   considered    the    world    such    a 

2.  Who  was  Thales?  Where  was  lie  bom?  What  of  the  seven  wise  men? 
How  WHS  Thales  considered  ?  3.  Relate  an  anecdote  of  him.  4.  What  did  Py. 
^1  .:.M..,s  buliovo?     5,  6.  What  of  Heraclitus? 


EUROPE.  205 

wretclied  place,  tliat  lie  never  could  look  at  anybody 
without  shedding  tears.  And  at  last  lie  retired  to  a 
cave  among  the  mountains,  where  he  lived  on  herbs 
and  roots,  and  v^as  as  miserable  as  his  heart  could  msh. 

7.  Democritus,  who  lived  not  long  after  Heraclitus, 
was  quite  a  different  sort  of  philosopher.  Instead  of 
shedding  tears,  he  laughed  so  continually  that  his 
townsmen  thought  him  mad.  And,  to  say  the  truth, 
I  think  so  too. 

8.  The  philosopher  Empedocles  went  and  lived  near 
Mount  Etna,  in  Sicily.  He  was  a  man  of  very  grave 
and  majestic  appearance,  and  everybody  knew  him, 
because  he  used  to  wear  a  crown  of  laurel  on  his  head. 
People  generally  acknowledged  him  to  be  a  very  wise 
man ;  but,  not  content  with  this,  he  "wanted  to  be 
thought  a  god. 

9.  One  day,  after  he  had  prej)ared  a  great  festival, 
Empedocles  disappeared,  and  was  never  seen  again. 
The  people  took  it  for  granted  that  he  had  ascended  to 
heaven.  But  shortly  afterward,  there  was  an:  eruption 
of  Mount  Etna,  and  an  old  shoe  was  thrown  out  of 
the  crater.  On  examination,  it  was  found  out  that  this 
shoe  had  belonged  to  Empedocles.     It  was  now  easy  to 

•?.  What  of  Democritus  ?  How  did  he  differ  from  Heraclitus?  8,  Where  did 
Empedocles  live?  What  did  he  wish  to  be  thought?  9.  What  means  did  he 
take  to  make  people  think  liiui  a  god? 


206  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

guess  at  the  fate  of  tlie  foolish  old  man.  He  had 
thrown  himself  into  the  crater  of  the  blazing  yolcano, 
in  order  that  people  might  think  him  a  god,  and  that 
he  had  gone  to  heaven. 

10.  Socrates  was  one  of  the  wisest  and  best  philos- 
ophers of  Greece.  Indeed,  he  was  so  wise  and  good, 
that  the  profligate  Athenians  could  not  suffer  him  to 
live.     They  therefore  compelled  him  to  drink  poison. 

11.  Diogenes  was  the  queerest  philosopher  of  all. 
He  was  called  Diogenes  the  Dog, — either  because  he 
lived  like  a  dog,  or  because  he  had  a  currish  habit  of 
snarling  at  everybody. 

12.  His  doctrine  was,  that  the  fewer  enjoyments  a 
man  had,  the  happier  he  was  likely  to  be.  This  phi- 
losopher went  about  barefoot,  dressed  in  very  shabby 
clothes,  and  carrying  a  bag,  a  jug,  and  a  staff.  He 
afterward  got  a  great  tub,  which  he  used  to  lug  about 
with  him  all  day  long,  and  sleep  in  at  night. 

13.  One  day,  Alexander  the  Great  came  to  see 
Diogenes,  and  found  him  mending  his  tub.  It  hap- 
pened that  Alexander  stood  in  such  a  manner  as  to 
shade  Diogenes  from  the  sun,  and  he  felt  cold.  "Dio- 
genes," said  Alexander,  "you  must  have  a  very  hard 
time  of  it,  living  in  a  tub.     Can  I  do  any  thing  to  bet^ 


10.  What  of  Socrates  ?     His  death  ?     11.  What  of  Diogenes  ?     12.  His  dootrioes  ? 


EUROPE.  207 

ter  your  condition  ?"  "  Nothing,  except  to  get  out  of 
my  sunshine,"  replied  Diogenes,  who  disdained  to 
accept  any  other  favor  from  the  greatest  monarch  in 
the  world. 


CHAPTER  LYIIL-^EuBOP?;  Continued. 
Somethmg  more  about  J^hilosopher^.    About  the  Greek  Poets. 

1.  I  COULD  tell  you  much  more  about  the  Grecian 
philosophers,  but  I  have  not  room.  I  must  not  forget, 
however,  to  mention  Plato,  who  was  born  429  years 
B.  C,  and  was  for  eight  years  the  pupil  of  Socrates. 

2.  This  great  man,  like  many  other  Grecian  philos- 
ophers, was  a  sort  of  schoolmaster,  and  many  young 
men  came  to  be  taught  by  him.  He  delivered  his  lec- 
tures in  a  grove  near  Athens,  called  Academus,  from 
which  circumstance  the  v/ord  academy  has  since  been 
applied  to  schools. 

3.  So  great  was  his  reputation,  that  the  first  young 
men  fi*om  various  parts  of  the  world  came  to  be  his 

How  did  he  live  ?    13.  Tell  an  anecdote  of  Diogenes. 

Chapter  LVIII. — 1.  When  was  Plato  born?    Whose  pupil  was  he?     2.  What 
else  of  Plato  ?^   3.  What  of  his  ideas,  and  his  mode  of  expressing  them  ? 

10 


208  UNIYERSAL  HISTORY. 

pupils.  He  had  very  sublime  ideas  of  religion,  virtue, 
and  truth,  and  lie  delivered  tliem  with  so  much  sweet- 
ness and  eloquence,  that  his  listeners  were  enchanted. 
The  Greeks  spoke  of  him  as  Plato  the  Divine. 

4.  There  were  other  celebrated  philosophers  in 
Greece,  but  I  must  leave  them  now,  and  tell  you  of  the 
poets.  Homer,  the  best  poet  of  ancient  times,  and  one  of 
the  greatest  that  ever  lived,  I  have  already  mentioned. 
When  this  great  man  was  born,  how  he  lived,  or  where 
he  died,  are  matters  of  uncertainty. 

5.  The  general  opinion  is,  that  he  lived  about  the 
year  900  B.  C.  and  was  a  wandering  minstrel,  who 
went  about  from  place  to  place  reciting  and  singing  his 
verses.  The  Iliad  and  Odyssey,  his  two  great  poems, 
were  composed  in  separate  parts,  and,  but  for  the  care 
of  Lycurgus,  who  had  them  collected, -would  doubtless 
have  been  lost.  They  celebrate  the  actions  of  heroes 
and  imaginary  gods,  and  are  full  of  the  deepest  interest. 

G.  There  were  a  multitude  of  other  poets  in  Greece, 
some  of  whom  acquired  great  celebrity.  Among  these 
was  Anacreon,  who  wYote  about  love;  Pindar,  who 
coraposed  sublime  odes;  and  Theocritus,  who  sang 
about  shepherds  and  shepherdesses.     There  were  also 


4.  What  of  Homer?     5.  When  is  it  supposed  Homer  hved?    How  did  he  live? 
What  of  his  poems  ?    6.  What  of  Anacreon  ?    Pindar  ?    Theocritus  ?    Other  poets  ? 


EUROPE.  •  209 


many  poets  wlio  wrote  pieces  to  be  played  upon  the 


stage. 


7.  You  already  know  that  the  Greeks  were  m  many 
respects  very  ignorant,  and  entertained  many  absm^d 
notions.  They  did  not  know  that  the  earth  is  a  great 
globe  or  ball,  that  it  turns  round  every  day,  and  that 
the  moon  and  stars  are  also  great  worlds  moving 
about  in  the  sky. 

8.  You  would  not  therefore  expect  in  their  poetry  to 
iind  any  useful  information  about  geography  or  astron- 
omy. Yet  they  lived  in  a  beautiful  country,  and  their 
mountains,  streams,  and  valleys  were  often  the  subject 
of  their  songs. 

9.  Their  religion,  too,  though  full  of  absurdity,  fur- 
nished materials  for  the  poets.  They  described  the 
gods  and  goddesses  as  dwelling  upon  the  mountains, 
or  skipping  along  the  valleys,  or  gliding  amidst  the 
waters.  Thus  every  object  of  nature  derived  a  new 
interest  from  the  vivid  fancy  of  the  poets. 

10.  To  this  day  the  verses  of  these  poets  are  remem- 
bered, and  the  places  mentioned  by  them  are  often 


1.  What  did  the  Greeks  not  know?  8.  What  of  the  poetrj  of  the  ancient 
Greeks?  9.  What  use  did  the  Grecian  poets  make  of  tlieir  mythology?  10.  Are 
the  poems  of  the  ancient  Greeks  still  remembered?  Why  are  the  places  men- 
tioned in  these  poems  rendered  more  interesting  to  travellers  of  the  present  time 
who  visit  them  ? 


210         '  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

visited  by  travellers,  who  look  upon  tliem  with  emo- 
tion, on  account  of  the  beautiful  fictions  they  inspired 
more  than  two  thousand  years  ago. 


VASES    USED   BY   THE    GREEKS  FOR   WATER. 

CHAPTER  LIX.— Europe  Continued. 

Ahout  the  Mode  of  Life  among  tJie  Ancient  Greeks, 

1.  But  we  must  now  leave  poets  and  philosopher?:, 
and  take  a  view  of  the  private  life  of  the  ancient 
Greeks.  The  men  wore  an  inner  garment,  called  a 
tunic,  over  which  they  threw  a  mantle ;  their  shoes  or 

Chapter  LTX. — 1.  What  did  the  men  wear  among  the  ancient  Greeks? 


EUROPE.  211 

sandals  were  bound  about  tbeir  feet  witli  thongs  or 
ropes.  In  ancient  times,  the  Greeks  went  with  their 
heads  uncovered,  but  afterward  they  used  hats  which 
were  tied  under  the  chin. 

2.  The  women  always  covered  their  heads  with  a 
veil,  which  came  down  upon  the  shoulders.  They  wore 
in  their  hair  golden  grasshoppers,  and  ear-rings  were 
suspended  from  their  ears.  The  rest  of  their  dress 
consisted  of  a  white  tunic  fastened  with  a  broad  sash, 
and  descending  in  folds  down  to  their  heels. 

3.  The  Greeks  usually  made  four  meals  a  day :  the 
morning  meal,  which  was  taken  at  the  rising  of  the 
sun ;  the  next  at  mid-day ;  the  afternoon  repast ;  and 
the  supper,  which  was  the  principal  meal,  as  it  was 
taken  after  the  business  of  the  day.  At  the  head  of 
this  chapter,  I  have  given  you  pictures  of  some  of  their 
vessels  for  water,  which  will  show  you  that  some 
articles  of  their  fnrniture  were  very  beautiful. 

4.  In  the  early  ages,  the  food  of  the  Greeks  was  the 
fruits  of  the  earth,  and  their  drink  water ;  the  flesh  of 
animals  was  introduced  at  a  later  period.  This  brought 
on  the  luxuries  of  the  table,  and  some  of  the  cities  of 

Their  shoes?  Head-dress?  2.  Head-dress  of  the  women?  What  ornaments 
did  they  wear?  The  rest  of  their  dress  ?  3.  The  meals  of  the  Greeks?  4.  What 
was  the  food  of  the  Greeks  in  the  early  ages  ?  What  of  flesh  ?  Luxuries  of  the 
table? 


212  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

Greece  became  renowned  for  producing  excellent  cooks. 
The  Spartans,  as  we  have  before  mentioned,  ate  at 
public  tables.  Their  chief  food  consisted  of  black 
broth. 

5.  The  poor  sometimes  fed  on  grasshoppers,  and  the 
extremities  of  leaves.  In  general,  the  Greeks  were 
very  fond  of  flesh.  Their  usual  drink  was  water,  either 
hot  or  cold,  but  most  commonly  the  latter,  which  was 
sometimes  cooled  with  ice.  Wines  were  very  generally 
used,  and  even  perfumed  wines  were  introduced  at  the 
tables  of  the  rich. 

6.  Before  the  Greeks  went  to  an  entertainment,  they 
washed  and  anointed  themselves;  when  they  arrived, 
the  entertainer  took  them  by  the  hand,  or  kissed  their 
lips,  hands,  knees,  or  feet,  as  they  deserved  more  or 
less  respect.  It  must  be  observed  concerning  the 
guests,  that  men  and  women  were  never  invited 
together. 

Y.  They  sat  at  meat  either  quite  upright,  or  leaning 

a  little  backward,  but  in  more  degenerate  ages  they 

adopted  the  eastern  custom  of   reclining  on  beds  or 

Cv'jiiclies.     As  soon  as  the  provisions  were  set  on  tlitj 

• 

What  of  tlic  Spartans?  5.  What  of  tho  poor?  Were  the  Greeks  fond  of  meat 
for  food?  Wliai  of  rh'Mr  drink?  Wine?  C.  What  ofeiitortainnients?  Men  and 
won)!';!  ?     7.  How  di<l  tliey  sit  :.t  t;il)le?    JIow  do  the  people  of  Asia  sit  at  table? 

IM  til     '  ii-.  .  I-,,~  a.loiit  this  A.slalic  LMi-4oni? 


EUROPE.  213 

table,  and  before  tlie  guests  began  to  eat,  a  part  was 
offered  as  a  sort  of  first-fruits  to  the  gods. 

8.  They  had  a  custom  similar  to  ours,  of  drinking 
healths,  not  only  to  those  present,  but  to  their  absent 
friends ;  and  at  every  name  they  poured  a  little  mne 
on  the  ground,  which  was  called  a  libation. 

9.  The  entertainment  being  ended,  a  hymn  was  sung 
to  the  gods.  After  this,  the  company  was  amused  with 
music,  dancing,  and  mimicry,  or  whatever  could  tend 
to  excite  mirth  or  cheerfulness. 

10.  The  houses  of  the  rich  were  built  of  stone,  and 
many  of  them  were  highly  ornamented.  A  large  part 
of  the  people,  however,  lived  in  huts  made  of  rough 
stone  laid  in  clay. 

11.  In  war,  the  Greeks  fought  with  various  weapons. 
Some  of  the  soldiers  had  bows  and  arrows ;  some  had 
javelins  or  spears,  which  they  hurled  with  great  force 
and  precision  of  aim ;  and  some  had  slings  with  which 
they  threw  stones.  They  usually  carried  shields  for 
warding  off  the  weapons  of  their  enemies. 

12.  You  must  recollect  that  in  these  ancient  times, 
gunpowder  was  not  known,  and  muskets  and  cannoii 
were  therefore  not  in  use.     In  battle,  the  warriors  often 

What  was  done  before  beginning  to  eat?  8.  Drinking  healths?  Libations? 
9.  What  followed  the  eating?  10.  What  of  the  habitations  of  the  rich?  Of  the 
poor?  1 1 .  What  weapons  were  used  by  the  Greeks  in  war  ?   12.  What  of  gunpowder  ? 


214  UNIYERSAL  HISTORY. 

engaged  iu  close  conflict,  foot  to  foot,  and  breast  to 
breast.  The  strife  was  therefore  very  exciting,  and  the 
men  usually  fought  with  farious  courage. 

13.  As  mankind  were  very  much  given  to  making 
war  upon  one  another,  it  was  the  custom  in  all  coun- 
tries to  surround  the  cities  with  high  walls  for  defense. 
This  practice  indeed  continued  for  many  ages,  and  if 
you  ever  go  to  Eui^ope,  you  will  see  that  the  principal 
cities  of  France,  Germany,  and  many  other  countries, 
are  still  secured  in  this  way. 

14.  In  modern  times,  when  an  army  attacks  a  city, 
it  batters  down  the  walls  with  cannon  shot,  or  by 
undermining  them,  placing  gunpowder  beneath,  and 
then  setting  it  on  fire.  But  in  the  olden  times  of 
Greece,  the  warrioi-s  used  battering  rams,  consisting  of 
heavy  beams  with  ponderous  stones  at  one  end.  These 
were  driven  by  main  strength  against  the  walls,  and 
thus,  after  many  efforts,  they  were  demolished. 

How  did  llie  warriors  engage  one  anotber  in  conflict?  13.  What  was  the  cus- 
tom regarding  cities  ?  What  are  to  be  seen  in  Europe?  14.  How  do  the  moderns 
attack  a  walled  city  ?    How  did  the  ancients  destroy  the  walls  of  a  city? 


EUROPE.  215 

CHAPTER   LX.— Europe   Continued. 
Philip  of  Mace  don  conquers  Greece. 

1.  I  SHALL  now  resume  tlie  history  of  Greece,  at  tlie 
point  where  I  left  off.  The  reader  will  recollect  that  I 
had  just  finished  speaking  of  the  Theban  war. 

2.  Not  long  after  the  close  of  that  war,  the  states  of 
Greece  became  involved  in  another,  which  was  generally 
called  the  Sacred  war.  The  people  of  Phocis  had  been 
sentenced,  by  the  Amphyctionic  council,  to  pay  a 
heavy  fine  for  ploughing  a  fiekl  which  belonged  to  the 
temple  of  Apollo,  at  Delphos. 

3.  Rather  than  pay  the  fine,  the  Phocians  resolved 
to  go  to  war.  The  people  of  Athens,  Sparta,  and 
Achaia,  assisted  the  Phocians.  The  Thebans,  Locrians, 
and  Thessalians,  took  the  part  of  the  Amphyctionic 
council,  and  Philip,  king  of  Macedon,  was  solicited  to 
fight  on  the  same  side. 

p  4.  The  kingdom  of  Macedon  is  numbered  by  some 
historians  among  the  states  of  Greece ;  but  others  con- 
sider it  a  separate  country.     Although  it  was  founded 


2.  What  of  the  sacred  war  ?  The  cause  of  it?  3.  What  states  fought  on  the 
side  of  the  Phociaos?  What  on  the  side  of  the  Amphyctionic  council?  On  whicb 
side  did  PhiUp,  1<ing  of  Maoeaon,  fight?     4.  What  of  Macedon  ? 


216  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

about  ^ve  liiindred  years  before  this  period,  it  bad 
never  been  very  powerful  till  Pbilip  mounted  the 
throne. 

5.  Philip  was  ambitious  and  warlike.  No  sooner 
h^fd  he  marched  his  army  into  Greece,  than  he  deter- 
mined to  make  himself  ruler  of  the  w^hole  country. 
The  Greeks  were  not  now  so  valiant  as  they  had  been  ; 
and  there  were  no  such  men  as  Leonidas,  Miltiades,  or 
Epaminondas,  to  lead  them  to  victory. 

6.  The  man  that  gave  Philip  more  trouble  than  any 
other,  was  Demosthenes,  an  Athenian.  He  was  one  of 
the  most  eloquent  orators  that  ever  lived ;  and  he 
uttered  such  terrible  orations  against  Philip,  that  the 
Athenians  were  incited  to  resist  him  in  battle.  It  is 
from  these  orations  against  the  Macedonian  king  that 
severe  speeches  have  since  been  called  pliilippics. 

1  But  the  Athenians  were  beaten  at  Cheronea,  in 
the  year  338  before  the  Christian  era.  Thenceforward, 
Philip  controlled  the  affairs  of  Greece,  till  his  death. 
Perhaps,  after  all,  he  was  a  better  ruler  than  the 
Greeks  could  have  found  among  themselves. 

8.  But  he  had  many  vices,  and  among  the  rest,  that 

When  was  it  founded  ?  5.  What  of  PhUip  ?  On  what  did  he  determine?  What 
of  the  Greeks  at  this  time?  6.  What  of  Demosthenes?  What  effect  had  his  ora- 
tory on  the  Athenians?  What  is  the  origin  of  the  word  philippic?  Where  were 
the  Athenians  beaten?  When  did  the  battle  take  place?  How  long  did  riiihp 
rule  G  reece  ? 


EUROPE.  21Y 

of  drinking  to  excess.  One  day,  just  after  lie  had  risen 
from  a  banquet,  lie  decided  a  ciu'tain  law-case  unjustly. 
The  losing  person  cried  out,  "  I  appeal  from  Philip 
drunk,  to  Philip  sober  T'  And,  sure  enough,  when 
Philip  got  sober,  he  decided  the  oth^^r  way. 

9.  A  poor  woman,  who  had  some  business  with 
Philip,  tried  in  vain  to  obtain  an  audience.  He  put 
her  off  from  one  day  to  another,  saying  that  he  had  no 
leisure  to  attend  to  her.  "  If  you  have  no  leisure  to  do 
justice,  you  have  no  right  to  be  king !"  said  the 
woman.  Philip  was  struck  with  the  truth  of  what  the 
woman  said,  and  he  became  more  attentive  to  the  duties 
of  a  king. 

10.  He  lived  only  about  two  years  after  he  had  con- 
quered the  Greeks.  There  was  a  young  nobleman 
named  Pausanias,  a  captain  of  the  guard,  who  had 
been  injured  by  one  of  Philip's  relations.  As  Philip 
would  not  punish  the  offender,  Pausanias  resolved  that 
he  himself  should  die. 

11.  On  the  day  of  the  marriage  of  Philip's  daugh- 
ter, the  king  was  entering  the  public  theatre,  where  the 
nuptial  festivities  were  to  be  celebrated.  At  this 
moment  Pausanias  rushed  forth,  with  his  sword  drawn, 
and  stabbed  him  to  the  heart. 

8,  9.  What  of  Philip?  Relate  some  anecdotes  of  him.  10.  What  of  Pausanias? 
11.  Describe  the  death  of  Philip. 


218 


UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


12.  The  Atlienians  greatlj  rejoiced  at  tlie  news  of 
Philips  death.  They  publicly  voted  that  a  golden 
crown  should  be  given  to  Pausanias,  as  a  reward  for 
having  murdered  him.  All  the  other  states  of  Greece 
likewise  revolted  against  the  power  of  Macedon. 


ALEXANDER   AND    HIS   IIOKISE   BUCEPHALUS. 

CHAPTER    LXI.— Europe    CoirmnjED. 
Conqitests  of  Alexander  the  Great. 

1.  But  the  new  king  of  Macedon,  though  only 
1  wenty  years  old,  was  well  worthy  to  sit  on  his  father's 
throne.     He  was  Alexander,  afterward  surnamed  the 

12.  What  did  the  Athenians  do  ?    Other  states  ? 
CuAPTEK  LXI. — 1.  Who  was  the  new  king  of  Macedon? 


EUROPE.  219 

Great.  Young  as  lie  was,  lie  liad  already  given  proofs 
of  tlie  valor  wMcli  so  soon  made  him  conqueror  of  tlie 
world. 

2.  Alexander  subdued  tlie  Grecian  states  in  tlie 
course  of  one  campaign.  lie  was  then  declared  gen- 
eralissimo of  the  Greeks,  and  undertook  a  war  against 
Persia.  The  army  which  he  led  against  that  country 
consisted  of  thirty-five  thousand  men. 

3.  He  ci'ossed  the  Hellespont,  and  marched  through 
Asia  Minor,  toward  Persia.  Before  reaching  its  bor- 
ders, he  was  met  by  the  Persian  king,  Darius,  who 
had  collected  an  immense  army.  Alexander  defeated 
him,  and  killed  a  hundred  and  ten  thousand  of  his  sol. 
diers. 

4.  Darius  soon  assembled  a  mightier  army  than  be- 
fore. He  had  now  half  a  million  of  men.  He  ad- 
vanced to  battle  in  the  midst  of  his  troops,  seated  on 
a  lofty  chariot,  which  resembled  a  moving  throne. 
Around  him  were  his  life-guards,  all  in  splendid  armor. 

5.  But  when  the  Persians  saw  how  boldly  the  Mace- 
donian horsemen  advanced,  they  took  to  flight.  Poor 
king  Darius  was  left  almost  alone  on  his  lofty  chariot. 

Of  what  had  he  given  proofs?  2.  After  what  exploit  was  Alexander  declared 
generalissimo  of  the  Greeks?  What  of  the  army  which  he  led  against  Persia? 
3.  What  sea  and  country  did  the  army  cross  to  reach  Persia  ?  Who  opposed  Al- 
exander? How  many  of  Darius'  army  were  killed?  4.  Describe  the  march  of 
Darius  and  his  half  million  of  troops. 


220  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

He  had  but  just  time  to  get  on  horseback,  and  gallop 
away  from  tlie  battle.  Shortly  afterwai'd,  he  was 
slain  by  two  of  his  own  subjects,  as  I  have  told  you  in 
the  history  of  Persia. 

6.  After  the  victory,  Alexander  marched  to  Persepo- 
lis,  which  was  then  the  capital  of  Persia.  It  was  a 
rich  and  magnificent  city.  In  the  royal  palace,  there 
was  a  gigantic  statue  of  Xerxes,  but  the  Macedonian 
soldiers  overthrew  it,  and  tumbled  it  upon  the  ground. 

Y.  While  he  remained  at  Persepolis,  Alexander  gave 
himself  up  to  drunkenness  and  licentious  pleasures. 
One  night,  at  a  splendid  banquet,  an  Athenian  lady 
persuaded  the  conqueror  to  set  fii-e  to  the  city.  It  was 
accordingly  burnt  to  the  ground. 

8.  When  Persia  was  completely  subdued,  Alexander 
invaded  India,  now  Hindostan.  One  of  the  kings  of 
that  countiy  was  named  Porus.  He  is  said  to  have 
been  seven  feet  and  a  half  in  height.  This  gigantic 
king  led  a  great  army  against  Alexander. 

9.  Porus  was  well  provided  with  elephants,  which 
had  l)een  trained  to  rush  upon  the  enemy,  and  trample 
them  down      Alexander  had   no    elephants,   but  his 

5.  What  became  of  Darius?  6.  Where  did  Alexander  go  after  his  victory? 
What  was  Persc'polis?  What  of  the  statue  of  Xerxes?  7.  What  happened  at 
Persepolis?  8.  What  country  did  Alexander  next  invade?  What  of  Porus? 
9.  What  animals  had  Porus  in  his  army  ? 


EUROPE.  221 

usual  good  fortune  did  not  desert  him.  Tlie  army  of 
Porus  was  routed,  and  lie  himself  was  taken  prisoner 
and  loaded  with  chains. 

10.  In  this  degraded  condition,  the  Indian  king  was 
brought  into  the  victor's  tent.  Alexander  gazed  with 
wonder  at  the  enormous  stature  of  Porus.  Although 
so  great  a  conqueror,  he  was  himself  only  of  middle 
size.  "  How  shall  I  treat  you  ?"  asked  Alexander  of 
his  prisoner.  "Like  a  king!"  said  Porus.  This  an- 
swer led  Alexander  to  reflect  how  he  himself  should 
like  to  be  treated,  should  he  be  in  a  similar  situation  ; 
and  he  was  induced  to  behave  generously  to  Porus. 


CHAPTEK  LXII.— Europe  Continued. 

Sequel  of  Alexander's  career. 

1.  I:n"  the  early  part  of  his  career,  Alexander  had 
shown  many  excellent  and  noble  traits  of  character. 
But  he  met  with  such  great  and  continual  success  in 
all  his  undertakings,  that  his  disposition  was  ruined 

Who  conquered  ?  What  became  of  Porus  ?  10.  Describe  the  meeting  between 
Alexander  and  Porus. 

Chapter  LXII. — 1.  What  of  Alexander?  What  ruined  his  disposition?  How 
did  he  consider  himself? 


222  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

by  it.     He  began  to  consider  himself  the  equal  of  the 
gods. 

2.  Yet  so  far  was  Alexander  from  being  a  god,  that 
some  of  his  actions  were  unworthy  of  a  man.  One  of 
his  worst  deeds  was  the  murder  of  Clitus,  an  old  officer 
who  had  fought  under  king  Philip.  He  had  once  saved 
Alexander's  life  in  battle,  and  on  this  account  he  was 
allowed  to  speak  very  freely  to  him. 

3.  One  night,  after  drinking  too  much  wine,  Alex- 
ander began  to  speak  of-  his  own  exploits ;  and  he 
spoke  more  highly  of  them  than  old  Clitus  thought 
they  deserved.  Accordingly,  he  told  Alexander  that 
his  father  Philip  had  done  much  greater  things  than 
ever  he  had  done. 

4.  The  monarch  was  so  enraged,  that  he  snatched  a 
spear  from  one  of  his  attendants,  and  gave  Clitus  a 
mortal  wound.  But  when  he  saw  the  old  man's 
bloody  corpse  extended  on  the  floor,  he  was  seized 
with  horror.  He  had  murdered  the  preserver  of  his 
own  life ! 

5.  Alexander's  remorse,  however,  did  not  last  long. 
He  still  insisted  on  being  a  god,  the  son  of  Jupiter 
Ammon ;  and  he  was  mortally  offended  with  a  philos- 
opher named  Callisthenes,  because  he  refused  to  worship 

2.  What  of  the  actions  of  Alexander?    Who  was  Clitus?    3,  4.  Give  an  account 
of  the  murder  of  Ciitua. 


EUROPE.  223 

him.  For  no  other  crime,  Callistlienes  was  put  into  an 
iron  cage,  and  tormented,  till  he  killed  himself  in 
despair. 

6.  After  Alexander's  return  from  India  to  Persia,  he 
met  with  a  great  misfortune.  It  was  the  loss  of  his 
dearest  friend,  Hephestion,  who  died  of  a  disease  which 
he  had  contracted  by  excessive  drinking.  For  three 
days  afterward,  Alexander  lay  prostrate  on  the  ground, 
and  would  take  no  food. 

7.  It  would  have  been  well  if  he  had  taken  warning 
by  the  fate  of  Hephestion.  But  Alexander  the  Great 
was  destined  to  owe  his  destruction  to  the  wine-cup. 
While  drinking  at  a  banquet  in  Babylon,  he  was  sud- 
denly taken  sick ;  and  death  soon  conquered  the  con- 
queror. 

8.  As  to  the  merits  of  Alexander,  I  pretty  much 
agree  with  a  certain  pirate,  whom  the  Macedonian  sol- 
diers once  took  prisoner.  Alexander  demanded  of  this 
man  by  what  right  he  committed  his  robberies.  "  I 
am  a  robber  by  the  same  right  that  you  are  a  con- 
queror," was  the  reply.  "  The  only  diiference  between 
us  is,  that  I  have  but  a  few  men,  and  can  do  but  little 


5.  What  did  Alexander  insist  on  being  called?  What  of  Callisthenes ?  6.  What 
of  Hephestion  ?  What  was  the  cause  of  his  death  ?  •  *l.  What  caused  Alexander's 
death  ?    Where  did  he  die  ?     8.  Tell  the  story  of  the  pirate. 


224  UNIYKRSAL  HISTORY. 

mischief;  while  you  have  a  large  army,  and  can  do  a 
great  deal." 

9.  It  must  be  confessed  that  this  is  the  chief  differ- 
ence between  conquerors  and  robbers.  ^  Yet,  when 
Alexander  died,  his  body  was  deposited  in  a  splendid 
coffin,  at  Alexandria,  in  Egypt,  and  the  Egyptians  paid 
him  divine  honors,  as  if  he  had  been  the  greatest  pos- 
sible benefactor  to  the  world. 


CHAPTER   LXIIL— Europe  Continued. 
Greece  invaded  hy  the  Gauls. 

1.  When  Alexander  lay  on  his  death-bed,  his  attend- 
ants asked  to  whom  he  would  bequeath  the  empire, 
which  now  extended  from  Greece  to  India,  including  a 
gi^eat  many  nations.  His  answer  was,  "To  the  most 
worthy." 

2.  But  there  appears  to  have  been  no  very  worthy 
man  among  those  whom  he  left  behind  him ;  and  even 
if  there  had  been,  the  unworthy  ones  would  not  have 
consented  to  yield  him  the  whole  power.     Alexander's 

9.  What  was  done  when  Alexander  died? 

Chapter   LXIIL — 1.  "Whflt   was   asked   Alexander  on   his  death-bed?     ITis 
reply  ?     2.  How  was  the  en)i)ire  divided  ? 


EUBOPfl.  225 

empire  was  therefore  divided  among  thirty-tliree  of  his 
chief  officers. 

3.  But  the  most  powerful  of  these  officers  were 
determined  to  have  more  than  their  share ;  and  in  the 
year  312  before  Christ,  four  of  them  had  got  possession 
of  the  whole.  Alexander  had  then  been  dead  eleven 
years.  All  his  children  and  relatives  had  been  de- 
stroyed by  his  ambitious  officers. 

4.  The  Greeks,  when  they  heard  of  Alexander's 
death,  had  attempted  to  regain  their  liberty.  But  their 
struggles  were  unsuccessful;  and  the  country  was 
reduced  to  subjection  by  Cassander,  who  had  been 
general  of  Alexander's  cavalry,  Cassander  died  in  a 
few  years.  Thenceforward,  the  history  of  Greece  tells 
of  nothing  but  crimes,  and  revolutions,  and  misfortunes. 

5.  In  the  year  278  before  the  Christian  era,  the 
Gauls  invaded  Greece.  They  were  a  barbarous  people, 
who  inhabited  the  country  now  called  France.  Their 
general's  name  was  Brennus ;  and  their  numbers  are 
said  to  have  been  a  hundred  and  sixty-iive  thousand 
men. 

6.  Brennus  met  with   hardly  any  opposition.     lit* 

3.  What  took  place  in  the  year  312  B.  C.  ?  What  of  Alexander's  children  mid 
relatives?  4.  Who  put  Greece  under  subjection?  Who  was  Cassander?  What 
of  the  history  of  Greece  after  his  death  ?  5.  When  did  the  Gauls  invade  Greece  ? 
Who  was  their  general  ?     What  of  their  army  ? 


226  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

marclied  to  Delplios,  intending  to  steal  tlie  treasures 
that  were  contained  in  tlie  famous  temple  of  Apollo. 
"  A  deity,  like  Apollo,  does  not  want  these  treasures," 
said  Brennus.  "  I  am  only  ^  man,  and  have  great  need 
of  them." 

7.  Accordingly,  he  led  his  l>arbarians  toward  the  tem- 
ple. The  stately  marble  front  of  the  edifice  was  seen  at 
a  short  distance  before  them.  It  was  considered  the 
holiest  spot  in  Greece.  Here  was  the  mysterious 
oracle,  from  which  so  many  wonderful  prophecies  had 
issued. 

8.  A  wild  shout  burst  from  the  army  of  the  Gauls, 
and  they  were  on  the  point  of  rushing  forward  to  the 
temple.  But  suddenly  a  violent  storm  arose.  The 
thunder  roared,  and  the  wind  blew  furiously.  At  the 
same  moment  a  terrible  earthquake  shook  the  ground 
beneath  the  affrighted  Gauls. 

9.  A  band  of  Greeks  had  assembled,  to  fight  in  de- 
fence of  the  temple.  When  they  saw  the  disorder  of 
the  barbarians,  they  attacked  them,  sword  in  hand.  It 
had  grown  so  dark  that  tlie  Gauls  could  not  distinguish 
friends  from  foes.  They  killed  one  another,  and  the 
whole  army  was  destroyed.  " 

G.  What  of  Brennus  and  a  famous  temple  at  Delphos  ?  7.  Describe  the  march 
toward  the  temple.  8.  What  affrighted  the  Gauls  ?  9.  What  of  the  Greeks?  How 
were  the  Gauls  destroyed  ? 


EUROPE.  227 

10.  Such  is  tlie  story  wliicli  tlie_old  histOTians  tell 
about  tliis  battle ;  it  is  doubtless  mucb  exaggerated,  for 
some  of  tlie  particulars  appear  hardly  credible.  But, 
at  any  rate,  this  was  the  last  great  victory  that  the 
ancient  Greeks  ever  achieved  over  their  enemies. 


CHAPTER  LXIY.— EiiKOPE  Continued. 
End  of  Grecian  Independence. 

1.  The  Greeks  had  now  almost  entirely  lost  their 
love  of  liberty,  as  well  as  the  other  virtues  which  had 
formerly  distinguished  them.  In  proof  of  this,  I  will 
relate  the  story  of  Agis,  the  young  king  of  Sparta. 

2.  King  Agis  was  anxious  for  the  welfare  of  Sparta, 
and  he  greatly  desired  to  restore  the  ancient  laws 
which  Lycurgus  had  enacted.  But  the  Spartans  were 
now  vicious  and  cowardly.  They  hated  the  very  name 
of  Lycurgus,  and  resolved  not  to  be  governed  by  his 
severe  laws. 

3.  They  therefore  seized  the  virtuous  young  king  and 
dragged  him  to  prison.     He  was  condemned  to  death. 

10.  What  rnay  be  said  of  the  victory  over  the  Gauls  ? 

Chapter  LXIV.— 1.  What  of 'the  Greeks?    2.  Who  was  Agis?    What  did  h© 
desire  ?    What  of  the  Spartans  ?     3.  What  did  they  do  to  Agis  ? 


228  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

The  executioner  slied  tears  at  tlie  moment  wlien  he  wa>j 
going  to  kill  him.  "  Do  not  weep  for  me,"  said  Agis  ; 
"  I  am  happier  than  my  murderers." 

4.  A  little  while  after  Agis  was  killed,  his  mother 
and  grandmother  came  to  the  prison  to  see  him,  for  thej 
had  not  heard  of  his  .death.  They  were  led  into  his 
dungeon ;  and  the  murderers  of  Agis  immediately  stran- 
gled them  both,  and  threw  their  dead  bodies  upon  his. 

5.  Some  time  after  this  horrible  event,  the  Spartans 
had  a  king  called  Nabis.  He  was  such  a  cruel  mon- 
ster, that  Heaven  seemed  to  have  made  him  a  king 
only  for  the  punishment  of  the  people's  wickedness. 
Nabis  had  an  image  in  his  palace.  It  resembled  his 
own  wife,  and  was  very  beautiful ;  it  was  likewise 
clothed  with  magnificent  garments,  such  as  were  proper 
for  a  queen  to  wear.  But  the  breast  and  arms  of  the 
image  were  stuck  fall  of  sharp  iron  spikes. 

6.  These,  however,  were  hidden  by  the  rich  clothes. 
When  king  Nabis  wished  to  extort  money  from  any 
person,  he  invited  him  to  his  palace,  and  led  him  up  to 
the  image.     No  sooner  was  the  stranger  within  reach, 

^than  the  image  put  out  its  arms  and  squeezed  him 
close  to  its  breast. 

Describe  his  death.  4.  What  of  the  mother  and  grandmother  of  Agis  ?  5. 
What  of  Nabis  ?  Describe  the  image.  6,  1.  What  did  Nabis  do  when  he  wanted 
to  extort  money  from  any  one  ? 


EUROPE.  229 

7.  This  was  done  by  means  of  machinery.  The 
poor  man  might  struggle  as  hard  as  he  pleased ;  but 
he  could  not  possibly  get  away  fi'om  the  cruel  embrace 
of  the  statue.  There  he  remained,  with  the  iron 
spikes  sticking  into  his  flesh,  until  his  agony  compelled 
him  to  give  Nabis  as  much  money  as  he  asked  for. 

8.  When  such  enormities  were  committed  by  the 
kings  of  Greece,  it  was  time  that  the  country  should 
be  governed  by  other  masters.  My  readers  will  not 
be  sorry  to  hear  that  this  soon  happened.  One  hun- 
dred and  forty-six  years  before  the  Christian  era, 
Greece  submitted  to  the  authority  of  Kome, 

9.  Thus  I  have  given  you  a  very  brief  account  of 
ancient  Greece.  Its  history  is  full  of  interest,  and  full 
of  instruction.  I  hope  you  will  hereafter  read  the 
whole  story  in  some  larger  work  than  mine. 

8.  When  was  Greece  conquered  by  the  Romans  ? 


230 


UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


MODEKN   ATHENS. 


CHAPTEE.   LXY.— Europe  Continued. 
Modern  History  of  Greece. 

1.  From  this  time  forward,  tlie  history  of  Greece  is 
connected  with  that  of  other  nations.  The  Greeks 
had  no  longer  any  power,  even  in  their  own  native 
country.  But  they  were  still  respected  on  account  of 
the  poets,  and  historians,  and  sculptors,  who  appeared 
among  them. 

2.  But  in  course  of  time,  the  srenius  of  the  Greeks 
seemed  to  have  deserted  them,  as  well  as  theii^  ancient 


Chap'feu  LXV. — 1.  W'liui  of  tho  Greeks?     Why  were  they  respected? 


EUROPE.  231 

valor.  They  were  then  wholly  despised.  I  have  not 
space  to  relate  any  of  the  events  that  occuiTed  to  them 
while  they  were  governed  by  the  Romans. 

3.  Between  three  and  four  hundred  years  affcer  the 
Christian  era,  the  Roman  dominions  were  divided  into 
the  Eastern  and  Western  emjpires.  The  capital  of  the 
Eastern  empire  was  Constantinople.  The  territory  of 
ancient  Greece  was  included  under  this  government, 
and  it  was  sometimes  called  the  Greek  empire. 

4.  Above  a  thousand  years  elapsed,  and  nothing 
happened  of  such  importance  that  it  need  be  tohl  in 
this  brief  history.  But  about  the  year  1450,  the  Turks 
invaded  the  eastern  empire  of  the  Romans.  Gi^eece 
then  fell  beneath  their  power.  During  almost  four 
centuries,  the  Greeks  were  treated  by  the  Turks  like 
slaves. 

5.  At  last,  in  the  year  182.1,  they  rebelled  against 
the  tyranny  of  the  Tui^ks.  A  war  immediately  broke 
out.  It  continued  a  long  time,  and  was  carried  on 
with  the  most  shocking  cruelty  on  both  sides. 

6.  Many  people  from  other  countries  went  to  assist 
the    Greeks.      The    ancient   renown   of  Greece   made 

2.  What  happened  in  course  of  time  ?  3.  When  were  the  Roman  dominions  di- 
vided ?  What  were  tlie  two  parts  called  ?  What  was  the  Eastern  empire  some- 
times called?  4.  What  happened  about  1450?  Into  whose  power  did  the 
Greeks  then  fall  ?     IIow  were  they  treated  ?     5.  What  took  place  in  1821  ? 

11 


232  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

friends  of  all  who  were  acquainted  with  her  history. 
Lord  Byron,  the  illustrious  English  poet,  lost  his  life 
in  Greece,  for  the  sake  of  this  famous  land. 

T.  The  Turks  are  a  fierce  people,  and  they  resolved 
not  to  give  up  the  country.  The  Greeks,  on  the  other 
hand,  determined  either  to  drive  away  their  oppres- 
sors, or  to  die.  But  they  would  not  have  succeeded, 
if  England,  France,  and  Eussia,  had  not  taken  their 
part. 

8.  The  fleets  of  these  three  nations  formed  a  junc- 
tion off  the  coast  of  Greece.  They  were  all  under 
the  command  of  the  English  admiral,  Sir  Edward  Cod- 
i-ington.  In  October,  1827,  they  attacked  a  Turkish 
fleet  of  more  than  two  hundred  vessels,  in  the  bay  of 
Navarino. 

9.  The  Turks  were  entirely  beaten,  and  their  ves- 
sels were  sunk  or  burned.  In  consequence  of  their 
losses  in  this  battle,  they  were  unable  to  continue  the 
war.     Greece  was  therefore  evacuated  by  the  Turks. 

10.  But  as  the  Greeks  ^vvere  not  considered  entirely 
fit  to  govern  themselves,  a  king  was  selected  for  them, 
by  England,  France,  and  Kussia.     The  new  king  was 

6.  "Who  assisted  the  Greeks?  Why  did  Greece  find  so  many  friends?  What 
of  Byron?  1.  What  of  the  Tnrks?  The  Greeks?  Who  took  part  with  Greece? 
8.  Who  commanded  the  combined  fleet  of  England,  France,  and  Russia  ?  When 
did  they  attack  the  Turks?  9.  T\'Tiat  of  the  Turks?  Were  they  obliged  to  leave 
Greece  ?     10.  Who  chose. a  king  for  Greece  ? 


EUROPE. 


233 


a  young  man  of  eighteen,  named  Otlio.  He  was 
placed  on  the  throne  in  the  year  1829,  and  still  con- 
tinues (1860)  to  reign.  This  is  the  latest  remarkable 
event  in  the  history  of  Greece. 


CHAPTER  LXVI.— EuKorE  Continued. 

ChronoUxjij  of  Greece, 


B.  C. 

Greece  founded  by  Inacluis 1856 

Athens  ibunded  by  Cecrops 1556 

Corinth  founded 1520 

Sparta  founded  by  Lelex 1516 

Thebes  founded  by  Cadmus 1500 

Argonautin  expedition 1263 

Twelve  states  of  Greece  unite. . . .  1257 

Siege  of  Troy 1193 

Homer  born 800 

Lycurgus  gives  laws  to  i^parta.  . .  881 

Solon  lawgiver  of  Athens 643 

■ — Bias,  the  pliilosopher,  flourished.  .  617 

Battle  of  Marathon 490 

Peloponnesian  war  begins 446 

Death  of  Pericles 429 

Former   government    restored    in 

Athens 403 

Pattle  of  Leuctra 371 


B.  C. 

Death  of  Kparainondas ,    .  363 

Battle  of  Cheronea 338 

Death  of  Philip,  king  of  Maced.,n,  336 

Death  of  Alexander 323 

Greece  subjected  by  Cassander, . .  322 

Division  of  Alexander's  kingdom,  312 

Greece  invaded  by  the  Gauls 278 

Death  of  Agis 244 

Greece  becomes  a  Pouian  prorinoe,  146 

A.  D. 

The   Turks   conquer   the    Eastern 

empire 1453 

Greece  rises  against  the  Turks  . . .    1821 
Death  of  Lord  Byron  at  Missoionghi,  1824 

Battle  of  Navarino 1827 

Accession  of  Otho  to  the  throne  of 
Greece 1829 


Wliat  is  his  name  ?     When  did  he  come  to  the  throne  ? 


Questions  on  tuk  Map  of  Italy.— How    is  Italy  bouiided?     Which  way  ia 
it  from  Turkey?     From  France?     From   Switzerland ?    What  two  large  islands 
Ke  to  the  west  of  Italy?     Where  is  Rome?     Florence?    Naples?    Genoa?    Yen-     i 
ice?     Turin?    In  what  sea  is  the  island  of  Sicily?     Where  is  Palermo?   Messina?    j 
Mount  Etna?     Which  way  docs  the  river  Po  How?    The  Tiber?  ! 


EUROPE, 


235 


INHABITANTS  OF  JtODEJiN   ITALY. 

CHAPTEE  LXYII.— Europe  Continued. 

About  Italy  as  it  now  is. 

1.  Italy  is  a  strip  of  land  in  tlie  soutli  of  Europe, 
extending  into  tlie  Mediterranean  sea.  It  is  fancied 
to  liave  tlie  shape  of  a  boot,  tlie  island  of  Sicily  lying 
at  tlie  toe.  It  lias  a  beautiful  climate,  tlie  seasons  of 
spring  and  summer  seeming  always  to  prevail. 

2.  If  you  were  to  go  to  this  country,  you  would  be 
charmed  with  the  beauty  of  the  sky,  and  the  balmy 
softness  of  the  air.     You  would  find  grapes  so  abun- 

Chapter  LXVIT.—l.  What  is  Italy?     Tts  shape?     Where  is  Sicily ?    Climate 
of  Italy  ?    2.  What  of  the  air  and  sky  in  Italy  ? 


236  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

dant  that  you  could  buy  a  delicious  bunch,  as  large  as 
you  could  eat,  for  a  cent ;  and  if  you  mshed  for  mne, 
you  could  get  a  bottle  for  four  cents. 

3.  You  would  find,  in  short,  that  Italy  abounds  in 
pleasant  fruits,  and  in  every  species  of  production  re- 
quired for  the  comfort  of  man.  You  would  find  the 
people — men,  women,  and  children — ^living  a  great  part 
of  the  time  in  the  open  air,  often  singing,  and  some- 
times dancing  in  groups  beneath  the  trees. 

4.  But  in  the  midst  of  these  signs  of  cheerfulness, 
you  would  observe  a  great  deal  of  poverty,  and  you 
would  soon  discover  that  many  of  the  people  are  indo- 
lent, vicious,  and  degraded. 

5.  In  the  cities,  many  of  which  are  large,  and  filled 
with  thousands  of  people,  you  would  notice  costly 
churches  and  splendid  palaces,  many  of  them  built  of 
marble.  But  still  every  thing  around  you  would  bear 
an  aspect  of  decay,  and  impress  you  with  the  idea  that 
Italy,  with  all  its  splendor,  is  an  unhaj)py  country. 

6.  At  Florence,  Home,  Naples,  and  other  large  cities, 
you  would  find  collections  of  pictures  and  statues, 
which  surpass  in  beauty  every  thing  of  the  kind  in 
the  woi'ld.     These  pictures  are  the  works  of  famous 

What  of  grapes  ?  "Wine?  3.  Fruits?  Other  productions  ?  The  people?  4. 
"What  would  you  discover  after  oxainining  the  people  of  Italy  carefully?  5.  What 
of  the  cities? 


EUROPE.  237 

artists,  wLlo  have  lived  in  Italy  within  the  last  five 
hundred  years. 

7.  The  statues  are  the  productions  of  sculptors,  who 
have  lived  at  various  periods  within  the  last  two  thou- 
sand years.  Some  of  them,  indeed,  are  supposed  to 
have  been  executed  by  Grecian  artists,  who  lived  in  the 
time  of  Pericles. 

8.  But  in  all  Italy  there  is  nothing  that  will  excite 
so  much  interest  as  the  ruins  of  ancient  Rome,  many 
of  which  are  still  to  be  seen  in  the  modern  city. 
These,  like  the  ancient  remains  of  Egypt  and  Greece, 
A7ould  delight  you  with  their  beauty,  and  astonish  you 
by  their  grandeur  and  magnificence. 

9.  The  most  remarkable  edifice  of  modern  times  to 
be  found  in  Italy,  is  the  church  of  St.  Peter's  at  Rome, 
the  height  of  which  is  nearly  ^ve  hundred  feet.  Near 
this  is  the  Vatican,  a  famous  palace  inhabited  by  the 
pope,  who  reigns  over  Rome  and  the  country  around, 
like  a  king. 

10.  If  you  were  to  go  to  Naples,  you  would  see  at 
the  distance  of  a  few  miles  a  famous  mountain  called 
A^esuvius,  from  which  smoke,  flame,  and  torrents  of 
melted  lava  have  periodically  issued  for  ages.     Some- 


G,  1.  What  of  pictures  and  statues?    8.  What  of  the  ruins  of  Rome?     9.  AVhat 
of  St.  Peter's?     The  Vatican?    The  Pope?     ]0.  What  of  Vesuviue? 


238  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

times  whole  towns  and  cities  in  the  neighborhood  have 
been  buried  beneath  the  burning  masses. 

11.  If  you  were  to  go  to  the  island  of  Sicily,  you 
would  find  another  volcanic  mountain  called  Etna, 
which  also  pours  out,  from  time  to  time,  immense  vol- 
umes of  smoke,  fire,  and  lava.  Yet  at  the  very  base  of 
these  mountains  the  people  dwell  in  thickly  settled 
villages,  and  here  you  will  find  rich  vineyards,  beau- 
tiful gardens,  and  groves  of  figs,  oranges,  and  olives. 

12.  Having  visited  Italy,  you  will  return  to  America 
with  many  wonderful  tales  to  tell  of  this  famous  pen- 
insula that  lies  in  the  shape  of  a  boot  in  the  Mediter- 
ranean sea ;  but  you  will  still  be  contented  and  happy 
to  settle  down  in  your  native  country,  where  beggai-s 
are  seldom  seen,  where  poverty  and  wretchedness  are 
rare,  and  where  every  thing  speaks  of  prosperity. 

13.  The  truth  is  that  Italy  has  been  badly  governed 
for  ages,  and  the  people  have  become  indolent  and 
vicious.  Let  us  hope  that  they  will  yet  become  more 
worthy  of  the  beautiful  country  they  inhabit. 

11.  What  of  Etna?  12.  With  what  feelings  would  you  return  to  Anaerica. 
after  visiting  Italy?     13.  What  may  be  said  of  Italy?     Her  people? 


EaROPR. 


239 


CHAPTEE  LXYIII.— EuKOPE  Continued. 
Founding  of  Rome  hy  JRormdus.     Its  early  state. 

1.  I  SHALL  now  proceed  to  tell  you  tlie  history  of 
Rome,  tlie  most  celebrated  empire  of  antiquity.  Like 
the  history  of  all  ancient  countries,  it  abounds  in  tales 

Chapter  LXYIII.— 1.  What  of  the  empire  of  Rome? 


240  •  UmYERSAL  HTSTORT. 

of  battle,  bloodshed,  injustice,  and  crime.  Over  sucli 
liorrid  scenes  I  should  be  glad  to  draw  a  veil ;  but 
these  things  have  really  happened,  and  it  is  the  duty 
of  a  faithful  story-teller  to  hide  nothing  which  is  neces. 
sary  to  give  a  true  picture  of  what  he  undertakes  to 
exhibit 

2.  The  famous  city  of  Rome  stands  on  the  river 
Tiber,  in  Italy.  Its  distance  fi^om  the  sea  is  about  six- 
teen miles.  It  is  supposed  to  have  been  founded  by 
Eomulus,  in  the  year  752  B.  C«&  ^Eomulus  was  the  cap- 
tain of  about  three  thousand  banditti,  or  outlaws. 
These  men  built  some  huts  on  a  hill  called  the  Pala- 
tine, and  enclosed  them  with  a  wall.  This  was  the 
origin  of  the  most  famous  city  the  world  ever  saw. 

3.  It  is  said  that  this  wall  was  so  low,  that  Eemus, 
the  brother  of  Eomulus,  leaped  over  it.  "  Do  you  call 
this  the  wall  of  a  city?"  cried  he,  contemptuously. 
Eomulus  was  so  enraged,  that  he  stioick  his  brother 
dead ;  and  this  was  the  first  blood  tliat  bedewed  the 
^v^alls  of  Eome. 

4.  When  Eomulus  and  his  fellow  robbers  wei-e  com- 
fortably settled  in  their  new  houses,  they  found  them- 

What  of  its  history?  2.  Oa  what  river  is  Rome?  How  far  is  it  from  the  sea? 
When  and  by  whom  was  it  founded  ?  Who  was  Romulus  ?  What  did  the  out- 
laws do?  What  is  the  origin  of  Rome  ?  3.  What  happened  between  Romulus  and 
Remua  ?  4  Of  what  did  Romulus  and  his  men  feel  the  want  ?    What  of  the  Sabinea  ? 


EUROPE.  241 

selves  in  want  of  wives.  At  tliis  time,  Italy  was 
inliabited  by  many  rude  tribes.  Among  these  were 
the  Sabines,  who  lived  in  the  neighborhood  of  Rome. 
These  would  not  allow  their  young  women  to  marry 
the  Romans ;  but  Romulus  contrived  a  scheme  to  get 
wives  by  force. 

5.  He  invited  the  whole  Sabine  people  to  witness 
some  games  and  sports.  Accordingly,  the  Sabines 
came ;  and,  as  they  suspected  no  mischief,  they  brought 
almost  all  their  marriageable  young  women. 

6.  At  first,  the  Sabines  were  highly  delighted  with 
the  feats  of  strength  and  agility,  which  were  performed 
for  their  entertainment.  But,  in  a  little  while,  Rom- 
ulus gave  a  signal ;  and  all  his  men  drew  their  swords, 
and  rushed  among  the  peaceable  spectators. 

Y.  The  Sabines  were  of  course  taken  by  surprise,  and 
could  make  no  resistance.  Each  of  the  Romans  caught 
up  the  prettiest  young  woman  he  could  find,  and  car- 
ried her  away.  There  was  no  longer  any  scarcity  of 
wives  in  Rome. 

8.  This  outrageous  act  of  violence  caused  a  war  be- 
tween the  Romans  and  Sabines.  The  latter  mustered 
a  large  army,  and  would  probably  have  exterminated 
Romulus  and  his  banditti.     But  when  they  were  about 

5-7.  Give  an  account  of  tho  carrying  off  of  the  Sabine  women.     8.  What  did 
this  act  cause  ? 


242  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

to  engage  in  battle,  the  young  wives  of  tlie  Romans 
rushed  into  the  field. 

9.  They  besought  the  two  hostile  parties  to  make 
peace.  They  said  that  whichever  side  might  gain  the 
victory,  it  would  bring  nothing  but  sorrow  to  them ; 
for,  if  the  Sabines  should  conquer,  their  husbands  must 
lose  their  lives ;  or,  if  the  Komans  should  win  the  day, 
their  kindred  would  perish. 

10.  Both  parties  were  much  moved  by  these  en- 
treaties. The  Sabines  saw  that  the  young  women  had 
become  attached  to  their  husbands ;  and  therefore  it 
would  be  a  pity  to  separate  them,  even  if  it  could  be 
done  without  bloodshed.  In  short,  the  matter  ended 
peaceably,  and  an  alliance,  which  you  know  is  a 
friendly  treaty,  was  formed. 

11.  The  first  government  of  Rome  consisted  of  a 
king  and  senate.  E-omulus  was  chosen  king,  and 
reigned  thirty-seven  years.  There  are  different  ac- 
counts of  the  way  in  which  his  reign  terminated. 

12.  Some  historians  pretend   that,  while   Romulus 
sat  in  the    senate-house,  giving  wise   instructions   in 
regard  to  matters  of  state,  the  hall  was  suddenly  dark- 
How  was  the  war  prevented  ?    9.  What  did  the  young  wives  of  the  Romans 

say?  10.  What  effect  had  their  entreaties  ?  11.  What  of  the  first  government 
of  Rome?  WHio  was  chosen  king,  and  how  long  did  lie  reign?  12.  What  do 
some  historians  pretend  ? 


EUROPE.  243 

ened  by  an  eclipse  of  tlie  sun.  Wlien  the  sun  shone 
out  again,  the  chair  of  Romulus  was  perceived  to  be 
empty;  and  it  was  said  he  had  been  taken  up  into 
heaven. 

13.  Others  say  that  Romulus  attempted  to  make 
himself  a  tyrant,  and  that  therefore  the  senators  pulled 
him  down  from  his  chair  of  state  and  tore  him  in 
pieces.  This  story  appears  more  probable  than  the 
former.  At  all  events,  king  Romulus  suddenly  disap- 
peared, and  was  never  seen  again  in  the  city  which  he 
had  founded. 


CHAPTER  LXIX.— Europe  Continued. 
Battle  of  the  Horatii  and  Curiatii. 

1.  The  second  king  of  Rome  was  Numa  Pompilius. 
He  was  a  wise  and  good  king,  and  a  great  lover  of 
peace.  He  spent  forty-three  years  in  making  excellent 
laws,  and  in  instructing  the  people  in  agriculture  and 
ether  useful  arts. 

2.  The  peaceful   IN'uma  was   succeeded   by  Tullus 

13.  What  do  others  say? 

Chapter   LXIX. — 1.  Who  was  the  second  king  of  Rome  ?     What  of  him  ? 


244  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

Hostilius.  He  was  a  warlike  monarcli.  During  Ms 
reign  the  Romans  engaged  in  hostilities  "with  the  Al- 
bans, who  inhabited  a  neighboring  city. 

3.  It  was  agreed  that  the  war  should  be  decided  by 
a  battle  between  three  champions  on  each  side.  In 
the  army  of  the  Albans  there  were  three  brothers,  each 
named  Curiatius ;  and  in  the  Eoman  army  there  were 
likewise  three,  by  the  name  of  Iloratius. 

4.  These  Horatii  and  Curiatii  were  fixed  npon  as 
the  champions.  They  fought  in  an  o])en  plain  ;  and 
on  each  side  stood  the  ranks  of  armed  warriors,  with 
their  swords  sheathed,  anxiously  watching  the  com])at. 

5.  At  first  it  seemed  as  if  the  Curiatii  were  going  to 
win  the  victoiy.  It  is  true  they  were  all  three 
wounded ;  but  two  of  the  Hoiatii  lay  dead  u])on  the 
field.  The  other  Iloratius  was  still  unhurt.  He  ap- 
peared determined  not  to  perish  like  his  two  brothers  ; 
for  he  was  seen  to  turn  and  flee.  At  the  flight  of  their 
champion,  the  Romans  groaned  with  shame  and  de- 
spair ;  for  if  he  should  lose  the  battle,  they  were  all  to 
be  made  slaves. 

6.  The  three  Curiatii  pursued  the  fugitive.  But 
their  wounds  had  rendered  them  feeble.     They  stag- 

2  What  of  TuUus  ITpstilius?  3.  How  was  the  war  between  the  Romans  and 
Albans  10  be  decided  ?  Who  wore  the  Iloratii  and  the  Curiatii  ?  4,  5.  Describe 
the  contest  between  these  combatants.     Who  fled  from  the  battle  ? 


EUROPE.  245 

gered  along,  one  behind  the  other,  so  that  they  were 
separated  by  considerable  distances.  This  was  what 
Iloratius  desired.  Though  he  could  not  have  beaten 
all  three  together,  he  was  more  than  a  match  for  them 
singly. 

7.  He  now  turned  fiercely  upon  the  foremost,  and 
slew  him.  Then  he  encountered  the  second,  and  smote 
him  dead  in  a  moment.  The  third  met  with  the  same 
fate.  The  Alban  army  now  turned  pale,  and  dropped 
theii^  weapons  on  the  field;  for  they  had  lost  their 
freedom. 

8.  The  exulting  E-omans  greeted  Iloratius  with  shouts 
of  triumph.  He  returned  toward  Rome  amid  a  throng 
of  his  countrymen,  all  of  whom  hailed  him  as  their 
benefactor.  But  as  he  entered  the  city,  he  met  a  young 
woman  wringing  her  hands  in  an  agony  of  grief.  This 
was  his  sister.  She  was  in  love  with  one  of  the  Cu- 
riatii,  and  when  she  saw  Horatius,  she  shrieked  aloud, 
and  reproached  him  bitterly  for  having  slain  her  lover. 

9.  The  victor  still  held  the  bloody  sword  with  which 
he  had  killed  the  three  Alban  champions.  His  heart 
was  still  fierce  with  the  frenzy  of  the  combat.  He 
could  not  bear  that  his  sister  should  bewail  one  of  the 

G.  "What  did  the  three  Curiatii  do?  What  of  Horaiius?  7.  Wliat  was  the  fate 
of  the  Curiatii?  8.  How  was  Horatius  greeted?  Wliat  of  his  sister?  9.  Why 
did  Iloratius  kill  her  ? 


246  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

dead  enemies,  instead  of  her  two  dead  brothers ;  nor 
that  she  should  darken  his  triumph  mth  her  reproaches. 
Accordingly,  in  the  frenzy  of  the  moment,  he  stabbed 
her  to  the  heart. 

10.  Horatins  was  condemned  to  die  for  this  dreadful 
crime;  but  he  was  afterward  pardoned,  because  his 
valor  had  won  for  Rome  such  a  great  deliverance. 
But  the  disgrace  of  his  guilt  was  far  more  than  the 
honor  of  his  victory. 


CHAPTEK   LXX.— Europe   Continued. 

From  the  reign  of  Ancus  Martins  till  the  ex^pidsion  of  the 

Kings, 

1.  After  the  death  of  Tullus  Hostilius,  the  Romans 
elected  Ancus  Martins  to  be  king.  He  was  succeeded 
by  Tarquin  the  Elder,  whose  father  had  been  a  rich 
merchant.  The  next  king  was  Servius  Tullius.  When 
Servius  had  reigned  forty  four  years,  he  was  murdered 
by  Tarquin,  his  son-in-law,  who  was  ambitious  of  being 
king. 

10.  What  of  Horatins?     Why  was  he  pardoned? 

ChapterLXX.—!.  Who  was  king  after  Tulkis  Hostilius?     Who   next?    Who 
killed  Servius  TuUius? 


EUROPE.  2  4 '7 

2.  Tullia,  tlie  wife  of  Tarquin  and  daugliter  of  Ser- 
vius,  rejoiced  at  her  father's  death,  for  she  wished  to  be 
queen.  She  rode  out  in  her  chariot  in  order  to  con- 
gratulate her  wicked  husband.  In  one  of  the  streets 
through  which  the  chariot  was  to  pass,  lay  the  dead 
body  of  the  poor  old  king.  The  coachman  saw  it,  and 
was  desirous  of  turning  back.  "  Drive  on !"  cried  the 
wicked  Tullia. 

3.  The  coachman  did  so;  and  as  the  street  was  too 
narrow  to  permit  him  to  turn  out,  the  chariot  passed 
directly  over  the  murdered  king.  But  Tullia  rode  on 
without  remorse,  although  the  wheels  were  stained 
with  her  father's  blood. 

4.  Her  husband  now  ascended  the  throne,  and  was 
called  Tarquin  the  Proud.  The  Romans  abhorred  him, 
for  he  was  a  hateful  tyrant.  Several  almost  incredible 
stories  are  .told  respecting  his  reign. 

5.  One  day,  it  is  said  that  a  woman  of  singular 
aspect  entered  the  king's  presence,  bringing  nine  large 
books  in  her  arms.  'No  one  knew  whence  she  came, 
nor  what  was  contained  in  her  books.  She  requested 
the  king  to  buy  them.  But  the  price  was  so  high, 
that  Tarquin  refused ;  especially  as  he  did  not  know 
what  the  books  were  about. 

2.  3.  "What of  Tullia?  Describe  her  wicked  act.  4.  What  was  Tarquin  called  ? 
What  of  him  ? 


248     '  UNlYPmSAL  HISTORY. 

6.  The  unknown  woman  went  away  and  burnt  tliree 
of  her  books.  She  then  came  back,  and  again  oifered 
the  remaining  ones  to  Tarquin.  But  she  demanded  as 
much  money  for  the  six  as  she  had  before  asked  for 
the  whole  nine ;  and  Tarquin  of  course  refused  to  buy 
them. 

7.  The  woman  w^ent  away  a  second  time.  But 
shortly  afterward  she  was  again  seen  entering  the 
palace.  She  had  now  only  three  volumes  left ;  and 
these  she  offered  to  the  king  at  the  same  price  which 
she  had  before  asked  for  the  nine. 

8.  Tliere  was  something  so  strange  and  mysterious 
in  all  this,  that  Tarquin  concluded  to  give  the  woman 
her  price.  She  put  the  three  volumes  into  his  hands, 
and  immediately  disappeared. 

9.  The  books  were  found  to  be  the  oracles  of  a  sybil, 
or  prophetess.  They  were  therefore  looked  upon  with 
superstitious  reverence,  and  were  preserved  in  Eome 
during  many  ages ;  and  in  all  difficult  and  perplexing 
cii>o^<,  the  rulers  looked  into  these  old  volumes,  and 
read,  as  they  supposed,  the  secrets  of  their  country's 
fate.     This  story  is  doubtless  a  fable. 

10.  When  Tarquin  the  Proud  had  reigned  more  than 
twenty  years,  he  and  his  family  were  driven  out  of 

5-9.  What  strange  story  can  you  tdl  of  him  ?     10.  How  long  did  Tarquin  reign? 


EUROPE.  249 

Eome  by  tlie  people  This  event  was  brought  about 
by  the  wickedness  of  bis  son  Sextus,  whose  conduct 
had  caused  a  noble  Koman  hidy  to  commit  suicide. 
Her  name  was  Lucretia. 

11.  The  expulsion  of  the  Tarquins  took  place  in  the 
year  509  before  the  Christian  era.  The  Romans  never 
had  another  king.  Besides  the  senate,  the  government 
now  consisted  of  two  magistrates,  called  consuls,  who 
were  chosen  every  year.  Brutus  and  Collatinus  were 
the  first. 

12.  Brutus  gave  a  ten-ible  example  of  his  justice 
and  patriotism.  His  two  sons  had  engaged  in  a  con- 
spiracy to  make  Tarquin  king  again.  Brutus,  who  was 
a  judge  when  they  were  brought  to  trial,  condemned 
them  both  to  death,  and  had  them  executed  in  his 
presence. 

What  of  him  and  his  family?  What  of  Sextus?  11.  What  took  pla-ce  509  B. 
C.  ?  How  long  from  the  founding  of  Rome  to  the  death  of  her  last  king  ?  What  of 
the  government  of  Rome  after  the  Tarquins  ?  Who  were  the  first  consuls  ?  12. 
What  act  did  Brutus  perform  ? 


250  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


CHAPTER   LXXI.— EuKOPE  Continued. 
The  story  of  Coriolanus. 

1.  Acts  of  lieroism  were  common  among  tlie  Ro- 
mans, in  tliose  days.  A  young  man,  named  Mutins 
Scaevola,  gained  great  credit  for  liis  fortitude.  He  had 
been  taken  prisoner  by  the  troops  of  the  king  of 
Etrui'ia,  or  Tuscany,  who  was  at  war  with  Rome.  Por- 
senna  threatened  to  torture  him,  unless  he  would  be- 
tray the  plans  of  the  Roman  general. 

2.  A  fire  was  burning  close  beside  the  prisoner.  He 
immediately  put  his  hand  into  the  midst  of  the  flames, 
and  held  it  there  till  it  was  burnt  off.  By  this  act  he 
showed  Porsenna  that  no  tortures  could  induce  him  to 
turn  traitor. 

3.  Almost  from  the  first  foundation  of  Rome,  the 
inhabitants  had  been  divided  into  two  classes;  one 
called  patricians,  and  the  other  plebeians.  The  senate 
and  most  of  the  rich  men  were  included  amonor  the 
patricians.  The  consuls  were  also  chosen  from  this 
class. 

4.  Thus  the  patricians  had  nearly  all  the  power  in 

Chapter  LXXI. — 1,  2.  Relate  the  anecdote  of  Mutius  Sccevola.  3.  What  two 
classes  were  there  in  Rome  ?  What  of  the  class  of  the  patricians  ?  Who  wero 
the  plebeians? 


EUROPE,  251 

their  hands.  Tliis  caused  frequent  quarrels  between 
tliem  and  tlie  common  people,  or  plebeians.  But  at 
length  it  was  ordained  that  ^ve  magistrates,  called 
tiibunes,  should  be  annually  chosen  by  the  plebeians. 

5.  These  tribunes  took  away  a  great  deal  of  power 
from  the  patricians,  and  were  therefore  hated  by  them. 
Coriolanus,  a  valiant,  but  proud  patrician,  endeavored 
to  have  the  office  of  the  tribunes  abolished.  But  they 
were  more  powerful  than  he,  and  succeeded  in  pro- 
curing his  banishment. 

6.  Coriolanus  left  the  city,  and  went  to  the  territo- 
ries of  the  Volsci,  who  were  bitter  enemies  of  the 
Eomans.  There  he  gathered  a  large  army,  and  ad- 
vanced to  besiege  Rome.  His  countrymen  were  greatly 
alarmed  when  they  heard  that  the  banished  Coriolanus 
was  returning  so  soon,  and  in  so  terrible  a  manner. 

Y.  They  therefore  sent  an  embassy  to  meet  him,  con- 
sisting of  the  oldest  senators.  But  these  venerable 
men  could  make  no  impression  on  Coriolanus.  Next 
came  an  embassy  of  priests;  but  they  met  with  no 
better  success. 

8.  Coriolanus  still  marched  onward,  and  pitched  his 
tent  within  a  short  distance  of  the  Roman  walls.     He 

4.  What  caused  quarrels  between  the  patricians  and  plebeians  ?  From  which 
class  were  the  tribunes  chosen  ?  5,  What  of  the  tribunes  ?  6-10.  Tell  the  story 
of  Coriolanus. 


252 


UNIYERSAL  HISTORY. 


was  gazing  toward  tlie  city,  and  planning  an  attack 
for  the  next  day,  wlien  a  tMrd  embassy  appeared.  It 
was  a  mournful  procession  of  E-oman  ladies. 


CORIOLANUS  AND  HIS  MOTHER, 


9.  At  tlieir  liead  walked  Volumnia,  wlio  was  tlie 
mother  of  Coriolanus ;  and  Virgilia,  his  wife,  was  also 
there,  leading  his  children  loj  the  hand.  When  they 
drew  near,  his  mother  knelt  down  at  his  feet,  and  be- 
sought him  not  to  be  the  ruin  of  his  native  city. 

10.  Coriolanus  strove  to  resist  her  entreaties,  as  he 
had  resisted  those  of  the  senators  and  priests.  But 
though  his  heart  had  been  proud  and  stubborn  against 
them,  it  was  not  so  against  his  mother. 


EUROPE. 


253 


11.  "  Motlier,"  cried  he,  "I  yield!  You  have  saved 
Rome,  but  you  have  destroyed  your  son  !"  And  so  it 
proved,  for  the  Volsci  were  enraged  at  his  retreat  from 
Rome,  and  they  murdered  him  at  Antium. 


BRENNUS  INVADING   ROME. 


CHAPTER    LXXII.— Europe    Continued. 

Borne  invaded  hy  the  Gauls.     The  first  Punic  War, 

1.  In  process  of  time,  the  Roman  government  under- 
went various  changes.  The  will  of  the  plebeians  had 
far  greater  influence  than  the  will  of  the  patricians. 

11.  What  was  his  fate? 

Chapter  LXXII. — 1.  Of  what  was  the  prosperity  of  Rome  the  consequence  ? 


254  .      UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

The   consequence  was,  that   the  prosperity  of  Kome 
increased,  both  at  home  and  abroad. 

2.  But  in  the  year  385  before  Christ,  a  great  calamity 
befel  the  city.  It  was  taken  by  an  army  of  Gauls, 
inhabitants  of  the  country  now  called  France.  When 
Brennus,  their  general,  had  entered  Rome,  he  marched 
with  his  soldiers  to  the  senate-house. 

3.  There  he  beheld  an  assemblage  of  gray-bearded 
senators,  seated  in  a  noble  hall,  in  chairs  of  ivory. 
Each  held  an  ivory  staff  in  his  hand.  These  brave 
old  men,  though  they  could  make  no  resistance,  con- 
sidered it  beneath  their  dignity  to  run  away  from  the 
invaders. 

4.  The  Gauls  were  awe-struck  by  their  venerable 
aspect.  But  finally,  one  of  the  soldiers,  being  ruder 
than  his  companions,  took  hold  of  the  long  gray  beard 
of  an  aged  senator,  and  pulled  it.  The  old  gentleman, 
whose  name  was  Papyrius,  was  so  offended  at  this 
insult,  that  he  uplifted  his  ivory  staff,  and  hit  the  sol- 
dier a  blow  on  the  head. 

5.  But  that  blow  cost  Rome  dear.  The  Gauls  im- 
mediately massacred  Papyrius  and  the  other  senators, 
and  set  fire  to  the  city ;  and  almost  the  whole  of  it 
was  reduced  to  ashes.     You  must  bear  in  mind  that  at 

2.  "What  befel  the  city  385  B.  C.  ?    What  of  Brennus?     3,  4.  What  happened  in 
tlie  aeaate-houso  ?   5.  What  of  the  size  of  Rome  at  the  time  ? 


EUROPE.  255 

tMs  time  K-ome  had  become  an  immense  city.  It  con- 
tained many  magnificent  edifices ;  tlie  most  splendid  of 
these  was  called  the  capitol ;  this  was  not  taken  by 
the  Gauls. 

6.  All  the  bravest  of  the  Romans  assembled  there, 
and  resolved  to  defend  it  to  the  last.  Yet  the  enemy 
had  nearly  got  possession  of  it  in  the  night.  But  as 
they  were  creeping  toward  the  gate,  they  awoke  a 
large  fiock  of  geese;  and  their  cackling  alarmed  the 
sentinels. 

7.  In  consequence  of  this  fortunate  event,  a  goose 
was  thenceforth  considered  a  very  praiseworthy  and 
honorable  fowl  by  the  Romans.  I  am  not  sure  that 
they  did  not  think  it  a  sin  to  have  roast  goose  for 
dinner. 

8.  The  Gauls  were  driven  out  of  Rome,  and  were 
soon  vanquished  by  Camillus,  a  brave  and  patriotic 
Roman.  It  is  said  that  not  a  single  man  of  them  got 
back  to  their  own  country,  to  tell  the  fate  of  his  com- 
panions. 

9.  The  Romans  were  almost  continually  at  war. 
Their  valor  and  discipline  generally  rendered  them  suc- 
cessful ;  but  sometimes  they  met  with  misfortunes.     In 


"What  of  the  capitol  ?     6.  How  was  the  capitol  saved  ?     1.  How  were  geese  re- 
garded afterward  ?     8.  Who  conquered  the  Gauls?     9.  What  of  the  Romans? 

12 


256  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

a  war  witli  tlie  Samnites,  a  Roman  army  was  captured, 
and  forced  to  pass  under  tlie  yoke,  wliicli  was  a  sign 
of  subjection.-    TMs  was  tlie  highest  possible  ignominy. 

10.  But  at  length  all  the  other  states  and  kingdoms 
of  Italy  were  brought  under  the  Roman  power.  After- 
ward, the  most  formidable  enemy  of  Rome  was  Car- 
thage. This  was  a  powerful  city  on  the  African  coast, 
near  where  Tunis  now  stands.  It  was  situated  nearly 
south  of  Rome,  across  the  Mediterranean  sea,  at  the 
distance  of  about  four  hundred  miles. 

11.  The  wars  between  Rome  and  Carthage  were 
called  Punic  wars.  The  first  began  in  the  year  264 
})efore  Christ,  and  lasted  twenty-three  years.  Many 
battles  were  fought  on  land,  and  some  by  sea. 

12.  The  Carthaginians  were  a  cruel  people.  When- 
ever their  generals  lost  a  battle,  they  were  crucified. 
Regulus,  a  Roman  general,  was  taken  by  them,  and 
underwent  homble  torments.  They  cut  oft*  his  eyelids, 
and  then  exposed  his  naked  eyes  to  the  bm^ning  sun. 
He  was  afterward  put  into  a  barrel,  the  inner  sides  of 
which  were  set  with  iron  spikes. 

13.  A  peace  was  at  last  concluded  between  Rome 

What  of  tbo  war  with  the  Samnites?  10.  What  of  the  kingdoms  of  Italy? 
Where  was  Carthago?  How  far  was  it  from  Rome?  In  what  direction  from 
Rome?  11.  When  did  the  first  Punic  war  begin ?  How  long  did  it  last?  12. 
What  of  tho  Carthaginians  ?    What  of  Regulus  ? 


EUROPE.  '257 

and  Carthage.  Tlie  doors  of  the  temple  of  Janus,  at 
Borne,  had  not  been  shut  for  five  hundred  years ;  for 
they  always  stood  open  while  the  Romans  were  at  war. 
But  now  they  were  closed  and  barred ;  for  Rome  was 
at  peace  with  all  the  world. 


CHAPTER   LXXIII.— Europe  Continued. 
Second  and  Third  Punic  Wars. 

1.  The  doors  of  the  temple  of  Janus  were  soon  flung 
wide  open  again;  for  a  war  broke  out  between  the 
Romans  and  a  tribe  of  Gauls.  It  ended  in  the  con- 
quest of  the  latter. 

2.  In  the  year  218  before  the  Christian  era,  another 
war  with  Carthage  began.  This  was  called  the  Second 
Punic  war.  The  Carthaginians  were  commanded  by 
Hannibal,  who  proved  himself  one  of  the  greatest 
-generals  that  ever  lived. 

3.  Hannibal  transported  his  army  across  the  Medi- 

13.  Wlmt  of  the  temple  of  Janus?  How  long  had  the  doors  been  open  ?  Whj 
were  they  now  closed?    When  was  the  temple  of  Janus  open?    When  shut? 

Chaptee  LXXIII.— 1.  What  war  now  broke  out  ?  Which  side  was  victorious  ? 
2.  Wh<*,n  did  the  second  Punic  war  begin  ?    Who  led  the  Carthaginians  ? 


258  UNIVERSAL  HISTOKY. 

terranean  sea  to  Spain,  and  thence  marclied  toward 
Italy.  In  Ms  progress  it  was  necessary  that  lie  should 
cross  the  Alps.  The  summits  of  these  mountains  are 
many  thousand  feet  in  height,  and  were  covered  wath 
ice  and  snow ;  in  some  places  Hannibal  is  said  to  have 
cut  a  passage  through  the  solid  rock.  i 

4.  After  crossing  these  mountains,  several  battles 
were  won  by  the  Carthaginians.  At  length,  the  two 
Roman  consuls,  with  a  large  army,  encountered  Han- 
nibal and  his  soldiers  at  Cannae.  Here  the  Eomans 
were  defeated  with  dreadful  slaughter.  One  of  the 
consuls  fled ;  the  other  was  slain,  and  forty  thousand 
men  were  left  dead  on  the  field. 

5.  Home  had  now  no  army  to  protect  it.  If  Hanni- 
bal had  marched  thither  immediately,  it  is  probable 
that  he  might  have  taken  the  city.  But  he  delayed 
too  long,  and  the  Romans  made  preparation  to  defend 
themselves. 

6.  Hannibal  never  won  such  another  victory  as  that 
at  Cannse,  for  the  Romans  soon  enlisted  new  armies, 
and  fought  more  successfully  than  before.  Scipio,  their 
best  general,  sailed  over  to  Africa,  in  order  to  attack 
Carthage.     Hannibal  immediately  followed  him. 

3.  What  did  Hannibal  do?  How  did  his  army  cross  the  Alps?  4.  Describe 
the  battle  of  Caunse.  6.  What  of  Rome  at  this  time?  6.  What  of  Scipio?  Who 
followed  him? 


EUROPE.  259 

7.  A  battle  was  fouglit  between  him  and  Scipio  at 
Zama.  The  Carthaginians  had  a  multitude  of  ele- 
phants. These  animals  were  wounded  by  the  Koman 
darts,  and  the  pain  made  them  rush  through  the  field, 
trampling  down  whole  ranks  of  Hannibal's  army. 

8.  The  Carthaginians  were  entirely  defeated,  and 
Hannibal  himself  barely  escaped  amid  the  rout  and 
confusion.  This  battle  put  an  end  to  the  second  Punic 
war. 

9.  But  a  third  war  between  Rome  and  Carthage 
broke  out  in  about  fifty  years.  The  Komans  were 
commanded  by  another  Scipio,  who  was  as  valiant  as 
his  namesake ;  but  the  Carthaginians  had  no  longer  a 
Hannibal. 

10.  This  third  Punic  war  ended  in  the  destruction 
of  Carthage.  The  city  was  set  on  fire,  and  continued 
to  burn  during  seventeen  days.  Many  of  the  citizens 
threw  themselves  into  the  flames,  and  perished.  This 
happened  in  the  year  137  before  the  Christian  era. 

11.  Scipio  returned  to  Rome,  and  was  rewarded  with 
a  triumph.  As  this  was  the  highest  honor  that  a 
Roman  general  could   attain,  and  as  such  triumphs 

1.  Where  was  a  battle  fought?  What  of  elephants?  8.  Which  side  were  de- 
feated? What  of  Hannibal ?  9.  Who  led  the  Romans  in  the  third  Punic  war? 
What  of  the  Carthaginians?  10.  When  was  Carthage  burnt?  11.  How  was 
Sciipio  rewarded? 


260  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

were  often  given  to  successful  commanders,  I  mil  tell 
my'  readers,  in  tlie  next  chapter,  wliat  Scipio's  triumph 
was. 


CHAPTEE  LXKiy.— EuKOPE  Continued. 
Scijpid's    Triumjph. 

1.  SciPio,  on  his  return  from  Carthage,  stopped  at 
the  Campus  Martins,  which  was  a  plain  on  the  outside 
of  Eome.  From  thence  he  was  escorted  into  the  city 
by  a  grand  procession. 

2.  First  came  a  band  of  musicians,  playing  their 
loudest  strains  on  all  sorts  of  instruments.  Then  fol- 
lowed a  drove  of  oxen,  which  were  to  be  sacrificed  in 
the  temples  of  the  gods.  Their  horns  were  gilded, 
and  garlands  were  wreathed  around  their  heads. 

3.  Next  came  a  train  of  wagons,  heavily  laden  with 
the  rich  spoils  that  had  been  taken  at  Carthage. 
There  was  gold  and  silver  in  abundance,  and  statues, 
pictures,   and    magnificent   garments.      The    brilliant 

X  armor  of  the  vanquished  army  was  likewise  piled  upon 
the  wagons. 

Chapter  LXXIV. — 1.  Where  was  the  Campus  Martius?  What  of  the  proces- 
sion? 2.  What  came  first?  What  was  to  be  done  with  the  oxen?  3.  With 
what  were  tha  wagons  laden  ? 


EUROPE.  261 

4.  Then  were  seen  some  elephants,  treading  along 
like  moving  liills.  These  huge  animals  were  trained  to 
war,  and  were  able  to  carry  a  whole  company  of  sol- 
diers on  their  backs. 

5.  Next  appeared  a  melancholy  troop  of  the  van- 
quished Carthaginians.  Their  chains  clanked  as  they 
walked  heavily  onward.  Among  them  were  all  the 
principal  men  of  Carthage,  and  they  drooped  their 
heads  in  shame  and  sorrow,  regretting  that  they  had 
not  perished  in  the  flames  of  their  city. 

6.  Behind  the  sad  troop  came  another  loud  band  of 
music,  drowning  the  groans  of  the  captives  with  the 
uproar  of  a  hundred  instruments.  There  were  like- 
wise dancers,  whose  garb  made  them  appear  like  mon- 
sters, neither  beasts  nor  men.  These  wore  crowns  of 
gold. 

7.  Then  came  a  splendid  chariot,  adorned  with  ivory, 
and  drawn  by  four  white  horses  all  abreast.  In  this 
chariot  stood  the  triumphant  Scipio,  dressed  in  a  pur- 
ple robe,  which  was  covered  with  gold  embroidery. 
His  face  was  painted  with  vermilion,  and  he  had  a 
crown  of  laurel  on  his  head. 

8.  A  golden  ball  hung  at  his  breast ;  and  in  his  right 

4.  What  of  elephants?  5.  Describe  the  appearance  of  the  captive  Carthagini- 
ans. In  what  battle  were  they  taken  prisoners  ?  6,  What  of  musicians  and  dan- 
cers?    T.  How  did  Scipio  appear? 


262  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

hand  he  held  an  ivory  sceptre,  with  a  golden  eagle  at 
the  top.  But  in  the  same  chariot  stood  a  slave,  who 
kept  whispering  to  Scipio,  "  Remember  that  thou  art 
but  a  man !"  And  these  words  seemed  to  sadden 
Scipio's  triumph. 

9.  Around  the  chariot  was  a  great  throng  of  Scipio's 
relatives,  and  other  citizens,  all  clothed  in  white.  Next 
came  the  consuls  and  all  the  members  of  the  Koman 
senate,  in  their  robes  of  ceremony. 

10.  Last  in  the  procession  marched  the  victorious 
army.  Their  helmets  were  wreathed  with  laurel.  The 
standard-bearers  carried  eagles  of  gold  and  silver,  in- 
stead of  banners.  As  they  moved  onward,  they  sang 
hymns  in  praise  of  Scipio's  valor,  and  all  the  Roman 
citizens  joined  their  voices  in  the  chorus.  In  this  man- 
ner, the  procession  passed  through  the  streets  of  Rome 
and  entered  the  doors  of  the  capitol. 

8.  What  did  the  slave  wliisper  in  his  ear?  What  was  the  efi'cct  of  what  he 
said  ?  9.  What  followed  the  chariot  ?  10.  Describe  the  victorious  army.  Where 
did  the  procession  stop  ? 


EUROPE.  2  63 

CHAPTER  LXXY.— Europe  Continued. 
Sylla  and  Marius. 

1.  The  Romans  still  continued  to  make  conquests. 
Not  long  after  the  ruin  of  Cai-thage,  the  whole  of 
Spain  became  a  province  of  Rome.  There  was  like- 
wise a  war  with  Numidia,  a  country  of  Africa,  now 
called  Algiers.  Jugurtha,  the  Numidian  king,  was 
brought  prisoner  to  Rome,  and  starved  to  death  in  a 
dungeon. 

2.  There  was  afterward  a  Social  war^  beginning  in 
the  year  91  before  Christ.  This  war  was  called  Social, 
because  it  was  between  the  Romans  and  the  neighbor- 
ing states  of  Italy,  who  had  been  their  own  friends  and 
allies.  Three  hundred  thousand  men  were  killed  on 
both  sides.  Then  there  was  a  war  with  Mithridates, 
the  powerful  king  of  Pontus,  in  Asia  Minor.  He  was 
not  entirely  vanquished  till  forty  years  afterward. 

3.  In  the  course  of  all  this  fighting,  two  Roman  com- 
manders acquired  great  renown.  One  was  named 
Marius,  and  the  other  Sylla.     Marius  was  a  rude  and 

Chapter  LXXV. — 1.  What  of  Roman  conquests  ?  What  of  Spain  ?  Nunaidia? 
Its  king?  2.  When  did  the  Social  war  begin?  How  many  men  were  killed  in 
this  war  ?    Who  was  Mithridates  ?    3.  What  of  the  Roman  commanders  ? 


264  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

daring  soldier,  knowing  nothing  but  how  to  fight. 
Sylla  was  likewise  a  good  soldier,  but  also  a  person  of 
great  elegance  and  polished  manners. 

4.  These  two  generals  became  so  great  and  power- 
ful, that  each  was  envious  of  the  other.  They  there- 
fore began  a  civil  war,  in  which  Romans  fought  against 
Romans.  I  mil  relate  an  incident  in  order  to  show  the 
horrors  of  this  war. 

5.  One  of  Sylla's  soldiers  had  killed  one  of  the  sol- 
diers of  Marius.  He  began  to  strip  him  of  his  armor ; 
but  on  taking  off  the  helmet  which  had  concealed  the 
dead  man's  face,  he  saw  that  it  was  his  own  brother. 
The  wretched  sur\dvor  placed  the  body  on  a  funeral 
pile,  and  then  killed  himself. 

6.  In  the  outset  of  the  struggle  with  Sylla,  Marius 
was  beaten;  but  he  afterward  gained  possession  of 
Rome.  He  now  resolved  to  put  to  death  every  person 
tliat  was  not  friendly  to  his  cause.  Senators  and  other 
distinguished  men  were  publicly  murdered.  Dead 
bodies  were  seen  everywhere  about  the  streets. 

Y.  But  Marius  could  not  escape  the  misery  which 
his  wickedness  deserved.  He  was  so  tortured  by 
remorse,  that  he  contracted  a  habit  of  drinking  im- 


Marius?    Sylla?     4.  What  war  broke  out  in  Rome?     5.  Relate  a  horrid  inci- 
dwit  in  this  war.     6.  What  did  Marius  do  7     7.  What  was  his  fate  ? 


EUROPE.  265 

moderately.     This    brought  on  a  fever,  of  which  he 
died. 

8.  After  the  death  of  this  wicked  man,  Sylla  return- 
ed to  Rome  at  the  head  of  a  large  army.  He  declared 
himself  dictator ;  and  his  word  then  became  the  sole 
law  of  E>ome.  Like  Marius,  he  determined  to  massa- 
cre all  his  enemies.  As  fast  as  they  were  killed,  their 
bloody  heads  were  brought  to  him. 

9.  When  Sylla  had  shed  as  much  blood  as  he  de- 
sired, he  suddenly  resigned  his  power.  Everybody 
was  surprised  at  this,  but  nobody  lamented  it;  nor 
were  there  any  mourners  when  this  cruel  and  wicked 
man  died,  an  event  which  happened  soon  after. 


CHAPTER    LXXYI.— EuKOPE    Continued. 

Cneius  Pomjpey  and  Julius  CcBsar, 

1.  If  the  Roman  people  had  loved  liberty  as  well  as 
they  once  did,  they  never  would  have  borne  the  tyr- 
anny of  Sylla  and  Marius.  But  they  had  become 
addicted  to  luxury,  by  the  riches  they  had  acquired 
from  their  conquests  in  all  parts  of  the  world. 

8.  What  did  Sylla  do  ?     Give  an  account  of  his  proceedings.     9.  What  act  of 
Sylla's  surprised  everybody  ? 

Chapter  LXXVI.— 1.  What  of  the  Roman  people  ? 


266  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

2.  Owing  to  their  continual  wars,  they  had  also  ac- 
customed themselves  to  consider  successful  warriors  as 
the  greatest  men  on  earth.  Soldiers  must  obey  their 
leaders,  without  asking  why  or  wherefore ;  and  all  the 
Eoman  people  felt  like  soldiei^.  Thus  the  very  same 
causes  which  rendered  the  Romans  so  invincible  to 
their  enemies,  made  them  liable  to  be  enslaved  by  any 
great  general  who  should  be  ambitious  of  enslaving 
them.     And  such  a  general  soon  appeared. 

3.  After  the  death  of  Sylla.  and  Marius,  the  two 
most  valiant  and  distinguished  waniors  were  Pompey 
and  Caesar.  Pompey  was  the  eldest.  He  had  grown 
famous  by  vanquishing  Mithridates,  and  by  many  other 
victories.  He  had  conquered  fifteen  kingdoms,  and 
taken  eight  hundred  cities. 

4.  The  name  of  this  illustrious  leader's  rival  was 
Julius  Caesar.  He  was  the  most  beautiful  person  in 
Rome.  He  had  fought  in  Gaul,  Germany,  and  Britain, 
and  had  overcome  three  millions  of  men,  and  killed 
one  million.     His  soldiers  idolized  him. 

5.  At  last,  like  Sylla  and  Marius,  these  two  generals 
became  so  great  and  powerful,  that  the  world  was  no 
longer  wide  enough  for  them  both.     They  each  col- 

2.  What  was  the  consequence  of  continual  war?  3.  What  generals  appeared 
after  Marius  and  Sylla?  What  had  Pompey  done  ?  4.  What  of  Pompey's  rival, 
Julius  Ciesar  ? 


EUROPE.  267 

lected  great  armies,  in  wliicli  all  tlie  Roman  soldiers 
were  enlisted,  on  one  side  or  the  other. 

6.  They  encountered  each  other  at  Pharsalia,  in 
Macedon,  The  best  part  of  Pompey's  army  consisted 
of  a  multitude  of  the  young  Roman  nobility.  These 
youths  had  very  handsome  faces ;  and  it  was  chiefly 
owing  to  this  circumstance  that  Pompey  lost  the 
victory. 

7.  Caesar  ordered  his  rough  and  weather-beaten  sol- 
diers to  aim  their  blows  right  at  the  faces  of  their  ene- 
mies. The  latter  were  so  afraid  that  their  beauty 
would  be  spoiled,  that  they  immediately  turned  and 
fled.     A  complete  victory  was  gained  by  Caesar. 

8.  Pompey  made  his  escape  into  Egypt,  but  was 
there  murdered.  His  head  was  cut  off  and  brought  to 
Csesar,  who  turned  aside  his  eyes  from  the  bloody 
spectacle,  and  wept  to  think  that  so  mighty  a  warrior 
had  met  with  so  sad  a  fate. 

5.  What  did  these  great  generals  do?  6.  Where  was  a  battle  fought?  What 
of  Pompey's  army?  7.  By  what  means  did  Csesar  vanquish  the  followers  of  Pom- 
pey?    8.  What  became  of  Pompey?     Why  did  Csesar  weep  at  his  death? 


268  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

CHAPTER  LXXVII.— Europe  Continued. 
CoBsar  usu7ys  the  Suprerroe  Power. 

1.  When  tlie  Eoman  senate  heard  of  Caesar's  vic- 
tory, they  proclaimed  a  solemn  thanksgiving  to  the 
gods.  Supreme  power  was  granted  him  for  life,  with 
the  title  of  dictator.  His  person  was  declared  sacred 
and  inviolable. 

2.  His  statue  was  placed  among  those  of  gods  and 
heroes,  in  the  capitol.  It  stood  next  to  that  of  Jupiter, 
and  bore  this  impious  inscription :  "  The  Statue  of 
CAESAR,  the  DE>n-GOD."  This  proves  that  the  Romans 
were  already  slaves,  when  they  thus  deified  a  mortal  man. 

3.  Csesar  had  now  but  one  other  wish  to  gratify. 
He  desired  to  bear  the  name  of  king.  He  endeavored 
to  gain  the  good  will  of  the  soldiers  and  people,  in 
order  that  they  might  gratify  his  ambition.  For  this 
purpose  he  spent  immense  sums  in  entertainments  and 
magnificent  spectacles. 

4.  On  one  occasion,  he  made  a  feast  for  the  whole 
Koman  people.  Twenty-two  thousand  tables  were  set 
out  in  the  streets  of  Rome.     All  sorts  of  delicious  food 

Chapter  LXXVH. — 1.  What  did  the  Romans  do  after  Caesar's  victory?  2. 
What  of  Csisar's  statue  ?  3.  What  did  this  great  conqueror  now  desire  ?  What 
did  he  do  to  obtain  his  wish  ?    4.  Describe  the  feast. 


EUROPE.  269 

and  drink  were  heaped  upon  them.     The  meanest  beg- 
gar was  at  liberty  to  sit  down  and  eat  his  fill. 

5.  Most  of  the  Romans  had  now  lost  the  noble 
spirit  which  had  animated  their  forefathers.  They 
were  willing  to  be  governed  by  any  man  who  would 
feed  them  with  delicacies,  and  amuse  them  with 
splendid  shows,  as  Caesar  did.  It  must  be  owned,  also, 
that  Caesar  had  many  noble  and  amiable  qualities. 

6.  The  people,  therefore,  had  a  fondness  for  their 
tyrant.  They  loved  to  behold  him,  at  the  public  spec- 
tacles and  entertainments,  sitting  in  a  gilded  chair  of 
state,  with  a  golden  crown  upon  his  head.  Had  he 
asked  it,  they  were  even  ready  to  fall  down  and  wor- 
ship him. 

7.  But  there  were  a  few  Romans  of  the  old  stamp, 
who  loved  liberty  for  its  own  sake.  There  were  others, 
also,  who  hated  Caesar  because  he  had  wronged  them, 
or  because  he  was  more  powerful  than  they.  These 
two  sorts  of  persons  formed  a  conspiracy  to  kill  him. 

8.  The  two  chief  conspirators  were  Brutus  and 
Cassius.  Brutus  was  a  dear  lover  of  liberty,  and  a 
true  friend  of  Rome.  He  also  loved  Caesar,  and  was 
beloved  by  him.  But  he  resolved  to  assist  in  slaying 
him  in  order  that  his  country  might  be  free. 

5   What  of  the  Romans?     6.  What  did  they  love  to  see?     7.  Who  formed  a 
conspiracy  to  kill  Caesar?     8.  Who  Avere  the  chief  conspirators  ?    What  of  Brutus? 


2T0 


UNIYERSAL  HISTORY. 


9.  Cassius  formed  tlie  same  resolution;  but  it  was 
cliiefly  because  he  bated  Caesar.  Sixty  other  senators 
were  engaged  in  the  plot.  Most  conspirators  endeavor 
to  do  their  work  in  secrecy  and  at  midnight.  But  the 
blood  of  Ca3sar  was  to  be  shed  in  broad  daylight,  and 
in  the  great  hall  of  the  senate-house. 


CESAR'S    DEATH. 


CHAPTER  LXXYIIL— EuKOPE  Continued. 

Assassination  of  Julius  Co^ar. 

1.  On  the  fatal  morning,  Caesar  set  forth  from  his 
mansion.  There  was  a  great  throng  of  flatterers  and 
false  friends  around  him.     As  he  came  down  the  steps 

9.  Caasius  ?     How  did  they  mean  to  act  ? 

CHAPTiTR  LXXVIII. — 1.  Describe  Cajsar'a  departure  from  his  house. 


EUROPE.  27l 

of  tlie  portal,  a  gray-bearded  pliilosoplier  pressed 
tliroagli  the  crowd  and  put  a  paper  into  liis  hand.  It 
contained  an  account  of  the  whole  plot.  If  Caesar  had 
read  it,  it  would  have  cost  all  the  conspirators  their 
lives,  and  have  saved  his  own.  But  he  gave  it  to  one 
of  his  secretaries,  and  walked  onward. 

2.  As  Caesar  passed  thi^ough  the  streets  of  Rome,  he 
looked  round  at  the  crowd  of  obsequious  senators,  and 
listened  to  the  shouts  of  the  multitude.  He  felt  that 
he  was  the  most  exalted  man  in  all  the  world.  But 
his  heart  was  not  at  ease ;  for  he  also  felt  that  he  had 
enslaved  his  country. 

3.  The  proud  procession  ascended  the  steps  of  the 
senate-house  and  passed  into  the  hall.  Along  the  sides 
of  this  hall  were  ranged  the  statues  of  many  famous 
Romans,  and  among  them  stood  the  marble  image  of 
Pompey,  whose  bloody  head  had  been  brought  to 
Caesar.  Just  as  Caesar  was  passing  in  front  of  Pom- 
pey's  statue,  Metellus  Cimber,  one  of  the  conspirators, 
knelt  down  and  took  hold  of  his  robe.  This  was  the 
signal  for  the  attack. 

4.  Casca,  who  was  behind  Caesar,  drew  a  dagger  and 

What  happened  as  he  came  down  the  steps  ?  2.  What  did  he  see  on  looking 
around  him  ?  How  did  he  feel  ?  3.  Where  did  the  procession  march  ?  What 
were  ranged  around  the  hall  ?  What  happened  as  Csesar  was  passing  the  statue 
of  Pompey  ? 


272  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

stabbed  him  in  tlie  shoulder.  "  Wretch !  what  doest 
thou  ?"  cried  Caesar,  snatching  the  weapon.  The  other 
conspii^atoi's  now  rushed  upon  him.  But  he  defended 
himself  with  the  valor  that  he  had  shown  in  a  hun- 
dred battles. 

5.  At  length  Brutus  pressed  forward  and  struck  him 
with  his  dagger.  When  Caesar  saw  that  the  hand  of 
his  dear  friend  was  raised  against  his  life,  he  made  no 
more  resistance.  "And-  thou  too,  Brutus!"  he  said, 
with  one  reproachful  look. 

6.  Then  covering  his  head  mth  his  mantle,  that  his 
enemies  might  not  behold  the  death  pang  in  his  face, 
he  fell  before  the  pedestal  of  Pompey's  statue.  The 
marble  countenance  of  the  statue  seemed  to  look  down 
upon  him,  and  Pompey  was  avenged. 

7.  The  conspirators  dipped  their  weapons  in  the 
blood  that  flowed  upon  the  pavement.  Brutus  raised 
his  dagger  aloft,  and  called  to  Cicero,  the  illustrious 
orator  and  patriot.  "  Rejoice,  father  of  our  country  !" 
he  exclaimed,  pointing  to  the  prostrate  form  of  Caesar, 
"  for  Rome  is  free !" 

8.  But  alas !  when  the  souls  of  a  whole  people  are 
enslaved,  it  is  not  the  death  of  any  single  man  that  can 

4.  Who  first  stabbed  him  ?  How  did  he  defend  himself?  5.  Who  gave  Cassar 
the  second  blow  ?  How  did  he  receive  it?  6.  Describe  his  death.  7.  What  d:4 
Brutus  and  the  conspirators  now  do?    8.  Why  did  CBesar  die  in  vain? 


EUROPE.  273 

set  them  free.     And  thus,  as  my  readers  will  perceive, 
the  mighty  victim  died  in  vain. 


CHAPTER  LXXIX.— Europe  Contintjed. 

Cwisequences  of  Cceswrs  Death. 

1.  The  death  of  Csesar  took  place  forty-three  years 
before  the  Christian  era.  The  affairs  of  Rome  wei^e 
thrown  into  great  confusion  by  it.  Caesar's  friends 
found  no  great  difficulty  in  persuading  the  people  that 
he  had  been  unjustly  murdered. 

2.  Brutus,  Cassius,  and  the  other  conspirators,  were 
compelled  to  flee  from  the  city.  Three  men  then 
usurped  the  government,  and  were  called  triumvirs,  or 
a  triumvirate.  Their  names  were  Mark  Antony,  Lepi- 
dus,  and  Octavius.  The  latter  was  Caesar's  nephew, 
and  had  been  his  adopted  son. 

3.  The  triumvirate  resolved  to  secure  themselves  in 
power  by  murdering  all  who  were  opposed  to  them. 
They  made  a  list  of  three  hundred  senators,  and  more 
than  two  thousand  knights,  and  offered  rewards  for 

Chapter  LXXIX. — 1.  When  did  Cjesar's  death  take  place?     What  of  Rome ? 
;       The  friends  of  Caesar  ?    2.  Who  were  obliged  to  fly  from  the  city  ?    Who  now  gov- 
erned Rome?    Who  was  Octavius ?     3.  What  did  the  triumvirate  do? 


274  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

killing  them.     They  exulted  when  the  heads  of  their 
victims  were  laid  at  their  feet. 

4.  One  of  these  wicked  triumvirs  presented  the  head 
of  his  own  brother  to  his  colleagues.  Another  brought 
his  uncle's  head.  No  friend,  nor  relative,  nor  patriot 
was  spared,  if  he  was  suspected  of  being  opposed  to 
the  triumvirate. 

5.  In  the  mean  time,  Brutus  and  Cassius  were  in 
Greece.  They  had  collected  an  army  of  a  hundred 
thousand  men.  Mark  Antony  and  Octavius  marched 
against  them;  and  a  battle  was  fought  at  Philippi. 
Brutus  and  Cassius  being  defeated,  they  both  com- 
mitted suicide. 

6.  The  triumvirate  had  now  got  all  the  power  into 
their  own  hands.  But  they  soon  quarrelled  among 
themselves.  Lepidus  was  turned  out  of  office,  and 
banished.  Mark  Antony  and  Octavius  then  made  war 
upon  one  another,  like  Marius  and  Sylla,  and  like 
Pompey  and  Caesar. 

Y.  The  good  fortune  of  Octavius  gave  him  the  vic- 
tory, and  Antony  killed  himself  with  his  own  sword, 
as  I  have  related  in  the  history  of  Egypt.     Octavius 

4.  What  acts  of  cruelty  did  they  perform  ?  5.  Where  now  were  Brutus  and 
Cassius?  Who  opposed  them  ?  Where  was  the  battle  fought  ?  The  fate  of  Bru- 
tus  and  Cassius?  6.  What  of  the  triumvirate  ?  7.  Which  of  the  triumvirs  tri- 
amphed  ? 


EUROPE.  2  75 

liad  no  longer  any  rivals,  and  was  now  sole  master  of 
Rome  and  its  dominions.  He  was  afraid  to  assume  tlie 
title  of  king,  but  called  himself  emperor,  and  Angus* 
tus  Caesar. 

8.  In  addition  to  several  other  titles,  the  senate  gave 
him  that  of  Pater  Patriae,  or  Father  of  his  Country. 
This  was  merely  a  piece  of  flattery.  Yet  there  were 
now  so  few  good  men  in  Rome,  that  perhaps  Octavius 
made  a  better  use  of  his  power  than  any  other  would 
have  done. 

9.  His  reign  from  this  time  was  peaceful  and  quiet, 
and  offers  few  events  that  need  be  recorded  in  this 
brief  history.  Nearly  the  whole  world  was  under  his 
sway,  and  therefore  he  had  no  occasion  to  increase  his 
dominions  by  going  to  war.  The  greatest  glory  of  his 
times  consists  in  the  works  of  poets  and  other  men  of 
genius. 

10.  Octavius,  or,  as  he  is  always  called,  Augustus 
Caesar,  reigned  forty-one  years,  and  died  at  the  age  of 
seventy-six,  in  the  year  14  after  the  birth  of  Christ. 
You  Avill  observe  that  it  was  during  his  reign  that 
Christ  appeared  in  Palestine. 

What  became  of  Antony?  What  did  Octavius  call  himself?  8.  What  other 
name  did  the  senate  give  him?  9.  Describe  the  reign  of  Augustus.  10.  How 
long  did  he  reign  ?    When  did  he  die  ? 


EUROPE.  277 


CIIAPTEK  LXXX.— Europe  Continued. 

About  the  great' power  and  extent  of  the  Itorrian  Empire  in 
the  time  of  Augustus. 

1.  As  Kome  was  now  at  its  greatest  lieiglit  of  wealth 
and  splendor,  I  shall  try  to  give  you  some  idea  of  the 
extent  and  power  of  this  vast  empire,  and  then,  having 
told  you  a  little  more  of  its  history,  I  shall  say  some- 
thing about  the  manners  and  customs  of  the  ancient 
Koman  people. 

2.  In  the  time  of  Augustus,  the  Eoman  empire  em- 
braced all  the  nations  of  Europe,  except  a  few  northern 
tribes,  who  maintained  their  independence.  It  in- 
cluded England,  France,  Spain,  Germany,  all  the  states 
of  Italy,  Greece,  the  country  now  occupied  by  Turkey 
in  Europe,  besides  many  other  nations. 

8.  In  Asia,  it  embraced  all  the  kingdoms  from  Asia 
Minor  on  the  west,  to  India  on  the  east.  Of  course,  it 
included  Asia  Minor,  Syria,  Palestine,  Arabia,  Persia, 
Parthia,  and  many  other  countries. 

4.  It  included  the  whole  northern  portion  of  Africa, 
from  Mauritania,  now  Morocco,  on  the  west,  to  Ethi- 


Chapter  LXXX. — 1.  "What  of  Rome  during  the  reign  of  Augustus  ?    What  did 
it  include  in  Europe,?     3.  In  Asia?     4.  In  Africa  ? 


278-  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

opia  on  tlie  east.  This  was  tlie  whole  of  Attica  then 
known ;  the  interior  being  only  inhabited  by  scattered 
bands  of  negroes. 

5.  It  seems  wonderful  that  one  country  could  gov- 
ern so  many  nations.  This  was  done,  however,  by 
placing  Roman  governors  over  these  various  kingdoms ; 
the  governors  being  sustained  by  a  multitude  of  Ro- 
man soldiers. 

6.  During  this  period,  the  people  of  Rome  had  great 
skill  in  architecture,  sculpture,  painting,  and  many 
other  arts.  These  arts  were  extended  to  all  parts  of 
the  empire. 

7.  Thus  a  multitude  of  cities  in  various  parts  of 
Europe,  Africa,  and  Asia,  were  filled  with  costly  tem- 
ples and  palaces  of  marble,  with  beautiful  statues  and 
valuable  paintings.  The  splendor  and  magnificence 
of  many  of  these  cities,  at  this  period,  was  indeed 
wonderful.. 

8.  Nor  was  this  all :  the  Romans  built  many  public 
works  of  great  utility ;  they  constructed  roads  paved 
with  stone;  they  built  durable  bridges,  and  made 
aqueducts  for  supplying  the  cities  with  water.  So  nu- 
merous and  so  permanent  were  these  vast  works,  that 

What  parts  of  Africa  were  then  known?  5.  How  did  Rome  govern  all  these 
nations  ?  6.  What  of  the  people  of  Rome  ?  T.  With  what  were  many  cities  filled  ? 
8.  What  of  public  works?     Roads?    Bridges?     Aqueducts? 


EUROPE.  279 

the  remains  of  them  are  still  to  be  found  in  most  of 
the  countries  over  which  the  Eoman  dominion  was 
then  established,  though  they  were  executed  nearly 
two  thousand  years  ago. 

9.  But  of  all  the  cities  in  the  world,  Rome  was  itself 
the  most  wonderful.  In  the  time  of  Augustus,  it  was 
fifty  miles  in  cii'cuit,  and  contained  four  millions  of 
inhabitants. 

10.  Like  all  ancient  cities,  it  was  surrounded  by 
high,  strong  walls  of  stone ;  for  in  these  warlike  times, 
as  I  have  before  said,  walls  were  a  necessary  protection 
against  the  attacks  of  an  enemy.  The  walls  of  Home 
were  entered  by  thirty-seven  gates. 

11.  The  interior  of  this  wonderful  city  surpassed  all 
description.  The  various  generals  who  had  conquered 
other  countries,  had  robbed  them  of  their  choicest 
treasures,  and  these  had  been  brought  to  Rome  to 
decorate  and  enrich  the  capital. 

12.  There  were  beautiful  statues  from  Greece,  obe- 
lisks and  columns  from  Egypt,  and  a  great  variety  of 
curious  and  costly  manufactures  from  Asia.  Gold,  sil- 
ver, and  precious  stones  had  been  gathered  from  every 
part  of  the  earth. 

13.  Beside   all  this,  the  city  was  embellished  with 

9,  10.  Describe  the  city  of  Rome.     11,  12.  How  was  tlie  capital  decorated? 

13 


280  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

temples,  many  of  tliem  of  marble,  and  beautifully 
sculptured;  there  were  also  theatres,  amphitheatres, 
porticoes,  public  baths,  triumphal  arches,  and  aqueducts. 
14.  In  short,  the  city  of  Rome  was  enriched  with 
the  spoils  of  the  whole  world,  and  had  that  air  "of 
pomp  and  magnificence  which  suited  the  capital  of  the 
greatest  empire  that  the  world  ever  saw. 

13.  What  of  temples?     Other  buildings?     14.  What  of  the  city  generally? 


EUROPE. 


281 


ANCIENT 


CIIAPTEK  LXXXI.— Europe  Continued. 

The  Means  hy  which  Rome  acquired  its  Power. 

1.  I  TRUST  you  have  now  some  faint  idea  of  the 
extent,  wealth,  and  power  of  the  Roman  empire.  We 
cannot  look  back  upon  it  without  feelings  of  admira- 
tion; yet  when  we  look  at  the  means  which  had  heen 


Chapter   LXXXI. — 1.  "What  must  we  feel  upon  reading  the  history  of  Rome  ? 


282  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

employed  to  establish  tliis  dominion ;  wlien  we  look  at 
tlie  condition  of  mankind  during  that  age,  and  consider 
that  this  vast  dominion  soon  crumbled  into  atoms; 
we  cannot  but  feel  the  strongest  emotions  of  pain. 

2.  In  the  first  place,  the  means  used  to  aggrandize 
Rome  were  those  of  conquest.  The  E-oman  generals 
went  abroad  to  subdue  other  countries,  for  no  other 
purpose  than  to  acquire  fame  and  spoils  for  themselves, 
and  power  for  Rome. 

3.  They  slaughtered  the  inhabitants  without  mercy, 
they  robbed  them  without  scruple,  and  they  subjected 
them  to  the  E-oman  yoke  without  the  slightest  regard 
to  the  rights  of  mankind.  * 

4.  Such  were  the  means  by  which  the  fabric  of  Ro- 
man power  was  erected.  And  what  must  have  been 
the  condition  of  mankind  during  the  seven  hundred 
years  that  Rome  was  carrying  on  its  wars  for  no  other 
purpose  than  to  enslave  the  world ! 

5.  It  is  true  that  a  few  men — generals,  senators,  con- 
suls, and  governors — may  have  lived  in  splendor,  and 
enjoyed  wealth  and  fame.  Some  of  the  Roman  sol- 
diers, too,  may  have  led  lives  of  adventure,  gratifying 
to  bold  and  restless  spirits. 

2,  3.  By  what  means  did  Rome  rise  to  such  a  high  pitch  of  renown  ?  Wliat  of 
the  Roman  generals  ?  4.  How  many  years  was  Rome  at  war  with  other  nations  ? 
5.  What  classes  may  have  been  benefited  by  these  wars? 


EUROPE.  283 

6.  But  how  mucli  suffering,  sori'ow,  and  despair  must 
there  have  been  among  the  millions  of  wounded  men ; 
among  the  millions  who  were  bereaved  of  their  Mends ; 
among  the  millions  who  were  stript  of  their  fortunes; 
among  the  millions  who  were  reduced  to  slavery ! 

7.  The  simple  truth  is,  that  the  policy  of  Rome  was 
wholly  selfish.  The  Roman  people,  like  the  Greeks, 
Persians,  Egyptians,  and  other  ancient  nations,  had 
some  notions  of  virtue,  and  occasionally  displayed 
noble  and  generous  qualities. 

8.  Yet,  like  all  these  nations,  they  were  destitute  of 
true  morality ;  that  morality  which  Christ  has  taught 
in  a  single  sentence :  Do  to  another  as  you  would  have 
another  do  to  you.  Like  most  other  ancient  nations, 
Rome  was  destitute  of  that  true  religion,  which  teaches 
mankind  that  all  power  founded  in  injustice  must 
perish. 

9.  Splendid  as  the  Roman  empire  was,  it  was  desti- 
tute of  real  glory.  Its  splendor  was  acquired  by  rob- 
bery, and  its  fame,  though  it  might  dazzle  a  heathen, 
will  be  regarded  as  a  false  renown  by  the  Christian. 

1     10.  Such  as  it  was,  the  power  of  Rome  was  destined 
to  speedy  decay.     For  a  time  after  Augustus,  the  em- 


6.  Who  suffered  from  them  ?     1.  What  of  Rome  and  her  citizens  ?     8.  Were 
the  people  eitlier  truly  moral  or  religious  ?     9.  Wliat  of  the  splendor  of  Rome  ? 


284  UNIYERSAL  HISTORY. 

pire  maintained  its  sway,  and  the  magnificence  of  Rome 
continued.  The  luxury  of  the  wealthy  citizens  even 
increased,  and  refinement  in  many  respects  was  carried 
to  a  higher  pitch  than  ever. 

11.  But  the  whole  fabric  was  based  upon  a  false 
foundation.;  and  in  a  few  centuries  imperial  E-ome  was 
divided  among  a  host  of  ruthless  invaders. 


CHAPTER  LXXXII.— Europe  Continued. 
Rome  under  the  Errvjperors.. 

1.  The  Roman  empire  had  now  reached  the  height 
of  its  power,  pomp,  and  splendor ;  but  its  decline  had 
already  commenced,  because  the  people  and  their 
rulers  were  alike  corrupt.  It  was  like  a  great  tree 
with  wide-spreading  branches,  but  rotten  at  its  trunk. 

2.  In  the  course  of  about  three  hundred  and  fifty 
years  after  the  death  of  Augustus  Caesar,  there  had 
been  thirty-six  emperors  of  Rome ;  but  I  can  mention 
only  a  few  of  them.     They  lived  in  great  luxury  and 

10,  What  was  the  state  of  Rome  after  the  death  of  Augustus?  11.  What  was 
the  final  fate  of  Rome  ? 

Chapter  LXXXII. — 1.  To  what  can  you  compare  the  Roman  empire?  2.  HoW 
many  emperors  reigned  after  Augustus?    What  of  them? 


EUROPE.  285 

splendor,  but  they  were  generally  such  wicked  persons 
that  it  would  have  been  better  for  the  world  if  they 
had  never  lived. 

3.  The  next  emperor  to  Augustus  Caesar  was  Tibe- 
rius. He  was  a  frightful  looking  object,  being  bald, 
and  covered  with  sores,  and  his  disposition  was  far 
more  hideous  than  his  aspect.  This  gloomy  tyrant 
suspected  everybody  of  plotting  against  his  life. 

4.  He  put  so  many  people  to  death,  that  their  dead 
bodies  were  piled  in  heaps  in  the  public  places.  He 
once  sentenced  a  poor  woman  to  die,  n^erely  for 
lamenting  the  death  of  her  son.  At  last,  he  fell  into 
a  swoon,  and  his  guards  smothered  him  with  his  bed- 
clothes. 

5.  His  successor  was  Caligula,  who  wished  that  the 
whole  Koman  people  had  but  one  head,  that  he  might 
chop  it  oif  at  a  single  blow.  He,  also,  was  murdered 
by  his  guards,  and  was  succeeded  by  Claudius,  an  idiot. 
Claudius  was  poisoned  by  his  own  wife. 

6.  Nero  was  the  next  emperor.  His  whole  reign 
was  a  scene  of  bloodshed.  He  murdered  his  mother 
and  his  wife.  He  set  E,ome  on  fire,  merely  for  the 
pleasure  of  seeing  it  blaze.  While  the  city  was  in 
flames,  he  sat  on  the  top  of  a  lofty  tower,  playing  on  a 

3,  4  Give  an  account  of  Tiberius.     5.  Describe  Caligula.     6.  "What  of  Nero  ? 


286  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

harp.  Finally,  lie  was  dethroned,  and  condemned  to 
be  beaten  to  death  with  rods.  To  escape  this  tortui'e, 
he  killed  himself. 

7.  The  two  next  emperors  were  Galba  and  Otho. 
The  first  was  killed  by  his  soldiers,  and  the  second 
committed  suicide.  The  next  was  Vitellius.  This 
monster  delighted  in  visiting  fields  of  battle,  and  snuf 
fing  up  the  smell  of  the  dead  bodies. 

8.  When  the  Romans  grew  weary  of  Vitellius,  they 
put  a  rope  around  his  neck  and  hauled  him  into  the 
most  public  part  of  the  city.  There  they  bespattered 
him  with  mud,  and  then  killed  him  in  the  most  cruel 
manner.  His  head  was  put  on  a  lance,  and  his  body 
dragged  into  the  Tiber. 

9.  But  I  am  weary,  my  dear  young  readers !  My 
heart  grows  sick  and  sad,  while  I  speak  to  you  of 
these  evil  a^id  miserable  men.  Forget  what  I  have  told 
you.  Forget  that  such  monsters  have  ever  existed  in 
the  world. 

10.  Or,  if  you  must  remember  them,  remember,  too, 
that  their  frightful  crimes  resulted  from  the  possession 
of  more  power  than  mortal  man  ought  ever  to  possess. 
And,  above  all,  remember  that  if  these  tyrants  were 


7.  What  of  Ualba  and  Otho?    ViteUius?     8.  What  became  of  ViteUius?     JO. 
What  may  you  remember  of  the  reigns  of  these  monsters  ? 


EUROPE. 


287 


the  scourges  of  their  people,  it  was  because  the  people 
had  not  virtue  enough  to  be  free. 


ALARIC,    KING  OF  THE  GOTHS,   ENTERING  ROME. 

CHAPTER  LXXXIII.— Europe  CoNxiNrED. 
Fall  of  the  Western  Empire  of  the  Romans, 

1.  Yet  there  were  some  good  men  among  the  Koman 
emperors.  Such  were  Vespasian,  Titus,  Antoninus, 
Marcus  Aurelius,  Alexander  Severus,  Aurelian,  and 
Diocletian.  But  these  good  men  would  doubtless  have 
been  better,  if  their  evil  fortune  had  not  made  themi 
emperors. 

Chapter  LXXXIII. — 1.  What  good  emperore  were  there  ? 


288  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

2.  The  first  emperor  wlio  became  a  convert  to  Chris- 
tianity, was  Constantine  the  Great.  He  began  to  reign 
in  the  year  306  after  the  Christian  era.  By  him  the 
seat  of  government  was  transferred  from  Eome  to  Con- 
stantinople, formerly  called  Byzantium. 

3.  The  religion  of  Christ  was  planted  in  various 
parts  of  the  Roman  empire  by  the  apostles,  but  the 
first  Christians  were  much  persecuted.  Some  were 
whipped,  many  were  imprisoned,  and  thousands  were 
murdered. 

4.  Still  their  numbers  increased.  At  length  the  em- 
peror Constantine  ordered  that  the  persecutions  should 
cease,  and  he  himself  became  a  convert  to  Christianity. 
This  took  place  in  311. 

5.  It  is  said  that  Constantine  was  one  day  riding  at 
the  head  of  his  army,  when  he  saw  a  splendid  cross  in 
the  heavens,  upon  which  was  written,  ^'  Conquer  by 
this  sign."  It  is  supposed  that  this  vision  persuaded 
the  emperor  of  the  truth  of  the  Christian  religion,  and 
induced  him  to  adopt  it  as  the  religion  of  the  state. 

6.  From  this  period  Christianity  flourished  for  a  con- 


2.  What  of  Constantino  ?  "When  did  he  begin  to  reign  ?  Where  was  the  seat 
of  goveraraent  placed  by  Constantine?  What  was  the  former  name  of  Constanti- 
nople? 3.  What  of  the  religion  of  Christ?  The  first  Christians?  Persecutions? 
4.  What  did  Constantine  do?  5.  What  is  said  to  have  happened  to  Constantine? 
$.  What  of  Christian  ity  from  this  period  ? 


EUROPE.  '  289 

siderable  time.  The  mytliology  of  Greece  and  Rome, 
Avhicli  had  been  extended  throughout  the  Roman  em- 
pire, gave  way  before  it.  Many  of  the  temples  were 
converted  into  churches,  and  the  people  who  had  been 
accustomed  to  bow  down  before  the  statues  of  Jupiter 
and  other  imaginary  gods,  knelt  in  humiliation  at  the 
foot  of  the  cross. 

T.  In  the  year  364,  the  Roman  dominions  were 
divided  into  the  Eastern  and  Western  empires.  The 
capital  of  the  Eastern  empire  was  Constantinople. 
The  fate  of  this  city  will  be  briefly  related  in  the  his- 
tory of  the  Turks. 

8.  The  capital  of  the  Western  empire  was  Rome. 
But  this  imperial  city  was  no  longer  powerful  enough 
to  defend  itself  against  the  nations  which  it  had  for- 
merly conquered.  It  was  ravaged  by  hordes  of  bar- 
bariaits  from  the  north  of  Europe,  consisting  of  Huns, 
Goths,  Vandals,  &c. 

9.  Of  these  rude  tribes  I  shall  speak  more  partic- 
ularly hereafter.  It  is  sufficient  for  the  present  to  say 
that  they  were  bold  warriors,  and  chose  rather  to 
obtain  wealth  by  plundering  the  rich  inhabitants  of 


Tlie  mythology  of  Greece  and  Rome?  Temples?  7.  What  took  place  304  A.  C? 
What  was  the  capital  of  the  eastern  empire  of  Rome?  8.  The  western  empire  ? 
How  was  it  ravaged  and  laid  waste  ?    9.  What  of  the  northern  barbarians  ? 


290  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

Italy,  tlian  by  tlie  cultivation  of  their  own  more  sterile 
soil. 

10.  One  of  tlie  first  and  fiercest  of  these  northern 
invaders,  was  Alaric,  king  of  the  Goths,  who  led  a 
large  anny  against  Rome,  and  threatened  the  destruc- 
tion of  the  city.  The  inhabitants  were  very  different 
from  the  ancient  Komans,  and,  being  overawed  by  the 
daring  freebooter,  promised  him  large  sums  of  money. 
But  this  promise  not  being  fulfilled,  Alaric  took  the 
city  and  gave  it  up  to  plunder. 

11.  For  six  days  imperial  Rome  was  a  scene  of  pil- 
lage and  murder.  Thousands  of  citizens  were  slain, 
and  a  large  portion  of  the  place  was  reduced  to  ashes. 
This  occurred  in  the  year  410. 

12.  After  a  while,  Alaric  retired;  but  about  the 
year  455,  Attila,  leader  of  the  Huns,  threatened  to  fol- 
low the  example  which  Alaric  had  set.  But  in  the 
midst  of  his  projects  he  died;  and  Rome,  for  a  time, 
was  saved. 

13.  In  the  year  476,  the  whole  Western  empire,  Avith 
Rome  itself,  was  entirely  subjugated  by  Odoacer,  the 
leader  of  another  northern  tribe,  called  the  Heruli,  and 
it  remained  under  this  dominion  for  many  years. 


10.  What  of  Alaric?    11.  What  occurred  in  410?     12,  What  happened  about 
the  year  445  ?     13.  What  of  Odoacer  ? 


EUROPE.  ■  2D1 

14.  In  tlie  year  537,  tliese  barbarians  were  driven 
from  Rome.  Tbis  triumpb  was  effected  by  Belisarius, 
an  illustrious  commander  in  tbe  service  of  the  emperor 
of  tbe  East.  Tbe  Eastern  and  Western  empires  were 
tben  reunited,  but  only  for  k  sbort  period.  Italy,  as 
Well  as  Rome,  from  tbis  time  frequently  cbanged 
bands,  being  sometimes  under  tbe  sway  of  nortbern 
kings,  and  sometimes  under  tbe  Greek  emperors. 


CHAPTER   LXXXIY.— Europe   Continued. 
Progress  of  the  Decline  of  Home. 

1.  IiT  tbe  tentb  century,  tbe  emperor  of  Germany 
claimed  Italy  as  a  part  of  bis  dominions.  Several  cities 
resisted  bis  autbority.  Wben  tbe  emperor,  wbose 
name  was  Otbo,  beard  of  it,  be  invaded  Italy,  and 
went  to  Rome. 

2.  He  took  possession  of  tbe  palace,  and  prepared  a 
magnificent  feast.  All  tbe  great  men  of  Rome  were 
invited.     Tbe  emperor  sat  at  tbe  bead  of  tbe  table,  on 

14.  What  happened  in  531?    Who  was  Belisarius?     What  did  he  do?     Whut 
of  the  eastern  and  western  empires  ?    What  of  Italy  ?    Rome  ? 
Chapter  LXXXIV.— 1.  What  of  the  emperor  of  Germany? 


292  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

a  splendid  throne.  The  guests  seated  themselves,  ex- 
pecting to  be  feasted  with  luxuries. 

3.  But  before  they  had  eaten  a  mouthful,  Otho  made 
a  sign.  Immediately  the  hall  was  filled  with  armed 
men.  The  emperor  ordered  the  guests  neither  to  move 
nor  speak,  on  pain  of  death,  whatever  might  take  place. 
They  trembled,  and  wished  themselves  away  from  the 
banquet. 

4.  One  of  the  emperor's  officers  stood  up  and  read 
aloud  the  names  of  all  who  had  opposed  his  authority. 

•  These  unfortunate  men  had  been  invited  to  the  feast, 
and  were  now  sitting  at  the  table.  The  emperor  com- 
manded them  to  be  dragged  into  the  middle  of  the 
hall  and  put  to  death.  The  executioner  was  in  readi- 
ness with  a  broad  and  heavy  sword.  One  after  anoth- 
er the  heads  of  the  condemned  persons  rolled  upon  the 
floor  of  the  hall.  No  mercy  was  shown  to  any  of 
them. 

5.  When  this  dreadful  scene  was  over,  the  emperor 
turned  his  attention  to  the  banquet.  His  stern  and 
wrathful  aspect  became  mild  and  pleasing.      He  en- 

,deavored  to  make  the  other  guests  enjoy  themselves; 
but  probably  their  appetites  were  not  increased  by  the 
sight  of  dead  bodies,  on  the  bloody  floor.     This  is  a 

2-5.  Relate  the  story  of  his  banquet 


EUROPE.  2  OS- 

horrible  story,  and  I  only  tell  it  to  sliow  you  tlie  bar- 
barous and  cruel  character  of  the  men  of  those  times. 

6.  In  the  course  of  years,  Italy  was  divided  into 
several  separate  states,  or  sovereignties.  The  principal 
of  these  were  Naples,  Tuscany,  Parma,  Lombardy, 
Genoa,  and  Venice.  Rome,  with  other  territories,  was 
given  to  the  pope.  Of  these  I  shall  give  you  a  brief 
account ;  but  before  I  proceed  farther  with  the  history 
of  Kome,  I  will  tell  you  something  of  the  manners  and 
custoins  of  the  ancient  Romans. 

Y.  Let  me  remark,  however,  that  Rome  was  now 
totally  changed  from  what  it  was  in  the  days  of 
Augustus.  Not  only  was  the  empire  broken  in  pieces, 
but  the  proud  city  of  Rome  itself  had  lost  its  former 
glory. 

8.  The  number  of  its  inhabitants  had  greatly  dimin- 
ished; many  of  its  most  splendid  edifices  were  falling 
into  ruins,  and  the  people,  having  been  long  mixed 
with  barbarians,  had  lost  their  former  polish,  and  be- 
come partially  barbarous  themselves. 

9.  Even  the  language  of  Rome  and  of  all  Italy  grad- 
ually became  changed.  The  people  had  formerly 
Bpoken  the  Latin  language ;  but  this  became  mingled 
with  the  languages  of  the  northern  invaders,  and  thus 

6.  How  did  Italy  become  divided  ?    1.  "What  of  the  ehangres  in  Rome  ?    8.  What 
of  the  inhabitants,  edifices,  &c.?    9.  The  language  of  Rome? 


294  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

the  modern  Italian  was  gradually  formed.     SucH  were 
the  wonderful  clianges  in  Rome  and  Italy. 


CHAPTER    LXXXY.— Europe    Continued. 
Ma?i7iers  and  Customs  of  the  Ancie7it  Romans. 

1.  I  AM  now  going  to  give  you  an  account  of  tlie 
manners  and  customs  of  the  great  people  whose  history 
you  have  just  read.  I  shall  tell  you  about  their 
domestic  habits,  and  about  their  public  observances; 
about  their  state  of  society,  agriculture,  shows,  dresses, 
religion,  marriage  ceremonies,  funeral  rites,  military 
institutions,  and  public  edifices. 

2.  The  people  of  Rome,  as  you  know,  were  at  first 
divided  into  two  classes,  the  patricians  and  plebeians. 
It  was  to  the  struggles  for  power  between  these  ranks 
that  most  of  the  difiiculties  in  the  state  were  owing. 
To  these  ranks  a  third  was  afterward  added,  called 
equites,  or  knights ;  the  custom  of  making  slaves  of 
the  subjects  of  conquered  nations,  introduced  a  fourth 
division. 

3.  You  have  seen  that  the  government  of  Rome  was 

Chapter  LXXXV. — 2.  Into  what  four  ranks  or  classes  were  the  Roman  citizens 
divided? 


EUROPE.  295 

subject  to  very  numerous  changes.  At  one  time  it  was 
under  a  king,  at  others  under  consuls,  dictators,  em- 
perors, etc.  The  other  officers  of  the  state  were  nu- 
merous, and  invested  with  very  different  degrees  of 
power. 

4.  The  ministers  of  religion  among  the  Komans  did 
not  form  a  distinct  order  of  citizens,  but  were  chosen 
from  the  most  virtuous  and  honorable  men  of  the  state. 
These  attended  to  the  sacrifices  of  beasts  to  the  gods, 
and  other  religious  rites.  The  superstitions  of  the 
times  gave  rise  to  the  establishment  of  a  college  of 
augurs,  whose  business  it  was  to  explain  dreams,  ora- 
cles, and  prodigies,  and  to  foretell  future  events. 

5.  They  drew  their  auguries  or  presages  concerning 
futurity  from  the  ap]3earance  of  the  heavens,  and  an  in- 
spection of  the  entrails  of  birds  and  beasts.  Of  course 
they  could  no  more  divine  the  future,  than  the  old 
women  you  may  sometimes  meet  with  in  our  villages, 
who  pretend  to  "  tell  your  fortune,"  by  examining  the 
grounds  of  coffee  cups. 

6.  The  augurs  at  Rome  interpreted  the  will  of  the 
gods  in  regard  to  making  war  and  peace,  and  none 
dared  to  dispute  their  authority.  No  business  of  im- 
portance could  be  proceeded  in,  without  first  consult- 

3.  What  of  the  government?     Officers  of  state?    4.  Ministers  of  religion  ?    Su- 
perstitions ?     5.  How  did  the  augurs  proceed  ?     6.  The  authority  of  the  augurs  ? 


296  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

ing  them ;  and  their  advice,  whatever  it  might  be,  was, 
by  a  decree  of  the  senate,  to  be  strictly  observed. 

7.  The  oifice  of  an  augur  was  important  and  honor- 
able, and  was  sought  after  by  many  of  the  principal 
persons  in  the  Roman  senate.  Cato,  the  censor,  was  a 
member  of  their  college,  and  Cicero  also;  though  they 
both  appear  to  have  been  fully  sensible  of  the  extrav- 
agance and  folly  of  the  art  they  practised.  A  remark 
is  attributed  to  Cato,  that  he  wondered  how  one  augui* 
could  look  in  the  face  of  another  without  laughing. 


CHAPTER   LXXXYI.— Europe   Continued. 
About  Religion. — Deities. — Temjples. — Marriages. 
1.  The  reliofion  of  the  Romans  was  bon*owed  from 


'c 


the  Greeks,  and  included  the  worship  of  Jupiter,  and 
a  multitude  of  other  deities.  Every  virtue  and  vice  of 
the  human  heart,  every  faculty  of  the  mind  and  body, 
every  property  of  the  real  and  imaginary  world,  was 
presided  over  by  its  peculiar  god.  Every  grove,  and 
mountain,  and  stream  had  its  nymph  or  naiad,  and 


7.  The  office  of  an  augur  ?     Cato  and  Cicero  ?     Remark  of  Cato? 
CuAPTER  LXXXVL— 1.  What  of  reUgion?    Gods,  nymphs,  &c.  ? 


EUROPE,  297 

every  liero  and  sage  of  tlie  country  was  elevated  to  tlie 
rank  of  a  divinity. 

2.  Every  religions  sect  was  tolerated  at  Rome  except 
tlie  Jews  and  the  Cliristians.  These  were  persecuted 
with  unrelenting  cruelty,  until  the  mild  precepts  of 
the  true  religion  triumphed  over  superstition  and  igno- 
rance. Christianity  at  length  prevailed  over  conflict- 
ing opinions,  and  was  adopted  as  the  rehgion  of  the 
state,  A.  D.  311. 

3.  The  number  of  deities  whom  the  Komans  wor- 
shipped, occasioned  the  erection  of  a  great  multitude 
of  temples.  Many  of  these  were  very  splendid  edi- 
fices, adorned  with  all  the  arts  of .  sculpture,  and  filled 
with  offerings  and  sacrifices.  The  priests  attended  at 
the  temples,  and  sacrificed  sheep,  bulls,  oxen,  and  other 
animals. 

4.  Marriage  was  very  much  favored  by  the  laws  of 
Rome,  and  severe  penalties  were  inflicted  on  those  who 
remained  single.  At  one  period,  the  censors  obliged 
all  the  young  bachelors  to  make  oath  that  they  would 
marry  within  a  certain  time.  Augustus  increased  the 
penalties  on  bachelors,  and  bestowed  rewards  on  those 
who  were  parents  of  a  numerous  offspring. 

5.  The  parties  were  betrothed  some  time  before  the 

2.  Toleration ?    Christianity?     3.  What  is  said  of  the  Roman  deities?    4.  Mar- 
riao-e?    Penalties? 


298  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

actual  celebration  of  tlie  marriage.  This  latter  was 
attended  witli  many  ceremonies,  at  wMch.  the  priests 
and  augurs  assisted.  The  contract  of  marriage  was 
drawn  up  in  the  presence  of  witnesses,  and  conibmed 
by  the  breaking  of  a  straw  between  the  engaged  pair. 

6.  The  bridegroom  then  presented  his  bride  with 
the  wedding  ring,  and  the  father  of  the  bride  gave  a 
great  entertainment.  The  wedding  ring  was  worn  on 
the  third  finger  of  the  left  hand,  from  a  notion  that 
a  nerve  of  that  finger  communicated  directly  with  the 
heart. 

7.  In  dressing  the  bride,  they  never  failed  to  divide 
her  locks  with  the  point  of  a  spear,  to  signify  that  she 
was  about  to  become  the  wife  of  a  warrior.  They 
then  crowned  her  with  a  chaplet  of  liowers,  and  put  on 
her  a  veil  proper  for  the  occasion. 

8.  Her  toilet  being  completed,  she  was  led  in  the 
evening  toward  the  bridegroom's  house,  by  three 
boys,  whose  parents  were  still  alive.  Five  torches 
were  carried  before  her,  and  also  a  distaff  and  spindle. 
Having  come  to  the  door,  she  herself  bound  the  posts 
with  wreaths  of  wool  washed  over  with  melted  tallow, 
to  keep  out  witchcraft. 

9.  In  going  into  the  house,  she  was  by  no  means  to 
touch  the  threshold,  but  was  to  be  lifted  over  by  main 

5-10.  Describe  the  marriage  ceremonies. 


EUROPE.  299 

strength.  When  she  had  entered,  the  bridegroom  pre- 
sented her  with  the  keys,  and  with  two  vessels,  con- 
taining fire  and  water. 

10.  The  bridegroom  then  gave  a  grand  snpper  to  all 
the  company.  The  festival  was  accompanied  with 
music  and  dancing,  and  the  guests  sang  verses  in  praise 
of  the  new-married  couple. 


CHAPTER    LXXXYIL— Europe    Continued. 
About  Funeral  Rites  and  Ceremonies. 

1.  The  funeral  rites  of  the  Eomans  present  a  very 
interesting  subject.  Burning  the  dead,  though  prac- 
tised by  the  Greeks  from  very  early  times,  was  not  adopt- 
ed  in  Rome  till  the  later  ages  of  the  republic.  It  after- 
ward became  universal,  and  was  continued  without  in- 
terruption till  the  introduction  of  Christianity.  It 
then  gradually  fell  into  disuse. 

2.  Among  the  Romans,  the  bed  of  the  sick  was 
never  abandoned  to  hired  nurses  and  servants.  It  was 
attended  by  the  relatives  and  intimates,  who  waited 


Chapter  LXXXVIL— 1.  What  is  said  of  burning  the  dead?     2.  The  bed  of  the 

dying? 


300 


UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


till  the  last  liour,  and  bade  a  last  farewell  to  tlieir  dy 
ing  friend. 

3.  The  body  of  the  dead  was  bathed  in  perfumes, 
dressed  in  rich  garments,  and  laid  out  on  a  couch 
strewed  with  flowers.  The  outer  door  of  the  house 
was  shaded  with  branches  of  cypress.  According  to 
the  heathen  mythology,  Charon  would  not  convey  the 
departed  spirit  across  the  Styx,  without  payment  of  a 
fixed  toll.  -  A  small  coin  was  therefore  placed  in  the 
mouth  of  the  deceased  to  meet  this  demand. 


MERCURY   CONDUCTI^TG  THE  SPIRITS    OF  THE   DEAD   TO   CHARON. 


4.  The  funeral  took  place  by  torclilight.  Tlie  body 
was  borne  by  near  friends  and  relatives,  on  an  open 
]>ier  covered  Avith  the  richest  cloth.     Lictors  dressed  in 

3.  The  body  of  the  dead?    What  was  the  behef  in  regard  to  Charon?    4.  The 

funeral? 


EUROPE.  301 

black  regulated  the  procession.  If  the  deceased  had 
been  a  soldier,  the  badges  of  his  rank  were  displayed, 
and  the  corps  to  which  he  belonged  marched  with  their 
arms  reversed. 

5.  Before  the  corpse  were  carried  images  of  the 
deceased  and  his  ancestors.  Then  followed  musicians 
and  mourning  women,  who  were  hired  to  sing  his 
praises,  and  dancers  and  buffoons,  one  of  whom  at- 
tempted to  represent  the  character  of  the  dead  man, 
and  imitate  his  manner  when  alive. 

6.  The  family  of  the  deceased  followed  the  bier  in 
deep  mourning,  the  sons  with  their  heads  covered,  the 
daughters  unveiled  and  with  their  hair  dishevelled. 
Magistrates  and  patricians  attended  without  their 
badges  or  ornaments,  and  the  procession  was  closed  by 
the  freed  men  of  the  deceased,  with  the  cap  of  liberty 
on  their  heads. 

7.  The  funeral  ceremonies  of  a  man  of  rank  were 
distinguished  by  an  oration  in  his  honor,  pronounced 
over  the  body  by  a  friend.  The  scene  of  this  display 
was  the  capitol,  and  in  the  later  ages  of  the  republic 
it  became  very  common.  While  the  practice  of  burial 
prevailed,  the  body  was  either  interred  without  a  coffin, 
or  placed  in  a  kind  of  deep  chest  called  a  sarcophagus. 

5,  6.  The  procession?      T.  "What  of  an  oration?      Where  was  this  delivered? 


302  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

8.  On  tlie  termination  of  tlie  rites,  the  sepulcLre 
was  strewed  witli  flowers,  and  the  mourners  took  a 
farewell  of  the  remains  of  their  friend.  The  attend- 
ants were  then  sprinkled  with  water  hj  the  priests,  and 
all  were  dismissed. 

9.  When  the  custom  of  burning  the  body  was  intro^ 
duced,  a  funeral  pile  was  raised  in  the  form  of  an  altar, 
and  the  bier  was  placed  upon  it.  The  procession  then 
moved  slowly  around,  to  the  sound  of  solemn  music, 
when  the  nearest  relative  advanced  from  the  train  with 
a  lighted  torch,  and  set  fire  to  the  pile. 

10.  Perfumes  and  spices  were  then  thrown  into  the 
blaze,  and  the  embers  were  quenched  with  wine.  The 
ashes  were  collected  and  placed  in  a  costly  urn,  which 
was  deposited  in  the  family  sepulchre.  In  the  funeral 
solemnities  of  a  soldier,  his  arms,  and  the  spoils  he  had 
won  from  the  enemy,  were  sometimes  added  to  the 
funeral  pile. 

11.  It  was  a  horrid  belief  of  the  heathen  nations 
that  the  spirits  of  the  dead  were  pleased  with  blood. 
It  was  their  custom  to  sacrifice  on  the  tomb  of  the  de- 
ceased, those  animals  to  which  he  was  most  attached 
during  his  life.     In  the  more  remote  and  barbarous 


8.  Conclusion  of  the  ceremonies?     0,  10.  "What  of  tlio  ceremony  of  burning  the 
body?     11,  What  of  sacrifices? 


EUEOPE.  303 

ages,  men  were  often  tlie  victims ;  so  also  were  domes- 
tic slaves  and  captives  taken  in  war;  and  sometimes 
friends  gave  themselves  to  be  sacrificed  from  feelings 
of  affection. 

12.  1^0  burial  was  allowed  witlain  tbe  walls  of  tLe 
city,  except  to  the  vestal  virgins,  and  some  families  of 
higli  distinction.  The  tombs  of  military  men  were 
usually  raised  in  the  field  of  Mars,  and  those  of  pri- 
vate citizens  in  the  gardens  of  their  villas,  or  by  the 
side  of  the  public  roads. 

13.  Many  of  these  monuments  are  still  standing. 
The  sepulchres  of  the  great  and  wealthy  are  engraven 
with  long  and  pompous  lists  of  their  titles,  honors,  and 
achievements.  The  tombs  of  the  humble  bear  but  a 
simple  lesson  to  the  reader,  and  some  beautiful  and 
touching  expressions  of  sorrow  or  hope  for  the  de- 
parted. 

14.  How  much  more  affecting  and  impressive  are  the 
simple  rites  of  Christian  burial,  than  the  pomp  and 
splendor  of  the  E-oman  ;  there  is  nothing  that  speaks 
more  strongly  to  the  heart  than  a  funeral  ceremony 
in  a  New  England  village. 

15.  Every  thing  is  so  still,  and  simple,  and  unaffec- 
ted, that  the  mind  rests  only  on  the  solemnity  of  death, 

12.  What  is  said  of  the  burial  places  ?    13.  Monuments  ?    14^16.  Describe  the  rites 
of  Christian  burial 

14 


304  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

witliout  being  distracted  by  display  and  splendor. 
Prayers  are  said  at  tbe  bouse  of  tbe  deceased,  tbe 
friends  and  relatives  follow  tbe  body  in  silent  proces- 
sion, and  enter  witb  it  into  tbe  unadorned  grave-yard, 
wbere  tbe  generations  of  tbe  family  are  sleeping. 

16.  Tbe  body  is  consigned  to  tbe  eartb  wbence  it 
came,  dust  to  dust.  Prayers  are  again  said,  and  tbe 
mourners  are  dismissed  to  tlieir  sad  bomes,  cbeered, 
bowever,  witb  tbe  blessed  consolations  wbicb  tbeir  re- 
ligion promises. 


CHAPTEE  LXXXYIII.— Europe  Continued. 

Homan  Farms. — Mode  of  Ploughing. — FarTn-lwuses, — Grain, 
— Cattle. — Superstitions  of  the  Farmer's. —  Vines.-  -('ountnj 
Houses. — Aqueducts. 

1.  I  AM  now  going  to  tell  you  about  tbe  fu'ms  and 
gardens  of  tbe  Romans.  In  tbe  early  and  more  vir- 
tuous ages  of  tbe  state,  tbe  cultivation  of  tbe  fields, 
and  a  few  rude  trades  connected  mtb  it,  were  tbe  only 
occupations. 

2.  Tbe  man  most  valued  and  bonored  was  tbe  best 


Chapter  LXXXVIII. — 1 ,  2.  What  were  the  early  occupations  of  the  Romans  ? 


EUROPE.  305 

liiisbandman ;  and  many  of  tlie  most  ancient  families 
received  tlieir  names  from  their  success  in  tlie  cultiva- 
tion of  plants  or  tlie  rearing  of  cattle. 

3.  It  is  probable  that  at  this  period  the  ground  was 
broken  up  only  by  the  spade.  Afterward,  when  the 
farms  were  enlarged,  more  expeditious  means  were  dis- 
covered. Some  of  the  Roman  modes  of  ploughing  are 
still  in  use.  They  always  ploughed  with  oxen,  a  single 
pair,  or  sometimes  three  abreast,  yoked  by  the  neck 
and  horns. 

4.  The  farm-houses  were  at  first  little  huts,  but  they 
were  soon  enlarged  to  suit  the  increasing  possessions 
of  the  owners.  We  read,  at  a  later  period,  of  large 
store-houses  and  granaries,  cellars  for  wine  and  oil, 
barns,  together  with  separate  buildings  for  the  care  and 
rearing  of  every  species  of  domestic  animal. 

5.  The  kinds  of  grain  in  common  cultivation  were 
the  same  as  those  now  known  in  Europe,  with  the 
exception  of  maize,  or  Indian  corn,  which  was  first 
found  in  this  country.  The  ancient  mode  of  converting 
grain  into  meal  was  by  pounding  it  with  an  instrument 
something  like  the  pestle  and  mortar.  Mills  moved 
by  cattle,  and  by  water,  are  later  inventions. 

6.  Much  care  was  paid  by  the  Romans  to  the  rear- 

3.  What  is  said  of  th^r  mode  of  ploughing?     4.  Their  farm-houses?    Other 
buildings  ?     5.  What  kinds  of  grain  were  cultivated  ? 


306  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

mg  of  cattle.  Slieep  were  secured  under  cover  during 
tlie  winter,  notwithstanding  tlie  mildness  of  the  Italian 
climate.  Shearing-time  was  a  season  of  general  fes- 
tivity. 

T.  Goats  were  made  as  profitable  to  the  farmer  as 
sheep.  Their  hair  was  clipped  every  year,  and  woven 
into  a  kind  of  coarse  stuff,  and  their  milk  was  the  chief 
supply  of  the  dairy. 

8.  Tne  Roman  farmers  were  very  superstitious. 
They  refrained  from  all  labor  on  the  fifth  day  of  the 
new  moon;  on  the  seventh  and  tenth  they  planted 
vines,  and  harnessed  young  oxen  to  the  yoke ;  on  the 
ninth  they  commenced  a  journey. 

9.  The  skeleton  of  an  ass's  head  was  hung  up  at 
the  boundary  of  the  farm,  to  enrich  the  soil,  and  drive 
away  the  effects  of  blight.  The  same  figure,  carved  in 
brass,  and  crowned  with  vines,  was  affixed  as  an  orna- 
ment to  their  couches. 

10.  It  is  supposed  that  the  Romans  obtained  a 
knowledge  of  the  cultivation  of  the  grape,  and  of  the 
art  of  making  wine,  from  Greece.  They  took  great 
care  of  their  vineyards,  and  labored  in  cultivating  the 
plants,  with  much  art  and  industry. 


6,  7.  What  is  said  of  cattle?     8,9.  What  of  the  superstitions  of  the  farmers? 
1 0,   What  is  said  of  the  grape  ? 


EUROPE.  307 

11.  The  mode  of  gathering  and  pressing  tlie  grape 
was  the  same  that  is  now  practised.  The  vintage  was 
a  time  of  festival,  and  the  rustics  made  merry  with  the 
performance  of  a  rude  kind  of  comedy,  and  pouring 
out  libations  of  new  wine  to  Jupiter  and  Venus. 

12.  The  wine  appears  to  have  differed  from  that  of 
modern  times;  it  was  kept  in  jars  formed  like  urns, 
some  of  which  are  said  to  have  been  so  large  as  to 
have  made,  when  filled,  a  load  for  a  yoke  of  oxen. 
They  were  commonly  ranged  in  cellars,  but  were  some- 
time^ buried  in  the  earth,  or  even  bedded  in  solid  ma- 
sonry. 

13.  Koman  villas,  or  country  seats,  were  originally 
nothing  more  than  very  humble  farm-houses ;  but  with 
the  progress  of  wealth  and  luxury,  they  were  made  by 
degrees  more  extensive  and  costly. 

14.  Some  of  them  were  surrounded  with  large  parks, 
in  which  deer  and  various  foreign  wild  animals  were 
kept.  Large  fish-ponds  were  also  not  unfrequently  at- 
tached to  them,  and  were  stocked  at  great  expense, 
Generally,  however,  the  villas  were  merely  surrounded 
by  gardens,  and  in  size  and  appearance  resembled 
those  of  modem  Italy. 

15.  It  was  not  till  the  year  441  after  its  foundation 

11.  Wine?     The  vintage?      12.  Wine  jars?     Where  were  they  kept?     13. 
What  of  the  Roman  villas  ?     14.  Parks?    Fish-ponds? 


308  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

tliat  Eome  obtained  its  supplies  of  water  by  means  of 
aqueducts.  They  afterward  became  so  numerous  that 
it  has  been  calculated  they  furnished  the  city  about 
five  hundred  thousand  hogsheads  every  day.  They 
were  built  of  brick,  and  were  sometimes  thii-ty,  forty, 
or  even  sixty  miles  in  length. 

16.  The  water  was  conveyed  to  reservoirs,  and  thence 
distributed  through  metal  pipes  over  the  town  in  great 
abundance.  Only  three  aqueducts  now  remain  for 
modern  Rome ;  yet  so  pure  are  the  sources  from  which 
they  draw  their  supplies,  that  few  cities  can  boast  of 
such  clear  and  healthful  water. 

17.  Great  attention  was  paid  to  ornament  in  the 
erection  of  the  aqueducts.  One  built  by  Agrippa, 
when  Edile  under  Augustus,  contained  one  hundred 
and  thirty  reservoirs,  and  ^ve  hundred  fountains, 
adorned  mth  statues  and  columns.  Remains  of  many 
of  these  great  works  at  this  day  bear  witness  to  their 
beauty  and  convenience. 

15.  Aqueducts?  Their  length?  Quantity  of  water  carried  daily  to  the  city? 
16.  Reservoirs  ?     17.  What  of  an  aqueduct  built  by  Agrippa  ? 


EUROPE.  309 


CHAPTER  LXXXIX.— Europe  Continued. 

Military  Affairs  of  the  Romans. — Division  of  the  Army. — 
The  Imperial  Ea^le. — Music. — Arms. — Dress. — Military 
Rewards. — Crowns. — The  Triumph. 

1.  You  know  tliat  tlie  Romans  were  almost  con- 
tinually engaged  in  wars.  Their  military  affairs,  there- 
fore, occupied  the  attention  of  the  most  distinguished 
citizens.  According  to  the  Roman  laws,  every  free- 
born  citizen  was  a  soldier,  and  bound  to  serve  in  the 
army  at  any  period  from  the  age  of  seventeen  to  that 
of  forty-six. 

2.  The  Roman  forces  were  divided  into  legions,  each 
of  which  consisted  of  three  thousand  foot  soldiers  and 
three  hundred  horsemen.  The  standard  of  the  legion 
was  the  imperial  eagle. 

3.  This  was  made  of  gilt  metal,  was  borne  on  a 
spear  by  an  officer  of  rank,  and  was  regarded  by  the 
soldiers  with  a  reverence  which  approached  to  devo- 
tion. The  cavalry  carried  pennons,  on  which  the 
initials  of  the  emperor  or  of  the  legion  were  embroi- 
dered in  letters  of  gold. 

4.  The  only  instrument  of  martial  music  among  the 

Chapter  LXXXIX. — 1.  What  is  said  of  military  affairs  ?     2.  Division  cf  the 
array?     3.  Tlie  standard?     Pennons? 


810 


UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


Romans,  was  tlie  brazen  trumpet.  Some  of  tlie  soL 
diers  were  armed  with  light  javelins,  and  others  with 
a  heavier  weapon  of  a  similar  description.  All,  how- 
ever, carried  shields  and  short  swords,  which  they  wore 
on  the  right  side. 


ROMAN   CAVALRY. 


5.  They  were  dressed  in  a  metal  cuirass,  with  an 
under  covering  of  cloth,  which  was  generally  red,  and 
hung  loose  to  the  knee.    On  the  head  they  wore  brazen 


4.  Instruments  of  martial  music?     Weapons?     5.  Dress  of  the  soldiers? 


EUROPE.  '  311 

jbelmets,  often  ornamented  with  flowing  tufts  of  liorse- 
liair.  The  uniform  of  the  generals  was  an  open  scarlet 
mantle. 

6.  The  cavalry  wore  a  coat  of  mail,  of  brazen  or 
steel  scales,  or  of  chain- work,  sometimes  plated  with 
gold.  Under  this  they  wore  a  close  garment  which 
reached  to  their  buskins.  They  rode  without  stirrups, 
and  their  saddles  were  merely  cloths  folded  to  suit  the 
convenience  of  the  rider.  The  discipline  of  the  army 
was  maintained  with  great  strictness  and  severity. 

7.  Rewards  of  various  kinds  were  held  out  to  those 
who  distinguished  themselves  by  an  extraordinary  ex- 
ploit. A  particular  kind  of  crown  was  presented  to 
him  who,  in  the  assault,  first  scaled  the  ramparts  of  a 
town. 

8.  A  soldier  who  saved  his  comrade's  life  in  battle 
was  entitled  to  the  civic  crown,  which  was  thought  a 
distinction  of  the  highest  honor.  The  general  who 
conquered  in  a  battle  was  decorated  with  the  laurel 
leaf. 

9.  But  the  highest  ambition  of  every  Roman  com- 
mander was  to  obtain  a  triumph.  This  was  the  gift 
of  the  senate,  and  was  only  granted  on  occasions  of 
splendid  victoiy.     When  decreed,  the  general  returned 


I 


Of  generals?     6.  Dress  of  the  cavalry?     T,  8.  Rewards  of  the  army?     Crowns? 


312  UNIYERSAL  HISTORY. 

to  E,ome,  and  was  appointed  to  the  supreme  command 
of  the  city  on  the  day  of  his  entry. 

10.  A  sculptured  arch  was  erected,  under  which  the 
procession  was  to  pass,  and  scaffoldings  were  raised 
for  spectators  in  all  the  public  squares  and  streets. 
The  procession  moved  at  daylight  from  beyond  the 
walls  of  the  city. 

11.  A  band  of  cavalry,  with  military  music,  took 
the  lead.  They  were  followed  by  a  train  of  priests,  in 
their  sacred  robes,  with  attendants  leading  to  sacrifice 
a  hecatomb  or  hundred  of  the  whitest  oxen.  Next 
came  chariots  laden  with  spoils,  the  arms  and  standards 
of  the  conquered,  followed  by  long  trains  of  the  cap 
tives,  conducted  by  lictors. 

12.  Loud  notes  on  the  trumpet  then  announced  the 
approach  of  the  victor,  dressed  in  a  robe  of  purple,  j 
crowned  with  laurels,  and  bearing  a  sceptre  of  ivory.  ' 
He  rode  in  a  splendid  car,  drawn  by  four  horses,  preceded  \ 
by  the  E-oman  eagle,  guarded  by  a  troop  of  cavalry. 

13.  The  most  distinguished  officers  of  the  army,  in 
their  richest  dress  and  trappings,  surrounded  him ;  a 
band  of  children  clothed  in  white  followed,  flinging 
clouds  of  perfume  and  flowers  on  the  air,  and  singing 
hymns  of  praise  to  the  conqueror. 

9-14.  Describe  the  triumph  of  a  victorious  general 


EUROPE.  318 

14.  Last  of  all,  came  tlie  victorious  army,  their 
weapons  wreathed  with  laurel,  and  their  burnished 
armor  gleaming  in  the  sunshine.  Countless  multitudes 
of  the  citizens  lined  the  streets,  and  every  window  and 
every  scaffolding  shone  with  beauty.  The  procession 
was  greeted  on  all  sides  by  loud  acclamations,  joy  and 
revelry  reigned  in  the  city,  and  a  scene  was  displayed 
of  a  magnificence  and  gorgeousness  not  to  be  paralleled 
in  modern  times. 


314 


UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


ROMAN    GALLEY. 


CHAPTEE  XC— EuKOPE  CoxXtinued. 

About  Naval  Affairs.  —  The    War    Galley.  —  Commerce,  - 
Shows  of  Wild  Beasts. — Exhibitions  of  Gladiators. 

1.  The  first  vessel  of  the  Roman  navy  is  said  to  have 
"been  built  after  the  model  of  a  Carthaginian  galley^ 
taken  in  war.  Their  ships  were  roughly  and  slightly 
constructed,  and,  though  very  large,  unfit  to  contend 
with  boisterous  and  tempestuous  weather. 

2.  They  were  clumsy  and  ill-fashioned,  with  a  high 
stern  and  sides,  and  rowed  with  two  or  three  tiers  of 


Chapter  XC. — 1.  What  of  the  first  war  vessel  of  the  Roman  navy? 


EUROPE.  315 

oars  on  different  decks.  The  prows  of  tlie  sliip  were 
armed  with  iron,  usually  carved  into  the  shape  of  some 
animal's  head ;  the  upper  deck  was  surmounted  with 
a  movable  turret,  from  which  the  soldiers  could  throw 
their  weapons  with  advantage.  The  smaller  vessels 
had  but  one  tier  of  oai's,  and  were  mthout  turrets. 

3.  The  merchant  ships  of  the  Komans  were  of  a  size 
corresponding  with  the  purposes  for  which  they  were 
intended.  Before  the  discovery  of  the  magnet,  by 
which  the  mariner  can  now  direct  liis  course  in  safety 
over  the  pathless  waves,  navigation  was  necessarily 
confined  to  the  coast.  These  coasting  vessels  w^ere  con- 
sidered large  if  they  reached  the  burden  of  fifty  tons. 

4.  Rome  was  long  supplied  with  the  products  of  the 
East  by  the  merchants  of  the  maritime  states  of  the 
Mediterranean.  It  w^as  not  till  the  conquest  of  Egypt 
by  Augustus,  that  the  trade  became  exclusively  her 
own.     Of  this  commerce  Alexandria  was  the  centre. 

5.  The  principal  expoi'ts  into  Italy  from  India  con- 
sisted of  drugs  and  spices ;  of  cotton  cloths  and  mus- 
lins, from  the  coasts  of  Coromandel  and  Malabar ;  of 
silk  from  China,  and  of  large  quantities  of  diamonds 
and  pearls  from  Bengal,  and  the  pearl-fisheries  near 

2.  Describe  the  war  galley.  3.  What  is  said  of  the  Roman  merchant  ships? 
Navigation  ?  Coasting  vessels  ?  4.  How  was  Rome  supplied  with  the  products 
of  the  East?     5.  What  were  the  principal  imports  into  Italy? 


316  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

Cape  Comorin.  From  Persia  and  Arabia  they  procured 
the  richest  carpets,  silks,  and  embroidered  stuffs,  to- 
gether with  rice  and  sugar. 

6.  The  first  amphitheatre  erected  in  Kome,  for  the 
shows  of  wild  beasts  and  gladiators,  was  a  mere  tem- 
porary building  of  wood,  probably  erected  by  Julius 
Caesar.  The  Flavian  amphitheatre,  better  known  by 
the  name  of  Coliseum,  was  commenced  in  the  reign  of 
Vespasian,  and  is  supposed  to  have  been  large  enough 
to  contain  upward  of  eighty  thousand  persons. 

7.  The  wild  beasts  were  secured  in  dens  round  the 
arena,  which  were  strongly  fenced,  and  surrounded  by 
a  canal,  to  guard  the  spectators  against  their  attacks. 
A  vast  number  of  wild  beasts  were  made  to  destroy 
each  other  in  these  very  cruel  exhibitions. 

8.  Eleven  thousand  are  said  to  have  been  slain 
during  four  months  of  triumph  in  honor  of  a  conquest 
over  the  Dacians;  and  ^ve  hundred  lions  were  killed 
in  a  few  days  on  another  similar  occasion. 

9.  The  first  public  combats  of  gladiators  took  place 
at  E-ome  in  the  close  of  the  fifth  century  from  the 
foundation  of  the  city.  They  were  exhibited  at  a 
funeral.  From  that  period,  they  became  common  on 
such  occasions,  and  afterward,  on  days  of  public  fes- 

6.  What  is  said  of  the  first  amphitheatre  ?     7,  8,  Destruction  of  wild  beasts  ? 
0.  10.  Gladiatorial  combats? 


EUROPE.  81'7 

tival,  were  considered    a    material  part  of  the  cere- 
monies. 

10.  Five  hundred  pairs  of  these  wretched  beings 
have  frequently  been  led  to  the  public  games  to  sacri- 
fice each  other  for  the  amusement  of  barbarous  spec- 
tators. They  were  at  first  taken  from  captives  in  war, 
or  malefactors;  afterward  from  slaves  trained  to  the 
profession. 

11.  They  fought  with  various  weapons,  some  in  com- 
plete armor,  others  with  only  a  trident  and  a  net,  in 
which  they  endeavored  to  entangle  their  adversary  and 
thus  slay  him. 

12.  It  is  needless  to  give  a  minute  account  of  these 
inhuman  customs.  They  were  conducted  in  the  most 
bloody  and  savage  spirit,  and  are  sufficient  proofs  of 
the  degraded  and  brutalized  condition  of  the  period 
in  which  they  were  tolerated. 

m  ■  ..         . 

11.  The  weapons  of  the  gladiators?     12.  What  is  said  of  these  contests? 


318  UNIYERSAL  HISTORY. 


CHAPTER   XCI.— Europe  Continued. 

Sports. — Chariot  racing — The  Circles. — Carriages. — Private 
Entertainments. —  Supper  Rooms. —  Convivial  Parties. — 
Luxuries. — Clochs.- — Fine  Arts. — Books. — Costume. 

1.  I  WILL  now  change  the  picture,  and  give  you  an 
account  of  some  of  the  less  barbarous  amusements  of 
the  Romans.  The  young  men  chiefly  engaged  in  sports 
in  the  open  air,  that  would  make  them  more  active  and 
vigorous.  Boxing,  wi*estling,  and  throwing  the  quoit, 
formed  a  prominent  part  of  these  amusements ;  but 
chariot  driving  took  the  lead  of  all  others. 

2.  For  the  better  enjoyment  of  horse  and  chariot 
races,  there  was  an  enclosed  course  immediately  adjoin- 
ing the  city,  called  the  circus.  It  was  rather  more 
than  a  mile  in  circumference,  and  was  surrounded 
with  seats  and  three  tiers  of  galleries. 

3.  In  the  centre  was  a  barrier,  twelve  feet  in  breadth 
and  four  feet  high,  around  which  the  race  was  per- 
formed ;  and  at  one  end  was  a  triumphal  arch,  through 
which  the  successful  charioteer  drove,  followed  by  the 
shouts  and  applause  of  the  assembly. 

4.  Four  chariots  usually  started  together,  the  drivei^ 

Chapteii  XCI. — 1.  What  of  the  games  of  the  Roman  youths?     2,  3  The  w  <3U*»7 


EUROPE.  819 

of  wliicli  were  distinguislied  by  dresses  of  different 
colors.  Each  color  liad  its  particular  partisans,  wlio 
wagered  largely  on  tlie  success  of  tlieir  favorite.  These 
sports  were  exceedingly  popular,  and  repeated  in  end- 
less succession. 

5.  Of  the  form  of  carriages  in  use  among  the  Romans, 
we  have  no  precise  description.  They  were  of  various 
kinds,  open  and  covered,  chairs  and  couches,  borne  on 
poles  by  slaves  in  livery.  The  couch  was  famished 
with  pillows  and  a  mattress,  and  with  feet  of  silver  or 
gold  to  support  it  when  set  down. 

6.  There  were  also  close  litters,  drawn  by  mules,  and 
carriages  on  two  and  four  wheels,  painted  of  various 
colors,  and  highly  ornamented.  The  horses  were 
yoked  to  the  carriage  by  means  of  a  curved  cross-bar 
passing  over  their  necks,  and  were  directed  by  bridles 
and  reins,  which  were  sometimes  of  embroidered  silk, 
with  gold  bits. 

7.  Besides  mules  and  horses,  many  other  animals 
were  occasionally  used  in  carriages,  such  as  dogs,  goats, 
and  deer,  and  even  bears,  leopards,  lions,  and  tigers. 
But  this,  of  course,  was  merely  for  a  whimsical  amuse- 
ment, and  not  for  real  service. 

4.  The  chariots  ?  Their  drivers  ?  5.  What  is  said  of  the  form  of  the  Roman 
carriages?  6.  Litters?  How  were  tlie  horses  harnessed aud  managed?  1.  What 
other  animals  were  sometimes  used  ? 


320  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

8.  When  the  Romans  were  pure  and  simple,  tliey 
lived  chiefly  on  milk  and  vegetables,  with  a  coarse 
kind  of  pudding  made  of  flour  and  water.  But  as  they 
began  to  grow  powerful,  and  to  conquer  the  neighbor- 
ing nations,  they  became  acquainted  with  the  luxuries 
of  the  people  they  subdued,  and  introduced  them  into 
their  own  state. 

9.  The  supper  rooms  of  some  of  the  emperors  were 
hung  with  cloths  of  gold  and  silver,  enriched  with 
jewels.  Tables  were  made  for  them  of  fine  gold,  and 
couches  with  frames  of  massive  silver.  The  Romans 
always  reclined  on  couches  to  take  their  meals. 

10.  At  great  entertainments  the  supper  room  was 
hung  with  flowers,  and  the  guests  were  crowned  with 
garlands.  The  floor  was  generally  bare,  though  richly 
ornamented,  and  the  ceiling  was  inlaid  with  a  fretwork 
of  gold  and  ivory.  Scented  oil  was  used  for  lighting 
the  apartments,  and  massive  carved  lamps  of  figured 
bronze  reflected  their  brilliancy  on  the  gay  and  beau- 
tifal  scene. 

11.  Some  of  the  more  voluptuous  and  degraded  of 
the  Roman  emperors,  in  the  decay  of  the  republic, 
were  most  extravagant   and  ridiculous   in  providing 

8.  What  of  the  early  living  of  the  Romans  ?  The  introduction  of  luxuries  ? 
9.  Supper  rooms?  10.  Ornaments  of  the  supper  room?  11.  Costly  dishes  of  the 
Roman  emperors? 


EUROPE.  321 

rare  dishes  for  their  table :  the  livers  and  brains  of  small 
birds,  the  heads  of  parrots  and  pheasants,  and  the 
tongues  of  peacocks  and  nightingales,  formed  a  part  of 
their  daily  food. 

12.  But  the  most  luxurious  dish  that  graced  the 
table  of  the  Romans  was  an  entire  boar,  roasted,  and 
stuffed  with  game  and  poultry.  On  one  occasion,  the 
senate  was  assembled  to  consult  on  the  best  mode  of 
dressing  an  immense  turbot  which  had  been  presented 
to  the  emperor  ! 

13.  The  use  of  such  clocks  and  watches  as  we  have 
at  present  was  unknown  to  the  Komans.  The  sun-dial 
was  introduced  440  years  after  the  building  of  the  city. 
About  a  century  afterward,  a  kind  of  water  clock 
was  introduced,  which  was  contrived  with  much  inge- 
nuity, and  answered  all  purposes  for  the  measurement 
of  time. 

14.  The  fine  arts  were  unknown  in  Rome  till  after 
the  sixth  century  of  her  existence,  when  they  were 
introduced  by  the  successful  captains  of  her  armies, 
from  the  nations  they  had  conquered.  After  a  taste 
for  the  arts  had  been  thus  formed,  large  enclosed 
galleries  were  built  around  the  mansions  of  the  ricli. 


12.  What  of  a  boar  and  turbot?     13.  Clocks  and  watches?     Sun-dials?     WaWr 
clock?     14.  What  is  said  of  the  fine  arts? 


e^2  UiNilVERSAL  HISTORY. 

and  were  adorned  with  the  finest  specimens  of  painting 
and  sculpture. 

15.  In  the  dwellings  of  the  most  affluent  patricians^ 
these  galleries  also  contained  splendid  libraries,  which 
were  open  to  the  inspection  of  the  learned  and  the 
curious.  Collections  of  books  were  then  of  course 
very  rare,  on  account  of  the  great  expense  and  diffi- 
culty of  transcribing  them. 

16.  They  were  sometimes  written  on  parclunent,  but 
more  frequently  on  a  paper  made  from  the  leaves  of  a 
plant  called  j)apyrus.  The  leaves  were  pasted  together 
at  the  ends,  and  then  made  up  into  a  roll,  which  was 
enclosed  in  a  covering  of  skin  or  silk,  fastened  with 
strings  or  clasps. 

17.  AYriting  was  performed  Avith  a  reed,  split  and 
pohited  like  our  pen,  and  dipped  in  ink.  Matters  ]iot 
intended  for  preservation  were  usually  wiitten  Avith 
a  pointed  instrument  on  tables  spread  witli  wax. 
When  letters  were  sent  forward  for  delivery  they  were 
perfumed,  and  ti(Ml  av  itli  a  silken  thread,  the  ends  of 
which  were  sealed  Avdth  common  wax. 

18.  The  usual  garments  of  the  Romans  were  the  toga 
and  the  tunic;  tlie  former  was  a  loose  woollen  robe,  of 
a  semicircular  form  and  without  sleeves ;  the  latter,  a 

15.  Libraries?     Books?     Paper?     16.  Papyrus?     17.  Writing?     Letters?     18. 
Usual  garments  of  l!ic  Romans.? 


EUROPE. 


323 


close  white  garment,  worn  wlien  abroad  under  the 
toga,  but  alone  in  the  house.  The  men  usually  went' 
bareheaded. 

19.  For  the  feet,  the  usual  coverings  were  the  buskin 
and  the  sandal.  The  buskin  reached  al)out  half-way 
up  to  the  leg ;  the  sandal  was  a  mere  sole,  fastened  to 
the  foot  by  straps  and  Ijuckles. 


VIEW  OF  MODERN   ROME. 


CHAPTEE  XCIL— Europe  Continued. 

Home  under  the  Popes. 

1.  I  WILL  now  proceed  to  finish  the  history  of  Eome. 
I  have  already  had  occasion   to  speak  of   the  pope. 

19,  Coverings  for  the  feet? 


324  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

This  title  was  given  to  tlie  bishops,  at  a  very  early 
period  of  the  Christian  church.  At  first,  the  pope  of 
Rome  was  only  one  of  the  superior  dignitaries  of  the 
church ;  but  in  the  course  of  years  he  became  the  head 
of  it,  and  both  claimed  and  exercised  an  authority 
superior  to  that  of  any  king  or  emperor. 

2.  For  a  long  time  the  popes  of  Rome  had  authority 
only  in  matters  of  religion ;  but  Gregory  III.,  about  the 
year  731,  resisted  the  Greek  emperor,  who  ruled  over 
Italy,  and  established  the  title  of  the  pope  to  reign 
over  Rome  in  matters  of  state.  From  this  time  for- 
ward, the  popes  rapidly  acquired  power,  and  in  the 
year  760  they  had  extensive  possessions  and  immense 
wealth.  Their  pride  was  now  equal  to  their  power, 
and  neither  seemed  to  have  any  bounds. 

3.  The  popes  claimed  the  authority  of  God's  viceroys 
on  earth.  They  called  themselves  the  successoi'S  of  St. 
Peter,  and  said  that  the  keys  of  heaven  and  hell  were 
given  into  their  custody.  No  other  tyranny  had  ever 
been  like  theirs,  for  they  tyrannized  over  the  souls  of 
men. 

^     4.  Other   potentates    are   content   ivith   wearing   a 

Chapter  XCII. — 1.  What  of  the  popes  in  early  times  ?  2.  What  of  Gregory- 
III.  ?  When  was  the  pope's  title  to  rule  over  Rome  established  ?  What  of  popes 
in  the  year  760?  Their  pride  and  power?  3,  What  did  the  popes  claim?  What 
did  they  call  themselves?     What  of  their  tyranny? 


EUROPE.  325 

single  crown  ;  "but  the  popes  crowned  themselves  with 
tliree,  rising  one  above  the  other.  They  assumed  the 
title  of  Holiness ;  but  some  of  them  were  as  unholy 
men  as  ever  lived,  being  full  of  earthly  ambition,  and 
stained  with  atrocious  sins. 

5.  When  their  power  was  at  its  height,  they  showed 
themselves  to  be  the  haughtiest  of  mortals.  Nobody 
was  allowed  to  enter  their  presence  without  kneeling 
down  to  kiss  their  toes.  When  they  mounted  on 
horseback,  they  caused  kings  and  emperors  to  hold 
their  stirrups. 

6.  They  took  away  kingdoms  from  the  rightful 
sovereigns,  and  gave  them  to  others.  A  pope  by  the 
name  of  Clement  declared  that  God  had  given  him  all 
the  kingdoms  of  heaven  and  earth.  If  any  person 
denied  the  pope's  authority,  he  was  burnt  alive. 

Y.  In  1077,  pope  Gregory  obliged  Henry  IV.,  em- 
peror of  Germany,  to  stand  three  days  in  the  depth  of 
winter,  barefoot  at  his  castle  gate,  to  implore  his  par- 
don. In  1191,  another  pope  kicked,  another  emperor's 
crown  off  his  head,  while  he  was  kneeling  before  him. 


4.  What  of  the  crowns  of  the  popes  ?  What  title  did  they  assume  ?  5.  How 
did  their  prida  manifest  itself ?  6.  What  of  pope  Clement?  What  was  done  to 
those  who  resisted  the  Pope?  7.  What  did  pope  Gregory  do  in  1077  ?  What  of 
another  pope  in  1191  ? 


326  UNIVERSAL  PIISTORY. 

to  sIlow  tliat  the  pope  could  make  and  unmake  kings 
at  his  pleasure. 

8.  It  was  near  tlie  year  1100  that  one  of  tlie  popes 
of  Kome  ordained  that  tlie  title  of  pope  should  be  given 
only  to  the  bishop  of  Rome.  It  was  about  this  period 
that  the  23ower  of  the  pope  was  at  its  highest  pitch. 
For  nearly  four  hundred  years  this  potentate  continued 
to  exercise  an  almost  undisputed  sway  over  the 
people,  and  even  the  kings  and  princes  of  the  Chris- 
tian world. 

9.  During  this  age,  great  darkness  prevailed  through- 
out Europe,  Asia,  and  Africa ;  and  though  Home  was 
the  seat  of  the  popes,  who  were  now  more  powerful 
than  any  sovereign,  the  people  were  generally  in  a 
state  of  ignorance  and  degradation. 

10.  But  in  the  year  1518,  a  Ileformation  was  com- 
menced by  a  man  called  Martin  Luther.  He  preached 
against  the  power  of  the  popes,  and  all  Europe  was 
shaken  with  the  convulsion  which  followed.  The 
result  was  that  the  alithoiity  of  the  popes  was  gene- 
rally thrown  off  by  the  governments  throughout  Chris- 
tendom, though  it  is  supposed  that  fifty  millions  of 

8.  What  of  the  power  of  the  pope  about  1100?  When  was  it  at  its  highest 
pitch?  How  long  did  its  sway  continue?  9.  What  was  the  state  of  the  world  at 
ihistime?  Of  Rome?  10.  What  took  place  in  1517  ?  What  of  Martin  Luther? 
What  was  the  result  of  the  Reforujation  ? 


•     EURorK  327 

people,  were  killed  iu  the  wars  that  took  place  during 
this  period  of  agitation. 

11.  The  pope  still  governs  Home  and  other  adjacent 
territories  in  the  centre  of  Italy.  His  dominions  are 
bounded  north  by  Lombardy,  and  in  other  directions 
by  the  Mediterranean  sea  and  the  Adriatic,  and  by 
the  kingdom  of  Naples,  Modena,  and  Tuscany.  He  is 
the  head  of  the  Catholic  church  throu^rhout  the  world. 

12.  Pius  IX.  was  elected  pope  in  1847,  and  still 
(1860)  remains  upon  the  throne.  The  French  Revo- 
lution of  1848  awakened  a  spirit  of  rebellion  in  his 
subjects,  and  he  was  compelled  to  flee.  He  was 
brought  back  by  the  French,  however,  and  has  ever 
since  owed  his  security  to  foreign  bayonets. 

13.  The  city  of  Rome  at  present  is  thirteen  miles  in 
circumference.  The  greater  part  of  it  has  a  dark, 
gloomy,  and  desolate  appearance.  It  is  full  of  old 
ruins  of  palaces  and  temples,  and  other  magnificent 
edifices  of  the  ancient  Romans. 

14.  Travellers  are  wonder-struck  by  these  tokens  of 
the  greatness  of  ancient  Rome.  But  instead  of  her 
mighty  warriors,  they  find  only  a  degraded  people. 

11.  What  of  the  pope  at  the  present  day?  Where  are  his  dominions?  Of  what 
church  is  he  the  head?  12.  What  of  Pius  TX.  ?  13.  What  of  the  present  city  of 
Rome?  14.  How  are  travellers  affected  iu  Rome?  What  of  the  people?  How 
has  their  spirit  been  crushed  ? 

15 


S28  UNIVERSAL  HISTdRY. 

Their  s^^irit  has  been  crushed  by  ages  of  servitude  and 
superstition. 

15.  But  these  ruins  and  relics  are  not  the  only  re- 
mains of  former  grandeur.  There  are  a  good  many 
works  still  existing,  written  by  the  old  Roman  authors. 
These  are  in  the  Latin  language,  which,  as  I  have  be- 
fore said,  was  spoken  by  the  Romans.  Many  of  them 
are  very  interesting,  and  from  them  modem  nations 
have  derived  a  large  part  of  their  most  valuable  laws 
and  institutions. 

15.  What  of  old  Roman  works?    In  what  language  are  they  written?     What 
have  the  moderns  derived  from  these  works? 


RUROPE, 


329 


VIEW   IX   VENICE. 

GHAPTEE  XCIII.— EuiiOPE   Continued. 

About  several  other  Italian  States. 

1.  You  know  tliat  Italy  is  now  divided  into  several 
distinct  kino:doms  or  states.  Eacli  of  tliese  lias  its  Lis- 
tory,  and  at  some  future  day  it  will  be  well  for  you  to 
read  the  story  of  tliese  celebrated  countries.  In  tliis 
little  book  I  can  only  give  you  a  very  brief  account  of 
two  or  three  of  them. 

2.  The  kingdom  of  Naples,  or  the  kingdom  of  the 
two  Sicilies,  includes  •the   island    of   Sicily   and    the 

Chapter  XCIII. — 1.  How  is  Italy  now  divided?     2.  What  does  the  kingdoni 
of  Xaples  iudinle  ? 


830  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

southern  extremity  of  tlie  peninsula  of  Italy.  It  em- 
braces the  foot  of  the  figure  of  the  boot,  which  I  have 
before  mentioned.  This  kingdom  has  a  population  of 
eii>:ht  millions  five  hundred  thousand. 

3.  The  history  of  Naples,  after  it  was  separated  from 
the  Koman  empire,  possesses  very  little  interest.  It 
passed  first  into  the  hands  of  one  tribe  of  nortliern  in- 
vaders, then  into  the  hands  of  another,  and  then  into 
the  hands  of  another.  After  this,  it  was  subject  to 
Spain  and  other  countries,  until  at  len^h  it  became  an 
independent  country,  under  the  goveniment  of  its 
present  race  of  kings. 

4.  In  1860,  the  Sicilians,  goaded  to  desperation  by 
the  shocking  cruelties  of  their  Neapolitan  governors, 
rose  against  them.  They  were  led  by  Garibaldi,  an 
Italian  who  had  long  been  exiled  in  America.  The 
Neapolitans  were  driven  out  of  Palermo  and  Messina, 
and  it  is  likely  that  Sicily  will  soon  be  independent. 
Even  the  miserable  little  king  of  Naples  himself  is 
beginning  to  fear  that  it  may  soon  be  his  turn  to  be  an 
exile. 

5.  The  history  of  Venice  is  more  interesting.  When 
the  northern  barbarians  invaded  Italy  in  452,  the  in- 


Population?     3.  Its  history?     4.  What  of  the  Sicilian  Revolution  in  1860? 
What  of  the  history  of  Venice  ? 


EUROPE.  831 

habitants  living  in  tlie  vicinity  of  the  present  city  of 
Venice,  settled  in  the  marshes  along  the  border  of  the 
sea,  and  supported  themselves  by  fishing,  makicg  salt^ 
and  by  commerce. 


THE   DOGE   OF   VENICE    AND    HIS   ADVISERS. 

6.  In  the  year  809  they  commenced  building  the 
city  of  Venice  on  a  little  island  called  Rialto.     To  this 


6.  When  and  where  was  Venice  buill  ? 


332  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

place  tliey  transported  their  riches,  and  soon  the  new 
city  became  the  capital  of  the  republic  of  Venice. 
The  city  and  state  increased,  until  at  length  Venice 
was  one  of  the  most  powerful  states  in  the  world. 
I  Y.  The  inhabitants  paid  great  attention  to  commerce, 
and  such  was  the  number  of  their  ships,  that  in  the 
eleventh  century,  Venice  sent  a  fleet  of  two  hundred 
sail  to  assist  in  the  flrst  crusade.  It  was  on  account  of 
the  interest  which  this  state  had  in  maritime  matters 
that  the  Doge,  who  was  the  chief  officer,  used  to  be 
wedded  to  the  sea  with  pompous  ceremonies. 

8.  The  power  of  Venice  continued  to  increase,  and 
in  process  of  time,  the  proud  city  of  Constantinople 
was  conquered  by  its  armies,  aided  by  the  crusaders. 
The  spoils  of  the  conquered  city,  consisting  of  gems  and 
jewelry,  books,  marbles,  pictures,  statues,  obelisks,  and 
other  costly  treasures,  were  chiefly  carried  to  Venice. 

9.  The  republic  prospered  for  many  yeai*s,  and  its 
wealth  and  power  increased,  though  the  people  were 
often  governed  in  the  most  cruel  and  oppressive  manner. 
But  I  have  only  room  to  add,  that  to^vard  the  close  of 
the  last  century,  it  fell  a  victim  to  the  power  of  France, 

7.  Wlint  of  the  commerce  of  Venice?  Fleet?  The  Doge  ?  8.  Power  of  Ven- 
\c"  ?  What  city  was  taken  by  Venice  and  the  crusaders  ?  What  of  tlie  spoils  of 
Constantinople?  9.  Wliat  of  the  republic  of  Venice  for  many  years?  What  of 
lYance  ?     What  of  Venice  since  1708? 

1. 


EUROPE. 


333 


and  since  tlie  year  1798,  it  has  been  attached  to  the 
empire  of  Austria. 

10.  I  could  fill  a  book  with  tales  about  Genoa,  which 
was  at  one  time  the  rival  of  Venice ;  about  Tuscany, 
which  is  considered  the  most  beautiful  portion  of  Italy; 
and  about  the  kingdom  of  Sardinia,  which  lies  in  the 
northern  part  of  Italy.  But  as  it  is  impossible  to  get 
a  long  story  into  a  little  book,  I  must  let  these  things 
pass. 


CHAPTER    XCIY.— Europe    Continued. 
Chronology  of  Italy. 


B.  G. 

Building  of  Rome  by  Romulus 752 

Numa  Pompilius  made  king. .....  715 

Tullus  Hostilius  made  king 672 

Death  of  Tarquin  the  Proud,  and 

his  family  expelled 509 

Tribunes  chosen 490 

Decemviri  chosen , 451 

Censors  established 437 

T^ome  taken  by  the  Gauls 385 

Tiieatres  established 361 

War  with  the  Samnites    343 

Fun-dial  introduced. - 312 

Aqueducts  built 311 

All  Italy  submits  to  Rome 270 

First  Punic  war  begins 264 

Second  Punic  war  begins 218 


B.  C. 

Carthage  destroyed 146 

Third  Punic  war  begins 137 

Spain  becomes  a  province  of  Rome,    1 34 

Social  war  begins 91 

War  between  Marius  and  Sylla. . .       88 

Pompey  defeats  Mithridates 65 

Triumvirate  formed 59 

Caesar  invades  Britain 55 

Battle  of  Pharsalia,  and  death  of 

Pompey 48 

44 
25 
A.  D. 
14 
37 
41 


Death  of  Caesar. 

Gaul  conquered  by  the  Romans 

Death  of  Augustus  Caesar 

Tiberius  died 

Caligula  died 


10.  What  of  Genoa?     Tuscany?    Sardinia? 


834 


UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


A.  D. 

Claudius  ascends  the  throne 54 

Xero  died  .  .    64 

YitelHus  ascends  the  throne 69 

TiLus  ascends  the  throne 19 

Ilygenus,  firi*t  bi.-;h(>poi"  Rome  who 

look  the  tiile  of  pope 154 

Coiistantine  began  to  reign 30G 

Christianity  adopted  by  the  empe- 
ror of  Rome 311 

Constantine   removes  the   seat   of 

empire  to  Constantinople 329 

Rome  divided  into  the  Eastern  and 

Western  empires  bj''  Tlieodosius,  395 

Rome  taken  by  Alaric 410 

Italy  invaded  by  Attila 445 

Rome  taken  by  Odoacer 476 

'roths  driven  from  Rome  by  Belisa- 

-ns 537 

^»  -^   pope's    supremacy   over   the 

Christian  church  established 607 

Custom  of   kissing  the  pope's    toe 

introduced 708 

Gregory  HI.,  founder  of  the  pope's 

temporal  power,  became  pope. .  731 
The  pope's  temporal  power  estab- 
lished   755 


A.  D. 

Venice  built 809 

Leo  IX.,  the  first  pope  that  kept  an 

army    1054 

Henry  lY.  obliged  to  stand   three 

days  at  the  pope's  gate 1077 

Pope's    authority   introduced   into 

Eugland .' 1079 

The  pope   kicks    olF  Ileury   IV.'s 

crown 1191 

Residence   of    the    pope    removed 
to  Avignon  iu   France,  where  it 

remained  seventy  years 1307 

Reformation  commenced  by  Mar- 
tin Luther.  . , 1517 

Rome  sacked,  and  Pope  Clement 

imprisoned 1527- 

Pope's  residence  removed  a  second 

time  to  Avignon 1531 

Kissing  the  pope's  toe  abolished.  .  1773 
Political    intiuence    of    the   pope 

ceased  in  Europe 1 787 

Venice  attached  to  Austria 1798 

Pius  IX.  pope  ot  Rome. , 1847 

He  flees  to  Gaeta 1849 

Sicilian    revolution,    under    Gari- 
baldi       1860 


euruVe. 


33i 


VIEW  OF  CONSTANTINOPLE. 


CHAPTER  XCY.— EuKOPE  Continued. 

About  the  Ottoman  Empire. — Turlcey  in  Eicrope. — Turhci/  iji 
Asia. — About  the  Climate,  People,  and  oth(^r  things. 


1.  The  Turkisli  or  Ottoman  empire  is  divided  into 
two  parts,  called- Turkey  in  Europe  and  Turkey  in  Asia. 
It  was  formerly  muck  more  extensive  than  at  pres- 
ent. It  now  embraces  a  large  region  of  territory  in 
Europe,  lying  between  Greece  on  tke  south,  and  Russia 

Chapter  XCV. — 1.  What  other  name  has  the  Turkish  empire?  How  is  the 
Ottoman  empire  divided?  Was  the  Turkish  empire  more  extensive  once  than 
it  is  now  ? 

1 


336  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

and  Gennany  on  tlie  north ;  tHs  portion  is  called  Tur- 
key  in  Europe. 

2.  Turkey  in  Asia  includes  Asia  Minor  and  Arme- 
nia, Syria,  Palestine,  Mesopotamia,  etc.  Egypt  and  the 
Barbary  states  in  Africa  were  also  subject  to  Turkey, 
till  within  a  few  years. 

6.  These  latter  countries,  together  with  Greece,  have 
become  wholly,  or  partially,  independent  of  the 
Turkish  dominion.  The  capital  of  this  empire  is  Con- 
stantinople, which  I  have  often  mentioned  before,  and 
which  at  this  day  is  one  of  the  greatest  cities  in  the 
world. 

4.  The  chief  ruler  or  king  of  the  Turks  is  called 
the  sultan.  He  lives  at  Constantinople,  in  a  splendid 
palace.  Like  most  eastern  princes,  he  has  two  or  three 
hundred  wives,  whom  he  keeps  shut  up  in  a  place  call- 
ed the  harem. 

5.  The  Turks  have  long  beards,  wear  turbans  on 
their  heads,  and  a  loose  flowing  robe  over  their  under 
dress.  They  sit  on  cushions  instead  of  chairs,  and  take 
their  food  with  their  fingers,  instead  of  forks. 

6.  The  sultan  rules  over  his  country,  not  according 

2.  What  does  Turkey  in  Asia  now  include  ?  "What  other  countries  formerly  be- 
longed to  the  Turkish  empire  ?  3.  What  of  the  countries  that  formerly  belonged 
to  the  Ottoman  empire  ?  Capital  of  Turkey?  What  of  Constantinople?  4.  What 
of  the  sultan  ?     5.  Describe  the  Turks. 


EURQrE.  33^ 

to  certain  establislied  laws,  but  according  to  bis  own 
will.  The  people  generally  do  exactly  what  he  re- 
quires ;  if  tbey  refuse  to  obey  bim,  tbey  are  sure  to  lose 
tbeir  property  and  tbeir  beads. 

7.  If  you  were  to  go  to  Turkey,  you  would  discover 
tbat  tbe  climate  is  warm,  and  tbe  country  naturally 
fertile.  You  would  see  tbat  tbe  people  are  indolent  and 
cruel.  You  would  see  tbat  tbey  bave  not  many  manu- 
factures, and  but  little  commerce.  You  would  see  tbat 
tbe  lands  are  poorly  cultivated,  and  tbat  many  tracts 
naturally  fruitful  are  barren  and  desolate  for  want  of 
tillage. 

8.  You  will  discover  tbat  tbe  people  dislike  tbe 
Cbristians,  and  worsbip  according  to  tbe  faitb  of  Ma- 
bomet.  You  will  discover  tbat  tbey  bave  mosques 
instead  of  cburcbes.  At  Constantinople,  you  will  see 
a  very  splendid  edifice,  called  St.  Sopbia.  Tbis  was 
formerly  a  Greek  cburcb,  but  it  is  now  converted  into 
a  Mahometan  mosque. 

6,  How  does  the  sultan  rule  the  Turks?  "What  of  the  people?  1.  Soil  and 
climate  of  Turkey?  The  people?  Manufactures?  Commerce?  Lands?  8. 
Religion  of  the  Turks  ?     What  are  their  places  of  worship  called  ?     St.  Sophia  ? 


338  univ]*:rs4X  history. 


CHAPTEE  XCYL— EurvorE  CoNTxt<uED. 

About  the  Saracens. — How  the  Turks  overturned  the  Saracen 
Empire. — How  the  Ottoman  Turks  founded  the  Ottoman 
Empire. — About  Bajazet^  Timoiir^  and  others, 

1.  In  the  liistoiy  of  Asia  I  liave  given  you  some 
account  of  the  Saracens.  These,  you  will  remember, 
were  Arabs,  among  whom  Mahomet  and  his  successors 
established  an  empire  at  the  commencement  of  the 
seventh  century. 

2.  The  kings  or  rulers  of  the  Saracen  empire  were 
called  caliphs,  and  resided  at  Bagdad,  a  splendid  city 
which  they  built  near  the  river  Tigris  in  Mesopotamia.^ 
I  have  told  you  how  these  caliphs  extended  their  em- 
pire over  a  considerable  part  of  Asia  and  Africa,  and 
some  portions  of  Europe. 

3.  To  the  noith  of  Mesopotamia,  there  were  several 
tribes  of  Tartars,  among  which  were  some  called  Turks. 
These  were  daring  warriors,  and  such  was  their  fame, 
that  the  caliphs  induced  many  of  them  to  come  to  Bag- 
dad and  serve  as  soldiers. 


Chapter  XCVI. — 1.  What  of  the  Saracens  ?  When  and  by  whom  was  the 
Saracen  empire  cstabhslied?  2.  What  of  the  caliphs?  Dominion  of  the  caliphs? 
3.  Who  were  the  Turks?  Where  did  they  live?  Why  were  they  employed  l)y 
tlie  caliphs  of  Bagdad? 

•      .         ■  -% 


EUi^PE.  339 

4.  Ill  process  of  time,  the  Turks  acquired  great  influ- 
ence at  Bagdad,  and  finally  overturned  tlie  Saracen 
empire,  made  themselves  masters  of  nearly  all  the  Sar- 
acen possessions,  and  adopted  the  Mahometan  religion. 
Thus  the  Turkish  eihpife  became -the  successor  of  the 
Saracen  empire,  and  included  in  its  dominions  Asia 
Minor,  Syria,  Palestine,  and  other  Asiatic  countries, 
which  the  Saracens  had  conquered  from  the  Greek  em- 
pire. 

5.  After  a  w^hile,  the  Turkish  empire,  which  had 
been  thus  established,  was  overturned  by  another  tribe 
of  Turks,  who  called  themselves  Ottomans.  These 
came  from  the  country  east  of  the  Caspian  sea,  and  laid 
the  foundation  of  the  present  Ottoman  empire.  This 
took  place  in  the  year  1299  ;  the  founder  of  the  empire 
being  Ofchman  I. 

6.  The  Greek  empire  had  formerly  included  Asia 
Minor,  but  this  had  been  taken  by  the  Saracens,  and 
afterward  by  the  Turks.  At  the  time  of  the  Ottoman 
invasion,  it  included  little  more  than  what  is  at  present 
called  Turkey  in  Euroj^e,  with  Greece. 

7.  Constantinople,   the  present  capital    of   Turkey, 

t  '    ~~     ~~~~~  ■ 

4.  What  did  the  Turks  do?  What  of  the  Turkish  empire?  5.  By  whom  was 
tiie  first  Turkish  dynasty  overturned?  Wlien  was  the  Ottoman  empire  founded? 
By  whom  ?  6.  What  did  the  Greek  empire  formerly  include  ?  What  did  it  in- 
clude in  1299? 


340  UNIVERSE  HISTORY. 

was  called  Byzantium,  from  Byzas,  wlio  founded  it  in 
Tlo  B.  C.  It  was  a  flourisMng  city  in  the  time  of  the 
early  Greeks.  The  neighboring  country  was  settled  by 
colonies  from  Greece,  and  by  other  tribes.  It  was  con- 
quered by  the  Komans,  and  the  name  of  Byzantium 
was  changed  to  Constantinople,  by  the  emperor  Con- 
st ant  ine,  in  329. 

8.  It  had  before  this  period  fallen  into  decay,  but  it 
was  now  revived,  and  Constantine  removed  thither 
with  his  whole  court.'  It  thus  became  the  capital  of 
the  Boman  empire.  When  that  was  divided  into  the 
Eastern  and  Western  empires  in  395,  it  was  the  capital 
of  the  former,  which,  as  you  know,  was  often  called 
the  Greek  empire. 

9.  This  continued,  with  various  changes,  to  subsist 
as  a  distinct  sovereignty,  till  the  period  of  which  I  am 
now  treating.  It  was,  as  I  have  said,  on  the  brink  of 
ruin,  when  the  Ottomans,  who  had  already  established 
themselves  in  Asia  Minor,  and  swallowed  up  the  coun- 
tries   formerly  belonging  to   the   Saracen  dominions, 

7.  Wliat  of  Constantinople?  Who  founded  it,  and  when?  What  pf  it  in  the 
time  of  the  early  Greeks?  "When  was  its  name  changed?  "When  and  by  whom 
was  Byzantium  called  Constantinople?  8.  What  became  the  capital  of  the  Roman 
empire?  "What  took  place  in  395?  What  was  called  the  Greek  empire?  What 
countries  did  the  Eastern  empire  of  the  Romans  include?  Ans.  Greece,  Macedon, 
what  is  now  called  Turkey  iu  Europe,  Asia  Minor,  and  other  adjacent  countries. 
9.  What  of  the  Ottomans  ? 


EUROPE.  341 

began  to  cast  longing  eyes  upon  the  Greek  empire  in 
Europe. 

10.  The  sultan,  at  this  time,  was  Bajazet.  He  be- 
gan to  reign  in  1389,  and  was  so  famous  for  his  con- 
quests, that  the  Turks  called  him  the  Thunderbolt. 

11.  He  was  preparing  to  attack  Constantinople,  when 
a  greater  warrior  than  he  came  from  Tartary,  and 
subdued  him.  This  was  Tamerlane,  otherwise  called 
Timo^r  the  Tartar,  and  sometimes  Timour  the  Lame 
Man.  He  defeated  Bajazet  in  a  great  battle,  in  which 
three  hundred  thousand  men  were  slain. 

12.  It  is  said  that  when  Timour  the  Lame  Man  had 
got  Bajazet,  the  Thunderbolt,  into  his  power,  he  2:)ut 
him  into  an  iron  cage,  and  carried  him  about  for  a 
show,  like  a  wild  beast.  Most  conquerors  have  a  re- 
semblance to  wild  beasts,  and  it  would  be  well  if  they 
could  always  be  kept  in  iron  cages. 

13.  The  misfortunes  of  Bajazet  prevented  the  Turks 
from  conquering  the  Eastern  empire  of  the  Komans,  for 
a  considerable  time.  But  in  1453,  when  Mahomet  the 
Great  was  sultan,  they  took  Constantinople.  The  em- 
peror, whose  name  was  Constantine,  was  killed.     From 


10.  Who  was  Bajazet?  When  did  he  begin  to  reign  ?  What  did  the  Turks  call 
him?  11.  What  of  Tamerlane?  12.  How  did  Timour  treat  Bajazet?  What  of 
conquerors  generally  ?  13.  What  happened  in  1453  ?  What  has  the  country  been 
called  since? 


S42  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

this  time  forward,  tlie  Turks  were  securely  established 
in  Europe,  and  the  country  which  they  inhabited  was 
called  Turkey. 


CHAPTER  XCYII.— Europe  CoNTmnED. 
Sequel  of  the  Turhish  Ilisto?^. 

1.  The  reigns  of  most  of  the  Turkish  sultans  have 
been  full  of  crime  arid  bloodshed.  Sultan  Selim,  who 
began  to  reign  in  1512,  invaded  Egypt,  and  conquered 
it.  The  Egyptian  soldiers  were  called  Mamelukes,  of 
Avhom  I  have  told  you  in  tlie  history  of  Egyj^t.  Thou- 
sands of  them  were  taken  prisoners. 

2.  After  the  victory,  the  sultan  ordered  a  splendid 
throne  to  be  erected  on  the  banks  of  the  river  Nile, 
near  the  gates  of  Cairo.  Sitting  on  his  throne,  he 
caused  all  the  Mamelukes  to  be  massacred  in  his  sight, 
and  their  bodies  to  be  thrown  into  the  river. 

3.  Mahomet  the  Third,  who  ascended  the  throne  in 
1596,  liad  nineteen  brothers.     All  these  he  caused  to 

Chapter  XCVII. — 1.  What  of  the  reigns  of  some  of  the  Turkish  sultans?  What 
of  sultan  Sehrn?  What  of  the  Mamelukes  ?  2.  What  did  tiie  sultan  order?  3.  When 
did  Mahomet  III.  ascend  the  throne?     What  crime  did  he  commit? 


EUROPE.  343 

be  strangled,  so  tliat  tliey  might  not  attempt  to  rob 
liim  of  his  power. 

4.  Amurath.  the  Fourth  became  sultan  in  1621. 
This  monster  caused  fourteen  thousand  men  to  be  mur- 
dered. The  sport  that  pleased  him  best,  v»^as  to  run 
about  the  streets  at  night,  with  a  drawn  sword,  cutting 
and  slashing  at  everybody  whom  he  met. 

5.  These  facts  will  show  the  reader  what  kind  of  a 
government  the  Turks  have  lived  under.  Mahmoud 
the  Second,  who  ascended  the  throne  in  1808,  was 
more  enlightened  than  his  predecessors.  But  he  was 
compelled  to  act  with  great  severity.  This  was  pai'tic- 
ularly  the  case  in  regard  to  the  janizaries. 

6.  These  were  a  large  body  of  troops,  established 
in  1300,  and  who  continued  to  be  a  very  powerful  body 
of  soldiers  for  several  centuries.  Though  called  the 
sultan's  guards,  they  became  more  dangerous  than  all 
the  other  subjects  of  the  emjiire. 

Y.  Sultan  Mahmoud,  therefore,  determined  to  free 
himself  from  their  power.  Accordingly,  in  the  year 
1826,  he  ordered  the  rest  of  his  troops  to  surround  the 
janizaries.     This  was  done,  and  they  were  shot  down 

4.  Who  became  sultan  in  1621  ?  What  of  Amurath?  5.  Wlien  did  Mahmoud 
IT.  ascend  the  throne?  What  of  him  ?  6.  Who  were  the  janizaries?  When 
were  they  established?  7.  What  was  done  iu  1826?  What  did  the  sultan  after- 
ward do  ? 


344  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

and  massacred  without  mercy.  The  sultan  afterward 
endeavored  to  reform  tlie  manners  of  the  Turks,  and 
to  make  them  adopt  the  customs  of  other  European 
nations.     In  this  he  had  some  success. 

8.  In  1853,  Abd-ul-Medjid  was  the  Turkish  sultan. 
Hussia  showed  a  disposition,  at  this  period,  to  make 
war  upon  Tm'key,  and  though  many  people  were  of  the 
opinion  that  it  would  be  well  if  so  miserable  a  govern- 
ment as  that  of  Turkey  could  be  destroyed,  yet  France 
and  England  went  to  the  sultan's  relief,  and  the  contest 
known  as  the  Eastern  war  followed. 

9.  This  lasted  several  years,  and  was  brought  to  a  close 
by  the  capture  of  Sebastopol,  a  Kussian  fortress,  in  the 
summer  of  1855.  It  is  supposed  that  half  a  million  of 
lives  were  lost  in  this  struggle.  Russia  has  been  foiled 
for  a  time,  and  Turkey  still  retains  its  independence. 

10.  But  in  1860,  millions  of  people  in  the  two  Chris- 
tian nations  that  aided  the  Turks  were  led  to  regret 
the  part  they  had  taken.  For  early  in  that  year, 
10,000  Christians  living  in  Syria  and  other  countries 
belonging  to  Turkey,  were  massacred  in  cold  blood  by 
believers  in  Mahomet !  It  is  supposed  that  Fj'ance  and 
England  will  send  soldiers  to  punish  the  murderers. 

8.  What  took  place  in  1853?  What  was  the  origin  of  the  Eastern  war?  9 
How  was  this  broxight  to  a  close?  How  many  lives  were  lost?  The  consequence? 
10.  Describe  the  massacre  of  Christians  in  18G0. 


EUROPE. 


345 


OLon.East  ]'! 


Questions  On  the  Map  of  Spain. — What  are  the  boundaries  of  Spain  ?  What 
two  countries  adjoin  Spain ?  Where  is  Madrid?  Malaga?  Seville?  Salamanca? 
Saragossa?  Cordova?  Barcelona?  Cadiz?  Valladolid?  Burgos?  Santiago? 
Describe  the  Guadalquiver  river.  Tlie  Douro.  The  Ebro.  What  mountains  sep- 
arate Spain  from  France?  Ajis.  The  Pyrenees.  Where  are  the  Straits  of  Gib- 
raltar ?     Wliat  islands  lie  in  tlie  Mediterranean  sea  ? 


346 


UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


YIEW   OP  MADRID. 


CHAPTEH    XCYin.— EuEOPE    Continued. 
Early  History  of  Spain.     The  Moorish  Conquest. 

1.  The  kingdom  of  Spain  is  divided  from  France  by 
the  range  of  mountains  called  the  Pyrenees.  It  has 
Portugal  on  the  west;  its  other  boundaries  are  the 
Atlantic  ocean,  the  Bay  of  Biscay,  and  the  Mediter- 
i-anean  sea.  The  whole  country  forms  a  large  pen- 
insula. 

2.  Spain  is  a  very  remarkable  country ;  it  is  full  of 
wild,  rocky  mountains,  with  beautiful  valleys  between. 

Chapter  XCVIII. — 1.  How  is  Spain  dividuU   from  France?     Boundaries  of 
Spaiu  ? 


EUROPE.  347 

The  climate  is  warm  and  deliglitful.  The  country  pro- 
duces abundance  of  grapes,  olives,  lemons,  almonds, 
flgs,  citrons,  and  pomegranates. 

3.  Spain  has  about  half  as  many  inhabitants  as  the 
United  States.  The  people  are  generally  ignorant  and 
superstitious,  but  they  seem  to  be  very  honest,  cere- 
monious, and  polite.  They  are  fond  of  gay  dances  in 
the  open  air.  Madrid,  the  capital  of  Spain,  is  a  very 
splendid  city. 

4.  Spain  abounds  in  castles,  churches,  and  palaces, 
built  by  the  Moors,  of  whom  I  shall  soon  tell  you  the 
story.  These  edifices  are  some  of  the  most  wonderful 
buildings  in  the  world.  They  are  totally  unlike  those 
of  ancient  Greece  and  Rome.  They  bear  some  re- 
semblance to  what  is  called  the  Gothic  architecture, 
specimens  of  which  are  to  be  found  in  some  of  our 
cities. 

5.  If  I  had  time  and  room,  I  should  like  very  much 
to  tell  you  a  long  story  about  Spain ;  but  I  shall  be 
obliged  to  say  very  little  of  it,  and  leave  you  after- 
ward to  pursue  the  subject  in  some  larger  book. 

6.  Little  is  known  about  the  history  of  Spain  till 
the  Phoenicians  made  voyages  thither,  about  900  B.  C. 

2.  What  sort  of  a  country  is  Spain  ?  Clinaate  ?  Productions  ?  3.  Population  ? 
What  of  the  people  ?  The  capital  ?  What  of  Madrid  ?  4.  What  of  the  Moorish 
buildings  in  Spain  ? 


348  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

They  came  from  Plicenicia,  wliicli  you  know  was  close 
to  the  land  of  Canaan,  a  distance  -of  two.- thousand 
miles,  and  built  two  columns  at  the  Straits  of  GibraL 
tar.  These  columns  were  called  the  pillars  of  Hercu- 
les. The  ancients  did  not  dare  to  sail  beyond  them, 
into  the  broad  Atlantic  ocean. 

7.  The  Greeks  founded  several  cities  in  Spain. 
Afterward,  the  Carthaginians  acquired  possession  of 
the  country ;  but  it  was  taken  by  the  Romans  in  1 34 
B.  C,  who  kept  it  till  the  year  406  after  the  Christian 
era.  Spain  was  then  invaded  by  barbarians  from  the 
north,  called  the  Suevi,  the  Alans,  and  the  Vandals. 

8.  Some  of  these  people  continued  in  the  country 
more  than  a  hundred  years.  They  were  then  driven 
out  by  another  set  of  barbarians,  called  Goths,  or  Visi- 
goths, who  overran  the  whole  of  Spain.  These  became 
established  in  the  country,  and  finally  founded  a  king- 
dom there. 

9.  After  the  Goths  had  been  in  Spain  al)out  two 
hundi-ed  years,  a  king  mounted  the  throne  whose  name 

6.  What  of  the  early  history  of  Spain  ?  Where  was  Phoenicia  ?  How  far  from 
Spain  ?  What  did  the  Phoenicians  do  in  Spain  ?  What  straits  connect  the  Medi- 
terrauefiQ  sea  with  the  Atlantic  ocean  ?  Where  were  the  pillars  of  Hercules 
built?  How  far  did  the  ancients  venture  to  go  in  their  vessels?  7.  What  of  the 
Greeks?  The  Carthaginians?  The  Romans?  What  barbarians  conquered  Spain  ? 
8.  How  long  did  the  Suevi  and  otlier  barbarians  remalD  in  Spain  ?  Wlio  drov&  out 
the  Suevi  ?     What  of  the  Goths  ? 


EUROPE.  349 

was  Roderick.  This  king  grievously  injured  Count 
Julian,  who  was  one  of  the  most  powerful  of  the 
Spanish  or  Gothic  nobles.  In  order  to  avenge  himself, 
Julian  took  steps  which  resulted  in  the  ruin  of  his 
country. 

10.  In  Mauritania,  which  I  have  already  mentioned, 
on  the  northern  coast  of  Africa,  and  not  far  from  Spain, 
there  was  a  nation  of  Saracens.  They  were  called 
Mauri,  or  Moors,  from  the  country  which  they  inhab- 
ited. Count  Julian  invited  them  to  cross  the  sea,  and 
invade  Spain. 

11.  Accordingly,  a  great  number  of  these  infidels 
landed  on  the  Spanish  shores,  under  the  command  of 
a  general  named  Tariff.  King  Roderick  the  Goth 
gathered  an  army,  and  encountered  them  at  Xeres,  in 
the  south  of  Spain.     Here  a  great  battle  was  fought. 

12.  The  Moors  were  completely  victorious.  The  fate 
of  king  Roderick  was  never  known.  His  horse,  and 
his  sword,  helmet,  shield,  and  breastplate,  were  found 
by  the  side  of  a  river,  near  the  field  of  battle ;  but  his 
body  was  nowhere  to  be  seen.  These  events  occurred 
about  712  after  Christ. » 


9.  What  of  Roderick ?  Count  Julian ?  What  did  he  do?  10.  What  of  Mauri- 
tania? Its  direction  from  Spain?  What  of  the  Moors?  Count  Julian?  11. 
What  did  the  Moors  do?     What  followed  ?     12.  Fate  of  king  Roderick?    When 

did  tliis  happen  ? 


350  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

13.  The  Spaniards  long  believed  tliat  king  Eoderick 
was  alive,  and  that,  at  some  future  day,  lie  would 
again  lead  an  army  to  battle  against  the  Moors.  But 
his  war-shout  was  heard  no  more,  and  as  the  Gothic 
monarchy  was  ruined  by  his  fall,  he  is  called  Roderick 
the  last  of  the  Goths. 

14.  Pelagio,  a  prince  of  the  blood-royal,  took  com- 
mand of  all  the  Gothic  Spaniards  who  had  not  been 
slain  by  the  Moors.  He  led  them  into  the  mountain- 
ous re^rion  of  the  Asturias  and  Buro;os,  and  there  found- 
ed  a  little  kingdom.  This  was  the  only  part  of  Spain 
which  the  Moors  never  conquered. 

15.  The  successors  of  Pelagio  enlarged  the  bounda. 
ries  of  his  kingdom.  But,  for  a  long  time,  the  Moors 
possessed  three- foui*ths  of  Spain. 


CHAPTER  XCIX.— Etjkope  Continued. 

Wdrs  between  the  Moors  and  the  Spaniards. 

1.  The  Moors  were  a  wild  people  when  they  first 
conquered  Spain ;  but  they  soon  became  civilized  and 

13.  What  did  the  Spaniards  believe?  Why  was  Roderick  called  the  last  of  tlie 
Gotba?  14.  What  of  Pelagio?  What  was  the  only  part  of  Spain  not  conquered 
by  the  Moors  ?  15.  What  of  the  successors  of  Pelagio  ?  What  portion  of  Spain 
did  the  Moors  long  possess  ? 

CiiAi'TER  XCIX.— 1.  What  can  you  euiy  of  the  Moors? 


EUEOPE.  351 

polished.     There  was  more  learnmg  among  tliem  than 
in  any  other  part  of  Europe. 

2.  In  the  city  of  Cordova,  there  was  a  library  of 
six  hundred  thousand  volumes.  There  were  likewise 
seventy  public  libraries  in  other  parts  of  the  Moorish 
territories  in  S]3ain.  The  Moors  were  great  lovers  of 
poetry  and  music. 

3.  They  built  many  noble  edifices  in  Spain.  The 
Alhambra,  in  the  city  of  Granada,  was  the  palace  of  the 
Moorish  sovereigns.  It  was  of  marble,  and  ornamented 
with  beautiful  sculpture.  The  sultry  atmosphere  was 
cooled  by  fountains,  which  played  continually  in  the 
chambers  and  halls.  Beneath  the  Alhambra  were 
vaults,  which  the  Moorish  kings  had  caused  to  be  dug, 
that  they  might  be  bmied  there ;  for  they  loved  the 
Alhambra  so  well,  that  they  used  it  both  as  their  palace 
and  sepulchre. 

4.  But  the  Spaniards  hated  the  Moors,  and  seldom 
were  at  peace  with  them.  In  their  continual  wars,  the 
victory  sometimes  fell  to  one  party,  and  sometimes  to 
the  other.  Eighty  thousand  Moors  were  once  slain  in 
a  single  battle. 


2.  What  of  the  libraries  in  Cordova?  In  other  cities?  Wliat  did  the  Moors 
love?  3.  Wlrat  did  they  build  in  Spain?  Describe  the  Alhambra.  What  were 
beneath  the  Alhambra  ?  4.  How  did  tlie  Spaniards  feel  toward  the  Moors  ?  Wh«it 
of  their  wars  ?  _ 

16 


352  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

5.  On  the  other  hand,  a  Moorish  hero,  by  the  name 
of  Almanzor,  is  said  to  have  vanquished  the  Spaniards 
in  more  than  fifty  battles.  He  took  the  city  of  Com- 
postella,  and  compelled  his  captives  to  caiTy  the  gates 
of  a  large  edifice  from  thence  to  Cordova,  on  their 
shoulders. 

6.  The  most  famous  warrior  that  appeared  on  either 
side,  was  Don  Rodrigo  de  Bivar,  sumamed  the  Cid 
Campeador,  or  the  Incomparable  Lord.  He  gained 
so  many  battles  against  the  Moors,  that  at  last  the 
Spaniards  considered  victory  certain  whenever  the  Cid 
Campeador  was  at  their  head. 

7.  When  the  Incomparable  Lord  was  dead,  the 
courage  of  the  Moors  re\dved.  They  boldly  attacked 
the  Spaniards,  and  besieged  the  city  where  the  Cid 
Campeador  lay  buried.  The  Spaniards  went  forth  to 
meet  them,  and  at  their  head  rode  an  armed  wamor, 
with  a  countenance  like  death. 

8.  The  Moors  recognized  his  features,  and  fled ;  for 
it  was  the  Cid  Campeador !  The  Spaniards  had  taken 
him  from  the  tomb,  and  seated  him  on  the  war-horse 
which  he  had  ridden  in  his  lifetime.  And  thus  the 
dfead  warrior  won  another  victory. 

5.  What  of  Almanzor?  Wliat  city  did  he  take?  6.  What  fainous  warrior  can 
70a  mention?  What  of  him?  7.  What  of  the  Moors  after  his  death?  Wlio  rode 
fit  the  head  of  the  Spaniards  ?  8.  How  were  the  Moors  aft'ected  by  seeing  the  dead 
body  of  the  Cid  Campeador? 


EUROPE.  353 

9.  Many  otlier  wonderful  stories  are  told  about  tlie 
Moorisli  and  Spanisli  wars.  Sometimes,  it  is  said,  a 
saint  came  down  from  heaven  to  lead  tlie  Spaniards  to 
battle.  Sometimes  tlie  sun  stood  still  tliat  they  might 
have  time  to  kill  their  enemies.  Sometimes  they  were 
encouraged  by  the  appearance  of  a  blazing  cross  in 
the  sky.  * 

10.  But  these  are  fables.  It  is  certain,  however,  that 
the  Moors  gradually  lost  their  Spanish  territories,  till 
nothing  remained  to  them  except  Granada.  And,  in 
the  reign  of  Ferdinand  and  Isabella,  they  were  wholly 
driven  out  of  Spain.  This  event  took  place  in  1492, 
nearly  eight  centuries  after  the  overthrow  of  king 
Eoderick  the  Goth. 


CHAPTER   C— Europe   Continued. 
TliG  Sjpanish  Inquisition, 

1.  The  reign  of  Ferdinand  and  Isabella  was  disgraced 
by  the  establishment  of  the  Spanish  Inquisition.  The 
design  of  this  horrible  institution  was  to  j)revent  the 
people  from  adopting  any  but  the  Catholic  religion. 

9.  "Wliat  stories  are  told  of  the  Moorisli  and  Spanish  wars?      10.  What  at  lai^t 
remained  to  the  Moors?     When  were  the  Moors  driven  out  of  Spain  ? 

CiiA*TKiiC.— 1.  When  was  the  Inquisition  established?     What  was  its  design? 


354  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

2.  Persons  who  were  suspected  of  being  heretics 
were  thrown  into  damp  and  dismal  dungeons.  They 
were  then  brought  before  the  inquisitors,  who  sat  com- 
pletely covered  with  long  robes  and  hoods  of  sack- 
cloth. Their  faces  were  invisible;  but  they  looked  at 
the  prisoners  through  two  holes  in  their  sackcloth 
hoods.  — 

3.  If  the  accused  persons  would  not  plead  guilty, 
they  were  tortured  in  various  ways.  Sometimes  they 
were  drawn  up  to  the  roof  of  the  chamber  by  a  rope, 
and  after  hanging  a  considerable  time,  the  rope  was 
loosened,  so  that  they  fell  almost  to  the  floor. 

4.  The  rope  was  then  suddenly  tightened  again,  and 
the  prisoner's  limbs  were  put  out  of  joint  by  the  shock. 
If  he  still  refused  to  confess,  the  inquisitors  rubbed  his 
feet  with  lard,  and  roasted  them  before  a  fire.  In 
short,  their  cruelties  were  too  dreadful  to  be  told. 

5.  When  the  inquisitors  had  satisfied  themselves 
with  torturing  their  prisoners,  they  prepared  to  burn 
them.  The  condemned  persons  walked  in  a  proces- 
sion, dressed  in  garments  which  were  painted  with 
flames.  On  their  breasts  they  wore  their  own  like- 
nesses, in  the  act  of  being  devoured  by  serpents  and 
wild  beasts. 


^.  How  were  suspected  persons  treated  ?    Describe  the  inquisitors.      3,  4.  How 
vi'ere  the  accused  persons  tortured? 


EUROPE.  355 

6.  When  they  reached  the  place  of  execution,  the 
victims  were  fastened  to  a  stake  with  ii'on  chains,  and 
roasted  to  death  by  a  slow  fire.  They  sometimes  suf- 
fered the  agony  of  this  toi-nient  for  two  or  three  hours, 
before  death  relieved  them. 

7.  Such  were  the  horrors  of  the  Inquisition ;  yet  it 
was  introduced  into  Italy  and  other  Catholic  countries, 
and  continued  in  operation  for  nearly  three  hundred 
years.  Between  thirty  and  forty  thousand  persons 
were  burnt  alive  before  the  Inquisition  was  abolished. 

8.  The  remembrance  of  the  Inquisition  will  ever 
cause  a  stain  to  rest  upon  the  reign  of  Ferdinand  and 
Isabella.  It  was  the  greatest  glory  of  this  king  and 
queen,  that  they  gave  Christopher  Columbus  the  means 
of  discovering  America.  But  Columbus  died  in  abso- 
lute misery,  as  the  reward  of  his  discovery ! 

9.  The  Spaniards  made  great  conquests  in  America. 
The  riches  of  the  country  were  in  this  way  much  in- 
creased, and  there  was  more  silver  and  gold  in  Spain 
than  in  all  the  rest  of  Europe.  But  it  is  doubtful 
whether  Spain  ever  derived  any  real  benefit  from  her 


5,  6.  Describe  the  burning  of  the  prisoners.  T.  How  long  did  the  Inquisition 
continue  in  operation  ?  How  many  persons  were  burnt  ?  8.  What  of  the  reign 
of  Ferdinand  and  Isabella  ?  What  was  the  glory  of  their  reign  ?  "What  was  tlie 
fate  of  Columbus ?  9.  What  of  the  Spaniards  in  America?  What  of  the  riches 
of  Spain  ?    Were  the  American  colonies  any  benefit  to  Spain  ? 


356  UNIYERSAL  HISTORY. 

American  colonies ;  for  instead  of  staying  at  home  to 
cultivate  the  soil,  the  inhabitants  crossed  the  ocean  in 
search  of  gold  and  silver. 


CHAPTER   CI.— Europe   Continued. 

The  Inmncible  Armada. — Curious  Death  of  a  Spanish  Kimj. 
— Recent  Affairs  of  Spain. 

1.  One  of  the  most  powerful  monarchs  of  Spain  was 
Philip  the  Second.  He  was  not  only  king  of  Spain, 
but  he  obtained  the  crown  of  Portugal  also,  in  1580 ; 
but  Portugal  afterward  became  a  separate  kingdom 
again.  It  had  fii^t  been  declared  independent  of  Spain 
at  the  beginning  of  ^the  twelfth  century. 

2.  Philip  intended  to  conquer  England,  and  prepared 
a  fleet  of  eighty  ships  for  that  pui'pose.  This  fleet  was 
called  the  Invincible  Armada.  But  it  was  conquered 
even  without  a  battle,  for  a  storm  scattered  it,  and 
drove  many  of  the  ships  on  the  British  coast. 

\      3.  The  son  of  Philip  was  a  weak-niiiided  man.     The 
manner  of  his  death  was  very  singular.     He  was  sit- 


Chapter   CI.— 1.  What  of  Philip  IL?    What  of  Portugal?     2.  What  ofthe 
Invincible  Armada? 


'    EUROPE.  357 

ting,  one  day,  in  the  council  chamber,  wliicli  was 
warmed  by  a  large  stove.  The  heat  and  vapor  of  the 
stove  affected  his  head. 

4.  He  ordered  the  attendants  to  quench  the  iire. 
But  the  ]3erson  whose  duty  it  was  to  do  this  happened 
not  to  be  in  the  chamber,  and  the  rules  of  the  Spanish 
court  were  so  strict,  that  it  would  have  been  unlawfid 
for  any  other  person  to  touch  the  fire. 

5.  Moreover,  it  would  have  been  beneath  the  king's 
dignity  to  leave  the  chamber,  or  even  to  move  his  chair 
back  from  the  stove.  So  the  fire  continued  to  grow 
hotter,  and  the  poor  king  grew  sicker  and  sicker,  till  at 
last  it  was  impossible  to  cure  him.  And  thus  he  died, 
by  a  kind  of  death  that  could  have  befallen  nobody 
but  a  Spanish  king. 

6.  In  the  year  1700,  Charles  the  Second  of  Spain 
died  without  children.  He  was  succeeded  by  a  young 
French  prince,  named  Philip,  duke  of  Anjou,  the  grand- 
son of  Louis  the  Fourteenth.  The  kings  of  this  family 
are  called  •the  Spanish  Bourbons. 

7.  This  event  caused  a  long  war  in  Europe.  Charles, 
archduke  of  Austria,  claimed  the  crown  of  Spain,  and 
he  and  Philip  of  Anjou  alternately  drove  each  other 

3-5.  Descriiie  the  death  of  Pliilip's  son.  6.  "VVliat  happened  in  the  year  1700? 
Who  succeeded  Charles  II.  ?  Who  were  the  Spanish  Bourbons?  T.  Why  did 
Cliarles  and  Philip  go  to  war  ?     Who  triumphed  ? 


358  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

out  of  Madrid.     But  Philip  finally  kept  liis  seat  on  the 
throne. 

8.  Spain  has  often  been  at  war  with  England.  She 
united  with  France  against  that  country  during  the 
American  Revolution;  but  peace  was  concluded  in 
1783.  Another  war,  however,  began  between  England 
and  France  about  ten  years  afterward. 

9.  In  1808,  when  the  emperor  Napoleon  was  at  the 
height  of  his  power,  he  compelled  the  Spanish  king  to 
abdicate  his  throne.  The  name  of  this  king  was  Fer^ 
dinand  the  Seventh.  Napoleon  then  j)laced  the  crown 
of  Spain  upon  the  head  of  his  own  brother,  Joseph 
Bonaparte. 

10.  But  most  of  the  Spaniards  refused  to  acknowl- 
edge king  Joseph  as  their  sovereign.  A  bloody  war 
ensued.  The  English  government  sent  armies  into 
Spain  and  Portugal  ;*  and  it  was  there  that  Lord  Wel- 
lington gained  his  first  victories  over  the  French. 

11.  Ferdinand,  the  old  Spanish  king,  was  replaced 
upon  the  throne  in  1814.     He  was,  however,  a  tyrant 


8.  What  of  Spain  and  England?  When  was  peace  concluded  between  France 
and  England?  9.  What  did  Napoleon  compel  the  Spanish  king  to  do  in  1808? 
Who  was  Ferdinand  VII.  ?  Whom  did  Napoleon  make  king  of  Spain?  10.  AVhat 
of  the  Spaniards  ?  What  of  the  EngHsh  government  ?  What  of  Lord  WelHngton  ? 
li.  When  was  Ferdinand  replaced  upon  the  throne?  What  of  him?  When  did 
he  dio  ? 


EUROPE.  359 

and  a  bigot,  and  Ms  reign  was  mischievous  to  tlie  coun- 
try.    His  death  took  place  in  1833. 

12.  After  this,  Spain  was  ravaged  by  a  civil  war  be- 
tween Don  Carlos  and  the  young  queen  Maria  Isabella. 
Three  or  four  hundred  thousand  persons  are  supposed 
to  have  been  killed  in  this  war.  Isabella,  under  the 
title  of  Isabella  IL,  was  soon  after  established  upon 
the  throne,  which  she  still  occupies  (1860). 


CHAPTER  CII.— Europe    Continued. 
A  short  Stwy  about  Portugal. 

1.  Portugal  lies  to  the  west  of  Spain,  and  is  bound- 
ed on  the  west  by  the  Atlantic  ocean.  The  popula- 
tion of  the  country  is  nearly  four  millions.  The 
capital  is  Lisbon.  This  is  a  large  city,  and  many 
of  our  vessels  visit  it  for  the  purpose  of  getting  wines, 
grapes,  oranges,  and  lemons. 

2.  The  climate  of  Portugal  is  similar  to  that  of 
Spain.  The  people  also  resemble  the  Spaniards,  but 
speak  a  language  somewhat  different.     The  Portuguese 

12.  What  of  a  civil  war  in  Spain  ?     Wlio  is  now  queen  ? 

Chapter  CII. — 1.  Boundaries  of  Portugal  ?     Population  ?    Wliat  o^  I^isbon  ?    2- 
Climate  of  Portugal  ?     The  people  ?    Language  ? 


360  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

are  very  ignorant,  and  as  tliey  seldom  read,  tliey  have 
plenty  of  time  for  dancing. 

3.  Portugal  was  originally  considered  a  part  of 
Spain,  and  shared  in  tlie  events  of  that  country.  In 
the  twelfth  century,  it  became  independent.  Since 
that  time  it  has  been  considered  a  separate  kingdom, 
though  it  has  been  subject  to  Spain  for  a  portion  of 
this  period. 

4.  The  history  of  Portugal  is  of  little  interest  till 
about  the  year  1400,  when  the  Portuguese  took  the 
lead  in  navigating  the  Atlantic  ocean.  At  that  time, 
this  great  sea  was  little  known,  and  nobody  had  gone 
across  it  to  America,  nor  had  any  one  dared  to  sail 
around  Africa. 

5.  But  the  little  Portuguese  vessels  ventured  out 
further  and  further,  and  finally  one  of  them  reached 
the  Cape  of  Good  Hope.  After  this,  a  Portuguese 
fleet  passed  entirely  around  Africa,  crossed  the  Indian 
ocean,  and  reached  India. 

6.  These  wonderful  adventures  and  discoveries  ex- 
cited other  nations,  and  in  a  few  years  Christopher  Co- 
lumbus  discovered   America.     Thus    the   Portuguese 

3.  What  of  Portugal?  When  did  it  become  independent?  What  of  Portugal 
since  the  twelfth  century?  4.  What  of  the  Portuguese  after  about  1400?  What, 
of  the  Atlantic  at  this  time  ?  6.  What  of  the  Portuguese  vessels  ?  Their  discov- 
eries ? 


EUROPE.  361 

may  be  considered  a^  having  led  tlie  way  to  the  dis- 
covery of  this  vast  continent  on  which  we  live,  and 
which 'Was  unknown  to  the  people  of  Europe,  Asia, 
and  Africa,  till  the  year  1492. 

7.  I  need  not  tell  you  of  what  happened  in  Portugal 
from  this  time  till  the  year  1755.  x\t  that  date,  an 
earthquake  took  place  which  shook  down  nearly  the 
whole  city  of  Lisbon.  Houses,  churches,  and  palaces 
were  suddenly  tumbled  into  heaps  of  ruins.  Large 
chasms  were  opened  in  the  earth,  and  hundreds  of 
houses  were  plunged  into  them.  The  sea  at  first  roll- 
ed back  from  the  land,  and  then  returned,  sweeping 
every  thing  before  it.  In  this  awful  calamity,  ten  thou- 
sand persons  lost  their  lives. 

8.  The  Portuguese  founded  a  good  many  colonies  in 
different  parts  of  the  world.  One  of  these  was  in 
Brazil,  in  South  America.  To  this  place  the  king  of 
Portugal  retired  with  his  family  in  1807,  and  estab- 
lished his  court  at  Rio  Janeiro,  the  capital  of  the  coun- 
try. This  was  done  because  Portugal  had  been  inva- 
ded by  the  French. 

9.  The  French  beino:  driven  out  in   1808,  the  kini? 

6.  What  consequences  fol  owed  the  Portuguese  discoveries?  Wliat  of  America 
till  1492?  7.  -What  liappened  in  1755  ?  Describe  the  earthquake.  8.  Colonies  of 
Portugal?  What  of  the  king  of  Portugal ?  When  and  why  did  hQ  remove  to 
Brazil  ? 


362 


UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


returned  in  a  few  years.  After  •his  death  there  ^vas  a 
struggle  for  the  crown,  but  it  was  finally  settled  upon 
Maria  II.,  from  whom  it  descended  to  Pedro  Y.,  the 
present  sovereign. 


CHAPTER    CIIL— Europe    Continued. 
Chronology  of  Turkey^  Sjmin  and  Poi'tugal. 


B,  c. 
The   Phoenicians     trade    to    Spain 

about 900 

The  Cartliaginiaus  make  conquests 

in  Spain  about   ". ,  500 

Hannibal  attacks  Sagunturn  in  Spain  2 1 9 

Spain  su))jected  to  the  Roman  power  206 

A.  D, 

Spain  invaded  by  northern  barba- 
rians   406 

Kingdom  of  the  Visigoths  founded 


\\\  bpam. 


419 

Roderick,   king   of  Spain,   defeated 

by  the  Moors U2 

Tlie  Moors  defeated  by  Charles  Mar- 

tel,  king  of  France 713 

Portugal  subjected  by  the  Moors ...    T 1 3 

Kingdom  of  Portugal   founded 1139 

The  Tartars  take  Bagdad 1258 

Othman  first  emperor  of  Turkey. .  .1268 

Ottoman  empire  founded .1299 

Sultan  Bajazet  begins  to  reign 1389 

Bajazet  taken  by  Tamerlane 1402 

The  Turks  take  Constantinople. . .  .1453 
Inquisition  established  in  Spain.  .  .I%r8 
The  Portuguese  discover  the  Cape 

of  Good  Hope 1481 

The  Moors  of  Granada  driven  out 

of  Spain 1492 


A.  D 

America- discovered  by  Columbus.  .1493 
The  Portuguese  discover  Brazil. . .  .1501 
Tlie  sultan  Sehm  began  to  reign.. .  .1512 
PhiUp  XL  ascended   tlio  throne  of 

Spain 1580 

Mahomet  III.  ascends  the  Turkish 

throne 1596 

Portugal    becomes   independent  of 

Spain 1604 

The    Moors    finally  expelled   from 

Spain 1620 

Amurath  IV.  emperor  of  Turkey.  .1621 
Lisbon  destroyed  by  an  carLhquakel755 
Peace  between  Spain  and  England.  1783 

King  of  Portugal  goes  to  Brazil 1807 

Napoleon   reuioves  Ferdinand  from 

the  throne  of  Spain 1808 

Inquisition  abolished  in  Portugal.  .1815 

Revolution  in  Portugal 1820 

Inquisition  abolished  in  Spain 1820 

Massacre  of  the  janizaries  in  Tur- 
key  1826 

Ferdinand  VII.,  king  of  Spain,  died,  1833 

Eastern  war  began 1853 

Capture  of  Sebastopol 1855 

Turkish  massacre  of  Christians  in 

Syria 1860 


9.  "What  followed  ?     Who  is  the  present  sovereign  ? 


EUROPE. 


363 


Questions  on  the  Map  of  France. — How  is  Franco  bounded?  Where  is 
Paris?  Give  the  direction  of  the  following  places  from  Paris:  Toulouse;  Brest; 
Havre;  Bordeaux;  Lyons;  Strasburg.  "Where  is  A^ersailles ?  Nantes?  Calais? 
Metz?  Narbonne?  Tours?  Nancy?  Orleans?  Lille?  Describe  the  river 
Rhone.  Tlie  Garonne.  The  Loire.  The  Marne.  The  Seine.  What  three  islands 
in  the  English  "channel?     Where  are  the  Pyrenees? 


364 


UXIYERSAL  mSTORY. 


SCENE  IN  FKANCK 


CIIAPTEE    CIY.— EuRorE  Continued. 

Description    of   France.  —  Its    Climate. — ClUes. — Mannfac- 
tures. — Manners  and  Customs  of  the  People. 

1.  Fka:xce  lies  in  tlie  western  part  of  Europe,  and 
contains  about  tliirty-six  millions  of  inliabitants. 
Paris,  tlie  capital,  is  a  very  large  city,  surrounded  with 
walls  of  stone.  It  is  full  of  fine  liouses,  beautiful  pub- 
lic gardens,  pleasant  walks,  liandsome'  streets,  and  in- 
teresting places  of  amusement.  To  a  stranger,  it  is  tlie 
most  agreeable  city  in  tlie  world. 


Chapter  CTV.— 1.  Where  is  France?    Its  population?     Describe  Paris.     What 
elrfc  ul   i'uri.s  ? 


EUROPE.  365 

2.  Besides  Paris,  tliere  are  a  great  many  otlier  large 
and  liandsome  cities  in  France.  Among  tliese  are 
Kouen,  wliere  tlie  people  manufacture  a  great  deal  of 
handsome  jewelry ;  Lyons,  wliere  ttiey  make  ])eautifal 
silks  ;  Bordeaux,  wliere  the  people  deal  in  wines ;  and 
Marseilles,  in  tlie  midst  of  a  country  wliick  produces 
fine  grapes,  and  otlier  delicious  fruits. 

3.  Tlie  climate  of  France  is  about  tlie  same  as  that 
of  Pennsylvania,  Maryland,  and  Virginia.  The  soil  is 
fruitful,  and  yields  abundance  of  food  for  the  numerous 
inhabitants.  The  country  produces  many  kinds  of 
fruit  in  great  perfection,  such  as  cherries,  pears,  plums, 
peaches,  and  figs.  It  also  yields  immense  quantities  of 
grapes,  from  which  many  kinds  of  choice  wines  are 
produced. 

4.  The  people  of  France  are  very  gay  and  cheerful. 
They  live  a  great  deal  in  the  open  air,  and  it  is  com- 
mon in  all  parts  of  the  country  to  see  both  men  and 
women  at  work  in  the  fields.  They  do  not  labor  very 
hard,  and  during  the  holidays,  of  which  they  have  a 
great  many,  they  walk  about  the  streets,  and  dance  in 
the  public  gardens  or  squares. 

5.  If  the  French  are  not  the  wisest  people  in  the 

2.  What  of  Rouen?  What  of  Lyons?  What  of  Marseilles?  What  of  Bor- 
deaux? 3.  Chmate  of  France  ?  Soil?  Productions?  4.  Character  and  man- 
ners of  the  French  people  ? 


866  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

world,  tliey  seem  to  enjoy  themselves  better  than  most 
others.  They  are  fond  of  music,  and  delight  to  get 
together,  and  talk  about  all  sorts  of  things.  They  are 
very  polite,  and  always  treat  strangers  with  particular 
civility.  The  gentlemen  are  very  courteous  to  the 
ladies,  and  the  ladies  in  return  take  every  means  in 
their  power  to  make  their  society  agreeable  to  the  gen- 
tlemen. 

6.  The  manufactures  of  France  are  numerous  and 
valuable.  The  people  have  an  excellent  fancy  in 
making  jewelry,  silks,  clocks,  watches,  and  many  other 
ornamental  articles.  These  are  sent  to  all  parts  of  the 
world,  and  though  they  may  not  be  considered  veiy 
necessary,  yet  they  give  a  great  deal  of  pleasure,  and 
thus  have  their  use. 

Y.  The  French  people  are  fond  of  dress,  and  the 
dress-makers  of  Paris  set  the  fashions  for  the  rest  of 
the  world.  The  milliners  and  mantua-makers  of  this 
city  have  more  followers  than  any  king  that  ever 
lived;  for  the  gowns  and  bonnets  of  all  the  ladies  of 
Europe  and  America  are  made  according  to  their  direc- 
tion. 

8.  The  French  nation,  on  the  whole,  are  a  very  inter- 

5.  What  of  the  gentlemen?  The  ladies?  6.  Manufactures  of  France?  What 
is  the  use  of  the  fancy  articles  manufactured  in  France  ?  7.  What  of  the  French  as 
to  dress?     Milliners  and  mantua-makers  ? 


EUROPE.  367 

esting  people.  Tliough  tliey  might  seem  to  Le  frivo- 
lous and  tlioughtlesSj  yet  France  lias  produced  many 
great  men,  and  the  history  of  the  country  displays 
many  great  and  glorious  actions, 

9.  You  might  at  first  think  them  a  nation  of  fiddlers, 
dress-makers,  and  dancing  mastej^;  but  if  you  look 
deeper  into  their  character,  and  read  their  story  with 
attention,  you  will  see  that  perhaps  they  are  the  most 
warlike  nation  in  Europe,  and  that  if  they  spend  their 
time  in  amusement,  it  is  not  because  they  are  deficient 
in  genius  for  the  highest  pui^suits  of  the  mind. 


CHAPTER  CY.— Europe  Continued. 

About  the  Gauls  and  other  tribes  of  Barbarians. — ITow  the 
southern  parts  of  Europe  were  first  settled^  and  how  the 
northern  parts  were  settled  afterward. 

1.  In  the  course  of  this  history,  I  have  had  frequent 
occasion  to  mention  various  northern  tribes  of  Europe, 
called  Barbarians,  and  perhaps  I  shall  not  find  a  better 
opportunity  than  the  present  to  give  you  some  account 


8.  What  might  seem  to  be  the  character  of  the  French  ?     Wliat  does  their  his- 
tory display  ?     9.  What  of  their  talent  for  war?    Their  genius  for  other  things? 


368  UNIYERSAL  HISTORY. 

of  them.  You  remember  that  Greece  was  settled  be- 
fore any  other  part  of  Europe.  The  first  inhabitants 
were  the  descendants  of  Japheth.  The  descendants  of 
these  spread  themselves  over  Greece,  and  probably 
other  parts  of  Europe. 

2.  As  the  people  increased  along  the  shores  of  Asia 
and  Africa,  they  sent  colonies  to  different  places  along 
the  shores  of  the  Mediterranean.^  Some  settled  in 
Greece,  some  in  Italy,  some  in  Spain.  These  countries 
being  v^arm,  pleasant,  and  fruitful,  were  soon  filled  with 
inhabitants.  Living  upon  the  coast,  they  had  a  great 
many  ships,  and  carried  on  commerce  with  different 
countries. 

3.  In  this  way,  after  many  years,  they  grew  rich,  and 
built  large  cities,  with  fine  houses,  temples,  and  pal- 
aces. Such  was  the  course  of  events  in  regard  to  all 
southern  Europe,  of  which  I  have  been  telling  you  the 
story.  But  while  these  things  were  going  on,  various 
tribes  were  emigrating  into  the  more  northern  portions 
of  Europe. 

4..  Here  the  climate  was  colder,  and  the  soil  less 
fruitful.  Still  the  woods  were  full  of  elks,  rein-deer, 
fallow-deer,    roe-bucks,  wild    bulls,   wild    boars,    and 

Chapter  CV. — 1.  Wliat  of  Greece?  2.  How  were  the  shores  of  the  Mediter- 
ranean settled?  What  of  the  people  in  these  coiintries?  3.  How  were  the  northern 
portions  of  Europe  settled?  4.  Climate  and  soil  of  northern  Europe?  Wliat  fur- 
nished subisisteuce  to  the  inhabitants  ? 


EUROPE.  ■  3G9 

many  other  animals.  These  supplied  food  for  the  in- 
habitants, and  the  chase  furnished  excellent  sport  to 
the  adventurous  men  of  those  days. 

5.  Besides  all  this,  in  those  regions  unoccupied  by 
man,  the  land  cost  nothing,  and  whoever  would  come 
and  take  it  might  have  it.  These  circumstances  invited 
the  people  to  leave  the  soft,  sunny  regions  of  Greecej 
Italy,  Spain,  and  also  of  Asia,  for  the  colder  and  wilder 
realms  of  northern  Europe. 

6.  Thus  tribe  followed  tribe,  and  nation  followed  na- 
tion, until  the  whole  country  was  occupied,  from  the 
Mediterranean  on  the  south,  to  the  Arctic  sea  on  the 
north.  These  emigrants  were  savages,  and  of  a  war- 
like character ;  they  therefore  did  not  mingle  into  one 
great  nation,  but  each  tribe  remained  distinct.  As 
they  increased  in  numbers,  they  increased  in  power. 

7.  After  a  while,  something  would  happen  to  bring 
two  tribes  living  near  each  other  into  a  state  of  war. 
Fierce  battles  would  follow,  and  a  great  many  would 
be  killed.  Sometimes  one  tribe  would  be  vanquished, 
and  they  would  all  be  slaughtered,  reduced  to  a  state 
of  slavery,  or  driven  out  of  their  country. 

8.  Among  the  most  remarkable    of  these  northern 


5.  What  of  the  land?     "What  induced  the  people  to  settle  in  northern  Europe? 
6.  Did  the  various  tribes  unite  together?     7.  What  of  wars? 


370  •  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

tribes  were  the  Gauls,  ^^  ho  were  tlie  first  known  inlial>- 
itants  of  France ;  tlie  Franks  and  Suevi,  wlio  inhabited 
German}" ;  the  Goths  and  the  Vandals,  who  inhabited 
Norway,  Sweden,  and  Lapland,  and  afterward  estab- 
lished themselves  in  Germany;  and  the  Huns,  who 
lived  in  Hungary.  There  were  still  many  other  tribes, 
but  it  is  not  necessary  to  mention  them  here. 

9.  Well,  you  must  now  imagine  all  the  north-  of 
Europe  inhabited  by  these  wild  tribes.  Spending 
their  time  chiefly  in  the  chase,  or  in  war,  or  other  hardy 
pui^suits,  they  became  bold,  daring,  and  adventurous. 
Their  numbers  also  increased,  and  some  of  them  be- 
came powerful  nations. 

10.  They  were,  however,  restless,  and,  like  beasts  of 
prey,  were  constantly  looking  out  for  some  object  upon 
which  they  might  fall  and  devour  it.  So  things  went 
on,  till  at  length  these  barbarians  fixed  their  attention 
upon  the  rich  cities,  the  fertile  plains,  and  vine-clad 
hills  of  the  south  of  Europe. 

11.  The  Roman  empire  was  now  tottering  to  decay, 
and  the  Eoman  armies  were  no  longer  the  dread  of 
these  tribes.  About  the  year  400,  they  began  to  pour 
down  their  armies  upon  the  plains  of  Italy.     Alaiic, 

8.  Which  were  the  most  remarkable  of  the  noriliern  tribes?  9.  Describe  their 
mode  of  hfe.  10.  What  at  len<iih  ailracted  Uieir  aticntion?  11.  What  of  the 
lioiuan  einpiru?  Wlien  did  ihe  bailiai-iaii.s  aUack  llalj-  ?   AVliaL  of  Alaric  and  Auilu  ? 


EUROPE.  •  371 

king  of  tlie  Gotlis,  laid  Rome  under  contribution,  and 
less  than  fifty  years  after,  Attila,  king  of  the  Huns, 
threatened  tlie  same  city  with  destruction. 

12.  After,  this  period,  these  ruthless  invaders  con- 
tinued from  time  to  time  to  attack  the  southern  regions 
of  Europe,  till  they  made  themselves  masters  of  its 
finest  portions. 

13.  As  the  northern  barbarians  of  whom  I  have  been 
speaking  had  no  books,  and  wrote  no  histories,  their 
early  story  is  little  known.  After  getting  possession 
of  Rome,  Spain,  and  other  southern  portions  of  EurojDe, 
they  settled  in  these  countries. 

14.  For  a  time,  literature  and  learning,  the  arts  of 
poetry,  painting,  sculpture,  and  music,  which  had  been 
cultivated  by  the  Romans,  were  unknown  in  the  coun- 
tries where  they  once  flourished.  But,  by  degrees,  the 
new  inhabitants  became  civilized  and  polished,  and  the 
modern  nations  which  now  occupy  these  regions  may 
be  considered  as  in  part  their  descendants.  It  is  now 
time  to  proceed  with  the  history  of  France. 

12.  What  did  the  barbarians  continue  to  do?  13.  Where  did  the  northern  bar- 
barians settle?  14.  What  of  tliem  for  a  time  ?  What  happened  at  length?  What 
of  the  modern  nations  of  the  south  of  Europe  ? 


n'TQ 


72 


uxia'j:rsal  history. 


PllAKAilCXD. 


CIIAPTEH   CYl.— EuiioPE   Continued. 

TlhG    Gauls. — Origin   of  the   French   Nation. — Little   King 

Pepin. 

1.  The  ancient  name  of  France  was  Gaul,  and  tlie 
inlia})itants  were  called  Gauls.  These  were  one  of 
those  warlike  tribes  of  wliicli  I  have"  just  been  spenlv- 
ing.  At  a  very  early  date,  tliey  appear  to  have  been 
numerous  and  powerful.  In  the  year  390  B.  C,  tliey 
invaded  Kome  under  Brennus,  and  took  that  city,  but 
Avere  expelled  ])y  Camillus. 

2.  Under  another  Brennus,  they  invaded  Greece,  as  I 

Chapter  C VI. — l."\Vliat\vas  tlie  ancient  name  of 'f'rance  ?  Of  the  people'-'  Wliat 
did  Ihoy  do  under  Brennu.s  ? 


EUROPE.  373 

have  told  you.  In  the  reign  of  Julius  Caesar,  the 
Gauls  had  made  some  little  progress  towards  civiliza- 
tion ;  but  they  were  still  a  barbarous  people,  and  re- 
tained many  practices  that  belong  only  to  savages. 
They  had,  however,  a  good  many  cities,  and  these  were 
defended  by  strong  walls. 

3.  When  Caesar  entered  the  country,  he  found  the 
Gauls  sorely  pressed  by  some  of  the  German  tribes. 
At  first,  he  affected  to  be  the  deliverer  of  the  Gauls 
from  these  troublesome  enemies. 

4.  But  the  people  soon  discovered  that  Caesar's  real 
design  was  to  conquer  them.  They  then  began  to  re- 
sist, and  for  nine  long  years  they  fought  Caesar  and 
liis  armies  with  admirable  skill  and  spirit.  But  the 
Homans  were  better  versed  in  the  art  of  war  than  their 
enemies.  Their  soldiers  were  better  trained,  and  their 
implements  of  war  were  superior  to  those  of  the  Gauls. 

5.  Notwithstanding  all  this,  so  brave  and  obstinate 
were  the  Gauls  in  the  defence  of  their  country,  that  it 
required  all  the  genius  of  Julius  Caesar,  one  of  the 
greatest  leaders  that  ever  lived,  aided  by  the  immense 
power  of  Bome,  to  subdue  them. 

2.  Under  whom  did  they  invade  Greece  ?  What  of  tliera  in  the  tirae  of  Juhus 
C«sar?     What  of  their  cities?     3.  What  did  Ca\sar  lind  on  entering  the  country? 

4.  What  did  the  people  soon  discover  ?  What  did  they  do  ?    Wliat  of  the  Komaas  ? 

5.  What  of  the  Gauls?     What  vv^as  required  to  subdue  them? 


3Y4  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

6.  Caesar  was  occupied  no  less  tlian  nine  year,=i  in 
conquering  tlie  Gauls,  and  it  is  supposed  tliat  a  million 
of  men  were  slain  in  the  bloody  struggle.  From  tlie 
time  of  Caesar's  conquest,  about  50  years  B.  C,  Gaul 
was  a  Roman  province,  and  the  people  gradually 
adopted  the  manners  and  customs  of  the  Komans. 
Even  their  language  became  changed,  and  assumed  a 
resemblance  to  the  Latin.  But  between  the  third  and 
fourth  century,  the  Franks,  a  German  tribe  whom  I 
have  mentioned,  got  possession  of  the  greater  part  of 
Gaul. 

7.  It  is  said  that  the  Franks  who  fii^st  established 
themselves  in  Gaul  Avere  led  by  Pharamond.  He  died 
in  428,  and  was  succeeded  by  his  son  Clodian,  who  was 
celebrated  for  the  beauty  of  his  hair.  Clodian  died  in 
448,  and  was  succeeded  by  Merovius;  Merovius  died 
in  458,  and  was  succeeded  by  Childeric.  Very  little  i^ 
known  of  these  kings,  except  the  last. 


6.  What  was  the  consequence  of  this  struggle  between  the  Gauls  and  Roraana'" 
"What  of  Gaul  from  this  time?  What  of  the  Franks  ?  7.  Pharamond?  Clodian f 
Merovius  ?     What  of  these  kings  ? 


EUROPE.  375 


CHAPTEE  CYII.— Europe  Continued. 
About  Clovis  and  little  King  Pepin. 

1.  CiiiLBEEio  is  considered  tlie  founder  of  tlie  Frencli 
monarchy.  He  was  succeeded  by  Ms  son  Clovis. 
When  Clovis  was  only  nineteen  years  old,  he  drove  the 
Komans  out  of  France.  He  afterward  gained  a  great 
victory  over  the  Germans. 

2.  As  Clovis  had  married  a  Christian  princess,  he 
attributed  his  success  to  the  Grod  whom  she  worship- 
ped. He  therefore  determined  to  become  a  Christian 
himself,  and  he  was  baptized,  with  three  thousand  of 
his  subjects,  on  Christmas  day,  in  the  year  496.  After 
the  death  of  Clovis,  France  was  divided  among  several 
petty  kings.  They  quarrelled  among  themselves,  and 
caused  great  trouble  to  the  nation.  The  wife  of  one 
of  them  was  accused  of.  murdering  ten  kings,  or  chil- 
dren of  kings. 

3.  Little  king  Pepin,  otherwise  called  Pepin  the 
Short,  thrust  all  the  other  kings  from  their  thrones, 
and  made  himself  sole  ruler  of  France.     He  was  a  very 

Chapter  CVIL— 1.  Who  was  Childeric?  What  of  Clovis  ?  2.  Why  did  Clovis 
determine  to  become  a  Christian  ?  When  was  he  baptized  ?  What  of  France  after 
his  death  ?     What  of  the  kings? 

17 


376  UNIYERSAL  HISTORY. 

small  man,  being  only  four  feet  and  a  half  high ;  lout 
he  had  a  mighty  spirit  in  that  little  body. 

4.  Moreover,  he  had  an  enormous  deal  of  strength. 
Knowing^  that  some  of  his  courtiers  made  fun  of  his 
little  size,  he  resolved  to  show  them  that  there  was  as 
much  manhood  in  him  as  there  could  possibly  be  in  a 
giant.  He  therefore  invited  them  to  see  a  fight  between 
a  lion  and  a  bull. 

5.  The  lion  gave  a  tremendous  roar,  and  leaped  upon 
the  bull's  back,  sticking  his  claws  deep  info  the  ilesh. 
The  bull  also  roared  with  pain  and  terror,  as  well  he 
might.  Then  little  king  Pepin  stood  on  tiptoe  on  his 
throne,  to  make  himself  as  tall  as  he  could;  and  he 
roared  out  to  his  courtiers,  full  as  loud  as  either  the 
bull  or  the  lion: 

6.  "  Which  of  you  all,"  cried  he, "  will  make  the  lion 
let  go  his  hold?"  The  courtiers  all  stood  silent  and 
abashed;  for  they  had  no  notion  of  venturing  within 
reach  of  the  lion's  claws.  "Then  I'll  do  it  myself!" 
said  king  Pepin  the  Short.  So  the  valiant  little  king 
leaped  down  from  his  throne,  and  drew  a  sword  almost 

y  as  long  as  himself  Brandishing  it  in  the  air,  he  ran 
up  to  the  lion,  who  was  still  clinging  to  the  mad  bull's 
back. 

'.\.  1.  Describe  the  little  king  Pepin.   What  did  he  invite  his  people  to  see  ?    5-7. 
lit'lnie  king  Pepin's  encounter  with  the  lion. 


EUROPE.  377 

7.  "VYlien  tlie  lion  beheld  this  terrible  small  cliam- 
pion,  lie  opened  his  enormous  jaws,  as  if  lie  meant  to 
snap  bim  np  at  a  single  mouthful.  But  little  king 
Pepin  dealt  him  a  blow  with  his  sword,  and  hit  him 
square  upon  the  neck. 

8.  Down  fell  the  lion's  head  on  one  side  of  the  bull, 
and  down  fell  his  body  on  the  other !  And  from  that 
time  forward,  the  courtiers  would  sooner  have  taken  a 
roaring  lion  by  the  mane,  than  have  laughed  at  little 
king  Pepin. 

8.  How  did  his  bravery  affect  his  courtiers? 


878 


UNRH^^RSAL  HISTORY. 


CUAllLEMAGNE. 


CHAPTER  CYIII.— Europe  Continued. 


The  reign  of  Charlemagne. 

1.  Kii^G  Pepin  the  Little  liad  a  son  wlio  was  called 
Charlemagne,  or  Charles  the  Great.  The  epithet  was 
given  him  because  he  was  a  mighty  king  and  conqueror, 
but  he  also  deserved  it  on  account  of  his  height,  which 
was  not  an  inch  less  than  seven  feet. 
.  2.  Charlemagne  used  to  wear  a  sheepskin  cloak. 
Whenever  he  saw  his  courtiers  richly  dressed,  he  in- 
vited them  to  go  a-hunting  with  him.     Charlemagne 

Chapter  CVIII.— 1.  Who  was  Charlemagne  ?     2.  What  of  his  dress?     That  of 
his  courtiers? 


EUROPE.  379 

took  care  to  lead  the  way  tlirougli  all  tlie  tliorns  and 
buslies  lie  could  find,  on  purpose  that  his  courtiers 
might  tear  their  fine  clothes  in  following  him. 

3.  This  king  was  continually  at  war.  He  subjugated 
the  Saxons,  and  other  tribes  who  lived  in  Germany. 
He  likewise  made  conquests  in  Spain  and  Italy.  At 
length,  ruling  over  France,  Germany,  and  other  coun- 
tries, he  wished  for  the  title  of  Emperor  of  the  West. 

4.  Accordingly,  he  went  to  E-ome,  and  knelt  down 
at  the  high  altar  of  the  church  as  if  to  say  his  prayers." 
There  was  a  large  congregation  in  the  church,  and  they 
were  much  edified  by  the  devout  behavior  of  Chai'le- 
magne.  But  while  he  was  kneeling,  the  pope  stole 
softly  behind  him,  and  placed  the  Imperial  crown  upon 
his  head. 

5.  This  was  the  crown  which  all  the  old  emperors 
of  Rome  had  worn,  and  when  the  people  beheld  it  on 
the  head  of  Charlemagne,  they  shout  3d  "  Long  live  the 
emperor !"  Charlemagne  pretended  to  be  surprised  and 
angry;  but  he  took  care  to  keep  the  imperial  crown 
upon  his  head. 

6.  Charlemagne  died  in  the  year  814,  when  he  was 
quite    an   old   man.     While  he  was    alive,   as  I   have 


3.  What  of  Charlemagne's  wars?     Over  what  countries  did  he  reign  ?     WhAt 
did  he  wish  ?    4,  5.  What  did  he  do  ?     Describe  his  coronation. 


380  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

mentioned,  lie  wore  a  slieepskin  cloak.  But  after  lie 
was  dead,  his  attendants  dressed  him  in  robes  of  im- 
perial purple. 

7.  They  placed  a  throne  of  gold  in  his  sepulchre,  and 
set  the  dead  body  of  the  gray-bearded  old  emperor  upon 
it.  A  sword  was  girded  about  his  waist.  He  had  a 
golden  crown  upon  his  head,  a  golden  sceptre  and 
shield  at  his  feet,  a  golden  chalice  in  his  hand,  and  a 
Bible  upon  his  knees. 

''.  8.  Over  the  sepulchre,  there  was  a  magnificent  tri- 
umphal arch,  w^ith  an  inscription  to  the  memory  of  the 
mighty  Charlemagne.  And  having  wasted  all  this 
splendor  upon  the  senseless  corpse,  the  attendants  shut 
up  the  tomb,  and  went  to  pay  their  court  to  Charle- 
magne's successor, 

9.  This  was  his  son,  entitled  Louis  the  Mild.  I  know 
not  wherefore  he  was  called  the  Mild,  for  one  of  the 
acts  of  his  reign  was  to  put  out  the  eyes  of  another 
king,  whom  he  had  taken  prisoner.  When  Louis  died, 
he  left  his  dominions  to  his  three  sons.  They  immedi- 
ately went  to  war  with  each  other.  It  is  said  that  a 
hundred  thousand  men  were  slain  in  one  of  their 
battles. 


6.  When  did  Charlemagne  die  ?  7.  How  was  his  body  dressed  for  his  burial? 
8.  What  was  put  over  the  sepulchre?  9.  Who  was  Louis  the  Mild?  What  of 
hira  ?    What  of  his  three  sons  ? 


EUROPE. 


381 


10.  Some  of  tlie  succeeding  kings  of  France  were 
Charles  the  Bald,  Louis  the  Stammerer,  Charles  the 
Fat,  Charles  the  Simple,  Louis  the  Foreigner,  and  Hugh 
Capet.  These  sovereigns  performed  no  actions  that 
need  be  recorded  in  my  book. 


CRUSADER  AND  SARACEN  FIGHTING, 


CHAPTER  CIX.— Europe   Continued. 

About  the  Crusades^  or  Holy  Wars. 

1.  I  MUST  now  give  you  some  account  of  the  Cru- 
sades, or  Holy  Wars,  undertaken  by  the  European 
nations  for  the  recovery  of  Jerusalem,  which  was  in 

10.  Who  were  some  of  the  succeeding  kings  of  France  ? 

Chapter  CIX.— 1.  What  were  the  crusades?     Why  were  they  undertaken? 
Why  did  the  Christians  reverence  Jerusalem  ? 


382  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

the  hands  of  the  Turks.  The  Christians  had  a  great 
reverence  for  this  city,  for  here  Christ  preached,  here 
he  performed  many  miracles,  and  here  he  was  buried. 

2.  On  account  of  the  pious  reverence  entertained  for 
what  they  called  the  Holy  City,  many  Christian  pil- 
grims went  on  foot  to  visit  it.  It  was  very  common 
for  the  Roman  Catholic  priests  to  impose  this  pilgrim- 
age on  persons  who  had  committed  some  sin,  and  they 
were  made  to  believe  that  in  this  way  alone  they  could 
receive  pardon  of  God. 

3.  Now  the  pilgrims  to  Jerusalem  were  often  treated 
Avith  cruelty  and  scorn  by  the  Turks  who  held  posses- 
sion of  Jerusalem  and  the  country  around  it.  The  pil- 
grims returned  to  Europe,  and  gave  an  account  of  the 
treatment  they  received.  This  excited  the  indignation 
of  the  Christians,  and  they  were  easily  induced  to  unite 
in  a  great  effort  for  taking  the  Holy  Land  from  the  in- 
fidel Turks. 

4.  The  pope  of  Rome  at  this  time  had  vast  influence, 
and  he  wished  to  acquire  more.  When  this  project 
was  proposed,  therefore,  he  gave  it  his  sanction,  tliink- 
ing  that  he  should  extend  his  dominion  over  Palestine, 
if  the  country  should  be  taken. 

2.  What  of  pngriraagea  to  Jerusalem?  3.  How  were  the  pilgrims  treated?  Wliat 
did  they  do  ?  What  was  the  cousequence  of  their  representations?  4.  What  oftbo 
pope  of  Rome? 


EUROPE.  383 

5.  Peter  tlie  Plermlt  was  tlie  principal  agent  in  ex- 
citing tlie  people  to  the  first  crusade.  He  was  a  half- 
starved  monk,  and  went  about  bareheaded,  with  a  rope 
round  his  waist,  and  wearing  a  garment  of  coarse 
cloth.  This  was  so  short  that  it  barely  covered  his 
body,  leaving  his  arms  and  legs  naked. 

6.  It  might  seem  that  such  a  scarecrow  as  this  would 
rather  have  excited  ridicule  than  reverence.  But 
Peter  had  been  in  Palestine,  and  had  experienced  the 
insults  of  the  Turks.  He  therefore  spoke  of  things 
he  had  seen,  and  the  people  listened  with  a  willing 
sympathy. 

7.  Thus  Peter  went  from  city  to  city,  and  everywhere 
crowds  came  to  hear  hjm.  There  was  soon  such  a  state 
of  excitement,  that  the  princes  assembled,  and  armies 
were  speedily  gathered  for  the  enterprise.  Thus  in 
the  year  1096,  Peter  set  out  with  two  hundred  thou- 
sand men  at  his  heels.  He  carried  a  ponderous  cross 
upon  his  shoulders,  and  his  followers  wore  crosses  of 
red  cloth  sewed  upon  their  clothes. 

8.  But  scarcely  had  this  army  landed  in  Asia,  when 
sultan  Solyman  attacked  them,  and  made  a  terrible 
slaughter.     As  a  trophy  of  his  victory  over  the  poor 

5.  Describe  Peter  the  Hermit.  6.  What  of  him  ?  1.  What  effect  had  his  preach- 
ing ?  What  took  place  in  1096  ?  8.  Who  attacked  the  army  in  Asia  ?  What  did 
the  sultan  do  ?    What  of  other  crusaders  ? 


384 


UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


wretclies,  lie  built  a  pyramid  of  their  bones.     Other 
armies  of  crusaders  met  with  similar  misfortunes. 


GODFllEY  OP  BOULOGNE. 


9.  It  is  computed  that  eight  hundred  and^  fifty  thou* 
j^dnd  Christians  lost  their  lives  in  the  course  of  this 


9.  "What  of  the  loss  of  life  iu  the  lirst  crusade  ? 


EUROPE.  885 

first  crusade.     And  all  tliis  slaugliter.took  j)lace  before 
tliey  liad  even  come  in  sight  of  Jerusalem. 

10.  There  was  another  army,  however,  belonging 
to  the  first  crusade,  that  had  better  success.  This 
consisted  of  eighty  thousand  men,  and  was  led 
by  a  French  prince  called  Godfrey  of  Boulogne. 
He  proceeded  through  Asia  Minor,  took  several  cities, 
and  captured  Jerusalem  in  1099.  From  this  period 
till  the  year  1187,  the  Holy  City  remained  in  the 
hands  of  the  Christians,  when  it  was  again  captured 
by  the  Turks,  in  whose  hands  it  has  since  remained. 

11.  No  less  than  five  other  crusades  took  place,  the 
last  being  commenced  in  1248.  This,  like  most  of 
the  others,  proved  unsuccessful.  The  whole  number 
of  men  who  lost  their  lives  in  these  wild  expeditions, 
was  not  less  than  two  millions. 

12.  It  appears  that  many  of  the  crusaders  were 
good  men,  and  some,  perhaps,  were  wise  ones.  Sev- 
eral of  the  leaders  were  brave  knights,  and  they  went 
forth  clad  in  bright  steel  armor,  and  mounted  upon 
fine  horses.  But  a  large  portion  of  the  armies  were 
of  a  different  character.     Some  were  half  crazy  people 

10.  What  of  the  army  under  Godfrey  of  Boulogne?  What  city  did  ho  take? 
When  did  the  Turks  retake  Jerusalem?  11.  How  many  crusades  ^vere  there? 
When  was  the  first  crusade  begun?  The  last?  How  many  men  lost  their  lives 
in  the  crusades  ?  12.  What  appears  concerning  many  of  the  crusaders  ?  Their  lead- 
ers ?     What  of  a  large  portion.i)f  the  armies  ? 


38G  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

filled  witli  religious  zeal,  and  a  larger  portion  were 
tliieves  and  robbers,  who  joined  the  expeditions  that 
they  might  share  in  the  plunder  of  cities  that  should 
be  taken. 

13.  But  although  the  motives  of  many  of  the  cru- 
saders were  selfish,  though  the  great  object  of  these 
expeditions  was  not  very  important,  and  though  much 
slaughter  and  bloodshed  flowed  from  them ;  still  the 
half  barbarous  inhabitants  of  Europe  brought  from  the 
East"  many  arts  that  tended  to  refine  and  civilize  the 
people.  In  this,  and  other  ways,  the  crusades  produced 
some  good  results. 


CHAPTER  ex.— EuKOPE  CoNTuniED. 

About  the  Feudal  System, 

1.  I  SUPPOSE  you  think  it  is  now  time  to  proceed 
with  the  history  of  France ;  but  do  not  be  impatient. 
It  is  not  light  for  one  who  undertakes  to  tell  the  his- 
tory of  mankind,  to  speak  only  of  kings  and  the  great 
battles  which  they  fight.     We  must  not  forget  to  con- 


13.  What  good  results  did  the  crusades  produce  ? 
Chapter  CX, — 1.  What  must  not  be  forgotten? 


EUROPE.  38  T 

sider  how  the  people  lived,  and  what  they  were  about 
while  their  rulers  were  thus  engaged. 

2.  I  trust  you  will  therefore  excuse  me  for  talking  a 
little  about  the  Feudal  System,  Chivalry,  and  a  few 
other  big  words,  which  it  is  proper  that  you  should 
understand.  I  have  told  you  that  the  northern  tribes 
of  Europe  were  fond  of  war,  and  of  a  restless,  roving 
cliaracter.  War  was  indeed  the  chief  business  of  the 
men.  A  few  of  them  were  engaged  in  agriculture, 
but  a  large  portion  of  them  led  the  lives  of  soldiers, 
either  wholly,  or  at  such  times  as  theii'  services  were 
required. 

3.  A  few  were  devoted  to  the  building  of  houses,  to 
the  manufacture  of  armor,  and  such  other  articles  as 
the  simple  manners  of  the  people  rendered  necessary. 
But  even  these  artisans  occasionally  bore  arms,  and 
went  with  their  countrymen  to  the  field  of  battle  if 
they  were  needed. 

4.  But,  as  I  have  said  before,  the  great  business  of 
society  in  these  times  was  war,  either  for  defence 
against  the  attacks  of  other  tribes,  or  for  the  purpose 
of  conquering  other  tribes.  The  chiefs,  or  leaders, 
were  generally  the  bravest  and  strongest  men,  those 


2    What  of  the  northern  tribes  of  Europe  ?     3.  What  of  the  men  ?      4.  What 
was  the  great  business  of  society  in  these  times  ?    What  of  the  chiefs  ? 


388  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

wlio  would  be  most  likely  in  a  battle  of  hard  blows  to 
carry  off  tbe  victory. 

5.  When  a  country  was  conquered,  the  lands,  towns, 
cities,  gold,  silver,  merchandise,  horses,  cattle,  and  all 
other  property  belonging  to  the  conquered  people, 
were  considered  the  spoils  of  the  victors.  The  people 
who  were  defeated  were  either  killed,  diiven  a^vay,  or 
reduced  to  a  state  of  servitude. 

6.  Strange  as  it  may  seem,  this  making  of  war  and 
robbing  people  of  their  lands  and  possessions,  was  not 
only  considered  lawful,  but  it  was  reckoned  grand 
sport.  It  is  true  that  the  soldiers  had  often  hard  fare 
and  hard  knocks ;  occasionally  they  were  wounded  and 
many  of  them  were  slain.  But  when  the  battle  was 
over,  those  who  survived  celebrated  their  victory  with 
feasting  and  drinking,  and  other  amusements  suited  to 
the  tastes  of  barbarous  men. 

7.  It  frequently  happened  that  some  person  in  the 
camp  had  a  great  talent  for  singing  and  stoiy-telling  ; 
he  therefore  would  be  often  called  upon  to  exercise  his 
gift.  So  he  would  amuse  the  company  with  wild  le. 
gends  of  the  chase,  in  which  a  king  or  prince  had  a 
terrible  battle  with  a  fierce  boar  or  a  rough  bear. 

8.  Or  he  would  tell  of  some  chief  who  had  per- 

6.  What  of  a  conquered  country  ?     The  people  ?     6.  How  were  war  and  rob- 
bery considered?    The  soldiers?     The  survivors?     7,  8.  What  of  story-telling? 


to 
\ 


EUROPE.  389 

formed  wonderful  deeds ;  or  perliaps  lie  would  weave 
some  superstitious  tale  of  ghosts  that  walked  abroad 
by  moonlight,  or  of  some  murdered  prince  whose  spirit 
often  came  at  night  to  haunt  the  castle  where  he  once, 
dwelt. 

9.  Such  were  some  of  the  amusements  which  repaid 
these  barbarians  for  the  toils  of  war.  But  these  were 
by  no  means  all.  The  real  ol^ject  of  most  of  the  wars 
among  these  people  was  plunder.  War  took  the  place 
of  trade  and  commerce  among  them,  and  the  principal 
inducement  to  carry  it  on  was  to  obtain  the  lands  and 
the  goods  of  other  nations.  It  was,  in  short,  a  system 
of  plunder,  and  the  several  tribes  might  be  considered 
as  so  many  bands  of  robbers. 

10.  When  a  nation  was  conquered,  the  spoils  were 
distributed  among  the  victors  according  to  their  rank. 
The  king,  or  chief,  had  a  large  share,  the  inferior 
<3hiefs  had  a  smaller  share,  and  the  common  soldiers 
had  still  less.  The  lands  were  divided  in  this  way,  but 
it  was  always  understood  that  those  who  received  the 
land  were  afterward  bound  to  go  and  fight  whenever 
called  upon  by  their  chiefs. 

11.  The  king  or  baron  built  upon  his  land  an  im- 

9.  What  was  the  real  object  of  war  amorij?  these  ancient  nations'^  "What  of 
war?  How  might  the  tribea  be  considered?  10.  What  of  the  division  of  ppoils? 
What  of  lands  ? 


390 


UNIYERSAL  HISTORY. 


mensely  strong  castle  of  stone ;  around  it,  the  people, 
wlio  were  called  liis  vassals,  or  slaves,  built  tlieir  little 


ANCIENT   FEUDAL  CASTLE. 


huts.  They  tilled  the  land,  taking  what  was  necessary 
for  their  own  support,  but  giving  the  best  of  every 
thing  to  their  liege  lord. 

12.  Now  what  is  meant  by  the  feudal  system  is 
this :  that  the  vassals  of  a  baron  who  lived  upon  his 
land  were  bound  to  do  military  service  whenever  the 
baron  required  it.  So  also  the  barons,  under  the  feu- 
dal system,  were  required  to  do  military  service,  bring- 
ing into  the  field  all  the  men  they  could  muster,  when- 
ever their  king  required  it. 

11.  What  of  a  king  or  baron  ?   The  people  or  vassals  ?   12.  What  was  the  feudal 
system  ?    What  were  the  vassals  required  to  do  ? 


EUROPE.  391 

13.  In  retiuTi  for  these  services,  the  lord  of  the  man- 
or, or  owner  of  the  land,  was  expected  to  protect  his 
people  in  time  of  war,  and  as  the  castle  was  usually 
large  and  strong,  the  people  fled  to  it  whenever  an  en- 
emy appeared  in  sight. 

14.  Here  in  the  castle  they  would  make  the  best 
defence  in  their  power.  Sometimes  they  would  be  be- 
sieged for  months ;  but  so  long  as  the  wines  lasted,  and 
the  stores  of  provisions  held  out,  the  besieged  inmates 
of  the  castle  would  hold  their  revels,  tell  their  stories, 
and  sing  their  songs. 


CHAPTEE    CXI.— Europe    CoNTmrED. 
About  Chivalry^  or  Knight- Errantry. 

1.  If  you  will  reflect  a  moment  you  will  perceive 
that  Europe  at  this  time  was  divided  among  a  great 
number  of  warlike  tribes  or  nations,  each  tribe  having 
a  king,  each  king  having  under  him  several  powerful 
barons,  and  each  baron  having  a  good  many  vassals. 

2.  You  Avill  remember  that  the  kings  and  barons 

13.  What  was  expected  of  the  lord  of  the  manor?     14.  What  of  a  besieged 
castle  ? 

Chapter  CXI. — 1.  What  can  you  say  of  Europe  in  feudal  times  ? 


392  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

dwelt  in  strong  stone  castles,  and  if  you  should  ever 
go  to  Europe,  you  will  see  many  of  these  still  in  exist- 
ence, some  of  wliicli  were  built  more  than  a  thousand 
years  ago.  Most  of  them  are  in  ruins,  but  they  are  in- 
teresting on  account  of  the  tales  and  legends  of  the 
olden  times  which  are  connected  with  them. 

3.  It  is  not  certain  when  the  feudal  system  com- 
menced, but  it  appears  .to  have  been  first  in  use  among 
the  Gemian  tribes,  and  was  introduced  into  France  by 
the  Franks,  who  entered  that  country  420  B.  C.,*and 
who  laid  the  foundation  of  the  French  monarchy  about 
486  years  after  Christ.  It  continued  in  full  force  in 
the  time  of  Charlemagne,  and,  for  -some  centuries 
after,  it  formed  the  basis  of  all  the  political  systems 
of  Europe. 

4.  Now  I  must  tell  you  that  among  the  rough  kings 
and  barons  of  the  feudal  times,  it  often  happened  that 
private  acts  of  violence  and  injustice  took  place. 
Sometimes  a  powerful  baron  would  come  suddenly 
upon  a  weaker  one,  seize  his  castle,  and  either  murder 
him  or  shut  liim  up  in  a  dungeon.  Sometimes .  one  of 
these  barons  would  cany  olf  the  beautiful  daughter 

2.  What  roust  you  remember?    3.  "What  of  the  feudal  system  ?    "Who  introdiiced 
'  it  into  France?     When?     When  was  tlie  foundation  of  the  French  monarcliy  ^ 
laid  ?     How  long  did  the  feudal  system  continue  ?     Of  what  did  it  form  the  basis  ? 
4.  What  happened  in  feudal  times  ? 


EUROPE.  393 

of  another  king  or  baron,  and  take  lier  home  to  his 
castle. 

5.  Even  in  these  rude  times,  such  things  were  con- 
sidered wrong,  and  sometimes  a  brave  warrior,  called 
a  knight,  would  take  it  upon  himself  to  redress  these 
grievances.  He  would  perhaps  go  and  challenge  the 
baron  who  had  been  guilty  of  injustice,  to  come  out 
and  fight  with  him,  or  in  some  other  way  would  en- 
deavor to  repair  the  injury  done. 

6.  The  people  applauded  these  knights,  and  cheered 
them  on  to  acts  of  daring,  in  the  cause  of  justice  and 
benevolence.  Thus,  by  degrees,  their  numbers  increas- 
ed, and  about  the  time  of  the  crusades,  there  appear 
to  have  been  a  good  many  of  them. 

Y.  The  crusades  themselves  served  to  establish 
knight-errantry  as  a  regular  profession,  and  from  the 
year  1100  after  Christ,  we  may  consider  it  as  one  of 
the  most  remarkable  institutions  in  Europe. 

8.  When  knight-errantry,  or  chivalry,  had  become 
thus  established,  those  who  belonged  to  the  profession 
were  considered  as  under  a  religious  vow  to  devote 
themselves  to  the  cause  of  justice  and  humanity.     If 

5.  How  were  such  things  considei'ed  ?  What  would  a  knight  sometimes  do  ?  6. 
■\Yii at  of  the  people?  Knights?  t.  What  oF  the  crusades?  When  did  knijrht- 
errantiy  become  a  regular  profession  ?  8.  What  of  those  who  belonged  to  the 
profession  ? 


394  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

any  person  liad  suffered  an  act  of  injustice,  they  con- 
sidered  themselves  bound  to  set  the  matter  right.  If 
any  person  was  in  distress,  they  were  under  obligation 
to  peril  their  lives  for  his  relief. 

9.  Besides  this,  the  knights  were  required  always 
to  tell  the  truth,  and  always  to  perform  their  prom- 
ises ;  they  were  expected  to  be  full  of  generosity  and 
courage,  and  never  to  be  guilty  of  any  act  of  mean- 
ness. They  were,  in  short,  expected  to  devote  them- 
selves to  the  cause  of  humanity,  and  remedy,  as  far  as 
was  in  their  power,  the  injustice  and  violence  which 
belonged  to  the  age  in  which  they  lived. 

10.  Many  of  these  knights  spent  their  whole  time 
in  riding  about  the  country  in  search  of  adventures. 
These  were  called  knights-errant.  If,  in  the  course  of 
their  travels,  they  heard  of  anybody  in  distress,  they 
would  offer  their  services  for  relief. 

11.  They  were  particularly  devoted  to  the  cause  of 
ladies  who  had  been  stolen  away,  and  shut  up  in  cas- 
tles. In  behalf  of  these,  they  often  performed  won- 
derftd  feats  of  strength  and  valor.  Sometimes,  it  is 
true,  the  knights  acted  wickedly,  but  in  so  doing  they 
violated  their  vows. 


9,  What  was  required  and  expected  of  the  knights?     10.  Who  were  knights^ 
errant?     II.  What  did  thej  perform  for  ladies  ? 


EUROPE. 


395 


A  TOURNAMENT. 


CHAPTER   CXII.— Europe  Continued. 


More  about  Chivalry. 

1.  If  one  knight-errant  chanced  to  meet  anotherj 
they  usually  went  to  fighting,  either  for  sport  or  re- 
nown. Some  of  them  acquired  great  fame,  and  a  mul- 
titude of  songs  and  ballads  were  composed  in  celebra- 
tion of  their  deeds. 

2.  The  knights  were  very  particular  to  ride  fine, 
strong  horses.  Some  of  these  are  almost  as  famous  in 
the  legends  of   chivalry  as  their  riders.     The  knight 

Chapter  CXIT. — 1.  What  happened  if  two  kuights-errant  met?  What  was  don© 
in  celebration  of  their  deeds  ? 


396  UNIYERSAL  HISTORY. 

was  powerfully  armed,  Ms  chief  weapon  being  a  long, 
pointed  lance.  Besides  this,  lie  had  a  sword,  dagger, 
battle-axe,  and  mace,  which  was  a  heavy  sort  of  club. 

3.  In  addition  to  these  weapons  for  attack,  he  had 
a  defensive  armor,  consisting  of  a  shield  of  metal,  a 
helmet  of  steel  with  a  vizor  to  cover  his  face,  a  body 
harness  made  of  plates  of  steel,  and  sometimes  a  shirt 
of  mail  consisting  of  a  multitude  of  ii'on  links,  the 
whole  fitting  close  to  the  body. 

4.  The  horse,  also,  was  carefully  defended  by  mail  or 
steel  plates.  His  head,  chest,  and  sides  were  usually 
covered,  and  sometimes  the  whole  body  was  shielded 
by  glittering  steel.  Nothing,  indeed,  could  exceed 
the  care  and  preparation  usually  bestowed  by  the 
knights  in  training  their  horses,  in  selecting  their 
armor,  in  having  it  carefully  fitted,  and  in  keeping  it 
bright. 

5.  A  knight  was  always  attended  by  a  squire,  and 
sometimes  by  several  squires.  These  waited  u})on 
their  masters,  and  were  considered  as  learning  to  be- 
come kniofhta  themselves.     As  the  institution  of  chiv- 

o 

airy  advanced,  it  became  a  matter  of  honor  to  be  a 

2,  3.  What  of  their  horses?  How  was  the  knight  armed?  4.  What  of  the 
horse's  caparison?  Knights'  armor?  5.  What  of  squires?  How  was  the  pro- 
fession of  knighthood  considered?  Who  were  the  celebrated  knights  in  th^ 
tiUSMdos  ? 


EUROPE.  397 

knlglit,  and  therefore  most  kings,  princes,  and  military 
leaders  took  upon  themselves  the  vows  of  knighthood. 
The  celebrated  leaders  of  the  crusades,  Richard  of  Eng- 
land, Godfrey  of  France,  and  others,  were  knights. 

6.  In  after  times,  there  were  several  orders  of 
knights ;  those  of  each  order  taking  upon  themselves 
peculiar  vows.  Such  were  the  Knights  of  St.  John 
of  Jerusalem,  the  Knights  of  Malta,  the  Knights  of 
the  Cross,  Kniglits  Templars,  etc. 

T.  When  society  had  become  somewhat  more  civil, 
ized,  it  was  the  custom  in  different  parts  of  Europe  to 
have  tilts  and  tournaments.  These  were  occasions  of 
great  ceremony,  and  multitudes  of  people  collected  to- 
gether to  witness  them.  They  were  often  splendid 
beyond  description.  Kings,  princes,  and  fair  ladies 
delighted  in  these  exhibitions. 

8.  They  consisted  of  encounters  between  celebrated 
knights,  clad  in  complete  armor.  They  took  place  in 
some  open  plain,  surrounded  with  tents  and  pavilions 
filled  with  spectators.  The  victorious  knights  were 
honored  with  applause  from  the  people,  and  with  marks 
.of  favor  even  from  kings  and  queens. 

9.  Such  was  the  institution  of  chivalry.     If  I  had 


6.  What  can  you  say  of  the  orders  of  kniglits?     1.  What  of  its  tilts  and  p^iw- 
naments?     8.  Describe  them.     What  of  the  victorious  kni'^lits? 


398  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

time,  I  could  fill  a  book  with  stories  of  knights.  A 
multitude  of  tales  called  romances  were  written  in  the 
age  of  chivalry.  These  recounted  the  deeds,  or  pre- 
tended deeds,  of  celebrated  champions.  Some  of  them 
are  very  amusing,  but  they  are  nearly  all  filled  with  in. 
credible  fables. 

10.  Chivalry  was  at  its  height  from  the  year  1200 
to  about  1400.  From  this  latter  period  it  rapidly  de- 
clined, and  in  the  time  of  Elizabeth  of  England,  that 
is,  al)out  1600,  it  had  ceased.  If  there  were  a  few  tilts 
and  tournaments  after  this,  they  were  only  as  relics  of 
an  age  that  had  passed. 


CIIAPTEE  CXIII.— EtmoPE    Contintjed. 

J^ing  Philip  and  Pope  Boniface, —  Wars  of  the  French  and 

English. 

1.  I  WILL  now  go  on  with  my  story  about  France. 
After  Charles  the  Fat,  Hugh  Capet,  and  the  other 
kings  I  have  mentioned,  there  were  many  sovereigns, 
but  I  shall  pass  them  over  till  I  come  to  Philip  the 

9.  What  of  romances?    10.  When  was  chivalry  at  its  heiglit?     What  of  it  after 
1400  ?     When  did  it  cease  ? 

Chapter  CXIir, — 1.  When  did  Philip  the  Fair  begin  to  reign  ?     What  of  him  ? 


EUROPE.  399 

Fair,  who  began  to  reign  in  1285.  He  possessed  great 
personal  beauty,  but  bad  many  bad  qualities  of  mind 
and  beart.  Tbe  most  remarkable  event  of  bis  reign 
was  a  great  quarrel  witb  pope  Boniface. 

2.  Tbis  potentate  was  one  of  tbe  baugbtiest  popes 
tbat  ever  wore  a  triple  crown.  He  spoke  to  tbe  sove- 
reigns of  Europe  as  if  be  were  sovereign  of  tbem  all, 
and  king  of  kings.  But  Pbilip  tbe  Fair  refused  to 
acknowledge  bis  authority.  Pope  Boniface  excommu- 
nicated king  Pbilip  for  bis  disobedience,  and  king 
Pbilip  called  pope  Boniface  all  tbe  bad  names  be  could 
tbink  of. 

3.  One  day,  some  of  Philip's  friends  took  pope  Bon- 
iface prisoner.  They  put  him  on  a  horse,  without  sad- 
dle or  bridle,  and  made  him  ride  with  his  face  toward 
tbe  horse's  tail.  Nobody  could  help  laughing  to  see 
what  a  ridiculous  figure  was  cut  by  his  Holiness.  But 
as  for  poor  pope  Boniface,  be  took  the  joke  so  much 
to  beart,  tbat,  together  witb  tbe  loss  of  his  treasures,  it 
actually  killed  him.  Philip  the  Fair  survived  him  sev- 
eral years. 

4.  The  French  have  always  been  a  warlike  people. 
They  have  been  so  often  at  war  with  England,  that 

2.  What  of  pope  Boniface?  What  took  place  between  hira  and  Philip  the 
Fair?  3.  What  did  Phihp  do  to  poor  pope  Boniface?  What  effect  had  this 
treatment  upon  the  pope  ? 

18 


400  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

Frenclimeii  and  Englishmen  think  themselves  >7orn  to 
be  each  other's  enemies. 

5.  On  the  death  of  Charles  the  Fourth,  in  1328, 
Philip  of  Valois  became  king  of  France.  But  Edward 
the  Third,  king  of  England,  asserted  that  he  himself 
was  the  rightful  king  of  France,  because  his  mother 
was  the  daughter  of  Philip  the  Fair.  He  undertook 
to  enforce  his  claim  by  invading  France  with  an  Eng- 
lish anny. 

6.  King  Edward  challenged  Philip  of  Valois  to  fight 
liim  in  single  combat ;  but  Philip  preferred  to  meet 
him  with  an  army.  At  the  bloody  battle  of  Cressy,  in 
France,  in  1346,  the  French  lost  the  bravest  of  their 
nobles,  and  thirty  thousand  men. 

7.  In  1350,  John  the  Good,  son  of  Philip  of  Valois, 
succeeded  to  the  throne  of  France.  The  country  was 
invaded  by  an  English  army  under  the  eldest  son  of 
Edward  the  Third.  He  was  called  the  Black  Piinee, 
on  account  of  the  color  of  his  armor. 

8.  King  John  of  France,  with  sixty  thousand  men, 
encountered  the  Black  Prince  of  England  near  Poic- 
tiers.     The  Black  Prince  had  only  eight  thousand  sol' 

4.  What  of  the  French  ?  TIow  do  the  French  and  EngUsh  consider  tliemselves  ? 
5.  When  did  Charles  IV.  diet  Wiien  did  Philip  of  Valois  become  king?  What 
did  Edward  III.  claim?  6.  What  did  king  Edward  do?  What  of  the  battle  of 
Crossy  ?     7.  Who  become  king  in  1350  ?    Who  was  the  Black  Prince  ? 


EUROPE.  401 

diers.  But  the  English  archers  and  cross-bow  men  let 
ily  their  arrows  at  the  French,  and  made  a  dreadful 
havoc  among  them.  King  John  was  taken  and  kept 
prisoner  four  years  in  London. 

9.  John  the  Good  was  succeeded  by  his  son,  Charles 
the  Wise.  King  Edward  of  England  had  now  grown 
old,  and  his  son,  the  brave  Black  Prince,  was  dead. 
The  French,  therefore,  got  back  all  the  territories  which 
the  English  had  won  of  them,  except  the  town  of 
Calais. 

10.  But  when  Charles  the  Well-beloved  was  king 
of  France,  the  English  renewed  the  war.  Henry  the 
Fifth,  then  king  of  England,  invaded  France.  At  the 
battle  of  Agincourt  he  had  but  fifteen  thousand  men, 
while  the  French  had  nearly  a  hundred  thousand. 

11.  Yet  the  English  gained  a  glorious  victory,  with 
the  loss  of  only  forty  men.  On  the  side  of  the  French, 
there  were  seven  princes,  the  high  constable  of 
France,  and  ten  thousand  gentlemen  killed,  besides 
many  prisoners.  In  1420,  the  English  king  entered 
Palis  in  triumph. 


8.  Who  encountered  the  Black  Prince  ?  Describe  the  battle  of  Poictiers.  9. 
Who  succeeded  John  the  Grood  ?  Why  were  the  French  able  to  win  back  tlseir 
territories  from  the  English?  10.  Who  was  the  next  king  of  France  ?  Wliat 
battle  was  fought  with  Henry  V.  ?  11.  Which  side  won  the  victory  ?  What  was 
the  loss  of  the  French  ?     What  took  place  in  1420  ? 


402  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

12.  But  Henr}^,  king  of  England,  died  soon  after- 
ward ;  and  then  the  French  began  to  beat  the  English. 
The  chief  leader  of  the  French  at  this  time  was  a  girl 
of  eighteen,  named  Joan  of  Arc,  or  the  Maid  of  Or- 
leans. She  was  very  beautiful.  The  French  believed 
that  Heaven  had  sent  her  to  rescue  their  country  from 
the  English  invaders.  The  English  believed  her  to  be 
a  witch,  and  that  the  evil  one  assisted  her  in  fighting 
against  them. 

13.  For  a  considerable  time,  it  was  found  impossible 
to  withstand  holy  Joan,  the  Maid  of  Orleans.  She  was 
clad  in  bright  steel  armor,  and  rode  in  front  of  the 
French  army  on  a  snoAV-white  horse.  In  her  hand  she 
carried  a  consecrated  banner,  on  which  was  painted  the 
image  of  our  Saviour.  But,  at  last,  she  was  wounded 
and  taken  prisoner.  The  English  condemned  her  to  be 
burnt  alive  for  witchcraft. 

14.  She  was  accordingly  bound  to  a  stake,  in  the 
>market-place  of  Kouen.     The  English  army  looked  on, 

rejoicing,  while  the  flames  roared  and  whirled  around 
her.  When  the  fire  had  burnt  out,  there  remained 
nothing  but  ashes  and  whitened  bones,  of  the  valiant 
Maid  of  Orleans. 

12.  What  happfened  after  the  death  of  Henry  V.  ?  Describe  the  Maid  of  Or- 
leans. What  did  the  French  and  KngUsh  think  of  her?  13.  How  did  she  appeax 
at  tlie  head  of  the  army?     14.  Wliat  was  her  sad  fate? 


EUROPE.  403 

CHAPTER  CXIY.— Europe   Continued. 
The  Rtigns  of  several  French  Kings. 

1.  But,  thougli  tlie  Maid  of  Orleans  was  no  longer 
tlieir  captain,  the  Frencli  were  still  successful.  Tlie 
Englisli  lost  nearly  all  that  Henry  the  Fifth  had  won. 
The  French  monarch  was  called  Charles  the  Victorious, 
on  account  of  his  many  triumphs. 

2.  Yet  he  was  an  unhappy  king.  His  son  hated 
him,  and  attempted  to  kill  him  by  poison.  After  the 
discovery  of  this  plot,  the  poor  old  king  was  afraid  to 
take  food  enough  to  support  life,  lest  he  should  take 
poison  with  it.  So  he  wasted  away,  and  died  miser- 
ably. 

3.  His  son,  Louis  the  Eleventh,  succeeded  him  in 
1461.  He  was  a  crafty,  treacherous,  and  cruel  king. 
Once,  when  a  nobleman  was  to  be  beheaded,  Louis  or- 
dered his  infant  children  to  be  placed  under  the  scaf- 
fold, that  they  might  be  sprinkled  with  their  father's 
blood: 

4.  Qne  of  the  most  famous  of  the  French  kings  was 
Francis  the  First,  who  ascended  the  throne  in  1515. 


Chapter  CXIV.— 1.  What  of  the  French  people  ?    The  English  ?     The  French 
king?     2.  What  of  Charles  the  victorious?     3.  What  of  Louis  XL? 


40-i  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

He  fought  against  tlie  Swiss,  and  against  the  emperor 
of  Germany  ;  but  tlie  emperor  took  him  prisoner  at  the 
battle  of  Pa  via. 

5.  There  was  no  war  with  England  during  the  reign 
of  Francis  the  First;  but  he  once  held  an  interview 
with  the  English  king,  neai"  Calais.  So  much  magnifi- 
cence was  displayed  on  both  sides,  that  the  place  of 
meeting  was  called  the  Field  of  the  Cloth  of  Gold. 

6.  In  1560,  Charles  the  Ninth  became  king  of 
France.  He  was  then  a  boy  ten  years  old.  His  reign 
was  disgraced  by  one  of  the  bloodiest  scenes  in 
history.  It  is  called  the  Massacre  of  St.  Bartholo- 
mew. 

7.  The  Catholics  (those  who  were  attached  to  the 
pope  of  Rome)  had  conspired  to  murder  all  the  Protes- 
tants (those  who  did  not  like  the  pope)  throughout 
France.  On  the  ni2:ht  of  St.  Bartholomew's  dav,  their 
wicked  project  was  put  in  execution.  Some  writers 
affirm  that  a  hundred  thousand  Protestants  were 
murdered. 

8.  The  king  himself  sat  at  one  of  his  palace  win- 
dows, with  a  musket  in  his  hand,  and  shot  some  of  the 
poor  wretches.     But  he  was  soon  called  to  receive  the 

4.  "When  did  Francis  I.  ascend  the  throne?  "What  of  him?  5.  Describe  the 
interview  at  Calais.  G.  When  did  Charles  IX.  come  to  the  throne  ?  7.  Describe  the 
massacre  of  Si.  Bartholomew.     8.  When  did  Cliarles  IX.  die? 


EUROPE.  405 

recompense  of  his  crimes.     After  tlie  massacre,  he  was 
afflicted  with  disease,  and  died  in  1574. 

9.  The  next  king  but  one  was  Henry  the  Fom'th, 
who  ascended  the  throne  in  1589.  He  was  a  good 
king,  a  brave  warrior,  and  a  generous  man.  His  sub- 
jects loved  him,  and  the  French  have  always  been 
proud  of  Henry  the  Fourth. 

10.  Yet  the  affection  of  his  people  could  not  save 
his  life.  One  day  he  was  riding  through  the  streets 
of  Paris  in  his  coach.  Several  courtiers  were  with  him. 
Other  vehicles  were  in  the  way,  so  that  the  coachman 
was  comj^elled  to  stop  the  horses.  The  king  chose  to 
alight. 

11.  There  was  a  man  near  the  coach,  named  Eavail- 
lac.  He  was  waiting  for  a  chance  to  kill  the  king; 
and  now,  seeing  him  about  to  get  out  of  the  coach,  he 
drew  a  poniard.  All  the  power  of  France  could  not 
now  be  of  any  avail.  The  first  blow  of  the  poniard 
w^ounded  the  king,  and  the  second  killed  him. 

9.  "When  did  Henry  IV.  come  to  the  throne?  "What  of  him?  10,  11.  How  did  lie 
lose  his  life  ? 


406 


UNIYERSAL  HISTORY. 


LOUIS  31V.   AND  HIS  COUET. 


CHAPTER   CXY.— Europe   Continued. 
The  Reigns  of  Louis  the  Grand  and  his  Successor. 


1  The  murdered  Henry  was  succeeded  by  his  son, 
Louis  the  Thix'teenth.  The  government  was  chiefly 
directed  by  cardinal  Richelieu,  an  ambitious  priest. 
He,  grew  more  powerful  than  the  king  himself. 

2.  The  next  king  was  Louis  the  Fourteenth,  whom 
the  French  call  Louis  the  Grand.  He  was  a  very 
proud  and  haughty  monarch.  He  endeavored  to  make 
France  the  greatest  country  on  earth ;    not  that   he 


Chaiter  CXV. — I.  WJio  succeeded  lleiiiy  IV.? 
2.  Who  was  the  next  king? 


What  of  cardinal  Richelieu? 


EUROPE.  407 

really  cared  for  tlie  welfare  of  liis  subjects,  but  because 
lie  wished  to  exalt  himself  above  all  other  kings. 

3.  He  had  a  peculiar  manner  of  walking,  which 
would  have  been  ridiculous  in  a  common  man,  but  was 
thought  extremely  majestic  in  a  king.  He  used  to 
wear  a  large  curled  wig,  and  nobody  ever  saw  him 
■without  it.  He  would  never  pull  off  his  wig  till  he 
had  got  into  bed  and  closed  the  curtains. 

4.  This  king  began  to  reign  when  five  years  old,  and 
reigned  no  less  than  seventy -two  years.  He  was  con- 
tinually at  war.  In  the  early  part  of  his  reign,  his 
armies  achieved  many  splendid  victories. 

5.  But,  in  the  king's  old  age,  the  English  duke  of 
Marlborough  wasted  his  troops,  and  reduced  his  king- 
dom to  great  distress.  The  French  people  now  grew 
weary  of  their  grand  monarch. 

6.  And  well  they  might  be  weary  of  him,  for  he  had 
taken  all  their  money,  in  order  that  he  might  have  the 
means  of  going  to  war.  He  seemed  to  think  it  more 
necessary  that  he  should  have  glory,  than  that  they 
should  have  bread. 

1.  At  last,  in  1715,  the  old  king  died.  As  he  had 
been  so  grand  in  his  life-time,  his  courtiers  deemed  it 


3.  What  can  you  say  of  Louis  the  Grand?  4.  What  of  his  wars?  5.  What  of 
the  duke  of  Marlborough  ?  6.  What  of  the  French  people  ?  7.  When  did  Louis 
the  Grand  die  ? 


408  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

proper  tliat  lie  should  carry  as  mucli  grandeur  witli 
liim  to  tlie  tomb  as  possible.  They  therefore  prepared 
a  magnificent  funeral. 

8.  But  wherever  the  procession  passed,  the  people 
heaped  curses  on  the  royal  corpse.  They  hissed  so 
loudly,  that,  if  the  king  had  not  been  stone  dead,  he 
would  have  started  up  in  his  coffin.  Thus  ended  the 
glorious  reign  of  Louis  the  Grand. 

9.  All  the  sons  and  grandsons  of  old  Louis  the 
Grand  had  died  before  him.  He  was  therefore  suc- 
ceeded by  his  great-grandson,  a  child  ^ve  years  old,  who 
now  became  Louis  the  Fifteenth. 

10.  Until  the  little  king  should  become  of  age  to 
take  the  sceptre  into  his  OTvn  hands,  the  duke  of  Or- 
leans was  declared  regent  of  France.  He  was  a  profli- 
gate man.  Instead  of  teaching  the  young  king  how  to 
make  his  subjects  prosperous  and  happy,  he  set  him  an 
example  of  all  sorts  of  wickedness. 

11.  And  Louis  the  Fifteenth  turned  out  just  such  a 
king  as  might  have  been  expected.  In  his  whole  reign 
of  fifty-nine  years,  he  seems  to  have  thought  of  noth- 
ing but  his  own  selfish  pleasures. 

12.  His  kingdom  was  almost  ruined,  and  his  subjects 


8.  Describe  the  funeral.     9.  Who  succeeded  Louis  XIV?      10.    What  of  the 
Duke  of  Orleans?     11.  What  of  Louis  XV.  ? 


EUROPE.  409 

were  starving.  But  if  an  earthquake  had  swallowed 
France  and  all  its  inhabitants,  the  king  would  hardly 
have  cared.  The  reign  of  this  odious  monarch  pre- 
pared the  French  to  hate  the  very  name  of  monarch. 
He  died  in  1774,  and  was  succeeded  by  his  grandson, 
Louis  the  Sixteenth,  who  was  then  a  young  man  of 
twenty. 

13.  Thus,  by  the  extravagance  of  Louis  XIV.,  and 
the  profligacy  of  Louis  XV.,  a  foundation  was  laid  for 
what  is  called  the  French  Revolution,  of  which  I  shall 
tell  you  in  the  next  chapter. 

14.  I  should  be  very  glad  to  pass  by  the  story  of 
that  awful  period,  for  I  know  it  can  give  my  reader  no 
pleasure  to  read  of  violence  and  bloodshed.  But  it  is 
necessary  to  read  the  dark  as  well  as  the  bright  pages 
of  history. 

15.  We  may  learn  from  the  French  Revolution  how 
much  evil  may  be  brought  upon  a  country  by  bad 
rulers,  and  as  some  of  my  young  pupils  will  hereafter 
be  men,  and  be  called  upon  to  assist  in  choosing  rulers, 
they  may  be. made  to  feel  the  duty  of  choosing  good 
ones. 

]2.  When  did  lie  die?     13.  What  event  followed  these  two  reigns?     15  What 
may  we  learn  from  the  French  Revolution  ? 


410 


UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


LOUIS  XVt  Ami  MAEIE  ANTOINETTE. 

CHAPTER   CXYI.— Europe   Continued. 
The  French  devolution, 

1.  LoTTis  the  Sixteenth  had  no  talents  which  could 
render  him  fit  to  govern  a  nation.  But  he  was  a  man 
of  good  heart,  kind  disposition,  and  upright  intentions. 
With  all  his  defects,  there  has  seldom  been  a  better 
king ;  for,  if  he  was  unable  to  do  good,  he  was  unwill- 
ing: to  do  harm. 

2.  The  king  was  married  to  an  Austrian  arch-duch- 
ess,  named  Marie  Antoinette.     She  had  great  beauty 


Chapter  CXVL— 1.  What  of  Louis  XVI.  ?     2.  What  of  Mario  Antoinette? 


EUROPE.  411 

and  accomplisliments ;  but  she  was  never  a  favorite  of 
tlie  Frencli  people. 

3.  Not  long  after  this  king  and  queen  were  crowned, 
tlie  American  Revolution  broke  out.  The  United 
States  declared  themselves  a  free  and  independent 
republic.  The  people  of  France  took  a  great  interest 
in  the  affairs  of  America;  and  they  began  to  think 
that  a  republic  was  a  better  kind  of  government  than 
a  monarchy. 

4.  They  compared  the  tyranny  under  which  they 
and  their  forefathers  had  groaned  for  ages,  with  the 
freedom  which  made  the  Americans  so  prosperous  and 
happy.  The  more  they  reflected  upon  the  subject, 
the  more  discontented  they  became  with  their  own  con- 
dition. 

5.  The  French  are  a  people  whose  minds  are  easily 
excited,  and  whenever  any  thing  remarkable  is  going 
on  among  them,  you  would  think  that  the  whole  na- 
tion was  almost  mad,  or  perhaps  had  been  drinking  too 
much  wine.  So  it  happened  in  this  case.  They  now 
began  to  rave  against  the  king,  queen,  and  nobles,  the 
priests,  the  gentlemen,  and  all  others  whom  they  had 
formerly  respected.  They  even  blasphemed  against 
Heaven  itself 

3.  "When  did  the  American  Revolution  begin  ?     4.  What  of  the  French  people  ? 
5.  How  do  the  French  appear  when  any  thing  remarkable  is  going  on  ? 


412  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

6.  In  1789,  the  mob  of  Paris  tore  down  the  Bastile. 
This  was  on  old  castle,  where  the  kings  of  France  had 
been  accustomed  to  confine  such  of  their  subjects  as 
offended  them.  Many  a  poor  wretch  had  been  thrown 
into  the  dungeons  of  the  Bastile,  and  never  again  be- 
held the  sunshine. 

1.  The  destruction  of  the  Bastile  was  a  good  thing ; 
and  so,  likewise,  were  many  other  of  the  first  move- 
ments of  the  French  Revolution.  But  when  the  people 
had  once  begun  to  change  their  ancient  government, 
they  knew  not  where  to  stop. 

8.  It  was  not  long  before  blood  began  to  flow.  No 
man  or  woman  in  the  kins^dom  was  now  safe,  unless 
they  wore  a  red  cap  upon  their  heads,  which  was  called 
the  cap  of  liberty. 

9.  At  this  period  it  was  no  uncommon  thing  to  see 
a  mob  of  men  and  women  in  the  streets  of  Paris,  car- 
rying a  bloody  head  upon  a  pole.  And  those  who 
looked  at  the  features  would  perhaps  recognize  the 
countenance  of  some  great  nobleman  or  beautiful  prin- 
cess. 

10.  In  a  little  while  longer  there  were  so  many 
heads  to  be  cut  off,  that  the  work  could  not  be  done 

6.  What  was  done  in  1789?  What  of  the  Bastile?  7.  What  of  the  des- 
truction of  this  old  castle  ?  8.  What  were  the  people  obliged  to  wear  upon 
their  heads  ?    9.  What  was  common  in  Paris  at  this  time  ? 


EURorE.  413 

fast  enougli  in  the  ordinary  way.  It  was  therefore 
necessary  to  do  it  by  machinery ;  and  a  horrible  in- 
strument, called  the  guillotine,  was  invented  for  the 
purpose. 

11.  This  infernal  contrivance  was  set  to  work  upon 
the  proud  nobles,  and  the  holy  priesthood,  and  the 
beautiful  ladies  of  France.  Hundreds  of  their  heads 
fell  upon  the  pavement  of  Paris,  and  their  blood  ran 
like  a  river  through  the  streets. 

12.  When  many  of  the  loftiest  heads  in  the  kingdom 
had  been  cut  off,  the  people  fixed  their  eyes  on  the 
head  that  wore  a  crown.  "  Off  with  the  king's  head 
too  !"  cried  they.  So  they  dragged  the  poor  harmless 
king  before  the  national  convention,  and  he  was  forth- 
with sentenced  to  the  guillotine. 

13.  As  the  poor  king  mounted  the  steps  of  the  scaf- 
fold, he  gazed  round  at  the  fierce  and  cruel  multitude. 
It  seemed  all  like  a  dream,  that  they,  his  born  subjects, 
should  be  waiting  there  to  see  him  die.  Then  he 
looked  at  the  guillotine,  and  beheld  it  stained  with  the 
blood  of  the  thousand  victims  who  had  been  dragged 
thither  before  him. 

14.  He  could  not  yet  believe  that  his  royal  blood 
was  no  longer  precious  to  his  people.     He  lingered — he 

10.  Why  was  the  guillotine  invented?     11.  What  use  was  made  of  it  ? 


414  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

was  lotli  to  lay  down  his  head — ^he  shivered  with  the 
agony  of  his  spirit.  There  stood  a  holy  priest  beside 
him  on  the  scaffold.  Other  priests,  in  those  di^eadful 
times,  had  abjured  their  God ;  but  here  was  one  who 
held  fast  his  faith.  Other  subjects  had  betrayed  their 
king,  but  here  was  one  who  revered  him  most  upon  the 
scaffold. 

15.  He  whispered  consolation  to  the  unhappy  king, 
and  pointed  heavenward.  The  victim  mustered  his 
fainting  courage,  and  laid  his  head  upon  the  block. 
"  Son  of  Saint  Louis,"  said  the  priest,  "  ascend  to 
heaven !" 

16.  Down  came  the  axe  of  the  guillotine,  aud  the 
head  that  had  worn  a  crown  was  severed  from  the 
body !  The  blood  of  a  kingly  race  gushed  out  upon 
the  scaffold.  Thus  the  crimes  and  misused  power  of 
many  kings  had  brought  vengeance  on  their  innoceut 
descendant. 

12-16.  Describe  the  execution  of  Louis  XVI. 


EUnOPE. 


415 


NAPOLEON   BONAPAETE. 


CHAPTEE   CXYII.— Europe  Continued. 


TJie  Hise  of  Napoleon  Bonaparte. 

1.  The  day  of  the  king's  execution  was  the  21st  of 
January,  1Y93.  Not  many  months  afterward,  the 
queen  was  likewise  beheaded.  France  was  now  ruled 
by  a  succession  of  bloody  monsters,  who,  one  day, 
were  sending  crowds  to  the  guillotine,  and,  the  next 
day,  were  sent  thither  themselves.  This  anarchy  was 
what  the  French  called  a  Republic. 

2.  In  the  mean  time,  war  was  breaking  out  on  all 

Chapter  CXYII. — 1.  When  was  Louis  XVI.  beheaded  ?    Describe  the  French 
republic. 


416  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

sides.  Austria,  Prussia,  England,  Holland,  Spain,  and 
Russia,  sent  armies  against  France.  The  French 
raised  a  million  of  men,  and  bade  defiance  to  all 
Europe. 

3.  In  the  French  army,  there  was  a  young  lieutenant 
of  artillery,  named  Napoleon  Bonaparte.  Wh^n  the 
war  began,  he  w^as  an  unknown  and  friendless  youth. 
But  he  distinguished  himself  in  every  battle  and  every 
siege,  till,  in  a  very  few  years,  the  whole  world  had 
heard  of  Bonaparte. 

4.  When  he  was  only  twenty-six  years  old,  he  con- 
quered Italy.  The  next  year  he  compelled  the  em- 
peror of  Austria  to  make  peace.  In  1798,  he  invaded 
Egypt,  and  fought  many  battles  in  the  sandy  deserts, 
and  among  the  pyi'amids. 

5.  The  French  were  now  tired  of  being  governed  by 
men  whose  only  engine  of  government  was  the  guillo- 
tine. They  wanted  a  ruler  who  would  deserve  their 
obedience  by  his  sagacity  and  energy,  and  not  merely 
compel  them  to  obedience  by  the  fear  of  having  their 
heads  cut  oft 

6.  Napoleon  Bonaparte  was  such  a  man.  He  was 
not  a  good  man,  nor  a  truly  wise  one.     He  was  a  sel- 

2.  Wliat  countries  now  wont  to  war  with   France?      3.  What  of  Napoleon 
Bonaparte  ?    4.  What  acts  did  Napoleon  perform  ?    5.  What  of  the  French  people 

a'    ihis  time  ? 


EUROPE.  417 

fish  and  ambitions  despot.  Bnt  perhaps  lie  was  a  more 
suitable  mler  for  such  a  people  as  the  French  than  if 
he  had  been  a  different  man. 

7.  He  saw  that  the  French  were  now  so  excited  that 
it  would  be  difficult,  perhaps  impossible,  to  restrain 
them.  He  thought  it  better  that  they  should  mako 
war  on  foreigners  than  slaughter  each  other,  and  with 
the  sword,  rather  than  with  the  guillotine.  So,  partly 
because  he  could  not  help  it,  but  chiefly  because  he 
was  ambitious,  Napoleon  Bonaparte  became  a  mighty 
conqueror.  * 


CHAPTEE  CXYIII.— EuEOPE  Continued. 
The  Fall  of  Bonaparte. 

1.  Ik  1802,  Bonaparte  was  elected  consul  of  the 
French  republic  for  life.  Two  years  afterward,  he 
was  proclaimed  emperor,  by  the  name  of  Napoleon. 
He  had  now  more  power  than  any  of  the  ancient 
kings. 

2.  I  cannot  follow  this  great  captain  in  his  marches 

.     G.  What  of  Napoleon?    T.  What  were  his  thoughts  upon  the  French?    What  did 
lie  become? 
Chapter  CXYIII. — 1.  What  were  the  titles  of  Napoleon  ?      „ 


418  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

all  over  Europe,  nor  even  number  the  victories  which 
he  won.  Wherever  he  went,  monarchs  humbled  them- 
selves before  him.  He  drove  them  from  their  thrones, 
and  placed  his  own  brothers  and  chief  officers  there  in- 
stead. He  gave  away  royal  diadems  for  playthings. 
He  was  called  the  Man  of  Destiny,  because  fate 
seemed  to  have  ordained  that  he  should  always  be  vic- 
torious. 

3.  But,  in  1812,  the  spell  of  his  success  began  to  be 
broken.  He  invaded  Russia  with  a  vast  army,  and 
penetrated  to  the  city  of  Moscow.  The  Russians  set 
the  city  on  fire.  Winter  was  coming  on,  and  the 
French  soldiers  had  nowhere  to  shelter  themselves. 

4.  They  reti^eated  toward  Poland.  On  their  way 
thither,  they  fought  many  battles  with  the  Russians, 
and  the  weather  was  so  bitter  cold,  that  the  snow  was 
crimsoned  with  their  blood,  and  the  bodies  of  the  slain 
were  frozen  stiff. 

5.  Before  they  reached  the  frontiers  of  Poland, 
three-fourths  of  the  army  were  destroyed.  The  em^ 
peror  Napoleon  fled  homeward  in  a  sledge,  and  return- 
ed to  Paris.  He  soon  raised  new  armies,  and  was 
ready  to  take  the  field  again. 

6.  But  all  the  nations  of  Europe  were  now  allied 

2.  What  happened  wherever  he  went  ?  Wliat  was  he  called  ?  3.  What  happened 
in  1812  ?    4.  What  of  the  French  army  ?     5.  What  of  Napoleon  ? 


EUROPE.  419 

against  him,  and,  after  a  few  more  battles,  he  was 
driven  from  Germany  into  France.  The  enemy  fol- 
lowed him.  They  compelled  him  to  sniTender  the  im- 
perial crown  of  France  in  exchange  for  the.  sovereignty 
of  the  little  island  of  Elba,  in  the  Mediterranean. 

T.  Napoleon  went  to  Elba,  and  remained  there 
almost  a  year.  But  in  March,  1815,  he  suddenly 
landed  ao:ain  on  the  French  coast.  He  was  almost 
alone  w^hen  he  set  his  foot  on  the  shore.  But  there 
were  a  multitude  of  his  grim  old  veterans  throughout 
the  country.  These  shouted  for  joy,  and  trampled  on 
the  white  flag  of  the  Bourbon  kings,  who  had  suc- 
ceeded him.  In  a  few  days,  Napoleon's  banner  again 
waved  triumphant  all  over  France. 

8.  The  nations  of  Europe  now  mustered  their  armies 
once  more.  They  were  led  by  the  English  duke  of 
Wellington.  Napoleon  marched  into  Flanders,  or  Bel- 
gium, to  meet  them.  He  was  followed  by  almost 
every  young  Frenchman  that  could  shoulder  a  musket. 

9.  The  emperor  Napoleon's  last  battle  was  fought 
at  Waterloo,  on  the  18th  of  June,  1815.  There  he 
was  utterly  overthrown,  and  France  was  overthrown 

6.  What  happened  to  him  ?  1.  How  long  did  Napoleon  remain  at  Elba  ? 
What  of  him  in  1815  ?  Describe  his  landing  in  France.  8.  Who  led  the  nations 
of  Europe?  What  did  Napoleon  do?  Who  followed  him?  9.  When  was  the 
battle  of  Waterloo  fought?     What  was  the  fate  of  Napoleon? 


420  raiYERSAL  HISTORY. 

with  liim.  The  warlike  emperor  was  sent  to  die  on  tlie 
island  of  St.  Helena,  and  the  Bourbon  king  was  again 
established  on  the  throne  of  Louis  the  Sixteenth. 


CHAPTER  CXIX.— EuKOPE  Continued. 
Later  Resolutions  in  France. — Napoleon  III. 

1.  Louis  the  Eighteenth,  the  new  king  of  France, 
was  a  fat,  quiet,  respectable  sort  of  old  gentleman,  and 
seems  to  have  been  chiefly  distinguished  for  his  love 
of  oysters!  He  died  in  1824,  and  was  succeeded  by 
his  brother,  Chaiies  the  Tenth. 

2.  It  was  said  of  all  the  Bourbon  family,  that  they 
had  learnt  nothing  during  their  exile  from  France,  nor 
forgotten  any  thing.  And  Charles  soon  proved  that 
he  had  not  forgotten  that  his  ancestors  had  exercised 
absolute  power,  nor  learnt  that  such  power  is  very  dan- 
gerous to  possess  or  exercise. 

3.  In  1830,  when  Charles  the  Tenth  had  sat  on  the 
throne  about  six  years,  he  forbade  the  printing  of  any 

Chapter  CXIX.— 1.  What  of  Louis  XVIII.?  When  did  he  die?  Who  ptic- 
ceeded  him?  2.  What  was  said  of  the  Bourbon  family?  What  did  Charles  prove? 
3.  What  happened  in  1830? 


EUROPE.  421 

newspapers,  except  sucli  as  praised  his  conduct  and 
government. 

4.  The  mob  of  Paris  immediately  rose,  and  began  a 
war  against  the  royal  troops.  They  beat  out  the  brains 
of  the  king's  soldiers  with  paving-stones,  and  shot  them 
from  the  vrindows  of  the  houses.  The  old  king,  who 
had  not  forgotten  the  days  of  the  Revolution,  began  to 
tremble  for  his  head.  • 

5.  In  order  to  keep  it  on  his  shoulders,  he  took  off 
his  golden  crown,  and  put  it  on  the  head  of  his  grand- 
son.    But  the  French  would  not  acknowledcre  the  little 

o 

fellow  for  their  king.     They  raised  large  armies,  and 
drove  Charles  X.  and  family  out  of  the  kingdom. 

6.  They  then  asked  the  good  and  glorious  Lafay- 
ette (the  man  who  came  and  fought  with  our  country- 
men in  the  time  of  the  Revolution)  what  sort  of  a 
government  they  should  have.  He  would  have  chosen 
a  republic,  like  our  own ;  but  he  knew  that  his  coun- 
trymen were  not  like  us. 

Y.  He  therefore  told  them  that  the  government  must 
be  a  limited  monarcjay,  and  that  Louis  Phillippe,  the 
duke  of  Orleans,  must  be  their  king.  Louis  Phillippe 
was  accordingly  raised  to  the  tlirone,  not  as  king  of 

4,  5.  Describe  the  Revolution.  6.  What  was  asked  of  Lafayette  ?  What  would 
he  have  done?  1.  What  did  he  tell  the  people?  Who  became  king?  What  of  his 
title  ? 


422  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

France,  but  as  king  of  tlie  Frencli ;  liis  title  implying 
that  the  country  did  not  belong  to  him,  but  to  the 
people. 

8.  During  his  reign,  France  had  no  foreign  wars,  ex- 
cept one  with  the  Arabs  in  Algeria.  This  was  brought 
to  a  close  in  1847, 'by  the  capture  of  Abd-el-Kader. 
Manufactures,  agriculture,  and  commerce  increased  to  a 
great  extent.  But,  by-and-by,  the  king  made  himself 
unpopular  by  increasing  the  army,  by  forbidding  the 
newspapers  to  print  certain  things  wliich  lie  did  not 
msh  to  have  printed,  and  by  j^reventing  the  people 
from  holding  public  meetings. 

9.  So,  in  February,  1848,  and  on  Washington's  birth- 
day, too,  the  people  rose  against  him,  and  on  the  third 
day,  drove  him  out  of  France.  They  then  had  a  pro- 
visional government,  and  in  December,  made  Louis  Na- 
poleon Bonaparte,  a  nej)hew  of  Napoleon,  president  of 
the  new  republic. 

10.  Louis  Napoleon  took  a  solemn  and  public  oath 
that  he  would  maintain  the  republican  constitution,  but, 
not  Ions:  after,  he  broke  his  oath  and  overturned  the 
republic;  in  1852,  he  made  himself  emperor,  with  tlio 
title  of  Napoleon  III.     The  next  year,  he  married  a 

8.  What  of  his  reign  ?  How  did  he  become  nnpopnlar?  9.  What  happened  in 
1848?  What  followed  ?  Wlio  was  made  presidont  ?  10.  What  of  Louis  Napo- 
leon's oath?    Did  he  keep  it?     What  happunt-d  iu  1802  ?     In  180G? 


EUROPE. 


423 


Spanisli  lady,  and  in  1856,  had  a  son,  who  received  the 
title  of  King  of  Algeria. 


KAPOLEON   III.    AND   EUGENIE. 


11.  Napoleon  III.  has  encouraged  manufactures, 
commerce,  and  railroads ;  he  has  increased  the  navy, 
and  has  greatly  embellished  Paris.  His  armies  have 
been  engaged  in  several  of  the  most  destructive  wars 
ever  fought.  He  is  now  (1860)  belicA^ed,  by  many,  to 
be  plotting  a  war  against  England.  In  spite  of  his 
broken  oath  and  bad  faith,  he  occupies  a  commanding 
position  in  European  politics. 

11.  What  has  Napoleon  III.  done  ?     His  wars?     His  position  in  Europe? 


19 


424 


UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


CHAPTER   CXX.— Europe    Continued. 
Chronology  of  France. 


2000 


397 


The  Gael,  Gail,  Gauls,  or  Celts,  be- 
gan 10  migrate  into  Europe  from 

•  Asia,  as  is  supposed,  about  ... 

General  migration  of  the  Gauls  to 
different  parts  of  Europe 

Italy  ravaged  by  the  Gauls,  and 
Rome  taken 390 

The  Gauls  make  destructive  incur- 
sions into  Macedon  and  Greece 

280  to  278 

A  colony  of  Belgae  settle   in  Gaul     200 

The  southern  part  of  Gaul  along 
the  Mediterranean  conquered  by 
tlie  Romans 128  to  1 22 


France  invaded  by  Julius  Cfesar. . 

All  France   finally  conquered  by 

the  Romans 


58 


25 

A.  D. 


France  invaded  by  the  Goths  and 
other  Germanic  tribes 

Pharamond,  a  Frank,  becomes  first 
king  of  France 418 

Pharamond  died 428 

Clodian   died. 448 

Merovius,  head  of  tlie  Merovingian 
race,  died 

Chiideric  died 

Monarchy  of  France  established 

Olovis  baptized 

Clovisdied 511 

Pepin  the  Short,  first  of  the  Carlo- 
vingian  race 

Charlemagne  began  to  reign 

Charlemagne  crowned  at  Rome .  . 

Charlemagne  died 

Hugh  Capet,  first  of  the  Capetian 
race,  began  to  reign 

Peter  the  Hermit  heads  the  first 
crusade 1096 

Godfrey  of  Boulogne  .takes  Jerusa- 
lem    1099 

Chivalrj'  at  its  height 1 200 

Last  crusade  begun 1218 


400 


458 
481 
486 
490 


751  i 
772  ! 

800  : 

814 

987 


Philip  the  Fair  begins  to  reign. . . 

Battle  of  Cressy 

John  the  Good  ascends  the  throne 

Battle  of  Poictiers 

Battle  of  Agincourt 

Joan  of  Arc  raises  the  siege  of  Or- 
leans   

Louis  XL  ascends  the  throne 

Francis  1.  began  to  reign 

Charles  IX.  began  to  reign 

Massacre  of  the  Protestants 

Death  of  Charles  IX. 

Henry  lY.  ascended  the  throne. . 

Henry  lY.  killed  by  Ravaillac,  a 
Jesuit. 

Riclielieu  minister  of  Louis  XIII. 

Louis  XIY.  died.... .'. 

Louis  XY.  died 

The  Bastile  destroyed 

Execution  of  Louis  XYI 

Napoleon  took  possession  of  Egypt 

Napoleon  gained  the  battle  of  Ma- 
rengo  

Napoleon  made  consul 

Napoleon  created  emperor  of 
France 

Battle  of  Trafalgar  beiweou  France 
and  England 

Burning  of  Moscow 

Louis  XYI  11.  king  of  France 

Battle  of  Waterloo,  between  Napo- 
leon and  tluMluke  of  Wellington 

Deatli  of  Napoleon 

Cliarlos  X.  king  of  France 

Revolution  of  the  three  glorious 
days  in  France 

Louis  Philippe  ascended  the  throne 

Death  of  La  Fayette 

Louis  Philippe  expelled 

Louis  Napoleon  president  of  the 
French  republic 

Napoleon  III.  emjieror 

Birth  of  the  king  of  Algeria 


A.  D. 
1285 
134G 
1350 
1356 
1420 

1428 

15^5 

156^ 

1572 

1574 

1589 

1610 
1628 
1715 
1774 
1789 
1793 
1798 

1800 
1802 

1804 

1805 
1812 

1814 


181 


18:!> 
I8;ju 

1831 

1848 

184S 
1852 
1856 


EUROPE. 


42  0 


SCENE   m   GERMANY. 


CHAPTER  CXXI.— EuEOPE   Continued. 


Ahout  Germany. 

1.  Germa]S"y  lies  to  the  east  of  France,  and  contain? 
no  less  tlian  thirty-six  different  kingdoms  and  states, 
besides  Austria  and  Prussia,  which  are  sometimes  con- 
sidered as  making  a  part  of  Germany,  and  of  which  I 
shall  tell  you  by-and-by.  These  thirty-six  states  and 
kingdoms  contain  about  sixteen  millions  of  inhabitants. 

2.  Some  of  the  principal  kingdoms  of  Germany  are 
Bavaria,  Wirtemburg,  Hanover,  and  Saxony.  They 
are  nearly  all  governed  by  a  king,  or  grand  duke,  or 


I 


Chapter  CXXI. — 1.  Where  is  German}',  and  what  does  it  contaiu  ?     Give  the 
population  of  the  thirty-six  states  and  kingdoms? 


426  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

prince  of  some  kind;  yet  they  are  leagued  togetlier 
under  a  sort  of  congress,  called  a  diet,  wliicli  meets  at 
Frankfort.     To  this  diet  the  states  send  deputies. 

3.  Tliere  are  a  great  many  large  towns  and  cities  in 
Germany.  Among  these,  the  principal  are  Hamburg, 
which  carries  on  a  good  deal  of  commerce  with  this 
country ;  Munich,  which  is  a  very  splendid  city ;  Carls- 
ruhe,  which  has  its  streets  arranged  like  the  sticks  of 
an  open  fan ;  Dresden,  which  is  famous  for  the  beauti- 
ful country  around  it;  and  Frankfort,  which  is  encir- 
cled by  a  belt  of  fine  gardens  and  public  walks. 

4.  I  could  easily  wiite  a  book  about  Germany,  for  it 
is  fall  of  curious  and  interesting  things.  In  the  cities, 
there  are  a  great  many  churches  in  the  Gothic  style, 
which  excite  the  wonder  and  admiration  of  a  traveller, 
on  account  of  their  grandeur,  and  the  skill  with  which 
many  parts  of  them  are  carved. 

5.  In  many  of  the  towns  there  are  very  curious  man- 
ufactures, particularly  of  musical  boxes,  toys  for  chil- 
dren, and  clocks  of  all  kinds.  The  Germans  are  very 
ingenious  in  these  matters,  and  sometimes  they  make 
clocks  so  cunningly  contrived,  that  at  every  hour  a 

2.  What  are  some  of  tlie  principal  kingdoms  of  Germany?  How  are  they 
governed?  How  are  they  united ?  Where  docs  the  diet  meet?  What  do  the 
states  send  to  this  diet?  3.  Describe  some  of  the  principal  cities  of  Germany.  4. 
What  of  churches?     5.  What  are  some  of  the  manufactures? 


EUROPE.  427 

little  bird  will  come  out,  flutter  his  wings,  and  sing  a 
song,  or  perhaps  tell  you  the  time  of  day. 

6.  If  you  ever  travel  in  Germany,  you  will  find  that 
the  people  are  very  fond  of  music.  All  the  boys  and 
girls  are  taught  music  as  a  part  of  their  education. 
Most  of  them  can  j)lay  upon  some  instrument.  The 
flute  is  a  great  favorite,  and  is  called  the  German  flute, 
either  because  it  was  invented  in  Germany,  or  because 
it  is  more  in  use  among  the  Germans  than  elsewhere. 

1.  In  passing  through  Germany,  you  will  often 
notice  the  ruins  of  castles,  some  of  which  were  built  a 
thousand  or  twelve  hundred  years  ago.  These  be- 
longed to  the  barons  who  occupied  the  country  in  the 
old  feudal  times,  of  which  I  have  told  you  in  the  his- 
tory of  France. 


CHAPTER  CXXIL— EuEOPE  Continued. 

About  the  Ancient  Tribes  of  Germany^  Charlemagne^  cfc<?. 

1.  In  ancient  days,  Germany,  as  I  have  told  you^ 

jvvas   inhabited    by    numerous    tribes    of    barbarians- 

Among   these   were   the    Goths,  Visigoths,   Vandals, 

6.  What  of  music?     The  flute?     7.  What  of  old  castles? 


428  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY." 

Suevi,  Cimbri,  Teutones,  Heruli,  Allemanni,  and  many 
others.  As  there  was  no  Peter  Parley  among  them 
to  write  their  history  in  early  times,  we  know  little  or 
nothing  of  them  till  two  or  three  himdred  years  before 
Christ. 

2.  At  this  time  they  were  numerous,  but  they  were 
mere  savages.  They  were  clothed  in  the  skins  of  wild 
beasts,  and  seemed  to  delight  only  in  war  and  plunder. 
In  the  time  of  Csesar,  they  were  very  powerful,  but 
that  famous  conqueror  marched  against  them,  and  after 
many  bloody  battles,  reduced  them  to  submission. 

3.  I  have  already  told  you  that  wherever  the  Ro- 
mans extended  their  arms,  they  carried  their  arts. 
Thus  the  rude  tribes  of  Germany  became  partially  civ- 
ilized; many  of  the  people  exchanged  their  skins  of 
beasts  for  the  Roman  toga  or  gown.  They  also  learnt 
how  to  make  better  weapons  of  war,  how  to  build  -bet- 
ter houses,  and  how  to  live  more  comfortably. 

4.  But  you  remember  that  four  or  ^ve  hundred  years 
after  Caesar,  poor  old  Rome  was  tottering  to  decay.  It 
was  therefore  unable  to  keep  these  restless  tribes  of 


Chapter  CXXII. — 1.  How  was  Germany  anciently  inhabited  ?     Mention  some-* 
of  the  barbarian  tribes.     2.  What  of  them  ii\  ancient  times  ?    In  the  time  of  Caesar  ? 
3.  What  of  the  arts  of  tlie  Romans  ?     How  did  the  rude   tribes  become  partly 
civilized  ?     Wh|it  did  they  do  ?     4.  What  of  Rome  several  hundred  years  after 
Caesar  ? 


^      EUROPE.  X  429 

the  north  in  subjection ;  nay,  Rome  was  now  incapable 
even  of  defending  herself 

5.  The  Germans  soon  discovered  how  matters  stood. 
They  saw  that  in  Spain,  Italy,  and  Greece,  there  were 
a  great  many  rich  cities,  and  pleasant  towns,  and  fruit- 
ful valleys.  They  saw  that  in  these  countries  the 
Eomans  had  collected  the  wealth  of  the  whole  world, 
and  these  shrewd  barbarians  thought  it  would  be  a 
good  S23eculation  to  go  to  these  countries  and  live  there. 

6.  They  thought  it  would  be  much  better  to  go  and 
live  in  palaces  and  fine  houses,  and  have  a  plenty  of 
wine,  and  plenty  of  gold,  silver,  and  jewels,  than  to 
live  in  their  own  less  fruitful  country,  and  earn  their 
bread  by  toil,  or  by  plundering  each  other. 

T.  Accordingly,  some  of  them  set  out  under  their 
daring  leaders,  and  marched  into  Italy.  Others  soon 
followed,  and  in  the  course  of  a  few  years,  these  hordes 
had  settled  like  swarms  of  bees  in  all  the  southern 
countries  of  Europe. 

8.  But  still  many  remained  behind  in  Germany,  and 
thus  increased,  so  that  in  the  time  of  Charlemagne 
they  were  numerous  and  powerful.  But  he  conquered 
them,  as  I  have  said  in  the  history  of  France.     Thusi 

5.  "What  didtlie  Grermans  soon  discover?  6.  "What  did  they  think?  7.  \y/iat 
did  some  of  them  do?  "What  happened  in  a  few  years?  8.  "What  of  the 
Daibarians  wiio  remained  in  Germany?     Wliat  of  Charlemagne  and  his  empire? 


430  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

liaving  made  himself  master  of  Germany,  lie  became 
its  emperor,  and  resided  there.  You  will  recollect 
that  his  empire  included  France,  Germany,  and  other 
countries. 

9.  The  empii^e  of  Germany,  thus  established,  was, 
however,  composed  of  many  separate  sovereignties, 
each  of  which  had  its  own  ruler.  In  the  year  912,  it 
became  the  custom  for  these  rulers  to  make  choice  of 
one  of  their  number,  and  declare  him  emperor.  He 
then  presided  over  the  whole  of  Germany.  Thus  Ger- 
many was  what  is  called  an  elective  monarchy,  and  so 
it  continued,  even  so  late  as  the  year  1806. 

10.  In  1056,  Hemy  the  Fourth  was  emj^eror.  He 
had  a  sharp  quarrel  with  pope  Gregory  the  Seventh. 
The  pope's  power  was  so  great,  that  he  compelled  the 
emperor  to  come  to  Italy  to  ask  his  pardon. 

11.  When  Henry  arrived  at  the  gate  of  the  pope's 
palace,  the  weather  was  exceedingly  cold,  and  there 
was  snow  on  the  ground.  Pope  Gregory  was  sitting 
by  a  comfortable  fire.  "  He  sent  the  emperor  word  that 
he  would  have  nothing  to  say  to  him,  till  he  had  stood 
three  whole  days  barefooted  in  the  snow,  without  tast- 
iiis:  a  mouthful  of  food. 


9.  What  of  the  sovereignties  of  Germany?  What  was  the  custom  in  912  ?  What 
of  the  emperor?  What  was  the  government  of  Germany?  10.  When  was  Henry 
IV.  emperor  ?     What  of  the  pope  ? 


EUROPE.  431 

12.  This  penance  tlie  poor  emperor  was  compelled  to 
undergo.  On  the  fourth  day,  pope  Gregory  gave  hun 
absolution  for  his  sins,  and  allowed  him  to  warm  him- 
self and  eat  his  dinner. 

13.  Another  emperor,  also  named  Henry,  who 
reigned  about  a  hundred  years  afterward,  quarrelled 
with  pope  Celestinus.  In  order  to  make  peace,  he  was 
persuaded  to  kneel  down  and  kiss  the  pope's  toe. 
But  no  sooner  had  his  lips  touched  the  toe,  than  pope 
Celestinus  drew  back  his  foot,  and  gave  the  emperor's 
crown  a  kick,  which  sent  it  half-way  across  the  room. 
This  anecdote  will  give  you  some  idea  of  the  spirit  and 
manners  of  these  pretended  successors  of  St.  Peter. 

14.  In  1273,  Rodolph  of  Hapsburgh,  a  native  of 
Switzerland,  was  elected  emperor  of  Germany.  He 
was  the  ancestor  of  the  present  sovereigns  of  Austria. 
Most  of  the  German  emperors,  since  his  reign,  have 
been  his  descendants. 

11,  12.  What  of  the  penance  laid  by  the  pope  upon  the  king?  13.  Relate  the 
anecdote  of  Henry  and  pope  Celestinus.  14.  Who  was  king  of  Germany  in  1273  ? 
What  of  him  ?  •       ' 


432 


UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


X0T1.K  Jboia  Grecnivi 


B4   '^■Mcriiarn/  nJ5     "^     ||T.oii.T:.rrom^Tisltiiigtoii 


CHAPTER  CXXIII.— Europe    Continued. 
Affairs  of  Switzerland, 

1.  Until  tlie  year  1307,  Switzerland  was  under  tlie 
government  of  Germany.  Switzerland,  as  you  know, 
is  a  mountainous  little  country,  whicli  is  hemmed  in 
between  Germany,  France,  and  Italy. 

Questions  on  the  Map  of  Switzerland. — How  is  Switzerland  bounded?  Where 
Is  Geneva  ?  Neuchatel  ?  Lausanne  ?  Friburg  ?  Zurich  ?  Constance  ?  Luzerne  ? 
Lugano?  Berne?  Where  are  the  Alps?  Where  is  Mount  Blanc?  Mount  St. 
Bernard?     Lake  of  Constance  ?     Lake  of  Zurich ?    Lake  of  Geneva ? 

Chapter  CXXIIL— 1.  What  of  the  government  of  Switzerland?  Where  is 
Switzerland  ? 


EUROPE.  433 

2.  As  I  have  many  kind  wislies  for  my  young  read- 
ers, I  hope  it  may  be  their  pleasant  fortune  some  day 
or  other  to  visit  Switzerland.  When  you  go  there,  you 
will  find  good  roads,  but  I  advise  you  to  travel  on  foot. 
There  are  so  many  pleasant  things  to  see,  so  many  tall 
mountains  looking  like  white  clouds  up  in  the  sky,  so 
many  little  blue  lakes,  seeming  like  mirrors  encircled 
with  frames  made  of  hills,  so  many  bright  green  val- 
leys, so  many  old  ruinous  castles — in  short,  so  many  in- 
teresting things  to  see,  that  you  will  be  stopping  every 
moment,  and  a  carriage  would  therefore  be  a  great 
trouble. 

3.  I  have  been  over  this  country  myself,  and  I  went 
on  foot.  Switzerland  seemed  to  me  like  a  little  world 
of  itself  Every  thing  was  strange,  but  still  interesting. 
Among  such  wild  mountains,  you  would  perhaps  ex- 
pect to  meet  with  a  wdld  and  fierce  people.  Yet  the 
Swiss  are  a  gentle  and  honest  race.  I  should  like  to 
visit  the  country  again,  but  my  old  limbs  will  never 
more  toil  up  and  down  those  hills. 

4.  But  I  must  now  proceed  with  my  brief  account 
of  the  history  of  Switzerland.  When  Albert  the  First 
became  emperor,  in  1298,  he  acted  like  a  tyrant 
toward  Switzerland.       He  appointed  governors,  who 

2.  Describe  the  appearance  of  the  countiy  there.     3.  What  of  the  people  ?     4. 
What  of  Albert  I?    What  of  Geslerl 


434  UNIVERSAL  HIST©IIY. 

were  worse  tyrants  tlian  Mmself.  One  of  them,  named 
Gesler,  set  liis  cap  upon  a  pole,  and  ordered  all  tlie 
people  to  bow  down  to  it. 

5.  jTlie  famous  peasant,  William  Tell,  would  not  bow 
down  to  Gesler's  cap.  My  readers  liave  lieard  the 
story,  how  Gesler  commanded  Tell  to  shoot  at  an  apple 
on  his  own  son's  head,  and  how  Tell  hit  the  apple 
without  hurting  his  son. 

6.  When  the  Swiss  rebelled  against  the  emperor  of 
Germany,  Tell  was  their  principal  leader.  After  sixty 
pitched  battles  with  the  emperor  s  troops,  the  liberty 
of  Switzerland  was  established,  and  it  became  a  free 
and  independent  republic. 

7.  It  is  said  that  some  of  the  Swiss  still  believe  that 
William  Tell  is  not  yet  dead,  though  it  is  nearly  five 
hundred  years  since  he  was  seen  on  earth.  They  sup- 
pose that  he  lies  asleep  in  a  cavern  near*  the  lake  of 
Lucerne,  with  two  other  men  who  assisted  in  founding 
the  republic. 

8.  These  three  slumberers  are  called  the  Men  of 
Rutli.  If  ever  Switzerland  shall  be  enslaved,  it  is  fan- 
cied that  they  will  start  from  their  sleep,  and  come 
forth  with  their  ancient  garb  and  weapons,  and  rouse 
up  the  people  to  fight  for  their  freedom. 

5.  What  of  William  Tell  ?    6.  How  did  Switzerland  obtain  her  liberty  ?  V,  8.  What 
legend  have  the  Swiss  concerning  William  Tell  and  his  two  companions? 


EUROPE. 


435 


9.  Since  tlie  time  of  William  Tell,  who  died  in  tlie 
year  1534,  Switzerland  lias  generally  been  a  free  coun- 
try. But  during  tlie  Frencli  Ke volution  it  was  con- 
quered ;  it  lias  since  been  restored  to  independence,  yet 
tlie  people  are  overawed  by  tlie  kings  that  reign  in  the 
neighboring  countries. 


SCENE  IN    SWITZEELAND. 


10.  Many  of  the  Swiss  leave  their  beautiful,  but 
poor  country,  to  seek  their  fortunes  in  other  lands. 
Some  enter  foreign  armies  as  soldiers,  and  some  go  to 
Paris  and  London  to  sing  songs,  or  carry  about  shows, 
and  thus  get  a  little  money.     You  often  find  a  Swiss 

9.  When  did  William  Tell  die  ?     What  of  Switzerland  since  the  time  of  Tell  ? 
10.  What  of  the  Swiss  people  ?  The  population  ? 


436    .  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

boy  in  tlie  streets  of  these  great  cities,  doing  what  lie 
can  to  get  a  living.  The  population  is  over  three  mil- 
lions. 


CHAPTER   CXXIY.— Europe  Continued. 
Sequel  of  German  History. 

1.  I  WILL  now  proceed  with  the  history  of  Germany. 
Charles  the  Fifth  was  the  most  renowned  of  the  em- 
perors of  Germany.  He  was  likewise  king  of  Spain, 
and  ruler  of  the  Netherlands,  and  part  of  Italy. 

2.  When  this  great  potentate  was  fifty -seven  years 
old,  he  grew  weary  of  pomp  and  power.  He  therefore 
took  off  his  crown,  and  gave  it  to  his  son  Philip,  and 
went  to  live  in  a  monastery  in  Estramadura,  in  Spain. 
He  dressed  very  plainly,  and  busied  himself  in  saying 
his  prayers  and  working  in  a  garden. 

3.  One  day,  he  wrapt  himself  in  a  shroud  and  lay 
down  in  a  coffin,  stretching  himself  out  as  if  he  were 
dead.  He  then  ordered  his  attendants  to  carry  him  to 
the  tomb.     The  reader  must  not  suppose  that  the  em- 


rilAPTi;i:   f'XXIV. -1.  V\'li:.t  of  Charles  A'."     '_'.    W.    \\v\:\W  an  aiiocdot.-  of  hir 
Wliou  did  Ciiaiif:^  \'.  di"? 


EUROPE.  .  437 

peror  meant  to  be  buried  alive.  He  merely  wished  to 
remind  himself  that  his  life  must  soon  close.  But  the 
ceremony  hastened  his  end ;  for  it  brought  on  a  fever, 
of  which  he  died,  in  1588. 

4.  Ferdinand  the  Second,  who  began  t(?^eign  in  1619, 
was  called  by  the  Catholics  the  Apostolic  emperor,  be- 
cause he  was  a  bitter  persecutor  of  the  Protestant  in- 
habitants of  Germany.  His  cruelties  forced  them  to 
ask  the  aid  of  the  Swedish  king,  Gustavus  Adolphus, 
who  accordingly  invaded  Germany,  and  gained  many 
victories. 

5.  The  subsequent  history  of  Germany  does  not 
abound  with  the  sort  of  events  which  my  young  read- 
ers would  be  desirous  of  knowing.  Few  or  none  of  the 
later  emperors  performed  any  remarkable  actions.  But 
they  appear  to  have  been  better  than  most  sovereigns, 
for  they  cannot  be  accused  of  great  crimes. 

6.  The  emperor  of  Germany,  as  I  have  mentioned 
above,  was  generally  a  prince  of  the  Hapsburgh  fami- 
ly. The  kingdom  of  Austria  was  enlarged  by  the 
successive  emperors,  and  finally  became  great  and  pow- 
erful. 

7.  It  was  now  able  to  carry  on  war  by  itself,  and  was 

4.  When  did  Ferdinand  11.  begin  to  reign?  What  of  him?  What  were  the 
Protestants  forced  to  do?  5.  What  of  tlio  late  emperors  of  Germany?  6.  What 
of  the  emperor  of  Germany  ?     Kingdom  of  Austria  ? 


438    .  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

at  different  times  engaged  in  struggles  witli  Turkey, 
with  France  and  Spain,  witli  Prussia,  and  sometimes 
witli  several  of  the  sovereign  states  of  Germany. 

8.  In  1792,  Francis  tli^  Second  became  emperor  of 
Germany.  H^  undertook  a  war  against  Napoleon 
Bonaparte,  but  liis  aiTaies  were  routed,  and,  in  1806, 
lie  was  compelled  to  resign  tlie  title  of  emperor  of 
Germany.  He  wag  afterward  called  emperor  of  Aus- 
tria. His  empire  at  tlie  time  of  his  deatli,  whicli  took 
place  in  ISBG,  was  one  of  the  most  powerful  sovereign- 
ties of  Europe,  and  deserves  a  separate  chapter. 

9.  There  is  now  no  German  emperor.  The  separate 
states  and  kingdoms  are  governed  by  their  own  sov- 
ereigns'and  their  own  laws.  They  send  representatives 
to  a  sort  of  congress,  called  a  diet,  as  I  have  said, 
which  manages  the  general  affairs  of  the  German  states. 

7.  With  what  countries  has  Austria  waged  war?  8.  Who  became  emperor  of 
Germany  in  1792?  What  took  place  in  1806?  What  of  tlio  Austrian  empire  7 
9.  What  of  the  German  states  at  present? 


EUROPE. 


439 


WILD  BOAB  HUJS'T  IX  AUSTEIA. 

CHAPTER  CXXY.— EuKOPE   Continued. 
About  Austria^  Hungary^  i&c. 

1.  Austria  is  an  extensive  and  powerful  empire, 
lying  south  of  Russia  and  Poland,  and  north  of  Turkey. 
On  the  west,  it  is  bounded  by  the  German  states, 
Switzerland,  and  Italy. 

2.  Austria  formerly  belonged  to  Germany,  and  is 
still  considered  as  belonging  to  it.  But  of  late  years 
other  countries  have  been  added  to  it  which  do  not 
belong  to  Germany.     It  now  includes  Hungary,  Bohe- 


Chapter"  CXXV,— 1.  Where  does  Austria  lie  ?     Its  boundaries  ?     2.  To  what 
does  Austria  belonc??     What  does  it  now  include  ? 


440  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

mia,  a  part  of  Poland,  a  part  of  Italy,  and  many  other 
states  wMcIl  were  formerly  independent.  Its  present 
population  is  about  thirty-six  millions,  including  all 
these  places. 

3.  Vienna  is  the  capital  of  the  German  part,  of  Aus- 
tria, and  is  one  of  the  most  splendid  cities  in  Europe. 
It  is  situated  on  the  Danube,  which  is  a  large  river.  In 
winter,  this  is  frozen  over,  and  the  people  amuse  them- 
selves by  sliding,  skating,  and  driving  upon  it  with 
various  kinds  of  sledges  or  sleighs.  The  scene  pre- 
sented at  such  a  time  is  very  gay  and  pleasant. 

4.  In  summer,  the  inhabitants  resort  to  the  public 
gardens,  which  are  extensive  and  beautiful.  Here  are 
iine  walks,  where  you  may  see  people  of  all  kinds. 
There  are  ladies  and  gentlemen  taking  the  air,  boys 
and  girls  scampering  about,  men  with  monkeys  taught 
to  dance,  and  a  multitude  of  curious  sports.  The  gen- 
tlemen of  Austria  are  much  addicted  to  hunting  wild 
boars,  which  are  common  in  that  country. 

5.  In  the  German  part  of  Austria,  which  is  the  east- 
ern portion,  the  inhabitants  speak  the  German  lan- 
guage, and  have  the  manners  and  customs  of  Germany. 
The  history  of  this  country  has  been  partly  told.     In 

3.  What  of  Vienna?  What  of -the  Danube?  Amusements?  4.  What  of  the 
public  gardens?  5.  What  of  the  Gorman  part  of  Austria  ?  What  of  it  in  ancient 
viraes?     At  a  later  period  ? 


EUROPE,  441 

early  times  it  was  occupied  by  tribes  of  barbarians. 
At  a  later  period  it  formed  one  of  tbe  states  of  the 
German  empire. 

6.  At  this  time  it  was  called  an  archducliy,  and  was 
governed  by  an  archduke,  who  was,  however,  subject 
to  the  emperor.  Rodolph  of  Hapsburg  succeeded  to 
the  government  of  the  empire  in  1273,  as  I  have  told 
you,  and  from  him  the  sovereigns  of  Austria  have  since 
descended.  After  his  time,  Austria  rapidly  increased 
in  power,  and  its  archduke  was  at  length  considered  as 
of  course  the  emperor  of  all  Germany. 

Y.  It  has  since  been  engaged  in  many  wars,  particu- 
larly with  Sweden,  Turkey,  and  France.  In  1688,  the 
Turks  pushed  their  arms  into  the  heart  of  the  empire, 
and  laid  siege  to  Vienna,  but  were  finally  driven  back. 

8.  In  1809,  Austria  was  involved  in  a  war  with  Bona- 
parte. She  had  well-trained  soldiers  and  able  gen- 
erals, but  the  French  emperor  beat  them  in  several 
pitched  battles,  and  finally  entered  Vienna.  Here  he 
made  peace  with  the  emperor,  but  took  from  him  a 
large  portion  of  his  dominions. 

9.  These,  however,  were  afterward  restored,  and  r ; 
the  present  day,  Austria  may  be  considered  as  one  of 

6.  What  was  it  called  at  this  time?  Who  succeeded  to  the  crown  in  12V3? 
What  of  Austria  and  its  archduke?  7.  What  of  the  wars  of  Austria?  What 
happened  in  1688  ?     8.  What  happened  in  1809  ?    What  did  Bonaparte  do  ? 


442 


univp:rsal  history. 


the  leading  kingdoms  of  Europe.  It  is  a  curious  fact, 
that  tlie  emperors  of  Austria  have  had  a  great  many 
beautiful  daughters.  Many  of  these  have  been  mar- 
ried to  the  kings  and  princes  of  Europe,  and  it  is  owing 
to  this,  more  than  to  success  in  war,  that  Austria  has 
].)een  able  to  acquire  its  vast  possessions  and  extensive 
dominions.  Francis  Joseph  I.  is  now  (1860)  emperor 
of  Austria. 


BOHESflAN   GYPSIES. 


CriAPTEE    CXXYL— EuKOPE    Continued. 
About  Hungary,  Boheraia^  the  Tyrol^  &g. 
1.  I  MUST  now  give  you  a  very  brief  account  of 
some  of  the  dependencies  of  Austria.     Hungary  is  an 

9.  How  may  Austria  be  considered  at  the  present  day,?-    Wiiat  is  a  curious 
fact  ?     Who  is  now  emperor  ? 


EUROPE.  443 

extensive  country,  and  includes  several  provinces. 
Buda,  the  capital,  is  a  fine  city,  situated  upon  the 
Danube. 

2.  The  climate  of  Hungary  is  pleasant,  and  the  soil 
yields  very  fine  grapes,  of  which  some  choice  wines 
are  made.  The  mountains  afford  considerable  quanti- 
ties of  gold  and  silver.  The  inhabitants  are  divided 
into  two  classes,  the  rich  and  the  poor.  The  former 
live  in  splendid  palaces,  and  the  latter  are  but  little 
better  than  their  slaves. 

3.  The  original  inhabitants  of  Hungary  consisted  of 
several  fierce  tribes,  who  appear  to  have  come  from  Asia 
into  Europe  at  a  very  early  date,  by  crossing  the  Altai 
Mountains.  They  probably  resembled  those  Tartar 
tribes  called  Turks,  who  fell  upon  the  Saracen  empire, 
and  established  the  empire  of  Turkey. 

4.  The  principal  of  the  Hungarian  tribes  were  call- 
ed Huns.  An  army  of  these,  you  will  recollect,  was 
led  into  Italy  by  the  fierce  and  bloody  Attila,  about 
450.  He  had  already  fought  many  battles,  and  made 
the  Greek  empire  a  tributary.  He  -now  crossed  the 
Alps,  and   pouring  down   upon   the   plains    of  Italy, 

Chapter  CXXVI. — 1.  What  of  Hungary?  Its  capital ?  2.  Climate  and  soil  of 
Hungary?  Mountains?  Inhabitants?  3.  What  of  the  original  inhabitants?  Their 
origin?  Whom  did  they  probably  resemble  ?  4.  What  of 'the  Huns?  What  of 
Attila  ?    When  did  he  die  ? 


444  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

spread  terror  and  desolation  among  tlie  mliabitants. 
He  approached  tlie  city  of  Rome,  but  was  compelled 
to  retire.     He  died  in  451. 

5.  For  many  years,  Hungary  was  the  scene  of  per- 
petual wars.  Its  rulers  did  not  acquire  the  title  of 
king  till  the  time  of  Stephen,  who  died  in  1038,  after 
a  reign  of  forty-seven  years.  In  1563,  Hungary  be- 
came attached  to  the  Austrian  empire,  and  continues 
so  to  the  present  day.  In  1848,  it  made  a  desperate 
attempt,  under  Kossuth,  to  recover  its  liberty,  but  was 
unsuccessful. 

6.  Bohemia  is  a  country  surrounded  by  mountains, 
containing  about  four  millions  of  inhabitants.  It  is 
rich  in  mines  of  silver,  tin,  and  precious  stones. 
Many  of  the  present  inhabitants  are  Jews.  There  are 
also  a  great  many  of  those  strange,  wandering  people, 
called  Gypsies. 

1,  This  country  derives  its  name  from  a  tribe  of 
Celts  from  Asia,  who  settled  there  about  600  years 
B.  C.  About  450  after  Christ,  it  appears  that  the 
Celts  had  been  driven  out,  for  the  people  at  that  time 
were    Germans,   under   the   government    of   a   duke. 

5.  What  of  Hungary  for  many  years?  "What  of  Steplien?  What  took  place 
in  15G:}?  Ill  1848?  6.  What  of  Bohemia ?  Population?  Mines?  Inhabitants? 
7.  What  of  a  tribe  of  Celts  ?  Who  occupied  the  country  in  450  ?  What  of 
Charlemagne?     What  took  place  in  1526  ? 


EUROPE.  445 

Ctarlemagne  rendered  tlie  country  tributary,  but  it 
afterward  became  a  kingdom.  In  1526,  it  wag.  attach- 
ed to  tlie  house  of  Austria,  and  has  continued  so  from 
tliat  day. 

8.  I  need  not  proceed  to  tell  you  more  about  the 
provinces  belonging  to  the  empire  of  Austria.  I  have 
already  given  you  some  account  of  Venice,  and  if  I 
bad  room,  I  could  tell  you  of  the  brave  Tyrolese  who 
live  in  the  mountains  between  Italy  and  GeiTaany, 
and  many  other  tribes  under  the  government  of 
Austria. 

9.  But  I  am  afraid  you  are  weary  of  these  dull 
stories;  we  will  therefore  proceed  to  the  history  of 
Prussia.  I  must,  however,  remai'k,  that  the  geography, 
as  well  as  the  history,  of  Germany,  is  a  great  puzzle, 
and  demands  much  study  in  order  to  be  understood. 


CHAPTER   CXXYIL— Europe   Continued. 

About  Prussia. 

1.  There  are  fiYe  great  powers  in  Europe :  Great 
Britain,   France,   Russia,   Austiia,   and    Prussia.      Of 

8.  Where  do  the  Tyrolese  live  ? 


446  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

these,  Prussia  is  tlie  smallest — tliat  is,  it  lias  tlie  fewest 
people,  4lie  least  wealth,  tlie  smallest  mmiber  of  sol- 
diers, and  therefore  the  least  power.  Yet  it  is  still  an 
extensive  country,  and  has  sixteen  million  inhabitants. 

2.  The  kingdom  of  Prussia  consists  of  two  separate 
tracts  of  territory.  The  larger  of  the  two  is  bounded 
north  by  the  Baltic,  east  by  Russia,  south  by  Austria, 
and  west  by  Germany.  The  smaller  portion  is  a  part 
of  Germany,  and  is  bounded  on  the  north  and  east  by 
the  Netherlands  and  Belgium. 

3.  The  capital  of  Prussia  is  Berlin,  situated  on  the 
river  Spree;  a  river,  by  the  way,  with  a  very  merry 
name.  It  is,  however,  a  sober  stream.  The  city  is 
twelve  miles  in  circumference,  and  is  surrounded  by  a 
wall.  It  has  a  splendid  palace,  where  the  king  resides, 
a  fine  university,  where  a  great  many  young  men  are 
educated,  and  several  places  of  public  amusement.  It 
is,  on  the  whole,  one  of  the  most  splendid  cities  in 
Europe. 

4.  Besides  Berlin,  there  are  many  other  fine  cities 
in  Prussia.  Among  these  are  Potsdam,  where  there  is 
a  royal  palace,  and  Dantzic,  a  wealthy  town  and  the 

Chaptbe  CXXVII. — 1,  What  are  the  five  great  powers  of  Europe  ?  Which 
is  the  smallest?  What  of  it?  Its  inhabitants?  2.  How  is  the  kingdom  of  Prus- 
sia divided?  Bound  the  two  portions.  3.  Capital  of  Prussia?  River  Spree? 
What  of  the  city  ? 


EUROPE.  447 

cliief  seaport  of  Prussia.  At  tliis  place,  tliere  is  a 
powerful  fortress,  witli  iramense  stone  walls,  and  a 
multitude  of  cannon.  It  is  defended  by  a  large  num- 
ber of  soldiers,  who  always  remain  in  it. 

5.  The  inhabitants  of  Prussia  are  chiefly  of  German 
origin,  and  speak  the  German  language.  These  are  in- 
dustrious, and  a  multitude  of  schools  having  been  es- 
tablished by  the  emperor  among  them,  they  are  toler- 
ably well  educated.  But  they  are  not  a  free  people, 
and  without  freedom,  even  education  cannot  make  a 
nation  happy. 

6.  Besides  the  German  population,  Pnissia  has  a  good 
many  Jews.  There  are  also  the  remains  of  tribes  that 
settled  in  the  country  long  ago,  who  speak  their  orig- 
inal languages.  These  people  are  generally  ignorant, 
and  appear  unmlling  to  be  taught. 


'      CHAPTER   CXXYIII.— Europe  Continued. 

More  about  P^russia. — Frederic  the  Great.  > 

1.  Prussia  did  not  become  a  kingdom  till  the  year 
1701.     Previous  to  that  time  it  was  governed  by  dukes. 

4.  What  oC  Potsdam  ?  Dantzic  ?  What  of  the  fortress  ?  5.  What  of  the  inhab- 
itants of  Prussia  ?  Schools  ?  Of  what  blessing  are  the  people  in  want  ?  6.  What 
of  Jews  ?     Ancient  tribes  ? 

20 


448  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

Its  ancient  inhabitants  were  called  Borussi,  from  wliom 
tlie  country  took  tlie  name  of  Prussia. 

2.  Frederic  "William  tlie  First,  wlio  ascended  the 
throne  in  1713,  was  a  very  odd  sort  of  king.  He 
used  to  wear  an  old  blue  coat,  which  was  ornamented 
with  rows  of  copper  buttons,  reaching  from  his  chin 
half-way  down  his  legs.  Whenever  he  got  a  new 
coat,  he  made  the  tailor  sew  on  these  same  old  copper 
buttons. 

3.  He  prided  himself  greatly  on  a  regiment  of  his 
guards  which  consisted  of  very  tall  men,  many  of  whom 
were  seven  feet  high.  These  gigantic  fellows  came 
from  all  parts  of  Europe,  and  if  they  would  not  come 
of  their  own  accord,  the  king  hired  people  to  bring 
them  by  force. 

4.  Frederic  William  was  in  the  habit  of  walking 
about  the  streets  of  Berlin,  with  a  big  cane  in  his 
hand,  and  if  he  happened  to  see  any  idle  people,  he 
would  give  them  a  sound  thrashing.  He  beat  his  own 
son  oftener  than  any  body  else.  The  princess,  his 
daughter,  got  likewise  a  good  many  hard  knocks. 

5.  When  this  ill-tempered  old  king  was  dead,  his 
son   Frederic   came   into   possession   of   an    enormous 

Chapter CXXVl II. — 1.  When  did  Pmasia  become  a  kingdom?  How  was  it 
previously  governed  ?  Its  ancient  inhabitants  ?  2.  What  of  Frederick  William  I,  ? 
"When  did  he  ascend  the  throne  ?     3,  4.  Give  an  account  of  him. 


I 


EUROPE.  449 

quantity  of  treasure,  as  well  as  an  army  of  sixty  thou- 
sand men.  He  soon  found  uses  enough  for  his  money 
and  soldiers,  in  a  war  with  Austria,  Russia,  and  France. 

6.  Th^  war  "between  Prussia  and  these  three  king- 
doms began  in  1^56,  and  was  called  the  Seven  Years' 
War.  Saxony  and  Sweden  joined  the  enemies  of  ^ 
Frederic.  At  one  time,  he  seemed  on  the  point  of 
losing  all  his  dominions.  But  he  finally  brought  the 
war  to  an  honorable  close.  He  was  then  the  most  cel- 
ebrated sovereign  of  his  time,  and  is  known  in  history 
by  the  title  of  Frederic  the  Great. 

7.  He  was  almost  as  peculiar  in  his  dress  as  his 
father  had  been.  He  always  wore  a  uniform,  consist- 
ing of  a  blue  coat  faced  with  red,  and  a  yellow  waist- 
coat and  breeches.  But  his  clothes  were  often  torn, 
and  generally  soiled  with  snuff.  On  his  head  was  a 
very  large  cocked  hat,  and  he  wore  a  long  cue  behind. 

8.  When  Frederic  the  Great  was  grown  an  old  man, 
he  used  to  sit  in  an  easy  chair,  wrapt  in  a  large  cloak. 
He  appeared  to  take  no  pleasure  in  his  palace,  nor  in 
all  the  pomp  and  power  of  his  kingdom. 

9.  He  looked  very  sad  and  wo-begone,  and  might  be 

5.  Who  succeeded  him  ?  In  what  wars  did  he  engage  ?  6.  What  war  began 
in  1756?  What  kingdoms  joined  the  enemies  of  Frederic?  What  was  he 
called?  7.  What  was  the  dress  of  Frederic  the  Great?  8.  What  of  him  when  he 
had  grown  old  ? 


450  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

heard  muttering  to  himself — "A  little  while  longer^ 
and  I  shall  be  gone !"  He  died  in  1786,  at  the  age  of 
seventy-five, 

10.  He  was  succeeded  by  his  nephew,  Frederic  Wil- 
liam the  Second,  who  reigned  eleven  years.  The  next 
king  was  Frederic  William  the  Third.  He  had  a  large 
army,  and  thought  himself  powerful  enough  to  with- 
stand the  emperor  Napoleon. 

11.  But  at  the  battle  of  Jena,  in  1806,  Napoleon 
wasted  the  Prussian  army,  and  killed  or  wounded 
twenty  thousand  men.  About  forty  thousand  were 
taken  prisoners.  Frederic  William  was  then  deprived 
of  a  great  part  of  his  territories. 

12.  After  the  battle  of  Waterloo,  and  the  final  de- 
feat of  Napoleon,  the  losses  of  Prussia  were  repaired, 
Frederic  William  then  showed  himself  a  well-meaning 
man.  He  declared  that  there  should  be  a  Bible  in 
every  cottage  in  his  kingdom,  and  I  believe  he  tried  to 
keep  his  word. 

13..  He  took  more  pains  than  any  other  king  that 
ever  lived  to  have  all  the  children  sent  to  school,  and 
the  good  state  of  education  in  the  country  is  partly 
owing  to  his  efforts.     If  he  had  ceased  to  govern  the 

9.  "When  did  he  die  ?  10.  What  two  kings  succeeded  him  ?  What  of  Fredeiic 
William  III.  ?  11.  What  took  place  at  the  battle  of  Jena?  What  of  the  Prussian 
king?   12.  What  took  place  after  the  battle  of  Waterloo? 


EUROPE.  451 

people  against  tlieir  will,  and  allowed  tliem  to  govern 
themselves,  according  to  their  wishes,  he  would  have 
set  an  example  worthy  of  being  followed  by  all  kings. 
14.  Frederic  William  IV.  came  to  the  throne  in 
1840.  Great  hopes  had  been  formed  of  his  character, 
but  they  were  doomed  to  be  disappointed.  The  people 
revolted  in  1848,  and  gained  some  slight  advantages, 
but  things  speedily  returned  to  their  former  condition. 
Though  Frederic  AYilliam  IV.  is  still  on  the  throne, 
his  son  administers  the  government  as  prince  regent. 
His  grandson  married  the  eldest  daughter  of  queen 
Victoria,  of  England,  in  1858. 


CIIAPTEK   CXXIX.— Europe   Continued. 
CJiTonology  of  Oermany^  Austria^  Hungary^  and  Prussia. 

B.  C.  I  A.  D. 

The  Celts  settled  in  Bohemia 609  i  The  Celts  driven  from  Bohemia. .     450 


Russia  possessed  by  the  Venedi. .  320 
Switzerland  subdued  by  Caesar. ..  57 
Hungary,  anciently  Pannonia,  sub- 
ject to  the  Romans 11 

A.D. 

The  Romans   expelled  from  Ger- 
many    290 

Germany  conquered  by  the  Huns  432 
Hungary  possessed  by  the  Huns 

under  Attila 433 

Attila  leads  the  Huns  into  Italy. .  450 


Charlemagne  master  of  Germany.     802 
Switzerland    becomes  part  of  the        * 

kingdom  of  Burgundy 888 

Hungary  annexed  to  Germany  un- 
der Charlemagne 920 

Stephen,  first  king  of  Hungary,died  1038 
Austria  attached  to  Germany  ....  1040 
Henry IV.  emperor  of  Germany. .  1056 
Prussia  subdued  by  Frederic  II..  1215 
Prussia  yielded  to  the  power  of 
Poland 1219 


13.  What  else  can  you  say  of  the  king?  14.  Who  became  king  in  1840  ?  What 
of  him?  What  occurred  in  1848  ?  Who  administers  the  government  of  Prussia? 
What  of  the  grandson  of  the  king  ? 


452 


UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


A.  D. 

Rodolph   of  Hapsburgh   governs 

Austria. 1213 

Albert  I.  reigns  in  Switzerland.. .  1298 

Cantons  formed  in  Switzerland.. .  1307 

William  Tell  died 1354 

Bohemia  attached  to  Austria 1526 

Hungary  attaclied  to  Austria, . . ,  1563 
Charles  V.,  emperor  of  Germany, 

died 1588 

Ferdinand  II.  of  Germany  began 

to  reign 1619 

The  Turks  lay  siege  to  Yienna. . .  1688 

Prussia  becomes  a  kingdom 1701 

Frederic    William   I.  emperor   of 

Prussia 1713 

Hungary  annexed  to  Germany. . .  1739 


"War    between    Austria,    Russia, 

France,  and  Prussia   1756 

Frederic  the  Great  died 1786 

Francis  11.  emperor  of  Germany.  1792 
Switzerland  defeated  by  the  French  1798 
Napoleon  defeats  the  Prussians. .   1806 

Austria  at  war  with  France 1809 

Death  of  Francis  II.,  emperor  of 

Austria 1835 

Frederic  WilliamlV.  king  of  Prus- 
sia     1840 

Francis  Joseph  I.  emperor  of  Aus- 

tra 1848 

Revolts   in    Hungary   and    Prus- 
sia      1843 

9 


SCENE  m  sussu. 


CHAPTER  CXXX.— Europe  Continued. 
Description  of  Russia. 
1.  The  Russian  empire,  like  tliat   of  Turkey,  lies 
partly  in  Europe  and  partly  in  Asia.     Tlie  whole  of 


EUROPE.  453 

the  northern  part  of  Asia  belongs  to  Russia.  This  is 
thinly  scattered  over  with  a  great  number  of  different 
tribes,  who  chiefly  wander  about  from  place  to  place  in 
search  of  food  for  their  cattle. 

2.  Siberia  is  a  name  given  to  nearly  all  the  northern 
part  of  Asia.  It  is  a  bleak,  cold  region,  and  almost 
makes  one  shiver  to  think  of  it.  The  people  are  poor, 
and  dress  in  the  skins  of  wild  animals,  and  for  the 
most  part  live  in  poor  huts.  It  is  to  this  country  of 
winter  and  poverty  that  the  Russian  emperor  banishes 
those  of  his  subjects  whom  he  does  not  like. 

3.  I  will  now  tell  you  of  that  part  of  Russia  whicli 
lies  in  Europe.  It  is  a  vast  territory,  about  equal  in 
extent  to  all  the  United  States,  and  embraces  more 
land  than  all  the  other  kingdoms  of  Europe.  The 
population  is  not  less  than  sixty  millions ! 

4.  You  will  see  by  this  that  the  emperor  of  Russia 
is  a  very  powerful  king.  He  reigns  over  his  subjects 
pretty  much  as  he  pleases,  there  being  no  law  superior 
to  his  will.  He  is  not  only  a  despot  in  his  ow^n  coun. 
try,  but  he  is  a  terror  to  all  Europe. 

5.  He  has  a  great  many  palaces  in  different  parts  of 


.  Chapter  CXXX. — 1.  What  of  the  Russian  empire?  What  of  northern  Asia? 
Tribes  ?  2.  To  what  country  is  the  name  of  Siberia  given  ?  What  of  the  coun. 
try?  People?  Russian  emperor ?  3.  What  of  Russia  in  Europe?  Its  popula- 
tion ?     4,  5.  What  can  you  say  of  the  emperor  of  Russia  ? 


454:  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

liis  kingdom,  but  lie  resides  cliiefly  at  St.  Petersburg. 
He  has  an  immense  army,  and  is  always  surrounded 
witli  a  great  many  soldiers. 

6.  By  looking  on  a  map,  you  will  see  tliat  Russia  in 
Europe  extends  from  the  Northern  or  Frozen  Ocean  on 
the  north,  to  the  Black  Sea  on  the  south,  a  distance  of 
nearly  two  thousand  miles.  On  the  east,  it  is  separated 
from  Asia  by  the  Ural  mountains ;  on  the  west,  it  is 
bounded  by  the  Gulf  of  Finland,  the  Baltic  sea,  Prus- 
sia, Austria,  and  Turkey. 

Y.  In  such  a  vast  territory  as  this,  you  may  well  sup- 
pose that  the  climate  is  various.  Along  the  borders 
of  the  Fi^ozen  Ocean,  the  lakes  are  covered  with  ice  for 
nine  months  in  the  year.  In  the  middle  parts  of  Rus- 
sia, the  winter  is  about  as  severe  as  in  Canada ;  in  the 
southern  parts,  the  climate  is  very  warm  and  pleasant. 
Here  grapes  grow  in  abundance,  with  many  other  nice 
fruits. 

8.  The  capital  of  Russia  is  St.  Petersburg,  situated 
on  the  river  Neva,  which  flows  into  the  Gulf  of  Fin- 
land. It  is  a  splendid  city,  and  contains  half  a  million 
inhabitants.  There  is  no  place  in  the  world  where  you 
would  see  more  strange  sights  than  in  St.  Petersburg. 
Here  are  a  great  many  palaces,  inhabited  by  people  so 

6.  What  is  the  extent  of  the  Russian  empire  ?     Boundaries?    1.  Climate  of  Rus- 
sia in  Europe?     Productions?     8.  What  of  St.  Petersburg ?     Palaces?     People? 


EUROPE. 


455 


rich,  that  some  of  them  keep  two  or  three  hmidred  ser- 
ants,  or  slaves. 

9.  In  the  streets,  you  see  a  great  many  soldiers  gaily 
dressed,  gilt  coaches,  drawn  by  three  or  four  horses, 
beggars  covered  with  rags,  and  people  dressed  in  all 
the  strange  fashions  you  can  think  of. 


RUSSIAN  PEASANTS. 


CHAPTER  CXXXI.— Europe  Continued. 
Description  of  liussia  continued. 

1.  Moscow  is  next  to  St.  Petersburg  in  size,  and  con- 
tains  350,000  inhabitants.      It  is  a  famous  old  city, 


9.  What  may  you  see  in  the  streets  ? 


456  UNIYERSAL  HISTORY. 

where  the  kings  of  Russia  used  to  live.  But  in  1812, 
a  great  part  of  it  was  burnt,  in  order  to  drive  out  Napo- 
leon and  liis  soldiers,  pretty  mucli  as  people  in  our 
country  sometimes  set  fire  to  a  heap  of  brush  in  order 
to  drive  out  a  rabbit  or  a  woodchuck.  In  this  way, 
Moscow  was  nearly  destroyed,  but  it  has  since  been  re- 
built. 

2.  St.  Petersburg  carries  on  a  great  deal  of  commerce 
by  sea,  and  many  of  our  ships  go  there  to  get  hemp, 
iron,  hides,  and  other  things.  But  Moscow  is  situated 
far  inland,  and  therefore  carries  on  no  trade  by  sea. 

3.  There  is  no  king  in  the  world  who  reigns  over 
so  many  kinds  of  people  as  the  czar,  or  emperor  of 
Russia.  In  his  European  dominions,  he  has  at  least 
sixty  different  tribes  or  nations  under  his  sway,  who 
speak  different  languages,  and  have  different  modes  of 
life.  In  his  Asiatic  dominions  he  probably  has  as  many 
more. 

4.  In  the  northern  part  of  European  Russia,  there 
are  a  good  many  tribes  of  short,  swarthy  people,  call- 
ed Laplanders,  Samoiedes,  etc.  These  live  almost  in 
a  savage  state.  Those  that  dwell  near  the  sea  live  so 
much  upon  fish,  that  they   always   carry  about  with 

Chapter  CXXXI.— 1.  What  of  Moscow?  What  was  done  in  1812?  2.  What 
of  the  commerce  of  St.  Petersburg  ?  That  of  Moscow  ?  3.  Wliat  of  the  czar  of 
Russia  ?    4.  What  tribes  live  in  European  Russia  ?     Whom  do  they  resemble  ? 


EUROPE.  457 

tliem  a  fishy  smell.  These  races  resemble  the  Esqui- 
maux Indians  that  occupy  the  northern  parts  of  our 
continent. 

5.  It  would  seem  that  these  people  would  have  a 
very  dull  time  of  it,  up  in  their  cold  country,  where 
three-fourths  of  the  time  it  is  winter,  and  where  the 
nights  are  sometimes  six  months  long.  But  they  appear 
to  enjoy  themselves  pretty  well  They  have  no  books, 
but  they  tell  long  stories  and  crack  their  jokes  as  well 
as  other  people. 

6.  They  have  no  history,  for  they  seem  to  keep  no 
more  record  of  what  passes  among  them  than  a  hive 
of  bees.  One  generation  succeeds  another,  and  so  things 
pass  from  age  to  age.  They  are  not  warlike,  and  have 
no  great  events  to  tell.  Thus  they  go  on,  living  now 
as  their  great-grandfathers  lived  before  them.  They 
acknowledge  the  authority  of  the  emperor,  but  the 
country  is  so  cold  that  he  never  comes  among  them,  so 
they  do  pretty  much  as  they  please. 

1.  In  the  southern  and  western  portion  of  European 
Russia  are  a  good  many  Tartars,  who  are  very  fond  of 
riding  about  on  swift  horses.  Along  the  river  Don, 
there  is  a  race  of  Cossacks.  These,  too,  are  fond  of 
horses,  and  in  battle  fight  terribly  with  long  spears, 

5,  6.  What  of  their  employments?   Their  life?     7.  What  of  Tartars?    Cossack  .s  ? 


458  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

• 

wliicli    tliey  liurl  to  tlie  distance    of    two    hundred 
feet. 

8.  Besides  tliese  tribes,  there  are  many  Jews,  several 
millions  of  Poles,  a  good  many  Germans,  and  some 
Gypsies  in  Kussia.  In  the  cities,  the  people  generally 
live  pretty  much  as  they  like,  each  man  pursuing  what 
occupation  he  pleases. 

9.  But  the  country  people  who  till  the  land  are 
held  in  a  state  of  bondage  similar  to  that  of  the  vassals 
in  old  feudal  times.  These  are  called  boors,  and  are 
in  a  sad  state  of  ignorance  and  poverty.  They  belong 
either  to  the  emperor  or  to  the  rich  people. 

10.  E-ussia  has  made  astonishing  progress  in  civiliza' 
tion  within  the  last  forty  years.  Railroads  have  been 
extensively  introduced,  and  now  connect  the  great 
cities.  Arts  and  manufactures  are  encouraged,  and 
a  general  state  of  improvement  exists  throughout  the 
empire. 

8.  What  of  other  inhabitants  ?  9.  Who  are  the  boors  ?  What  of  them  ?  10.  What 
of  the  progress  of  Russia  ? 


EUROPE.  459 

CHAPTER  CXXXIL— Europe  Continued. 
The  Reign  of  Peter  the  Great. 

1.  Although  Russia  is  sucli  an  immense  empire,  its 
history  will  not  detain  us  long.  It  was  a  country  of 
barbarians,  till  within  a  little  more  tlian  a  hundred 
years.  It  cannot  be  said  to  have  taken  a  rank  among 
civilized  nations  till  Peter  the  Great  ascended  the 
throne,  in  1696. 

2.  Peter  was  a  ^ery  strange  man,  and  though  he 
began  the  work  of  civilizing  his  empire,  he  found  it  a 
more  difficult  task  to  civilize  himself.  In  fact,  he  was 
somewhat  of  a  barbarian  all  his  life. 

3.  The  emperors  of  Russia  are  called  czars.  When 
the  czar  Peter  was  twenty-iive  years  old,  he  left  his 
throne,  and  travelled  over  Europe  in  search  of  knowl- 
edge. He  did  not  go  to  any  of  the  learned  universi- 
ties, nor  apply  himself  to  the  study  of  the  dead  Ian. 
guages. 

4.  That  was  not  the  sort  of  knowledge  which  Peter 
wanted.  The  first  thing  he  did  was  to  go  to  Holland, 
and  put  himself  apprentice  to  a  ship-carpenter.     The 


Chaptek  CXXXTT.— 1.  What  of  Russia?     Peter  the  Great?     2.  What  can  you 
y  of  Peter?     3.  Who  are  called  czars?    What  did  Peter  do? 


46,0  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

house  is  still  standing  where  lie  used  to  live  wliile 
there.  He  afterward  went  to  England,  and  followed 
the  same  trade  as  in  Holland. 

5.  Besides  learning  the  business  of  ship-cai-pentry, 
he  took  lessons  in  other  branches  of  mechanics,  and 
also  in  surgery.  In  short,  he  neglected  no  kind  of 
knowledge  which  he  thought  would  be  useful  to  him- 
self or  his  subjects. 

6.  In  a  little  more  than  a  year,  he  heard  that  his 
sister  was  endeavoring  to  make  herself  empress  of 
Russia.  This  intelligence  compelled  him  to  break  off 
his  studies  and  labors,  and  hasten  back  to  the  city  of 
Moscow.  On  arriving  there,  he  put  some  of  the  con- 
spii^ators  to  death,  and  confined  his  sister  in  prison. 

Y.  His  time  was  afterward  so  much  occupied  in 
war,  and  in  taking  care  of  the  empire,  that  he  never 
had  leisure  to  finish  his  education.  But  he  had  already 
learnt  a  great  deal,  and  the  eflPect  of  his  knowledge  was 
soon  seen  in  the  improvement  of  Russia. 

8.  Peter  used  to  rise  at  five  in  the  morning,  and 
busy  himself  all  day  about  the  affairs  of  the  empire. 
But  in  the  evening,  when  his  work  was  over,  he  would 
seat  himself  beside  a  big  round  bottle  of  brandy,  and 
drink  till  his  reason  was  quite  gone. 

4,  5.  Describe  the  manner  in  which  the  czar  rotor  succeeded  in  acquiring  knowl- 
edge.    G.  What  now  happened  ?     7.  What  of  his  time  ? 


EUROPE,  461 

9.  Tills  liabit,  together  with  the  natural  violence  of 
his  temper,  rendered  him  almost  as  dangerous  to  his 
friends  as  to  his  enemies.  He  often  said  that  he  had 
corrected  the  faults  of  Russia,  but  that  he  could  not 
correct  his  own. 

10.  Peter  was  in  the  habit  of  beating  those  who 
offended  him,  with  his  cane.  The  highest  noblemen 
in  Russia  often  underwent  this  punishment.  Even 
the  empress  Catherine,  his  wife,  sometimes  got  sound- 
ly beaten ;  but  perhaps  not  oftener  than  she  deserv- 
ed it. 

11.  It  is  supposed  that  the  czar  Peter  ordered  his 
own  son  to  be  put  to  death,  and  that  he  was  himself 
privately  executed  in  prison.  He  had  many  faults,  and 
was  guilty  of  some  great  crimes,  but  his  name  stands 
high  on  the  list  of  sovereigns;  for  he  was  one  of  the 
very  few  who  have  labored  hard  for  the  Avelfare  of 
their  subjects.  He  did  more  for  the  good  of  Russia 
than  all  the  czars  who  went  before  and  have  come 
after  him. 

8,  9.  In  what  vice  did  Peter  indulge?  10.  What  habit  had  he?  11.  What  is 
supposed  to  have  been  the  fate  of  Peter's  son  ?  His  own  fate  ?  The  character  of 
Sue  czar  Peter  ? 


462  TJKIYERSAL  HISTORY. 

CHAPTEE  CXXXIIL-'EiJEOPE  Continued. 
The  Successors  of  Peter  the  Great. 

1.  Peter  died  in  1725,  at  the  age  of  fifty-tliree,  and 
was  succeeded  "by  Ms  wife,  the  empress  Catherine.  She 
had  been  a  country  girl,  and  the  czar  Peter  had  married 
her  for  the  sake  of  her  beauty.  In  some  respects, 
Catherine  was  a  good  sort  of  woman ;  but,  among  other 
faults,  she  was  rather  too  fond  of  wine. 

2.  She  reigned  only  about  two  years,  and  was  suc- 
ceeded by  her  husband's  grandson,  named  Peter  the 
Second.  He  died  in  1730,  and  left  the  throne  to  Anne 
Jwanowna,  his  niece.  The  empress  Anne  was  a  good 
sovereign,  and  performed  many  praiseworthy  acts. 
None  of  her  deeds,  however,  have  been  more  famous 
than  the  building  of  a  palace  of  ice. 

3.  This  stately  and  beautiful  structure  was  built  on 
a  frozen  lake.  Instead  of  wood  or  hewn  stone,  it  was 
composed  entirely  of  blocks  of  ice.  The  furniture 
was  likewise  of  ice ;  and  even  the  beds  were  of  the 


CHAPTER  CXXXTII.— 1.  When  did  the  czar  Peter  die?  Who  succeeded 
him?  What  of  the  empress  Catherine?  2.  How  long  did  she  reign  ?  Who  suc- 
ceeded her?  When  did  Peter  II.  die?  Who  succeeded  him?  What  of  the  em- 
press Anne  ? 


EUROPE.  463 

same  material.  When  it  was  illuminated  within,  the 
whole  edifice  glittered  and  sparkled  as  if  it  were  made 
of  diamonds. 

4.  Bright  as  it  was,  however,  I  would  ^far  rather 
dwell  in  the  meanest  mud-cottage,  than  in  so  cold  a 
mansion.  Yet,  my  dear  readers,  any  other  palace  is 
almost  as  uncomfortable  as  the  empress  Anne's  palace 
of  ice.  There  is  little  in  them  but  cold  and  glittering 
grandeur. 

-  5.  The  successor  of  Anne  was  the  princess  Eliza- 
beth, a  daughter  of  Peter  the  Great.  She  mounted 
the  throne  in  1740,  and  reigned  twenty-two  years. 
Her  successor  was  Peter  the  Third,  who  began  to  reign 
in  1762. 

6.  He,  like  Peter  the  Great,  had  a  wife  named  Cath- 
erine. They  had  not  long  sat  together  on  the  throne, 
when  she  contrived  to  depose  Peter,  and  made  herself 
sole  ruler  of  Eussia.  It  is  supposed  that  she  afterward 
caused  him  to  be  murdered. 

7.  But  although  so  wicked  a  woman,  Catherine  was 
endowed  with  admirable  talents,  and  she  became  one 
of  the  most  illustrious  sovereigns  in  the  world.  Some 
people  called  her  Catherine  the  Great  Man ;  for  many 

3.  4.  Describe  a  palace  of  ice.  5.  Who  succeeded  the  empress  Anne?  What 
of  her?  Wtien  did  Peter  III.  begin  to  reign  ?  6,  1.  What  of  his  wife?  What  can 
you  say  of  her  ? 


464  UNIVERSAL  niSTORT. 

of  her  great  qualities  would  liave  been  more  becoming 
in  a  man  tban  a  woman. 

8.  In  1796,  when  sbe  died,  Catherine  was  on  the 
point  of  driving  the  Turks  from  their  territories.  If 
she  had  succeeded  in  doing  so,  she  would  have  govern- 
ed the  whole  of  the  vast  region  between  the  Mediter- 
ranean sea  and  the  Arctic  ocean. 

9.  But  death  hurried  the  great  empress  away,  to 
answer  for  the  murder  of  her  husband,  and  many  other 
crimes.  ,  She  was  succeeded  by  her  son  Paul,  who  was 
then  forty-three  years  old. 

10.  The  czar  Paul  possessed  none  of  his  mother's 
talents,  and  was  of  a  very  stern  and  unamiable  disposi- 
tion. People  suspected  him  of  being  insane.  His  con- 
duct grew  so  intolerable,  that  some  of  his  principal 
nobles  conspired  to  kill  him. 

11.  Paul  was  succeeded  by  Alexander,  his  eldest  son. 
This  emperor  reigned  from  1801  till  1825.  He  was  en- 
gaged in  war  with  the  emperor  ^N'apoleon,  who  pene- 
trated with  his  army  to  the  city  of  Moscow.  But  the 
Russians  bunit  that  ancient  capital  of  their  country ; 
and  its  destruction  i^uined  the  French  army. 

12.  The  next  czar  of  Russia  was  named  Mcholas. 

8.  "What  plan  had  Catherine  the  Great  before  her  death?  When  did  she  die? 
9.  Who  succeeded  her?  10.  What  of  the  czar  Paul?  11.  Who  succeeded  bim? 
What  of  Alexander?     How  was  the  French  array  ruhiod? 


EUROPE.  465 

He  succeeded  his  brother  Alexander  in  1825  His 
tyranny  drove  his  Polish  subjects  to  revolt  a  few  yeai^s 
after  his  accession,  but  they  were  subdued.  Thou- 
sands of  them  fled  to  other  countries,  thousands  were 
slain,  and  thousands  were  imprisoned,  or  banished  to 
Siberia, 

13.  In  1854,  Nicholas  endeavored  to  take  a  part  of 
the  Turkish  dominions  from  the  sultan,  and  thus  be- 
came involved  in  a  war  with  England,  France,  and  Tur- 
key. The  czar  was  defeated  in  the  struggle,  which 
was  brought  to  a  close  by  the  capture  of  the  Russian 
stronghold,  Sebastopol,  in  1856. 

14.  Nicholas  died  during  this  contest,  and  was  suc- 
ceeded by  his  son,  Alexander  III.  Russia,  though  still 
partly  barbarous,  is  an  empire  of  immense  power,  and 
is  constantly  improving  in  every  thing  which  contrib- 
utes to  the  civilization  of  a  people.  It  is  now  (1860) 
at  peace  with  every  nation  of  Europe. 

.  12.  Who  was  the  next  czar  of  Russia?  What  of  him  ?  13.  "What  happened 
in  1854?  What  was  the  result?  14.  Who  succeeded  Nicholas  ?  What  of  Rus- 
sia at  the  present  day  ? 


4t>6 


UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


VIEW  IN  STOCKHOLM. 

CHAPTER  CXXXIY.— EuKOPE  Continued. 

About  Sweden. 

1.  The  Swedish  territories  at  present  comprise 
Sweden,  Norway,  and  part  of  Lapland.  These  are 
bounded  north  by  the  Arctic  Ocean;  east  by  Lapland, 
the  Gulf  of  Bothnia,  and  the  Baltic;  south  by  the 
Baltic,  the  Kattigat,  and  the  Skager  E-ack;  and  west  by 
the  Atlantic. 

2.  Sweden  is  a  cold  and  mountainous  country,  cele- 
brated for  its  iron,  of  which  large  quantities  are 
brought  to  this  country.     The  people  are  industrious, 

CiiAPTEE  CXXXiy. — 3.  What  do  the  Swedish  territories  comprise  ?  Bound  them. 
2.  Wliat  of  Sweden  ?     The  people  ? 


EUROPE.  46T 

bold,  frank,  and  independent.  A  large  part  of  the 
inhabitants  live  npon  milk,  cheese,  and  fish.  In  mnter 
they  clothe  themselves  in  furs  and  sheepskins. 

3.  The  Swedes  are  a  sensible  people,  and  are  dis- 
posed to  make  the  best  of  every  thing.  When  their 
long  v^inter  goes  away,  they  celebrate  the  return  of 
spring  by  dancing  around  a  May-pole.  They  love  their 
country,  and  insist  that  it  is  the  pleasantest  part  of 
the  world. 

4.  Though  they  dress  in  sheepskins,  and  live  in  a 
homesj)un  sort  of  way,  they  are  still  very  polite.  They 
are,  in  short,  much  more  amiable,  respectable,  and  well- 
behaved,  than  many  of  the  kings  and  princes  about 
whom  I  have  been  telling  you. 

5.  Not  much  is  known  al)out  the  early  history  of 
Sweden.  In  ancient  times  it  was  under  the  govern- 
ment of  Denmark.  A  Danish  queen,  called  Margaret, 
ruled  over  Denmark,  Sweden,  and  Norway,  in  1387. 

6.  In  1518,  the  Danish  king  Christian  caused  ninety- 
four  Swedish  senators  to  be  massacred  in  the  city  of 
Stockholm.  Gustavus  Vasa,  the  son  of  one  of  these 
senators,  incited  the  Swedes  to  revolt  against  Denmark. 
1  7.  The  king  of  Denmark  sent  an  army  to  put  down 
the  rebels.     But  the  ships  in  which  the  Danish  soldiers 

3.  What  of  the  Swedes?    4.  Their  dress?     Manners?     5.  History  of  Sweden? 
Who  ruled  in  1387  ?     6.  What  was  done  in  1518?    What  of  Gustavus  Vasa  ? 


468  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

liad  embarked,  got  embedded  in  the  ice,  on  tlie  coast 
of  Sweden.  The  inhabitants  skated  off  from  the 
shore,  and  set  the  ships  on  fire. 

8.  Gustavus  Vasa  succeeded  in  freeing  his  country, 
and  was  elected  king.  The  next  sovereign  of  Sweden 
who  is  worth  mentioning,  w^as  Gustavus  Adolphus. 
He  began  to  reign  in  1611,  at  the  age  of  eighteen. 

9.  This  king  was  a  great  waiTior,  and  vanquished 
the  best  generals  in  the  service  of  the  emperor  of  Ger- 
many. In  1633,  he  won  the  battle  of  Lutzen,  but  was 
killed  at  the  moment  of  victory. 

10.  Gustavus  Adolphus  left  a  daughter  named  Chris- 
tina, who  was  then  only  six  years  old.  She  was 
thought  to  possess  remarkable  talents,  and  great  pains 
were  taken  with  her  education.  But  she  was  neither 
a  good  woman  nor  a  good  queen. 

11.  After  reigning  a  considerable  time,  queen 
Christina  became  weary  of  the  cares  of  government. 
She  therefore  abdicated  the  throne,  and  set  out  to 
seek  a  residence  in  some  pleasanter  country  than 
Sweden. 

12.  But  her  conduct  was  so  bad,  that  all  the  kings 
of  Europe  were  ashamed  to  have  such  a  woman    in 

7.  What  of  the  kin<??  The  ships?  8.  What  of  Gustavus  V.i>;i  ?  9.  Who  was 
king  of  Sweden  in  lOll?  What  of  GiKtavns  Adolphus?  in  what  battle  did 
he  die?      10,  11.  What  casi  yon  VAl  of  Christina? 


EUROPE.  _  469 

their  dominions.  At  last,  she  adopted  tlie  Catholic 
religion,  and  the  pope  permitted  her  to  reside  in 
Rome. 


CHAPTEE  CXXXy.— Europe   Continued. 
Charles  the  Twelfth  and  his  successors, 

1.  The  most  famous  sovereign  that  Sweden  ever 
had,  and  one  of  the  most  famous  in  the  world,  was 
Charles  the  Twelfth.  But  my  readers  must  have  be- 
come tired  of  hearing  about  conquerors  ;  so  that  I  shall 
speak  very  briefly  of  Charles. 

2.  He  began  to  reign  in  1697,  at  fifteen  years  of 
age.  From  his  youth  upw^ard,  he  thought  of  nothing 
but  being  a  soldier.  When  he  was  only  about  seven- 
teen years  old,  the  czar  of  Russia,  and  the  kings  of 
Poland  and  Denmark,  made  war  upon  him. 

3.  Charles  beat  them  all  in  the  first  campaign. 
When  he  heard  the  bullets  whistling  by  his  ears,  he 
showed  great  delight,  and  exclaimed — "  That  shall  be 

12.  "Where  was  she  permitted  to  reside? 

Chapter  CXXXV. — 1.  "Who  was  the  most  famous  of  the  kings  of  Sweden? 
2.  "When  did  he  begin  to  reign?  "What  did  he  principally  think  of  when  a  boy? 
"Who  made  war  upon  him  ?     3.  "What  anecdote  can  you  tell  of  him  ? 


470  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

my  music !"     And,  as  long  as  lie  lived,  lie  never  wish- 
ed for  any  other  music. 

4.  But  it  is  a  sad  thing  for  a  people  when  their  king 
loves  the  whistling  of  bullets.  Charles  the  Twelfth 
was  a  scourge  to  all  Europe,  and  to  his  own  kingdom 
more  than  to  any  other.  He  delighted  in  war  for  its 
own  sake,  and  not  for  any  good  which  he  expected  to 
gain  by  it. 

5.  During  the  first  few  years  of  his  reign,  Charles 
was  constantly  successful,  but  in  1709,  the  czar  of 
Russia  gained  a  great  victory  over  him,  at  Pultowa. 
Charles  made  his  escape  into  Turkey. 

6.  He  continued  in  that  country  ^ve  years,  although 
he  might  safely  have  returned  home.  He  seemed  to 
care  nothin^:  about  his  own  dominions.  When  the 
Swedes  sent  to  inquire  what  they  should  do  in  his 
absence,  Charles  answered,  that  he  would  send  one  of 
his  old  boots  to  govern  them. 

7.  At  last,  in  1714,  he  left  Turkey  and  returned  to 
Sweden.  His  first  business  was  to  make  war  again. 
But  his  warfare  was  now  drawing  to  a  close. 


4.  Wliat  can  jou  say  of  him?  5.  "What  of  Charles  XTI.  for  the  first  few  years 
of  his  reiprn  ?  When  was  the  battle  of  Pultowa?  "Where  did  Charles  fly? 
G.  Tlow  lor)^'- did  he  stay  in 'I'urkfy  ?  What  answer  did  he  send  to  a  mes^a^j^e 
from  the  Swedes?  7.  When  did  Cliarles  return  to  Sweden  ?  Wliat  of  him  when 
there? 


EUROPE.  471 

8.  One  niglit,  wliile  besieging  a  fortress  in  Norway, 
lie  advanced  in  front  of  liis  troops  to  see  liow  the  siege 
was  going  on.  A  cannon-shot  struck  Mm  on  the  head, 
and  killed  him.  He  was  found  grasping  his  sword, 
which  was  half  drawn  from  the  scabbard.  Historians 
seem  hardly  decided  whether  to  call  Charles  the  Twelfth 
a  hero  or  a  madman. 

9.  One  of  his  successors,  named  Gustavus  the 
Third,  was  shot  at  a  masquerade,  in  1792.  Gustavus 
the  Fourth  behaved  in  such  a  manner  that  his  subjects 
were  compelled  to  dethrone  him.  This  took  place  in 
1809. 

10.  The  next  king  was  Charles  the  Thirteenth. 
The  emperor  l^apoleon  caused  a  French  general,  named 
Bernadotte,  to  be  declared  Crow^n-prince  of  Sweden, 
and  heir  to  the  throne.  In  1818,  when  Charles  the 
Thirteenth  died,  Bernadotte  succeeded  him,  with  the 
title  of  Charles  John,  and  reigned  prosperously  several 
years. 

11.  Though  he  had  originally  been  only  a  common 
soldier,  Bernadotte  proved  to  be  a  better  king  than 
most  of   the  other  European  sovereigns,  whose  fore- 

8.  How  did  he  meet  his  death  What  do  historians  tliink  of  Charles  XII? 
9.  Who  succeeded  him  ?  When  did  Gustavus  III.  die  ?  When  was  Gustavus  IV. 
dethroned?  10.  Who  was  the  next  king  ?  What  of  Napoleon?  When  did  Ber- 
nadotte succeed  to  the  throne  of  Sweden  ? 

21 


472 


UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


fathers  had  worn  crowns  for  a  thousand  }'eai's.  In  1844, 
he  was  succeeded  hj  his  grandson,  Oscar  I.,  who  was 
succeeded  in  1860  1)y  his  son,  Oscar  II,  The  popuL^- 
tion  of  Sweden,  with  that  of  Norway,  is  five  millions. 


LAPLANDERS  TRAVELLING  IN  SLEDGEa 


CHAPTEE  CXXXYL— EuKOPE   Continued. 

Ahmit  Lapland^  Norway^  and  Denmark, 

1.  Lapland  is  the  most  northern  country  of  Europe, 
and  is  divided  between  Russia  and  Sweden.  The 
country  is  so  cold  that  the  hot  liquor  we  call  brandy 
sometimes  freezes  there.     I  am  afraid,  however,  that 

11.  What  of  Bernadotto?     Who  is  the  present  king? 

Chapter  CXXXVL— 1.  Wiicre  is  Lapland?     What  of  the  erimate  ? 


EUROPE.  '^    •  473 

the  Lapps  find  means  of  tliawing  more  of  it  than  is 
good  for  them. 

2.  I  have  ah^eady  told  you  something  about  the 
Laplanders.  The  men  are  about  four  feet  high,  and 
the  women  not  much  taller  than  a  cider-baiTel.  Th^ 
people  have  a  great  many  reindeer,  whose  flesh  supplier 
food,  and  whose  skins  furnish  clothing.  They  also  take 
the  place  of  horses,  and  drag  the  people  over  the  snow 
in  sledges,  at  a  rapid  rate.  These  people  have  no 
history  that  is  worthy  of  being  related  here. 

3.  Norway  is  an  extensive  country,  bounded  on  the 
west  by  the  Atlantic  ocean,  and  on  the  east  by 
Sweden.  It  is  a  cold,  bleak,  and  barren  region,  but 
the  inhabitants  live  pretty  comfortably.  They  have 
very  fine  cows,  from  which  they  make  the  best  butter 
in  the  world. 

4.  Bergen  is  the  largest  city,  and  has  twenty  thou- 
sand inhabitants.  The  houses  are  small,  and  generally 
built  of  wood.  Fires  sometimes  do  great  damage,  and 
therefore  there  are  a  good  many  watchmen,  who  walk 
about  the  streets  at  night,  mufiled  up  in  thick  great- 
coats. Every  hour  they  cry  out,  "  God  preserve  ou:: 
good  city  of  Bergen  !" 

2.  What -of  the  Laplanders?  Remdeer?  History?  3.  Where  is  Norway? 
What  of  the  country?  The  people?  Butter?  4.  What  of  Bergen ?  Its  popu' 
latiou  ?     What   of  the  houses  ?     Are  fires  frequent  ?     What  of  the  watchnieu  ? 


474  •  UNIYBRSAL  HISTORY. 

5.  Norway  was  early  inliabited  by  roiigli  tribes,  wLo 
were  adventui^ous  seamen.  There  seems  to  liave  been 
now  and  then  a  pirate  among  them,  for  in  860,  a  pirate, 
named  Nadodv,  discovered  Iceland,  which  was  after  • 
ward  settled  by  the  Norwegians. 

6.  Norway  was  conquered  by  Canute,  king  of  DeD 
mark,  in  1030 ;  but  six  years  after,  it  became  indepen 
dent,  and  for  many  years  it  was  governed  by  its  o^^ti 
king.     In  1397,  it  was  incorporated  with  Denmark,  and 
continued  a  pai-t  of  that  kingdom   till  1814,  when  it 
was  transferi'ed  to  Sweden. 

7.  Denmark  is  a  little  kingdom  lying  between 
Sweden  and  Germany.  It  is  a  level  country,  nearly 
surrounded  by  the  sea.  The  people  have  light  com- 
plexions, and  the  skin  of  the  ladies  is  said  to  be  ex- 
ceedingly white.  The  people  have  a  great  many  cattle, 
and  they  seem  very  fond  of  tilling  the  soil.  Copen- 
hagen, the  capital,  has  one  hundred  and  twenty  thou- 
sand inhabitants.  The  whole  population  of  the  king- 
dom is  two  and  a  quai'ter  millions.  The  Danish  laU' 
gnage  is  spoken  both  in  Denmark  and  Norway. 

8.  The  three  kingdoms  of  Denmark,    Sweden,  and 

5,  How  was  Norway  early  inhabited?  What  was  done  in  860?  6.  "Wlien  was 
Norway  conquered,  and  by  whom  ?  When  did  it  become  independent?  What  of 
it  in  1397?  In -1814?  7.  Where  is  Denmark?  What  of  it?  Tiie  people? 
What  of  Copenhagen?  Its  population?  Population  of  the  Danish  kingdom? 
What  language  is  spoken  in  Norway  and  Denmark  ? 


EUROPE.  475 

Norway  were  anciently  called  Scandinavia.  In  very 
early  times  they  were  occupied  by  tribes  of  Finns  and 
Germans ;  afterward  tlie  Gotlis  conquered  these  coun- 
tries. They  were  led  by  Odin,  of  whom  many  marvel- 
lous tales  are  told,  and  who  seems  to  have,  been  wor- 
shipped as  a  kind  of  Jupiter  among  these  northern 
tribes.  Skiold,  the  son  of  Odin,  is  said  to  have  been 
the  first  king  of  Denmark. 

9.  All  that  we  really  know  of  Denmark  at  this  early 
period,  is,  that  the  people  were  composed  of  wild,  ad- 
venturous warriors,  who  were  generally  considered  by 
the  more  southern  nations  of  Europe  as  pirates.  About 
the  time  that  the  Koman  empire  fell,  the  Danes, 
Swedes,  and  Norwegians  were  known  by  the  general 
name  of  Normans. 

10.  These  bold  freebooters  sallied  forth  in  their 
little  vessels,  and  made  conquests  in  different  countries. 
Some  of  them  settled  in  England,  some  in  that  part  of 
France  called  Normandy,  and  some  of  them  reached 
Spain  and  Italy. 

11.  In  920,  the  several  Danish  tribes  appear  to  have 
been  united  under  one  government.     Canute  conquered 


8,  "What  three  countries  were  called  Scandinavia  ?  Who  occupied  it  ?  Who  led 
these  tribes?  Who  was  the  first  king  of  Denmark ?  9.  What  of  Denmark  at 
this  early  period  ?  What  people  were  called  Normans?  10.  What  of  these  free- 
booters ?     Where  did  thej  settle  ? 


4T6  Uirn^ERSAL  HISTORY. 

EBgland  and  a  part  of  Scotland  in  1016,  and  subdued 
Norway  in  1030.  Since  Ms  time,  Denmark  lias  had  a 
great  many  sovereigns,  and  been  engaged  in  several 
wars,  but  its  history  offers  but  little  that  is  interesting. 
Frederick  VIL  is  now  (1860)  king. 


CHAPTER   CXXXYII.— Europe  Continued. 
Brief  Notices  of  several  Kingdoms  and  States. 

1.  There  are  several  countries  of  Europe,  of  which 
my  limits  will  not  peiinit  me  to  give  a  separate  history. 
Some  of  them  have  been  spoken  of  in  connection  with 
other  kingdoms.  The  rest  must  be  briefly  noticed  in 
one  chapter. 

2.  If  I  had  time,  I  could  make  a  long  story  about 
Holland,  a  country  once  covered  by  the  sea,  which  is 
now  walled  out  by  a  vast  dyke.  The  people  of  Hol- 
land, who  number  near  three  millions,  are  called 
Dutch,  and  are  known  all  the  world  over  as  great 
smokers.  They  are,  however,  an  industrious  people, 
and  I  know  of  nothing  more  comfortable  than  the  in- 

11.  What  took  place  in  920  ?  1,  2.  "What  of  Canute  ?  History  of  Denmark  ? 
Who  i3  now  king  ? 

Chapter  CXXXVn.— What  of  HoUand?  The  people?  What  is  the  popula- 
tion, of  Amsterdam? 


EUROPE.  477 

side  of  a  tlirifty  Dutchman's  house  in  his  own  country. 
Amsterdam,  the  capital,  contains  two  hundred  thousand 
inhabitants. 

3.  In  Belgium,  the  people,  strange  as  it  may  seem, 
appear  to  have  a  mixture  of  Dutch  and  French  man- 
ners. They  smoke  a  great  deal  of  tobacco,  yet  speak 
the  French  language.  The  country  is  pleasant,  and 
some  parts  are  beautiful.  Many  of  the  cities  are  very 
interesting.  The  population  is  four  and  a  half  mil- 
lions. 

4.  The  Netherlands,  or  Holland  and  Belgium,  were 
formerly  one  country.  The  whole  territory  is  bounded 
on  the  north  by  the  North  Sea,  east  by  Germany,  south 
by  France,  and  west  by  the  British  Channel  and  the 
North  Sea.  These  territories  belons^ed  at  one  time  to 
Home,  afterward  to  Germany,  and  finally  to  Spain. 

5.  In  1581,  the  seven  northern  provinces  revolted 
against  Philip  of  Spain,  and  formed  themselves  into  a 
republic,  which  was  then  called  Holland.  During  the 
seventeenth  century  it  was  a  very  powerful  nation, 
especially  by  sea.  At  this  time  its  ships  often  fought, 
and  sometimes  successfully,  with  the  British  ileets. 

3.  What  of  the  people  of- Belgium  ?  The  country?  The  cities?  Population? 
4.  What  of  Holland  and  Belgium  ?  How  is  the  territory  bounded  ?  To  whom  has 
it  belonged  at  different  times?  5.  What  took  place  in  1581?  When  was  Hol- 
land very  powerful  ? 


478  UNIYERSAL  HISTORY. 

6.  Tlie  remaining  provinces  of  tlie  Netherlands  were 
long  under  the  government  of  Austria.  In  1810,  the 
whole  of  the  Netherlands  were  united  to  France,  but 
were  afterward  formed  into  a  separate  kingdom.  In 
1830,  there  was  a  revolution,  and  the  southern  prov- 
inces now  compose  the  kingdom  of  Belgium. 

7.  Poland  was  once  a  nation  of  Europe,  but  it  is  now 
no  longer  so.  It  was  bounded  north  and  easi  by  the 
Kussian  dominions,  south  by  the  river  Dneister,  and 
west  by  Prussia.  .  In  1772  the  sovereigns  of  Russia, 
Prussia,  and  Austria  seized  upon  Poland,  and  divided 
the  greater  part  of  its  territories  among  themselves. 
In  1795  they  seized  the  remainder.  The  inhabitants 
struggled  bravely  for  their  freedom,  but  in  vain.  They 
were  cruelly  treated  by  Nicholas,  the  emperor  of  Russia, 
who  sent  thousands  into  exile,  and  banished  thousands 
to  other  countries.  Some  of  the  Poles  have  fled  from 
oppression  to  this  country. 

6,  What  of  the  remaining  provinces  of  the  Netherlands  ?  What  took  place  in 
1810?  In  1830?  7.  What  of  Poland?  Its  boundaries?  What  took  place  in 
1772  ?    In  1795  ?     What  of  the  Poles  ? 


EUROPE. 


479 


CHAPTER   CXXXYIII.— EuEOPE   Continued. 

Chronology  of  Russia^  Sweden^  Lapland^  Norway^  Denmark^ 
Holland^  Belgium^  d;c. 


A.  D. 

Kingdom  of  Sweden  begun 481 

The  tirst  king  reigns  in  Denmark.     714 
Iceland  discovered  by  the  Norwe- 
gians  860 

Christianity  introduced  into  Russia     955 
Can)ite,  king  of  Denmark,  conquer- 
ed England 1 016 

Norway  conquered  by  Canute.  . .   1030 
Russia  conquered  by  the  Crira  Tar- 
tars    1237 

Norway  incorporated  with    Den- 
mark      1387 

Russia  independent  of  the  Tartars  1462 

Massacre  in  Sweden 1518 

Gustavus  Yasa  expelled  the  Danes 

from  Sweden 1525 

Gustavus     Yasa     ascended     the 

throne  of  Sweden 1528 

The  first  czar  reigned  in  Russia. .   1553 
Republic  of  Holland  founded. ....   1581 
Gustavus  Adolphus  king  of  Swe- 
den    1611 

Battle  of  Lutzen,  and  death  of  Gus- 
tavus Adolphus 1633 

Peter  the  Great  begins  to  reign. .   1696 
Charles   XII.  begins  to  reign  in 

Sweden 1697 

Peter  the    Great  defeats  Charles 

XII.  at  Pultowa 1 709  j 

Charles  XII.  returns  to  Sweden. . .  1714  1 


AD. 

Russia  becomes  an  empire 1721 

Peter  the  Great  died 1725 

Peter  II.  died 1730 

Elizabeth    ascends  the  throne  of 

Russia ..   1740 

Peter  III.  ascends  the  throne 1762 

Partition  of  Poland 1772 

Gustavus  III.  died ]  792 

Russia  declared  war  against  France  1 792 

Catherine  II.  died 1796 

Paul,  emperor  of  Russia,  died.  ...   1801 
Copenhagen    bombarded    by    the 

English 1807 

Gustavus  lY.  of  Sweden  dethroned  1809 
Netherlands  united  to  France.  ...   1810 

The  city  of  Moscow  burnt 1812 

Norway  transferred  to  Sweden. ..  1814 
Commercial  treaty  between  Den- 
mark and  England 1824 

Alexander,    emperor    of    Russia, 

dies 1825 

Nicholas   ascends    the   throne    of 

Russia 1825 

Revolution  in  the  Netherlands;  di- 
vided into  Holland  and  Belgium  18."'.0 
Russia  makes  war  against  Turkey  1854 

Death  of  Nicholas 1855 

Sebastopol  taken *.   1856 

Coronation   of  Alexander  HI.  at 
Moscow 1856 


480 


UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


MAi'  OF   GREAT  BKlTAiN. 


EUROPE.  481 

CHAPTER  CXXXIX.— Europe    Continued. 
Kingdoin  of  Great  Britain  and  Ireland, 

1.  I  HAVE  now  come  to  the  most  interesting  country 
in  Europe ;  tlie  country  where  there  is  more  comfort^ 
more  good  sense,  more  thorough  civilization,  more 
true  religion,  than  in  any  other  place  in  Europe,  Asia, 
or  Africa. 

2.  The  kingdom  of  Great  Britain  and  Ireland  em- 
braces England,  Wales,  Scotland,  and  Ireland.  The 
three  first  countries  are  upon  the  island  of  Great 
Britain.  This  island  is  on  the  western  coast  of  Europe, 
and  is  separated  by  the  British  Channel  from  France. 
At  the  narrowest  part,  this  channel  is  twenty-five  miles 
wide.  Ireland  lies  west  of  Great  Britain,  at  the  distance 
of  about  sixty  miles. 

Questions  on  the  Map  of  Great  Britain. — How  are  tlie  British  Islands 
bounded  ?  Where  is  London  ?  Give  the  direction  of  the  following  places  from 
London:  Plymouth;  Dulalin ;  Birmingham;  Liverpool;  Bristol;  Leeds;  Aber- 
deen ;  Glasgow ;  Cork ;  Edinburgh ;  Londonderry ;  Dumfries.  Wiiere  are  the 
Orkney  Islands  ?  The  Shetland  Islands  ?  The  Hebrides  ?  Where  is  the  English 
Channel?  The  Isle  of  Wight?  Cape  Clear?  St.  George's  Channel  ?  Land''? 
End?  The  Frilh  of  Forth  ?  The  River  Dee?  The  Trent?  The  Severn  ?  Tlio 
Boyne  ?  The  Derwent  ?  The  Humber  ?  The  Tweed  ?  By  what  are  England  and 
Ireland  separated?     Where  is  Wales? 

CHAPTER  CXXXIX. — 1.  Which  is  the  most  interesting  country  in  Europe? 
2.  What  is  embraced  in  the  kingdom  of  Great  Britain  and  Ireland  ?  What  of  the 
island  of  Great  Britain  ?     What  of  the  British  Channel?     Ireland  ? 


482  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

3.  These  two  islands  are  small  in  extent,  but  they 
contain  over  twenty-seven  millions  of  inhabitants.  Be- 
sides this,  the  kingdom  has  colonies  in  various  parts  of 
America,  Africa,  and  Asia,  so  that  the  king  rules  over 
nearly  one  hundred  and  sixty  millions  of  people.  Great 
Britain  may  be  considered  the  richest  and  most  power- 
ful kingdom  on  the  face  of  the  globe. 

4.  I  suppose  you  know  that  the  first  settlers  of  our 
country  came  from  England.  They  brought  with 
them  the  manners  and  customs  of  the  countiy  where 
they  lived.  Thus  the  United  States  became  very 
much  like  England ;  the  houses,  the  churches,  the 
dress  of  the  people  in  the  two  countries,  are  nearly 
the  same.  Besides  this,  the  people  speak  the  same 
language. 

5.  But  you  must  remember  that  England  is  an  older 
and  richer  country  than  ours.  It  has  larger  cities,  more 
splendid  churches,  more  beautiful  roads,  finer  gardens, 
and  many  other  things  superior  to  what  can  be  found 
in  this  country. 

6.  Besides  all  this,  England  has  a  king  or  a  queen, 
who  has  several  magnificent  palaces.  England,  too, 
lias  a  great  many  noblemen,  who  live  in  costly  country- 

3.  Population  of  Great  Britain  and  Ireland  ?  Colonies  of  Great  Britain  ?  4.  How- 
can  you  account  for  the  United  States  resembling  England  ?  5.  How  does  the 
latter  country  excel  the  former  ? 


EUROPE.  483 

seats.  These  ride  about  in  coaches,  some  of  which  cost 
ten  thousand  dollars.  Thus  there  is  a  great  deal  more 
splendor  in  England  than  we  find  here. 

7.  But,  as  an  offset  to  this,  there  is  more  poverty 
there  than  in  our  happier  country.  Beggars  throng  the 
streets,  even  in  London,  and  they  are  to  be  found  in  all 
parts  of  the  kingdom.  Thousands  of  people,  too,  who 
are  not  beggars,  labor  very  hard,  and  yet  are  scarcely 
able  to  live.  Sometimes  a  great  many  people  die  for 
want  of  food.  Thus  England  is  a  country  which  is 
wonderful  for  its  magnificence  and  power,  yet  with  all 
its  wealth,  a  large  portion  of  the  people  suffer  the  pangs 
of  poverty. 

6.  What  of  the  king  ?     Noblemen?    Y.  What  of  poverty  in  England?    What  can 
jou  say  of  England  ? 


484 


UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


VIEW  IN  LONDON. 


CHAPTEE  CXL.— Europe  Contintjed. 

J  bout  Lmxdon  and  other  cities  of  England^  ^S\des^  Scotland^ 

and  Ireland. 

1.  London  is  the  largest  and  finest  city  in  Europe, 
and  contains  about  three  millions  of  inhabitants.  The 
Thames,  a  considerable  river,  runs  through  it.  Across 
this  there  are  a  number  of  handsome  stone  bridges,  and 
^beneath  it  is  a  tunnel,  so  that  people  may  walk  under 
the  water !  London  has  no  wall  around  it  like  Paris, 
Berlin,  and  most  large  cities  of  the  continent,  but  it  is 


Chapter  CXL.- 
Londoii  ? 


-1.  Population  of  London?      The  Thames?     Country  around 


EUROPE.  485 

encircled  by  a  beautiful  country,  dotted  with  villages, 
villas,  and  country-seats. 

2.  London  seems  like  a  world  of  itself;  you  miglit 
walk  about  for  a  year,  and  go  into  some  new  street 
every  day.  In  some  parts  of  tlie  city  theip^^  are  sucli 
streams  of  people,  tliat  it  always  seems  there  like  the 
Fourth  of  July,  or  Election  day.  The  shops  are  filled 
with  beautiful  things,  and  the  streets  are  crowded  with 
coaches  and  carriai^es  of  all  sorts. 

3.  The  palace  of  St.  James  is  a  dark  old  building^ 
but  the  late  king  had  a  new  one  built  for  him,  which 
is  very  fine.  Westminster  Abbey  is  an  old  Gothic 
church,  which  strikes  every  beholder  with  admiration 
and  wonder.  St.  Paul's  is  a  more  modern  church,  and 
is  very  handsome. 

4.  I  have  not  time  to  tell  you  of  the  other  wonder- 
ful things  in  London,  nor  can  I  tell  you  of  the  other 
beautiful  towns  and  cities  in  England.  You  must  read 
about  them  in  some  larger  book,  or  come  and  see  me 
of  a  long  winter  night. 

5.  I  will  then  tell  you  of  Manchester,  where  they 
make  beautiful  ginghams,  calicoes,  and  other  goods; 
of  Birmingham,  where  they  make  guns,  pistols,  swords, 
locks,  and  lamps ;  of  Sheffield,  where  they  make  knives, 

2.  Describe  the  appearance  of  London.     3.  Palace  of  St.  James?    Westminster 
^bbey?    St.  Paul's?     5.  What  of  Manchester ?     Birmingham?     Sheffield? 


486  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

forks,  and  scissors;  and  of  otlier  places,  where  they 
make  a  great  variety  of  articles. 

6.  Wales  is  a  country  of  mountains,  lying  on  tlie 
west  of  England.  Most  of  the  people  talk  the  Welsh 
languagejipsvhich  you  could  not  understand.  They  are 
very  industrious,  and  live  in  a  comfortable  manner. 
Their  mountains  are  celebrated  for  producing  coal,  tin, 
iron,  and  copper. 

1.  Scotland  is  also  a  land  of  mountains.  In  the 
southern  part,  the  people  speak  the  Scotch  language, 
which  perhaps  you  could  partly  understand.  But  in 
the  highlands  of  the  north,  the  inhabitants  speak 
Gaelic,  which  would  be  as  strange  to  you  as  the  lan- 
guage of  an  Arab. 

8.  The  capital  of  Scotland  is  Edinburgh,  a  fine, 
smoky  old  city,  with  an  immense  high  castle  in  the 
midst  of  it.  Besides  this,  there  are  many  fine  towns  in 
Scotland.  Glasgow  is  a  large  place,  celebrated  for  its 
manufactures. 

9.  Ireland  is  a  bright  green  island,  containing  seven 
millions  of  people.  It  is  the  native  land  of  those  cheer- 
ful, witty  Irishmen,  who  come  out  to  this  country  in 
such  abundance.   If  their  country  was  happily  governed, 

6.  Where  is  Wales?  What  of  the  people?  Mountains?  7.  What  of  Scot- 
land? Lanp^unge?  8.  What  of  Edinburgh?  Glasgow?  9.  What  of  Ireland? 
Government? 


EUROPE.  487 

they  would  not  come  here;  but  the  truth  is  that  Ire- 
land has  felt  the  miseries  of  bad  government  for  many 
years,  and  a  large  part  of  the  people  are  therefore  kept 
in  a  state  of  distressing  poverty. 

10.  The  Irish,  however,  are  a  very  interesting  people. 
At  home  or  abroad,  they  seem  to  be  full  of  wit  and 
hospitality.  It  is  by  their  lively  disposition  and  cheer- 
ful turn  of  mind,  that  they  seem  to  soften  the  evils 
which  so  often  pursue  them. 

11.  Dublin  is  the  capital  of  Ireland,  and  some  of  its 
streets  are  magnificent,  but  many  portions  of  it  are 
filled  with  inhabitants  who  present  the  most  woful 
aspect  of  raggedness  and  misery.  Beggary  is  common 
in  all  parts  of  the  kingdom. 

10.  What  of  the  Irish  people  ?     1?~  WlsT  o^  DubUn? 


4  88 


UNIVEKSAL  HISTORY. 


CELTIC  INHABITANTS  OF   BRITAIN. 

CHAPTEE   CXLI.— Europe  Coj^tinued. 
Origin  of  th-e  British  Nation — TIlg  Druids. 

1.  It  is  supposed  that  Great  Britain  and  Ireland 
were  originally  settled  by  a  colony,  from  Ganl.  These 
were  called  Gaels,  or  Celts.  Their  descendants  are 
found  at  this  day  in  Ireland  and  Wales,  and  the  high- 
lands of  Scotland.  Some  of  these  still  speak  the 
ancient  Gaelic  or  Celtic  lano:uao:e. 

2.  Very  little  is  known  about  these  islands  till  the 
time  of  Julius  Caesar.     He  invaded  England  in  the  year 


Chapter  CXLL— 1.  What  of  the  Gaels,  or  Celts? 


I 


EUROPE.  489 

55  before  tlie  Cliristian  era.  The  country  was  then 
called  Britannia,  or  Britain.  It  was  inhabited  by  bar- 
l^arians,  some  of  whom  wore  the  skins  of  wild  beasts, 
while  others  were  entirely  naked.  They  were  painted, 
like  the  American  Indians.  Their  weapons  were 
clubs,  spears,  and  swords,  with  which  they  fiercely 
attacked  the  Roman  invaders. 

3.  The  ancient  Britons,  like  the  other  northern 
nations  of  Europe,  were  idolaters.  Their  priests  were 
called  druids.  Their  places  of  worship  were  in  the 
open  air,. and  consisted  of  huge  stone  pillars,  standing 
in  a  circle.  A  large  stone  in  the  middle  was  used  as 
an  altar,  and  human  victims  were  sacrificed  upon  it. 
The  ruins  of  one  of  these  temples  still  remains  at 
Stonehenge,  and  is  very  wonderful. 

4.  The  druids  considered  the  oak  a  sacred  tree. 
They  set  a  great  value  on  the  misletoe,  a  sort  of  plant 
which  sometimes  grows  on  the  oak.  Wherever  they 
found  the  misletoe,  they  held  a  banquet  beneath  the 
spreading  branches  of  the  oak  on  which  it  grew. 

5.  The  druids  incited  the  Britons  to  oppose  the 
Bo  man  power.     They  fought  fiercely,  and  the  country 

2.  "When  did  Cresar  invade  Eng-land?  What  was  Great  Britain  then  called? 
What  of  the  people  ?  3.  Religion  of  the  ancient  Britons  ?  Who  were  the  druids  ? 
What  of  their  places  of  worship  ?  4.  IIow  was  the  oak  considered  by  the  druids? 
The  misletoe? 


490  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

was  not  entirely  subdued  till  sixty  years  after  tlie 
Christian  era.  Suetonius,  a  Roman  general,  tlien  cut 
down  the  sacred  groves  of  oak,  destroyed  the  temples, 
and  threw  the  druids  into  the  iires  which  they  had 
themselves  kindled  to  roast  the  Romans. 

6.  The  Scots,  who  inhabited  the  northern  part  of  tin 
island,  were  a  fierce  people,  and  were  still  unconquered. 
To  prevent  them  from  making  incursions  into  Britain, 
the  Romans  built  a  wall  from  the  river  Tyne  to  the 
Frith  of  Solway. 

Y.  The  Britons  remained  quietly  under  the  govern- 
ment of  Rome  for  nearly  ^ve  centuries  after  the  Chris- 
tian era;  adopting  during  this  period,  many  of  the 
Roman  customs.  They  never  attempted  to  free  them- 
selves. But,  at  last,  the  Roman  empire  became  so  Aveak 
that  the  emperor  Valentinian  withdrew  his  troops  from 
Britain. 

8.  The  inhabitants  had  grown  so  un warlike,  that, 
when  the  Roman  soldiers  were  gone,  they  found  them- 
selves unable  to  resist  the  Scots.  They  therefore  asked 
the  assistance  of  two  tribes  of  people  from  Germany, 
called  Saxons  and  Angles. 

5.  When  was  t lie  country  entirely  subdued?  Wliat  of  Suetonius?  6.  Wliatot 
the  Scots?  What  did  tlie  Romans  do?  7.  How  lout,^  did  Rome  govern  Britain ? 
What  of  the  emperor  Valentinian  ?  8.  Whose  aid  did  the  Britons  ask  against  the 
Scots? 


EUROPE. 


491 


9.  These  people  drove  back  tlie  Scots  into  their  own 
part  of  the  island.  Then,  instead  of  returning  to  Grer- 
many,  they  took  possession  of  Britain  by  the  right  of 
the  strongest.  It  was  divided  by  them  into  seven  small 
kingdoms,  called  the  Saxon  IIe})tarcliy. 


"nr 


1 


A  SAXON   KING. 


CHAPTER   CXLIL— EuKOPE   Continued. 
Saxon  and  Danish  kings  of  England. 
1.  In  the  year  827  of  the  Christian  era,  all  the  seven 
kingdoms  of  the  Saxon  Heptarchy  were  imited  into  one, 
under  the  government  of  Egbert.     He  was  therefore 
the  first  king  of  England. 


9.  What  didtliese  two  tribes  do?     How  was  Britain  then  divided? 

Chapter  CXLII.— 1,  Who  was  the  first  king  of  England?     What  kingdoms  did 


he  govern  ? 


492  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

2.  Egbert  was  a  native  of  England,  but  liad  ])een 
educated  in  France,  at  the  court  of  Chaiiemao^ne.  He 
was  therefore  more  polished  and  enlightened  than  most 
of  the  Saxon  kings.  During  the  reign  of  Egbert,  and 
for  many  years  afterward,  the  Danes  made  incursions 
into  England.  They  sometimes  oveiTan  the  whole 
country. 

3.  Alfred,  who  ascended  the  throne  in  872,  fought 
fifty-six  battles  with  them,  by  sea  and  land.  On  one 
occasion,  he  went  into  the  camp  of  the  Danes  in  the 
disguise  of  a  harper.  He  took  notice  of  every  thing, 
and  planned  an  attack  upon  the  camp.  Returning  to 
his  own  men,  he  led  them  against  the  Danes,  whom  he 
completely  routed. 

4.  This  king  was  called  Alfred  the  Great;  and  he 
had  a  better  right  to  the  epithet  of  Great  than  most 
other  kings  who  have  borne  it.  He  made  wise  laws, 
and  instituted  the  custom  of  trial  by  jury.  He  like^vise 
founded  the  university  of  Oxford.  Nearly  a  hundred 
years  after  his  death,  the  Danes  again  broke  into 
England.  There  was  now  no  Alfred  to  oppose  them. 
They  were  accordingly  victorious,  and  three  Danish 
kings  governed  the  country  in  succession. 

2.  What  of  Egbert?'  What  of  the  Danes?  3.  When  did  Alfred  ascend  the 
throne?  What  did  he  do?  4.  Why  was  he  called  Alfred  ilio  Chvat  ?  What  of 
the  Danes  after  his  death  ? 


EUROPE.  493 

5.  Canute  tlie  Great  was  one  of  them.  He  appears 
to  liave  been  an  old  pirate,  or,  as  they  were  called  in 
those  days,  a  sea-king.  One  day,  when  he  and  his 
courtiers  were  walking  on  the  shore,  they  called  him 
king  of  the  sea,  and  told  him  that  he  had  but  to  com- 
mand, and  the  waves  would  obey  him. 

6.  Canute  desired  a  chair  of  state  to  be  brought  and 
placed  on  the  hard,  smooth  sand.  Then,  seating  himself 
in  the  chair,  he  stretched  out  his  sceptre  over  the  waves, 
with  a  very  commanding  aspect. 

7.  "  KoU  back  thy  waves,  thou  sea !"  cried  Canute. 
^'  I  am  thy  king  and  master !  How  darest  thou  foam 
and  thunder  in  my  presence?"  But  the  sea,  nowise 
abashed,  came  roaring  and  whitening  onward,  and 
threw  a  sheet  of  spray  over  Canute  and  all  the  cour- 
tiers. The  giant  waves  rolled  upward  on  the  beach, 
far  beyond  the  monarch's  chair.  They  would  soon 
have  swallowed  him  up,  together  mth  his  courtiers, 
if  they  liad  not  all  scampered  to  the  dry  land. 

8.  In  the  year  1041,  the  Danes  were  driven  out  of 
England,  and  another  Saxon  king,  called  Edward  the 
Confessor,  was  placed  upon  the  throne.  At  his  death, 
in  1066,  Harold,  who  was  also  a  Saxon,  became  king. 

9.  But   he  was  the  last  of  the  Saxon   king's.      No 

5-7.  Tell  a  story  of  Canute.  8.  When  were  the  Danes  driven  out  of  England? 
Who  was  then  placed  upon  the  throne  ?     When  did  Harold  become  king? 


494  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

sooner  liad  lie  mounted  the  tlirone,  than  William,  duke 
of  Normandy,  in  France,  invaded  England,  at  the  head 
of  sixty  thousand  men. 

10.  Harold  led  an  army  of  Saxons  against  the  Nor- 
man invaders,  and  fought  with  them  at  Hastings.  In 
the  midst  of  the  battle,  an  arrow  was  shot  through  his 
steel  helmet,  and  penetrated  his  brain.  The  duke  of 
Normandy  gained  the  victory,  and  became  king  of 
England. 


CHAPTEE   CXLIII.— Europe  Continued. 
Norman  Icings  of  England, 

1.  William  the  Conqueror  (as  the  duke  of  Nor- 
mandy was  now  called)  reigned  about  twenty  years. 
He  was  succeeded  by  his  second  son,  William  Rufas, 
or  the  Red,  who  was  so  named  from  the  color  of  his 
hair. 

2.  The  Red  king  was  ver}^  fond  of  hunting.  One 
day,  while   he  was   chasing   a   deer  in   the   forest,  a 

9.  Who  now  invaded  England  ?     10.  Where   was  the  battle  fought  between 
Harold  and  William  ?     Who  became  king  of  England? 

Chai'TER  CXLIII.— 1.  Who  succeeded  William  the  Conqueror? 


EUROPE.  495, 

gentleman  by  tlie  name  of  Walter  Tyrrel  let  fly  an 
arrow.  It  glanced  against  a  tree,  and  hit  the  king  in 
the  breast ;  so  that  he  fell  from  his  horse  and  died. 

3.  This  took  place  in  the  year  1100,  and  William 
Rufus  was  succeeded  by  his  brother  Henry.  This 
king  was  called  Beauclerk,  or  Excellent  Scholar,  be- 
cause he  was  able  to  wiite  his  name.  Kings  were  not 
expected  to  have  much  learning  in  those  days.  On  the 
death  of  king  Henry  Beauclerk,  in  1135,  the  throne 
was  usurped  by  Stephen  of  Blois.  But  he  died  in  1154, 
and  was  succeeded  by  Henry  the  Second,  who  was  son 
to  the  former  Hemy. 

4.  This  monarch  had  a  violent  quarrel  with  Thomas 
Becket,  archbishop  of  Canterbury.  Hoping  to  please 
the  king,  four  knights  went  to  Canterbury,  and  mur- 
dered Becket  at  the  foot  of  the  altar.  But  this  bloody 
deed  was  a  cause  of  great  trouble  to  king  Henry ;  for 
the  pope  threatened  to  excommunicate  him. 

5.  In  order  to  pacify  his  holiness,  the  king  set  out 
on  a  pilgrimage  to  the  tomb  of  Becket.  When  he 
entered  the  abbey  where  the  tomb  was  situated,  the 
whole  community  of  monks  assaulted  him  with  rods. 
The  king,   being  afraid  to  resist  them,  was  soundly 

2.  What  was  the  fate  of  William  Rufus  ?  3.  When  did  Henry'Beauclerk  begin 
his  reign  ?  When  did  Stephen  succeed  to  the  throne  ?  When  did  he  die  ?  4.  Who 
murdered  Thomas  Becket  ?     5.  What  happened  to  Henry  II,  ? 

22 


496  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

wliipped,  and,  as  a  reward  for  his  patiencej  lie  received 
the  pope's  pardon. 

6.  During  the  reign  of  this  king,  Ireland  was  con- 
quered and  annexed  to  the  realm  of  England.  It  had 
previously  been  divided  into  several  separate  kingdoms. 

Y.  Kichard  the  lion-hearted  was  crowned  king  ol 
England  in  1189.  He  was  a  valiant  man,  and  pos- 
sessed prodigious  strength  ;  and  he  delighted  in 
nothing  so  much  as  battle  and  slaughter.  After 
gaining  great  renown  in  Palestine,  he  was,  on  his  way 
back,  taken  and  imprisoned  for  two  years  by  the  duke 
of  Austria. 

8.  The  English  obtained  Eichard's  release  by  paying 
a  heavy  ransom;  but  soon  afterward,  while  besieging 
a  castle  in  Normandy,  he  was  killed  by  an  arrow  from 
a  cross-bow.  The  next  king  was  Eichard's  brother 
John,  surnamed  Lackland,  or  Loseland. 

9.  This  epithet  was  bestowed  on  John  because  he 
lost  the  territories  which  the  English  kings  had  hither- 
to possessed  in  France.  John  was  one  of  the  worst 
kings  that  ever  England  had.  Among  other  crimes, 
he  murdered  his  nephew,  Arthur  of  Bret  ague,  who  was 
rightful  heir  to  the  crown. 

6>  What  of  Ireland  ?  7.  When  was  Eichard  made  king  of  England?  What  of 
him?  8.  How  was  he  killed?  9.  Why  was  John  called  Liickland?  What  of  him? 
His  crimes? 


EUROPE.  497 

10.  The  barons  of  England  were  so  disgusted  with 
the  conduct  of  John,  that  they  assembled  at  E,unny- 
mede,  and  compelled  him  to  sign  a  written  deed,  called 
Magna  Charta.  This  famous  charter  was  dated  the  19th 
of  June,  1215.  It  is  considered  the  foundation  of  Eng- 
lish liberty.  It  deprived  John,  and  all  his  successors,  of 
the  despotic  power  which  former  kings  had  exercised. 

11.  King  John  died  in  1216,  and  left  the  crown  to 
his  son,  who  was  then  only  nine  years  old.  He  was 
called  Henry  the  Third.  His  reign  continued  fifty-five 
years  ;  but,  though  he  was  a  well-meaning  man,  he  had 
not  sufficient  wisdom  and  firmness  for  a  ruler. 


CHAPTER  CXLIY.— Europe  CoNxmuHD. 
English  Wars  and  Rehdlions. 

1.  The  next  king,  Edward  the  First,  was  crowned 
in  1272.  The  people  gave  him  the  nickname  of  Long- 
shanks,  because  his  legs  were  of  unusual  length.  He 
was  a  great  warrior,  and  fought  bravely  in  Palestine, 
and  in  the  civil  wars  of  England. 

2.  Edward  conquered  Wales,  which   had   hitherto 

10.  "Who  signed  Magna  Charta ?  What  is  it  considered?  11.  When  did  king 
John  die  ?  .  What  of  Henry  HI.  ? 

Chapter  CXLIV.— 1.  When  was  Edward  I.  crowned?  What  did  tlie  people  call 
hiiu  ?     What  of  him  ? 


498  /  UXTYERSAL  HISTORY. 

been  a;  separate  kingdom.  He  attempted  to  conquer 
Scotland  likewise,  b'ut  did  not  entirely  succeed.  The 
illustrious  William  Wallace  resisted  him,  and  beat  the 
English  troops  in  many  battles.  But,  at  last,  Wallace 
was  taken  prisoner  and  carried  in  chains  to  London, 
and  there  executed. 

3.  Robert  Bruce  laid  claim  to  the  crown  of  Scotland, 
and  renewed  the  w^ar  against  Edward.  But  old  Long- 
shanks  was  determined  not  to  let  go  his  hold  of  poor 
Scotland.  He  mustered  an  immense  army,  and  was 
marching  northward,  when  a  sudden  sickness  put  an 
end  to  his  life. 

4.  His  son,  Edward  the  Second,  ascended  the  throne 
in  1307.  He  led  an  army  of  a  hundred  thousand  men 
into  Scotland.  But  he  was  not  such  a  warrior  as  old 
king  Longshanks.  Robert  Bruce  encountered  him  at 
Bannockburn,  with  only  thirty  thousand  men,  and 
gained  a  glorious  victory.  By  this,  Scotland  was  set 
free.  Edward  the  Second  reigned  about  twenty  years. 
He  was  a  foolish  and  miserable  king.  His  own  wife 
made  war  against  him  and  took  him  prisoner.  By  her 
instigation,  he  was  cruelly  murdered  in  prison. 

2.  What  of  Wales  ?  Who  resisted  Edward  in  Scotland  ?  Fate  of  William  Wal- 
lace? 3.  What  of  Robert  Bruce?  Death  of  Edward  Longshanks?  4.  What  of 
Edward  IT,  ?  Battle  of  Bannockburn?  How  was  Scotland  set  free?  What  hap- 
pened to  Edward  II.  ? 


EUROPE.  499 

5.  His  son,  Edward  the  Third,  began  to  reign  in 
132Y,  at  the  age  of  eighteen.  He  had  not  long  been 
on  the  throne,  before  he  showed  himself  very  unlike 
his  father.  He  beat  the  Scots  at  Halidown  Hill,  and 
afterward  invaded  France.  I  have  spoken  of  his 
French  wars,  in  the  history  of  France. 

6.  The  king's  son,  surnamed  the  Black  Prince,  was 
even  more  valiant  than  his  father.  He  was  also  as 
kind  and  generous  as  he  was  brave.  He  conquered 
king  John  of  France,  and  took  him  prisoner,  but  he 
did  not  exult  over  him.  AYhen  they  entered  London 
togethei*,  the  Black  Prince  rode  bareheaded  by  the  side 
of  the  captive  monarch,  as  if  he  were  merely  an  attend- 
ant, instead  of  a  conqueror. 

7.  This  brave  prince  died  in  1376,  and  his  father 
lived  only  one  year  longer.  The  next  king  was  Rich- 
ard the  Second,  a  boy  of  eleven  years  old.  When  he 
grew  up,  Richard  neglected  the  government,  and  cared 
for  nothing  but  his  own  pleasures.     ' 

8.  During  his  reign,  a  rebellion  was  headed  by  a 
blacksmith  named  Wat  Tyler.  The  rebels  had  also 
other  leaders,  nicknamed  Jack  Straw  and  Hob  Carter. 


5.  What  of  Edward  III.  ?  When  did  he  begin  to  reign  ?  What  happened 
at  Halidown-  Hill?  6.  What  of  the  Black  Prince?  How  did  he  treat 
John  of  France?  7.  What  of  Richard  II.?  8,  9.  What  of  Wat  Tyler's  rebel- 
lion^ 


500  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

They  marclied  to  London  witli  a  hundred  thousand 
followers,  and  did  a  great  deal  of  mischief. 

9.  The  king,  attended  by  a  few  of  his  nobles,  rode 
out  to  hold  a  conference  with  Wat  Tyler.  The  black- 
smith was  very  rude,  and  treated  king  Richard  as  if 
he  were  no  better  than  a  common  man,  or  perhaps  not 
quite  so  good.  He  even  threatened  the  king  with  a 
drawn  sword. 

10.  William  Walworth,  the  Lord  Mayor  of  London, 
was  standing  near  the  king.  He  was  so  offended  at 
Wat  Tyler's  insolence,  that  he  uplifted  a  mace,  or  club, 
and  smote  Wat  to  the  ground.  A  knight  then  killed 
him  with  a  sword. 

11.  When  the  rebels  saw  that  the  valiant  black- 
smith was  beaten  down  and  slain,  they  gave  an  angry 
shout,  and  were  inishing  forward  to  attack  the  king's 
party.  But  king  Richard  rode  boldly  to  meet  them, 
and  waved  his  hand  with  a  majestic  air. 

12.  "  Be  not  troubled  for  the  death  of  your  leader  !" 
he  cried.  "  I,  your  king,  will  be  a  better  leader  than 
Wat  Tyler !"  .  The  king's  words  and  looks  made  sucli 
an  impression,  that  the  rebels  immediately  submitted, 
and  Wat  Tyler's  murder  was  unavenged. 

10.  What  did  Walworth  do?  11.  What  of  the  rebels  when  Wat  Tyler  was  killed  ? 
12.     What  did  Richard  do? 


EUROPE.  501 

CHAPTER  CXLY.— Europe  Contdojed. 
The  Lancastrian  Kings  of  England. 

1.  [N'oTWiTHSTAi^DiNG  his  promisG  to  the  rebels,  king 
Richard  was  not  half  so  good  a  ruler  as  the  blacksmith 
would  probably  have  been.  His  subjects  grew  more 
and  more  discontented,  and  his  cousin,  the  duke  of 
Lancaster,  formed  the  project  of  making  himself  king. 
Richard  was  dethroned,  and  imprisoned  at  Pontefract 
castle,  where  he  was  either  killed  or  starved  to  death. 
The  duke  of  Lancaster  began  to  reign  in  the  year  1400, 
and  was  called  Henry  the  Fourth. 

2.  There  were  two  rebellions  against  this  king.  One 
was  headed  by  the  earl  of  Northumberland,  and  the 
other  by  the  archbishop  of  York ;  for,  in  those  times, 
bishops  often  put  on  armor,  and  turned  soldiers.  Henry 
conquered  the  rebels,  and  reigned  several  years  in 
peace. 

3.  As  long  as  his  father  lived,  the  king's  eldest  son 
was  a  wild  and  dissipated  young  man.  But  no  sooner 
was  the  old  king  dead,  than  his  character  underwent  a 

Chapter  CXLV. — 1.  What  of  England  under  Richard  ?  Who  dethroned  him  ? 
His  fate?  "Who  was  Henry  IV.  ?  When  did  he  begin  to  reign  ?  2.  What  rebel- 
lions were  there  against  this  king  ?  3.  What  of  Henry  V.  ?  When  did  he  invade 
Prance  ? 


502  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

complete  change.  He  now  tlirew  off  his  dissipation, 
and  devoted  himself  carefully  to  the  business  of  gov- 
erning his  kingdom.  He  was  crowned,  as  Henry  the 
Fifth,  in  1413.  Two  years  afterward  he  invaded 
France. 

4.  I  have  already  told,  in  •  the  history  of  France, 
how  Henry  vanquished  the  French  in  the  famous 
battle  of  Agincourt,  and  how  he  afterward  became 
master  of  the  whole  kingdom  of  France.  His  death 
took  place  in  1422,  in  the  midst  of  his  triumphs,  at  the 
age  of  thirty-four. 

5.  The  new  king  of  England,  Henry  the  Sixth,  was 
a  baby,  only  nine  months  old.  At  that  tender  age, 
while  he  was  still  in  his  nurse's  arms,  the  heavy  crowns 
of  England  and  France  were  put  upon  his  Jiead.  The 
ceremony  of  this  poor  child's  coronation  was  performed 
in  the  city  of  Paris.  He  soon  lost  the  crown  of  France. 
But  the  crown  of  England  continued  a  torment  to  him 
as  long  as  he  lived,  and  it  caused  his  death  at  last. 

6.  When  he  grew  up,  he  turned  out  to  be  a  mild, 
quiet,  simple  sort  of  man,  with  barely  sense  enougli  to 
get  along  respectably  as  a  private  person.  As  a  king 
he  was  an  object  of  contempt.     His  ^vife  had  f^ir  more 


4.  Who  fought  the  battle  of  Agincourt  ?     When  did  FTenry  V.  die  ?     5.  Describe 
the  coronation  of  Henry  VI.       6.   What  of  him  ?     His  queen  ? 


EUROPE.  503 

nianliood  than  liimself,  and  she  governed  him  like  a 
child. 

Y.  During  this  king's  reign  began  the  war  of  the 
Koses.  The  reader  will  recollect  that  the  duke  of 
Lancaster  had  unlawfully  taken  the  crown  from 
Richard  the  Second.  But  he  and  his  son  reigned 
without  much  opposition,  because  they  were  warlike 
men,  and  could  have  defended  the  crown  with  their 
swords. 

8.  Henry  the  Sixth,  on  the  contrary,  was  soft,  meek, 
and  peaceable,  without  spirit  enough  to  fight  for  the 
crown  which  his  father  left  him.  The  heirs  of  Richard 
the  Second  therefore  thought  this  a  proper  time  to  get 
back  their  lawful  inheritance.  The  duke  of  York  was 
the  nearest  heir. 

9.  He  began  a  war  in  1455.  If  there  had  been 
nobody  but  Henry  the  Sixth  to  resist  him,  he  might 
have  got  the  crown  at  once.  But  Henry's  wife,  whose 
name  was  Margaret,  and  many  of  the  nobility,  took  up 
arms  for  the  king.  Other  noblemen  lent  assistance  to 
the  duke  of  York. 

10.  All  the  Yorkists,  or  partisans  of*  the  duke  of 
York,  wore  white  roses,  either  in  their  hats  or  at  their 

7.  "Whatof  the  duke  of  Lancaster?  His  son  Henry  V.  ?  8,  "What  did  the  heirs 
of  Richard  II.  do?  9.  When  did  the  duke  of  York  begin  the  war?  Who  took 
up  arms  .for  Henry  ? 


504  UNIYERSAL  HISTORY. 

breasts.  The  Lancastrians,  or  those  of  tlie  king's  party, 
wore  a  red  rose  in  the  same  manner.  Whenever  two 
persons  happened  to  meet,  one  wearing  a  red  rose  and 
the  other  a  white,  they  drew  their  swords  and  fought. 
11.  Thus  the  people  of  England  were  divided  into 
two  great  parties,  who  were  ready  to  cut  each  other's 
throats,  merely  for  the  difference  between  a  red  and 
white  rose. 


CHAPTER  CXLYI.— EuEOPE  Continued. 

Wars  of  the  Hoses. 

1.  The  wars  of  the  roses  lasted  thirty  years.  Some- 
times the  white  rose  was  uppermost  and  sometimes  the 
red.  The  most  celebrated  general  in  these  wars  was 
the  earl  of  Warwick.  It  was  chiefly  by  his  means  that 
the  soldiers  of  the  white  rose  gained  a  decisive  victory 
at  Towton,  in  which  thirty-six  thousand  of  the  red  rose 
men  were  killed.  The  young  duke  of  York  was  then 
proclaimed  king,  under  the  name  of  Edward  the 
Fourth. 


10.  What  did  tlie  followers  of  the  duke  of  York  wear?  Tiiose  of  the  king? 
"What  often  happened?     11,  How  were  the  English  people  now  situated? 

Chapter  CXLVI. — 1.  How  Jong  did  the  wars  of  the  roses  last  ?  What  of  the 
earl  of  Warwick  ? 


EUROPE.  505 

2.  This  was  in  1461.  But,  not  long  afterward,  tlie 
earl  of  Warwick  quarrelled  witli  king  Edward,  and 
quitted  tlie  party  of  the  Yorkists.  He  took  king 
Henry  tke  Sixth  out  of  prison,  and  placed  him  on  the 
throne  again,  and  Edward  was  compelled  to  flee  over 
to  France. 

3.  As  the  earl  of  "Warwick  showed  himself  so  pow- 
erful in  pulling  down  kings  and  setting  them  up  again, 
he  gained  the  name  of  the  King-maker.  But  he  was 
finally  killed  in  battle,  while  fighting  bravely  for  the 
Lancastrians;  and  then  the  white  rose  flourished 
again. 

4.  Henry  the  Sixth  and  his  son  were  murdered  in 
1464,  and  Edward  the  Fourth  became  the  undisputed 
king  of  England.  He  had  fought  bravely  for  the 
crown,  but  now  that  he  had  got  firm  possession  of  it, 
he  became  idle  and  voluptuous. 

5.  He  was  a  cruel  tyrant,  too.  Having  resolved  to 
put  one  of  his  brothers  to  death,  he  gave  him  the  choice 
of  dying  in  whatever  manner  he  pleased.  His  brother, 
who  was  a  great  lover  of  good  liquor,  chose  to  be 
drowned  in  a  hogshead  of  wine.  ' 

6.  Edward  the  Fourth  died  in  1483.     He  left  two 

2.  When'was  Edward  IV.  made  king?  What  did  Warwick  do?  3.  What  was 
he  called  ?  How  was  he  killed  ?  When  did  the  party  of  the  white  roses  flourish 
again?     4.  What  of  Edward  IV.  ?     5.  How  did  he  treat  his  brother  ? 


506  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

young  children,  the  eldest  of  whom  now  became  king 
Edward  the  Fifth.  But  these  poor  children  had  a 
wdcked  uncle  for  a  guardian.  He  was  called  Richard 
Crookback,  duke  of  Gloucester.  Most  historians  say 
that  he  was  a  horrible  figure  to  look  at,  having  a 
hump-back,  a  withered  aim,  and  a  very  ugly  face. 
This  frightful  personage  was  determined  to  make  him- 
self king. 

7.  He  took  care  that  the  little  king  Edward  and  his 
brother  should  lodge  in  the  tower  of  London.  One 
night,  while  the  two  children  were  sound  asleep  in 
each  other's  arms,  some  villains  came  and  smothered 
them  with  the  bolsters  of  the  bed.  They  were  buried 
at  the  foot  of  a  staircase.  So  Richard  Crookback,  the 
murderer,  became  king  of  England.  He  committed  a 
thousand  crimes  for  the  sake  of  getting  the  crown,  but 
he  did  not  keep  it  long. 

8.  Henry  Tudor,  the  young  earl  of  Richmond,  was 
now  the  only  remaining  heir  of  king  Henry  the  Sixth. 
The  French  supplied  him  with  the  means  of  making 
war  against  Richard  Crookback.  He  landed  in  Eng- 
land, and  gained  a  victory  at  Bosworth. 

9.  When  the  soldiers  of  Richmond  examined  the 

6.  When  did  lie  die?  What  children  did  he  leave?  Describe  Richard  Crook- 
back.  7.  What  cruelty  did  he  commit  ?  Did  he  become  king  ?  8.  Who  gained 
the  battle  of  Bosworth  ? 


EUROPE.  507 

dead  bodies  tliat  lay  in  lieaps  on  tlie  battle-field,  they 
found  tlie  hump-backed  Eichard  among  them,  with 
the  golden  crown  upon  his  head.  They  ^^nt  it  on  the 
head  of  E-ichmond,  and  hailed  him  King  Henry  the 
Seventh. 

10.  The  new  king  married  a  daughter  of  Edward 
the  Fourth ;  and  at  their  wedding  they  each  wore  a 
red  rose  intertmned  with  a  white  one ;  for  the  wars  of 
the  roses  were  now  over  at  last. 


CHAPTEE  CXLYII.— EuKOPE   Continued. 

Reigns  of  the  Tudor  Princes. 

1.  Heney  the  Seventh  (the  late  earl  of  Eichmond) 
began  his  reign  in  1485.  He  was  a  crafty  king,  and 
cared  much  more  for  his  own  power  and  wealth  than 
for  the  happiness  of  his  subjects.  But,  for  his  own 
sake,  he  desired  to  reign  peaceably,  without  foreign  wars 
or  civil  commotions. 

2.  During  his  reign,  two  impostors  appeared  in  Eng- 
land, each  of  whom  pretended  that  he  had  a  better  right 

9.  Where  was  Richard  found  ?     10,  Who  did  Henry  VII.  marry  ?    Why  were 
the  wars  of  the  rosea  now  at  an  end  ? 

Chapter  CXLVII.— 1.  When  did  Henry  VII.  begin  to  reign  ?    What  of  him  ? 


508  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

to  the  crown  than  Henry  the  Seventh  liad. .  One  was 
Lambeii;  Simnel,  the  son  of  a  baker ;  but  he  called  him- 
self a  nephew  of  Edward  the  Fourth.  The  other  was 
Perkin  Warbeck,  the  son  of  a  Flemish  butcher. 
He  pretended  to  be  one  of  the  little  princes 
whom  Richard  Crookback  had  smothered  in  the 
tower. 

3.  Many  knights  and  noblemen  of  England  were  led 
into  rebellion  by  each  of  these  impostors.  But  finally 
they  were  both  taken  prisoners.  Perkin  Warbeck  was 
hanged,  and  Lambert  Simnel  was  set  to  washing  dishes 
in  the  king's  kitchen. 

4.  Henry  the  Seventh  died  in  1509.  He  had  been 
a  great  lover  of  money,  and  put  all  that  he  could  lay 
his  hands  on  into  his  own  purse.  A  sum  equal  to  fifty 
millions  of  dollars  was  found  in  his  palace,  after  his 
death. 

5.  His  son,  Henry  the  Eighth,  began  to  reign  at  the 
age  of  eighteen.  He  was  a  haughty,  stern,  hard-hearted, 
and  tyrannical  king.  Whenever  he  got  angry,  and 
that  was  not  seldom,  the  heads  of  some  of  his  subjects 
were  sure  to  be  cut  oft.  This  royal  villain  had  six 
wives.     One  died  a  natural  death  ;  he  was  divorced 

2.  What  of  two  impostors?  Their  names?  "Whom  did  they  pretend  to  be  ?_  3. 
What  became  of  them?  4.  What  of  the  riches  of  Henry  VII.?  5.  When  did 
Henry  VJII.  begin  to  reign?    What  of  him  ?    What  of  his  wives? 


EUROPE.  509 

from  two,  cut  off  tlie  heads  of  two  others,  and  one  out. 

lived  liim. 

* 

6.  The  reign  of  Henry  the  Eighth  was  chiefly  re- 
markable on  account  of  the  Reformation  in  England. 
By  this  term  is  meant  the  substitution  of  the  Protestant 
religion  for  the  Roman  Catholic.  Until  this  period, 
the  pope  of  Rome  had  claimed  authority  over  England. 

7.  But  Henry  the  Eighth  took  all  the  power  to  him- 
self. If  any  of  his  subjects  dared  to  have  a  religion  un- 
like the  king's,  they  were  either  beheaded  or  burnt. 
The  king  was  so  proud  of  his  religious  character  that 
he  called  himself  Defender  of  the  Faith  ! 

8.  The  old  tyrant  died  in  1547,  at  the  age  of  fifty- 
six.  One  of  his  last  acts  was  to  cause  the  earl  of 
SmTey  to  be  beheaded,  although  he  was  guilty  of  no 
crime;  and  wdth  that  innocent  blood  upon  his  soul, 
king  Henry  the  Eighth  was  summoned  to  the  judg- 
ment-seat. 

9.  His  son,  Edward  the  Sixth,  was  but  nine  or  ten 
years  old  when  he  ascended  the  throne.  He  was  a  fine 
and  promising  boy,  but  lived  only  to  the  age  of  sixteen. 
His  sister  Mary  succeeded  him,  in  1553. 

6.  What  great  event  occurred  in  this  reign  ?  "What  is  meant  by  the  Reforma- 
tiori.^  Who  had  claimed  authority  over  England?  1.  Why  was  the  king  called 
Defender  of  the  Faith  ?  8.  When  did  Henry  VIIT.  die  ?  What  was  the  last  act 
of  his  reign  ?     9.  What  of  Edward  VI.  ?     When  did  Mary  begin  to  reign  ? 


510  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

10.  She  bears  the  dreadful  title  of  Bloody  Queen 
Mary.  Being  a  Roman  Catholic,  she  caused  person^ 
to  be  burnt  alive  who  denied  the  authority  of  the  pope. 
Many  bishops  and  godly  ministers  thus  perished  at  the 
stake. 

11.  But,  even  in  the  midst  of  the  flames,  they  were 
happier  than  the  Bloody  Queen  Mary.  It  seemed  as 
if  a  fire  were  consuming  her  miserable  heart.  She 
knew  that  everybody  hated  her,  and,  after  a  reign 
of  only  ^ve  years,  she  died  of  mere  trouble  and 
anguish. 

10.  Why  is  she  called  Bloody  Mary  ?     11.  How  long  did  she  reigu? 


EUROPE. 


511 


QUEEN  ELIZABETH  AND  HER  COURT, 


CHAPTER  CXLYIIL— Europe    Continued. 


The  reign  of  Elizabeth. 

1.  The  famous  Elizabeth,  sister  to  tlie  Bloody 
Mary,  became  queen  in  1558.  She  was  a  Protestant, 
and  therefore  there  were  no  more  martyrdoms  in 
England. 

2.  Elizabeth  was  truly  a  great  queen,  and  England 
was  never  more  respected  than  while  this  mighty 
woman  held  the  sceptre  in  her  hand.  But  she  pos- 
sessed hardly  any  of  the  kind  of  virtues  that  a  woman 

Chapter  CXLVIII. — 1.  When  did  Elizabeth  ascend  the  throne  ?     What  was 
herreh'gion?     2,  What  of  her? 


512  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

ouglit  to  liave.     Yet  slie  prided  herself  greatly  on  her 
beauty. 

3.  Many  princes  and  great  men  desired  to  marry 
Elizabeth ;  but  she  chose  to  remain  sole  mistress  of 
her  person  and  her  kingdom.  And  as  she  herself  re- 
fused to  take  a  husband,  it  made  her  very  angry 
whenever  any  of  the  ladies  of  her  court  got  mar- 
ried. 

4.  Philip  the  Second  of  Spain  asked  her  hand  in 
marriage.  On  her  refusal,  he  sent  his  Invincible 
Armada  to  invade  England.  But  a  storm  destroyed 
part  of  the  ships,  and  the  English  fleet  conquered  the 
remainder,  as  I  have  already  told  you. 

5.  Some  of  the  actions  of  queen  Elizabeth  were  al- 
most as  bad  as  those  of  old  Harry,  her  father.  When 
Mary,  the  beautiful  queen  of  Scots,  fled  into  England 
for  protection,  she  caused  her  to  be  imprisoned  eighteen 
years.  And  after  those  long  and  weary  years,  the  poor 
queen  was  tried  and  condemned  to  die. 

6.  Elizabeth  Avas  resolved  upon  her  death,  but  she 
was  loth  to  incur  the  odium  of  such  a  crime.  She 
therefore  endeavored  to  persuade  the  jailer  to  murder 
her.     But  as  he  steadfastly  refused,  Elizabeth  signed 

3.  Why  did  she  not  marry?  What  made  her  angry?  4.  What  of  Philip  of 
Spain  ?  What  of  the  Invincible  Armada?  5.  What  was  one  of  the  worst  actions 
of  queen  Elizabeth  ?     6.  What  was  the  fate  of  Mary,  queen  of  Scots  ? 


EUROPE.  51 B 

tlie  death-warrant,  and  the  unfortunate  Mary  was  be» 
headed. 

7.  When  queen  Elizabeth  grew  old,  she  could  not 
bear  to  look  at  her  gray  hairs,  and  withered  and 
wrinkled  visage,  in  a  glass.  Her  maids  of  hono^:, 
therefore,  had  all  the  trouble  of  dressing  her.  Pai  *; 
of  their  business  was  to  paint  her  face.  The  queen 
of  course,  expected  them  to  make  her  cheeks  look  red 
and  rosy. 

8.  But,  instead  of  putting  the  red  paint  on  her 
cheeks,  these  mischievous  maids  of  honor  used  some- 
times to  put  it  all  upon  her  nose.  So  they  set  this  great 
queen  on  her  throne,  in  the  presence  of  her  court,  with 
her  nose  as  bright  as  if  it  had  caught  fire. 

9.  The  courtiers  often  made  a  fool  of  Elizabeth  by 
pretending  to  be  in  love  mth  her,  even  when  she  was 
old  enough  to  be  their  grandmother.  Among  others, 
the  earl  of  Essex  paid  his  addresses  to  her,  and  became 
her  chief  favorite.  But,  at  last,  he  oifended  her,  and 
was  sentenced  to  lose  his  head. 

10.  When  the  earl  of  Essex  was  dead  and  gone, 
queen  Elizabeth  bitterly  repented  of  her  cruelty.  She 
was  now  very  old,  and  she  knew  that  nobody  loved 
her,  and  there  were  none  that  she  could  love.  She  pined 

7,  8.  What  trick  did  the  maids  of  honor  put  upon  queen  Elizabeth  ?  9.  What 
of  the  earl  of  Essex  ?     10.  How  did  Elizabeth  feel  after  his  death  ? 


514  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

away,  and  never  held  up  lier  head  again ',  and  in  her 
seventietli  year  slie  died. 

11.  Tlie  bishops,  and  the  wise  and  learned  men  of 
her  court,  came  to  look  at  her  dead  body.  They  were 
sad,  for  they  doubted  whether  England  would  ever  be 
so  prosperous  again,  as  while  it  was  under  the  govern- 
ment of  this  mighty  queen.  And,  in  truth,  of  all  the 
monarchs  who  have  held  the  sceptre  since  that  day, 
there  has  not  been  one  who  could  sway  it  like  the 
gray-haired  woman,  whose  spirit  had  now  passed  into 
eternity. 

]  1.  How  did  the  great  men  of  the  court  feel  whea   tbej  saw  Elizabeth's  dead 
body  ?     Wiiat  may  be  said  of  her  government  ? 


EUROPE. 


15 


DRESSES  IN  THE  TIME  OF  JAMES  I. 

CHAPTER  CXLIX.— Europe  Continued. 
Accession  of  the  House  of  Stuart. 

i.  Elizabeth  was  succeeded  by  James  Stuart,  king 
of  Scotland.  He  was  tlie  sixth  James  that  had  ruled 
over  that  kingdom,  but  was  James  the  First  of  England. 
He  began  to  reign  in  1603.  James  inherited  the  Eng- 
lish crown,  because  he  was  the  grandson  of  a  daughter 
of  Henry  the  Seventh.  His  mother  was  Mary,  queen 
of  Scots,  whom  Elizabeth  had  beheaded. 

2.  The   whole   island    of    Great   Britain   was   now 


Chapter  CXLIX. — 1.  When  did  James  I.  begin  to  reign  ?    Who  was  be  ? 


516  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

under  tlie  same  governmeiit.  This  event  put  an  end 
to  the  wars  wliicli  had  raged  between  England  and 
Scotland  during  many  centuries.  But  it  was  a  long 
time  before  the  English  and  Scotch  could  live  together 
like  brethren. 

3.  As  for  king  James,  he  was  much  fitter  for  a 
schoolmaster  than  for  a  king.  He  had  a  good  deal 
of  learning,  and  ^vi'ote- several  books.  He  delighted  to 
talk  Hebrew,  and  Greek,  and  Latin  ;  and  his  courtiers 
were  often  puzzled  to  understand  him. 

4.  James  thought  himself  as  wdse  as  Solomon ;  and 
it  must  be  owned  that  he  possessed  a  sort  of  cunning, 
which  greatly  resembled  wisdom.  This  was  seen  in 
his  discovery  of  the  Gunpowder  Plot.  The  Koman 
Catholics  had  laid  a  plan  to  blow  up  the  parliament 
house,  at  a  time  when  the  king,  the  lords,  and  all  the 
members  of  parliament,  would  be  assembled  there.  If 
it  had  succeeded,  the  whole  government  of  England 
would  have  been  destroyed. 

5.  But  king  James  smelt  out  the  plot.  He  set 
people  on  the  watch,  and  they  caught  a  man  by  the 
name  of  Guy  Fawkes,  in  a  cellar,  where  thii'ty-six 
barrels  of  gunpowder  w^ere  concealed.      Fawkes  told 

2.  What  put  an  end  to  the  wars  between  England  and  Scotland  ?  3.  What  of  king 
j'ames?  4.  What  plot  had  the  Roman  Catholics  laid?  5.  IIow  did  James  dis- 
cover the  plot?    What  of  Guy  Fawkes ? 


EUROPE.  517 

the  king  tlie  names  of  eighty  of  liis  accomplices.     He 
and  tliey  were  all  put  to  death. 

6.  James  had  one  good  quality  which  kings  have 
not  very  often  possessed.  He  hated  war.  His  reign, 
was  therefore  peaceable.  He  died  in  1625,  and  was, 
succeeded  by  Charles  the  First,  his  son. 

7.  It  was  easy  to  foresee  that  this  king  would  have 
a  more*  troublesome  reign  than  his  father.  There  were 
now  many  Puritans  in  England.  These  people  were 
opposed  to  the  Church  of  England,  to  the  bishops,  and 
to  all  the  ceremonies  which  had  not  been  cast  off  when 
the  E,oman  Catholic  faith  was  abolished. 

8.  They  likewise  thought  that  the  kings  of  England 
had  too  much  power.  They  were  determined  that, 
thenceforward,  the  king  should  not  reign  merely  for  his 
own  pleasure  and  glory,  but  for  the  good  of  the  people. 
Charles,  on  the  other  hand,  seemed  to  think  that  the 
common  people  were  created  only  that  kings  might 
have  subjects  to  rule  over. 

9.  In  the  early  part  of  his  reign,  the  king  persecuted 
the  Puritans.  He  would  not  allow  the  Puritan  minis- 
ters to  preach,  nor  the  people  to  attend  their  meetings. 
Their  sufferings  were  great,  although  the  king  dared 

6.  What  good  quality  did  James  possess?     "When  did  he  die?     "Who  succeeded 
him?     T.  What  of  the  Puritans ?     8.  What  did  they  think ?    What  of  Charles? 
9.  How  did  he  treat  the  Puritans  ? 


518  UNIYEESAL  HISTORY. 

not  burn  them,  as  tlie  bloody  queen  Mary  would  liave 
done. 

10.  Many  of  tliem  crossed  the  ocean,  and  sought  re- 
ligious freedom  in  New  England.  John  Hampden, 
John  Pym,  and  Oliver  Cromwell,  were  once  on  the 
point  of  coming  to  this  country.  But  the  king  pre- 
vented them,  and  these  three  persons  afterward  became 
his  most  powerful  enemies. 


CHAPTER   CL.— Europe   Continued. 
Wars  of  the  King  and  Parliament 

1.  Till  the  reign  of  Charles  the  First,  the  English 
parliament  had  hai^dly  ever  dared  to  oppose  the  wishes 
of  the  king.  But  now  there  were  continual  disputes 
between  the  king  and  parliament ;  and  if  Charles  dis- 
solved one  parliament,  the  next  was  sure  to  be  still 
more  obstinate. 

2.  Matters  went  on  in  this  way,  till  at  length  the 
quarrel  grew  too  violent  to  be  settled  by  mere  words. 
Both  parties  then  betook  themselves  to  their  weapons. 
The  king  was  supported  by  a  great  majority  of  the 

10.  Wliat  did  many  of  them  do?     "What  of  three  principal  enemies  of  Charles? 
Chapter  CL. — 1.  What  of  the  parliaments  during  the  reign  of  Charles  I.  ? 


EUROPE.  619 

lords  and  gentlemen  of  England  and  Scotland,  and  by 
all  tlie  bishops  and  clergy  of  the  English  church.  All 
the  gay  and  wild  young  men  in  the  kingdom  likewise 
drew  their  swords  for  the  crown.  The  whole  of  king 
Charles'  party  were  called  cavaliers. 

3.  Some  of  the  noblemen  and  gentry  took  the  side 
of  the  parliament;  but  its  adherents  were  chiefly 
mechanics,  tradesmen,  and  common  people.  Because 
their  hair  was  cropped  close  to  their  skulls,  their 
enemies  gave  them  the  nickname  of  roundheads.  The 
cavaliers  dressed  magnificently,  and  wore  long  hair, 
hanging  in  love-locks  down  their  temples.  They  drank 
wine,  and  sang  songs,  and  rode  merrily  to  the  battle- 
field. 

4.  The  roundheads  wore  steeple-crowned  hats  and 
sad-colored  garments.  They  sang  nothing  but  psalms, 
and  spent  much  of  their  leisure  time  in  praying  and 
hearing  sermons.  They  were  a  stern  and  resolute  set 
of  men,  and  when  once  they  had  made  up  their  minds 
to  tear  down  the  throne,  it  must  be  done,  thouorh  the 
realm  of  England  should  be  rent  asunder  in  the 
struggle. 

5.  The  civil  war  between  the  cavaliers  and  round- 

2.  How  was  the  king  supported?  What  were  the  king's  party  called  ?  3.  Who 
took  the  part  of  the  parliament?  Describe  the  cavaliers.  4.  What  of  the 
roundheads  ? 

23 


520  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

heads  began  in  1642.     Many  battles  were  foiiglit,  and 
rivers  of  English  blood  were  shed  on  both  sides. 

6.  It  was  not  long  before  Oliver  Cromwell  began  to 
be  a  famous  leader,  on  the  side  of  the  parliament.  He 
pretended  to  fight  only  for  religion  and  the  good  of  the 
people.  But  he  was  an  ambitious  man,  and  meant  to 
place  himself  in  the  king's  seat  when  it  became  emi)tj. 

7.  Cromwell  gained  one  battle  after  another,  and 
rose  from  step  to  step,  till  there  was  no  man  so  power- 
ful and  renowned  as  he.  Finally,  in  1645,  he  defeated 
the  king's  army  at  the  bloody  battle  of  Naseby.  King 
Charles  afterward  surrendered  himself  to  the  Scots, 
and  they  delivered  him  to  the  parliament. 

8.  The  parliament  brought  the  king  to  trial  as  a 
traitor.  The  court  that  tried  him  consisted  of  a  hun- 
dred and  thirty-three  persons.  They  declared  him 
guilty,  and  sentenced  him  to  lose  his  head.  When 
the  people  of  England  .  heard  the  sentence,  they 
trembled. 

9.  For  it  was  a  great  and  terrible  thing,  that  their 
anointed  sovereign  should  die  the  death  of  a  traitor. 
Many  kings,  it  is  true,  had  died  by  the  hands  of  their 
enemies,  but  it  had  always  been  in  darkness  and  se- 

5.  What  war  began  iu  1642  ?  6.  What  of  Oliver  Cromwell  ?  7.  When  was  the 
battle  of  Naseby  fought  ?  8.  What  was  done  to  king  Charles  ?  9.  How  did  the 
people  feel  when  he  was  sentenced  to  death? 


EUROPE.  521 

crecy.     But  king  Cliaiies  was  tried  and  condemned  in 
tlie  face  of  all  the  worid. 

10.  On  tlie  tliirtieth  of  January,  1649,  they  brought 
the  king  from  his  palace  to  the  scaffold.  It  was  cov- 
ered with  black  cloth.  In  the  centre  of  the  scaffold 
stood  a  block,  and  by  the  block  stood  an  executioner, 
with  an  axe  in  his  hand,  and  a  black  mask  over  •'his 
face. 

11.  The  steel-clad  soldiers  of  Cromwell  surrounded 
the  scaffold.  But  the  kino^  walked  to  his  death  with 
as  firm  a  step  as  when  he  went  to  his  coronation. 
"  They  have  taken  away  my  corruptible  crown,"  said 
he,  "-but  I  go  to  receive  an  incorruptible  one." 

12.  When  king  Charles  had  knelt  down  and  prayed, 
he  cast  a  pitying  glance  upon  the  people  round  the 
scaffold;  for  he  feared  that  direful  judgments  would 
come  upon  the  land  which  was  now  to  be  stained  with 
its  monarch's  blood. 

13.  But,  as  he  saw  that  his  enemies  were  resolved 
to  slay  him,  he  calmly  laid  his  head  upon  the  block. 
The  executioner  raised  his  axe,  and  smote  off  the  king's 
head  at  a  single  blow.  Then,  lifting  it  in  his  hand,  he 
cried  aloud — "  This  is  the  head  of  a  traitor !"  But  the 
people  shuddered;  for  they  doubted  whether  it  was 

10.  Describe  the  execution  of  Cliarles  I.     In  what  year  did  it  take  place? 


522  UNIVERSAL  HISTORT. 

tlie  head,  of  a  traitor,  and  they  knew  tliat  it  was  the 
head  of  a  king. 


CJIAPTEE  CLI.— Europe   Continued. 
The  Protectorate  and  the  Restoration. 

1.  Aisjy  now  the  throne  of  England  was  empty. 
The  king,  indeed,  had  left  a  son,  but  if  he  had  shown 
himself  in.  London,  he  would  soon  have  died  the  same 
death  as  his  father.  The  young  prince  was  defeated 
in  battle,  and  compelled  to  flee.  At  one  time,  his 
enemies  pressed  him  so  hard,  that  he  climbed  up 
among  the  thick  branches  of  an  oak,  and  thus  saved 
his  life. 

2.  The  government,  at  this  period,  was  called  a 
republic.  There  was  no  king,  no  lords,  no  bishops, 
nothing  but  the  House  of  Commons,  or  the  lower 
house  of  parliament.  All  the  real  power  of  the  king- 
dom was  possessed  by  Oliver  Cromwell,  because  he 
was  at  the  head  of  the  army. 

3.  !N'o  sooner  did  the  parliament  dare  to  oppose 
CromwelFs  wishes,  than  he  led  three  hundred  soldiers 

Chapter  CLI. — 1.  What  of  king  Charles' son?     2.  What  was  the  governKjent 
■jailed  at  this  time  ?     WU^  had  all  the  power  ? 


EUROPE.  523 

into  tlie  hall  where  they  were  sitting.  He  told  the 
parliament  men  that  they  were  a  pack  of  traitors,  and 
bade  them  get  out  of  the  house.  When  they  were 
gone,  he  summoned  another  parliament.  The  princi- 
pal man  in  it  was  called  Praise-God  Barebones.  This 
name  sounded  so  well  that  it  was  bestowed  on  the 
whole  parliament. 

4.  But  Praise-God  Barebones'  parliament  did  not 
keep  together  a  great  while.  At  the  end  of  five 
months  they  besought  Cromwell  to  send  them  about 
their  business,  and  take  the  government  into  his  own 
hands.     This  was  just  what  Cromwell  wanted. 

5.  In  1654,  he  was  proclaimed  Lord  Protector  of 
the  Commonwealth  of  England.  He  held  this  high 
office  four  years.  He  was  a  sagacious  and  powerful 
ruler,  and  made  himself  feared  and  respected,  both  in 
England  and  foreign  countries. 

6.  But  he  had  no  peace  nor  quiet  as  long  as  he 
lived.  He  constantly  wore  iron  armor  under  his 
clothes,  dreading  that  some  of  his  enemies  would  at- 
tempt to  stab  him.  He  never  enjoyed  any  quiet 
sleep,  for  the  thought  always  haunted  him,  that  con- 


3.  Describe  the  dispersing  of  the  parh'araent  by  Cromwell.  What  parliament  was 
then  called?  4.  What  of  it?  5.  When  was  Cromwell  proclaimed  Lord  Pfo- 
tector?  How  long  did  he  hold  the  office?  What  was  his  character?  6.  What  fe«.rs 
deprived  him  of  peace  ? 


524  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

spirators  miglit  be  hidden  in  tlie  closet  or  nnder  the 
bed. 

Y.  Cromwell  was  released  from  this  miserable  way 
of  life  by  a  slow  fever,  of  which  he  died  in  1658,  at  the 
age  of  fifty-niner  His  son  Richard  succeeded  him  in 
the  office  of  Lord  Protector;  but  he  had  not  ability 
enough  to  keep  the  kingdom  in  subjection. 

8.  Kichard  Cromwell  soon  resigned  his  office,  and 
the  government  then  became  unsettled.  The  people 
began  to  think  that  England  would  never  be  prosper- 
ous again,  unless  the  hereditary  sovereigns  were  re- 
established on  the  throne. 

9.  The  man  who  had  most  influence  in  the  army, 
after  Oliver  Cromwell's  death,  was  General  George 
Monk.  He  invited  the  eldest  son  of  Charles  the  First 
to  return  to  England,  promising  that  the  soldiers  would 
assist  in  making  him  king. 

10.  The  banished  prince  had  been  living  in  different 
parts  of  Europe,  and  was  reduced  to  great  poverty.  He 
lost  no  time  in  coming  to  England,  and  entered  London 
in  triumph.  At  sight  of  their  new  king,  it  seemed  as 
if  the  people  were  mad  with  joy.  He  w^as  crowned  in 
1660,  by  the  title  of  Charles  the  Second. 

7.  When  did  he  die  ?  Who  succeeded  him?  8.  What  of  Richard  Cromwell? 
9.  What  did  General  Monk  do?  10.  Wliat  of  thu  banished  prince?  When  was 
Cliarles  II.  crowned  ? 


EUROPE.  525 

11.  Many  of  tlie  persons  who  liacl  assisted  in  de- 
throning and  beheading  the  king's  father  were  hanged. 
The  body  of  Oliver  Cromwell  was  taken  out  of  the 
grave,  and  hung  upon  the  gallows,  and  afterward 
buried  beneath  it.  Yet  it  would  have  been  well  for 
England,  if  that  stern  but  valiant  ruler  could  have 
come  to  life  again. 


CHAPTER  CLII.— Europe  Continued. 
The   Revolution  of  1688,  and  other  matters. 

1.  Chaeles  the  Second  had  lived  a  careless  and 
vicious  life  during  his  banishment,  and  his  habits  did 
not  improve,  now  that  he  was  on  the  throne.  He 
spent  whole  days  and  nights  in  drinking  wine,  and  in 
all  sorts  of  profligate  pleasures. 

2.  In  the  year  1665,  there  was  a  great  plague  in 
London,  of  which  nearly  a  hundred  thousand  persons 
died.  The  next  year,  a  terrible  iire  broke  out,  which 
consumed  a  great  part  of  the  city.  But  neither  of 
these  calamities  made  any  impression  on  the  king. 

11.  What-of  the  body  of  Cromwell? 

Chapter  CLII.— 1.  What  of  Charles  II.  daring  his  banishment?     2.  What  of 
the  plague?     What  of  the  great  fire? 


526  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

3.  He  suffered  tlie  nation  to  he  ruled  by  unprincipled 
and  wicked  men.  It  was  safer  to  be  wicked,  in  those 
days,  tkan  to  be  virtuous  and  upright.  Virtue  and  re- 
ligion were  looked  upon  as  treason,  in  the  reign  of 
Charles  the  Second.  This  good-for-nothing  monarch 
died,  in  the  midst  of  his  drunkenness  and  debauchery, 
in  the  year  1685.  His  brother  succeeded  him,  and  was 
called  James  the  Second. 

4.  James  was  a  Roman  Catholic ;  and,  from  the  mo- 
ment that  he  ascended  the  throne,  he  thought  of  noth- 
ing but  how  to  bring  Great  Britain  again  under  the 
power  of  the  pope  of  Rome.  This  project  rendered 
him  hateful  to  his  subjects. 

5.  He  had  not  been  on  the  throne  more  than  three 
years,  when  some  of  the  greatest  men  in  England  de- 
termined to  get  rid  of  him.  They  invited  William, 
prince  of  Orange,  to  come  over  from  Holland  and  be 
their  king. 

6.  This  prince  had  no  title  to  the  crown,  except  that 
he  had  married  the  daughter  of  James  H.  But  no 
sooner  had  he  landed  in  England,  tlian  all  the  courtiers 
left  king  James,  and  hurried  to  pay  obeisance  to  the 

3.  "What  was  the  state  of  morals  and  religion  during  this  reign  ?  When  did  Charles 
die  ?  Who  succeeded  him  ?  4.  AVhat  did  James  wish  to  do  ?  5.  What  did  some 
of  the  great  men  do?  Whom  did  they  invite  from  Holland?  6.  "What  title  had 
"William  to  the  throne?     When  was  lie  crowned?     What  of  king  James? 


EUROPE.  527 

prince  of  Orange.  He  and  liis  wife  were  crowned  in 
1689,  as  king  William  and  queen  Mary.  James  made 
his  escape  into  France.  Some  of  his  adherents  en- 
deavored to  set  him  on  the  throne  again,  but  without 
success. 

7.  This  change  of  government  of  which  I  have  been 
speaking,  is  generally  called  the  glorious  Revolution  of 
1688.  Some  regulations  were  now  adopted,  in  order 
to  restrain  the  royal  power. 

8.  King  William  was  very  fond  of  hunting,  and  this 
amusement  hastened  his  death.  He  was  thrown  from 
his  horse,  in  the  year  1702,  and  died  in  about  a  month. 
His  queen  had  died  some  years  before  him. 

9.  Anne,  another  daughter  of  the  banished  James, 
now  ascended  the  throne.  The  reign  of  this  queen  was 
a  glorious  one  for  England.  The  renowned  duke  of 
Marlborough  gained  many  splendid  victories  over  the 
French.  But  the  chief  glory  of  the  age  proceeded 
from  the  great  writers  who  lived  in  ber  time. 

10.  Queen  Anne  reigned  twelve  years,  and  died  in 
1714,  at  the  age  of  forty-nine.  She  was  the  last  sove- 
reign of  England  who  belonged  to  the  family  of  the 

1.  What  of  the  Revolution  of  1688?  8.  When  did  William  die?  9.  What  of 
Anne?  Her  reign?  What  of  the  duke  of  Marlborough?  What  was  the  cliief 
glory  of  Anne's  reign?  10.  When  did  Anne  die?  When  did  the  Stuarts  begin 
to  reign? 


528  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

Stuarts,  whicli,  as  you  remember,  began  to  reign  in 
England  in  1603. 


CHAPTEE  CLIII.— Europe  Continued. 
Che   Hanoverian   Kings   of  Great    Britain. 

1.  The  old  banished  king  James  had  died  in  France, 
in  the  year  1701.  He  left  a  son,  whom  Louis  the 
Fourteenth  caused  to  be  proclaimed  king  of  England. 
But  the  English  people  called  him  the  Pretender. 
They  were  determined  not  to  have  a  Roman  Catholic 
king.  The  nearest  Protestant  heir  to  the  throne  was 
the  elector  of  Hanover,  a  German  prince,  whose  mother 
was  a  grand-daughter  of  James  the  First.  He  was  now 
about  fifty-five  years  old. 

2.  This  old  German  elector  was  proclaimed  king  of 
England,  by  the  title  of  George  the  First.  With  him 
began  the  dynasty  of  the  House  of  Hanover,  the  de- 
scendants of  which  still  (1860)  occupy  the  throne. 
He  could  not  speak  a  word  of  English,  and  knew  noth- 
ing about  the  kingdom  which  he  was  to  govern. 

Chapter  CLIII. — 1,  "When  and  where  had  James  II.  died?  What  did  the 
Enghsh  people  call  James'  son?  Who  was  the  nearest  heir  to  the  throne? 
2.  WJ\o  was  George  I.  ?     What  of  him  ? 


EUROPE,  529 

3.  He  spent  mucli  of  liis  time  in  his  native  country, 
for  lie  dearly  loved  Hanover,  and  could  never  feel  at 
home  in  the  palace  of  the  English  kings.  He  died  in 
1727,  and  was  succeeded  by  his  son,  George  the  Second, 
who  was  likewise  a  native  of  Grermany. 

4.  During  part  of  George  the  Second's  reign,  Eng- 
land was  at  war  with  Spain  and  France.  The  king 
commanded  his  army  in  person.  The  English  were 
victorious  in  the  battle  of  Dettingen,  but  they  lost  the 
battle  of  Fontenoy. 

5.  In  1745,  the  grandson  of  James  the  Second  at- 
tempted to  win  back  the  crown  of  his  ancestors.  He 
landed  in  Scotland,  and  marched  into  England  with  a 
small  army  of  Scottish  mountaiijeers.  But  he  was  at 
last  defeated,  and  forced  to  fly ;  and  many  of  his  ad- 
herents were  beheaded  or  hanged. 

6.  In  1755,  another  war  began  between  the  French 
and  English,  and  some  of  their  principal  battles  were 
fought  in  America.  The  city  of  Quebec  and  the  Can- 
adas  were  conquered  by  the  English  during  this  war. 
Shortly  after  this  event,  George  the  Second  died,  at  the 
age  of  seventy-seven. 


3.  When  did  George  II.  come  to  the  throne?  4.  With  what  countries  was 
England  at  war  during  his  reign?  "What  battle  did  the  English  gain  ?  What  did 
they  lose?  5.  What  took  place  in  1745  ?  G.  What  of  the  war  in  1755?  What 
of  Quebec  and  the  Canadas? 


530  UNIYERSAL  HISTORY. 

1,  His  grandson,  George  tlie  Tliird,  began  to  reign 
in  1760,  when  lie  was  about  twenty-one  years  old.  No 
king  ever  ascended  the  throne  with  better  prospects. 
Yet  so  many  misfortunes  befell  him,  that  it  would  have 
been  far  better  for  him  to  have  died  on  his  coronation 
day. 

8.  George  the  Third  was  a  man  of  respectable  com- 
mon sense.  In  his  j^rivate  conduct  he  was  much  better 
than  the  generality  of  kings.  But  he  was  very  obsti- 
nate, and  often  would  not  take  the  advice  of  men  wiser 
than  himself.  Had  he  done  so,  it  is  probable  that  the 
American  Revolution  would  not  have  happened  in  his 
reign. 

9.  I  shall  speak  of^this  great  event  hereafter.  The 
loss  of  America,  together  with  many  other  troubles, 
contributed  to  drive  George  the  Third  to  madness. 
His  first  fit  of  derangement  happened  in  1788,  and 
lasted  several  months. 

10.  In  1804,  he  had  another  turn,  and  a  third  in 
1810.  From  this  latter  period,  he  continued  a  mad- 
man till  his  dying  day.  While  the  armies  of  England 
were  gaining  glorious  victories,  and  grand  events  were 
continually  taking  place,  the  poor  old  crazy  king  knew 
nothing   of   the   matter.      Death   released   him    from 

7.  "Wheo  iid  Greorge  III.  bejrin  to  reigu?     8.  Character  of  Greorge  III.?     9. 
What  hap[  inedto  bun?     10.  What  of  his  insanity?     When  did  he  die? 


EUROPE,  531 

tliis  miserable  condition,  in  the  eiglity-second  }^ear  of 
liis  age. 

11.  Tlie  son  of  the  old  king  was  very  wild  in  liis 
youtli,  and  lie  never  became  a  really  good  man.  He 
liad  been  declared  Prince  Regent  in  consequence  of  liis 
father's  insanity.  In  1820,  lie  Avas  crowned  as  king 
Georo-e  tlie  Fourth. 

12.  Even  when  he  was  quite  an  old  man,  this  king 
cared  as  much  about  dress  as  any  young  coxcoml).  He 
had  a  great  deal  of  taste  in  such  matters,  and  it  is  a 
pity  that  he  was  a  king,  because  he  might  otherwise 
have  been  an  excellent  tailor. 

13.  During  his  regency,  England  combatted  the 
power  of  Bonaparte.  By  her  gigantic  power,  aided  by 
the  other  kingdoms  of  Europe,  that  famous  conqueror 
was  finally  overthrown.  The  only  event  of  George 
IV.'s  reign  worth  recording  here,  was  the  admission  of 
Catholics  to  sit  in  Parliament. 

14.  The  king  died  in  1830,  and  was  succeeded  l)y 
his  brother,  William  IV.  This  reign  is  remarkable  in 
British  history  as  having  been  the  only  one  in  which 
the  country  was   not   engaged  in  some   foreign   war. 

11.  When  was  George  TV.  crowned?  12.  "What  of  his  taste  in  dress?  13.  TThat 
events  took  place  during  his  regency?  His  reign?  14.  When  did  George  IV. 
die  ?  Who  succeeded  him  ?  For  what  is  this  reign  remarkable  ?  When  did 
William  IV.  die  ?     Who  succeeded  him  ? 


532  *  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

William  IV.  died  in   1837,  and  was  succeeded  by  his 
niece,  Victoria  I. 

15.  Queen  Victoria,  wlio  is  still  (1860)  upon  tlie 
throne,  lias  obtained  the  admiration  of  the  world  for 
her  domestic  virtues,  and  the  honorable  character  of 
her  administration.  England  has  been  prosperous 
during  her  reign,  though  wars  in  Afghanistan,  China, 
the  Punjaub,  and  the  Crimea,  and  a  rebellion  in  Can- 
ada, have  consumed  immense  sums  of  money,  and 
sacrificed  hundreds  of  thousands  of  lives.  In  1860, 
Victoria's  eldest  son,  the  prince  of  Wales,  visited  Can- 
ada and  the  United  States. 


CHAPTER  CLIY.— Europe  Continued. 
The  Story  of  Wales. 

1.  If  you  ever  go  to  Wales  and  mingle  with  the 
people,  you  will  hardly  believe  that  you  are  in  any 
part  of  Great  Britain.  The  names  of  the  inhabitants 
are  very  different  from  English  names.  What  do  you 
think  of  Mr.  Llewellyn  ap  Griffith  ap  Jones,  and  Mrs. 


15.  What  of  (inoon  Victoria?  What  of  wars?     What  of  the  prince  of  Wales? 
Chapter  CLIV. — 1    What  of  the  names  in  Walc;i  ? 


EUROPE.  533 

Catesby  ap  Catesby  ?     Yet  sucli  names  are  common  in 
Wales. 

2.  Some  of  tlie  people  speak  Englisli,  but  most  of 
tliem  use  the  same  language  tliat  was  spoken  by  their 
ancestors.  It  is  nearly  the  same  as  the  original  lan- 
guage of*  Ireland  and  the  Highlands  of  Scotland. 
This  seems  to  show  that  the  people  are  of  the  same 
stock  as  the  Irish  and  the  Scotch  Highlanders. 

3.  The  early  history  of  Wales  is  involved  in  obscu- 
rity. When  the  Romans  came  to  Britain,  the  Welsh 
mountains  were  inhabited  by  a  rough  set  of  people, 
who  gave  terrible  blows  with  their  clubs.  These  de- 
fended their  mountains  so  fiercely,  that  the  Komans 
never  got  possession  of  the  country. 

4.  When  the  Saxons  came,  they  subdued  all  Eng- 
land, and  a  small  portion  of  Wales ;  but  the  greater 
part  held  out  against  them  to  the  last.  Thus  the 
Welsh  princes  maintained  their  independence,  as  well 
ajxainst  the  Roman  as  the  Saxon  invaders.  These 
princes  appear  to  have  lived  in  strong  stone  castles, 
which,  in  time  of  war,  were  defended  by  the  people 
around  them.     The  ruins  of  some  of  these  castles  are 

still  to  be  seen. 

« . — , ^ — — 

2.  Their  language  ?  Of  what  stock  are  the  Welsh  people  ?  3.  What  of  the 
early  historj  of  Wales  ?  The  ancient  inhabitants  ?  4.  What  of  the  Saxons  ? 
What  of  the  Welsh  princes? 


534  '-  UNIYERSAL  HISTORY. 

5.  In  tliese  ancient  times  tliere  was  a  strange  set  of 
men  in  AVales,  called  bards.  These  sang  songs  and 
told  stories  about  tlie  brave  deeds  of  tlie  Welsli 
princes  and  lieroes.  The  people  loved  to  listen  to 
these  men,  for  their  tales  related  to  fierce  wars  and 
bloody  battles,  of  which  such  rude  nations  are  ever 
fond. 

6.  Some  of  these  bards  had  a  wonderful  gift  for 
singing  and  story-telling.  These  were  often  taken  into 
the  castles  of  the  princes,  and  here  they  led  a  meiTy 
life,  between  singing  and  feasting.  In  order  to  keep 
up  their  influence,  they  pretended  to  be  ];)rophets,  and 
both  the  people  and  the  princes  believed  they  could 
foretell  future  events.  Perhaps,  too,  the  bards  believed 
it  themselves,  for  nothing  is  more  easy  than  self-decep- 
tion. At  all  events,  the  people  paid  them  the  greatest 
reverence. 

7.  There  is  nothing  so  troublesome  to  a  king  as  a 
tribe  of  people  maintaining  theii*  independence  in  his 
neighborhood.  His  pride  is  mortified,  his  indignation 
roused,  by  seeing  people  thus  set  up  for  themselves. 
He  thinks  everybody  ought  to  bow  to  jDower,  and  feels 
toward  them  very  much  as  an  old  hunter  does  toward 
a  family  of  wolves  or  foxes,  that  pei*sist  in  li\dng  among 


G.  "Wliat  of  tlie  bards?     1.  What  is  very  troublesome, to  a  king? 


EUROPE.  ^       535 

tlie  rocks  near  liim,  in  spite   of  all  Ms  efforts  to  kill 
them. 

8.  So  it  was  with  tlie  kings  of  England  with  regard 
to  Wales.  With  a  view,  therefore,  to  subdue  these 
Welsh  wolves  and  foxes  of  the  mountains,  they  sent  a 
great  many  armies  against  them.  But  the  mountaineers 
were  too  cunning  to  be  caught,  until  about  the  year 
1285.  Edward  First  was  then  king  of  England,  and 
Llewellyn  prince  of  Wales. 

9.  The  bards  were  always  great  lovers  of  hard  fight- 
ing, and  therefore  they  incited  the  Welsh  princes  to  the 
boldest  deeds.  Llewellyn  had  been  told  by  one  of 
these  bards  that  he  should  become  master  of  the  whole 
island  of  Britain. 

10.  Accordingly,  when  the  forces  of  Edward  First 
came  against  him,  he  rashly  led  his  little  army  against 
the  English,  and  was  defeated  and  slain.  He  was  suc- 
ceeded by  his  brother  David,  but  he  too  was  taken  and 
hung  on  a  gibbet,  for  the  crime  of  bravely  defending 
his  country. 

11.  King  Edward  was  very  angry  at  the  bards  for 
stirring  up  the  people  to  resist  his  arms.  He  therefore 
caused  them  a^ll  to  be  assembled   and  put  to  death. 

8,  What  did  the  kings  of  England  do?  Who  was  prince  of  Wales  in  1285? 
9.  What  did  the  bards  do?  What  did  one  of  them  tell  Llewellyn?  10.  What 
did  Llewellyn  do ?     His  fate?     Who  defeated  him ?     What  of  his  brother  David? 


536 


UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


These  acts  did  not  make  the  ting  a  favorite,  but  the 


TUK   FIRST   PIUNGK    OF   WALES 


next  king  vras  born  in  Wales,  and  received  the  title  of 
prince  of  Wales.     They  appear  to  have  liked  him  a 

11.  "What  did  king  Edward  do  to  the  bards?     Where  was  the  next  king  of 
England  born  ?     What  has  happened  from  this  time  ? 


EUROPE.  w     537 

little  better.     From  this  time,  tlie  eldest  son  of  the 
king  of  England  has  been  called  prince  of  Wales. 

12.  Thus,  with  the  death  of  David,  ended  the  line 
of  Welsh  princes,  and  thus  ended  the  independence  of 
Wales.  Since  that  time,  the  Welsh  have  been  a  part 
of  the  British  nation,  and  they  now  weave  stocking?, 
and  dig  coal  and  iron,  instead  of  fighting,  as  their 
fathers  did  in  the  times  of  Llewellyn. 

12.  Since  when  have  the  "Welsh  been  a  part  of  the  British  nation?      What 
of  the  "Welsh  people  now? 


538 


UNIYERSAL  HISTORY. 


EDINBURGH   CASTLE. 


CHAPTEE  CLY.— EuKorE    Continued. 
The  Story  of  Svotland. 

1.  The  first  inliabitants  of  Scotland  appear  to  have 
been  Celts,  and  probably  were  tlie  same  as  the  early 
Britons,  Welsh,  and  Irish.  They  defended  themselves 
against  the  Romans,  who  could  never  subdue  the 
people  of  the  Highlands.  They  were  so  troublesome 
that  the  Roman  generals  caused  a  wall  to  be  built  from 
the  Sol  way  Frith  to  the  river  Tyne. 

2.  Thus  the  Scots  were  shut  up  in  their  own  country, 
like  a  herd  of  unruly  cattle ;  but  they  contrived  to  get 

CiiAiTKU  CLV. — 1.  Wliat  of  tlio  iii'st  iahabitants  of  Scotlaud?     What  did  the 
Roman  ;?e!ieralrf  do  ? 


EUROPE.  w       539 

over  the  wall  pretty  often.  Three  or  four  hundred 
years  after  Christ,  a  tribe  of  Goths,  called  Picts,  came 
over  from  the  continent,  and  settled  in  this  country. 
These  inhabited  the  Lowlands,  and  lived  by  agricul- 
ture. The  Scots  dwelt  in  the  mountains,  carrying  on 
war,  and  subsisting  by  the  chase. 

3.  Thus  the  nation  became  divided  into  Highlanders 
and  Lowlanders,  and  thus,  to  some  extent,  the  peo23le 
remain  to  this  day.  They  live  peaceably  now,  but  in 
early  days,  they  quarrelled  with  great  fierceness.  I 
cannot  undertake  to  tell  you  of  their  battles,  and  indeed 
we  know  but  little  about  them. 

4.  In  839,  it  is  said  that  Kenneth  the  Second,  who 
was  a  Highland  leader,  subdued  the  Picts,  and  became 
the  first  king  of  all  Scotland.  From  his  time  to  that 
of  Edward  the  First  of  England,  there  were  a  good 
many  sovereigns,  but  their  story  is  not  worth  re- 
peating. 

5.  I  have  told  you  in  the  history  of  England  how 
Edward  Longshanks,  the  same  that  subdued  Wales, 
made  war  upon  the  Scotch,  imprisoned  Wallace,  and 
had  prepared  a  great  army  for  the  final  subjugation  of 
Scotland,  when  he  died.     I  have  told  you  how  his  son, 

2.  What  of  the  Picts?  The  Scots?  3.  How  was  the  nation  divided ?  How 
did  they  live  in  the  early  times?  4.  Who  was  king  of  Scotland  in  839  ?  5.  What 
can  you  tell  of  Edward  Longshanks  ?  Of  Edward  II.  ?  When  was  the  battle  of 
Bannockburn  ?    Its  eifects  ? 


540       •  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

Edward  tlie  Second,  was  beaten  by  Robert  Bruce  at  tlie 
glorious  battle  of  Bannockburn.  This  event  occurreo 
in  1313,  and  secured  the  freedom  of  Scotland,  whicL 
Lad  been  threatened  by  the  English  kings. 

6.  From  this  time,  the  history  of  Scotland  tells  of 
little  but  civil  wars  and  bloody  battles  with  England^ 
till  the  time  of  James  the  Fifth.  He  assumed  the  reins 
of  government  in  1513,  at  the  age  of  thirteen  years. 
Ke  lost  the  confidence  of  his  army,  and  they  deserted 
him  in  the  hour  of  need.  This  broke  his  heart, 
and  he  starved  himself  to  death,  at  the  age  of  thirty- 
one. 

T.  His  daughter  was  the  beautiful  and  unfortunate 
Mary,  queen  of  Scots,  as  she  is  called,  and  whom  I 
have  mentioned  in  the  history  of  England.  She  was 
educated  in  France,  and  w^as  not  only  very  handsome, 
but  she  was  very  accomplished.  While  she  was  yet  a 
young  lady,  she  was  taken  to  Scotland  and  became 
queen. 

8.  But  beauty,  accomjilishments,  and  power,  cannot 
insure  happiness.  Mary's  kingdom  was  in  a  state  of 
great  trouble ;  the  people  were  divided  among  them- 
selves, and  Mary  found  it  impossible  to  govern  them. 
At  length,  she  became  afraid  that  they  would  kill  her, 

6.  How  long  were  the  Scots  at  war  with  the  English  ?     When  did  James  V, 
begin  to  reign  ?     Hia  fate  ?     7-9.  Tull  the  story  of  Mary  of  Scotland. 


EUROPE.  •  541 

and,  to   save  lier  life,  slie  set  out   for  England,  and 
placed  herself  under  tlie  protection  of  Elizabeth. 

9.  This  was  about  as  wise  as  it  would  be  in  a  fly  to 
seek  protection  of  a  spider.  Elizabeth  treated  Mary 
very  much  as  a  spider  would  a  fly  that  falls  into  his 
power.  She  caused  her  to  be  put  in  prison,  and 
finally  took  her  life. 

10.  The  son  of  Mary,  James  Sixth  of  Scotland,  suc- 
ceeded his  mother,  and,  after  the  death  of  Elizabeth, 
became  king  of  England  also,  under  the  title  of  James 
First.  Though  he  lived  in  England,  he  did  not  forget 
Scotland.  He  loved  learning,  and  caused  schools  to  be 
established  in  his  native  country,  where  all  the  boys 
and  girls  might  learn  to  read  and  ^vrite.  These  schools 
are  continued  to  this  day,  and  therefore  it  is  very  un- 
common to  meet  with  a  Scotchman  who  is  not  a  fair 
match  for  a  Yankee. 

11.  From  the  time  of  king  James,  in  1603,  Scotland 
has  been  attached  to  the  British  crown.  She  has 
sometimes  rebelled,  and  in  the  cause  of  the  Stuarts 
she  fought  a  good  many  battles.  But  for  many  years 
Scotland  has  been  a  peaceful  portion  of  the  British 
kingdom. 

10.  Who  succeeded  Mary?  What  did  James  do  ?  11.  What  of  Scotland  since  1 G03  7 


;42 


UJSIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


SCENE   IN  DUBLIN. 

CHAPTER   CLYI.— EuKOPE   Continued. 
About  Ireland. 

1.  The  history  of  Ireland,  or  "  Green  Erin,"  as  it  is 
called,  is  full  of  interesting  matter,  and  I  am  sorry  that 
I  can  only  bestow  upon  it  one  brief  chapter.  The  first 
inhabitants,  like  the  Britons,  were  hard-fisted  Celts, 
who  fought  with  clubs,  and  seemed  to  love  fighting 
better  than  feasting. 

2.  They  were  divided  into  many  tribes,  and  their 
leaders   were   called   kings.      These   were   constantly 


Chapticr  CLVI. — 1.  "What  is  Ireland  called  ?    Who  were  its  first  inhabitants  ? 


EUROPE.  -  *  543 

quarrelling  witli  eacli  otlier,  and  thus  the  people  had 
plenty  of  their  favorite  sport.  The  early  Irish,  like 
the  other  Celtic  tribes,  were  devoted  to  the  religion 
of  the  druids,  but  about  the  year  550,  a  Christian 
missionary  came  into  the  country,  whose  name  was 
Patrick. 

3.  He  seems  to  have  been  a  wise  and  good  man,  and 
the  people  liked  him  very  much.  So  they  adopted 
Christianity,  and  under  its  influence  gradually  became 
somewhat  civilized.  Patrick  lived  to  a  great  age,  but 
at  lensfth  he  was  buried  at  Doune. 

4.  When  he  was  gone,  the  people  told  pretty  large 
stories  about  him,  and  finally  they  considered  him  more 
holy  than  any  other  man,  and  called  him  a  saint.  To 
this  day,  they  consider  St.  Patrick  as  in  heaven,  watch- 
ing over  the  interests  of  Ireland.  They  pray  to  him, 
and  to  do  him  honor,  set  apart  one  day  in  the  yes  r  for 
going  to  church,  drinking  whiskey,  and  breaking  each 
other's  heads  with  clubs. 

5.  Among  the  curious  notions  still  entertained  by 
the  Irish  with  regard  to  St.  Patrick,  is  this.  In  Ireland 
there  are  no  serpents,  or  venomous  reptiles,  and  the 


2.  What  of  the  Celts?  Religion  of  the  early  Irisli  ?  What  took  place  in  550  ? 
3.  What  of  Patrick  ?  What  influence  civilized  the  people  ?  4.  What  did  the 
people  think  "of  Patrick?  How  do  they  consider  him?  How  do  they  honor 
him  ?      5.  What  curious  notions  have  the  Irish  with  respect  to  St.  Patrick  ? 

24 


5  44  '  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

people  firmly  believe  that  St.  Patrick  put  an  end  to 
them,  and  freed  the  island  from  them  all  forever. 

6.  At  the  lake  of  Killarney,  the  peasants  still  pre- 
serve the  following  ludicrous  tradition.  When  the 
labors  of  St.  Patrick  were  dramng  to  a  close,  there 
was  one  enormous  serpent  who  sturdily  refused  to 
emigrate,  and  baffled  the  attempts  of  the  good  saint  for 
a  long  time. 

7.  He  haunted  the  romantic  shores  of  Killamey,  and 
was  so  well  pleased  with  his  place  of  residence,  that 
he  never  contemplated  the  prospect  of  removing,  with- 
out a  deep  sigh.  At  length,  St.  Patrick,  having  pro- 
cured a  large  oaken  chest  with  nine  strong  bolts  to 
secure  its  lid,  took  it  on  his  shoulder  one  fine  sun-shiny 
morning,  and  trudged  over  to  Killarney,  where  he  found 
the  serpent  basking  in  the  sun. 

8.  "  Good  morrow  to  ye !"  cried  the  saint.  "  Bad 
luck  to  ye !"  replied  the  serpent.  "  Not  so,  my  friend," 
replied  the  good  saint ;  "  you  speak  unwisely ;  I'm 
your  friend.  To  prove  which  haven't  I  brought  you 
over  this  beautiful  house  as  a  shelter  to  you  ?  So  be 
aisy,  my  darling."  But  the  serpent,  being  a  cunning 
reptile,  understood  what  blarney  meant,  as  well  as  the 
saint  himself. 

9.  Still,  notmshingto  afiTront  his  apparently  friendly 

G-ll.  Tell  the  story  of  the  saiut  and  the  serpent  on  the  lake  of  Killarney. 


EUROPE.  545 

visitor,  lie  said,  by  way  of  excuse,  that  tlie  ctest  was 
not  large  enougli  for  him.  St.  Patrick  assured  him 
that  it  would  accommodate  him  very  well.  "  Just  get 
into  it,  my  daiiint,  and  see  how  aisy  you'll  be."  The 
serpent  thought  to  cheat  the  saint,  so  he  whipped  into 
the  chest,  but  left  an  inch  or  two  of  his  tail  hanging 
out  over  the  edge. 

10.  "I  told  you  so,"  said  he  ;  "  there's  not  room  for 
the  whole  of  me!"  "Take  care  of  your  tail,  my  dar- 
ling !"  cried  the  saint,  as  he  whacked  the  lid  down 
upon  the  serpent.  In  an  instant  the  tail  disappeared, 
and  St.  Patrick  proceeded  to  fasten  all  the  bolts.  He 
then  took  the  chest  on  his  shoulders.  "Let  me  out," 
cried  the  serpent.  "  Aisy,"  cried  the  saint ;  "  I'll  let  you 
out  to-morrow." 

11.  So  saying,  he  threw  the  box  into  the  waters  of 
the  lake,  to  the  bottom  of  which  it  sank,  to  rise  no 
more.  But  forever  afterward,  the  fishermen  affii-med 
that  they  heard  the  voice  of  the  poor  cheated  reptile 
eagerly  inquiring,  "Is  to-morrow  come  yet?  Is  to- 
morrow  come  yet  ?"     So  much  for  St.  Patrick. 

12.  In  the  time  of  Henry  the  Second  of  England, 
Ireland  was  conquered,  and  since  that  period  has  been 
under  the  English  kings.     It  has,  however,  been  very 

12.  When  was  Ireland  conquered  ?  How  has  it  since  been  governed?  "What 
of  king  James  I.  ? 


546  UNITERSAL  HISTORY. 

ill  governed.  King  James  tlie  First  did  sometliing 
toward  improving  tlie  condition  of  the  people,  but 
neither  he  nor  any  subsequent  king  has  been  able  to 
get  St.  Patrick  out  of  their  heads. 

13.  The  saint  was  a  Koman  Catholic,  and  the  greater 
part  of  the  people  are  Catholics  to  this  day.  They  are 
dissatisfied  with  the  English  government,  and  most  of 
them  deem  its  conduct  to  have  been  selfish,  cruel,  and 
unwise.  The  people  have  often  been  in  a  state  of  re- 
bellion, and  though  the  leaders  are  ever  crushed  by  the 
power  of  the  government,  still  others  rise  up  to  head 
them. 

14.  Thus  Ireland  has  been  for  years  in  an  almost 
constant  state  of  agitation.  Thousands  of  lives  have 
been  lost  in  attempts  to  obtain  the  freedom  of  the 
country,  but  in  vain.  In  1847,  a  plague  carried  off  a 
million  of  the  inhabitants.  Of  late,  millions  have  emi- 
grated, and  it  is  to  be  hoped  that  happier  prospects  are 
before  the  people  of  this  island. 

13,  What  is  the  religion  of  Ireland  ?  Do  the  people  like  the  government  of 
England  ?  What  excites  them  to  rebellion  ?  14.  What  is  the  present  state  of  Ire 
land?     What  of  a  plague ?     Emigration? 


EUROPE.  547 

CHAPTER  CLYII.— Europe  Continued. 
About  Various  Matters  and  Things. 

1.  I  HAVE  now  told  you  sometliing  about  England, 
Wales,  Scotland,  and  Ireland ;  but  it  is  impossible  to 
do  justice  to  so  great  a  subject,  in  this  little  book.  I 
have  told  you  sometliing  about  the  kings,  and  the  bat- 
tles that  have  been  fought. 

2.  But  there  are  a  great  many  interesting  stories  that 
I  have  been  obliged  to  omit.  If  I  had  time,  I  could 
give  you  a  more  particular  account  of  the  Celtic  re- 
ligion taught  by  the  druids,  which  was  very  curious, 
together  with  the  manners  of  these  Celts  in  other  re- 
spects, which  you  would  find  very  amusing. 

3.  I  could  tell  you  of  Odin,  or  Woden,  the  Scandi- 
navian hero,  who  established  a  strange  mythology, 
which  pervaded  the  northern  nations  of  Europe,  and 
became,  for  a  time,  the  religion  of  some  of  the  inhabi- 
tants of  Britain.  I  could  tell  you  how  Christianity 
was  introduced  into  England,  sixty  years  after  Christ ; 
and  how  at  first  the  people   built  rude   churches  of 

Chapter  CLVIL — 2.  What  of  the  rehgion  and  manners  of  the  Celts  ?  3. 
Who  was  Woden  ?  What  did  hia  riythology  become  ?  When  was  Christianity 
introduced  into  England?  •  —     -  - 


548  UNIYERSAL  HISTORY. 

wood,  and  how  they  afterward  constructed  those  fine 
Gotliic  buildings  in  wMcli  the  people  worship  now. 

4.  If  I  had  time,  I  could  tell  you  of  the  Gypsies,  a 
strange  race  of  people  to  be  found  in  most  countries 
of  Europe,  but  particularly  in  England,  Spain,  Hun- 
gary, and  Bohemia ;  who  wander  from  place  to  place, 
having  no  fixed  homes  ;  who  come  from  some  far  land, 
but  whether  from  Egypt  or  Asia,  none  can  tell ;  who 
continue  from  age  to  age  the  same,  while  the  nations 
among  which  they  wander  rise  and  fall,  flouiish  and 
decay. 

5.  If  I  had  time,  I  could  tell  you  some  curious  sto- 
ries about  a  famous  robber  by  the  name  of  Kobin 
Hood,  who  lived  in  the  woods,  and  performed  strange 
things.  I  could  also  tell  you  of  many  celebrated 
people  more  worthy  of  being  remembered  than  this 
freebooter. 

6.  I  could  tell  you  of  Dr.  Watts,  who  wrote  that 
beautiful  little  book  entitled  Hymns  for  Infant  Minds, 
a  work  which  has  given  more  pleasure,  and  done  more 
good,  than  all  the  battles  of  the  greatest  conqueror 

ythat  ever  lived. 

Y.  I  could  tell  you  of  Hannah  More,  who  wrote  that 
beautiful  story  entitled  the   Shepherd,  of   Salisbuiy 

4.  What  of  the  Gypsies?    Where  do  they  live?     5.  Who  was  Robin  Hood? 
6.  What  of  Pr.  Watts  ? 


EUROPE.  549 

Plain;  of  Miss  Eclgeworth,  wlio  wrote  tlie  story  of 
Frank ;  and  Daniel  De  Foe,  wlio  composed  tliat  beau, 
tifal  fancy  story  called  Eobinson  Crusoe. 

8.  It  would  be  very  pleasant  to  read  about  tliese 
people;  they  seem  like  friends  to  us,  and  we  sliould 
like  to  know  wbere  they  lived,  liow  tliey  looked,  and 
what  adventures  they  met  with.  But  these  and  other 
matters  relating  to  the  history  of  that  beautiful  and 
interesting  country  from  which  our  forefathers  came,  I 
must  leave  for  the  present. 

9.  I  have,  then,  only  to  add,  that  while  you  can  read 
the  history  of  the  British  nation  in  books,  you  can 
best  study  the  character  and  manners  of  the  people  at 
home,  in  their  own  country.  An  Englishman  is  very 
agreeable  in  his  own  house,  but  out  of  his  country,  he 
is  too  often  disao^reeable  and  unreasonable. 

10.  The  Scotch  are  a  shrewd,  money-saving  race,  and 
if  you  will  go  to  their  wild  country,  and  pay  well  for 
what  you  want,  you  will  be  well  served.  If  a  Scotch- 
man leaves  his  own  country,  it  is  generally  to  better 
his  fortune.  The  Scotch  are  sometimes  called  British 
Yankees. 

11.  The  Irish  are  much  the  same,  wherever  they  may 


1,  8,  What  otlier  celebrated  writers  could  be  mentioned  ?     9.  What  of  English- 
men ?     10.  What  of  the  Scotch  ? 


550 


UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


be:  clieerful,  witty,  and  generous.  They  live  for  to- 
day, and  tliink  little  of  to-morrow.  Tliey  are  generally 
without  education,  but  if  ignorant,  they  are  better 
than  most  other  ignorant  people.  They  are  of  a  nation 
possessing  fine  qualities,  but  injured  by  ages  of  oppres- 
sion. They  are  constantly  improving  now,  and  their 
children  may  be  among  our  best  and  happiest  citizens. 


CHAPTER  CLYIII.— EuBOPE  Continued. 


Chronology  of  Great  Britain. 


England  invaded  by  Caesar. .... 

Enofland  finally  subdued  by  Clau- 
dius  

Chiisliitnity  introduced  into  Eng- 
land  

Scotland  received  the  Christian 
faith 

Tlie  Saxons  conquer  England .... 

Patrick  visits  Ireland 

Edw}dl  first  king  of  Wales 

Egbert  I.  king  of  England 

Kenneth  11.  first  king  of  Scotland 

Alfred  ascends  the  English  throne 

The  Danes  conquer  England 

England   recovered  by  Alfred .  .  . 

Alfred  the  Great  died 

Canute  invaded  England 

Danes  driven  out  of  England.  .  .  . 


B.  G. 

55 

A.  D. 

44 

60 

203 

455 
550 
690 

827 
839 
872 
877 
880 
900 
101  f) 
1041 


Harold  became  king  of  England  1066 
William  the  Conqueror  ascends  the 

throne 1006 

Wales  conquered  and  divided  by 

William  the  Conqueror 1091 

Death   of  William   Rufus,  king  of 

England   1100 

Death  of  Henry  Beauclerk,  king 

of   England 1135 

Griffith,  last  king  of  Wales,  died.  1137 
Death  of  Stephen,  king  of  England  1 154 

Richard  ascends  the  throne 1189 

Magna    Charta   granted    by   king 

John 1215 

John  died 1216 

l«]d\vard  I.  ascended  the   English 

throne 1272 

Wales  annexed  to  the  crown   of 

England 1285 


11.  What  of  the  Irish? 


EUROPE. 


551 


A.D. 

Sir  "William  Wallace  executed...   1305 

Kdward  11.  king  of  England 1307 

Battle   of  Bannockburn 1313 

E.dward  III.  king  of  England 1327 

Battle  of  Cressy 1346 

Black  Prince  died. 1376 

Henry  IV.  king  of  England 1400 

Henry  V.         "  "         1413 

Henry  V.  died 1422 

Wars  of  York  and  Lancaster  begin  1455 

Edward  IV.  king  of  England 1461 

Edward  IV.  died 1483 

Richard  Crookback  died 1485 

Henry  VII.  died 1509 

James  V.  king  of  Scotland 1513 

Henry  VIII.  died 1547 

Bloody  Mary  queen  of  England.  .  1553 
Elizabeth  ascended  the  throne. .  .  1558 
Destruction  of  the  Spanish  Armada  1588 

James  I.  ascends  the  throne 100:3 

Charles  I.     "  ''       1625 

Civil  war  begun  in  England  be- 
tween the  cavaliers  and  round- 
heads     1642 


A.  D. 

Battle  of  Naseby 1045 

Charles  I.  beheaded 1049 

Cromwell  made  LoitI  Protector..    1654 

Cromwell  died 1058 

Charles  II.  king  of  England IGGO 

Great  plague  in  London 1605 

Great  fire  "       1000 

James  II.  king  of  P]ngland 1085 

William    and    Mary   crowned    in 

England 1089 

Anne  ascended  the  throne 1103 

Anne  died 1714 

George  I.  died 1727 

War  between  France  and  England  1755 

George  IIL  king  of  England 1700 

"  became  deranged. .. .    1788 

George  IV.  made  king 1820 

William  IV.  ascended  the  throne.  1^30 
Vi^oria  "  "        .    1837 

Victoria  marries  prince  Albert. . .    1840 

Plague  in  Ireland 1847 

The  prince  of  Wales  visits  Canada 

and  the  United  States 1860 


CHAPTEE  CLIX.— EuKOPE   CoNTmuED. 

Iceview. — The  Dark  Ages. — Important  Inventions^  <&g, 

1.  Such  is  my  brief  story  about  Europe.  I  liope  I. 
have  told  you  enough  to  excite  your  curiosity,  and  lead 
you  to  read  larger  works  than  mine,  about  the  nations 
I  have  mentioned.  You  will  find  the  subject  very  in- 
teresting, and  worthy  of  your  careful  study.     I  have 


552  UNIYERSAL  HISTORY. 

room  now  only  to  mention  a  few  tMngs  that  liave  been 
omitted  in  tlie  progi'ess  of  my  story. 

2.  You  will  remember  tliat  Greece  was  settled  before 
any  otlier  portion  of  Euroj)e,  and  that  the  Greeks  be- 
came a  polished  and  powerful  people.  You  will  re- 
member that  Rome  became  a  mighty  empire,  and  ex- 
tended its  sway  over  nearly  all  parts  of  the  world  that 
were  then  kno^vn. 

3.  You  will  remember  that  four  or  five  hundred 
years  after  Christ,  the  Roman  empire  was  dismem- 
bered, and 'that  the  northern  tribes  of  Europe  spread 
themselves  over  Spain,  Italy,  and  Greece.  Thus  the 
arts,  learning,  and  refinement,  which  had  been  culti- 
vated in  these  countries,  were  for  a  time  extinguished, 
and  all  Europe  was  reduced  to  a  nearly  barbarous  state. 

4.  This  period  is  called  the  Dark  Ages,  because  the 
nations  were  generally  ignorant,  fierce,  and  barbarous. 
So  things  continued,  till  about  ^ve  hundred  years  ago, 
when  the  light  of  learning  began  to  return.  Since  that 
time,  society  has  advanced  in  civilization,  till  it  has 
reached  a  higher  state  of  improvement  than  was  ever 
known  before. 

5.  The  history  of  the  church  of  Christ  is  a  subject 

Chaptee  CLIX. — 2.  Which  of  Ihe  natious  of  Europe  was  first  settled?  What 
of  Rome  ?  3.  What  happened  four  or  five  hundred  years  after  Christ  ?  4.  What 
period  was  called  the  Dark  Ages?    How  long  is  it  since  learning  began  to  revive  ? 


EUROPE.  553 

at  wliich  I  liave  been  able  only  to  take  an  occasional 
glance.  After  our  Saviour's  deatli,  in  the  year  33,  Ms 
apostles  proceeded  to  spread  tlie  gospel  tlirougliout 
different  countries.  Paul  was  the  most  active  and  suc- 
cessful of  these  missionaries.  He  went  several  times 
through  Asia  Minor,  travelled  to  Greece,  and  finally  to 
Rome ;  everywhere  preaching  the  truths  of  the  Chris- 
tian religion.     He  died  at  Rome,  in  the  year  61. 

6.  At  first,  the  Christians  were  persecuted  by  the      -^ 
Roman  emperors,  but  the  gospel  continued  to  flourish, 
until  it  pervaded  most  parts  of  the  Roman  empire.     It 
was  introduced  into  Britain  in  the  year  60,  and  into 
most  other  parts  of  Europe  at  an  early  period.     But 

it  was  not  till  the  year  306,  when  Constautine  adopted 
it,  that  it  found  favor  with  any  king  or  prince  in 
Europe. 

7.  From  this  period  it  advanced  rapidly.  The  my- 
thology of  Greece  and  Rome  gave  way  before  it.  The 
horrid  sacrifices  and  gloomy  superstitions  of  the  druids 
yielded  to  the  gentle  worship  of  one  God,  and  the 
mysterious  rites  of  Odin  were  forsaken  for  the  religion 
of  the  cross. 

8.  In  the  course  of  time,  the  popes  of  Rome,  finding 

5.  When  did  Christ  die?  "What  of  the  apostles?  6.  How  did  the  Roraans  first 
treat  the  Christians  ?  When  was  Christianity  introduced  into  Britain  ?  What  took 
place  in  306?     1.  What  of  the  progress  of  Christianity? 


554  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

that  tlie  Christian  religion,  was  going  to  pervade  the 
world,  pretended  to  place  themselves  at  the  head  of  it, 
that  they  might  thus  obtain  an  influence  over  mankind. 
They  gradually  acquired  immense  power,  which  they 
often  used  for  the  worst  purposes. 

9.  In  process  of  time,  their  authority  was  lessened, 
and  a  large  part  of  the  people  of  Christendom  pro- 
tested against  their  authority,  and  were  thence  called 
Protestants.  At  the  present  day,  the  pope  of  Eome 
has  but  little  power. 

10.  I  have  mentioned  the  Inquisition,  in  the  history 
of  Spain.  This  was  a  secret  court,  whose  business  it 
was  to  arrest  and  bring  to  trial  those  who  were  sus- 
pected of  not  being  true  followers  of  the  Poj)ish,  or 
Catholic  religion. 

11.  It  appears  that  this  institution  was  sanctioned 
by  pope  Innocent  III.,  in  the  year  1215.  From  that 
time  it  was  gradually  extended,  and  at  length  was  es- 
tablished in  Spain,  in  1481.  Here  it  acquired  great 
power,  and  became  the  most  cruel  and  bloody  tribunal 
that  has  been  known  upon  the  face  of  the  earth. 

12.  It  was  for  many  years  a  favorite  instrument  by 
which  the  pope  of  Rome  can-ied  on  his  schemes  of 

8.  What  of  the  popes?  9.  Who  were  called  Protestants?  What  of  the  popo 
at  the  present  day?  10.  What  was  the  Inquisition?  11.  By  what  pope  was  it 
tiauetioued?     When  was  it  established  in  Spain?     What  did  it  then  become  ? 


EUROPE.  555 

tyranny.  It  was  introduced  into  most  countries  of 
Europe  wliere  tlie  Catliolic  religion  prevailed,  but  in 
no  country  did  it  exercise  its  terrible  power  with  such 
cruel  despotism  as  in  Spain.  It  was  not  finally  abol- 
ished till  the  year  1820. 

13.  I  have  not  had  an  opportunity  to  mention  the 
abbeys  and  monasteries  of  Europe,  These  curious 
institutions,  however,  deserve  notice.  It  appears  that 
in  most  countries  there  have  ever  been  some  people 
who  retire  from  the  active  business  of  life,  and  shut 
themselves  up  for  religious  contemplation.  Such  has 
been  the  case  in  Asia,  and  among  the  worshippers  of 
Brama,  Fo,  Lama,  and  Mahomet,  they  are  still  found. 
Such  was  also  the  case  among  the  idolaters  of  ancient 
Egypt,  Greece,  and  Home.  Such  was  the  case  among 
the  ancient  Jews,  and  such  has  been  the  case  amono; 
the  believers  of  Christ,  from  very  early  ages. 

14.  The  first  monastery  was  founded  by  St.  Antho- 
ny, in  Upper  Egypt,  A.  D.  305.  This  consisted  of  a 
number  of  huts,  in  which  several  hermits  dwelt,  de- 
voting themselves  to  penance  and  prayer.  Another 
monastery  was  established  in  France,  in  the  year  360, 

12.  Into  what  countries  was  the  Inquisition  introduced  ?  Where  were  its  powers 
most  cruelly  exercised  ?  13.  What  appears  to  be  the  case  in  most  countries? 
Mention  some  instances.  14.  Who  founded  the  first  monastery?  When?  Of 
what  did  it  consist  ?  When  and  by  whom  was  a  monastery  established  in 
France?     What  of  monasteries  from  this  time  ? 


556 


UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


by  St.  Martin.     From  tMs  time,  these  institutions  were 
multiplied,   and    became    established    in  all   Catholic 
countries.     From  the  eighth  to  the  fifteenth  century 
they  received  great  encouragement,  and  many  splendid 
edifices  were  erected  for  their  use. 


ABBEY  OF  THE  MIDDLE  AGES. 


15.  Some  were  called  abbeys,  and  some  monasteries. 
Many  of  them  were  filled  with  monks  and  friars,  and 
others  with  females,  called  nuns.  The  splendid  remains 
of  many  of  these  edifices  are  still  to  be  found  in  Eng- 
land, France,  Germany,  and  other  parts  of  Europe.  At 
first,  the  inhabitants  of  monasteries  lived  in  a  simple 

15.  Who  inhabited  thein  ?     lluw  did  the  monks  and  nuns  formerly  live?     How 
in  later  days  ? 


EUROPE.  557 

manner,  and  devoted  tliemselves  to  religious  contem- 
plations. But  In  after  times,  the  abbeys  and  monas- 
teries became  tlie  seats  of  voluptuousness.  None  were 
permitted  to  enter  them  but  the  monks  and  nuns ;  these, 
therefore,  while  they  pretended  to  be  engaged  in  re- 
ligious duties,  screened  from  the  eyes  of  the  world 
often  gave  themselves  up  to  luxurious  pleasures. 

16.  These  institutions  were,  however,  greatly  en- 
couraged by  the  popes,  and  it  was  not  until  the  mon- 
strous corruptions  of  the  Catholic  religion  brought  on 
the  E-eformation,  in  the  sixteenth  century,  that  monas- 
tic institutions  began  to  decline.  They  were  abolished 
in  England  in  1539,  and  in  France  in  1Y90.  In  several 
other  countries  of  Europe  they  have  ceased,  but  still 
continue  in  Italy  and  Spain. 

17.  In  the  early  ages,  war  was  carried  on  without 
guns  and  cannon.  The  Greeks  and  Komans  were 
armed  with  swords,  spears,  and  battle-axes,  and  canied 
shields  for  defence.  The  troops  of  Egypt,  Carthage, 
and  Persia,  were  armed  in  a  similar  manner.  In  the 
year  1330,  gunpowder  was  invented,  and  cannon  began 
to  be  used  about  the  same  time.     They  were  first  em- 


16.  By  whom  were  these  institutions  encouraged  ?  When  did  .monastic  institu- 
tions begin  to  decline  ?  When  were  they  abohshed  in  England  ?  In  France  ? 
Where  do  they  still  exist  ?  17.  What  of  war  in  early  times?  Arms?  When  was 
gunpowder  invented  ?    When  were  cannon  first  used  by  the  English  ? 


^^^  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY, 


ployed  by  the  English  at  the  battle  of  Cressy,  in  1346 
On  that  occasion,  king  Edward  had  four  pieces  of  can- 
non, which  greatly  aided  in  gaining  the  victory. 

18    From  this  time,  fire-arms   Avere    rapidly  intro- 
duced, and  soon  the  whole  art  of  war  was  changed 
-Bows    and  arrows,  spears  and  shields,  were  thrown 
aside,  and  contending  armies,  instead  of  coming   up 
close  to  each  other,  and  fighting  face  to  face,  learned 
to  shoot  each  other  down  at  a  distance. 
_    19.  One  of  the  greatest  discoveries  of  modem  times 
IS  that  quality  of  the  mariner's  compass  by  which  it 
always  points  to  the  north  pole.     This  useful  instni- 
ment,  which  enables  the  seaman  to  traverse  the  tra<  k- 
less  deep,  appears  to    have  been  in  use  as  early  as 

20.  But  a  still  more  important  invention  was  thai  of 
pnntmg,  in  1441.  Previous  to  that  time,  all  books 
were  written  Avith  the  pen.  A  copy  of  the  Bible  was 
worth  as  much  in  ancient  times  as  a  good  house  or  a 
good  farm  is  now.  Of  coui-se,  fe^y  people  could  learn 
to  read,  for  the  want  of  books.  If  Peter  Parky  had 
lived  m  those  times,  I  am  inclined  to  think  he  would 
have  obtamed  a  very  poor  living. 

18.  What  happened  from  time  to  time'    19  What  i<.  «  „r„.i.  j- 
times?     men  was  the  mariner's  compa^  fct  used ?   "o   ZT"^      "^""^ 
invented?    How  were  books  formerly  mal  T  ^O-  ^h^n  was  prmfng 


AilEEICA. 


559 


STUDYING  THE  MAP  OF  AMEEIQA, 


CHAPTER  CLX.— Ameeioa. 

About  America, 

1.  We  liave  long  been  occupied  with  tlie  tliree  great 
divisions  of  tlie  eastern  continent,  Asia,  Africa,  and 
Europe.  Let  us  now  leave  tliese  countries,  cross  the 
Atlantic,  and  come  to  our  own  continent  of  A^merica. 

2.  This  continent,  as  you  will  see  by  the  map,  con- 
sists of  two  parts,  North  and  South  America.     These 


Questions  on  the  Map  of  the  Western  Hemisphere,  p.  18.— How  is  the 
continent  of  America  bounded  on  the  east?  On  the  west?  Where  is  Cape  Horn? 
West  Indies  ?  Greenland  ?  The  Sandwich  Islands  ?  In  which  direction  is  Cape 
Horn  from  New  York  ?    Where  are  Behring's  Straits  ? 


660  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

are  united  by  a  narrow  strip  of  land,  called  tlie  isthmus 
of  Darien.  about  sixty  miles  in  width;  at  the  narrow- 
est part  it  is  but  thirty-seven  miles.  This  vast  conti- 
nent is  about  nine  thousand  miles  in  length,  and  is 
nearly  equal  in  extent  to  Asia.  The  whole  population 
is  estimated  at  nearly  fifty  millions. 

3.  The  northern  part  of  America  is  excessively  cold. 
Whether  it  is  there  bounded  by  the  sea,  or  whether  it 
extends  to  the  north  pole,  we  cannot  tell.  Greenland, 
the  coldest  inhabited  country  on  the  globe,  was  for- 
merly considered  a  part  of  our  continent,  but  is  now 
thought  to  be  an  island. 

4.  The  countries  in  North  America  are  the  island  of 
Iceland,  Greenland,  the  Polar  Regions,  inhabited  by 
the  Esquimaux  and  other  tribes  of  Indians;  British 
America,  Russian  America,  the  United  States,  Mexico, 
and  Guatimala. 

5.  Between  North  and  South  America  are  a  number 
of  beautiful  islands,  called  the  West  Indies.  South 
America  is  divided  into  Venezuela,  New  Grenada, 
Equator,  Peru,  Bolivia,  Chili,  and  the  United  Provinces. 
These  are  republics.     Brazil  was  a  province  of  Portu- 

Chapter  CLX. — 2.  What  does  tlie  continent  of  America  consist  of?  What  of 
the  isthmus  of  Darien  ?  Extent  and  population  of  America?  3.  What  is  known 
of  the  northern  part  of  America  ?  What  of  Greenland  ?  4.  Countries  of  North 
America? 


AMERICA.  561 

gal,  but  is  now  an  independent  empire.  Patagonia  is 
a  land  thinly  settled  by  uncivilized  tribes.  Guiana 
consists  of  a  French,  Dutch,  and  British  colony. 

6.  I  have  said  that  it  was  extremely  cold  at  the 
northern  part  of  Nortn  America.  In  this  dreary  re- 
gion,  no  trees  are  to  be  found,  and  no  plants  flourish. 
For  nine  months  in  the  year,  the  sea  is  frozen,  and 
scarcely  a  living  thing  is  able  to  dwell  there.  Even 
in  summer  nothing:  is  seen  but  now  and  then  a  lone- 
ly  white  bear,  or  a  solitary  reindeer  feeding  upon 
moss. 

Y.  The  English  and  Americans  have  sent  many  ships 
to  these  desolate  scenes,  at  first  to  discover  whether 
there  was  any  passage  by  water  from  the  east  to  the 
west,  and  afterward  to  make  experiments  in  magnet- 
ism, and  other  strange  things.  The  adventurers  in 
these  ships  saw  many  marvellous  sights.  Dr.  Kane,  in 
1860,  found  a  natural  shaft  of  green  basalt,  shaped  ex- 
actly like  a  monument,  and  looking  precisely  like  the 
work  of  men's  hands !  He  named  it  "  Tennyson's 
Monument,"  in  honor  of  an  English  poet. 

8.  As  you  proceed  south,  you  meet  with  a  few  wil- 
low and  birch  trees,  and  some  hardy  plants.     Still  fur- 

5.  What  of  the  West  Indies  ?  Divisions  of  South  America?  Brazil?  Patagonia? 
G-uiana  ?  6.  What  of  the  northern  part  of  North  America?  1.  What  of  ships 
sent  to  the  north?    Dr.  Kane?    8.  What  of  vegetation  as  you  proceed  south? 


162 


UNIVEESAL  HISTORY. 


iher  soutli,  tlie  vegetation  improves,  wild  animals  be- 
come  abundant,  and  wild  birds  are  seen  swimming  in 
the  waters,  or  hovering  in  tlie  air. 


TENITi'SON'S  MONUMENT. 


9.  Here  you  meet  with  tribes  of   Esquimaux  and 


AMERICA.  563    ^ 

Cliippewa  Indians.  When  you  get  to  Canada,  you 
find  a  fruitful  country.  When  you  get  as  far  south  as 
the  United  States,  the  climate  becomes  pleasant.  In 
the  West  Indies,  around  the  Gulf  of  Mexico,  and 
throughout  all  the  noi-thern  parts  of  South  America, 
the  climate  is  that  of  perpetual  spring  or  summer. 

10.  As  you  go  further  south,  it  grows  cold,  and  Avhen 
you  get  to  Cape  Horn,  you  ^vdll  find  it  a  frozen  coun- 
try, where  winter  reigns  three-fourths  of  the  year. 
The  wild  animals  of  America  are  very  numerous.  The 
bison,  wild  goat,  wild  sheep,  antelope,  many  kinds  of 
deer,  several  kinds  of  bears,  w^olves,  foxes,  and  many 
smaller  quadrupeds,  together  wdth  birds  of  many  kinds, 
are  natives  of  America. 

11.  .Most  of  our  domestic  animals  were  not  found 
here  when  the  country  was  first  discovered.  It  is  said 
that  the  Newfoundland  dog,  and  one  or  two  other 
species,  are  natives  of  this  country.  But  our  domestic 
cattle,  all  our  breeds  of  sheep,  our  horses,  asses,  mules, 
goatSj  hens,  and  cats,  were  originally  brought  from 
Europe.  The  domestic  turkey,  goose,  and  duck,  are 
native  birds. 

12.  The  people  of  America  may  be  divided  into  two 

9.  What  of  Indian  tribes?  What  of  the  climate  as  you  proceed  south  to  the 
north  of  South  America?  10.  What  of  Cape  Horn?  Animals  of  America?  Birds? 
11.  "What  animals  were  found  there?     What  of  cattle?     Native  birds? 


^      564  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

great  classes.  First,  tlie  Indians,  wlio  were  found  scat- 
tered throughout  the  American  continent  when  it  was 
first  discovered.  These  consisted  of  many  tribes,  living 
separately,  and  speaking  different  languages.  And 
second,  the  descendants  of  the  Europeans  who  have 
come  to  this  country  at  various  times,  and  settled  here. 
To  these  we  might  add  several  millions  of  negroes  who 
have  been  brought  from  Africa  as  slaves,  or  theii-  de- 
scendants. 

13.  America  is  remarkable  for  three  things :  it  has 
the  largest  lakes,  the  longest  rivers,  and  the  longest 
chain  of  mountains  to  be  found  in  the  world.  The 
largest  lake  is  Lake  Superior,  the  longest  river  is  the 
Mississippi,  the  longest  chain  of  mountains  is  that 
which  extends  nearly  the  whole  length  of  the  conti- 
nent, being  called  the  Andes  in  South  America,  the 
Cordilleras  in  Guatimala  and  Mexico,  and  the  Rocky 
Mountains  in  the  United  States. 

12.  Describe  the  two  classes  of  people  in  America.      13.  For  what  is  America 
remarkable  ?     "What  of  Lake  Superior  ?    Mississippi  river  ?    The  Andes  7 


•AMERICA. 


565 


ESQUIMAUX  INDIANS. 


-  CHAPTER  CLXI.— America  Continued. 
The  First  Inhabitants  of  America. 

1.  WiiEK  we  look  around  us,  and  see  sucli  fine  cities 
as  Boston,  New  York,  PhiladelpMa,  Baltimore,  New 
Orleans,  Louisville,  and  Cincinnati;  wken  we  see  tke 
whole  country  dotted  all  over  witli  towns,  cities,  and 
villages,  we  can  kardly  believe  tliat  three  hundred  and 
seventy  years  ago  our  whole  continent  of  America  was 
unknown  to  the  inhabitants  of  Europe,  Asia,  and 
Africa. 

2.  Such,  however,  was  the  fact.     The  country  was 


Chapter  CLXI. — 1.  What  of  America  three  hundred  and  seventy  years  ago? 


5G6  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

indeed  inhabited  by  many  tribes  of  Indians,  but  these 
peoj)le  had  no  books,  and  knew  nothing  of  the  rest  of 
the  world.  Where  they  came  from,  or  when  they  first 
settled  in  America,  no  one  can  certainly  tell. 

3.  It  appears  that  the  northern  portions  of  I^orth 
America,  are  inhabited  by  a  race  of  people  called 
Esquimaux.  These  differ  fi'om  all  the  other  Indians, 
and  bear  a  close  resemblance  to  the  Laplanders.  It 
seems  likely,  therefore,  that  these  polar  regions  were 
settled  by  people  who  came  from  Europe  in  boats, 
many  centuries  since. 

4.  That  such  a  thing  is  possible,  appears  from  the 
fact  that  the  Norwegians  are  kno"wn  to  have  discovered 
Iceland,  in  the  eighth  century,  and  that  they  actually 
made  settlements  in  Greenland  in  tlie  ninth  century. 
It  appears,  then,  that  .portions  of  America  were  actually 
visited  by  these  northern  Europeans,  who  possessed  no 
other  than  small  vessels,  and  little  knowledge  in  the 
arts  of  navigation. 

5.  But  how  did  the  other  Indians  get  to  this  coun- 
try ?  If  you  will  look  on  a  map  of  the  Pacific  ocean, 
you  will  see,  at  the  northern  part,  that  America  and 
Asia  come  very  close  together.     They  are  separated 


2.  Wliat  of  the  Indians?     3.  The  Esquimaux?   What  seems  probable?  4.  What 
of  the    Xorvvo":iaus?      5.    What   straiis    separate   Asia    aud  Auiorica?      Their 


width'*" 


AMERICA.  567 

only  by  Beliring's  Straits,  whicli  are  but  eighteen  miles 
wide. 

6.  Across  this  narrow  channel,  the  people  of  the 
present  day,  living  in  the  neighborhood,  are  accustomed 
to  pass  in  their  little  boats.  There  is  reason  to  believe, 
then,  that  many  ages  since,  some  of  the  Asiatic  tribes 
of  Tartars  wandered  to  Behring's  Straits,  and  crossed 
over  to  America.  These  may  have  been  numerous, 
and  consisting  of  different  tribes:  a  foundation  may 
thus  have  been  laid  for  the  peopling  of  the  American 
continent. 

7.  That  such  was  the  fact,  there  is  little  reason  to 
doubt.  There  is  considerable  resemblance  between  the 
American  Indians  and  some  Asiatic  tribes :  and  they 
appear  to  possess  some  singular  customs  known  in 
Asia.  Thus  it  would  seem  that  Asia,  which  furnished 
the  first  inhabitants  of  Africa  and  Europe,  also  sup- 
plied this  continent  with  the  first  human  beings  that 
trod  its  shores. 

6.  What  is  there  reason  to  beh'eve?    1.  Whom  do  our  Indians  resemble  ?     How 
was  America  probably  first  peopled  ? 


568  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

CHAPTER  CLXII.— America  Continued. 
Discovery  of  America  hy  Columbus. 

1.  It  lias  been  conjectured  tliat  tlie  ancient  Cartlia- 
ginians  discovered  Soutli  America, 
and  made  settlements  there.  But 
this  is  very  unlikely ;  if  it  was  the 
case,  the  event  had  been  forgotten 
for  two  or  three  thousand  years. 
It  appears  probable  that  the  first 
inhabitant  of  the  Old  World,  who 
gave  any  information  of  what  was 
called  the  New  World,  was  Chris- 
topher Columbus.    He  may,  there- 

ohristophkToolumbus.     fore,  fairly  be  called  the  discoverer 
of  America. 

2.  This  illustrious  person  was  born   at   Genoa,   in 
Italy,  in  1442.     As  he  grew  up,  he  paid  great  attention 
to  the  study  of  geography.     The  idea  entered  his  mind 
that  there  must  be  vast  tracts  of  undiscovered  country 
somewhere  on  the  face  of  the  broad  ocean. 

3.  If  you  will  look  at  the  map  in  the  opposite  page, 
you  will  get  an  idea  of  the  state  of  geography  in  the 

Chapter  CLXII. — 1.   What  has  been  conjectured?      What    of    Christopher 
Columbus?    2.  Wh«n  and  where  was  he  born? 


AMERICA. 


5G9 


5Y0  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

time  of  Columbus.  The  places  left  white  were  the  only 
ones  known  to  the  Europeans — that  is,  the  whole  of 
Europe,  Great  Britain,  Iceland,  the  northern  coast  of 
Africa,  Asia  Minor,  the  entire  coast  of  Arabia,  and  the 
coast  of  Hindostan,  or  India.  Of  the  rest  of  the  world, 
then  existing  and  inhabited,  they  knew  nothing  what- 
ever. 

4.  Columbus  was  poor,  and  had  not  the  means  of 
sailing  in  search  of  these  unknown  lands.  He  applied 
for  assistance  to  the  rulers  of  his  native  country ;  but 
they  refused  it.  He  next  went  to  Portugal ;  but  there 
he  met  with  no  better  success. 

5.  At  last,  he  came  to  the  court  of  Spain.  Ferdinand 
and  Isabella  were  king  and  queen  of  that  country. 
The  king,  like  almost  every  body  else,  treated  Colum- 
bus with  neglect  and  scorn. 

6.  But  the  queen  thought  so  favorably  of  his  project, 
that  she  sold  her  jewels  to  defray  the  expenses  of  the 
voyage.  Three  small  vessels  were  equipped  with  ninety 
men,  and  with  provisions  for  one  year.  Columbus  took 
the  command,  and  sailed  from  Spain  on  the  third  of 
August,  1492,  after  having  been  blessed  by  the  digni 
taries  of  the  church. 

1.  He  first  held  his  course  southward,  and  touched 

3.  Describe  the  map  on  page  5G9.     4-G.  Tell  the  story  of  Columbus  till  the  time 
when  ho  set  saiL 


AMERICA. 


571 


COLUMBUS   PEEPARLN'G   TO   SET   SAIL   FOR   AMERICA. 

at  tlie  Canary  Islands.  Tlience  lie  steered  straight 
toward  tlie  west.  After  a  few  weeks,  liis  men  became 
alarmed.  They  feared  that  they  should  never  again 
behold  their  native  conntryj  nor  any  land  whatever, 
but  should  perish  in  the  trackless  sea. 

8.  Columbus  did  his  utmost  to  encourage  them.  Ht) 
promised  to  turn  back,  if  land  were  not  discovered 
within  three  days.     On  the  evening  of  the  last  day,  at 


1.  Which  way  did  he  first  steer  his  course  ?    What  of  his  men  ? 


572  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

about  ten  o'clock,  lie  looked  from  tlie  deck  of  liis 
vessel,  and  beheld  a  light  gleaming  over  tlie  sea.  He 
knew  that  this  light  must  be  on  land.  In  the  morning 
an  island  was  seen,  to  which  Columbus  gave  the  name 
of  St.  Salvador. 

9.  This  is  one  of  the  Bahama  Islands.  The  natives 
thronged  to  the  shore,  and  gazed  with  wonder  at  the 
three  ships.  Perhaps  they  mistook  them  for  living 
monsters,  and  thought  that  theii*  white  sails  were 
wino^s. 

10.  Columbus  clothed  himself  magnificently,  and 
landed  with  a  drawn  sword  in  his  hand.  His  first  act 
was  to  kneel  down  and  kiss  the  shore.  He  then 
erected  a  cross,  as  a  symbol  that  Christianity  was 
now  to  take  the  place  of  paganism.  He  declared  the 
island  to  be  the  property  of  cpeen  Isabella.  He  then 
visited  other  islands,  and  returned  to  Spain,  giving  an 
account  of  the  wonderful  things  he  had  seen.  He  made 
a  second,  but  it  was  not  till  his  third  voyage  that  he 
discovered  the  continent  of  America. 

11.  No  sooner  had  Columbus  proved  that  there 
really  was  a  new  world  beyond  the  sea,  than  several 
other  navigators  made  voyages  thitherward.     Ameri- 

8.  How  did  Columbus  first  encourage  them  ?  "What  land  was  first  discovered  ? 
9.  What  of  the  people?  10.  What  did  Columbus  now  do  ?  11.  What  of  Americus 
Vespuciu3  ? 


AMERICA.  573 

cus  Vespucius,  a  native  of  Florence,  came  here,  and 
contrived  to  liave  tlie  whole  continent  called  by  his 
name. 

12.  By  degrees,  discoveries  were  made  along  the 
whole  coast  of  North  and  South  America.  People 
came  from  various  nations  of  Europe,  and  formed 
settlements  there.  In  relating  the  history  of  these 
settlements,  I  shall  begin  with  the  most  northerly,  al- 
though the  earliest  colonies  were  planted  in  the  tropical 
regions. 


CHAPTEK   CLXIII.— America   Continued. 

A  few  words  about  Iceland  and  Greenland.     Settletnents  of 
the  French  in  America. 

1.  I  HAVE  already  told  you  that  the  island  of  Ice- 
land was  discovered  by  a  Norwegian  pirate,  in  860. 
After  this,  the  Norwegians  sent  people  to  settle  there. 
It  is  a  cold,  dreary  country,  and  there  is  a  temble 
mountain  in  the  island,  called  Hecla,  which  sometimes 
sends  out  fire,  smoke,  and  ashes,  and  shakes  the  whole 
island  with  its  frightful  rumblings. 

12.  What  of  otker  countries? 

Chaptee  CLXIII— 1.  When  was  Iceland  discovered?   What  of  it?   Mt.  Hecla? 


574  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

2.  But  still  tlie  inliabitants  increased,  and  Christi- 
anity was  introduced  in  981.  From  tliat  time  to  tlie 
present,  tliey  liave  continued  a  quiet,  honest  set  of 
people.  Their  number  is  now  fifty  thousand,  and  they 
are  under  the  government  of  Denmark.  Greenland 
was  discovered  about  the  same  time  as  Iceland,  and 
settled  soon  after. 

3.  The  colony  continued  to  flourish  till  the  year 
1408.  At  this  time,  the  winter  was  so  severe  as  to 
block  up  the  sea,  and  since  that  time  nothing  has  been 
known  of  the  colony  of  settlers.  It  is  probable  they 
all  perished  long  since.  This  settlement  was  on  the 
northern  part  of  Greenland.  Another  colony  was 
settled  in  the  south-western  part  of  Greenland;  this 
continues  to  the  present  day,  but  the  inhabitants  are 
few  in  number.  Most  of  them  are  aative  Esquimaux ; 
the  rest  are  the  descendants  of  the  Norwegian  set- 
tlers. 

4.  The  portion  of  America  which  is  now  under  the 
government  of  Great  Britain,  consists  of  Nova  Scotia, 
New  Brunswick,  Newfoundland,  Upper  and  Lower 
Canada,  and  New  Britain. 

5.  All  these  provinces  together  compose  a  tract  of 

2.  When  was  Christianity  introduced  into  Iceland?  People?  What  of  Green- 
land ?  3.  Colony  at  Greenland  ?  When  was  it  last  heard  of?  Colony  in  the  south? 
The  people?    4.  What  does  British  America  consist  of? 


AMERICA.  575 

country  two-tliirds  as  large  as  the  United  States.  They 
are  bounded  north  by  the  Arctic  Sea  and  Baffin's  Bay, 
east  by  the  Atlantic,  south  by  the  United  States,  and 
west  by  Russian  America  and  the  Pacific  ocean. 

6.  The  first  people  who  formed  settlements  in 
America,  to  the  northward  of  the  present  limits  of 
the  United  States,  were  the  French.  Nearly  three 
hundred  years  ago,  they  were  in  the  habit  of  sending 
fishing- vessels  to  this  coast. 

Y.  In  1524,  a  Frenchman,  named  James  Cartier, 
sailed  up  the  St.  Lawrence  and  built  a  fort,  in  which 
he  passed  the  winter.  Settlements  AYere  soon  after 
formed  in  Canada  and  Nova  Scotia.  King  Henry  the 
Fourth  of  France  appointed  the  Marquis  de  la  Roche 
to  be  governor-general  of  Canada  and  the  neighboring 
territories. 

8.  The  city  of  Quebec  was  founded  in  t^e  year  1G08. 
It  stands  on  the  river  St.  Lawrence,  about  ^ve  hundred 
miles  from  the  sea.  Its  foundation  is  on  a  rock  of 
marble  and  slate. 

9.  The  French  settlers  were  on  very  friendly  terms 
with  the  Indians.  They  purchased  the  furs  which  the 
red  men  obtained  in  their  hunting  expeditions.     These 

5.  IIow  large  is  it?  Boundaries?  G.  What  of  the  French?  7.  What  was 
done  in  15241"  Who  was  appointed  governor  of  Canada?  8.  When  and  where  was 
Quebec  founded  ?     9.  What  of  the  French  and  Indians  ? 


576  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

were  sent  to  Europe,  and  sold  at  a  great  profit.     Some 
of  the  Frencli  were  married  to  Indian  wives. 

10.  When  the  English  began  to  foiTQ  settlements  to 
the  southward  of  Canada,  the  French  incited  the  savages 
to  make  war  upon  them.  Parties  of  French  and  Indians 
would  sometimes  come  from  Quebec  or  Montreal,  and 
burn  the  'New  England  villages.  The  inhabitants  were 
killed,  or  carried  captive  to  Canada. 

11.  In  1629,  Sir  David  Keith,  a  British  officer,  took 
Quebec ;  but  it  was  afterward  restored  to  the  French. 
The  people  of  New  England  made  several  attempts  to 
get  it  back  again. 

12.  In  1711,  the  British  government  sent  a  strong 
fleet  up  the  St.  Lawrence,  under  the  command  of  Ad- 
miral Sir  Ho  vender  Walker.  There  was  an  army  of 
seven  thousand  men  on  board  the  ships. 

13.  If  they  had  landed  in  safety,  they  would  prob- 
ably have  succeeded  in  taking  Quebec.  But  when  they 
were  entering  the  river,  the  vessels  became  involved  in 
a  fog.  A  strong  wind  began  to  blow,  and  drove  eight 
or  nine  of  them  upon  the  rocky  shore. 

14.  The  next  morning,  the  French  found  the  dead 
bodies  of  a  thousand  men,  in  scarlet  coats,  heaped 

10.  In  what  way  were  the  English  treated  by  them?  11.  When  and  by  whom 
was  Quebec  taken  ?  12-14.  What  was  done  in  1711?  Give  an  account  of  tho 
•xpeditiou.     What  was  the  object  of  it  ? 


AMERICA.  577 

amonof  tlie  rocks.  These  were  the  drowned  En2:lish 
soldiers.  This  sad  event  caused  the  English  to  give  up 
the  design  of  conquering  Canada, 


CHAPTER  CLXIY.— America  Continued. 
The  French    Colonies   conquered  hy  the  English, 

1.  Whet^ever  there  was  a  war  between  France  and 
Old  England,  there  was  likewise  a  war  between  New 
England  and  the  French  provinces  in  America.  The 
French  built  strong  fortresses,  and  the  English,  or 
Americans,  made  great  efforts  to  take  them.  • 

2.  The  French  had  carefully  fortified  the  city  of 
Louisbourg,  on  the  island  of  Cape  Breton.  In  1745, 
the  New  England  people  formed  a  project  of  taking  it. 
They  raised  a  strong  army,  and  gave  the  command  to 
a  Boston  merchant,  named  William  Pepperell. 

3.  The  army  sailed  under  the  escort  of  an  English 
fleet,  and  landed  on  the  island  of  Cape  Breton.  Gen- 
eral  Pepperell's    men   were    merely  farmers   and  me- 

Chapter  CLXIV. — 1.  "What  was  the  consequence  of  a  war  between  France  and 
England?  2.  Where  was  Louisbourg  ?  What  was  done  in  1745  ?  Describe  the 
capture  of  Louisbourg. 


578  ITXIYERSAL  HISTORY. 

chanics;  and  lie  liimself  knew  but  little  about  taking 
fortresses. 

4.  But  if  tlie  New  Englanders  liad  no  skill,  tkej  had 
plenty  of  courage.  Tliey  erected  batteries,  and  can- 
nonaded the  city  for  about  a  fortnight;  and  then  the 
French  commander  hauled  down  his  flag.  The  con- 
quest of  Louisbourg  was  considered  a  very  brilliant 
exploit. 

5.  Louisbourg  was  restored  to  the  French,  at  the 
close  of  the  war.  But  it  was  again  taken  by  General 
AYolfe,  in  1758.  The  same  general  soon  afterward  led 
an  army  against  Quebec. 

6.  This  city  was  so  strongly  fortified,  that  it  appear- 
ed almost  impossible  to  take  it.  It  had  a  citadel, 
which  was  built  on  a  rock  several  hundred  feet  high ; 
and  there  were  strong  walls  all  round  the  city.  And 
besides  the  French  garrison  within  the  walls,  there  was 
a  large  French  army  on  the  outside. 

7.  But  General  Wolfe  was  determined  to  take  Que- 
bec, or  lose  his  life  in  the  attempt.  After  trying  va- 
rious other  methods,  he  led  his  army  from  the  shore  of 
the  I'iver  up  a  steep  precipice.  When  tliey  reached 
the  top,  they  were  on  a  level  with  the  walls  of  Quebec. 

8.  This  bold  movement  was  performed  in  the  night. 

3,  4.  When  was  it  restored  to  the  French  ?     5.  When  taken  by  General  Wolfe  ? 
6,  1.  Describe  the  capture  of  Quebea 


AMERICA.  579 

As  soon  as  tlie  Marquis  de  Montcalm,  wlio  commanded 
tlie  French  army,  heard  of  it,  lie  marched  to  meet  the 
British.     A  battle  was  begun  immediately. 

9.  General  Wolfe  put  himself  at  the  head  of  his 
troops,  and  led  them  bravely  onward.  Though  he  had 
received  two  wounds,  he  refused  to  quit  the  field.  At 
last,  a  ball  struck  him  in  the  body,  and  stretched  him 
on  the  ground. 

10.  A  few  of  his  soldiers  carried  him  to  the  rear. 
But,  though  the  hand  of  death  was  on  him,  General 
Wolfe  thought  only  of  the  battle  that  was  raging 
around.  He  heard  a  voice  shouting  "  They  flee  !  They 
flee  !"  and  he  asked  who  it  was  that  fled. 

11.  "It  is  the  French!"  said  one  of  his  attendants. 
"  They  are  beaten !  The  victory  is  ours !"  A  glad 
smile  appeared  on  the  general's  face.  "  Then  I  die 
happy !"  he  cried,  and  expired. 

12.  The  victory  was  complete.  The  Marquis  de 
Montcalm  was  mortally  wounded.  In  a  few  days  after 
the  battle,  Quebec  was  surrendered.  The  whole  prov- 
ince, and  all  the  French  possessions  in  the  north,  soon 
fell  into  the  hands  of  the  British. 

13.  They  have  ever  since  continued  under  the  British 


8.  "Who  cominanded  the  French  army?      9-11.  Describe  General  Wolfe's  death. 
12.  Consequence  of  the  victory  ?     French  possessions  ? 


580  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

government.  .  Wlien  tlie  other  American  territories  of 
Great  Britain  became  independent,  these  old  French 
colonies  continued  attached  to  the  crown  of  Britain. 


CHAPTER  CLXY.— America  Continued. 
Description  of  the  United  States. 

1.  We  have  been  travelling  all  about  the  world,  but 
•  we  have  now  got  home  again.     The  United  States  are 

bounded  on  the  north  by  the  British  possessions,  east 
by  the  Atlantic  ocean,  south  by  the  Gulf  of  Mexico 
and  the  states  of  Mexico,  and  west  by  the  Pacific 
ocean.  The  whole  country  is  nearly  as  extensive  as  all 
Europe,  and  contains  about  thirty  millions  of  inhabi- 
tants. 

2.  Not  more  than  three-fourths  of  this  vast  country 
is  settled.  The  whole  central  portion  is  unoccupied,  oi 
thinly  scattered  over  with  Indian  tribes.  The  United 
States,  at  present  (1860),  comprise  thirty-three  states, 

^  each  having  a  governor,  and  a  legislature  to  make  lawa 

13.  To  what  are  the  old  French  colonies  attached  ? 

Chapter  CLXV. — 1.  Boundaries  of  the  United  States?  Extent?  Population? 
2.  How  large  a  portion  is  settled  ?  What  of  the  government  ?  Divisvous  of  the 
United  States?    (Answer  this  from  map  on  p.  681.) 


582  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

The  wliole  are  united  under  a  national  government, 
over  wliicL  a  president  is  placed  as  tlie  cliief 
ruler. 

3.  Tlie  United  States  are  favored  by  a  great  many 
fine  rivers,  flowing  througli  fertile  valleys.  There  are 
many  mountains,  but  none  are  so  lofty  as  tlie  Andes 
of  South  America,  the  Alps  of  Europe,  or  the  Himalaya 
mountains  of  Asia.  The  climate  of  the  north  is  tem- 
perate, and  the  soil  yields  apples,  pears,  peaches,  and 
other  fruits.  In  the  south  it  is  warm,  and  oranges,  figs, 
and  lemons,  flourish. 


CHAPTER  CLXYI.— America   Continued. 
Settleinent  and  Cokmial  History  of  Nefvo  England. 

1.  Before  speaking  of  the  United  States  as  one 
whole  country,  I  must  give  a  brief  account  of  the  set- 
tlement of  the  several  colonies.  I  shall  begin  with 
Ne^v  England,  because  that  section  of  the  Union  is  the 
most  northerly,  though  not  first  settled. 

2.  New  England  contains  the  states  of  Maine,  New 

3.  Face  of  the  country ?     Climate?     Soil?     Productions? 


AMERICA.  583 

Hampsliire,  Vermont,  Massachusetts,  Eliode  Island,  and 
Connecticut.  It  is  bounded  north  by  Lower  Canada, 
east  by  New  Brunswick  and  the  Atlantic  ocean,  south 
by  the  Atlantic  and  Long  Island  Sound,  and  west  by 
New  York. 

3.  In  the  year  1620,  a  ship  called  the  Mayflower 
arrived  on  the  coast  of  New  England.  On  board  of 
this  vessel  were  a  number  of  ministers,  and  pious  men 
and  women.  They  had  brought  their  children  with 
them,  for  they  never  expected  to  return  to  their  native 
land. 

•  4.  They  had  been  driven  from.  England  by  persecu- 
tion, and  they  had  come  to  this  dreary  wilderness,  in 
order  to  w^oi'ship  God  according  to  their  own  con- 
sciences. It  was  in  the  cold  wintry  month  of  Decem- 
ber, when  the  Mayflower  anchored  in  the  harbor  of 
Plymouth.  The  people  went  on  shore,  and  the  rock 
on  which  they  landed  has  ever  since  been  considered 
sacred. 

5.  They  went  to  work  and  built  themselves  some 
poor  huts.  At  first,  they  met  with  gi'eat  difficulties 
and  hardships.  Many  of  them  fell  sick  and  died. 
The    survivors    were    often    in    want    of    food,    and 


Chapter  CLXVI.— 1,  2.  What  of  New  England  ?     Boundaries  ?     3.  What  took 
place  in  1620  ?    4-6.  Describe  the  settlement  of  Plymouth. 


584  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

were  sometimes  forced  to  dig  for  shell -fisL.  on  the  sea- 
shore. 

6.  In  addition  to  their  other  troubles,  the  wild  In- 
dians sometimes  threatened  to  attack  them.  But  the 
Pilgrims  were  as  brave  and  patient  as  they  were  pious. 
They  put  their  trust  in  God,  and  steadily  pursued  their 
design  of  making  a  permanent  settlement  in  the  countiy. 

7.  Soon  after  this  settlement  at  Plymouth,  other 
companies  of  religious  persons  came  to  different  parts 
of  New  England.  Some  settled  at  Salem,  and  others 
at  Boston.  Thus  a  good  many  English  people  were 
established  in  the  country.  In  the  year  1635,  sixty, 
men,  women,  and  children,  joui'neyed  from  Massa- 
chusetts to  Connecticut,  to  make  a  settlement  there. 

8.  They  went  through  the  woods  on  foot,  and  drove 
theii^  cattle  before  them,  subsisting  principally  on  milk. 
They  waded  through  rivers  and  swamps,  and  traversed 
hills  and  mountains.  At  night,  they  lay  down  to 
deep,  Avith  no  shelter  but  the  boughs  of  the  trees. 

9.  When  they  reached  the  Connecticut  river,  they 
began  to  build  Windsor,  Hartford,  and  other  towns. 
But  the  winter  came  upon  them  before  they  were  pre- 
pared for  it,  and  the  snow  fell  very  deep.  So  fom^teen 
of  their  number  set  out  to  return,  and  would  ha^^  per- 

7.  What  of  the  other  settlements?     What  took  place  in  1G35  ?     8,  9.  Describe 
\fte  journey. 


AMERICA. 


585 


islied  on  tlie  way,  liad  tliey  not  been  relieved  by  the 
Indians.  Windsor  and  Hartford  were  tbe  first  settle- 
ments in  Connecticut. 

10.  In  1636,  a  pious  minister,  named  Eoger  Williams, 
was  banished  Irom  Massachusetts. 
He  went  to  Khode  Island,  and  set- 
tled at  Providence.  This  good  man 
was  a  great  friend  of  the  Indians, 
and  they  had  a  strong  affection  for 
him.  By  degrees,  villages  were 
built  all  along  the  sea-coast  of  New 
England,  and  settlements  began  to 
be  formed  on  the  inland  rivers. 
11.  But  a  thick  and  dreary  forest 
still  overshadowed  the  greater  part  of  the  country,  and 
bears  and  wolves  often  prowled  around  the  cottages. 


ROGER    WILLIAMS. 


CHAPTEE  CLXVII.— Amekica  Contintjed. 

Affairs  of  New  England  continued. 

1.  The  settlers  of  New  England  were  good  and 
pious  peoj^le ;  but  many  of  them  seemed  to  have  pretty 
much  the  same  feeling  toward  the  Indians  that  they 

10.  When  and  by  whom  was  Providence  settled?      What  was  done  by  degrees? 
11.  What  of  the  greater  part  of  New  England? 

Chapter  CLXVII. — 1.  How  were  the  Indians  considered  by  the  settlers  ? 


586 


UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


had  toward  the  bears  and  wolves.      They  considered 
them  a  sort  of  wild  animal,  or  if  men,  very  ^vicked  ones. 

2.  The  best  friend  that  ever  the  red  men  had,  was 
John  Eliot.  He  considered  them  his  fellow  beings, 
and  went  about  preaching  to  them ;  and  so  he  was 
called  the  apostle  of  the  Indians.  He  spent  a  great 
many  years  in  translating  the  Bible  into  their  language, 
and  in  teaching  the  Indians  to  read  it. 

3.  There  were,  however,  very  few  white  men  that 
loved  the  Indians,  and  the  latter  looked  upon  the  set- 
tlers as  their  enemies.  They  were  afi'aid  that,  in  time, 
they  would  cut  down  all  the  trees  of  the  forest,  and 
change  their  hunting  grounds  into  cultivated  fields. 

4.  The  settlers  had,  therefore,  many  wars  with  the 
Indians,  but  the  most  terrible 
one  broke  out  in  the  year  1675, 
and  was  called  king  Philip's 
w^ar.  King  Philip,  though  an 
Indian,  was  a  man  of  great 
sagacity,  and  it  was  his  design 
to  destroy  all  the  settlers,  and 
make  New  England  a  wilder- 
ness again. 

5.  King  Philip  fii'st  made  an  attack  on  the  people 


KING  PHILIP. 


2.  What  of  John  Eliot  ?     3.  How  did  the  Indians  consider  the  white  men  ?    4. 

When  did  king  Phihp's  war  begin?     What  of  king  ThiMp? 


AMERICA.  587 

of  Swanzey,  in  Massachusetts,  as  they  were  coming  out 
of  the  meeting-house,  on  Fast  day.  Eight  or  nine  per- 
sons were  shot.  Many  others  were  killed  and  scalped 
in  different  parts  of  the  country,  and  many  houses 
were  set  on  fire. 

6.  Almost  every  man  in  New  England  now  shoul- 
dered his  musket,  and  went  out  to  fight  king  Philip. 
Even  the  ministers,  instead  of  teaching  the  Indians  to 
read  the  Bible,  as  John  Eliot  did,  now  took  their  guns 
and  sent  bullets  at  them  whenever  they  had  a  chance. 

7.  In  the  course  of  the  next  winter,  the  settlers 
formed  themselves  into  an  army  of  nearly  two  thou- 
sand men,  and  drove  king  Philip  and  the  other  Indians 
into  a  strong  fort,  in  Rhode  Island.  -It  stood  in  the 
midst  of  a  swamp,  and  contained  six  hundred  wig- 
wams. All  the  Indian  women  and  children  had  taken 
refuge  there.  * 

8.  Four  thousand  Indian  warriors  were  in  the  fort. 
But  the  settlers  boldly  attacked  them,  broke  into  the 
fort,  and  set  the  wigwams  on  fire.  Many  of  the  old 
and  infirm  Indians,  as  well  as  the  women  and  poor 
helpless  children,  were  burnt  alive. 

9.  A   thousand   Indian   w^trriors   were    killed    and 

,i 
U 

5.  When  did  he  first  attack  the  Americans?  6.  "What  did  the  people  do?  1. 
What  did  they  do  the  next  wimer?  What  of  the  fort?  8,  9,  Describe  the  des- 
tnictif^i  i)f  the  fort. 


588  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

wounded,  and  several  hundred  were  taken  prisoners. 
Tlie  remainder  fled.  The  fort  presented  a  horrible 
spectacle,  with  half-burnt  bodies  of  men,  women,  and 
■children,  strewn  among  the  ashes  of  the  wigwams. 

10.  But  "still  the  war  was  not  at  an  end,  for  kiner 
Philip  was  alive.  The  next  summer,  it  was  known  that 
he  had  taken  refuge  at  Mount  Hope,  in  Ehode  Island. 
Ca23tain  Church  pursued  him  thither,  with  a  small  party 
of  men. 

11.  King  Philip  happened  to  come  toward  a  clump 
of  bushes,  where  an  Englishman  and  a  friendly  Indian 
lay  concealed.  The  Englishman  fired  at  him,  but  miss- 
ed. The  Indian  then  took  aim  and  fii-ed,  and  the 
valiant  king  Philip  fell  dead. 

12.  After  this  war,  the  Indians  were  never  again 
able  to  do  so  much  mischief  to  the  New  England 
people.  But,  for  many  years  afterward',  they  would 
sometimes  steal  out  of  the  woods  by  night,  set  the  vil- 
lages on  fire,  and  slaughter  the  inhabitants.  The  New- 
England  colonies,  however,  increased  rapidly,  and,  in 
time,  the  country  had  many  pleasant  towns  and  vil- 
lages. 

10,  11.  Describe  the  capture  aud  death  of  king  PhiUp.     12.  What  of  the  Indians 
after  tliis  war  V 


AMERICA.  589 

CHAPTER   CLXYni.— America  Contintjed. 

Early  History  of  Yirginta. 

1.  The  colony  of  Virginia  was  settled  some  years 
before  New  England.  Jamestown,  on  James  River,  was 
founded  by  Captain  Christopher  Newport,  in  1607. 
The  first  settlers  of  Virginia  were  not  such  pious 
people  as  those  of  New  England.  They  had  not  come 
to  America  for  the  sake  of  worshipping  God,  but  were 
influenced  by  more  worldly  motives. 

2.  Many  of  them  were  wild  young  men,  and  it  was 
difficult  to  keep  them  in  order. 
Owing  to  this  and  other  causes,  the 
colony  was  sometimes  on  the  brink 
of  ruin.  The  Indians  gave  the  set- 
tlers great  trouble,  and  would  prob- 
ably have  destroyed  them,  if  it  had 

JOHN  SMITH.  not  been  for  Captain  John  Smith. 

3.  Captain  Smith  was  a  gallant  man,  and  had  been 
*i  warrior  all  his  lifetime.     Before  he  came  to  Virginia, 


Chapter  CLXYIII. — 1.  When  was  Jamestown  settled?    What  of  tbe  settlers 
of  Virginia  ?     2.   What  of  the  Indians  ? 


590  UNITERSAL  HISTORY. 

he  had  fought  against  the  Turks,  and  had  cut  off  the 
heads  of  three  Turkish  lords,  in  single  combat.  He 
showed  himself  equally  valiant  in  his  engagements 
with  the  Indians. 

4.  But  one  day,  when  Captain  Smith  was  retreating 
from  a  large  party  of  savages,  he  sank  almost  up  to  his 
neck  in  a  swamp,  so  that  he  could  neither  fight  nor 
flee.  The  Indians  pulled  him  out  of  the  swamp,  and 
carried  him  to  their  king,  Powhatan. 

5.  Powhatan  was  rejoiced  to  have  Captain  Smith  in 
his  power,  for  he  had  been  more  afraid  of  him  than  of 
all  the  other  Englishmen  together.  In  order  to  pre- 
vent any  further  trouble,  he  determined  immediately  to 
put  him  to  death.  Accordingly,  Captain  Smith's  hands 
were  tied,  and  he  was  stretched  on  the  ground,  with 
his  head  on  a  large  stone. 

6.  Kincy  Powhatan,  who  was  a  man  of  immense  size 
and  strength,  then  seized  a  great  club,  intending  to"  kill 
Captain  Smith.  He  lifted  the  club  on  high  for  this 
purpose ;  but  just  as  the  blow  was  falling,  his  daughter 
Pocahontas  rushed  forward. 

7.  This  beautiful  Indian  maiden  threw  herself 
upon   the   body  of  Captain    Smith.      If   Powhatan's 


3.  What  of  Captain  Smith  and  the  Turks  ?    4-7.  Relate  the  adventure  of  Cnptr 
Smith  with  the  Indiana. 


AMERICA. 


591 


club  had  fallen,  it  would  have 
killed  her,  instead  of  the  prisoner. 
Pocahontas  besought  her  father 
to  have  mercy ;  and  the  fierce  In- 
dian could  not  resist  her  tears 
and  entreaties. 

8.  Captain  Smith  was  therefor^ 
released,  and  sent  back  to  James- 
town.    The  name  of  Pocahontas 
POCAHONTAS.  wlll  always  be  honored  in  Virginia. 

She  was  afterward  married  to  one  of  the  English  set- 
tlers, and  her  descendants  are  living  in  Virginia  to  this 
day. 


8.  What  of  Pocahontas  ? 


592  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

CHAPTER  CLXIX.— America  Continued. 

Braddock^s  defeat^  and  other  matters, 

1.  I  MUST  pass  over  tlie  remainder  of  tlie  Hstory  oi 
Virginia,  till  the  time  of  the*  olj 
French  war.  This  began  in  1755 
Not  long  after  war  was  declared, 
the  British  general,  Brad  dock,  march- 
ed with  an  army  to  attack  the  French 

^^SIB/^^w,  ^^  Fort  du  Quesne.     This  fort  stood 
at  the  head  of  the  Ohio  river,  where 
BRADDocK.  Plttsburg  Is  now  situated. 

2.  Many  Virginians  and  other  colonists  were  in 
Braddock's  army.  Colonel  George  Washington,  then 
a  very  young  man,  was  one  of  his  aids.  Washington 
had  already  acquired  much  warlike  skill;  and  if  General 
Braddock  had  taken  his  advice,  it  would  have  saved  hisf 
own  life,  and  the  lives  of  hundreds  besides. 

3.  Braddock  and  his  army  marched  onward,  till  they 
were  within  about  seven  miles  of  Fort  du  Quesne 
Thick  woods  were  all  around  them,  and  the  settle 
ments  of  Virginia   were   hundreds   of  miles  behind 


Chapter  CLXTX. — 1.  When  did  the  old  French  war  begin  ?     Where  was  Fort 
Du  Quesne?     2.   Wliat  of  Washington? 


AMERICA.  593 

Suddenly,  a  terrible  volley  of  musketry  was  fired  at 
tliem  from  beiiiiid  the  trees. 

4.  General  Braddock  now  knew  tliat  lie  had  fallen 
into  an  ambuscade  of  Frencli  and  Indians.  He  gallop- 
ed about,  endeavoring  to  encourage  his  men ;  but  the 
bullets  came  so  thick,  that  the  bravest  of  them  were 
appalled. 

5.  The  general  had  five  horses  killed  under  him. 
At  last,  a  bullet  struck  him  in  the  breast.  Nearly  all 
the  other  officers  were  either  killed  or  wounded ;  but 
Washino^ton  remained  unhuii;.  It  seems  as  if  he  were 
preserved  to  be  the  saviour  of  his  country. 

6.  An  Indian  chief  had  taken  aim  and  fired  at  him 
seventeen  times,  without  once  hitting  him.  It  was 
Washington  who  rescued  the  army  from  total  destruc- 
tion. He  and  the  Virginian  troops  kept  off  the  Indians, 
and  enabled  the  British  to  retreat. 

7.  I  shall  now  proceed  to  speak  of  the  other  colonies. 
The  first  settlement  in  New  York  was  made  in  161*^, 
on  the  shores  of  the  Hudson  river,  where  Albany  now 
stands.  The  city  of  New  York,  founded  about  the 
same  time,  was  at  first  called  New  Amsterdam  ;  it  de- 


3-5.  Describe  the  defeat  and  death  of  Bi-addock.  6,  "What  of  Washino-ton  and 
his  troops?  7.. When  and  where  was  the  first  settlement  in  New  York?  What  wa9 
the  city  of  New  York  first  called  ? 


594 


UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


rived  its  name  from  tlie  capital  of  Holland,  for  the  early 
settlers  were  natives  of  that  country. 

8.  In  1664,  the  province  of  New  York  was  surren- 
dered by  the  Dutch  into  the  hands  of  the  English.  It 
grew  and  j)rospered  very  fast,  and  became  one  of  the 
most  powerful  of  the  colonies. 

9.  Pennsylvania  was  settled  in  1681.  Its  founder 
was  William  Perm,  a  Quaker, 
and  all  the  earliest  settlers  like- 
"wdse  belonged  to  the  sect  of 
Quakers.  When  William  Penn 
arrived  in  the  country,  he  bought 
land  of  the  Indians,  and  made  a 

^^UK^Kl^^^'  treaty  with  them. 

10.  This  treaty  was  always 
held  sacred.  The  Indians  saw 
that  the  Quakers  were  men  of 
peace,  and  therefore  they  were  carefal  never  to  do  them 
any  injury.  There  are  no  stories  of  Indian  warfare 
with  the  Quakers  of  Pennsylvania. 

11.  The  city  of  Pliiladelphia  was  laid  out  in  accord- 
ance with  Penn's  instructions.  He^told  the  settlei^  not 
to  make  it  like  the  crowded  cities  of  the  old  world,  but 


WILLIAM   PENN. 


8.  What  of  the  province  of  New  York  ?  9.  When  and  by  whom  was  Penn- 
Bylvauia  settled?  How  did  William  Penn  treat  the  Indians?  10.  What  was  the 
consequence  of  his  treaty  with  them  ?     11.  What  of  the  city  of  Philadelphia  ? 


AMERICA 


595 


to  plant  it  with  gardens  round  each  house,  that  it  might 

look  like  a  "  greene  country  towne." 

12.  The  province  of  Maryland  was  given  by  Charles 
the  First  to  Lord  Baltimore.  He 
was  a  Roman  Catholic,  and,  in 
1634,  he  brought  over  two  hun- 
dred people  of  the  same  religion, 
and  made  the  first  settlement  in 
Maryland. 

-     13.  Carolina  first  began  to  be 

permanently  settled  in  1680.     In 

1Y29,  it  was  divided  into  North 

The  first  settlement  in  Georgia 

The  principal  founder  was  General 

James  Oglethorpe.     He  came  from  England  with  one 

hundred  and  sixteen  settlers,  and  began  to  build  the 

city  of  Savannah. 


LORD  BALTIMORE. 

and  South  Carolina, 
was  made  in  1733. 


CHAPTER    CLXX.— America   Continued. 
Causes  which  led  to  the  Revolution. 

1.  The  reader  will  have  learnt,  by  the  preceding 
chapters,  how  the  whole  of  the  sea-coast,  between  New 

12.  Who  gave  Maryland  to  Lord  Baltimore?  What  of  Lord  Baltimore?  When 
did  he  settle  Maryland?  13.  When  was  Carolina  settled?  When  divided?  First 
settlement  in  Georgia ?     Who  founded  it?     What  city  did  he  build ? 


596 


UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


Brunswick  and  Florida,  became  covered  with  colonies, 
wliicli  were  all  under  the  government  of  Great  Britain. 
The  inhabitants  were  growing  numerous. 

2.  When  the  king  of  Great  Britain  and  his  ministers 
beheld  the  prosperous  condition  of  the  colonies,  they 
determined  to  derive  some  profit  from  them.  For  this 
purpose,  in  1765,  the  British  parliament  passed  what 
was  called  the  Stamp  x\.ct. 

3.  Their  object  was,  to  take  money  out  of  the 
pockets  of.the  Americans  for  the 
use  of  the  king  and  ministry. 
But  the  Americans  were  resolved 
that  no  king  on  earth  should  take 
their  property,  without  their 
own  consent.  Patrick  Henry, 
a  famous  Virginian,  told  his 
countr}mien  not  to  mind  about 
stamj^ed    paper,    but    to   write 

on  any  paper  they  liked  best. 

4.  They  made  so  strong  an  opposition  to  the  Stamp 
Act,  that  parliament  was  forced  to  repeal  it.  But  a 
tax  was  soon  afterward  laid  on  tear;  so  that  no  Ameri- 


PATRICK   IIEXRY. 


Chapter  CLXX. — 1.  What  of  the  American  sea-coast  ?  2.  What  of  the  kinp: 
and  ministers  of  Great  Brilaiii  ?  What  did  the  parliament  do?  3.  Their  object? 
What  did  the  Americans  resolve?  What  did  Patrick  Henry  say?  4.  What  did 
tboy  do?     What  of  the  lax  on  tea?     Wliat  of  soldiers? 


AMERICA.  597 


can  lady  could  give  a  tea-party,  without  paying  a  tax 
to  England.  Soldiers  were  sent  to  America  to  compel 
the  people  to  obey  these  unjust  laws. 

5.  In  the  year  1770,  a  quarrel  took  place  between 
some  of  these  soldiers  and  the  inhabitants  of  Boston. 
A  company  of  the  British  red-coats  assembled  in  State 
street,  and  iired  upon  a  crowd  of  unarmed  j)eople. 
Three  of  them  fell  dead  in  the  street,  and  five  more 
were  wounded.  This  affair  was  called  the  Boston  Mas- 
sacre. 

6.  But  instead  of  being  affrighted  by  this  blood- 
shed, the  people  grew  more  determined  in  their  resist- 
ance to  the  tyranny  of  England.  In  the  year  1773, 
some  ships  were  sent  from  London  to  the  colonies,  laden 
with  cargoes  of  tea. 

7.  Three  of  the  ships  arrived  in  the  harbor  of  Bos- 
ton. One  night,  a  number  of  persons  went  on  board, 
in  the  disguise  of  Indians,  and  threw  half  the  tea  over- 
board. These  Indian  figures  were  never  seen  again; 
and,  to  this  day,  nobody  can  tell  who  they  were. 

8.  When  tiding^  of  this  event  were  carried  to  Eng- 
land, the  king  and  ministry  saw  that  they  could  never 
make  slaves  of  the  Americans,  unless  by  force  of  arms. 

5.  Describe  the  Boston  massacre.  6.  What  of  the  Americans?  Wliat  hap- 
pened in  the  year  1773?  7.  Describe  the  destruction  of  the  tea.  8.  What  did 
the  king  and  ministers  now  do  ? 


598  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

They  therefore  sent  over  large  bodies  of  troops  to  keep 
tlie  people  in  subjection. 


CHAPTER  CLXXI.— America  Continued. 

Account  of  the  Battle  of  Lexington. 

1.  In  1775,  General  Tliomas  Gage  was  the  comman- 
der-in-chief of  the  British  forces  in  America  His 
head-quarters  were  at  Boston. 

2.  On  the  night  of  the  18th  of  April,  General  Gage 
sent  a  detachment  of  eight  hundred  grenadiers  to  seize 
some  cannon  and  ammunition  at  Concord,  about 
eighteen  miles  from  Boston.  The  grenadiers  marched 
all  night,  and  reached  the  town  of  Lexington  at  sunrise. 

3.  Lexington  is  a  village  about  twelve  miles  from 
Boston.  A  meeting-house  sjiood  by  the  road-side,  and 
near  it  there  was  a  level  tract  of  grass.  On  this  green 
space,  a  company  of  militia  were  drawn  up. 

4.  Major  Pitcaim  was  the  British  commander.     A? 
soon  as  he  saw  tlie  militia,  he  galloped  forward,  bran 
dishing  his  sword,  and  drawing  a  pistol  from  his  hoi 

Chapter  CLXXL— 1.  What  of  General  Gage?    2.  What  did  he  do?    Wliat  0/ 
the  grenadiers?     3-6.  Wliat  took  place  at  Lexington  and  Coi^cord  '/ 


AMERICA.  599 

ster — "  Disperse,   you   rebels  !"    lie   shouted.    ''  Throw 
down  your  anns  and  disperse !" 

5.  As  lie  spoke,  without  giving  the  militia  men  time 
to  run  away,  he  discharged  his  pistol  at  them.  The 
British  soldiers  followed  the  example  of  Major  Pitcairn, 
and  fired  a  whole  volley  at  the  Americans.  Several  of 
them  were  killed  and  w^ounded. 

6.  The  British  troops  then  continued  their  march  to 
Concord.  But  the  Americans  were  now  collecting  on 
all  sides.  When  the  British  reached  Concord,  they  had 
a  skirmish  with  a  party  of  militia  there.  They  now 
found  it  necessary  to  retreat  as  fast  as  possible. 

7.  As  they  marched  along  the  road,  the  people  fired 
at  them  from  behind  the  fences  and  stone  walls,  and 
out  of  the  windows  of  the  houses.  At  every  step, 
some  of  the  British  soldiers  fell ;  but  their  comrades 
hurried  on,  without  heeding  them. 

8.  When  General  Gage  heard  what  was  going  on,  he 
sent  Lord  Percy  out  of*Boston,  with  nine  hundred  men 
and  two  brass  cannon.  Lord  Percy  met  Major  Pitcairn 
and  the  grenadiers  scampering  back  to  Boston  as  fast 
as  they  could  go  ;  and,  by  firing  his  cannon,  he  kept 
the  Americans  off. 


1.  How  were  the  British  annoyed  in  their  retreat  to  Boston  ?     8.  What  did 
General  Gage  do  ? 


600  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

9.  But  tlie  moment  the  troops  resumed  their  march, 
the  Americans  shot  at  them  again  from  behind  the 
fences.  Before  the  British  arrived  in  sight  of  Boston, 
they  had  lost  nearly  three  hundred  men,  in  killed, 
wounded,  and  prisoners.  The  loss  of  the  Americans 
was  much  less. 

10.  The  news  of  this  battle  spread  all  over  the  coun- 
try, and  wherever  the  story  was  told,  the  people  quit- 
ted their  business  and  turned  soldiers.  For  now  the 
Kevolution  had  l>roken  out,  and  it  was  easy  to  foresee 
that  there  would  be  a  bloody  war. 


CHAPTER  CLXXIL— America   Continukd. 

The  Battle  of  Bunker  Hill, 

1.  In  a  short  time  after  the  battle  of  Lexington,  a 
large  American  army  was  ass^bibled  round  Boston. 
The  British  troops  could  not  venture  out  of  the  town. 
They  found  it  difficult  to  get  provisions  enough  to  live 
upon. 


9.  What  of  the  Americans  and  British  ?  10,  "What  effect  had  the  uews  of  this 
battle? 

Chapter  CLXXIL— 1.  "Where  did  an  American  army  assemble  ?  "V\'liat  of  the 
British  troops? 


AMERICA.  601 

2.  On  tlie  niglit  of  tlie  sixteenth,  of  June,  Colonel 
Prescott  marched  with  a  thousand  Americans  to  Bunk- 
er Hill,  in  Charlestown.  On  the  summit  of  this  hill, 
with  their  spades,  they  threw  up  a  wall  of  earth  and 
eods  as  high  as  their  breasts. 

3.  They  intended  this  as  a  fortification,  from  wdiich 
they  liiight  fire  upon  the  British  fleet  which  Jay  in 
Boston  harbor.  No  sooner  did  the  British  admiral  see 
the  wall  of  earth  and  sods,  than  he  began  to  batter  it 
with  cannon-shot  and  bombs.  At  the  same  time.  Gen- 
eral Gage  sent  three  thousand  troops  to  take  Bunker 
Hill  b}'  storm. 

4.  The  troops  landed  in  Charlestown,  and  marched 
boldly  up  the  hill.  They  made  a  formidable  aj)pear- 
ance,  moving  in  a  long  red  line,  with  their  glittering 
muskets.  As  they  advanced,  the  cannon  balls  from 
the  British  fleet  flew  high  over  their  heads,  and  struck 
among  the  Americans. 

5.  But  when  the  British  soldiers  had  come  within 
twenty  yards  of  the  fortification,  the  Americans  sud- 
denly saluted  them  with  a  tremendous  volley  of  mus- 
ketry. The  smoke  cleared  away,  and  there  were  th ) 
king's  soldiers  retreating  in  confusion  to  the  w^ater  side. 


2.  What  did  Colonel  Prescott  do  ?     3.  What  of  the  British  admiral  and  General 
Gage? 


602 


UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


6.  But  many  of  them  lay  dead  or  wounded  upon  the 
MIL  In  the  mean  time,  Charlestown  had  been  set  on 
fire,  and  was  blazmo^  like  an  immense  farnace,  and 
throwing  clouds  of  smoke  over  the  whole  scene. 

7.  The  officers  encouraged  the  British  troops,  and  led 
them  again  into  battle.  But  a  second  time  they  were 
driven  back,  with  terrible  slauschter.  It  was  not  till 
the  third  trial,  that  the  British  were  able  to  reacL  the 
breast-work. 


THE  BATTLE  OP  BUNKER  HILL. 


8.  The  Americans  had  now  fired  away  all  their  pow 
der  and  ball,  and  were  forced  to  retreat.  General  War- 
ren was  among  the  last  to  leave  the  breast-work.     A 


4-9.  Describe  the  battle  of  Bunker  Hill. 


AMERICA.  '    603 

Britisli  officer  snatclied  a  musket  from  a  soldier,  and 
sliot  the  gallant  Warren  dead. 

9.  But  many  a  brave  Englishman  had  laid  down  his 
life  that  day,  and  blood  enough  had  been  shed  to  red- 
den all  the  grass  on  Bunker  Hill. 

10.  In  about  a  fortnight  after  this  battle.  General 
George  Washington  arrived  at  Cambridge.  The  conti- 
nental congress  at  Philadelphia  had  appointed  him 
commander-in-chief  of  the  American  armies.  He  man- 
aged matters  so  skilfully,  that  the  British  were  driven 
out  of  Boston,  in  March,  1Y76. 


CHAPTER   CLXXin.— America    Continued. 
Progress  of  the  War.    Capture  of  Burgoyne. 

1.  It  was  on  the  fourth  of  July,  1776,  that  the  con- 
tinental congress  declared  the  United  States  a  free  and 
independent  nation.  This  declaration  caused  great  re- 
joicings all  over  America.  Yet  our  affairs  were  not  iu 
a  very  promising  situation. 

2.  After    the     enemy    evacuated    Boston,    General 

10.  What  of  General  AVashington  ?    When  were  the  British  driven  out  of  Boston  ? 
Chapter  CLXXIII. — 1.  When  were  the  United  States  declared  free  and  inde- 
pendent? 


> 


604 


UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


Washington  marched  from  that  town  to  JS^ew  York. 
Some  important  battles  were  fought  between  our 
troops  and  the  British;  but  Washington  was  finally 
compelled  to  retreat,  by  superior  force.  When  winter 
came  on,  the  American  soldiers  were  almost  naked. 
Wherever  they  marched,  their  bare  feet  left  bloody 
tracks  upon  the  frozen  ground. 

8.  But,  on  a  dark  December  night,  Washington  cross- 
ed the  Delaware  river  with  his  troops,  and  marched  to 
Trenton,  in  JSTew  Jersey.  A  large  body  of  Hessian 
soldiers,  who  had  been  hired  by  the  English,  were  en- 
camped at  this  place.  They  were  suddenly  startled  by 
the  shouts  of  the  Americans,  who  had  broken  into  their 
camp,  and  they  all  laid  down  their  arms. 

4.  Lord  Cornwallis,  the  British  general,.was  now  in 
pursuit  of  the  Americans;  but  Washington  marched  to 
Princeton,  and  attacked  a  party  of  the  enemy,  who  had 
taken  post  in  the  college  edifice.  Sixty  of  them  were 
killed,  and  three  hundred  taken  prisoners. 

5.  The  next  year,  1777,  the  gallant  Marquis  de 
Lafayette  came  from  France  to  assist  the  Americans. 
He  was  then  only  nineteen  years  old;  but  Congress  a])- 
pointed  him  major-general,  and  he  became  one  of  the 
bravest  and  best  in  the  army. 

2.  What  of  Washington ?     What  of  the  American  soldiers?     3.  Describe  ih^ 
attack  upon  Trenton.     4.  Attack  upon  Princeton.    6.  What  of  Lafayette  ? 


AMERICA. 


605 


6.  During  tliis  year,  tlie  Britisli  general,  Burgoyne, 
marclied  witli  a  large  army  from  Canada.  He  sailed 
down  Lake  CliamjDlain,  and  went  from  thence  to 
Saratoga.  But  General  Gates  was  waiting  for  him 
there,  with  ten  thousand  American  troops.  Many 
battles  were  fought  between  them  and  the  British. 

T.  In  one  of  these  battles,  Colonel  Cilley,  an  Ameri- 
can officer,  took  a  brass  cannon  from  the  enemy  with 
his  own  hands.  He  immediately  got  astride  of  it, 
shouting  and  encouraging  his  men,  and  waving  his 
sword,  as  if  he  were  seated  on  a  war-horse. 

8.  On  the  eighteenth  of  October,  General  Bui'goyne 
was  forced  to  surrender.     He  and  his  aids  rode  out  of 

the  camp  to  meet  General  Gates ; 
and  Burgoyne  took  his  sword  by 
the  point,  and  offered  the  hilt 
to  the  American  general.  At  the 
same  time,  all  the  British  army 
grounded  their  arms. 

9.  This  great  success  of  the 
Americans  induced  the  French 
to  make  a  treaty  of  alliance  with 
them,  and  to  declare  war  against  Great  Britain.  France 
was  persuaded  by  the  famous  Benjamin  Franklin  to 

6.  What  of  Burgoyne  ?   General  Gates  ?    7.  What  of  Colonel  Cilley  ?    8.  Describe 
the  surrender  of  General  Burgoyne.     9.  What  did  the  French  do  ? 


BENJAMI^^    FRANKLIN. 


606  •         UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

send  a  fleet,  and  afterward  an  army,  to  fight  on  our 
side. 


CHAPTEE  CLXXIY.— America  Continijed. 
The  Story  of  the  traitor  Arnold  and  Major  AndrL 

1.  It  would  fill  a  mucli  larger  book  than  mine,  if  I 
were  to  relate  the  particulars  of  all  the  battles,  skir- 
mishes, and  other  warlike  events  that  occurred  during 
the  Revolution.  I  must  therefore  leave  far  the  greater 
part  of  them  untold. 

2.  One  of  the  most  interesting  incidents  in  the 
whole  war  took  place  in  1780.  General  Arnold, 
who  had  shown  himself  a  very  brave  officer,  became 
discontented,  and  resolved  to  desert  the  cause  of  his 
country. 

3.  Pretending  that  his  wounds  rendered  him  unfit 
for  active  service,  he  requested  that  the  command  of 
West  Point  might  be  given  him.  This  strong  fortress 
was  situated  amon«:  the  hio-hlands,  on  the  shore  of  the 
Hudson  river.  Its  loss  would  have  been  a  severe  mis- 
fortune to  the  Americans. 

CiiAi'TEH  CLXXIV.— 2.  What  of  General  Arnold?    3.  What  did  he  request? 


AMERICA.  607 

4.  No  sooner  had  Arnold  got  possession  of  West 
Point,  than  he  sent  to  Sir  Henry  Clinton,  the  British 
general  at  New  York,  offering  to  surrender  the  for- 
tress. Sir  Henry  Clinton  -  sent  a  young  officer,  named 
Andre,  to  meet  Arnold,  and  contrive  the  means  of 
completing  this  treacherous  business. 

5.  Major  Andre  had  a  meeting  with  Arnold,  and 
they  arranged  the  manner  in  which  the  fortress  was  to 
be  given  up  to  the  British.  Andre  then  wished  to  get 
on  board  the  ship  Vulture,  which  had  brought  him  up 
the  river  from  New  York. 

6.  But  the  Vulture  had  now  sailed  further  down 
the  stream,  and  it  was  necessary  for  Major  Andre  to 
return  by  land.  He  therefore  took  off  his  uniform  and 
put  on  a  common  coat,  in  order  that  the  Americans 
might  not  know  that  he  was  a  British  officer. 

7.  Then  mounting  a  horse,  he  set  out  on  the  road  to 
New  York.  He  had  to  pass  through  a  part  of  the 
coiuitry  that  was  guarded  by  the  American  troops,  but 
he  travelled  most  of  the  way  without  any  trouble  or 
hindrance. 

8.  But,  when  Major  Andre  reached  a  place  called 
Tarrytown,  he  saw  three  young  militia  men  by  the 
road-side.     They  came  up  to  him  and  seized  his  horse 

4.  To  whom  did  he  send?    What  did  Sir  Henry  Clinton  do  ?    5.  What  of  Andre  ? 


608  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

by  the  bridle.  IS'ow  Andre  had  a  passport  from  Gen- 
eral Arnold  in  Lis  pocket,  and  if  he  had  shown  it  to 
the  militia  men,  they  would  have  let  him  go  free.  But 
instead  of  that,  he  asked  them  where  they  came  from. 

9.  "From  down  the  river,"  they  replied.  When 
Andre  heard  this,  he  mistook  the  three  militia  men 
for  tories,  or  friends  of  the  British.  "  I  am  a  British 
officer,"  said  he.     "  Let  me  pass  on ;  for  I  am  in  haste !" 

10.  But  these  words  were  fatal  to  poor  Andre.  The 
three  men  took  him  prisoner,  and  found  some  treason- 
able papers  in  his  boots.  General  Arnold  made  his  es- 
cape to  JN'ew  York ;  but  poor  Major  Andre  remained  in 
the  hands  of  the  Americans. 

11.  He  was  tried  as  a  spy,  and  condemned  to  death. 
Washington  and  all  the  army  were  sorry  for  him,  but 
nothing  could  save  him  from  the  gallows.  He  was 
therefore  executed. 


CHAPTER   CLXX  v.— America    Continued. 
War  in  the  South. — Surrender  of  Comwallis. 

1.  In  the  latter  part  of  the  war,  many  important 
events  were   transacted   in   the  Southern  states.     In 

6-1 1.  DescribeTiis  journey,  capture,  and  death. 


AMERICA.  609 

1780,  General  Gates,  tlie  conqueror  of  Burgoyne,  was 
defeated  by  Lord  Cornwallis,  at  Camden,  in  South  Car- 
olina. Congress  then  sent  General  Greene  to  command 
the  army  of  the  south. 

2.  General  Greene  had  been  a  Quaker  in  his  youth; 
but  when  the  Eevolution  broke 
out,  he  became  the  best  officer 
in  the  American  army,  except 
General  Washington.  This  was 
proved  by  his  good  conduct  in 
the  Southern  states. 

3.  He  fought  several  battles 
^y^^  with  the  British,  and  though  he 
GENERAL  GREENE.  was  somctimes  compelled  to  re- 

treat by  the  enemy's  superior  force,  yet  they  never 
gained  any  real  advantage  over  him.  By  his  skill  and 
valor,  the  British  troops  were  finally  driven  into  the 
city  of  Charleston.  After  this  event,  there  was  no 
more  trouble  with  the  enemy  in  the  south. 

4.  Lord  Cornwallis,  with  a  large  army,  was  now  in 
Virginia.  The  American  and  French  troops  proceeded 
thither  to  attack  him.  General  Washins^ton  had  com- 
mand  of  the  whole;  and,  under  Washington,  the  Count 
de  Rochambeau  was  commander  of  the  French. 

Chapter  CLXXV.— 1.  What  took  place  in  1T80?  2,  3.  What  of  General  Greena? 
i.  What  of  Lord  Cornwallis  ?    Who  headed  the  Americans  and  French  ? 


610  UNIYERSAL  HISTORY. 

5.  They  besieged  the  British  at  Yorktown ;  for  Lord 
Cornwallis  did  not  feel  strong  enough  to  meet  them  in 
the  open  field.  The  Americans  built  breastworks  round 
about  the  intrenchments  of  the  British,  and  cannon- 
aded them  night  and  day. 

-  6.  Finally,  on  the  nineteenth  of  October,  1781,  Lord 
Cornwallis  agreed  to  surrender  his  army.  But  he  was 
ashamed  to  go  through  the  ceremony  of  delivering  his 
sword  to  the  conqueror ;  and  he  therefore  sent  General 
O'Hara  to  do  it  in  his  stead. 

7.  General  O'Hara  accordingly  marched  forth  at 
the  head  of  the  vanquished  army.  When  he  came  in 
presence  of  General  Washington,  he  offered  him  his 
sword.  But  Washington  pointed  to  General  Lincoln; 
for  it  was  not  proper  that  he  himself  should  receive 
the  sword  of  any  but  Lord  Cornwallis. 

8.  General  Lincoln  took  General  O'Hara's  sword,  and 
the  whole  British  army  grounded  their  arms,  and  yield- 
ed their  banners  to  the  victorious  Americans. 

9.  After  the  surrender  of  Cornwallis,  no  important 
battles  were  fought,  although  peace  was  not  declared 
till  1783.  In  the  summer  and  autumn  of  that  year, 
all  the  British  troops  sailed  homeward,  and  left 
America  free  and  independent. 

5.  Describe  the  siege  of  Yorktosvn.     6-8.  Describe  the  surrender  of  Lord  Corn- 
wallia  aixd  his  army.  .  9.  When  was  peace  declared  ?    "What  of  the  British  troops? 


AMERICA. 


611 


10.  Thus  you  see  tliat  tlie  revolutionary  war,  whicli 
began  by  the  battle  of  Lexington,  in  1775,  was  termi- 
nated, after  having  continued  eight  years.  The  suffer- 
ings of  our  countrymen  were  very  great,  but  the  reward 
i*f  their  patience  and  patriotism  was  also  great. 


CHAPTER  CLXXYL— America  Continued. 
The  Presidents. 
When  the  revolutionary  war  was  over,  the  people 
of  the  United  States  found  it 
necessary  to  adopt  a  consti- 
tution of  government.  The 
present  Federal  Constitution 
was  prepared  by  some  of  the 
wisest  men  in  the  country.  It 
went  into  operation  in  1789. 

2.  The  good  and  illustrious 
Washington  was  our  first  pres- 
ident. He  came  into  office  in 
1789.  Men  were  appointed  to 
assist  him,  called  the  Secretary 


WASHINGTON. 


10.  How  long  did  the  revolutionary  war  last?  What  of  the  sufferings  of  the 
Americans  ?     Tlieir  reward  ? 

Chapter  CLXXVI. — 1.  What  did  the  people  now  find  it  necessary  to  do?  By 
whom  was  the  constitution  prepared?  When  did  it  go  into  operation  ?  2.  What  of 
Washington  ?    His  assistants  ? 


612  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

of  State,  tlie  Secretary  of  War,  tlie  Secretary  of  tlie 
Navy,  tlie  Secretary  of  the  Treasury,  and  tlie  Attorney- 
General.     This  last  was  the  president's  lawyer. 

3.  Washington  and  Congress,  which  was  composed 
of  representatives  of  the  people,  then  set  to  work  to 
frame  measures  for  raising  the  necessary  money  to  carry 
on  the  government.  This  was  done  by  placing  taxes 
on  the  goods  that  arrived  in  ships.  These  measures 
were  called  the  revenue  system. 

4.  Next,  they  formed  the  Judiciary,  a  body  of  men 
appointed  to  say  what  was  law,  and  to  see  that  the 
laws  were  carried  out.  So  that  very  soon  all  the  de- 
partments of  the  government  went  into  operation. 

5.  Washington  was  re-elected  president  in  1793,  and 
served  eight  years  in  all.  In 
1797,  John  Adams  was  ap- 
pointed to  succeed  him,  and 
became  the  second  president 
of  the  United  States.  Dur- 
ing his  administration,  Wash- 
ington  became  the   capital   in- 

fU^  stead  of  New  York.  - 

JOHN  ADAMa  6.  The  most  mournful  event 

that  had   ever  befallen  America,  was  the  death  of 

3.  What  of  the  revenue  system  ?    4.  What  of  the  judiciary  ?    Operation  of  tho 
government?    5.  What  happened  mn93?    Inllon     What  of  Vho  capital? 


AMERICA. 


613 


Washington.  It  took  place  in  1799,  wlien  lie  was 
sixty-eiglit  years  old.  The  whole  country  was  over- 
whelmed withi  sorrow.  But  Washington  had  done  his 
work  on  earth,  and  it  was  fit  that  he  should  ascend  to 
heaven. 

Y.  The  next  president,  after  John  Adams,  was 
Thomas  Jefferson.  *  The  most 
remarkable  event  of  Jefferson's 
administration  was  the  pur- 
chase of  Louisiana  from  France, 
in  the  year  1803.  This  im- 
mense territory  included  the 
country  between  the  Mississippi 
and  the  Kocky  Mountains.  It 
was  bousrht  for  fifteen  millions 


THOMAS  JEFFERSON. 


of  dollars. 

8.  In  1804,  the  president  sent  several  ships  of  war 
against  the  Algerian  pirates  in  the  Mediterranean 
sea,  who  had  attacked  our  ships,  and  had  made  slaves 
of  our  citizens.  The  pirates  received  a  sound  drub- 
bing, and  behaved  better  for  some  years  afterward. 
But  they  were  not  finally  crushed  till  the  year 
1815. 

9.  Jefferson,  like  Washington,  served   eight   years, 


6.  What  of  the  death  of  Washington?     T.  What  of  Thomas  Jefferson?    What 
of  Louisiana  ?     8.  What  of  the  Algerian  pirates  ? 


614 


UNIYEESAL  HISTORY. 


JAMES  MADISON. 


and  was  succeeded^  in  1809,  by 
James  Madison.  Durino-  his  ad- 
ministration,  the  United  States 
were  on  ill  terms  with  Great 
Britain,  and  there  was  great 
reason  to  fear  that  hostilities 
would  ensue. 

10.  Accordingly,  on  the  eight- 
eenth of  June,  1812,  Congress 
made  a  declaration  of  war.  Troops  were  sent  to  in- 
vade Canada.  There  were  several  gallant  conflicts  on 
the  Canadian  frontier ;  but  the  Americans  did  not  suc- 
ceed in  conquering  the  province. 

11.  Many  glorious  \dctories  were  won  by  the  Ameri- 
can  navy,  both  on  the  ocean  and  the  lakes.  Hitherto  the 
British  navy  had  always  been  triumphant ;  but  now,  om^ 
brave  sailors  often  compelled  them  to  haul  down  their  flag. 

12.  The  last  and  most  brilliant  event  of  the  war, 
was  the  battle  of  New  Orleans.  On  the  morning  of 
the  eighth  of  January,  1815,  a  strong  British  army  ad- 
vanced to  take  the  city.  But  they  were  driven  back 
with  immense  slaughter  by  the  Americans  under 
General  Jackson.  Peace  had  been  made  before  this 
battle  took  place,  though  it  was  not  yet  known. 

9.  What  happened  in  1809?    What  was  there  reason  to  fear?     10.  What  hap- 
pened in  1812  ?     11.  What  of  victories?     12.  Describe  the  battle  of  New  Orleans. 


AMERICA. 


615 


13.  In  1817,  president  Madison  retired  from  office, 
and  was  succeeded  by  James  Munroe.  During  the 
eiglit  years  of  liis  administration,  tlie  country  was  quiet 
and  prosperous.  Many  territories  became  states,  and 
large  tracts  of  our  western  country  were  settled. 

14.  In  1818,  laws  were  passed  giving  pensions  to  the 
old  soldiers  of  tlie  Revolution, 
and  a  treaty  was  made  with 
England,  by  which  American 
fisherman  were  alloAved  to  fish 
off  the  coasts  of  the  Biitish 
provinces.  This  was  a  very  im- 
portant arrangement  for  the 
United  States. 

15.  Monroe  was  twice  presi- 
dent, and  was  succeeded  in  1825  by  John  Quincy 
Adams,  the  son  of  John  Adams,  the  second  president. 

Little  of  interest  happened  du- 
ring his  administration.  The 
country  remained  quiet,  and  was 
at  peace  with  the  whole  world, 
except  a  few  Creek  and  Cherokee 
Indians  in  Georgia. 

16.  On  the  Fourth  of  July, 
1826,  two  presidents  died,  Jef- 

j.  Q.  ADAMS.  ferson  and  Adams.     Jefferson's 

27 


JAMES   MONROE. 


616  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

last  words  were,  "  I  commend  my  soul  to  God,  and  niv 
dangliter  to  my  country."  Adams,  who  did  not  know 
of  the  death  of  Jefferson,  uttered  these  words  with  his 
expiring  breath :  "  Jeiferson  survives." 

17.  Andrew  Jackson,  the  hero  of  the  battle  of  ]S"ew 
Orleans,  was  made  president  in 
1829.  While  he  was  at  the  head 
of  the  nation,  the  state  of  South 
Carolina  undertook  to  disobey  a 
law  of  the  United  States,  on  the 
ground  that  it  was  more  favorable 
to  the  North  than  to  the  South. 

AxXDRKw  jACKsox.  Jacksou  seut  soldiers  to  South  Car- 
olina, and  threatened  to  go  himself,  but,  in  the  mean 
time,  Henry  Clay  proposed  the  Compromise  measure, 
which  settled  all  difficulties. 

18.  The  other  measures  of  Jackson  were  :  the  closin^r 
of  the  United  States  Bank,  which  brought  great  mis- 
fortunes upon  the  country ;  the  removal  of  many  tribes 
of  Indians  beyond  the  Mississippi;  a  war  with  the 
Seminoles  in  Florida,  who  refused  to  leave  their  homes  ; 


13.  What  happened  in  1817  ?  What  was  the  state  of  the  country?  14.  What 
laws  were  passed?  What  treat v  was  made?  15.  Who  became  piesideut  in  ISi'at 
Whi.t  of  the  country?  IG.  What  happened  iulS'JG?  Give  the  last  words  of 
Jefferson.  Of  Adams.  IT.  AVhat  of  Andrew  Jackson  ?  State  the  difficulty  in 
South  Carolina.     18.  What  were  the  other  measures  of  Jackson's  administration? 


AMERICA. 


G17 


and  tlie  compelling  of  France  and  Portugal  to  pay  cer- 
tain large  sums  of  money  long  due  from  tliem  to  the 
United  States. 


CIIAPTEE    CLXXYII.— America    Continued. 
The  Presidents  contimied. 
1  Marti:s"  Van    Buren   became   president  in  1837. 
Tlie  country  was  tLen  suffering  from  the  extravagance 

of  the  people,  the  great  expansion 
of  the  credit  system,  and  the 
closing  of  the  United  States 
Bank.  This  was  called  the  panic 
of  1837,  and  it  lasted  several 
years. 

2.  The  country  was  far  from 
prosperous.  The  Seminole  war 
continued,  but  was  finally  con- 
cluded by  the  capture  of  Osceola.  A  war  seemed 
at  one  time  likely  to  break  out  between  the  United 
States  and  England  relative  to  the  boundary  between 
Maine  and  New  Brunswick;  peace  was  made,  how- 
ever, by  General  Scott,  who  was  sent  to  the  scene  of 
disturbance. 

3.  Van  Buren  had  a  hard  time  of  it  for  four  years, 


MAKTIN   VAN    BUREN. 


Chapter  CLXXVII. — 1.  What  of  Martia  Van  Buren?     The  state  of  the  eoun- 
try?     2.  What  of  wars? 


618 


UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


WILLIAM  H.    HARRISON. 


and  was  succeeded,  in  1841,  by  Wil- 
liam Henry  Harrison.  Harrison  had 
been  a  general,  and  bad  fougbt  many 
battles  witli  tbe  English  and  the 
Indians  in  the  north-west.  He  was 
too  old,  however,  to  be  president, 
and  died  exactly  a  month  after  his 
inauguration. 

4.  Now  you  must  know  that  the 
people  had  chosen  a  vice-president,  at  the  time  they 
had  elected  Harrison.  If  the  president  lives,  the  vice- 
president  is  the  chief  officer  of  the  Senate ;  if  he  dies, 
he  takes  his  place.  John  Tyler  now  became  president, 
after  the  death  of  Harrison. 

5.  Tyler  became  very  unpopular  at  an  early  date,  by 
refusing  to  sign  ceii}ain  laws  made 
by  Congress.  All  the  members  of 
his  cabinet  deserted  him,  except 
Daniel  Webster. 

6.  At  this  period,  a  great  deal 
was  said  about  the  annexation  of 
Texas.  Texas  was  a  part  of  Mex- 
ico,  in  which  a  great  many  Ameri- 
cans had  settled.     Texas  then  de- 


JOHN   TYLER. 


3.  What  of  Harrison?     His  death  ?     4.  "What  of  the  vice-president?     Who  suc- 
ceeded Harrison  ?    5.  Was  Tyler  popular?     W^hat  of  Daniel  Webster? 


AMERICA. 


619 


clared  itself  independent  of  Mexico,  and  asked  for  ad- 
mission to  tlie  United  States.     After  a  long  debate  in 
Congress,  the  bill  making  Texas  a  state  was  passed. 
7.  James  K.  Polk  became  president  in  1845,  and 
Mexico  immediately  made  war  on 
Texas    for    Laving    joined    tke 
United  States.     This  led  to  what 
is  called  the  Mexican  war,  which 
lasted  somewliat  over  a  year. 

8.  Gen.  Zachary  Taylor    was 
sent    against     Mexico,    and    he 
fought   the   glorious    battles   of 
Palo  Alto,  Resaca  de  la  Palma, 
General   Scott  was  also  sent,  l)y 
sea.      He  took  the  fortress  of 
Vera  Cruz,  and  the  capital  city 
of    Mexico.      By  a  treaty   of 
peace  made  in  1848,  the  Amer- 
icans   obtained   the   territoiies 
of  New  Mexico,  Utah,  and  Cali- 
fornia. 

9.    Zachary   Taylor  was    re- 
ZACHARY  TAYLOR.  wardcd    for    his    brilliant    ser^ 


and 


JAMES  K.   POLK. 

Buena  Vista. 


G.  What  of  Texas  ?  What  followed  in  Congress  ?  V.  Who  became  president 
in  1845?  What  followed?  8.  What  battles  did  Taylor  fight?  What  cities  did 
Scott  take  ?     What  did  the  United  States  gain  by  tho  war  7 


620 


UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


vices  in  Mexico,  by  being  elected  to  tlie  presidency. 
He  entered  upon  the  office  on  the  fourth  of  March, 
1849.  He  was  the  twelfth  president  of  the  United 
States.  *  Millard  Fillmore,  of  New  York,  was  chosen 
vice-president. 

10.  At  this  time,  California,  owing  to  its  gold 
mines,  had  become  filled  with  Americans,  who  natu- 
rally desired  that  the  tenitory  should  be  admitted  to 
the  union  as  a  state.  The  people  petitioned  Congress 
to  this  efi*ect  in  February,  1850.  This  led  to  a  long 
discussion,  but  California  was  admitted  in  the  course  of 
the  year. 

11.  General  Taylor  died  after  having  been  a  year  in 
office,  and  Millard  Fillmore  succeeded  him.     During 

his  term,  the  United  States  came 
near  having  a  war  with  Great 
Britain  about  the  Newfoundland 
fisheries,  but  the  difficulty  was 
amicably  an'anged. 

12.  In   1852,  a  squadron   of 
vessels  of  w^ar  were  sent  to  Ja- 
pan with  a  letter  to  the  empe- 
ror from  the  president,  advising 
a  commercial  exchange  of  products  between  the  two 

9.  How  was  Taylor  rewarded  ?     What  of  Millard  Fillmore?     .10.  What  of  Cali- 


MILLARD   FILLMORE. 


foruia?     11.  When  did  General  Tavlor  di 


What  of  Millard  Fillmore's  term 


AMERICA.  621 

countries.  The  mission  was  successful;  and  a  treaty 
was  made  which  led  to  tlie  visit  of  the  famous  Japanese 
embassy  to  the  United  States  in  1860. 

13.  Franklin   Pierce    became   president   in   March, 

1853.  Six  wars  were  threat- 
ened, with  as  many  different 
powers,  during  his  four  years 
of  office,  but  they  were  all 
avoided  by  friendly  negotia- 
tion. In  1853,  Dr.  Kane,  of 
whose  discoveries  I  have 
spoken,  sailed  to  the  Arctic 
regions.      Difficulties  arose  in 

Kansas,  which  have  since  been  in  a  great  measure  set- 
tled. 

14.  England,  France,  and  Turkey  were  at  this  period 
engaged  in  a  war  Avith  Eussia.  England  was  in  want 
of  soldiers,  and  her  ambassador  at  Washington,  and 
her  consuls  in  various  American  ports,  openly  engaged 
in  enlisting  men  in  the  United  States.  As  the  country 
was  neutral,  and  wished  to  remain  so,  these  acts  might 
have  compromised  our  government  with  Russia,  and  so 
the  president  sent  the  ambassador  and  the  consuls  back 

12.  What  of  a  squadron  sent  to  Japan  ?  What  did  this  lead  to?  13.  What  of 
Franklin  Pierce's  presidency?  Dr.  Kane?  Kansas?  lA.  Describe  what  occurred 
in  America  during  the  Russian  war. 


FRANKLIN  PIERCE. 


622 


UNIYERSAL  HISTORY. 


to  England.     The  Englisli  were  angry  for  a  time,  but 

as  they  were  plainly  in  the  wrong,  they  soon  got  over  it. 
15.  James  Buchanan  succeeded  Franklin  Pierce  in 

1857.     The  principal  events  of  his  administration  were 

the  attempts  to  admit  Kansas 
as  a  state,  the  war  against  the 
Mormons,  the  panic  of  1857, 
the  purchase  of  Washington's 
Home  and  Tomb  at  Mount  Ver- 
non by  an  association  of  Amer- 
ican ladies,  the  laying  of  the 
Atlantic  telegraph  cable,  and 
the  visit  of  the  Prince  of 
Wales.     The  immense  crop  of 

1860  restored  prosperity  to  the  country,  which  had 

been  suffering  since  1857. 


JAMES  BUCHANAN. 


15.  What  were  the  principal  events  of  James  Buchanan's  adminigtration  ? 


AMERICA. 


623 


THE  CAPITOL  AT  WASHINGTON. 


CHAPTER  CLXXyiII.-.AMEEicA  Continued. 


General  Remarks  upon  the  History  of  the  United  States. 

1.  I  HAVE  now  told  you  a  short  story  about  our  own 
country.  You  will  notice  tliat  the  first  settlement 
made  by  tbe  white  people  in  the  United  States,  was  at 
Virginia,  in  1607;  the  next  in  New  York,  by  the 
Dutch,  in  1613 ;  the  next  by  the  Puritans,  or,  as  we 
often  call  them,  the  Pilgrims,  at  Plymouth,  in  Massa- 
chusetts, in  1620. 

2.  Other  parts   of   the  country  were    soon  settled, 

Chapter  CLXXVIII. — 1.  Where  and  when  was  tlie    first   settlement  in  the 
tJnited  States  ?     The  next  ?     The  next  ? 


624  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

chiefly  by  people  from  England ;  but  colonies  were  es- 
tablished also  by  Swedes,  Germans,  and  French.  Thus 
the  whole  country  along  the  Atlantic  border  became 
inhabited.  By  degrees,  the  settlers  w^ent  further  and 
further  into  the  wilderness,  until  to^vns  and  cities  rose 
up  throughout  the  whole  interior  of  the  land. 

3.  Thus  you  will  observe  that  about  two  hundred 
and  fifty  years  ago,  there  was  not  a  white  inhabitant 
throughout  this  vast  country.  The  Indian  tribes  w^ere 
numerous,  and  their  whole  number,  within  the  present 
boundary  of  the  United  States,  might  have  been  a  mih 
lion,  or  more. 

4.  But  these  lords  of  the  forest  gradually  disappear- 
ed before  the  white  people.  Many  of  them  were  slain 
in  battles  with  the  settlers ;  the  others  gradually  re- 
tired, as  the  forests  were  cut  down,  and  the  lands 
cleared. 

5.  They  lived  by  hunting  wild  deer,  bears,  buffaloes, 
and  wild  turkeys,  and  as  these  animals  fled  from  towns 
and  cities,  and  took  refuge  in  the  forests,  so  the  Indians 
went  with  them. 

6.  In  this  way  the  red  man  vanished  from  the  settled 
portions  of  the  country,  and  at  this  day  there  are  few 
of  them  to  be  seen,  except  in  the  far  western  wilderness. 

2.  What  of  other  parts  of  the  countr}'^?     3.  What  of  this  country  two  hundred 
and  fifty  years  ago?     What  of  the  Indiana?     4,  5.  Tell  the  story  of  the  Indians. 


•      AMERICA.  625 

There  herds  of  wild  deer,  vast  flocks  of  bisons,  bears^ 
wild  turkeys,  and  other  wild  animals,  are  to  be  found, 
and  there  is  now  the  home  of  the  Indians. 

1.  Well,  as  the  Indians  retired,  the  white  people  in- 
creased, being  all  under  the  government  of  the  king  of 
England.  At  the  time  of  the  Eevolution,  they  were 
three  millions  in  number,  and  as  the  king  treated  them 
ill,  they  threw  off  his  authority  and  set  up  a  government 
for  themselves. 

8.  This  government,  or  constitution,  was  formed  in 
1780,  and  we  have  lived  under  it  very  happily  for  over 
seventy  years ;  and  the  little  nation  of  three  millions 
has  now  become  nearly  thirty  millions  strong. 


CHAPTEE   CLXXIX.— America  Continued. 

General     remarks     on    the   History  of    the    United  States 

continued. 

1.  1^  reviewing  the  history  of  our  country,  we  shall 
notice  that  it  has  been  involved  in  three  wars  since  it 


6.  "Where  ar*  they  now  principally  to  be  seen?     "What  of  animals?  1.  What 

of  the  white  people?     Their  numbers  at  the  time  of  the   Revolution?  8.  When 

was  the  American  government  completed?     Population  of  the   United  States  at 
this  time  ? 


626  UNIVERSAL  HISTOflY. 

became  independent.  Previous  to  that  event,  the 
colonists  had  a  great  many  battles  with  the  Indian 
tribes,  and  they  had  a  good  deal  of  iighting  to  do 
in  the  old  French  war,  which  commenced  about 
1755. 

2.  The  revolutionary  war  was  a  great  affair.  The 
people  were  fighting  for  independence,  for  liberty. 
America  was  poor,  and  England  was  rich  and  power- 
ful. In  this  struggle,  our  country  may  be  compared  to 
a  stout  boy  in  the  grasp  of  a  strong  man,  who  is  trying 
to  bind  him  in  chains.  But  the  boy  breaks  the  chains 
asunder,  turns  upon  his  oppressor,  and  drives  him  out 
of  the  country. 

3.  In  looking  back,  then,  we  see  that  our  forefathers 
toiled  and  suffered  much  to  establish  freedom  in  this 
country.  We  are  now  enjoying  the  fruits  of  their 
labors.  Let  us  cherish  .their  memory,  for  they  were 
great  and  good  men.  Let  us  be  thankful  to  Heaven, 
for  it  has  smiled  upon  their  labors. 

4.  Having  taken  a  backward  glance  at  the  history  of 
oui"  country,  let  us  consider  for  a  moment  its  present 
condition.  Look  at  the  towns  and  cities  that  are  scat- 
tered over  the  country.     Look  at  the  hills  and  valleys, 


Chapter  CLXXIX.—l.  Wliat  of  American  wars?      2.  What  of  the  revolu- 
tionary war?     3.  What  of  our  forefathers?    • 


AMERICA.  627 

covered  with  fruit  Threes  and  gardens,  and  yielding  tlieir 
annual  harvests. 

5.  Look  at  the  rivers,  ploughed  with  whizzing  steam- 
boats ;  look  at  the  canals,  bearing  along  their  burden 
of  produce  and  merchandise.  Look  at  the  steam-cars, 
hurrying  along  like  birds  upon  the  wing ;  look  at  our 
sea-ports,  and  see  the  forest  of  shipping  that  is  crowded 
into  their  harbors.  Look  at  our  lines  of  telegraph, 
conveying  messages  and  news  more  rapidly  than  if  they 
were  borne  upon  the  wings  of  the  wind. 

6.  Visit  the  city  of  New  York,  a  busy,  buzzing  hive 
of  men,  containing  nearly  a  million  of  people.  0])serve 
its  beautiful  streets,  its  fine  houses,  the  banks,  the 
churches,  and  other  public  edifices. 

7.  Enter  the  shops,  and  notice  the  beautiful  articles 
of  merchandise  brouo;ht  from  China,  from  Java,  from 
Hindostan,  from  Arabia,  from  all  the  shores  of  the 
Mediterranean  sea,  from  England,  France,  Holland,  and 
the  borders  of  the  Baltic.  v.^ 

8.  Go  to  the  top  of  Trinity  Church,  where  you  can 
have  a  view  of  the  surrounding  waters;  notice  the 
fringe  of  masts  encircling  the  southern  portion  of  the 
city.  See  there  the  fiag  of  every  commercial  country 
under  heaven.     See  there,  too,   ships,   sloops,  schoon- 

4,  5.  "What  shall  we  see  in  looking  at  our  counlry  ?    6,  7.  What  shall  we  observe 
in  the  city  of  New  York  ?     8.  What  shall  we  see  on  the  waters  around  ? 


628  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

ers,  and  steamboats,  coming  and  going  like  bees  in  a 
summer  morning,  all  bringing  tlieir  burden  to  tbe 
Mve. 

9.  Wbat  a  beautiful  sight  is  this,  and  in  a  country, 
too,  wliicli  has  been  settled  but  little  more  than  two 
hundred  years !  And  if  you  would  know  more  of  our 
country,  get  into  a  steamboat  and  sail  up  the  Hudson, 
one  of  the  finest  streams  on  the  face  of  the  globe. 

10.  Visit  Troy,  Albany,  Utica,  Rochester,  and 
Buffalo,  all  of  them  interesting  and  flourishing  towns. 
Observe  the  numerous  villages,  the  handsome  houses, 
and  the  throngs  of  happy  people  that  inhabit  the  state 
of  New  York. 

11.  If  you  are  fond  of  travelling,  cross  Lake  Erie  in 
a  steamboat,  and  proceed  to  Ohio.  See  there  a  coun- 
try that  has  not  been  settled  seventy  years,  now  studded 
over  with  thriving  towns  and  villages.  Go  to  Cincin- 
nati, Louisville,  Nashville,  St.  Louis,  and  proceed  on 
the  bosom  of  the.'great  Mississippi  to  New  Orleans. 

12.  Consider  the  great  valley  through  which  the 
Mississippi  flows;  the  millions  of  people  that  are 
already  there ;  the  rapid  increase  of  wealth,  the  prog- 
ress  of  refinement,  and  the  multiplication  of  the  in- 
habitants. 

■ • m '      ~~~ 

0.  What  of  tho  Hudson?     10.  Cities  of  New  York?     11.  State  of  Ohio?     12. 
"Wliat  of  the  valley  of  tlie  Mississippi  ? 


AMERICA.  629 

13.  "Wlien  you  liave  seen  these  interesting  tilings,  go 
home  and  reflect  upon  them.  Sit  quietly  down,  review 
the  past,  consider  the  present,  and  look  forward  to  the 
future.  What  a  glorious  prospect  for  our  country,  if 
our  present  government  continues,  if  the  people  are  true 
to  their  own  interests,  and  maintain  the  liberty  their 
fathers  left  them ! 

14.  I  say  if  the  people  are  true  to  their  own  interests. 
We  live  in  a  fine  country,  we  have  a  good  form  of 
government,  but  these  will  not  insure  happiness.  If 
the  people  become  indolent,  or  if  they  become  wicked, 
ruin  and  desolation  will  visit  this  land.  Government 
may  be  compared  to  a  house ;  those  who  live  in  it,  must 
take  good  care  of  it. 

15.  They  must  keep  their  doors  and  windows  shut, 
to  prevent  storms  from  driving  in.  If  any  part  decays, 
or  is  injured  by  a  tempest,  it  must  be  repaired.  The 
fires  must  be  watched  at  night.  In  short,  the  whole 
establishment  must  be  taken  care  of  by  people  who 
are  worthy  of  being  trusted,  people  who  are  skilful,  and 
who  cannot  be  tempted  to  neglect  their  duty. 

16.  If  the  house  is  entrusted  to  careless,  ignorant,  or 
faithless  people,  it  may  take  fire,  and  the  inhabitants 
be  burned  up.     Or  it  may  decay  and  fall  down  upon 

13.   What  reflections  should  you  make?     14-16,  To  what  may  government  bo 
compared  ? 


630  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

the  lieads  of  tliose  wlio  dwell  in  it.  Or  it  may  become 
leaky,  so  as  to  admit  the  cold  -wind,  or  the  driving  rain 
or  snow.  It  may  thus  become  a  miserable  and  com- 
fortless habitation. 

17.  It  is  so  with  government.  If  careless,  ignorant, 
or  faithless  rulers  are  chosen  to  take  care  of  the 
country,  wars  and  commotions  may  follow;  poverty 
and  vice  may  spread  over  the  land ;  ignorance  and 
misery  may  take  the  place  of  knowledge  and  prosperity. 
Thus  the  government,  which,  like  a  house,  is  designed 
to  protect  us,  when  ill  managed,  like  a  house  on  fire, 
or  borne  down  by  the  tempest,  may  be  the  cause  of  our 
ruin. 

18.  Think  of  these  things,  my  young  readers,  and 
when  you  come  to  be  men,  always  use  your  influence 
to  have  no  other  rulers  than  those  who  are  capable, 
honest,  and  sincere  friends  of  the  country. 

17.  What  will  happen  to  the  land  if  faithless  rulers  are  chosen  ?    18.  How  should 
you  use  your  influence  'i 


AMERICA. 


631 


SCENE   m  THE  ANDES. 


CHAPTER  CLXXX.— America   Contintjed. 

About     South    ATneriea,     El     Dorado^    and    the   Fountain 

of  Youth, 

1.  No  sooner  had  Columbus  discovered  America, 
than  the  pope  of  Rome  claimed  it  all  as  his  own.  None 
of  the  Catholic  kings  of  Europe  were  supposed  to  have 
any  right  to  plant  colonies  there,  unless  his  holiness 
granted  them  permission. 

'  2,  Alexander  the  Sixth  was  pope  at  that  time.  He 
verf  generously  bestowed"~one  half  of  the  new  world 
on  the  king  of  Spain,  and  the  other  half  on  the  king 

Chapter  CLXXX,— 1.  What  of  the  pope  of  Rome?     2.  What  did  pope  Alex- 
ender  do  ?     What  of  the  kings  of  Spain  and  Portugal  ? 


632  UNIYERSAL  HISTORY. 

of  Portugal.  'These  kings  then  sent  out  ships  and  men, 
who  conquered  immense  territories,  and  reduced  many 
of  the  inhabitants  to  slavery. 

3.  The  Spaniards  first  took  possession  of  the  West 
Indies.  They  built  the  city  of  Havana,  on  the  island 
of  Cuba,  and  the  Spanish  governor  had  his  residence 
there.  Other  nations  afterward  took  possession  of 
these  islands.  The  great  object  of  all  who  came  to 
America,  at  this  period,  was  to  get  gold  and  silver. 
The  most  wonderful  stories  were  told  about  the  abun- 
dance of  these  metals  in  some  parts  of  the  western 
continent. 

4.  There  was  supposed  to  be  a  kingdom,  called  El 
Dorado,  or  The  Gilded,  w^hich  was  thus  described. 
The  king  was  every  day  covered  with  powdered  gold, 
so  that  he  looked  like  a  golden  image.  The  palace 
of  this  glittering  monarch  was  built  of  brilliant  marble 
as  white  as  snow.  The  pillars  of  the  palace  were  por- 
phyry and  alabaster.  Its  entrance  was  guarded  by  two 
lions,  w^ho  were  fastened  to  a  tall  column  by  chains  of 
massive  gold. 

5.  After  passing  the  lion^?,  a  fountain  was  seen,  from 
wliifh    gushed   a   continual    shower   of  liquid    silver, 

3.  "VVliat  of  the  Spaniards?  Wliat  was  the  preat  object  of  all  who  came  to 
America  ?  What  of  gold  and  silver  ?  4-6.  Describe  the  kingdom  of  El  Dorado, 
UH  it  was  supposed  to  exist. 


A.MERICA.  633 

tlirough  four  large  pipes  of  gold.     The  interior  of  tlie 
palace  was  too  splendid  to  be  described. 

6.  It  contained  an  altar  of  solid  silver,  on  wliicli  was 
an  immense  golden  sun.  Lamps  were  continually 
burning,  and  tlieir  dazzling  radiance  was  reflected  from 
innumerable  objects  of  silver  and  gold.  Such  was  the 
splendid  fiction,  invented  by  somebody,  and  believed 
in  Europe. 

7.  Numbers  of  adventurers  went  in  search  of  El 
Dorado,  and  some  pretended  that  they  had  really  visit- 
ed this  golden  kingdom.  But  it  has  long  since  been 
ascertained  that  no  such  kingdom  ever  existed. 

8.  Another  thing  which  the  Spaniards  expected  to 
find  in  America,  was  the  fountain  of  youth.  Far  away 
beneath  the  shadows  of  the  forest,  they  believed  that 
there  was  a  fountain,  the  bright  waters  of  which  would 
wash  away  wrinkles,  and  turn  gray  hair  dark  again. 

9.  Oh,  if  there  were  any  such  fountain,  old  Peter 
Parley  would  journey  thither,  lame  as  he  is,  and  plunge 
head  foremost  into  its  bosom  !  After  a  while  the  chil- 
dren of  America  would  ask — "  Where  is  that  lame  old 
gentleman  who  used  to  tell  us  stories  V  \ 

10.  And  there  would  be  a  little  rosy  boy  among 
them,  a  stranger,  whom  they  had  never  seen  before. 

t.  What  of  adventurers?     8-10.  Describe  the  fountain  of  youth. 


634  UNIYEESAL  HISTORY. 

He  would  cry  out,  "  I  was  old  Peter  Parley ;  but  1 
have  been  bathing  in  the  fountain  of  youth,  and  now  I 
am  a  boy  again  !  Come,  let  us  see  which  will  hop  fur- 
thest!" 


CHAPTER  CLXXXL— America  Continued. 
History  of  the  Mexican  Territm^e8,—Guati7nala. 

1.  Though  there  was  no  El  Dorado  in  America, 
there  was  gold  enough  to  satisfy  even  the  Spaniards,  if 
such  rapacious  people  ever  could  be  satisfiexi.  The  em- 
pire of  Mexico  contained  immense  riches. 
•i  2.  This  country  is  in  the  southern  part  of  Noiih 
America.  It  extends  across  from  the  Gulf  of  Mexico 
to  the  Pacific  ocean.  Its  capital  city,  which  is  like^vise 
called  Mexico,  is. one  of  the  most  magnificent  in  the 
world. 

3.  When  America  was  first  discovered,  the  city  of 
Mexico  was  even  more  splendid  than  it  is  now.  It  had 
stately  temples  and  houses,  which  were  profusely  orna- 
mented with  gold.  Its  inhabitants  were  more  civiHzed 
than  any  other  natives  of  America. 

Chapter  CLXXXL— 1.  What  of  gold  in  Mexico  ?    2.  What  of  Mexico?  Capital  ? 
3.  Describe  the  city  of  Mexico. 


AMERICA. 


635 


CORTEZ 

witli  them. 


In  tlie  year  1519,  Fernando  Cortez,  a  Spaniard,  in- 
vaded Mexico,  witli  only  about  six 
hundred  men.  •  But,  as  his  followers 
wore  iron  armor,  and  had  muskets 
and  cannon,  they  were  able  to  iight 
whole  armies  of  the  Mexicans. 

5.  The    emperor  of  Mexico  was 
named   Montezuma.      He   received 
Cortez    and    his   men   with    great 
civility,  for  he  was  afi'aid  to  quarrel 
But,  after  a  short  time,  Cortez  threw  Mon- 
tezuma into  prison,  and  loaded  him  with  chains. 

6.  Finding  himself  in  so  unhappy  a  situation,  Mon- 
tezuma consented  to  become  a  vassal  of  the  kino;  of 
Spain.  But  the  Mexicans  raised  an  insurrection,  and 
when  Montezuma  endeavored  to  quiet  them,  they  ut- 
tered shouts  of  scorn  and  anger. 

T.  So  offended  were  they,  that  they  discharged  ar- 
rows and  stones  at  him.  One  arrow  struck  poor  Mon- 
tezuma in  the  breast,  and  stretched  him  on  the  ground. 
He  would  not  suffer  the  wound  to  be  dressed,  and,  in  a 
few  days,  this  ill-fated  emperor  died. 

8.  The  Mexicans  elected  Guatimozin,  son-in-law  of 
Montezuma,    to    succeed   him.     He   made    a   vigorous 

4.  When  did  Cortez  invade  Mexico  ?    5.  What  of  Montezuma  ?  Cortez  ?  6.  Whak 
did  Montezuma  do  ?     What  of  the  Mexicans  ?     T.  Fate  of  Montezuma? 


636 


UNIYERSAL  HISTORY. 


SQUARE  IN  THE   CITY  OP  MEXICO. 


attack  on  the  Spaniards,  and  drove  them  from  tlie  city 
of  Mexico.  But  Cortez  soon  came  back  with  an  army, 
and  conquered  the  whole  country. 

9.  The  emperor  Guatimozin  was  taken  prisoner.  lie 
refused  to  confess  where  his  treasures  were  concealed. 
Some  of  the  Spaniards  then  laid  him  at  full  length  on 
a  bed  of  burning  coals.  There  Guatimozin  writhed  in 
agony,  till  he  was  delivered  by  Cortez,  who  had  borne 
no  part  in  this  horrible  cruelty.  But,  about  three 
years  afterward,  Guatimozin  was  suspected  of  being  en- 
gaged in  a  conspiracy,  and  Cortez  sentenced  him  to  be 
hanged. 


8.  What  did  Guatimozin  do  ? 
fate? 


Cortez?    9.  What  was  done  to  Guatimozin  ?    Ilis 


AMERICA. 


63t 


10.  It  lias  been  affirmed  tliat  Cortez  and  Ms  soldiers 
killed  four  millions  of  tlie  Mexicans,  in  completing  the 
conquest  of  tlie  country.  He  pretended  that  his  only 
object  was  to  convert  the  people  to  the  Christian  re- 
ligion. But  he  and  his  soldiers  acted  like  fiends,  rather 
than  Christians. 

11.  From  the  time  of  its  conquest  by  Cortez,  the 
Mexican  empire  continued  under  the  government  of 
Spain,  till  the  year  1810.     A  revolution  then  took  place. 

12.  In  1813,  the  Mexican  provinces  declared  them- 
selves free  and  independent.  But  their  independence 
was  not  established  till  several  years  afterward. 
Texas,  one  of  the  provinces,  became  one  of  our  United 
States  in  1845. 

13.  This  gave  rise  to  a  war,  as  I  have  told  you,  be- 
tween Mexico  and  the  United 
States,  in  which  General  Scott's 
army  took  possession  of  the  capital 
of  the  country.  The  war  resulted 
in  an  immense  loss  of  territory  to 
Mexico — New  Mexico,  Utah,  and 
California. 

14.  The   country  called   Guati- 
mala  was  a  republic;  the  city  of 

10.  What  is  said  of  Cortez?  What  excuse  did  he  give  for  his  cruelty?  11.  How  long 
was  the  Mexican  empire  under  the  government  of  Spain  ?    Wbattook  place  in  1810  ? 


6ENEEAL  SCOTT. 


638  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

San  Salvador  being  its  capital.  The  several  provinces 
of  Guatimala,  now  called  Central  America,  are  at  pres- 
ent entirely  independent  of  each  other. 


CHAPTER  CLXXXII.— America  Continued. 
Spandsh  Peruvian  Territories. 

1.  A  FEW  years  after  the  conquest  of  Mexico,  by 
Cortez,  the  Spaniards  also  conquered  the  vast  empire 
of  Peru,  in  South  America.  At  the  present  day,  Pei*u 
is  bounded  north  by  the  republic  of  Ecuador,  east  by 
Brazil,  south  by  Bolivia  and  the  Pacific  ocean,  and 
west  by  the  Pacific.  But  when  the  Spaniards  first  in- 
vaded it,  the  Peruvian  empire  included  a  much  larger 
space. 

2.  The  sovereigns  of  this  empire  were  called  Incas, 
and  the  Peruvians  believed  that  their  first  inca  was  a 


12.  What  in  1813?  What  of  Texas?  13.  What  did  Mexico  lose  by  the  war 
•with  the  United  States?     14.  Wiiat  of  Guatimala?     Its  present  name  ? 

CnAPTER  CLXXXII. — 1.  When  was  Peru  conquered  ?  What  of  Peru  at  the 
present  time  ?  What  of  it  when  the  Spaniards  first  invaded  it?  2.  What  of  native 
Bovereigns  of  Peru  ?    The  people  ? 


AMERICA.  639 

child  of  tlie  sun.     Tlie  inhabitants  were  worsliippers 
of  the  sun. 

3.  Peru  contained  many  magnificent  cities,  and  gold 
was  more  abundant  even  than  in  Mexico.  Of  course, 
no  sooner  did  the  Spaniards  hear  of.  it,  than  they  de- 
termined to  make  themselves  masters  of  the  countiy. 

4.  The  first  invader  was  Francis  Pizarro.  In  1531, 
he  marched  into  Peru,  and  took  the  inca  prisoner  in  his 
own  palace.  The  inca's  name  was  Atabalipa.  To  re- 
gain his  freedom,  he  offered  Pizarro  as  much  gold  as 
would  fill  a  spacious  hall  of  his  palace,  piled  as  high 
as  he  could  reach. 

5.  But  after  the  gold  had  been  delivered,  Pizarro  re- 
fused to  give  Atabalipa  his  freedom.  He  was  not  sat- 
isfied with  the  inca's  treasure,  but  was  determined  to 
have  his  blood.  So  he  condemned  him  to  death ;  and 
Atabalipa  was  accordingly  strangled  and  burnt. 

6.  When  he  had  conquered  the  Peruvians,  Pizarro 
quarrelled  with  one  of  his  chief  ofl&cers,  named  Alrna- 
gro.  They  made  war  upon  each  other,  and  Pizarro 
caused  Almagro  to  be  beheaded.  Soon  afterward  he 
was  himself  murdered. 

7.  In  the  course  of  time,  the  Peruvian  empire  was 

3.  What  did  Peru  contain  ?  What  did  the  Spaniards  determine  to  do  ?  4.  When 
did  Pizarro  go  to  Peru  ?  Who  was  the  inca  ?  What  did  h«  do  ?  5.  Fate  of  Ata- 
balipa ?     6.  What  of  Pizarro  and  Almagro?    What  became  of  Pizarro? 

28 


G40  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

divided  into  several  provinces.  All  of  them  were 
ander  tlie  government  of  Spain.  The  Spanish  territo- 
ries comprised  nearly  all  the  western  part  of  South 
A^merica. 

8.  But  the  kingdom  of  Spain  became  so  weak  that 
it  lost  its  authority  over  these  colonies.  The  first  re- 
sistance to  the  government  was  made  while  Joseph  Bo- 
naparte was  king  of  Spain ;  and  the  people  would  not 
return  to  their  allegiance,  when  the  former  king  was 
ao-ain  on  the  throne. 

o 

9.  The  different  states  in  America,  which  were  once 
Spanish  provinces,  are  called  the  United  Mexican 
States,  Guatimala  or  Central  America,  New  Grenada, 
Venezuela,  Ecuador,  Peru,  Bolivia,  Chili,  Buenos  Ayres, 
Uruguay,  and  Paraguay.  Most  of  them  have  become 
independent,  but  are  in  a  very  unsettled  condition. 


CHAPTEK   CLXXXIIL— America   Continued. 

Accourd  of  the  Brazilian  Territories. 

1.  The  vast  country  of  Brazil  is  bounded  nortli  by 
New  Grenada,  Venezuela,  and  Guiana;    east  by  the 

7.  What  of  the  Peruvian  empire  ?  What  of  the  Spanish  territories  ?  8.  What 
of  the  kingdom  of  Spflin  ?  The  people  ?  9.  What  of  the  states  in  America  once 
Spanish  provinces  ? 


•  AMERICA.  641 

Atlantic  ocean ;  soutli  by  tlie  Atlantic,  Urugnay,  and 
Paraguay ;  and  west  by  Bolivia,  Peru,  and  tlie  republic 
of  Ecuador.  It  is  nearly  as  large  as  tlie  wliole  United 
States. 

2.  When  the  Spaniards  were  making  conquests  in 
other  parts  of  America,  the  Portuguese  came  to  BraziL 
It  is  said  that,  near  the  river  Amazon,  they  found  a 
nation  of  women,  whose  lives  were  spent  in  war. 

3.  We  do  not  read  that  the  Portuguese  committed 
such  horrible  cruelties  as  the  Spaniards  did.  The  rea- 
son was,  that  the  natives  of  Brazil"  possessed  but  little 
gold;  and  the  Portuguese  hardly  thought  it  worth 
their  while  to  colonize  the  country. 

4.  During  many  years,  the  government  of  Portugal 
was  accustomed  to  send  nobody  but  criminals  thither ; 
so  that  to  be  sent  to  Brazil  was  considered  almost  as 
bad  as  being  sent  out  of  the  world. 

5.  In  1548,  a  multitude  of  Jews  were  banished  to 
Brazil.  They  planted  the  sugar-cane  there,  and  suc- 
cessfully cultivated  it.  When  the  king  of  Portugal 
found  that  the  country  was  rich  and  fruitful,  he  sent 
over  a  governor,  in  order  that  he  might  not  lose  his 
share  of  the  wealth. 

Chapter  CLXXXIII.—l.  Boundaries  of  Brazil?  Extent?  2.  What  of  the  Portu- 
guese ?  Amazons  ?  3,  Why  were  the  Portuguese  not  as  cruel  as  the  Spaniards  ? 
<  Who  were  sent  to  Brazil  ?    5,  What  happened  in  1548  ?    What  of  Jews  ? 


642  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY.  • 

6.  France,  Spain,  and  Holland  likewise  attempted  to 
get  possession  of  Brazil.  But  tlie  Portuguese  resisted 
them,  and  finally  became  sole  masters  of  the  country. 
Perhaps,  if  the  other  nations  had  known  of  the  hidden 
riches  of  BrazD,  they  would  not  have  given  up  their 
claims  so  easily. 

7.  A  long  time  after  the  settlement  of  the  country, 
valuable  mines  of  gold  were  discovered.  Considerable 
quantities  of  this  precious  metal  are  also  found  in  the 
beds  of  the  rivers,  mixed  with  sand  and  gravel.  The 
topaz  and  the  diamond  are  sometimes  seen  glittering 
among  the  gold. 

8.  The  Rio  Pardo,  though  it  is  a  very  small  and  shal- 
low stream,  produces  a  great  number  of  diamonds. 
Other  rivers  are  likewise  enriched  with  them.  Negro 
slaves  are  employed  in  washing  the  sand  and  gravel  of 
these  rivers,  and  when  one  of  them  finds  a  very  large 
diamond,  he  receives  his  freedom. 

9.  In  1808,  the  king  of  Portugal  removed  to  Brazil, 
and  established  his  court  in  the  city  of  Rio  Janeiro. 
Fifteen  years  afterward,  he  returned  to  Lisbon.  His 
son  Pedro  was  then  proclaimed  emperor  of  Brazil. 

6.  What  of  other  countries  ?  7.  What  were  discovered  in  Brazil  ?  8.  What  of 
the  Rio  Pardo?  What  of  negro  slaves?  9,  When  did  the  king  of  Portugal  re- 
move to  Brazil  ?  Where  did  he  establish  his  court  ?  When  did  he  return  to  Lis- 
bon ?    What  of  his  son  Pedro  ? 


AMERICA,  643 

10.  In  1831,  tlie  Brazilians  became  discontented 
witli  tlie  government  of  Pedro.  He  therefore  gave  up 
tlie  imperial  crown  to  his  son,  who  was  then  only  five 
years  old.  This  boy  was  styled  the  emperor  of  Brazil, 
but  the  government  was  carried  on  by  a  council  of 
regency  till  a  few  years  since,  when  the  emperor  assum- 
ed the  government.  This  seems  to  have  acquired  some 
stability,  and  the  country  is  gradually  improving. 


CHAPTER  CLXXXIY.— America  Continued. 
The  West  Indies. 

1.  I  MUST  not  close  my  story  about  America,  with- 
out giving  you  some  little  account  of  the  West  India 
Islands,  lying  in  the  Atlantic  ocean,  between  North 
and  South  America.  These  consist  of  three  clusters, 
called  the  Bahamas,  the  Antilles,  and  the  Caribbees. 
The  Bahamas  are  the  most  northerly  of  the  three 
groups,  and  lie  near  to  Florida.     They  are  about  six 

10.  "What  of- the  Brazilians  in  the  year  1831  ?  What  did  Pedro  do  ?  How  is 
Brazil  now  governed? 

Chapter  CLXXXIV.—l. "Where  are  the  "West  India  Islands  situated?  Of  what 
three  groups  do  they  cousist  ?    What  of  the  Bahama  Islands  ? 


644  UNIYERSAL  HISTORY. 

hundred  in  number.  Most  of  them  are  small,  con^ 
sisting  of  sand  and  rocks,  and  are  uninhabited  by 
man. 

2.  These,  however,  are  the  resort  of  a  great  variety 
of  sea-fowl.  Many  of  the  birds  which  visit  the  lakes 
and  shores  of  the  United  States  in  summer,  retire  to 
these  lonely  islands  in  winter,  where  they  find  a  secure 
and  pleasant  abode.  The  Bahama  Islands  belong  to 
Great  Britain,  and  contain  about  seventeen  thousand 
inhabitants.  The  principal  are  Turks  Islands,  Prov- 
idence, and  San  Salvador,  or  Cat  Island.  This  last  is 
that  which  Columbus  first  discovered. 

3.  The  Antilles,  occupying  the  middle  portion  of  the 
West  Indies,  consist  of  Cuba,  which  is  the  largest,  and 
belongs  to  Spain;  Hayti,  or  St.  Domingo,  which  is  in- 
dependent, and  governed  by  blacks  ;  Porto  Eico,  which 
belongs  to  Spain ;  Jamaica,  which  belongs  to  Great 
Britain,  and  a  few  smaller  islands. 

4.  The  Caribbee  Islands  are  very  numerous,  and  lie 
south-easterly  of  the  others.  They  stretch  from  Porto 
E,ico  in  a  semicircular  group  to  the  shores  of  South 

^America.     They  belong  to  different  European  govern- 
ments.    The    most    celebrated   of '  these    islands   are 

2.  What  of  sea-fowl  ?  To  whom  do  the  Bahamas  belong  ?  Which  are  the 
principal  ones?  3.  What  can  you  say  of  the  Antilles?  4.  What  of  the  Caribbee 
Islands  ?    The  principal  ones  ? 


AMERICA.  645 

Martinique,  Barbadoes,  St.  Thomas,  Tobago,  St.  Lucia, 
St.  yincent,  Guaclaloupe,  Antigua,  St.  Cliristoplier, 
Dominica,  Santa  Cruz,  and  Trinidad. 

5.  The  climate  of  the  West  Indies  is  that  of  per- 
petual summer.  Frost  and  snow  never  come  to  visit 
them.  The  trees  are  ever  clothed  with  leaves,  and 
many  of  the  shrubs  and  plants  continue  at  all  times  to 
be  adorned  with  blossoms. 

6.  The  fruits  which  are  common  with  us,  such  as 
apples,  pears,  cherries,  and  peaches,  are  unknown  in 
these  regions;  but  oranges,  figs,  lemons,  pineaj)ples, 
and  many  other  nice  things,  are  abundant. 

7.  The  people  do  not  cultivate  Indian  corn,  wheat, 
rye,  oats,  and  barley,  as  we  do,  but  they  raise  sugar- 
cane, from  which  they  extract  sugar  and  molasses,  and 
they  cultivate  coifee,  cotton,  indigo,  tobacco,  cocoa,  all- 
spice, and  other  things. 

8.  The  forests  contain  mahogany,  lignum  vitae,  iron 
wood,  and  other  woods  useful  in  the  arts.  Among  the 
birds  are  parrots  of  various  kinds,  some  of  which  are 
not  bigger  than  a  bluebird.  A  friend  of  mine  made 
me  a  present  of  one  of  these  little  fellows,  a  few  years 
since.  Instead  of  sitting  upon  his  perch,  I  have  kno^vn 
him  to  hang  by  his  claws  to  the  top  wires  of  the  cage, 

5.  What  .of  the  climate  of  the  West  Indies ?  6.  Fruits?  7.  Productious?  8. 
Forests  ?    Birds  ? 


646  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

witli  liis  liead  downward,  and  tliiis  remain  during  the 
whole  night. 

9.  Among  the  quadrupeds  of  the  West  Indies  are 
some  curious  little  monkeys,  and  several  kinds  of 
lizards.  The  chameleon  is  the  most  interesting  of 
these.  He  was  formerly  supposed  to  live  on  air,  and 
to  have  the  power  of  changing  his  color  at  will.  But 
it  is  now  ascertained  that  he  often  makes  a  sly  meal 
upon  insects  that  come  in  his  way,  and  that  his  color 
does  not  vary  more  than  that  of  several  other  animals 
of  a  similar  kind. 

10.  Although  the  West  Indies  are  never  disturbed 
by  winter,  they  are  often  visited  by  terrible  hurri- 
canes. These  sometimes  come  so  suddenly  as  to  tear 
the  sails  from  the  masts  of  vessels,  and  often  overturn 
the  houses  and  trees  upon  the  land. 


CHAPTER  CLXXXY.— AiviERicA  Continued. 
The   West  Indies  continued. 

1.  If  you  were  to  visit  the  West  Indies  at  the  pres- 
ent day,  you  would  find  them  inhabited  by  Europeans 
and  their  descendants,  together  with  a  great  many  ne- 

9.  What  of  monkeys  ?     The  chameleon  ?    10.  What  of  hurricanes  ?  • 
Chapter  CLXXXV. — 1.  How  arc  the  West  Indies  inhabited? 


AMERICA.  647 

groes.     But  you  would  meet  with  none  of  the  native 
Indians.     These  have  long  since  disappeared. 

2.  You  already  know  that  Columbus  first  discovered 
one  of  the  Bahamas,  to  which  he  gave  the  name  of  San 
Salvador,  and  which  is  now  called  Cat  Island.  Here 
he  found  a  great  many  people  who  appear  to  have  been 
nearly  the  same  as  the  Indians  which  formerly  inhabit- 
ed our  country. 

3.  After  leaving  San  Salvador,  Columbus  visited 
Cuba  and  St.  Domingo.  Both  of  these  were  thronged 
with  Indians.  It  is  supposed  that  Cuba  alone  contain- 
ed several  millions.  They  appeared  to  live  very  hap- 
pily, for  the  climate  was  mild,  and  the  soil  fruitful. 
They  received  Columbus  with  kindness,  and  rendered 
him  every  service  in  their  power.  They  little  thought 
of  the  cruel  consequences  which  were  soon  to  follow. 

4.  Not  many  years  after  the  discovery  of  the  AYest 
India  Islands,  the  largest  and  finest  of  them  were 
taken  possession  of  by  the  Spanish  government.  The 
Indians  were  a  gentle  race,  and  were  easily  subjugated. 
The  Spaniards  did  not  seem  to  regard  them  as  human 
beings,  but  rather  as  wild  animals,  who  were  to  be  ex- 


2.  What  of  Cat  Island?  What  people  did  Columbus  find  there  ?  3.  What  islands 
did  he  next  visit?  What  of  the  Indians?  4,  5.  What  of  the  Spanish  govern 
ment?    How  did  the  Spaniards  treat  the  Indians  ? 


648  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

terminated.     They  shot  them  down  by  thousands,  and 
even  trained  bloodhounds  to  pursue  them. 

5.  In  this  way,  the  numerous  islanders  who  once 
swarmed  like  bees  upon  every  hill-side  and  in  every 
valley  of  these  beautiful  regions,  were  reduced  to  a 
v.ery  small  number.  Most  of  these  were  treated  like 
slaves,  and  many  of  them  were  compelled  to  work  in 
mines,  where  they  soon  perished  from  hard  labor  to 
which  they  were  unaccustomed,  and  for  the  want  of 
that  free  air  which  Heaven  had  sent  them  before  the 
Europeans  came  to  deprive  them  of  it. 

6.  Thus,  by  degrees,  the  native  West  Indians  van- 
ished, and  their  fair  lands  came  into  the  possession  of 
various  European  governments.  Spain  held  Cuba  and 
Porto  Rico  in  her  firm  grasp.  England  got  possession 
of  Jamaica,  the  Bermudas,  and  some  other  islands. 
France  had  St.  Domingo,  Martinique,  Guadaloupe,  and 
several  others.  Some  of  the  smaller  islands  fell  into 
the  hands  of  the  Dutch,  Danes,  etc. 

7.  The  first  object  of  the  Europeans  after  the  dis- 
covery of  America,  was  to  obtain  gold  and  silver. 
They  seemed  to  imagine  that  all  the  hills  and  moun- 
tains in  this  continent  were  filled  with  these  precious 

6,  Which  islands  did  Spain  obtain  possession  of?  England  ?  France  ?  Wl)at 
of  smaller  islands?  7.  What  did  the  Europeans  expect  to  find  abundant  in 
America?     Result  of  these  expectations? 


AMERICA.  G49 

metals.  But  this  illusion  soon  vanished,  and  in  the 
West  Indies  the  people  began  to  cultivate  the*  soil,  in-, 
stead  of  digging  into  the  bosom  of  the  earth  for  gold, 
and  silver. 

8.  They  discovered  that  the  land  was  peculiarly  suit- 
ed to  the  raising  of  sugar-cane,  oranges,  pineapples, 
and  other  productions  of  a  tropical  climate.  To  these, 
then,  they  devoted  their  attention,  and  the  lands  soon 
became  very  productive.  In  order  to  till  them,  the 
people  sent  to  Africa  for  negroes,  who  were  brought  by 
thousands  and  tens  of  thousands,  and  compelled  to 
work  as  slaves.  Nearly  all  the  labor,  at  the  present 
day,  is  performed  by  negro  slaves. 


CIIAPTEE  CLXXXYI.— America  Continued. 

The  West  Indies  concluded. 

1.  I  SHALL  not  undertake  to  tell  you  of  all  the  inter 
esting  events  which  have  occurred  in  the  West  Indies 
Several   of   these   islands  have  often  changed  hands^ 
sometimes  belonmno^  to  one  o;overnment,  and  sometimes 

8.  What  did  tliey  discover  ?    What  of  negro  slaves  ? 

Chapter  CLXXXVI. — 1.  What  of  some  of  the  West  India  islands? 


650  UXIYERSAL  HISTORT. 

to  another.  They  liave  frequently  been  shaken  by 
earthquakes,  and  often  desolated  by  whirlwinds.  But 
of  these  events  I  cannot  tell  you  now. 

2.  I  must  not,  however,  overlook  the  story  of  Hayti. 
This  fine  island  was  discovered  by  Columbus  on  his 
first  voyage,  and  here  he  left  a  part  of  his  men,  who 
made  the  first  European  settlement  on  this  side  of  the 
Atlantic.  The  island  was  called  Hayti  by  the  natives, 
and  Hispaniola  by  the  Spaniards.  The  settlement  in. 
creased  rapidly,  and  soon  the  whole  island  became  sub- 
ject to  Spain.  In  after  times,  the  French  obtained  pos- 
session of  a  portion  of-  the  country,  and  until  about 
sixty  years  ago,  it  was  shared  between  the  French  and 
Spanish  governments. 

3.  But  the  negro  slaves  had  become  much  more 
numerous  than  the  white  inhabitants,  and,  in  1791, 
they  rose  against  their  mastei^.  France,  at  this  time, 
was  in  a  state  of  revolution,  and  could  afford  no  aid  to 
put  down  the  insurrection.  The  negroes  therefore 
slaughtered  the  white  people  by  thousands,  pillaging 
their  houses,  and  then  setting  them  on  fire.  A  few 
escaped,  but  a  large  proportion  were  killed. 

4.  The   negroes    now   considered   themselves    inde- 

2.  Who  discovered  Hayti  ?  "What  settlement  was  made  ?  Names  of  the  is- 
land ?  To  what  country  did  it  become  subject  ?  What  of  France  ?  3.  What  was 
done  in  17 or? 


AMERICA.  651 

pendent,  and  began  to  form  a  government  of  their 
own.  After  various  revolutions,  the  whole  island  was 
formed  into  a  sort  of  republic,  the  officers  of  which 
were  negroes  or  mulattoes.  After  a  time,  it  became  an 
empire,  and  so  it  continues  to  this  day. 

5.  Before  I  leave  the  West  Indies,  I  must  say  a  few 
words  about  the  buccaneers,  a  famous  set  of  sea-robbers, 
who  infested  these  islands  during  the  seventeenth 
century.  These  at  first  consisted  of  men  from  England 
and  France,  who  settled  on  the  western  coast  of  St. 
Domingo  and  the  neighboring  island  of  Tortuga,  about 
the  year  1630. 

6.  For  a  while,  they  lived  by  hunting  wild  animals, 
but  when  they  became  numerous,  they  procured  ves- 
sels, and  went  forth  upon  the  sea  to  rob  and  plunder 
whomsoever  they  might  meet.  This  business  succeed- 
ed so  well,  that  a  great  many  desperate  adventurers 
from  all  parts  of  Europe  united  themselves  to  the  buc* 
cancers.  They  therefore  procured  larger  vessels,  which 
were  equipped  in  the  best  manner  for  attack.  These 
were  filled  with  daring  seamen,  and  commanded  by 
bold  leaders. 


4.  "What  of  the  negroes  ?  Their  government  ?  State  of  society  ?  5.  What  of 
the  buccaneers?  Where  were  they  originally  from  ?  Where  and  in  what  year 
did  they  settle  ?  6.  How  did  they  live  for  a  while  ?  What  did  they  afterward  do  ? 
By  whom  were  they  joined  ? 


652  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

7.  In  tills  manner  the  buccaneers  became  very 
formidable.  Their  vessels  hovered  in  the  track  of  the 
merchant  ships,  ready,  like  hawks  in  the  neighborhood 
of  a  barnyard,  to  pounce  down  upon  whatever  might 
come  in  their  way.  They  often  captured  ships  laden 
with  rich  merchandise,  and  sometimes  mth  gold  and 
silver. 

8.  In  this  way,  they  amassed  great  wealth,  and 
such  was  their  power  at  one  time,  that  they  made 
successful  attacks  upon  large  cities,  sometimes  pillag- 
ing the  inhabitants,  and  sometimes  laying  them  under 
contribution.  But,  at  length,  the  European  govern- 
ments were  roused,  by  the  violence  and  cruelty  of  these 
robbers,  to  measures  of  retaliation.  They  sent  large 
vessels  to  cruise  in  the  neighborhood  of  the  West  In- 
dies, and,  after  many  struggles,  the  buccaneers  were 
finally  exterminated. 

9.  In  later  times,  the  West  Indian  seas  have  been 
infested  by  pirates,  who  have  captured  a  good  many 
trading  vessels,  but  they  are  now  never  met  with. 

7.  What  of  the  ships  of  the  buccaneers  ?      8.  "What  of  the  power  of  these 
pirates  ?     How  were  they  finally  subdued  ?    9.  What  of  other  pirates? 


AMERICA. 


653 


CHAPTER  CLXXXYn— America   CoNrmuED. 

Chronology  of  America. 


A.  D. 

Iceland  and  Greenland  settled 860 

Christianity   introduced   into  Ice- 
land    981 

Severe  winter  in  Greenland,  which 

destroyed  the  colony 1408 

Columbus  born 1442 

America  discovered 1492 

Cortez  invaded  Mexico 1519 

French  settlements  made  in  Canada  1524 

Pizarro  goes  to  Peru 1531 

First    settlement   in    Virginia   at 

Jamestown 1607 

Quebec  founded 1608 

First  settlement  in  New  York.. . .  1613 

Settlement  at  Plymouth 1620 

Buccaneers  first   assemble  at  St. 

Domingo  and  Tortuga 1630 

Maryland  settled 1634 

First  settlement  in  Connecticut. . .  1635 

Providence  settled 1636 

English   got  possession  of   New 

York 1664 

King  Philip's  war  begins 1675 

Carolina  settled 1680 

Pennsylvania  settled 1681 

The  Carolinas  divided 1729 

Georgia  founded 1733 

Capture   of  Louisburg 1745 

Old  French  war  begins 1755 

Capture  of  Louisburg  by  "Wolfe. , .  1758 

Quebec  taken  by  the  English. ...  1759 

Stamp  act  passed. . .  .• 1765 

Boston  massacre 1770 

Destruction  of  the  tea 1773 

Commencement    of    the    Eevolu- 

tionary  war 1775 

British  troops  driven  out  of  Boston  1776 

Lafayette  came  to  America 1777 

Andre  taken  as  a  spy 1780 

Execution  of  Andre ; . . .  1780 


A.D. 

Gates  beaten  by  Comwallis 1780 

Surrender  of  Cornwallis  to  Wash- 
ington      1781 

Peace  between  Great  Britain  and 

the  United  States 1783 

Constitution  of  the  United  States 

went  into  operation 1789 

Washington  made  president 1789 

John  Adams  "  1797 

Death  of  Washington 1799 

Jefferson  president 1 801 

Purchase  of  Louisiana 1803 

King  of  Portugal  goes  to  Brazil. .   1808 

Madison  president 1809 

Revolution  in  Mexico 1810 

United  States  declare  war  against 

Great  Britain 1812 

Mexican  provinces  become  free..   1813 

Battle  of  New  Orleans 1815 

Monroe  president 1817 

J.  Q.  Adams  president 1825 

Jackson  president 1829 

Don  Pedro  gives  up  the  crown  of 

Portugal  to  his  son 1831 

Van  Buren  president 1837 

Harrison  president 1841 

Tyler  president 1841 

Polk  president 1845 

Annexation  of  Texas 1845 

W  ar  with  Mexico 1846 

Zachary  Taylor  president 1849 

Millard  Fillmore  president 1850 

California  a  state 1850 

Franklin  Pierce  president 1853 

James  Buchanan  president 1857 

Laying  of  the  first  trans-Atlantic 

cable 1858 

Visit  of  an  Embassy  from  Japan  1860 
Visit  of  the  prince  of  Wales I860 


654  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

CHAPTEK  CLXXXYIII.— OcEANicA. 
About   Oceanica. — The  Malaysian  Islands. 

1.  Having  now  related  the  liistory  of  Asia,  Europe, 
Africa,  and  America,  the  reader  will  probably  think  that 
my  Universal  History  ought  to  close  here.  But,  as  an 
Irishman  would  say,  there  is  a  fifth  quarter  of  the 
globe,  on  which  I  must  now  employ  my  pen. 

2.  America  ought  no  longer  to  be  called  the  New 
World ;  for  there  is  a  newer  one,  composed  of  the 
islands  which  lie  in  the  Pacific  and  Indian  oceans.  The 
name  of  Oceanica  has  been  given  to  this  region.  If 
all  the  islands  were  put  together,  they  would  cover  a 
space  of  at  least  four  millions  of  square  miles. 

3.  There  are  three  divisions  of  Oceanica.  Those 
islands  which  lie  in  the  Indian  Ocean,  near  the  conti- 
nent of  Asia,  are  called  Malaysia.  The  largest  of 
them  are  Borneo,  Sumatra,  and  Java.  Scarcely  any 
thing  has  been  written  about  the  history  of  Malaysia, 
for  the  islands  are  chiefly  inhabited  by  the  natives,  who 
keep  no  record  of  passing  events,  and  have  no  desire 
to  know  the  deeds  of  their  forefathers. 

Chapter  CLXXXVIIL— 2.  What  of  Oceanica  ?    Extent  of  Oceanica?    3.  What 
of  Malaysia  ?     The  natives  ? 


OCEANIC  A.  655 

4.  The  history  of  Java  is  best  known,  but  is  not 
very  important  or  interesting.  It  was  discovered  by 
the  Portuguese,  in  the  year  1510.  They  found  it  an 
exceedingly  fertile  island,  producing  abundance  of 
sugar,  coffee,  rice,  pepper,  spices,  and  delicious  fruits. 
There  were  also  mines  of  gold,  silver,  diamonds,  rubies, 
and  emeralds. 

5.  The  island  is  six  hundred  and  fifty  miles  in  length. 
Soon  after  its  discovery,  the  Dutch  got  possession  of  a 
large  portion  of  it.  They  built  the  city  of  Batavia,  on 
the  north-western  coast  of  the  island. 

6.  The  city  is  situated  on  a  low,  mai-shy  plain,  and 
canals  of  stagnant  water  are  seen  in  many  of  the  streets. 
But  the  edifices  were  so  splendid,  that  Batavia  was 
called  the  queen  of  the  East.  Its  beauty  was  much 
increased  by  the  trees  that  overshadowed  the  streets 
and  canals. 

t.  In  the  year  1780,  the  population  amounted  to  a 
hundred  and  sixty  thousand.  People  from  all  the  dif 
ferent  parts  of  the  world  were  among  them.  But  the 
Europeans  were  the  fewest  in  number,  although  the 
government  was  in  their  hands. 

8.  Of  late  years,  Batavia  has  been  fast  going  to  de- 

4.  What  of  Java?  When  was  it  discovered?  What  are  its  productions? 
Mines?  5.  Length  of  Java  ?  Who  built  Batavia?  6.  Describe  the  citj.  7. 
Population  of  Batavia  in  1780  ? 


656  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

cay.  Tlie  climate  is  so  unliealtliy,  that  strangers  are 
very  liable  to  be  attacked  by  dreadful  fevers.  Some- 
times a  vessel  loses  her  whole  crew  by  death. 

9.  In  the  year  1811,  the  English  took  possession  of 
the  island  of  Java.  They  kept  it  till  1816,  and  then 
restored  it  to  its  former  owners.  The  Dutch  are  said 
to  exercise  great  tyranny  over  the  natives. 

8.  T\niat  of  the  city  of  late  years?     Its  climate?     9.  What  happened  in  1811? 
In  1816?    What  of  the  Dutch? 


OOEANICA. 


657 


AUSTRALIAN  SAVAGES  HUNTING  KANGAROOS. 


CHAPTEE  CLXXXIX.— OcEANicA  CoNTmuED. 


The  Australasian  division  of  Oceanica, 


1.  The  second  division  of  Oceanica  is  called  Austral- 
asia. This  comprises  New  Holland,  JSTew  Guinea,  Van 
Diemen's  Land,  and  tlie  otlier  islands  in  tlie  vicinity. 
New  Holland  is  an  immense  island,  containing  three 
millions  of  square  miles,  and  is  about  as  large  as 
Europe. 

2.  The  natives  of  New  Holland  are  described  as 
the  most  degraded  people  in  the  world.      They    are 

Chapter  CLXXXIX.— 1.  What  is  called  Australasia  ?    What  is  the  size  of  New 
HoUand  ? 


658  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

negroes,  and  have  very  lean  arms  and  legs.  Their 
features  liave  a  resemblance  to  the  monkey  tribe,  and 
they  are  said  to  be  not  much  handsomer  or  more  in- 
telligent than  the  orang-outangs,  found  in  the  Malaysian 
islands. 

3.  This  great  island  was  discovered  by  the  Dutch,  in 
1610,  but  the  whole  of  it  is  now  claimed  as  a  territory 
of  Great  Britain.  Captain  James  Cook,  the  celebrated 
navigator,  took  possession  of  it  in  1770. 

4.  It  is  divided  into  several  settlements.  The  east- 
ern is  called  New  South  Wales,  and  the  western  the 
Swan-river  colony.  New  South  Wales  is  the  oldest, 
and  began  to  be  settled  in  1778.  It  was  then  called 
Botany  Bay. 

5.  The  first  colonists  were  not  a  very  respectable 
sort  of  people.  The  English  government  conceived 
the  plan  of  sending  criminals  to  New  Holland,  instead 
of  keeping  them  in  jail,  or  sending  them  to  the  gal- 
lows. Accordingly,  ship-loads  were  transported  every 
year. 

6.  This  cannot  be  considered  a  severe  punishment, 
for  the  soil  of  New  Holland  is  fertile,  and  the  climate 

2.  What  of  the  natives?  3.  When  and  by  whom  was  New  Holland  discovered? 
Who  now  hold  it  in  possession ?  When  was  it  taken  by  Captain  Cook?  4.  What 
of  the  two  colonies  of  New  Holland  ?  When  was  New  South  Wales  settled? 
What  was  the  new  settlement  called?  5.  Who  were  the  first  colonists?  Who 
were  sent  every  year  from  England  to  Botany  Bay?   6.  What  of  their  punishment? 


OCEANIC  A.  659 

is  deliglitfuL  Perliaps  tlie  Englisli  would  have  acted 
more  equitably,  if  they  had  transported  the  honest 
poor  people,  who  were  starving  at  home. 

7.  But,  during  many  years,  there  were  hardly  any 
honest  men  in  the  new  colony.  Few  of  the  inhabitants 
felt  any  reluctance  to  commit  crimes,  or  were  ashamed 
to  be  found  out ;  for  they  knew  that  their  neighbors 
were  as  bad  as  themselves. 

8.  In  later  years,  however,  the  people  began  to  im- 
prove. The  children  of  the  convicts  were  now  growing 
up,  and  their  parents  had  taught  them  to  be  more  vir- 
tuous  than  they  themselves  had  been. 

9.  A  young  girl,  who  was  born  in  New  Holland, 
was  once  asked  whether  she  would  like  to  go  to  Eng- 
land. "  Oh,  no  !"  said  she ;  "  I  should  be  afraid  to  go 
there,  for  the  people  are  all  thieves  !"  The  child  knew 
that  a  gang  of  thieves  arrived  in  every  ship  which  came 
from  England,  and  she  naturally  supposed  that  the 
English  were  all  thieves  alike. 

10.  Criminals  continued  to  be  transported  from  Eng- 
land ;  and  they  were  so  numerous,  that  it  was  found 
necessary  to  plant  new  colonies    of  them.     Since  the 

T.  What  cau  be  said  of  the  colonists  for  some  years  ?  8.  What  of  them  in  later 
years  ?  9.  Relate  the  anecdote  of  the  young  New  Holland  girl.  10.  What  has  it  been 
found  necessaiy  to  do  on  account  of  the  number  of  criminals  sent  to  New  Holland? 
What  was  done  in  1804? 


660  UNIYERSAL  HISTORY. 

year  1804,  Van  Diemen's  Land  has  been  appropriated 
to  that  purpose. 

11.  This  island  lies  feonth  of  New  Holland,  and  is 
two  hundred  miles  in  length.  The  population  is  over 
fifty  thousand,  of  whom  about  one  quarter  are  convict- 
ed criminals. 

12.  Gold  has  recently  been  found  in  great  quantities 
in  ISTew  Holland,  and  this  has  led  to  a  sudden  increase 
in  the  population  of  New  Holland,  which  now  goes  by 
the  name  of  Australia.  The  sending  of  criminals  here 
has  nearly  ceased. 


CHAPTER   CXC— OcEANicA   Contintjed. 
Polynesia. — The  Sandwich  Islands, 

1.  The  third  division  of  Oceanica  is  called  Polyne- 
sia. It  consists  of  many  groups  of  small  islands, 
which  are  scattered  over  a  large  extent  of  the  Pacific 
ocean.     None  of  them  are  inhabited  by  civilized  people. 

2.  The  Sandwich  Islands  are  among  the  most  im- 
portant in  Polynesia.     They  consist  of  ten  islands,  of 

11.  Where  is  Van  Dienien's  Land?     Its  population  ?     12.  What  of  gold  ?    What 
is  New  Holhmd  now  called  ? 

Chapteu  CXC. — l.What  of  Tolyncsia  ?     Its  inhabitants? 


OOEANIOA.  661 

wliicli  Owliyliee,  or  Hawaii,  is  the  largest.     These  isl- 
ands were  discovered  by  Captain  James  Cook,  in  1778. 

3.  He  found  them,  inhabited  by  a  race  of  people 
whose  forms  were  very  beautiful,  although  their  com- 
plexions were  darker  than  our  own.  They  appeared  to 
be  of  a  gay,  friendly,  and  sociable  disposition. 

4.  But  there  were  some  shocking  customs  among 
them.  They  were  in  the  habit  of  feasting  on  human 
flesh,  and  offering  human  sacrifices  to  their  idols.  They 
were  also  great  thieves,  and  had  many  other  vices. 

5.  The  natives  at  first  behaved  in  a  very  friendly 
manner  to  Captain  Cook.  But,  after  some  time,  a  j)art 
of  them  stole  one  of  the  boats  belonging  to  his  vessel. 
The  captain  went  on  shore,  intending  to  take  the  king 
of  Hawaii  prisoner,  and  keep  him  till  the  boat  should 
be  returned. 

6.  But  when  he  had  landed,  the  natives  mustered 
in  great  numbers.  Captain  Cook  found  it  necessary  to 
retreat  toward  his  own  men,  who  were  waiting  for 
him  in  a  boat  near  the  shore.  The  natives  followed 
him,  shouting,  throwing  stones,  and  brandishing  their 
weapons. 

2.  Which  are  the  most  important  islands  of  the  group?  Which  is  the  largest 
of  the  Sandwich  Islands?  Who  discovered  these  islands?  When?  3.  What 
people  did  Captain  Cook  find  inhabiting  the  Sandwich  Islands  ?  4.  What  were 
some  of  their  customs?  5.  What  took  place  between  the  natives  and  Captain 
Cook  ?  6,  1.  What  did  Cook  find  it  necessary  to  do  ?    Relate  what  then  happened. 


662  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

7.  Captain  Cook  pointed  his  musket  at  them,  but  it 
only  made  them  more  tumultuous  and  violent.  He 
then  took  aim,  and  shot  the  foremost  native  dead.  In 
a  moment,  before  the  smoke  of  his  musket  had  blown 
away,  the  natives  rushed  upon  him.  One  of  them  beat 
him  down  with  a  club,  and  then  stabbed  him  with  a 
dagger.  His  men  fired  their  muskets  at  the  natives, 
but  could  not  rescue  him. 

8.  The  Sandwich  Islands,  soon  after,  became  the  re- 
sort of  whale-ships,  and  of  all  other  vessel*  that  voy- 
aged in  that  part  of  the  Pacific  ocean.  But  the  inhab- 
itants did  not  derive  any  advantage  from  their  inter- 
course with  civilized  people. 

9.  On  the  contrary,  they  became  a  great  deal  more 
vicious  than  ever  they  were  before.  They  contracted 
so  many  diseases,  that  their  numbers  were  reduced  from 
four  hundred  thousand  to  less  than  a  hundred  and  fifty 
thousand.  There  was  reason  to  fear  that  the  islands 
would  be  depopulated. 

10.  Some  American  missionaries  crossed  the  ocean, 
in  hopes  to  save  these  poor  islanders  from  destruction. 
They  preached  the  gospel  to  them,  and  established 


8.  "What  ships  soon  resorted  to  the  Sandwich  Islands  ?  0.  ^liat  was  the  conse- 
quence of  the  intercourse  of  the  natives  with  the  wliites?  10.  What  of  American 
missionaries  ? 


OCEANICA.  663 

schools,  in  wMcli  the  natives  were  taught  to  read  the 
Bible. 

11.  Kaahumana,  the  queen-regent  of  the  Sandwich 
Islands,  adopted  the  Christian  religion.  By  her  assist- 
ance, the  missionaries  met  mth  great  success.  A  num- 
ber of  schools  were  established.  It  appeared  probable 
that  the  whole  people  would  be  civilized  and  Christian- 
ized. 

12.  These  prospects  have  been  in  some  degree  real- 
ized. The  present  population  of  the  islands  is  150,000, 
many  of  whom  are  whites,  chiefly  Americans.  Good 
houses,  churches,  roads,  printing-presses,  and  other  arts 
of  civilization  have  been  introduced.  The  government 
is  in  the  hands  of  a  native  king,  but  the  missionaries 
have  much  influence. 


CHAPTER     CXCI.— OcEANicA    Continued. 

Polynesia  continued.     The  Society  Islands.     The  Bounty. 

1.  The  Society  Islands  likewise  belong  to  Polynesia. 
They  are  situated  about  a  thousand  miles  south  of  the 

11.  What  of  Kaahumana?     12.  Present  state  of  these  islands? 
Chapter  CXCL — 1.  Where  are  the  Society  Islands  ?      To  what  group  do  they 
belong? 

29 


664  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

equator,  wliicli   is  nearly  tlie  same  distance  that  the 
Sandwich  Islands  are  north  of  it. 

2.  The  largest  of  the  Society  Islands  is  called  Tahiti, 
or  Otaheite.  It  is  a  hundred  miles  in  circumference^ 
and  is  inhabited  by  about  ten  thousand  people.  Like 
the  natives  of  the  Sandwich  Islands,  they  are  generally 
handsome,  and  of  agreeable  manners. 

3.  A  very  interesting  event  took  place  among  these 
islands,  many  years  ago.  The  brig  Bounty,  belonging 
to  the  British  navy,  was  sent  to  the  Society  Islands  in 
order  to  carry  bread-fruit  trees  from  thence  to  the 
West  Indies.  Her  commander  was  Lieutenant  William 
Bligh. 

4.  He  arrived  at  Otaheite  in  1788.  His  crew  were 
delighted  Avith  the  island.  The  air  was  balmy  and 
full  of  sunshine.  Fruits  grew  abundantly  on  every 
tree.  There  was  no  need  of  toiling  for  bread,  since 
there  were  trees  enough  which  produced  it  ready 
made,  and  almost  as  good  as  if  it  had  been  baked. 

5.  The  natives  of  Otaheite  received  the  Englishmen 
with  kindness.  The  women  behaved  A\ath  great  affec- 
tion toward  the  poor  storm-beaten  sailors.      In  shoiH:, 

2.  "Wbat  is  the  size  and  population  of  Tahiti  or  Otaheite  ?  "What  of  the  natives  ? 
3.  Wliat  of  the  brig  Bounty?  Who  was  her  commander?  4.  When  did  he  arrive 
at  Otaheite  ?  How  did  his  men  like  the  island  ?  5.  How  did  the  natives  treat 
the  Englishmen  ? 


OCEANIC  A.  665 

the  crew  spent  their  time  so  pleasantly,  that  they  were 
very  reluctant  to  depart. 

6.  They  desired  to  spend  their  whole  lives  in  these 
sunny  islands,  instead  of  wandering  any  more  over  the 
wide  and  dreary  sea.  When  the  Bounty  sailed,  they 
cast  many  a  sad  glance  at  the  pleasant  shores  which 
they  were  leaving.  They  had  not  sailed  many  days, 
before  they  formed  a  resolution  to  return. 

7.  A  young  man  by  the  name  of  Christian  was  an 
officer  on  board  the  Bounty.  He  was  not  on  good 
terms  with  Lieutenant  Bligh,  and  he  incited  the  crew 
to  mutiny  against  their  commander,  and  take  possession 
of  the  vessel. 

8.  One  morning,  before  sunrise.  Christian  and  his 
associates  entered  Lieutenant  Bligh's  cabin,  while  he 
was  asleep.  They  bound  his  hands  behind  his  back, 
threatening  him  with  death  if  he  made  the  least  re- 
sistance. He  was  then  put  into  a  leaky  boat,  with 
eighteen  other  persons,  who  refused  to  join  in  the 
mutiny. 

9.  I  can  only  say  of  Lieutenant  Bligh  and  his  com- 
panions, that  they  arrived  safe  in  England,  after  severe 
hardships.     The  British  frigate  Pandora  was  then  sent 

6.  What  of  the  crew  of  the  Bounty?  What  resolution  did  they  form?  7.  What 
did  Christian  do  ?  8.  How  did  he  treat  Lieutenant  Bligh  and  eighteen  others  ? 
9.  Did  they  arrive  in  England?    What  ship  was  sent  to  Otaheite  ? 


666  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

to  Otalieite  in  searcli  of  the  mutineers^  tliat  they  might 
be  brought  to  justice. 

10.  The  frigate  arrived  at  Otaheite  and  found  four- 
teen of  the  mutineers.  She  took  them  on  board  and 
sailed  for  England,  but  was  \vrecked  on  her  passage. 
Four  of  the  mutineers  were  drowned.  The  other  ten 
were  saved  and  carried  to  England,  where  three  of 
them  were  hanged. 

11.  Christian,  the  ringleader  of  the  mutiny,  had  not 
been  taken  prisoner  by  the  Pandora;  for  he  and 
several  companions  had  sailed  from  Otaheite  in  the 
Bounty.  They  had  taken  with  them  a  plentiful  supply 
of  hogs,  dogs,  cats,  and  fowls,  and  also  a  number  of 
Otaheitan  men  and  women. 

12.  For  a  great  many  years,  nobody  could  tell  what 
had  become  of  Christian  and  his  friends,  and  of  the 
brig  Bounty,  in  which  they  had  sailed  away.  As  no 
news  were  heard  of  them,  people  universally  believed 
that  the  vessel  had  gone  to  the  bottom,  with  alL  her 
crew. 

10.  What  happened  to  the  Pandora?  "What  became  of  the  mutineers?  11.  What 
liad  Christian  and  his  companions  done  ?  12.  What  was  supposed  to  have  become 
of  them  ? 


OCEANICA.  667 

CHAPTER  CXCII.— OcEANicA   Continued. 
Story  of  the  Bounty  concluded. 

1.  But,  after  twenty  years,  wlien- people  had  long 
ago  done  talking  about  the  Bounty,  it  was  found  out 
what  had  become  of  her.  In  the  year  1813,  a  British 
ship  of  war  was  sailing  from  the  Marquesas  Islands  to 
the  port  of  Valparaiso,  in  South  America.  The  cap* 
tain  of  the  vessel  was  Sir  Thomas  Staines.  In  the 
course  of  his  voyage,  he  happened  to  cast  anchor  off 
Pitcairn's  Island. 

2.  This  small  island  lies  many  leagues  to  the  south- 
west of  Otaheite.  It  was  first  discovered  by  Captain 
Carteret,  in  1767,  but  very  few  people  had  since  visited 
it,  for  it  produced  no  valuable  commodities,  and  it  was 
supposed  to  be  uninhabited. 

3.  But,  as  Sir  Thomas  Staines  looked  from  the  deck 
of  his  vessel  to  the  shore,  he  was  amazed  to  perceive 
that  the  island  was  cultivated,  and  that  there  were 
small  houses  on  it.  These  houses  were  better  built 
than  those  of  the  savages  generally  are,  and  they  look- 
ed something  like  the  dwellings  of  poor  people  in  Eng- 
land. 

Chapter  CXCII. — 1.  What  happened  in  the  year  1813  ?  2.  Where  is  Pit- 
cairn's  Island?  "When  was  it  discovered?  3.  What  was  seen  from  the  deck  of  the 
ship  ?    How  did  the  houses  appear  ? 


668  UJ^IYERSAL  HISTORY. 

4.  While  Sir  Thomas  Staines  and  his  sailors  were 
wondering  at  these  circumstanceSj  a  small  boat  put  off 
from  the  shore.  The  waves  rolled  very  high,  but  the 
boat  skimmed  lika  a  sea-bird  over  the  tops  of  them, 
and  soon  came  alongside  of  the  vessel. 

5.  The  boat  was  rowed  by  two  young  men.  They 
were  handsome,  though  of  rather  a  dark  complexion. 
When  they  came  near  the  vessel,  one  of  them  called 
out,  in  good  English — "  Won't  you  throw  us  a  rope, 
friends  ?" 

6.  A  rope  was  thrown  to  them,  and  they  took  hold 
of  it,  and  clambered  on  board  of  the  vessel.  Sir 
Thomas  Staines  asked  them  who  they  were,  and  how 
they  came  to  be  living  on  that  lonely  island.  The 
mystery  was  soon  explained. 

T.  When  Christian  and  his  companions  left  Otaheite, 
they  had  steered  for  Pit  cairn's  Island,  and  had  run  the 
Bounty  ashore  on  the  rocks,  and  set  her  on  fire.  They 
had  then  built  houses  on  the  island,  and  had  married 
the  Otaheitan  women  whom  they  brought  with  them. 

8.  Christian  and  all  his  associates  were  now  dead, 
except   one  old  man,  whose  name  was   John  Adams. 


4.  "What  of  a  boat  from  shore?  5.  Describe  the  young  men  who  rowed  it. 
What  did  they  call  out?  6.  What  did  they  do?  7.  Where  had  Christian  and 
his  companions  steered  on  leaving  Otaheite  ?  What  did  they  then  do  ?  8.  Who 
alone  remained  of  the  mutineers  ?     How  was  the  colony  peopled  ? 


OCEANIC  A.  669 

But  they  had  left  children  and  grandchildren,  so  that 
there  was  now  quite  a  flourishing  colony  on  the  island. 

9.  Old  John  Adams  had  taught  the  young  people 
to  read  the  Bible,  to  tell  the  truth,  and  to  be  honest 
and  upright  in  their  behavior.  They  seemed  to  be 
the  happiest  set  of  creatures  that  ever  lived ;  for  they 
hardly  knew  that  there  was  any  sin  and  sorrow  in  the 
world.* 

10.  After  this,  several  vessels  touched  at  this  island. 
The  inhabitants  were  supposed  to  be  from  80  to  100  in 
number.  They  were  very  industrious  and  moral,  and 
seemed  to  be  an  interesting  people.  The  island  they 
inhabited  was  about  seven  miles  in  circumference,  and 
rose  to  the  height  of  1000  feet.  The  shores  were  rocky 
and  precipitous. 

11.  In  1856,  the  descendants  of  the  mutineers,  199 
in  number,  were  removed  to  Norfolk  Island,  to  the  east 
of  Australia,  their  original  home  being  no  longer  large 
enough  to  contain  them. 

9.  What  had  John  Adams  done  for  the  young  people?     10.  What  often  hap- 
pened since  this?     What  of  the  people?     The  island?     11.  What  happened  in 

1856? 


670 


UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


CHAPTEK  CXCIIL— OcEANicA  Continued. 
Chronology  of  Oceanwa. 


A.  D. 

Java  discovered  by  the  Portuguese  1510 
New  Holland   discovered  by  the 

Dutch 1610 

Batavia,  the  capital  of  Java,  built 

by  the  Dutch 1619 

Captain  Cook   took  possession   of 

New   Holland 1770 

Botany  Ba}"^,  in  New  South  "Wales, 

settled 1778 

Sandwich    Islands   discovered   by 

Captain   Cook 1778 

Death  of  Captain  Cook 1779 

Ship  Bounty  arrives  at  Otabeite. .   1788 


A.  D. 

Convicts  first  sent  to  "Van  Diemen's 
Land 1804 

The  English  take  Java  from  the 
Dutch^ 1811 

Sir  Thomas  Staines  reaches  Pit- 
cairn's  Island 1813 

The  Dutch  take  Java  again  from 
the  English 1816 

Missionaries  established  at  the 
Sandwich  Islands 1820 

Gold,  discovered  in  Australia. . . .   1850 

Pitcairu  Islanders  removed  to  Nor- 
folk Island 1856 


CHAPTER  CXCIV.— PwEviEw. 

Ancient  Names   of  Countries^   So. 

You  already  know  tliat  most  of  the  countries  in 
Europe,  Asia,  and  Africa,  have  different  names  at  the 
present  day  from  what  they  had  in  ancient  times.  I 
will  therefore  give  you  a  list  of  the  principal  states 
and  kingdoms  throughout  these  three  quarters  of  the 
globe,  showing  their  present  and  ancient  names,  to- 
gether with  the  original  inhabitants,  and  the  sources 
from  which  the  present  inhabitants  have  sprung,  so  far 
as  I  am  able. 


KEVIEW. 


G71 


ASIA. 

Modem  Name*,  Ancient  Names.  Original  Inhabitants, 

Natolia Asia  Minor Descendants  of  Japhet 

Canaan Descendants  of  Shem. 


PiiU-stine. 


Syria Syria " 

Armenia Armenia      " 

Irak  Arabi Mesopotamia " 

Koordistan Assyria " 

Bagdad Babylonia  or  Chaldea.  " 

Irak  Adjemi Media " 

Part  of  Indep.  Tartary Parthia " 

Khorasan Hyrcania " 

Persia ." Persia Descendants  of  Elem. 

Astrachan Asiatic  Sarmatia Descendants  of  Sliem. 

(;:abulistan Bactria . .   " 

Siberia,  Tartary,  &c. .  .Scythia " 

AFRICA. 

Egypt Descendants  of  Ham  . . 


From  whom  ths  presnt  Inhabi- 
tants are  descended. 

I  Original    InhabiUints, 
I    Greeks,  Jews,  Turk8,&c. 
]  Original     Inhabitants, 
\      Jews.  Turks,  Ac. 
Original  Inhabitants,  &c. 


{Original  Inhabitants, 
mixed  with  Turks,  &c. 


Egypt 

Barca Lybia  , 

Tripoli^;  part  of  Tunis,  Africa Greeks,  Carthaginians.  " 

Part  of  Tunis&Algiers,  Numidia Carthaginians -j  ^abl?Tu."k8*  &?"*''  ^'^^' 

Morocco Mauritania Mauri  or  Moors Original  Inhabitants,  &c. 

Biledulgerid Ga-tulia Gsetuli " 

Nubia  and  Abyssinia.  Ethiopia "  " 

EUROPE. 

J  Gothic  tribes,  called  n 

)     Scandinavians  ... 

.   . .  Cimbri " 

Tartars f  Tartars,     Scandinavians, 

■  }     and  other  tribes. 
£qHq  j  Saxons,  Danes,   Britons, 


Norway,  Sweden,and 

D<ninark 

Jutland 


■Scandinavia. 
..Cimbria.... 
Eussia  and  Poland   ...  Sarmatia 

Great  Britain Brittannia. . 

Scotland Caledonia  . . 


(fee. 


^  Highlands.        Celts ;  j  Original  Inhabitants,  and 

(     Lowlands,  Picts. . .  |      others. 

Ireland Hibernia   Pelts .   Original  Inhabitants. 

Holland  and  Belgium. Belgica BelgsB — 

France.   Gallia   Celts.  ..Celts,  Franks,  Normans. 

«— 7 Germania. \  ^^ZTJtierlZT': \  ^"^--1  Inhabitants. 

Switzerland Helvetia Helvetii " 

Tyrol Ehjetia —  _ 

Romania Thracia —  — 

»r-*- • Hispania Carthaginians,   Greeks]  ^tit,Vandat Sf'' 

PortugaL Lusitania '•  •' 


P-Ha  S  0riginallnhabitant3,mix- 

■^®"^ ed  with  Gothic  tribes. 


Savoy,  Piedmont,  etc.  Cisalpine  Gaul  . 

Macedonia. Macedonia 

Greece Grsecia Phoenicians,  Egyptians  Original  I»habitant8. 

QTTE8T10N6.  The  teacher  can  here  ask  the  ancient  name,  original  inhabitants,  etc ,  of  each 
^country. 


972  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

CHAPTEE  CXCY.— General  Views. 
The  Origin   and  Progress   of  Oovermneni. 

1.  I  SUPPOSE  by  tMs  time  tliat  my  reader  is  wear}?', 
but  I  beg  his  patience  for  a  short  time,  while  I  give  a 
brief  account  of  several  important  mattei^.  I  shall 
first  speak  of  government. 

2.  You  observe  that,  at  the  present  day,  some  na- 
tions are  governed  in  one  way,  and  some  in  another. 
In  this  country,  the  people  are  governed  by  rulers  of 
their  own  choice,  and  according  to  a  constitution  of 
their  own  formation.  This  nation  is  therefore  called  a 
republic. 

3.  Some  nations  are  governed  by  kings  or  emperors, 
who  rule  according  to  their  own  will.  These  are  called 
despotic  monarchies.  Other  nations  are  ruled  by  kings 
or  emperors,  whose  power  is  restrained  by  legislative 
assemblies,  who  make  laws  for  the  countiy.  These  are 
called  limited  monarchies. 

4.  Now  you  must  not  suppose  that  the  world  has 
always  been  governed  in  the  same  manner  as  now. 
The  first  kind  of  government  sprang  from  that  of  the 

Chapter  CXCV. — 2,  How  is  this  country  governed  ?  "What  is  it  called  ?  3. 
"What  are  despotic  monarchies?  What  are  limited  monarchies?  4.  From  what 
did  the  first  kind  of  government  spring? 


GOVERNMENT,  673 

father  of  a  family.  In  the  first  place,  be  ruled  over  his 
children,  who  acquired  the  habit  of  obeying  him.  His 
grandchildren  followed  their  example,  and  thus  the 
whole  of  the  little  community  naturally  yielded  to  the 
authority  of  their  common  parent. 

5.  This  laid  the  foundation  for  that  kind  of  goveri- 
ment  which  is  called  patriarchal.  It  existed  before  the 
flood,  and  also  prevailed  in  many  parts  of  Asia  long 
after  that  event.  But  mankind  were  at  length  divided 
into  separate  tribes,  and  these  became  involved  in  wars 
with  each  other.  In  the  struggles  which  ensued,  some 
men  displayed  superior  strength,  courage,  and  skill. 
These  naturally  became  the  leaders,  and  were  entrusted 
with  extensive  authority. 

6.  All  men  are  fond  of  power,  and  these  leaders  soon 
acquired  almost  complete  dominion  over  the  people. 
This  produced  the  second  kind  of  government,  the  head 
of  which  was  a  chief,  and  was  usually  that  of  warlike 
tribes,  who  had  advanced  from  tbe  savage  to  the  bar- 
barous state, 

7.  When  society  had  progressed  so  far  as  to  build 
towns  and  cities,  the  military  chieftain  was  not  exactly 
suited  to  the  more  refined  and  luxurious  tastes  of  the 


5.  What  of  the  patriarchal  form  of  government  ?  What  of  warlike  tribes  ?  6. 
What  was  the  second  form  of  ^vernment?  7.  What  did  the  people  desire  aa  society 
advanced  ? 


674  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

people.  Ttey  now  desired  a  ruler  with  a  more  sound- 
ing title.  He  must  be  smroundeki  with  pomp  and  cere- 
many;  lie  must  wear  a  cro^vn  upon  his  head,  and 
dwell  in  a  palace.  1 

8.  He  must  be  attended  by  persons  richly  attired, 
and  in  order  to  give  sacredness  to  his  character,  he 
must  hold  himself  aloof  from  the  people,  as  if  superior 
to  other  mortals.  Thus  a  third  kind  of  government 
was  formed,  which  is  called  monarchical. 

9.  But  it  was  at  length  found  that  the  monarchs  or 
kings  were  selfish,  and  m^de  slaves  of  the  people.  In 
some  countries,  therefore,  the  people  elected  their 
rulers,  and  made  laws  for  themselves*  Thus  a  fourth 
kind  of  government  was  instituted,  called  i-epublican. 

10.  Now  you  will  bear  in  mind  that  the  first  kind 
of  government,  called  patriarchal,  was  adopted  in  the 
earliest  ages  of  society,  while  the  greater  part  of  the 
people  were  devoted  to  agriculture  and  the  rearing  of 
cattle.  The  second  kind  of  government,  at  ihe  head 
of  which  was  a  chie^  was  adopted  by  warlike  tribes 
who  had  not- yet  reached  a  state  of  civilization. 

11.  The  third  ^kind  of  government  was  adopted 
when  people  had  become  civilized  and  luxmious.     It 


8.  What  of  the  monarchical  form  of  gorenQment?    9.  "What  of  the  republican 
form  of  governmcut?     10.  What  of  the  first  kind  of  government?     Second? 


OOYERNMENT.  675 

was  the  form  of  government  among  tlie  ancient  Assy- 
rians, Egyptians,  and  Persians,  and  lias  been,  since  tlie 
period  of  tliese  empires,  in  all  ages  of  mankind,  more 
prevalent  than  any  other  system.  At  the  present  day, 
nine-tenths  of  mankind  are  subject  to  monarchical  gov- 
ernment. 

12.  The  republican  form  of  government  was  par- 
tially adopted  by  tha  Jews,  soon  after  their  return 
from  Egypt.  But  it  was  not  till  the  time  of  the 
Greeks  that  a  genuine  republic  was  established.  Sev- 
eral of  the  states  of  Greece  formed  themselves  into  re- 
publics at  different  times,  but  these  were  of  short  dura- 
tion, and  were  usually  overthrown  by  aspiring  men, 
who  made  themselves  kings. 

13.  Rome  was  at  one  time  a  republic,  but  here,  too, 
freedom  soon  gave  place  to  despotism.  Other  coun- 
tries have  been  called  republics,  but  it  was  not  till  the 
formation  of  the  constitution  of  the  United  States, 
that  a  republic  was  formed,  which  secured,  on  perma- 
nent principles,  the  equal  rights  of  all  the  citizens. 

11.  "What  of  the  third  kiad,  or  monarchical  government  ?  12.  What  of  the  repub- 
lican form  of  goyeramQui?  What  of  the  Greeks?  13.  What  of  Rome?  The 
United  States? 


676  UNIVEKS-AL  HISTORY. 

CHAPTEE   CXCTI.--GEifERAL  Yiews  CoNirmiED. 
Architecture,     Commerce, 

1.  The  first  habitations  of  man  were  such  as  nature 
suggested,  just  sufficient  to  satisfy  his  wants:  huts, 
grottoes,  and  tents.  As  civilization  advanced,  men  be- 
gan to  build  more  dm^able  and  commodious  habitations. 
They  fitted  the  stones  or  biicks  together  more  neatly, 
but  at  first  without  any  cement.  After  they  had  learn- 
ed how  to  build  houses,  they  began  to  erect  temples 
for  their  gods,  which  were  much  larger  and  better  made 
than  their  own  habitations. 

2.  Architecture  appears  to  have  been  one  of  the 
earliest  inventions,  and  its  works  have  been  regulated 
by  hereditary  imitation.  Whatever  rude  structure  the 
climate  or  materials  of  any  country  forced  the  first 
inhabitants  to  construct,  the  same  form  was  kept  up  in 
after  years  by  their  more  refined  posterity. 

3.  Thus  the  I^yptian  style  of  building  derived  its 
origin  from  the  cavern  and  mmtnd ;  the  Chinese  from 

^the  tent ;  the  Grecian  from  the  wooden  cahin  /  and.  the 
Gothic  fix)m  the  hcnoer  of  trees.     Architecture  at  length 

Chapter  CXCVL— 1.  What  of  the  first  habitations  of  man  ?  What  was  done 
as  civilization  advanced  ?  2.  What  of  architecture  ?  3.  Meutioa  the  dififereut 
Etylea  of  building.    What  of  arclutectuxe  at  length  ? 


ARCHITECTURE.  Q'jt 

became  a  fine  ai't,  and  mucli  pains  were  bestowed  upon 
temples  and  palaces.  Colonnades,  halls,  and  courts 
soon  appeared ;  tlie  rough  trunk  was  transformed  into 
the  lofty  column,  and  the  natural  vault  of  a  cavern 
into  the  splendid  pantheon. 

4.  The  first  nations  who  paid  attention  to  architec- 
ture were  the  Babylonians,  who  built  the  temple  of 
Belus  and  the  hanging  gardens ;  the  Assyrians,  who 
filled  Nineveh  with  splendid  buildings;  the  Phoeni- 
cians, whose  cities  were  adorned  with  magnificent 
structures ;  and  the  Israelites,  whose  temple  was  consid- 
ered wonderful.  Of  the  Persian  and  Egyptian  archi- 
tecture we  have  some  remains,  and  they  are  all  in  a 
style  of  prodigal  splendor  and  gigantic  height. 

5.  The  Greeks  first  introduced  a  more  simple  and 
dignified  style  of  building,  called  the  Doric  order. 
The  Ionic  and  Corinthian  columns  were  soon  added  to 
the  Doric.  After  the  Peloponnesian  war,  this  noble 
simplicity  had  again  given  place  to  the  excess  of  orna- 
ment; and  after  the  death  of  Alexander,  323  B.  C,  the 
art  declined,  and  was  afterward  but  little  cultivated  in 
Greece. 

6.  The  K-omans  had  paid  some  attention  to  architec- 
ture, but  did  not  equal  the  Greeks  till  the  time  of 

4.  What  people  first  paid  attention  to  architecture  ?      What  of  Persian  and 
Egyptian  architecture  ?     5.  What  of  the  Greeks  ?    Their  architecture  ? 


678  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

Augustus,  who  encouraged  Greek  artists  to  erect  splen- 
did buildings  in  Rome.  But  wlien  the  seat  of  govern- 
ment was  removed  to  Constantinople,  the  art  declined 
in  Rome.  About  this  time,  the  Roman,  or  Composite 
column  originated,  which  was  employed  in  temples  and 
splendid  buildings. 

Y.  These  beautiful  works  of  art  were  almost  entirely 
destroyed  by  the  Goths  and  Vandals ;  l)ut  Theodoric, 
a  friend  of  the  arts,  endeavored  to  restore  them,  and 
even  erected  several  new  ones.  This  is  the  era  of  the 
origin  of  modern  art,  and  the  style  of  building  it  intro- 
duced is  called  Gothic  architecture. 

8.  Architetcure  has  experienced  different  destinies  in 
different  countries,  and  it  has  risen  and  declined  at  dif- 
ferent periods.  In  America,  the  Grecian  architecture  is 
prevailing,  as  it  is  better  adapted  than  the  Gothic  to 
small  buildings,  and  does  not  require  splendid  edifices 
to  display  its  beauty. 

9.  The  first  mention  made  of  nations  trading  one 
with  another,  appears  in  the  book  of  Genesis,  chapter 
xxxviii.  25,  when  Joseph's  brethren  sold  him  to  a  band 
of  Ishmaelites,  who  were  conveying  spices,  balm,  and 
myrrh  into  Egypt.     The  balm  was  from  Gilead,  and 

6.  What  of  the  Roman  architecture  ?  7.  What  of  the  Goths  and  Vandals  ? 
Theodoric?  Crothic  architecture  ?  8.  What  of  architecture  in  America  ?  9.  What 
is  the  first  mention  made  of  trade  ? 


COMMERCE.  679 

the  myrrli  was  tlie  produce  of  Arabia.  They  were  going 
through  the  land  of  Canaan  into  Egypt,  which  was 
then  a  highly  cultivated  kingdom. 

10.  The  central  situation  of  Egypt  has  always  made 
it  the  emporium  of  commerce.  By  caravans,  the  treas- 
ures of  Asia  and  Africa  were  brought  thither.  Trade 
was  always  held  in  esteem,  because  of  the  wealth  it 
brought.  Of  the  maritime  trade  of  the  Egyptians,  we 
have  no  regular  account,  for  they  superstitiously  neg- 
lected the  sea  for  many  ages. 

11.  Tyre  and  Sidon,  cities  of  Phoenicia,  are  next 
found  rising  into  notice.  Their  country  was  not  rich 
in  its  productions;  industry  alone  made  their  rocks 
productive ;  they  conveyed  their  merchandise  from  port 
to  port,  and  commerce,  by  feeding  industry,  was  itself 
enriched. 

12.  About  eleven  hundred  years  before  Christ,  in  the 
time  of  Davidy  the  Phoenicians,  in  the  true  spirit  of 
commerce,  continually  extended  their  voyages,  and 
finding  plenty  of  gold  in  Spain,  they  formed  a  settle- 
ment for  the  purpose  of  trade,  called  Gadir,  now  Cadiz. 

13.  Solomon  saw  the  advantagre  of  commerce,  and 
caused  ships  to  be  built,  which  he  sent  to  Ophir,  and 

10.  What  of  Egypt?  Its  commerce?  11.  What  of  Tyre  and  Sidon?  12.  What 
of  the  Phoenicians?  Cadiz?  13.  What  encouragement  did  Solomon  give  to  com- 
merce? 


680  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

whicli  brought  back  gold,  silver,  ivory,  birds,  and  other 
things.  He  had  also  great  traffic  with  Egypt,  whence 
he  obtained  horses  and  fine  linen. 

14.  About  869  years  before  Christ,  Carthage  was 
built,  and  became  famous  for  her  commerce  throughout 
the  civilized  world.  In  700  B.  C,  Corinth  became  dis- 
tinguished as  a  maritime  power,  and  made  improve- 
ments in  the  building  of  ships. 

15.  In  588  B.  C,  Tyre  became  famous.  We  read  an 
interesting  account  of  her  commerce  and  splendor  in 
the  26th,  27th,  and  28th  chapters  of  Ezekiel.  But  the 
Tyrians  drew  "upon  themselves  the  vengeance  of  God, 
and  they  were  subdued  first  by  Nebuchadnezzar,  and 
afterward  more  completely  by  Alexander,  332  B.  C. 

16.  The  Phoenicians,  after  the  destruction  of  Tyre, 
still  pursued  and  enlarged  the  sphere  of  commerce, 
by  means  of  Carthage,  till  that  city  was  destroyed  by 
the  Romans,  146  B.  C.  At  one  time,  the  Grecian  states 
were  conspicuous  by  their  attention  to  naval  affairs. 
Athens  and  Sparta  in  turn  became  famous,  and  remain- 
ed so  till  their  overthrow. 

17.  Alexander  paid  great  attention  to  commercial 
affairs,  and  built  the  cities  of  Alexandria  and  Berenice, 
at  which  places  he  carried  on  an  extensive  trade  with 

14.  What  of  Carthage?      Corinth?      15.  What  of  Tyre?      16.  What  of   the 
t'hoBnicians  ?     Athens?    Sparta? 


COMMERCE.  .  681 

the  West,  by  means  of  the  Mediterranean  sea,  with  the 
richer  provinces  of  the  East  by  the  Red  Sea,  and  with 
the  central  countries  of  Asia,  by  the  Isthmus  of  Suez. 
He  kept  up  large  fleets,  and  his  revenues  were  immense. 

18.  The  Komans  were  ignorant  of  the  value  of  com- 
merce, and,  as  if  they  were  determined  to  root  it  out, 
they  destroyed  Corinth,  which  was  one  of  the  most 
commercial  cities  of  Greece.  Great  stagnation  of 
commerce  now  followed,,  which  was  felt  by  all  the  sur- 
rounding countries,  till  the  time  of  Julius  Caesar,  who 
determined  to  revive  it,  and  restored  in  one  year  both 
Corinth  and  Carthage. 

19.  As  the  Romans  were  now  masters  of  all  around 
the  Mediterranean,  they  began  to  favor  commerce  for 
their  own  sake.  They  therefore  obtained  supplies 
from  all  the  regions  round  about,  to  minister  either  to 
their  necessities  or  their  luxuries.  The  return  they 
made  for  these  various  and  choice  articles  was  in 
money,  and  therefore  this  interchange  can  hardly  be 
called  commerce.  Indeed,  the  Romans  were  never  a 
commercial  people;  they  despised  the  character  of  a 
merchant,  and  wished  to  rule  and  obtain  riches  only  by 
the  sword. 


11.  What  of  Alexander?     18.  How  was  commerce  destroyed?     19.  What  did 
the  Romans  do  in  favor  of  commerce  ? 


682  .  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

20.  After  the  seat  of  government  was  removed  to 
Constantinople,  Theodoric  became  king  of  Italy,  and 
under  his  wise  and  peaceful  reign,  commerce  began 
again  to  flourish,  though  in  a  reduced  state.  In  the 
East,  silk  began  to  be  a  great  article  of  commerce,  and 
the  Persians  enriched  themselves  very  much  in  their 
trade  with  ships  from  India,  which  stopped  at  their 
ports. 

21.  In  732  A.  D.,  Venice, began  to  pay  attention 
to  commerce,  and  carried  on  an  extensive  traffic  with 
the  East.  Many  other  states  in  Italy  also  carried 
on  a  large  trade  with  different  countries.  In  1063, 
Pisa  and  Genoa  became  distinguished  as  commercial 
cities. 

22.  From  the  accession  of  William  the  Conqueror  to 
the  throne  of  England,  in  1066,  we  date  the  commence- 
ment of  commerce  in  that  country,  and  much  intercourse 
took  place  between  Normandy  and  England. 

23.  The  crusades  we  find  giving  the  next  spur  to 
commerce.  The  crusaders,  finding  in  the  East  luxuries 
that  they  could  not  procure  at  home,  determined  to 
supply  themselves  with  these  foreign  elegancies,  con- 


20.  What  of  commerce  under  Theodoric?  In  the  East?  Persia?  21.  What  of 
Venice  ?  Pisa  ?  Genoa?  22.  What  of  the  rise  of  commerce  in  England?  23.  What 
of  tlie  crusades  ? 


COMMERCE.  683 

veniences,  and  necessities.     Commerce,  therefore,  began 
to  extend  itself  witli  rapidity. 

24.  Tlie  discovery  of  tlie  polarity  of  the  loadstone 
gave  new  wings  to  commerce ;  it  was  applied  to  navi- 
gation about  the  year  1200.  In  the  time  of  king  John^ 
in  1216,  England  became  very  rich  and  populous  by 
trade,  and  the  people  flourished  accordingly. 

25.  In  1241,  the  German  towns  began  to  engage  in 
commerce,  and  entered  into  a  league  for  mutual  defence. 
They  were  called  Hanse  towns.  They  made  themselves 
very  rich  and  powerful.  Edward  I.  of  England  allow- 
ed them  great  privileges  in  trade,  which  were,  however, 
curtailed  under  Edward  VI. 

26.  In  the  time  of  Elizabeth,  another  blow  was 
struck  at  their  commerce ;  but  in  spite  of  all,  they  be- 
came so  formidable  that  the  governments  of  several 
states  entered  into  a  league  against  them,  which  result- 
ed in  their  power  being  weakened  and  finally  sunk,  in 
1662. 

27.  About  the  year  1251,  we  find  Florence  rising 
into  notice,  in  a  commercial  point  of  vie^v.  Its  trade 
was  immense,  and  its  fabrics  beautiful  and  costly.  The 
merchants    amassed   great   wealth,    and    became    the 


24.  What  of  the  loadstone?     25,  26.  What  of  the  Hanse  towns?     27.  What  of 
Florence  ? 


684 '  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

bankers  of  all  Europe.   This  state  of  splendor  continued 
for  centuries. 

28.  Flanders  was  for  some  time  the  seat  of  the 
principal  manufactories  of  Europe.  As  far  back  as  the 
year  960,  we  find  the  Flemish  trading  to  great  advan- 
tage. In  1253,  they  were  famous  for  their  linens,  and 
they  continued  eminent  for  their  manufactures  till 
1584,  when  Antwerp  was  destroyed  by  the  duke  of 
Parma.  This  put  an  end  to  the  prosperity  of  the  country, 
and  her  fine  manufactures  were  dispersed  among  other 
nations. 

29.  Hitherto,  the  trade  with  India  had  been  earned 
on  by  caravans,  but  in  1497j^a-jpassage^  being  found 
round  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope,  the  way  was  no%  open 
to  wealth  and  luxuiy.  In  the  year  1500,  the  Portu. 
guese  began  to  make  settlements  in  Africa,  and  soon 
after  Portugal  became  the  centre  of  commerce,  till 
1580,  w^hen  the  kingdom  was  seized  by  the  king  of 
Spain. 

30.  From  the  reign  of  John,  in  1216,  to  1317,  com- 
merce flourished  in  England.  But  at  that  time,  q^uar- 
rels  between  the  English  and  Flemish  were  so  fierce, 
that  all  commercial  intercourse  was  suspended.      In 


28.  What  of  the  commerce  of  Flanders?  What  destroyed  it?    20.  What  of  trade 
in  India?     In  Portugal?    :50.  What  of  commerce  in  England? 


COMMERCE.  ,  685 

1331,  it  was  again  revived  under  Edward  III.,  wlio  in- 
troduced tlie  manufacture  of  woollen  cloth. 

31.  In  the  reign  of  Henry  VIII.,  the  Keformation 
was  of  great  service  to  commerce,  and  in  the  time  of 
Edward  VI.,  a  trade  was  entered  into  with  Russia. 
Queen  Elizabeth  greatly  encouraged  commerce.  She 
formed  several  trading  companies — one  to  Russia,  and 
another  to  Turkey  and  the  Levant.  The  East  India 
Company  began  during  her  reign,  in  1600. 

32.  As  for  the  commerce  of  our  own  country,  after 
independence  was  declared,  our  commercial  resources 
began  to  develop  themselves.  Our  ships  penetrated 
to  the  most  distant  seas,  and  brought  home  with  them 
the  produce  of  every  clime.  Our  commercial  pros- 
perity is  now  established  on  an  enduring  basis,   -» 


CHAPTER  CXCVII.— General  Views— Continued. 
Origin  and  Progress  of  Various  Arts, 

1.  I  HAVE  attempted  to  give  you  some  idea  of  the 
origin  and   progress   of   government,  of   architecture, 

31.  What  queen  gave  great  encouragement  to  commerce?     32.  What  of  com- 
merce in  our  own  country  *? 


686  '  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

and  commerce;  but  there  are  still  many  things  neces- 
sary to  be  known,  in  order  to  understand  the  man- 
ners, customs,  feelings,  and  opinions  of  mankind  in 
former  ages. 

2.  When  you  read  of  such  a  great  man  as  Julius 
Caesar,  and  know  that  he  had  immense  wealth  at  his 
command,  you  might  imagine  that  he  rode  in  a  beau- 
tiful coach,  wore  a  fine  beaver  hat,  silk  stockings, 
leather  shoes  with  silver  buckles,  and  that  he  earned 
a  splendid  gold  watch  in  his  pocket. 
-  3.  But  you  must  remember  that  no  such  things  as 
coaches,  hats,  stockings,  shoes,  buckles,  or  w^atches 
were  invented  till  long  after  the  time  of  Julius  Csesar. 
The  truth  is,  that  by  far  the  largest  portion  of  the 
articles  of  furniture  and  of  clothing,  as  well  as  the 
greater  part  of  the  tools  and  implements  now  in  use, 
have  been  invented  within  the  last  ^ve  hundred  years. 
I  will  endeavor  to  give  you  some  little  idea  of  the 
origin  and  j)rogress  of  various  inventions  which  essen- 
tially contribute  to  our  comfort  and  convenience. 

4.  You  know  that  all  edge  tools,  such  as  knives, 
hatchets,  axes,  planes,  etc.,  now  used  for  cutting  and 
shaping  wood,  are  made  of  steel,  which  is  a  preparation 

Chapter  CXCVII. — 2.  What  might  you  imagine  of  Julius  Caesar?  3.  What  arti- 
cles were  unknown  until  after  his  time?  What  have  been  invented  within  the 
)ast  five  hundred  years  ?     4.  What  can  you  say  of  iron  ? 


THE  ARTS.      .  687 

of  iron.  Yet  it  appears  probable,  altliougli  iron  is 
mentioned  as  being  known  before  the  deluge,  that  the 
use  of  it  was  afterward  lost. 

5.  There  is,  therefore,  no  doubt  that  the  ancient 
nations  were  ignorant  of  the  use  of  iron,  and  therefore 
destitute  of  all  those  convenient  edge  tools  now  so 
common  among  us.  Instead  of  these,  the  ancients 
used  sharp  stones,  flints,  horns,  bones,  and  other  things. 

6.  But  it  is  said  that  iron  was  discovered  by  the 
burning  of  Mount  Ida,  in  Crete,  about  the  year  1406 
B.  C.  ^  It  is  probable  that  it  was  in  use  for  various 
insti*uments,  among  the  more  civilized  nations,  not 
long  after  this  period,  Among  the  Romans,  two  or 
three  hundred  years  before  Christ,  iron  was  used  for 
chains,  locks,  axes,  hoes,  spades,  and  other  tools. 

7.  But  fine  cutlery,  such  as  is  now  in  use,  was  not 
known  till  hundreds  of  years  afterward.  Knives  for 
the  table  were  not  made  in  England  till  about  1500. 
Forks  were  unknown  to  the  Greeks  and  Komans, 
and  are  not  in  use  even  now  among  the  Turks,  Chinese, 
and  some  other  eastern  nations.  Razors  appear  to  have 
been  of  great  antiquity,   as    they  are   mentioned   by 


5.  What  did  the  ancients  use  instead  of  iron?  6.  When  was  iron  said  to  be  dis- 
covered ?  "What  is  probable  ?  What  of  iron  among  the  Romans  ?  T.  What  of  fine 
cutlery  ?    When  were  table  knives  first  in  use  ?    What  of  forks?    Razors  ? 

30 


688  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

Homer;  but  they  were  probably  not  of  steel  till  long 
after. 

8.  The  weaving  of  woollen  and  linen  cloth  was  prac- 
tised in  very  early  times.  The  ladies  of  Rome  paid 
great  attention  to  these  arts.  Silk  was  manufactured 
in  Persia  several  hundred  years  before  Christ,  and 
aftei^vard  in  Tyre  and  Constantinople.  In  later  times, 
the  art  of  making  silk  fabrics  passed  into  Italy, 
France,  and  other  countries. 

9.  Cotton  fabrics  are  also  of  great  antiquity,  and  it 
appears  that  the  inhabitants  of  India  had  the  art  of 
calico  printing  at  least  as  early  as  the  time  of  our 
Saviom\ 

10.  The  first  houses  of  mankind  were  made  of  wood, 
stone,  clay,  and  various  other  substances ;  they  were, 
liowever,  low,  rough,  and  inconvenient.  As  the  arts 
advanced,  improvements  wei*e  made  in  the  dwellings. 
But  even  so  late  as  the  time  of  Nero,  almost  all  the 
houses  of  Rome  were  built  of  wood,  and  when  the  city 
was  set  on  fire  by  order  of  that  cruel  emperor,  three- 
fourths  of  it  were  consequently  burnt  to  the  gi^ound. 

11.  The  houses  of  the  rich  had  small  windows  of 
transparent  stone,  horn,  or  other  substances,  but  most 


8.  "What  of  weaving  ?     Silk  ?     9.  What  of  cotton  fabrics  ?     Calico  printing  ? 
10.  What  of  the  firat  houses?     Those  in  the  time  of  Nero? 


THE   ARTS.  689 

of  the  d^/elllngs  liad  no  otlier  windows  than  small  holes 
in  the  walls  to  admit  light  and  air.  Glass  windows 
were  not  introduced  till  the  fifth  century  after  Christ, 

12.  Chimneys  were  not  in  use  till  the  twelfth  cen- 
tury. Before  this,  the  smoke  escaped  through  an 
opening  in  the  roof.  It ,  was,  however,  very  trouble- 
some, and  we  have  reason  to  suppose  that  even  Alex- 
ander and  Caesar  often  had  their  eyes  almost  put  out 
with  it.  As  late  as  the  time  of  Elizabeth,  three- 
fourths  of  the  houses  in  England  were  destitute  of 
chimneys. 

13.  These  few  remarks  will  show  you  that  the 
world  •  presents  a  very  different  state  of  things  now 
from  what  it  did  formerly.  The  poorest  person  now 
enjoys  a  multitude  of  comforts,  conveniences,  and 
luxuries  which  Caesar,  with  all  his  wealth,  did  not 
possess. 

14.  One  of  the  most  wonderful  improvements  of 
modern  times  is  that  of  the  steam-engine.  This  con- 
trivance is  now  made  to  do  the  work  which  millions 
of  men  could  not  have  done  before.  It  is  applied  to 
the  manufacture  of  an  infinite  variety  of  articles.  Nor 
is  this  all;  it  is  employed  to  drive  vessels  over  the 

11.  What  of  windows?  12.  What  of  chimneys?  Smoke?  13.  What  of  the 
present  state  of  the  world?  14.  What  of  the  steam-engine?  Its  various 
uses  ? 


690  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

water,  and  to  impel  carriages  upon  rail-roads  with  im- 
mense speed. 

15.  A  steamboat  w^s  some  years  since  taken  to  Cal- 
cutta, in  Hiudostan.  The -Hindoos  looked  at  tke  huge 
vessel  ploughing  through  the  waves,  and  spouting  forth 
fire  and  smoke,  with  great  astonishment. 

16.  One  of  them  remarked  upon  the  occasion  as 
follows:  *^Man  is  one  curious  thing ;  he  catch  elephant, 
make  him  woi^k;  he  catch  camel,  make  him  work;  he 
catch  wind,  make  him  work  -the  big  ship ;  he  catch 
water,  make  him  work  the  mill ;  now  he  catch  fire, 
make  him  work  the  steamboat !" 

17.  But  the  electric  telegi*aph,  first  applied  in  this 
country  in  1846,  is  perhaps  the  most  wonderful  in- 
vention of  man.  My  readers  have  all  heard  of  this 
extraordinary  invention,  and  perhaps  some  of  them 
have  sent  messages  by  it.  The  first  words  transmitted 
over  the  wires  were  these :  "What  has  God  wrought !" 


15,  16.  Relate  the  anecdote  of  the  stearaboat  at  Calcutta.  17.  What  of  the  electric 
telegraph  7    When  was  It  established?    What  was  the  first  message  ? 


X<>^i 


DISCOVERIES  AND   INVENTIONS.  691 

CHAPTER  CXCYIII— GmERAL  Views  CoNTmuED. 
Dates  of  Discoveries  and  Inventions. 

I  WILL  now  give  you  a  list  of  various  discoveries 
and  inventions,  and  tell  you  tlieir  dates.  When  you 
read  this  list,  I  should  like  to  have  you  tell  which  of 
these  things  was  known  in  the  time  of  Julius  Caesar, 
which  in  the  time  of  Constantine,  which  in  the  time 
of  Charlemagne,  and  which  in  the  time  of  Louis  XIV. 

B.C. 

Pirst  pyramid  begun  about ...  2095 

Brick-making  known 2000 

Money  first  mentioned  in  Genesis,  chapter  21 — in  use 1865 

Letters  invented  by  Memnon,  an  Egyptian . 1822 

Alphabetical  writing  first  introduced  mto  Europe 1493 

The  first  ship  seen  in  Greece  arrived  in  Rhodes  from  Egypt 1485 

Iron  discovered  by  the  burning  of  Mount   Ida  in  Crete 1406 

Bows  of  wood  and  metal,  shields,  swords,  spears,  battle-axes,  helmets,  coats 
of  mail,  chariots,  sickles,  ploughs,  yokes,  statues,  temples,  canals,  iron- 
working,  hand-millstones,  gilding,  and  perfumery  known  abput 1400 

Weights  and  measures  invented 8G9 

Carving  in  marble  invented ,.,, 7'72 

The  game  of  chess  invented , 608 

Comedy  first  acted  in  Athens  on  a  scaffold 562 

Bellows  invented. 554 

Malt  liquor  used  in  Europe ^ , 450 

First  private  library,  belonging  to  Aristotle , .  334 

Wrought  silk  brought  from  Persis^-.to  Greece 325 

Silver  coined  at  Rome 269 

Clocks  carried  by  water  in  use  at  Rome 158 

Blister  plasters  invented 60 

Glass  known  to  the  Romans ^ 60 


692  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 


A.  D. 

Grist-mills  luvented  in  Ireland '.' 214 

Hour-glass  invented  at  Alexandria 240 

Saddles  in  use  about , . , 400 

Bells  invented  by  Paulinus,  bishog  of.Nola,  in  Campania 400 

Glass  for  windows  first  used 450 

Shoeing  of  horses  introduced 481 

Stirrups  first  used  about .4. 550 

"Water-mills  for  grinding  invented  by  Belisarius. 555 

Pens  for  writing  first  made  from  quills .' 635 

Buildings  of  stone  first  introduced  into  England 670 

Lanterns  invented  by  king  Alfred , 590 

Arithmetical  figures  first  introduced  into  Europe  from  Arabia 991 

Paper  first  made  of  cotton , 1100 

Compasses  invented  about 1200 

Colleges  for  education  first  established  in  Paris. 1215 

Lmen  first  made  in  England 1253 

Magnifymg-glasses  invented  by  Roger  Bacon. 1260 

Wind-mills  invented. 1299 

Spectacles  invented  by  Spina,  a  monk  of  Pisa.  'J'. 1299 

Lookmg-glasses  made  only  at  Venice 1300 

Gunpowder  invented .  . .' 1 330 

Cannon  invented  about 1340 

Painting  in  oils  invented  by  John  Van  Eyk , 1352 

Cards  invented  in  France 1380 

Spurs  in  use  about 1400 

Hats  invented  at  Paris 1404 

Muskets  first  used  in  France - 1414 

Paper  first  made  from  linen  rags , 1417 

Pumps  invented 1425 

Engraving  for  printing  on  paper  first  known . .    ] 428 

Printing  invented  by  Faust 1441 

A  Latin  Bible,  "the  first  l5obk  printed  from  typo. 1450 

Electricity  discovered 14G7 

Almanacs  first  published  in  Germany 1470 

Violins  and  watches  invented 1477 

Modern  canals  first  made  in  Italy. . .  .• 1481 


DISCOVERIES  AND  INYENTIONS.  693 

A.  D. 

Tobacco  first  discovered  in  St.  Domingo 149G 

Spinning  introduced  into  England 1505 

Cliocolate  introduced  into  Europe  from  Mexico 1520 

Spinning-wheel  invented  at  Brunswick •  1530 

Needles  first  made  in  England  by  a  native  of  India 1545 

Stockings  of  silk  first  worn  by  Henry  11.  of  France 1547 

Knitting  stockings  first  invented  in  Spain ....  1550 

Circulation  of  the  blood  first  published 1553 

Fans  first  used  in  England 1572 

Coaches  first  introduced  into  England 1 580 

Telescopes  invented  in  Germany 1590 

Tea  first  brought  into  England  from  China 1591 

Coining  with  a  die  first  practised 1617 

Steam-engines  invented  by  Savary 1618 

Thermometers  first  invented  by  Drebel,  a  Dutchman 1620 

Microscopes  first  used 1621 

Coffee  first  brought  into  England 1641 

Air-guns  invented 1646 

Railroads  first  used,  near  Newcastle-upon-Tyne 1650 

Air-pumps  invented 1654 

Clocks  with  pendulums  first  invented  about ....'. 1656 

Chain-shot  invented  by  Admiral  De  Witt 1660 

Knives  not  made  in  England  till 1663 

Fire-engines  invented.   1663 

Barometers  invented 1670 

Guineas  coined  in  England  from  gold  brought  from  Guinea 1673 

Buckles  invented  about 1680 

Signal-telegraphs  invented 1687 

Copper  money  first  coined  in  England 1689 

Prussian  blue  discovered  at  Berlin 1704 

First  newspaper  in  America  printed  in  Boston 1704 

Stereotype  printing  invented  at  Edinburgh 1725 

First  ascent  of  a  balloon  in  France 1182 

Sunday-schools  first  established  in  Yorkshire,   England 1784 

Lithographic  engraving  invented  by  Senefelder,  a  German lldQ 

First  steamboat  succeeded  in  the  North  River 


m 


694  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

A.  D. 

Leicester  Square,  London,  paved  with  cast  iron 1817 

Ether  first  used  in  surgical  operations 1816 

The  electric  telegraph  established 1848 

The  Atlantic  telegraph  cable  laid 1858 

IMPORTANT   DATES, 

WHICH   IT   WOULD   BE    VERY   USEFUL   TO   COMMIT   TO   MEMORY. 

B.  C. 

The   Creation 400-1 

The  Deluge. 2348 

As.syria  founded  by  Ashur 2229 

Egypt  settled  by  Misraira 2188 

Birth  of  Abraham ; 199G 

Inachus  makes  the  first  settlement  in  Greece 185(j 

Removal  of  Jacob  to  Egypt. 1705 

Athens  founded  by  Cecrops. 1556 

Departure  of  the  Israelites  out  of  Egypt 1491 

Death  of  Moses 1447 

King  David  born 1085 

Solomon's  temple  compteted 1004 

Jonah  the  Prophet  sent  to  preach  to  tlie  Ninevites 806 

Rome  founded 752 

Persian  empire  established  by  Cyrus  the  Great 536 

The  Jews  permitted  to  return  from  their  captivity  in  Babylon 5;>6 

Alexander  invades  Persia • 330 

Greece  and  Cartliage  conquered  by  the  Romans , 146 

Julius  Ctesar  invades  Great  Britain.  . .    55 

The  battle  of  Pharsaha 48 

The  battle  of  Actium 31 

Cleopatra,  the  beautiful  queen  of  Hgypt,  dies 30. 

AD. 

Jesus  Christ  was  born,  Augustus  Caesar  being  emperor  of  Rome 0 

St.  Paul  sent  a  prisoner  to  Rome 61 

Jerusalem  destroyed  by  Titus 70 

Hygenus,  first  bishop  of  Rome  who  was  mado  pope 154 


IMPORTANT  DATES.  695 

A.  D. 

Cliristianity  adopted  at  Rome  by  the  Emperor  Constantine 311 

Pharamoud,  first  king  of  Prance 41 8 

Pall  of  the  Roman  empire  476 

Mahomet's  flight,  called  the  Hegira ^ 622 

Saracen  empire  established 638 

Charlemagne  becomes  emperor  of  Germany 802 

The  first  crusade 1096 

Chivalry  at  its  height 1200 

Ottoman  empire  founded 1299 

Discovery  of  America  by  Columbus * 1492 

Elizabeth,  queen  of  England,  dies 1603 

English  settlement  in  Virginia 1607 

Dutch  settlement  in  New  York 1614 

The  Pilgrims  land  at  Plymouth 1620 

Oliver  Cromwell  dies 1658 

American  Revolution  begins 1775 

"Washington,  first  president  of  the  United  States 1789 

Prench  Revolution 1 793 

War  between  England  and  America 1812 

Battle  of  Waterloo 1815 

Bonaparte  dies  at  St.  Helena 1821 

French  Revolution 1848 

Liberation  of  Italy 1860 

ORIGIN  OF  STATES,  KINGDOMS,  EMPIRES,  ETC. 

B.  C. 

Assyria  founded  by  Ashur 2229 

Misraim  settles  in  Egypt 2188 

Chinese  empire  founded 2100 

Inachus,  with  a  Phoenician  colony,  settles  in  Greece 1856 

Athens  founded  by  Cecrops 1556 

Kingdom  of  Corinth  established 1520 

Sparta  founded  by  Lelex 1516 

The  Israelites  settled  in  Canaan  under  Joshua,  about 1432 

Madrid  built 936 

Carthage  founded  by  the  Phoenicians 869 


696  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

B.  C 

Rome  founded  by  Romulus 752 

Byzantium,  now  Constantinople,  founded 715 

Alexandria  in  Egypt  built  by  Alexander 332 

Lyons  built 43 

A.  D. 

Londofi  fortified  by  the  Romans   50 

Paris  built 357 

Venitia  founded 42 1 

French  monarchy  established  by  Clovis 486 

Saracen  empire  established 638 

Bagdad,  the  seat  of  the  caliphs,  founded , 672 

Bruges,  now  Brussels,  founded 703 

Moore  established  in  Spain 712 

The  Saxon  monarchy  begun  in  England  with  Egbert. 827 

Walls  of  Dublin  built 838 

Holland  formed  into  a  state  by  Thierry 868 

Banish  kingdom  founded  by  Gorm 920 

Algiers  built , 944 

Edinburgh  built 950 

Vienna  obscure,  till  walled  and  enlarged 1122 

Kingdom  of  Portugal  founded , . ., 1139 

Moscow  founded. .    .   1156 

Copenhagen  founded 11 69 

Amsterdam  settled 1203 

Stockholm  founded. ...   1 253 

Independence  of  Switzerland 1315 

Independence  of  Russia  established 1450 

Present  Spanish  monarcliy  establislied  about 1453 

New  York  commenced 1614 

Boston  settled 1630 

Phihidelphia  founded 1684 

Knigdom  of  Prussia  founded 1 701 

Independence  of  the  United  States  of  America 1776 

Mexico  declared  its  independence 1810 


IMPORTANT  DATES.  697 


CELEBRATED    CHARACTERS. 

B.  C. 

Adam  created  sLx  days  after  tlie  Creation 4004 

Noah  died 1998 

Sesostris,  king  of  Egjpt,  flourished 1T22 

Jacob  died 1689 

Moses,  the  Hebrew  lawgiver,  died 1447 

Joshua,  leader  of  the  IsraeUtes,  died 1426 

Orpheus,  a  Greek  poet  and  musician,  flourished 1284 

David,  king  of  Israel,  died 1015 

Solomon  died 975 

Homer,  a  famous  Greek  poet,  flourished 900 

Lycurgus,  tlie  Spartan  lawgiver,  flourished 834 

Isaiah,  a  Jewish  prophet,  flourished 735 

Jeremiah,  a  Hebrew  prophet,  flourished 700 

Sappho,  a  celebrated  Greek  poetess,  born   600 

^sop,  a  Grecian  fabuhst,  flourished 580 

Solon,  lawgiver  of  Athens,  died. ... 558 

Confucius,  a  Chinese  philosopher,  bom 551 

Thales,  a  famous  Greek  astronomer,  died 548 

Plato,  a  Grecian  philosopher,  born.   429 

Socrates,  a  celebrated  Greek  philosopher,  died 401 

Aristotle,  a  Greek  philosopher,  died 384 

Xenophon,  a  Grecian  general  and  author,  died 359 

Alexander,  king  of  Macedon,  died 324 

Sylla,  a  Roman  general,  died *  78 

Virgil,  a  Roman  poet,  born 70 

Julius  Cassar,  a  celebrated  Roman  general  and  writer,  died 44 

Cicero,  a  Roman  orator,  deid 42 

Horace,  a  famous  Roman  poet,  died 8 

A.  D. 

Livy,  a  famous  Roman  historian,  died 17 

Strabo,  a  geographer  and  historian,  died 25 

John  the  Baptist  flourished 26 

Jesus  Christ  crucified. 33 


698  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

*  A.  D. 

Seneca,  a  Roman  philosopher,  died. 65 

Pliny^he  earliest  writer  OTLJaaLiiral  .liistorj,  died 79 

— PWtarch,  a  celelSrated  Roman  biographer,  died 140 

£t.  Chrysostom,  bishop  of  Constantinople,  died. 407 

Clovis,  tlie  first  king  of  France,  born 481 

Charles  Martel,  founder  of  a  race  of  French  kings,  died 741 

Charlemagne,  emperor  of  Germany,  died 814 

X'gbert,  first  king  of  England,  died 827 

Alfred,  king  of  England,  died , 872 

Hugh  Capet,  head  of  a  race  of  French  kings,  died. 996 

Abelard,  a  poet,  flourished 1143 

Genghis  Khan,  a  Tartar  warrior,  died 1227 ' 

William  Wallace,  the  hero  of  Scotland,  executed 1305 

Dante,  a  celebrated  Italian  poet,  died , 1 320 

Tell,  the  Swiss  patriot,  died 1 354 

Petrarch,  a  celebrated  poet,  died 1374 

Boccaccio,  a  learned  Italian,  died 1375 

Chancer,  the  father  of  English  poetry,  died 1400 

Joan  of  Arc  flourished 1428 

Raphael,  a  celebrated  painter,  called  the  Divine,  born 1483 

Columbus,  the  discoverer  of  America,  died 1506 

Gustavus  Yasa  became  king  of  Sweden 1523 

Ariosto,  a  great  Italian  writer,  died 3533 

"Erasmus,  a  man  of  great  learning,  died 1536 

Copernicus,  a  celebrated  astronomer,  died 1543 

Martin  Luther,  the  great  reformer,  died 1546 

Tycho  Brahe,  a  celebrated  Danish  astronomer,  born 1546 

Shakspeare,  a  celebrated  English  dramatist,  born 1546 

Cervantes,  a  famous  writer,  bom 1 549 

Calvin,  a  reformer,  died 1 564 

Buchanan,  a  celebrated  Scotch  writer,  died 1582 

Sir  Philip  Sidney  died 1586 

Tasso,  an  eminent  Italian  poet,  died ; 1595 

Spenser,  one  of  the  greatest  English  poets,  died 1596 

Elizabeth,  queen  of  England,  died 1603 

Dea  Cartes,  a  famous  French  astronomer,  died 1610 

( 


IMPORTANT  DATES.  699 

A.  D. 

Gustavus  Adolphus  became  king  of  Sweden 1611 

Sir  Walter  Raleigh,  an  English  writer,  died. , 1618 

Lord  Bacon,  an  eminent  English  philosopher,  died  1626 

Kepler,  a  celebrated  astronomer,  died 1 630 

Clalileo,  a  famous  astronomer,  died 1642 

Cromwell,  Protector  of  England,  died 1653 

Moliere,  a  French  writer,  died 1 653 

Milton,  the  greatest  of  English  poets,  died 1674 

Pascal  born 1683 

Corneille,  a  celebrated  French  poet,  died 1 685 

Montesquieu,  a  famous  writer,  died 1689 

Madame  de  Sevigne,  an  elegant  French  writer,  died ...   1694 

Racine,  a  celebrated  French  writer,  died 1699 

Dryden,  an  admired  English  poet,  died 1100 

Locke,  an  English  philosopher,  died • 1104 

Pitl^  Lord  Chatham,  the  celebrated  statesman,  born 1708 

Fenelon,  an  elegant  French  writer,  died ; 1715 

Addison,  an  elegant  English  essayist,  died 1719 

Peter  the  Great,  of  Russia,  died 1721 

Sir  Isaac  Newton,  the  great  philosopher,  died 1727 

Washington  born ; 1732 

Pope,  a  great  English  poet,  died 1744 

Swift,  an  English  writer,  died 1745 

Thomson,  a  pleasing  poet,  died 1748 

Young,  the  great  moralist  and  poet,  died , 1765 

Sterne,  an  English  essayist,  died 1768 

Gray,  a  celebrated  English  poet,  died 1771 

Smollett,  an  English  novelist,  died 1771 

Goldsmith,  a  celebrated  English  writer  and  poet,  died 1774 

Hume,  a  Scottish  historian,  died 1776 

Voltaire,  a  famous  French  writer,  died 1778 

Linnaeus,  a  great  Swedish  naturalist,  died 1778 

Rousseau,  a  celebrated  French  writer,  died 1778 

Garrick,  the  great  English  comedian,  died 1779 

Metastasio,  an  eminent  Italian  poet,  died 1 782 

Johnson,  essayist  and  lexicographer,  died 1784 


7. 


YOO  UNIVERSAL  HISTORY. 

A.  D. 

Buffon,  ft  French  naturalist,  died 1788 

Franklin,  an  American  philosopher,  died 1790 

Robertson,  a  Scotch  historian,  died 1793 

Gibbon,  an  historian  of  eminence,  died 1794 

Burns,  the  celebrated  Scottish  poet,  died 1796 

Burke,  a  great  English  statesman,  died 1797 

Cowper,  an  English  poet,  died 1800 

Lavater,  writer  on  physiognomy,  died 1801 

Beattie,  a  Scottish  poet  of  distinction,  died 1803 

Klopstock,  a  German  poet,  died 1803 

Schiller,  an  eminent  German  poet,  died 1805 

Paley,  an  English  divine,  died 1 805 

Sheridan,  an  elegant  English  writer  and  orator,  died 1816 

Dr.  Dwight,  an  American  theologian,  died 1817 

Madame  de  Stael,  a  celebrated  French  .writer,  died 1817 

Bonaparte  died 1821 

Byron  died  at  Missolonghi 1824 

La  Place,  a  celebrated  French  astronomer,  died 1827 

Mfl(^jmftdft  Genlis,  a  French  writer,  died 1830 

Sir  Waiter  "Scott,  a  celebrated  writer,  died 1832 

Cuvier,  the  great  French  naturalist,  died 1832 

Goethe,  a  celebrated  German  writer,  died 1832 

Henry  Clay,  an  American  statesman,  died 1852 

Daniel  Webster,  an  American  statesman,  died 1852 

Humboldt,  a  German  philosopher,  died 1851 


THE   END. 


RETURN     CIRCULATION  DEPARTMENT 
TO-i^>     202  Main  Library 


LOAN  PERIOD 
HOME  USE 


I 


ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS 

1  -month  loans  may  be  renewed  by  calling  642-3405 

6-month  loans  may  be  recharged  by  bringing  books  to  Circulation 

Desk 

Renewals  and  recharges  may  be  made  4  days  prior  to  due  date 

DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 


FEB  16  1979 


2  3    197S 


UNIVERSITY  OF 
FORM  NO.  DD6,  40m,  3/78  BERKELt 


HITCHCOCK'S  ANATOMY, 
HITCHCOCK'S  GEOLOGY. 
KIDDLE'S  NEW  ASTRONOMY. 
SILL'S  NEW  SYNTHESIS. 
THE  AMERICAN  DEBATER. 
THE  HUMOROUS  SPEAKER. 
OUTLINES  OF  OBJECT  TEACH- 
ING. 


ALDEN'S  CHRISTIAN  ETHICS ; 
OR,  SCIENCE  OF  DUTY.  If 
used  in  every  School,  morality 
and  religion  would  prevail. 

GOODI SON'S  DRAWING-BOOK 

FROBISHER'S  VOICE  and  AC- 
TION. Preachers  and  Public 
Speakers,  it  deserves  your  care- 
ful study. 

ELIOT  &  STORER'S  INORGAN- 
IC CHEMISTRY. 


FASQUELLE'S  FRENCH  SERIES. 


Fasquelle's  Introductory  French  Course 
Fasquelle's     Larger    French    Course. 

Revised. 
Fasquelle's  Key  to  the  above. 
Fasquelle's  Colloquial  French  Reader. 
Fasquelle's  Telemaque. 


Fasquelle's   Dumas'  Napoleon. 
Fasquelle's   Racine. 
Fasquelle's  Manual  of  French  Conver- 
sation. 
Howard's  Aid  to  French  Composition. 
Talbot's  French    Pronunciation. 


WOODBURY'S  GERMAN  SERIES. 


Woodbury's   New  Method  with  the 

German. 
Woodbury's  Key  to  above. 
Woodbury's  Shorter  Course  with  the 

German. 
Woodbury's  Key  to  the  Shorter  Course 
Woodbury's   Method  for  Germans  to 

learn  English. 


Woodbury's     Elementary     German 

Reader. 
Woodbury's  Eclectic  German  Reader. 
Glaubensklee's  German  Reader. 
Glaubensklee's    Synthetic    German 

Grammar, 
Woodbury's  German  English  Reader. 


Kuhner's  Elementary  Greek  Grammar. 

Questions  on  Kuhner's  Elementary  Greek  Grammar. 

Kendrick's  Greek  Introduction. 


BUSH'S  NOTES  ON  GENESIS. 
2  volumes. 

BUSH'S  NOTES  ON  EXODUS. 
2  volumes. 

BUSH'S  NOTES  ON  LEVITI- 
CUS,    1  volume. 


BUSH'S  NOTES  ON  NUMBERS. 

1  volume. 
BUSH'S  NOTES   ON  JOSHUA. 

1  volume. 
BUSH'S  NOTES   ON  JUDGES. 
1  volume. 


KITTO'S  CYCLOPEDIA  OF  BIBLICAL  LITERATURE. 
2  vols.,  half  calf,  only  complete  edition,  fully  illustrated. 


PROGRESSIVE  SPANISH  READERS.    SCHOOL  RECORDS. 
BRADBURY'S  SCHOOL  MUSIC  BOOKS,  &c. 


U.C,  BERKELEY  LIBRARIES 


ca35flOTma 


SPENCERIM  SYSTEM  OF  BUSmi 

THE  NEW  STANDARD  EDITION  OB 

SPENCERIAN  C0P1 

REVISED,  IMPROVED,  AND  NEWLY 

IN  FOUR  DISTINCT  SERIES. 

C0MM02^  SCHOOL  8EBIE8.    Ms.  1,  2,  b,  %  arm  o. 
BUSINESS  8ERIE8.    Ms.  6  a7id  7. 
LAJDIE8'  8ERIE8.    Ms.  8  and  9. 

EXERCISE  SERIES.     Ms.  10,  11,  and  12. 

The  particular  points  of  exeellence  claimed  are 
1.     SIMPLICITY.  2.     PRACTICABILITY.  3.     BEAUTY- 

SPENCERM  KEY  TO  PRACTICAL  PENMANSHIP. 
SPENCERIAN  CHARTS  OF  WRITING  AND  DRAWING 

Six  in  Number.    In  Size,  24  by  80  inches. 

THEY  AKE  SO  PRINTED  AS  TO  PRESENT  THE  APPEARANCE  OF 

SUPERIOR  BLACKBOARD  WRITING. 

COMPENDIUM  OF  THE  SPENCERIAl^  SYSTEM. 

60  pages.    Illustrating  Chirography  in  its  Analytical,  Practical, 
and  Ornamental  Forms. 


SPENCERIAN  DOUBLE  ELASTIC  STEEL  PENS. 

These  Pens  combine  elasticity  of  action  with  smoothness  of  point  not  found  in 

other  pens,  and  are  a  nearer  approximation  to  the  real  SWAN 

QUILL,  than  anything  hitherto  invented. 

THEY  ARE  THE  BEST  PENS  MANUFACTURED. 

CAUTION. — AVe  Caution  Booksellers  and  Stationers  against  purchasing  any 

"  Spencerian  "  Pens  which  have  not  our  initials,  "  I.,  P.,  B.  &  Co.," 

or  "Ivison,  Phinney  &  Co.,"  on  each  Pen. 

These  PENS  will  be  sent  by  Mail  to  any  address  in  the  United  States,  postage 

paid,  on  receipt  of  price  annexed. 


No.  1 

per  gross  $1  50 

No.     8 

per  gross  $1  50 

No.  2 

"            1  50 

No.    9 

"            150 

No.  3 

"            1  50 

No.  10 

"           2  00 

No.  4 

"           1  50 

No.  11 

"            2  00 

No.  5 

"           150 

No.  12 

"            2  75 

No.  6 

"            1  50 

No.  13 

"           150 

No.  1 

"            2  00 

No.  14 

"            2  00 

Sample  gross,  4  kinds  assorted,  excepting  No.  12    $2  00. 
Sample  Cards  containing  all  the  Fourteen  Numbers,  PRICE  TWENTY-FIVE  CENTS. 
A  Liberal  Discount  to  the  Trade. 
N.  B. — One  of  the  strongest  proofs  of  the  great  popularity  of  these  Pens, 
and  an  undeniable  confession  to  tlieir  superiority,  is  that  no  less  than  ten 
firms  have  mariufactured,  or  caused  to  he  made.  Pens  similar  in  style,  under 
different  names,  for  which  they  claim  the  same  qualities  and  favor  as  the  still  un- 
approached  SPENCERIAN. 
1^"  Teachers  and  Superintendents  are  invited  to  send  for  our  Catalogue  or  Circulars. 


P.O. 


Address  the  Pubushers, 

IVISON,  PHINNEY,  BLAKEMAN  &  CO. 

Box  1478,  New  York. 


